Original Instructions

OPERATING MANUAL

MAZATROL SmoothX
(for Machining Centers)
OPERATING NC UNIT AND PREPARATION
FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Manual No.: H747S30044E

Serial No.:

Before using this machine and equipment, fully understand the contents of this
manual to ensure proper operation. Should any questions arise, please ask the
nearest Technical Center or Technology Center.

IMPORTANT NOTICE
1. Be sure to observe the safety precautions described in this manual and the contents of the
safety plates on the machine and equipment. Failure may cause serious personal injury or
material damage. Please replace any missing safety plates as soon as possible.
2. No modifications are to be performed that will affect operation safety.
3. For the purpose of explaining the operation of the machine and equipment, some illustrations
may not include safety features such as covers, doors, etc. Before operation, make sure all
such items are in place.
4. This manual was considered complete and accurate at the time of publication, however, due to
our desire to constantly improve the quality and specification of all our products, it is subject
to change or modification. If you have any questions, please contact the nearest Technical
Center or Technology Center.
5. Always keep this manual near the machinery for immediate use.
6. If a new manual is required, please order from the nearest Technical Center or Technology
Center with the manual No. or the machine name, serial No. and manual name.
7. The export of machining programs may be restricted to prevent them from being used for
military purposes. The machining programs you prepared are your property, so you should
manage them yourself in accordance with the law.
Issued by Manual Publication Section, YAMAZAKI MAZAK CORPORATION, Japan

06.2019

Copyright (C) 2017 YAMAZAKI MAZAK CORPORATION. All Rights Reserved.

 PART 3
OPERATING NC UNIT AND
PREPARATION FOR
AUTOMATIC OPERATION

H747S30044E
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Preface
Safety precautions relating to the CNC unit (in the remainder of this manual, referred to simply as
the NC unit) that is provided in this machine are explained below. Not only the persons who
create programs, but also those who operate the machine must thoroughly understand the
contents of this manual to ensure safe operation of the machine.
Read all these safety precautions, even if your NC model does not have the corresponding
functions or optional units and a part of the precautions do not apply.

Rule
1. This section contains the precautions to be observed as to the working methods and states
usually expected. Of course, however, unexpected operations and/or unexpected working
states may take place at the user site.
During daily operation of the machine, therefore, the user must pay extra careful attention to
its own working safety as well as to observe the precautions described below.
2. Although this manual contains as great an amount of information as it can, since it is not
rare for the user to perform the operations that overstep the manufacturer-assumed ones,
not all of “what the user cannot perform” or “what the user must not perform” can be fully
covered in this manual with all such operations taken into consideration beforehand.
It is to be understood, therefore, that functions not clearly written as “executable” are
“inexecutable” functions.
3. The meanings of our safety precautions to DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION are as
follows:

: Failure to follow these instructions could result in loss of life.

DANGER

: Failure to observe these instructions could result in serious harm to a human

life or body.
WARNING

: Failure to observe these instructions could result in minor injuries or serious

machine damage.
CAUTION

HGENPA0102E S-1
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Basics

 After turning power on, keep hands away from the keys, buttons, or switches of the
operating panel until an initial display has been made.

WARNING  Before proceeding to the next operations, fully check that correct data has been entered
and/or set. If the operator performs operations without being aware of data errors,
unexpected operation of the machine will result.
 Before machining workpieces, perform operational tests and make sure that the machine
operates correctly. No workpieces must be machined without confirmation of normal
operation. Closely check the accuracy of programs by executing override, single-block,
and other functions or by operating the machine at no load. Also, fully utilize tool path
check, Virtual Machining, and other functions, if provided.
 Make sure that the appropriate feed rate and rotational speed are designated for the
particular machining requirements. Always understand that since the maximum usable
feed rate and rotational speed are determined by the specifications of the tool to be used,
those of the workpiece to be machined, and various other factors, actual capabilities differ
from the machine specifications listed in this manual. If an inappropriate feed rate or
rotational speed is designated, the workpiece or the tool may abruptly move out from the
machine.
 Before executing correction functions, fully check that the direction and amount of
correction are correct. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if a correction
function is executed without its thorough understanding.
 Parameters are set to the optimum standard machining conditions prior to shipping of the
machine from the factory. In principle, these settings should not be modified. If it becomes
absolutely necessary to modify the settings, perform modifications only after thoroughly
understanding the functions of the corresponding parameters. Modifications usually affect
any program. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if the settings are modified
without a thorough understanding.

Remarks on the Cutting Conditions Recommended by the NC

 Before using the following cutting conditions:

• Cutting conditions that are the result of the MAZATROL Automatic Cutting Conditions
WARNING Determination Function
• Cutting conditions suggested by the Machining Navigation Function
• Cutting conditions for tools that are suggested to be used by the Machining Navigation
Function
Confirm that every necessary precaution in regards to safe machine setup has been taken
– especially for workpiece fixturing/clamping and tool setup.
 Confirm that the machine door is securely closed before starting machining.
Failure to confirm safe machine setup may result in serious injury or death.

S-2
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Programming

 Fully check that the settings of the coordinate systems are correct. Even if the designated
program data is correct, errors in the system settings may cause the machine to operate
in unexpected places and the workpiece to abruptly move out from the machine in the
WARNING
event of contact with the tool.
 During surface velocity hold control, as the current workpiece coordinates of the surface
velocity hold control axes approach zeroes, the spindle speed increases significantly. For
the lathe, the workpiece may even come off if the chucking force decreases. Safety speed
limits must therefore be observed when designating spindle speeds.
 Even after inch/metric system selection, the units of the programs, tool information, or
parameters that have been registered until that time are not converted. Fully check these
data units before operating the machine. If the machine is operated without checks being
performed, even existing correct programs may cause the machine to operate differently
from the way it did before.
 If a program is executed that includes the absolute data commands and relative data
commands taken in the reverse of their original meaning, totally unexpected operation of
the machine will result. Recheck the command scheme before executing programs.
 If an incorrect plane selection command is issued for a machine action such as arc
interpolation or fixed-cycle machining, the tool may collide with the workpiece or part of
the machine since the motions of the control axes assumed and those of actual ones will
be interchanged. (This precaution applies only to NC units provided with EIA/ISO
functions.)
 The mirror image, if made valid, changes subsequent machine actions significantly. Use
the mirror image function only after thoroughly understanding the above. (This precaution
applies only to NC units provided with EIA/ISO functions.)
 If machine coordinate system commands or reference position returning commands are
issued with a correction function remaining made valid, correction may become invalid
temporarily. If this is not thoroughly understood, the machine may appear as if it would
operate against the expectations of the operator. Execute the above commands only after
making the corresponding correction function invalid. (This precaution applies only to NC
units provided with EIA/ISO functions.)
 The barrier function performs interference checks based on designated tool data. Enter
the tool information that matches the tools to be actually used. Otherwise, the barrier
function will not work correctly.
 The system of G-code and M-code commands differs, especially for turning, between the
machines of INTEGREX i/e-Series and the other turning machines.
Issuance of the wrong G-code or M-code command results in totally non-intended
machine operation. Thoroughly understand the system of G-code and M-code commands
before using this system.

Sample program Machines of INTEGREX i/e-Series Turning machines

–1
S1000M3 The milling spindle rotates at 1000 min . The turning spindle rotates at 1000 min–1.
–1
S1000M203 The turning spindle rotates at 1000 min . The milling spindle rotates at 1000 min–1.

S-3
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

 For the machines of INTEGREX i/e-Series, programmed coordinates can be rotated using
an index unit of the MAZATROL program and a G68 command (coordinate rotate com-
mand) of the EIA/ISO program. However, for example, when the B-axis is rotated through
WARNING
180 degrees around the Y-axis to implement machining with the turning spindle No. 2, the
plus side of the X-axis in the programmed coordinate system faces downward and if the
program is created ignoring this fact, the resulting movement of the tool to unexpected
positions may incite collisions.
To create the program with the plus side of the X-axis oriented in an upward direction, use
the mirror function of the WPC shift unit or the mirror imaging function of G-code
command (G50.1, G51.1).
 After modifying the tool data specified in the program, be sure to perform the tool path
check function, the Virtual Machining function, and other functions, and confirm that the
program operates properly. The modification of tool data may cause even a field-proven
machining program to change in operational status.
If the user operates the machine without being aware of any changes in program status,
interference with the workpiece could arise from unexpected operation.
For example, if the cutting edge of the tool during the start of automatic operation is
present inside the clearance-including blank (unmachined workpiece) specified in the
common unit of the MAZATROL program, care is required since the tool will directly move
from that position to the approach point because of no obstructions being judged to be
present on this path.
For this reason, before starting automatic operation, make sure that the cutting edge of
the tool during the start of automatic operation is present outside the clearance-including
workpiece specified in the common unit of the MAZATROL program.

 If axis-by-axis independent positioning is selected and simultaneously rapid feed selected

for each axis, movements to the ending point will not usually become linear. Before using
these functions, therefore, make sure that no obstructions are present on the path.
CAUTION
 Before starting the machining operation, be sure to confirm all contents of the program
obtained by conversion. Imperfections in the program could lead to machine damage and
operator injury.

S-4
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Operations

 Single-block, feed hold, and override functions can be made invalid using system
variables #3003 and #3004. Execution of this means the important modification that
makes the corresponding operations invalid. Before using these variables, therefore, give
WARNING
thorough notification to related persons. Also, the operator must check the settings of the
system variables before starting the above operations.
 If manual intervention during automatic operation, machine locking, the mirror image
function, or other functions are executed, the workpiece coordinate systems will usually be
shifted. When making machine restart after manual intervention, machine locking, the
mirror image function, or other functions, consider the resulting amounts of shift and take
the appropriate measures. If operation is restarted without any appropriate measures
being taken, collision with the tool or workpiece may occur.
 Use the dry run function to check the machine for normal operation at no load. Since the
feed rate at this time becomes a dry run rate different from the program-designated feed
rate, the axes may move at a feed rate higher than the programmed value.
 After operation has been stopped temporarily and insertion, deletion, updating, or other
commands executed for the active program, unexpected operation of the machine may
result if that program is restarted. No such commands should, in principle, be issued for
the active program.

 During manual operation, fully check the directions and speeds of axial movement.
 For a machine that requires manual homing, perform manual homing operations after
CAUTION turning power on. Since the software-controlled stroke limits will remain ineffective until
manual homing is completed, the machine will not stop even if it oversteps the limit area.
As a result, serious machine damage will result.
 Do not designate an incorrect pulse multiplier when performing manual pulse handle feed
operations. If the multiplier is set to 1000 times and the handle operated inadvertently,
axial movement will become faster than that expected.

S-5
 REQUEST TO THE USER

REQUEST TO THE USER

Request for Saving Data of Machining Programs

Machining programs saved on the local disk of the NC unit may not be read out in the event of
accidental local disk trouble. The user, therefore, is earnestly requested to back up and store
every machining program of importance at regular intervals onto an external memory (USB
memory, SD card, etc.).

 The procedure for data storage is detailed in the Operating Manual, Part 3
(OPERATING NC UNIT AND PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC
OPERATION), Chapter 10, (DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE).
 Always use an initialized USB memory or SD card. The USB connector and
the SD card slot are located on the right side of the machine operating panel.

USB memory SD card

 On machines with a random ATC feature, each actual ATC operation changes the tool
data (in pocket numbers). Be sure not to run the machine after loading the externally
stored data of the TOOL DATA display without having confirmed the data’s
CAUTION correspondence to the current tooling on the magazine. Otherwise the machine cannot be
be guaranteed to operate normally.

S-6
 BEFORE USING THE NC UNIT

BEFORE USING THE NC UNIT

Limited Warranty
The warranty of the manufacturer does not cover any trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its
non-intended purpose. Take notice of this when operating the unit.
Examples of the trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its non-intended purpose are listed
below.
1. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available software
products (including user-created ones)
2. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any Windows operating systems
3. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available computer
equipment

Operating Environment

1. Ambient temperature
During machine operation: 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F)

2. Relative humidity
During machine operation: 10 to 75% (without bedewing)
Note : As humidity increases, insulation deteriorates causing electrical component parts to
deteriorate quickly.

Network Setting
The NC unit operates using dedicated network adapters.
Note 1: Do not change the settings of the following two network adapters. Any changes will
prevent the NC unit from operating normally.
 Ethernet_NC (IP address:192.168.100.2)
 NC Trainer Virtual Network (IP address:192.168.202.10)

S-7
 BEFORE USING THE NC UNIT

Note 2: Use “Ethernet_PC” to connect the NC to an intra-factory network and other systems.
Do not use, however, the following network addresses: “192.168.100.xxx” and
“192.168.202.xxx”

 If the setting of the network adapter “Ethernet_PC” is changed, other systems

connected to the network may not operate normally. So, be sure to check the
settings of the other systems on the network as well. Here are some
examples of systems connected to the network.
Other systems Sections describing how to configure network settings
Smooth PMC Operating Manual of the Smooth PMC
“Network Setting for the MAZATROL at the Machine”
TOOL HIVE Operating Manual & Maintenance Manual of the Extended
TOOL HIVE
“How to Change Network Settings”
Magazine display unit for Operating Manual of the Visual Tool ID/Data Management
Tool ID (touch panel) “CONNECTING TO THE LOCAL AREA NETWORK”

Note 3: If you configure network settings for the NC unit, using Internet Information Services
(IIS) on Windows, do not use the following port numbers.
 21
 683
 43816
 55555
 55556
 57400

S-8 E
 CONTENTS

1 PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION ............................... 1-1

1-1 Preparation Steps for Automatic Operation ........................................................ 1-1

2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW ......................................................................... 2-1

2-1 Name of the Components of Each Display ......................................................... 2-1

2-2 Types of Displays ............................................................................................... 2-3

2-3 Name of the Components of Each Window ........................................................ 2-4

2-3-1 Display data .......................................................................................................... 2-4

2-3-2 Window list ............................................................................................................ 2-5

2-4 SMART Mode ..................................................................................................... 2-7

2-5 Configuration of Displays .................................................................................... 2-9

2-5-1 Configuration of displays ....................................................................................... 2-9

3 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING .................................... 3-1

3-1 Touch Gestures .................................................................................................. 3-1

3-1-1 Moving the cursor/Selecting an item (Tap) ............................................................ 3-2

3-1-2 Scrolling through a list/Moving a model (Swipe) .................................................... 3-2

3-1-3 Rotating a model ................................................................................................... 3-3

3-1-4 Enlarging/Reducing a model (Pinch out/in)............................................................ 3-3

3-2 Setting Data for the NC Unit ............................................................................... 3-4

3-2-1 Setting alphanumeric data ..................................................................................... 3-5

3-2-2 Selecting menu data ............................................................................................. 3-8

3-2-3 Undo and Redo ................................................................................................... 3-12

3-3 Other Operations .............................................................................................. 3-13

C-1
 3-3-1 Correcting the blurring of the sensitivity of the touch panel .................................. 3-13

3-3-2 Displaying the taskbar of the operating system (Windows) .................................. 3-13

3-4 Data Guard Setting Display .............................................................................. 3-14

3-4-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 3-14

3-4-2 Account management ......................................................................................... 3-16

3-4-3 Setting a Rank..................................................................................................... 3-17

3-4-4 Input and output of the settings ........................................................................... 3-18

3-4-5 Initialization of the settings .................................................................................. 3-18

3-4-6 Initial setting for data guard ................................................................................. 3-19

3-5 Saving Machining Programs ............................................................................. 3-20

3-6 Naming Machining Programs ........................................................................... 3-20

4 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME

SCREEN) ............................................................................................ 4-1

4-1 Displayed Data ................................................................................................... 4-1

4-2 Process Selection ............................................................................................... 4-2

4-3 Machine Information Display .............................................................................. 4-3

4-4 Summary Display ............................................................................................... 4-4

4-5 Simple Monitoring ............................................................................................... 4-9

4-6 Peripheral Software .......................................................................................... 4-10

4-7 Smooth Applications Manager .......................................................................... 4-11

4-8 Applications Available....................................................................................... 4-16

4-8-1 Function for consulting manuals .......................................................................... 4-16

4-8-2 Control of access to MAZAK API ......................................................................... 4-21

4-9 Turning Off the NC Unit .................................................................................... 4-26

C-2
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL
STATUS .............................................................................................. 5-1

5-1 POSITION Display.............................................................................................. 5-1

5-1-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 5-1

5-1-2 Data registration .................................................................................................... 5-5

5-1-3 Display operations................................................................................................. 5-6

5-1-4 Custom display...................................................................................................... 5-9

5-2 TRACE Display ................................................................................................ 5-25

5-2-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 5-25

5-2-2 Displaying machining shape and tool tip ............................................................. 5-27

5-2-3 Display operations in the 3D display mode .......................................................... 5-28

5-2-4 Display operations in the 2D display mode .......................................................... 5-29

5-2-5 [Counter Erase] ................................................................................................... 5-32

5-3 EIA MONITOR Display ..................................................................................... 5-33

5-3-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 5-33

5-3-2 EIA/ISO monitor function ..................................................................................... 5-34

5-3-3 Editing functions .................................................................................................. 5-34

5-3-4 RESTART 2 NONMODAL function...................................................................... 5-35

5-4 Condition Monitor ............................................................................................. 5-37

5-4-1 SPINDLE LOAD GRAPHIC DISPLAY display ..................................................... 5-37

5-4-2 MACHINING - MONITORING display ................................................................. 5-40

5-4-3 DRILL MONITOR display .................................................................................... 5-44

5-4-4 CONDITION CHECK display............................................................................... 5-47

5-4-5 RUNNING RECORDER display .......................................................................... 5-51

C-3
5-5 MACHINING NAVIGATION - RESULT Display ................................................ 5-53

5-5-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 5-53

5-5-2 Displaying data.................................................................................................... 5-56

5-5-3 Display modes..................................................................................................... 5-57

5-6 MAZA CHECK Display (Option) ....................................................................... 5-58

5-6-1 Outline ................................................................................................................ 5-58

5-6-2 Data display ........................................................................................................ 5-58

5-6-3 Display operations............................................................................................... 5-60

5-7 Display for Setting SMC Data ........................................................................... 5-62

5-7-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 5-62

5-7-2 Registering and editing data ................................................................................ 5-63

5-7-3 Input and output of data ...................................................................................... 5-65

5-7-4 Factory-set data .................................................................................................. 5-66

5-8 POSITION TEACH Window ............................................................................. 5-67

5-8-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 5-67

5-9 Display for Intelligent Thermal Shield ............................................................... 5-68

5-10 TRIAL MODE Window ...................................................................................... 5-69

5-10-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 5-69

5-10-2 Functions and settings ........................................................................................ 5-70

5-10-3 Example of operation .......................................................................................... 5-71

5-11 HANDLE INTERUPT Window .......................................................................... 5-73

5-11-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 5-73

5-11-2 Counter setting procedure ................................................................................... 5-74

C-4
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP................................. 6-1

6-1 SET UP RECORD Display ................................................................................. 6-1

6-1-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 6-1

6-1-2 Custom display...................................................................................................... 6-2

6-1-3 Manual measurement.......................................................................................... 6-19

6-2 WORK OFFSET Display .................................................................................. 6-33

6-2-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 6-33

6-2-2 Data registration .................................................................................................. 6-34

6-2-3 Display operations............................................................................................... 6-36

6-3 MACRO VARIABLE Display ............................................................................. 6-37

6-3-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 6-37

6-3-2 Data registration .................................................................................................. 6-38

6-3-3 Display operations............................................................................................... 6-39

6-4 ADDITIONAL WPC Display .............................................................................. 6-41

6-4-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 6-41

6-4-2 Data registration .................................................................................................. 6-42

6-4-3 Address setting ................................................................................................... 6-42

6-4-4 Considerations to measurement .......................................................................... 6-43

6-5 Graphic Display of Straightness (Option) ......................................................... 6-44

7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION ............................. 7-1

7-1 PROGRAM Display ............................................................................................ 7-1

7-2 TOOL PATH CHECK Display ............................................................................. 7-2

7-2-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 7-2

7-2-2 Basic display operation ......................................................................................... 7-4

C-5
 7-2-3 Restarting tool path check ..................................................................................... 7-4

7-2-4 Block skip .............................................................................................................. 7-5

7-2-5 Window function .................................................................................................... 7-5

7-2-6 Tool path checking in a quasi-actual machining image .......................................... 7-5

7-3 SHAPE CHECK Display ..................................................................................... 7-6

7-3-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 7-6

7-3-2 Basic display operation ......................................................................................... 7-7

7-4 PROGRAM FILE Display.................................................................................... 7-8

7-4-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 7-8

7-4-2 Setting a work number .......................................................................................... 7-9

7-4-3 Changing a work number .................................................................................... 7-10

7-4-4 Program erasure ................................................................................................. 7-11

7-4-5 Program copy ...................................................................................................... 7-14

7-4-6 Program editing ................................................................................................... 7-14

7-4-7 Converting MAZATROL programs to EIA/ISO programs ..................................... 7-14

7-4-8 Opening the shape drawing window .................................................................... 7-14

7-4-9 Directory change ................................................................................................. 7-15

7-4-10 Program transfer ................................................................................................. 7-16

7-4-11 Rearranging programs ........................................................................................ 7-18

7-4-12 Changing a reference folder ................................................................................ 7-19

7-4-13 Program management functions ......................................................................... 7-20

7-4-14 Project function ................................................................................................... 7-21

7-5 PROGRAM LAYOUT Display ........................................................................... 7-30

7-5-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 7-30

7-5-2 Priority number setting ........................................................................................ 7-32

C-6
 7-5-3 Delay priority designation .................................................................................... 7-32

7-5-4 Priority number assignment ................................................................................. 7-33

7-5-5 Priority number movement .................................................................................. 7-33

7-5-6 Erasure of all priority numbers............................................................................. 7-34

7-5-7 Store ................................................................................................................... 7-34

7-5-8 Program write ...................................................................................................... 7-34

7-5-9 Simultaneous use of functions............................................................................. 7-35

7-5-10 Changing the type of process display .................................................................. 7-35

7-5-11 Program reference window.................................................................................. 7-35

7-5-12 Alternation of process numbers and data numbers ............................................. 7-36

7-5-13 Process-number search ...................................................................................... 7-36

7-6 MACHINING NAVIGATION - PREDICT Display .............................................. 7-37

7-6-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 7-37

7-6-2 Displaying data.................................................................................................... 7-40

7-6-3 Display modes..................................................................................................... 7-40

7-6-4 Modifying the cutting conditions .......................................................................... 7-42

8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS....................................................... 8-1

8-1 TOOL DATA Display .......................................................................................... 8-1

8-1-1 Outline .................................................................................................................. 8-1

8-1-2 Tool data mode ..................................................................................................... 8-5

8-1-3 Registering the tools to be used (for MAZATROL programs)............................... 8-12

8-1-4 Setting tool data (for EIA/ISO programs) ............................................................. 8-32

8-1-5 MAZATROL tool data INVALIDATION (Option) ................................................... 8-36

8-1-6 Manual tool length measurement (using the LENG-OFS TEACH menu
function) .............................................................................................................. 8-38

C-7
 8-1-7 Tool layout mode................................................................................................. 8-39

8-1-8 Tool layout for the necessary tools ...................................................................... 8-44

8-1-9 Other functions for display operation ................................................................... 8-49

8-2 TOOL FILE Display .......................................................................................... 8-51

8-2-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 8-51

8-2-2 Registering milling tool data ................................................................................ 8-53

8-2-3 Erasing a part of the registered data ................................................................... 8-60

8-3 TOOL OFFSET Display .................................................................................... 8-61

8-3-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 8-61

8-3-2 Tool-compensation data setting procedures ........................................................ 8-64

8-3-3 Setting the current position .................................................................................. 8-69

8-3-4 EIA/ISO tool length measurement ....................................................................... 8-70

8-3-5 Manual tool nose measurement using the TOOL EYE (TOOL EYE
measurement) ..................................................................................................... 8-73

8-4 Input Error Prevention Function ........................................................................ 8-76

8-4-1 Operation ............................................................................................................ 8-76

8-4-2 Data items to be checked .................................................................................... 8-77

8-4-3 Related parameters ............................................................................................. 8-77

8-5 Changed Data Check Function ........................................................................ 8-78

8-5-1 Outline ................................................................................................................ 8-78

8-5-2 Operation ............................................................................................................ 8-78

9 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS .......................................... 9-1

9-1 CUTTING CONDITION - W.-MAT./T.-MAT. Display........................................... 9-1

9-1-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 9-1

9-1-2 Data registration .................................................................................................... 9-2

C-8
 9-1-3 Read and Write of text file ..................................................................................... 9-2

9-2 CUTTING CONDITION - C-SP/FR Display ........................................................ 9-5

9-2-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 9-5

9-2-2 Data registration .................................................................................................... 9-7

9-3 CUTTING CONDITION - PERCENTAGE Display .............................................. 9-9

9-3-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 9-9

9-3-2 Data registration .................................................................................................. 9-10

9-4 CUTTING CONDITION - TURNING Display .................................................... 9-11

9-4-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 9-11

9-4-2 Data registration .................................................................................................. 9-12

9-5 CUTTING CONDITION - SPEC. CUT. FORCE Display ................................... 9-13

9-5-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 9-13

9-5-2 Data registration .................................................................................................. 9-14

9-6 CUTTING CONDITION LEARN Display ........................................................... 9-14

9-6-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 9-14

9-6-2 Menu functions .................................................................................................... 9-16

9-7 USER PARAMETER Display ........................................................................... 9-17

9-7-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 9-17

9-8 MACHINE PARAMETER Display ..................................................................... 9-19

9-8-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 9-19

9-9 PLC PARAMETER Display .............................................................................. 9-20

9-9-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 9-20

10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE ..................................... 10-1

10-1 DATA I/O Display ............................................................................................. 10-1

C-9
 10-1-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 10-1

10-1-2 DATA I/O operations (HARD DISK)..................................................................... 10-2

10-1-3 DATA I/O operations (USB)................................................................................. 10-8

10-1-4 DATA I/O operations (SD Card) ........................................................................ 10-12

10-1-5 DATA I/O operations (CMT) .............................................................................. 10-15

10-1-6 DATA I/O operations (TAPE)............................................................................. 10-18

10-1-7 Saving CAM data .............................................................................................. 10-22

10-1-8 Data input/output in text file format .................................................................... 10-23

10-1-9 Saving programs additionally ............................................................................ 10-24

10-1-10 Saving tool catalog ............................................................................................ 10-24

10-1-11 MAZATROL program loading ............................................................................ 10-25

10-1-12 Function for preventing erroneous parameter loading ....................................... 10-26

10-1-13 Conversion of a program with the use of A-axis tilting table (for machines
with B-axis tilting table)...................................................................................... 10-27

10-2 Program Transfer from the Host PC to the NC ............................................... 10-31

10-2-1 Outline .............................................................................................................. 10-31

10-2-2 Detailed description ........................................................................................... 10-31

10-3 DATA I/O PARAMETER Display .................................................................... 10-36

10-3-1 Data display ...................................................................................................... 10-36

10-4 MACHINE MODEL SAVE Menu Function ...................................................... 10-37

10-4-1 Operating procedure ......................................................................................... 10-37

10-4-2 Changing the folder for data storage ................................................................. 10-38

11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS ............................................. 11-1

11-1 DIAGNOSIS (USER) ........................................................................................ 11-2

11-1-1 ALARM display.................................................................................................... 11-2

C-10
 11-1-2 ALARM HISTORY display ................................................................................... 11-8

11-1-3 PLC SIGNAL display ......................................................................................... 11-13

11-2 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................. 11-16

11-2-1 MAINTENANCE display .................................................................................... 11-16

11-2-2 Data display for long-term check items .............................................................. 11-18

11-2-3 Calendar check items ........................................................................................ 11-19

11-2-4 CHECK EXHAUSTION display ......................................................................... 11-20

11-2-5 UNIT WORKLOG display .................................................................................. 11-23

11-2-6 Display operations............................................................................................. 11-23

11-2-7 Entry of the check items to be displayed ........................................................... 11-24

11-2-8 INSUL. RESIST. display.................................................................................... 11-27

11-3 RUNNING CONTROL .................................................................................... 11-30

11-3-1 RUNNING CONTROL display ........................................................................... 11-30

11-3-2 Display for each program .................................................................................. 11-33

11-3-3 Spindle load display .......................................................................................... 11-35

11-3-4 Alarm list display ............................................................................................... 11-36

11-3-5 Other functions .................................................................................................. 11-38

11-4 DIAGNOSIS (MAKER) ................................................................................... 11-40

11-4-1 VERSION display .............................................................................................. 11-40

11-4-2 DIAGNOSIS MONITOR display ........................................................................ 11-43

11-4-3 OPTION display ................................................................................................ 11-47

12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION..... 12-1

12-1 Outline .............................................................................................................. 12-1

12-2 INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD (ISS) ............................................................ 12-3

C-11
12-3 3D MONITOR Display .................................................................................... 12-23

12-3-1 Data display ...................................................................................................... 12-23

12-3-2 3D monitor menu............................................................................................... 12-24

12-3-3 Moving an additional part .................................................................................. 12-27

12-3-4 Changing machine models ................................................................................ 12-28

12-4 VIRTUAL MACHINING Display ...................................................................... 12-29

12-4-1 Outline .............................................................................................................. 12-29

12-4-2 Data display ...................................................................................................... 12-30

12-4-3 Work simulation................................................................................................. 12-33

12-4-4 Machine simulation ........................................................................................... 12-40

12-4-5 Display of material, tool, and fixture................................................................... 12-47

12-5 3D SETUP Display ......................................................................................... 12-52

12-5-1 Data display ...................................................................................................... 12-52

12-5-2 3D setup initial menu ......................................................................................... 12-53

12-5-3 Models to be set on the 3D SETUP display ....................................................... 12-53

12-5-4 Material model setting ....................................................................................... 12-56

12-5-5 Fixture model setting ......................................................................................... 12-69

12-5-6 Manual arrangement of the material and fixture models .................................... 12-76

12-5-7 OPTIONAL TABLE SETUP menu function (for machines with additional
tables) ............................................................................................................... 12-77

12-5-8 Material model conversion ................................................................................ 12-78

12-5-9 3D display operation ......................................................................................... 12-81

12-5-10 Pallet model setting (only for correspondingly designed machine models) ........ 12-86

12-6 Tool Model Setting Display ............................................................................. 12-88

12-6-1 Data display ...................................................................................................... 12-88

C-12
 12-7 TOOL MODEL MANAGEMENT Display....................................................... 12-101

12-7-1 Data display .................................................................................................... 12-101

12-8 TOOL PART MODEL Display ....................................................................... 12-108

12-8-1 Data display .................................................................................................... 12-108

13 OPTION............................................................................................. 13-1

13-1 Machining Management Functions ................................................................... 13-1

13-1-1 General ............................................................................................................... 13-1

13-1-2 PALLET MANAGEMENT display ........................................................................ 13-2

13-1-3 Scheduled-operation function .............................................................................. 13-2

13-1-4 External unit skipping function ............................................................................. 13-9

13-1-5 External multi-piece machining function ............................................................ 13-11

13-1-6 Fixture offsetting function .................................................................................. 13-14

13-1-7 Parameters ....................................................................................................... 13-15

13-2 Function Related to EIA/ISO Program (Option) .............................................. 13-16

13-2-1 Setting method .................................................................................................. 13-16

13-2-2 Configuration of displays ................................................................................... 13-16

13-2-3 POSITION display ............................................................................................. 13-18

13-3 Workpiece Measurement Printout Function.................................................... 13-19

13-3-1 Function overview ............................................................................................. 13-19

13-3-2 Parameter setting .............................................................................................. 13-24

13-3-3 Macroprogram configuration.............................................................................. 13-27

13-3-4 Explanations of macroprograms ........................................................................ 13-32

13-3-5 List of measurement patterns with macroprograms ........................................... 13-54

13-3-6 Printout of measurement results ........................................................................ 13-55

C-13
 13-3-7 Related alarms .................................................................................................. 13-57

13-3-8 Program and printout examples ........................................................................ 13-58

13-4 Geometry Compensation Function ................................................................. 13-63

13-4-1 Function general ............................................................................................... 13-63

13-4-2 Detailed description ........................................................................................... 13-66

13-4-3 Hold status ........................................................................................................ 13-72

13-4-4 Notes ................................................................................................................ 13-72

13-4-5 Parameters ....................................................................................................... 13-73

13-4-6 Appendix ........................................................................................................... 13-74

13-5 Hard Disk Operating Function ........................................................................ 13-77

13-5-1 Outline .............................................................................................................. 13-77

13-5-2 Preparation for HD operation............................................................................. 13-77

13-5-3 Selection of operation mode .............................................................................. 13-77

13-5-4 Program selection for HD operation .................................................................. 13-79

13-5-5 Restart in the HD operation mode ..................................................................... 13-80

13-5-6 Format for HD operation programs .................................................................... 13-80

13-6 Ethernet Operating Function .......................................................................... 13-82

13-6-1 Outline .............................................................................................................. 13-82

13-6-2 Preparation for ENET operation ........................................................................ 13-82

13-6-3 Selection of operation mode .............................................................................. 13-83

13-6-4 Program selection for ENET operation .............................................................. 13-85

13-6-5 Restart in the ENET operation mode ................................................................. 13-85

13-6-6 Format for ENET operation programs ............................................................... 13-86

13-7 EIA/ISO Conversion ....................................................................................... 13-88

C-14
 13-7-1 Outline .............................................................................................................. 13-88

13-7-2 EIA/ISO conversion program format .................................................................. 13-89

13-7-3 Output data unit................................................................................................. 13-89

13-7-4 Operating procedure ......................................................................................... 13-90

13-7-5 Supplementary description and precautions ...................................................... 13-91

13-7-6 Parameter and alarm lists ................................................................................. 13-95

13-8 Inch/Metric Unit System Change Simplifying Function ................................... 13-96

13-8-1 Outline .............................................................................................................. 13-96

13-8-2 Data concerned ................................................................................................. 13-97

13-8-3 Operating procedure ......................................................................................... 13-97

13-8-4 Internal management of data............................................................................. 13-97

13-9 DYNAMIC OFFSET Display ........................................................................... 13-99

13-9-1 Data display ...................................................................................................... 13-99

13-9-2 Data registration .............................................................................................. 13-101

13-10 Tap Retract Function .................................................................................... 13-102

13-10-1 Outline ............................................................................................................ 13-102

13-10-2 Operating procedure ....................................................................................... 13-102

13-10-3 Supplementary notes ...................................................................................... 13-102

13-11 WORK POSITION ERROR COMP. Display ................................................. 13-104

13-11-1 Data display .................................................................................................... 13-104

13-11-2 Data registration .............................................................................................. 13-105

14 OTHER FUNCTIONS ........................................................................ 14-1

14-1 Voice Advisor ................................................................................................... 14-1

14-1-1 Change settings .................................................................................................. 14-1

C-15
 14-1-2 Greeting message ............................................................................................... 14-4

14-1-3 Exclusion of alarms from warning ........................................................................ 14-4

14-2 Custom Menu Function .................................................................................... 14-5

14-3 NC Backup Function......................................................................................... 14-8

14-4 Program Edit Backup Function ....................................................................... 14-10

C-16 E
 PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION 1
1 PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION
To machine workpieces, you must mount the tools for machining to the magazine and prepare
fixtures. Then, programs and other various data for automatic operation must be set to the NC.
This chapter describes procedures to be carried out before automatic operation.

1-1 Preparation Steps for Automatic Operation

Supposing that the tooling and adjustment of each part for operation have already been
completed, the subsequent operational steps are described below.

Tool data setting

 Coordinates data setting for the tools

 Registration of the tool shape and the conditions of its usage

Program creation

 Program data setting (See the Programming Manual.)

 Machining shape check
 Tool path check
 Confirmation of the process layout

Data setting for set-up job

 Setting of the program zero-point

 Check of cutting and machine operation in simulated form on the VIRTUAL
MACHINING display

Automatic operation

For execution procedure for automatic operation, see the Part 4, AUTOMATIC OPERATION.

1-1
1 PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION

1-2 E
 DISPLAY OVERVIEW 2
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW

2-1 Name of the Components of Each Display

The liquid crystal display unit of the operation panel presents a specific display according to the
particular requirements. All displays are composed of the display areas shown below.

6 7
2 3 4 5
1

10
9 11 12
13
D747S30001

No. Name Description

1 Home button Used to change over to the Process Home screen.
Indication of the current rapid traverse speed in percentage (0 to 100) with respect to
Rapid traverse over- the maximum value preset in parameter M1.
2
ride display area
Remark : For details of the rapid traverse override see Section 3-1 in Part 4.
Indication of the current spindle speed.
 In manual operation mode
Indication of the current spindle speed in number of revolutions per minute.
Spindle speed over-
3
ride display area  In automatic operation mode
Indication of the current spindle speed in percentage (0 to 150) with respect to the
programmed value.
Remark : For details of the spindle speed override see Section 3-3 in Part 4.
 In manual operation mode
Indication of the current rate of feed in actual value.
Cutting feed override  In automatic operation mode
4
display area Indication of the current rate of feed in percentage (0 to 200) with respect to the
programmed value.
Remark : For details of the cutting feed override see Section 3-2 in Part 4.

2-1
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW

No. Name Description

Displays the status of various functions of the machine.
 Status indication about INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD functions. The indication
depends upon the type and specification of the machine.

ON:

5 Status display area OFF:

 Indication of the current spindle rotational direction. REV appears to indicate the
reversed rotation of the spindle during program flow.

For normal rotation: For reverse rotation:

 Number of tool stop positions currently stored by the TPS function.
Remark : For details of the TPS function see Section 5-1 in Part 4.
Tools common to all Displays the icons for activating the tools common to all displays.
6
displays Remark : See Table 2-1 for more information.
7 Time display area Date and time of the current day.
Data that have been input, data that the NC unit has processed, and other information
8 Data display area
items specific to the current display are displayed.
If erroneous operations are carried out or if machine or NC unit trouble occurs, details of
those operations or trouble will be displayed here as an “alarm.”
9 Alarm display area
Note : If an alarm is displayed, you must remove the cause. Refer to the separate
Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List for further information on alarms.
Used to clear the alarm from the screen.
10 Alarm clear button
Note : Some alarms cannot be cleared with the alarm clear button.
Message display Directions for operation and data descriptions are displayed in inquiry form.
11
area The character strings displayed here are referred to as “messages.”
12 Data input area Data that have been set using a screen keyboard are displayed.
The entire character string displayed here is referred to as a “menu.”
Main menu display Display another page of main menu, if possible, to use another set of menu functions.
13
area
Remark : See Subsection 3-2-2 for more information.

Table 2-1 Tools common to all displays

Icon Name Function

Used to protect programs and other types of data from rewriting.
Data protect button
Remark : See Section 6-1 in Part 4 for more information.
Position storage window Used to display the position storage window.
button Remark : See Section 5-8 for more information.

Machine menu button Used to display machine menus.

Calculator button Used to display a screen keyboard (in Calculator mode).

Setup menu button Used to display the setup menu specific to each display.

2-2
 DISPLAY OVERVIEW 2
2-2 Types of Displays
To manufacture a product, you must register various information, such as tool data, machining
program data, etc., in the NC unit in advance. You must also check registered information and
the movements of each section of the machine during operation.
The NC unit provides the following types of displays to allow for a variety of jobs that are required
for machine operation:

Type of display Main functions Refer to

Process Home screen Displays various working processes and basic information on other Chap. 4
machines.
This display allows you to move to various displays or to switch or
start up peripheral software.
Displays related to the machine Used to check the movements of each section of the machine and Chap. 5
operational status the machining status.
Displays related to program Used to create, check, and/or edit a program appropriate for the Chap. 7
creation type of product to be machined.
Displays related to tools Used to register type and compensation data for the required tools. Chap. 8
Displays related to machining Used to carry out data registration required for executing a machin- Chap. 6
setup ing program, and other jobs.
Displays related to parameters Used to register the control elements (parameters) of the NC unit or Chap. 9
machine and the data for automatic setting of cutting conditions.
 Data that MAZAK recommends are displayed; it is possible to
change data as required.
Remark : Refer to the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/
M-Code List for further details.
Displays related to data trans-  Used to check the registration status of machining programs. Chap. 10
ference between the NC unit and
 Used to transfer machining program data or other data between
an external hardware unit
the NC unit and an external hardware unit.
Displays related to diagnosis Provided for diagnosis and maintenance of the NC unit or machine. Chap. 11
Displays related to 3D interference Used to check the movement of the machine, using models, and to Chap. 12
check set the models for interference check.
Displays related to optional Used to set data on optional functions. Chap. 13
functions
Other functions Used to set data on other (auxiliary) functions. Chap. 14

2-3
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW

2-3 Name of the Components of Each Window

2-3-1 Display data

To help you to carry out operations on the selected display, the NC unit displays a window
allowing you to display information and to enter data.
[1] [2]

[5] [3]

[4]

D747S30190

No. Name Function

[1] Window title Name of the window.
[2] Close button Used to close the window.
[3] Position hold button Stores in memory the position in which the window is displayed.
Next time the window is opened, it will be displayed in the position stored in
memory.
[4] Data display area Displays information and buttons according to the selected function.
[5] Comment display button Used to select whether or not to display the contents of the comment unit in a
MAZATROL program.
Note : Only displayed in the PROGRAM MONITOR window.

1. Opening a window
The following four types of windows are prepared, and only appropriate windows can be opened
on each display.

Window type Description

Windows to be opened by tapping an Windows appearing when the corresponding menu item, such as [WORK
menu item No.] and [RESTART], is tapped.
Windows to be opened automatically Windows displayed automatically to allow various data to be entered or a
specific operation to be carried out.
Windows to be opened through Windows displayed by tapping the setup menu button , one of the
tools common to all display, and selecting an item from the [Window] list
menu.
Windows to be opened by tapping a Windows displayed by tapping an icon on the screen.
button other than the above
Example : Machine menu displayed by tapping .
Remark : The machine menu is detailed in Part 2.

2. Closing a window
Tap the same menu item again or tap [2] in upper right corner.
Remark : Certain windows will be automatically closed if another menu item or the display
selector button is tapped, another display is called up, or if numeric data entry is
complete.

2-4
 DISPLAY OVERVIEW 2
2-3-2 Window list
The NC unit provides the following windows to allow for a variety of jobs that are required for
machine operation:

Displays on which the

Window name Description of window display
window can be displayed
WORK No. A list of work numbers of the programs registered in the NC unit.  POSITION
SELECT  PROGRAM
 DATA I/O
[3] [4] [5]  EIA MONITOR
 TRACE

[1] [2]

[6] [7]

<Project display>

[8] [9]

No. Item Description

Currently accessible storage areas of machining programs (WNos.).
[1] Storage area list Tap the desired item of storage area in this column to change the WNos.
to be displayed in column [2].
Currently accessible machining programs (WNos.).
[2] Work No. list In this column the WNos. that are stored in the storage area selected in
column [1] are displayed when the directory select function is activated.
[3] Project display icon Used to select the project display mode.
[4] Alphabetical order icon Used to display the WNos. in alphabetical order.
Used to change the viewing format for the WNo. list column between list
[5] Viewing format icon
view and detail view.
[6] Work No. Display of the WNo. selected from the list or manually entered.
[7] [OK] button Used to confirm the current selection of WNo.
[8] Project list List of the currently registered projects.
Work No. list for the
[9] List of Work Nos. that are registered for the currently selected project.
project

Note :
1. The format of the list can be changed by tapping the button displayed in
the upper right corner of the window.
2. Display data in the window will not be changed even if a new program is
loaded into the NC unit using data input/output operation while this
window is opened.

2-5
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW

Displays on which the

Window name Description of window display
window can be displayed
3. When the directory select function is activated (US1 bit 4 = 1), the
columns [1] and [2] display the storage areas currently available and
Work Nos. stored in the selected area, respectively.
4. Tap the symbol displayed when US1 bit 5 = 1 (Project function
enabled) to select and cancel the project display mode, in which the left-
hand column [8] lists up the currently available projects.
Selection and cancelation are displayed, respectively, by the symbol
held down and released .
5. The directory select function and project function refer to the Work No.
selection on the displays PROGRAM, EIA MONITOR and DATA I/O as
well as the windows for restart operation and comparison stop.
6. In the project display mode, only display of the programs (WNos.) al-
ready registered for the projects can occur for Work No. selection.
Cancel the project display mode, therefore, to create a new program.
PART SHAPE The machining shape on the XY-plane is displayed for a program which is  POSITION
currently selected for automatic operation on the POSITION display, or  PROGRAM FILE
arbitrarily selected on the PROGRAM FILE display.  EIA MONITOR
 SET UP RECORD
PROGRAM The contents of the currently selected program are displayed (program layout  POSITION
MONITOR and program data, respectively, for a MAZATROL and an EIA/ISO program).  TOOL PATH CHECK
The highlighting in the window refers to the sections being actually executed  VIRTUAL MACHINING
and internally checked, respectively, in the case of the POSITION and TOOL
 3D MONITOR
PATH CHECK displays.
 TRACE
Enable the comment display function if it is desirable to display the contents of
the comment unit in a MAZATROL program at the top of the program layout.
As for a program containing multiple comment units, a comment remains dis-
played until it is replaced by the execution of the succeeding comment unit.
RESTART Indication of the restart position, along with the modal information as a result of  POSITION
searching the EIA/ISO program for the specified starting position of restart  TRACE
operation.  EIA MONITOR
HANDLE Amount of interruption existing during manual pulse interruption  POSITION
INTERUPT
TOOL DATA Data on the tools registered in the NC unit  PROGRAM
Note : This window is only available during creation of a MAZATROL (MAZATROL)
program, and enumerates selectively those tools which are appropriate for
the tool sequence marked by the cursor.
 Tap to display the next page.
 Tap to display the previous page.
POSITION Display of the current position (in the workpiece coordinate system), machine  MACRO VARIABLE
position, work number, tool number, etc.  WORK OFFSET
 TOOL OFFSET
 TOOL DATA
PROGRAM Display of the MAZATROL program’s unit marked by the cursor  PROGRAM LAYOUT
TOOL FILE Tool data registered in the NC unit  PROGRAM
 Tap to display the next page. (MAZATROL)
 Tap to display the previous page.  TOOL DATA

Note : This window displays the data of the milling tools as registered on the
TOOL FILE display.
NOM- Display of a list of standards for unified/pipe threads  PROGRAM
SELECT Note : (MAZATROL)
1. If the display of the above data spans over mulitiple pages,  TOOL DATA

 Tap to display the next page.  TOOL LAYOUT

 CUTTING CONDITION
 Tap to display the previous page.
LEARN
2. This window can only be displayed in the MAZATROL programming
while the cursor remains set at the required position for input of the
nominal diameter for a tapping tool.

2-6
 DISPLAY OVERVIEW 2
Displays on which the
Window name Description of window display
window can be displayed
ALARM NAVI- Display of alarm remedial information upon occurrence of alarms.  Any display
GATION A parameter (bit 1 of F80) is provided for the selection of whether this window
is to be displayed automatically upon occurrence of an alarm.
Manual display of the window can be done by tapping and [Help] in
any display as well as by tapping the [ALARM NAVI.] menu item on the
GRAPHIC MAINTENANCE display.
Note :
1. One alarm is described on one page. For multiple simultaneous alarms,
 Tap to display the next page.
 Tap to display the previous page.
2. Use the vertical and horizontal scroll bars if the window area is not large
enough to display the information in its entirety.
3. Remedial information is only provided for the alarms No. 200 to No. 399
and No. 1200 to No. 1399.
4. The contents of the window remaining opened will not be cleared
together with clearence of the alarm itself.

2-4 SMART Mode

SMART Mode refers to a function of selectively making available the MAZATROL CNC’s
displays of relatively frequent use. There are three types provided for the SMART mode: general
SMART mode, and two particular modes, SMART (MAZ) and SMART (EIA), appropriate for
MAZATROL and EIA/ISO programs, respectively.
The default setting is of the general SMART mode.

1. Mode selection

A. From the Process Home screen

(1) Tap the [SMART] button on the Process Home screen.

 A message box is displayed.

(2) Select the desired mode by tapping.

 Mode selection is finished.

2-7
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW

B. From the menu

(1) Tap the display selector button, and then tap the [SMART] menu item.
 The following menu is displayed.
SMART SMART EXPERT
(MAZ) (EIA)

(2) Select a menu item as required to choose a particular SMART mode.

 The color of the selected menu item is changed from orange to green to indicate the
corresponding selection.
 Do not make any selection here if it is only desired to select the general SMART mode.
 Select the [EXPERT] menu item to cancel the SMART mode at all, i.e. to use all the
available displays.
 The state of SMART mode selection is not cleared by turning-off.

2. Mode indication
The current state of SMART mode selection is indicated as shown below on the Process Home
screen.

Types of SMART mode Indication

SMART mode

SMART (MAZ) mode

SMART (EIA) mode

EXPERT mode

2-8
 DISPLAY OVERVIEW 2
2-5 Configuration of Displays

2-5-1 Configuration of displays

1. EXPERT mode

PROGRAM MONITOR PART SHAPE CNC SIGNAL

POSITION RESTART COMPARISON STOP TRIAL MODE
HANDLE INTERUPT WORK No. SELECT

SETUP PALLET MACHINING MACHINING -

TRACE INFORMATION MANAGEMENT EIA MONITOR NAVIGATION - MONITORING WORK OFFSET
RESULT
WORK No. SELECT PART SHAPE WORK No. SELECT POSITION
PROGRAM MONITOR HANDLE INTERUPT
DRILL DYNAMIC
RESTART 3D SETUP RESTART
MONITOR  OFFSET 
COMPARISON STOP COMPARISON STOP
HANDLE INTERUPT CNC SIGNAL POSITION
PART SHAPE
WORK POSITION
ERROR COMP.
ADDITIONAL MACRO TOOL PATH
WPC VARIABLE CHECK FOR TOOL LAYOUT MEASURE 3D MONITOR
OP. PROGRAM POSITION

POSITION POSITION PROGRAM MONITOR WORK No. SELECT

STRAIGHTNESS
GRAPH 
PROGRAM WORK No. SELECT
(MAZATROL) TOOL DATA
TOOL FILE

PROGRAM WORK No. SELECT

(EIA)

TOOL PATH PROGRAM MONITOR PROGRAM PROGRAM PROCESS

SHAPE CHECK CUTTING
CHECK LAYOUT FILE CONTROL CONDITION

MACHINING POSITION CUTTING

VIRTUAL
MACHINING NAVIGATION - TOOL DATA CONDITION
PREDICT LEARN

PROGRAM MONITOR
RESTART POSITION
TOOL OFFSET TOOL FILE
USER
PARAMETER
Main display

Sub-display
MACHINE EASY-SET PLC DATA I/O
PARAMETER PARAMETER PARAMETER PARAMETER DATA I/O
Window

WORK No. SELECT  Optional

DATA ERASE Can be called up mutually
DIAGNOSIS SELECT DIRECTORY
(USER) ACCUMULATED TIME by tapping the menu item.
USB DRIVE SELECT

ALARM MAINTENANCE SPINDLE LOAD

PLC SIGNAL ALARM HISTORY CHECK GRAPHIC PLC
DISPLAY

DIAGNOSIS RUNNING CONDITION RUNNING UNIT GRAPHIC CHECK

(MAKER) RECORDER CHECK CONTROL WORKLOG MAINTENANCE EXHAUSTION

DIAGNOSIS SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER

VERSION MONITOR OPTION MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR

D747S30210E

2-9
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW

2. SMART mode

PROGRAM MONITOR PART SHAPE CNC SIGNAL

POSITION RESTART COMPARISON STOP TRIAL MODE
HANDLE INTERUPT WORK No. SELECT

SETUP
TRACE EIA MONITOR WORK OFFSET
INFORMATION

WORK No. SELECT PART SHAPE WORK No. SELECT POSITION

PROGRAM MONITOR HANDLE INTERUPT
RESTART 3D SETUP RESTART
COMPARISON STOP COMPARISON STOP
HANDLE INTERUPT CNC SIGNAL
PART SHAPE

ADDITIONAL MACRO TOOL PATH

WPC VARIABLE CHECK FOR TOOL LAYOUT MEASURE 3D MONITOR
OP. PROGRAM

POSITION POSITION PROGRAM MONITOR WORK No. SELECT

WORK No. SELECT POSITION

PROGRAM
TOOL DATA TOOL DATA
(MAZATROL)
TOOL FILE

PROGRAM WORK No. SELECT POSITION

TOOL FILE TOOL OFFSET
(EIA)

TOOL PATH PROGRAM MONITOR PROGRAM PROCESS PROGRAM

CHECK SHAPE CHECK FILE CONTROL LAYOUT

VIRTUAL
MACHINING USER DATA I/O
PARAMETER

PROGRAM MONITOR
WORK No. SELECT
RESTART
SELECT DIRECTORY
USB DRIVE SELECT
DATA ERASE
DIAGNOSIS
(USER) ACCUMULATED TIME

MAINTENANCE
PLC SIGNAL ALARM ALARM HISTORY CHECK PLC

RUNNING CONDITION RUNNING UNIT GRAPHIC CHECK

RECORDER CHECK CONTROL WORKLOG MAINTENANCE EXHAUSTION

Main display

Sub-display

Window

 Optional
Can be called up mutually
by tapping the menu item.
D747S30211E

2-10
 DISPLAY OVERVIEW 2
3. SMART (MAZ) mode

PROGRAM MONITOR CNC SIGNAL TRIAL MODE

POSITION RESTART HANDLE INTERUPT
WORK No. SELECT PART SHAPE

SETUP
TRACE WORK OFFSET
INFORMATION

WORK No. SELECT POSITION

PROGRAM MONITOR
RESTART 3D SETUP
HANDLE INTERUPT
PART SHAPE

ADDITIONAL TOOL PATH POSITION

WPC CHECK FOR 3D MONITOR TOOL DATA TOOL LAYOUT
OP. PROGRAM

POSITION PROGRAM MONITOR

TOOL FILE
WORK No. SELECT
PROGRAM
(MAZATROL) TOOL DATA
TOOL FILE

TOOL PATH PROGRAM MONITOR PROGRAM PROGRAM

CHECK SHAPE CHECK FILE LAYOUT

VIRTUAL
MACHINING USER
PARAMETER DATA I/O

PROGRAM MONITOR
RESTART WORK No. SELECT
SELECT DIRECTORY
USB DRIVE SELECT
DIAGNOSIS
(USER)

PLC SIGNAL ALARM ALARM HISTORY PLC

RUNNING GRAPHIC
COND MONITOR CONTROL MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE

Main display

Sub-display

Window

 Optional
Can be called up mutually
by tapping the menu item.

D747S30212E

2-11
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW

4. SMART (EIA) mode

PROGRAM MONITOR CNC SIGNAL RESTART

POSITION COMPARISON STOP HANDLE INTERUPT TRIAL MODE
WORK No. SELECT PART SHAPE

TRACE WORK OFFSET EIA MONITOR

WORK No. SELECT POSITION WORK No. SELECT

PROGRAM MONITOR HANDLE INTERUPT
RESTART RESTART
COMPARISON STOP COMPARISON STOP
HANDLE INTERUPT CNC SIGNAL
PART SHAPE

MACRO TOOL PATH

VARIABLE CHECK FOR SETUP 3D MONITOR
OP. PROGRAM

POSITION PROGRAM MONITOR POSITION

TOOL DATA

WORK No. SELECT

PROGRAM
(EIA) PART SHAPE POSITION
TOOL OFFSET

TOOL PATH PROGRAM MONITOR PROGRAM

CHECK FILE

VIRTUAL
MACHINING USER
PARAMETER DATA I/O

PROGRAM MONITOR
RESTART WORK No. SELECT
SELECT DIRECTORY
USB DRIVE SELECT
DIAGNOSIS
(USER)

PLC SIGNAL ALARM ALARM HISTORY PLC

RUNNING GRAPHIC
COND MONITOR CONTROL MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE

Main display

Sub-display

Window

 Optional
Can be called up mutually
by tapping the menu item.

D747S30213E

2-12 E
 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING 3
3 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING
Registration of data in the NC unit is accomplished by setting data in each item displayed on the
screen.
This chapter describes the basic display operations, general methods of setting, erasing and
modifying data, and related precautions.

 More specific methods of setting data are detailed later for each display.
Refer to the relevant section.

3-1 Touch Gestures

The NC unit is provided with a touch panel as a means of operating its displays and entering
data in it.
Table 3-1 Basic touch gestures

Gesture Action Description Function

Tap Tap an item once.  To move the cursor
 To select an item

Double tap Tap an item twice. (Note)

Long tap Continue touching an (Note)

item for a certain time.

Swipe Slide a finger on an item.  To scroll through a

list
 To move a model

Two-finger swipe Slide two fingers on an To rotate a model

item.

Rotate  Turn your hand while To rotate a model

touching an item with
two fingers.
 Turn one finger about
another on an item.
Pinch out Touch an item with two  To enlarge a model
fingers and move the
Pinch in  To reduce a model
fingers away from each
other (pinch out) or
towards each other
(pinch in).

Note : Used only for operations on the operating system (Windows 8).

3-1
3 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING

3-1-1 Moving the cursor/Selecting an item (Tap)

Function To enter data into the NC unit, to move the cursor or select a button on the screen.

Directly tap the desired data item or button (icon).

Moving the cursor Selecting a button

Operation

3-1-2 Scrolling through a list/Moving a model (Swipe)

Function To scroll through the list displayed on the screen or to move a model in a 3D graphic display area.

Slide a finger on the list to be scrolled or the model to be moved.

Scrolling through a list Moving a model

Operation

3-2
 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING 3
3-1-3 Rotating a model

1. Two-finger swipe

Function To rotate a model in a 3D graphic display area.

 Slide two fingers on the model to be rotated.

 The model rotates on the horizontal axis with respect to the display area.

Operation

2. Rotate

Function To rotate a model in a 3D graphic display area.

 Turn your hand while touching the model you want to rotate with two fingers.
 The model rotates on the vertical axis with respect to the display area.

Operation

3-1-4 Enlarging/Reducing a model (Pinch out/in)

Function To enlarge or reduce a model in a 3D graphic display area.

Touch a model with two fingers and move the fingers away from each other (pinch out) or towards
each other (pinch in).

Enlarging a model Reducing a model

Operation

3-3
3 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING

3-2 Setting Data for the NC Unit

The NC unit has the feature that it uses interactive input. That is, the operator can set data in
sequence just by responding to inquiry messages issued by the NC unit. When setting data,
check the message display area to ensure that the data you are going to set is exactly what you
want to set. Usually, messages are displayed in either of the following formats:
(: Details of the data to be set)
Message format Setting Refer to
“?”  Setting alphanumeric data Subsection
Data are set by entering characters and numeric values with a keyboard 3-2-1
displayed on the screen.
“ <MENU>?”  Selecting menu data Subsection
Data are set by selecting an item from a menu. 3-2-2

For the NC unit, all data can be set by “alphanumeric data setting” (with a screen keyboard) or
“menu data selection”, or by combined use of these two methods.

3-4
 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING 3
3-2-1 Setting alphanumeric data

1. Types of screen keyboards

Four types of screen keyboards are available, as shown below, and the keyboard best suited to
the data to be entered is automatically displayed. (Remark 5)

Numeric data entry mode (Remark 1) ONG key mode (Remark 2) Calculator mode (Remark 3)
 Without cursor keys  SHIFT key OFF
[9] [12] [13] [11]
[1]
[2] [3]
[14]
[10]
[5]
[15]
[6]
[4]
[7]
[8]  SHIFT key ON

 With cursor keys

[6]

Full keyboard mode (Remark 4)

 For the entry of alpha-

numeric data [18]

[16] [19]

[17]

 For the entry of signs

No. Name Description

[1] Message display area Displays a message corresponding to the data to be entered. (Note)
[2] Incremental entry key Used to enable the entry of an incremental value.
[3] Data entry field Displays the data entered. (Note)
[4] Numeric keys Used to enter numeric data.
[5] Backspace key Used to delete the data entered last.
Used to keep the keyboard displayed in the same position even if the cursor is
[6] Position hold key
moved. (Remark 1)
[7] Cancel key Used to cancel the data entered.

3-5
3 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING

No. Name Description

Used to set the entered data at the cursor position.
During creation of a MAZATROL program a new line can be added by tapping
[8] Enter key
the key with the cursor being placed at the last (rightmost) item on the
last line.
[9] Close button Used to close the keyboard.
[10] Alphabetic keys Used to enter alphabetical characters.
[11] mode key Used to switch between ONG key mode and Full keyboard mode.
Used to switch alphabetic characters that can be entered with alphabetic keys.
[12] SHIFT key
(Remark 2)
[13] abc key Used to switch between uppercase and lowercase characters.
[14] Get key Used to acquire the data at the cursor position.
[15] Function keys Used to select a function used for a calculation.
[16] Tabulator key Used to switch tabs.
Used to switch the characters to be entered with alphabetic keys from
[17] Sign mode select key
alphabetic characters to signs. (Remark 3)
[18] Page keys Used to change pages.
[19] Cursor keys Used to move the cursor.

Note : These display areas are not displayed on a display or window that allows you to enter
data directly.
For example, on the PROGRAM display for an EIA/ISO program, MDI window.
Remark 1: Follow the procedure below to show the cursor keys always on the screen keyboard
in numeric data entry mode.
(a) Tap , [Touch Setup] and the [Show Cursor Keys On Keyboard] option in that
order on the POSITION display to assign a check mark to the item mentioned last.

(b) Tap the (activated) position hold key [6].

 The key is replaced with and the cursor keys are added to the screen
keyboard.

 Tap the key to hide the cursor keys and to deactivate the “position hold”
function.
Remark 2: The items displayed on the left side of the keyboard change depending on whether
SHFT
the key [12] is activated or deactivated.
Remark 3: In the following explanation, the screen keyboard in this mode is referred to as
calculator window.
Remark 4: The items displayed on the left side of the keyboard change depending on whether
the !#? key [17] is activated or deactivated.
Remark 5: Tap , [Touch Setup] and the [Do not Show Screen Keyboard] option in
that order on the POSITION display to assign a check mark to the item mentioned last
if it is not desirable that the screen keyboard should automatically be displayed.

3-6
 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING 3
2. Setting data
Example : To set data of “6.02”:
(1) Tap the desired item on the NC screen to move the cursor to it.
 A screen keyboard corresponding to the selected item is displayed.
(2) Enter the desired value with numeric keys.
 Tap 6  0 2 in that order.
 The value entered is displayed in the data entry field [3].

(3) Tap the key [8].

 The value entered in Step (2) is definitively set for the item on which the cursor is placed.

 Data is not registered in the NC unit unless it is displayed at the corre-

sponding item in the data display area. So, be sure to tap the key after
performing the step in (3).
Depending on the type of the keyboard displayed in Step (1), a data entry
field may not be displayed. In that case, data entered is directly reflected at
the corresponding item, so you need not tap the key.

Remark : If you tap a wrong numeric key [4] or a wrong alphabetic key [10], delete the entered
value or character using the key [7], and then enter a value or character again.

 Values entered in the calculator window are retained. Enter data correctly for
each item.

3-7
3 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING

3-2-2 Selecting menu data

1. Types of menu items

Three types of menu items are prepared as shown below.

Menu item display (Note)

Menu item type Description Disabled Enabled
(orange) (green)
Display switch menu item Tap the menu item to switch to another display.

Data setting menu item Select a data item from the menu to set it.
(Menu data selection)
Function execution menu Menu functions of this type cannot be selected
item from a menu listed up in List menu mode.

Note : When a menu item is tapped, its color changes from orange to green.
When the menu item is tapped again or when the setting of data or the execution of a
function has been completed, the color of the menu item returns from green to orange.
USER SET USER SET
Remark : Disabled and enabled menu items are shown as REGIST and REGIST , respec-
tively, in this manual.

A. Main menu
The main menu is displayed at the bottom of every display except the Home screen.
Use the main menu to change over to another display or to turn on and off a function.

Main menu

[1] [2] [3]

D747S30003

No. Name Description

[1] Display selector button Used to change over to the display selection menu.
[2] Menu Used to change over to another display or to select/deselect a function.
: Used to change over to another menu available on the current display.
[3] Menu selector button : Used to switch to List menu mode.
Remark : For an explanation of list menus, see “B. List menu.”

3-8
 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING 3
B. List menu
The list menu mode displays all other menus that can be displayed currently using the menu
selector button.
 When the list menu mode is available, is displayed on the top of the menu selector
button and all other menus can be displayed by tapping .
 Every item on the menus listed up can be selected directly. (Note)

List menu

Displayed green in the list menu mode

D747S30004

Note : Menu items that involve the actual operation of the machine cannot be selected directly
from a menu listed up.
If such a menu item is tapped, the corresponding machine operation will not be
executed, but the contents of the main menu display area will be replaced with the
menu containing the item concerned. Select the item again from the main menu to
operate the machine.

3-9
3 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING

C. Submenu
Submenu refers to a menu that is displayed only when necessary (for example, for changing the
type of data display) to perform operations on the screen.
 The icon is displayed on a display or window for which a submenu can be displayed.

 To display a submenu, tap the area in which is displayed.

 A submenu disappears when an item is selected from it or the area is exited by tapping
another display area.

Submenu

D747S30005

D. Message box
A message box is displayed only when necessary for entering data or performing operations on
a display. It gives information on the data item concerned or prompts to confirm the operation.

[3]

[1]

[2]

D747S30006

No. Name Description

[1] Message display area Displays a message corresponding to the operation concerned.
[2] Button display area Displays buttons corresponding to the operation concerned.
[3] Close button Used to close the message box.

3-10
 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING 3
2. Setting data
(1) Tap the desired item on the NC screen to move the cursor to it.
 A menu corresponding to the selected item is displayed.
(2) Select the desired item from the menu.
 The selected item (data) is set for the item on which the cursor is placed.
Note : In some cases (e.g., data entry in exponential notation on the MACRO VARIABLE
display), the item selected from a menu is not displayed directly at the cursor position,
but in the data entry field.
In such a case, tap the key after Step (2) above to definitively set the data.

3. Deleting data
Follow the procedure below to delete data displayed on the screen.
(1) Place the cursor where the data to be deleted is displayed.
 A menu corresponding to the selected item is displayed.
(2) Tap the key.
 The data at the cursor position is deleted (or cleared to 0).
Note : It may be possible to delete data line-by-line or to delete the entire displayed data at a
time.
Some types of data, however, cannot be deleted by using the key.

4. Modifying data
Follow the procedure below to modify data displayed on the screen.
(1) Place the cursor where the data to be modified is displayed.
 A menu corresponding to the selected item is displayed.
(2) Set new data.
 The data at the cursor position is overwritten with the new data.

5. Entering an incremental value

Incremental values can be used to set numeric data.
The desired data can be set just by specifying an incremental or decremental value for the
original data. Effectively use this function when increasing or reducing displayed data.
To enable the entry of an incremental value, select the [INCRMENT INPUT] menu function or
make active the + key on the screen keyboard.

(1) Tap the [INCRMENT INPUT] menu item or the + key on the screen keyboard.
 The menu function and the key are made active.
(2) Specify an incremental or decremental value for the original data.
Example : To reduce the data of “12.05” by –0.1:
Tap – 0  1 in that order.
 The specified value is displayed in the data entry field.
(3) Tap the key.
 The original data changes by the value that was entered in Step (2) above.
 In the example shown above, the original data changes to “11.95” (= 12.05 – 0.1).
Note : This function cannot be used for an item for which the [INCRMENT INPUT] menu item
is not displayed or the + key is forcibly made inactive.

3-11
3 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING

3-2-3 Undo and Redo

Data setting or editing operation can be canceled and repeated as required.
On displays with and at the top, the data displayed on the screen can be reverted to the
previous state.

[1] [2] [3]

D747S30007

No. Name Description

[1] UNDO button Used to revert the data to an older state.
Displays the number of pieces of data or operations stored in memory.
[2] Number of stored items  Up to 10 pieces of data or operations can be stored.
 The stored items are cleared by data saving or switch to another display.
Used to repeat the operation undone in order to advance the data to a more current
[3] REDO button
state.

3-12
 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING 3
3-3 Other Operations

3-3-1 Correcting the blurring of the sensitivity of the touch panel

Follow the procedure below to correct the blurring of the sensitivity of the touch panel due to the
operating environment.
(1) Tap and the [Touch Panel Compensation] option on the POSITION display.
(2) Select a correction level.
 A correction level can be selected from the following.

Correction level Correction Operability

Low Small amount of correction High operability
Middle
Large amount of correction Low operability
High

 A message box is displayed.

(3) Tap the [OK] button.
 A change of correction level starts and CNC BUSY is displayed in the message display
area.

 During change of correction level, do not perform tapping operations.

 During change of correction level, do not turn off the power; otherwise the
correction level could not be changed correctly.

 When the change of correction level has been completed, a message box appears.
(4) Tap the [OK] button.
Note : Operability can be reduced depending on the correction level selected. Select a
correction level suited to the operating environment.

3-3-2 Displaying the taskbar of the operating system (Windows)

The Windows taskbar is hidden to prevent incorrect use of menus.
Follow the procedure below to display the taskbar, for example, in order to set up external
software or a network.
(1) Tap , [Setup] and the [Show Windows Taskbar] option in that order on the
POSITION display.
(2) Tap at the bottom of the screen.
 The taskbar is displayed.

Note : The selection of [Show Windows Taskbar] is canceled when the power is turned off.

3-13
3 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING

3-4 Data Guard Setting Display

 To specify who has the authority to change data on each display.

Function  Up to 8 operator ranks can be set. (Default: 4 ranks)
 Up to 50 user accounts and passwords can be registered.

Remarks The number of ranks can be changed with the parameter US37.

3-4-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

A. Data guard setting mode

[1] [6]

[2] [3] [4] [5] [4]

D747S30008

3-14
 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING 3
B. Log-in mode

[7]

D747S30009

C. Account management mode

[8]

[9]

[10]

D747S30010

3-15
3 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING

2. Display data description

No. Item Description

[1] User information Name and rank of the user.
[2] Category list Category of the data items to be protected.
[3] Display list List of displays with the data items to be protected.
Specified rank.
[4] Rank
Setting range: 1 to 8
[5] Item list Data items concerned on the selected display.
[6] User select button Used to switch users.
[7] Log-in information Name and password of the user.
[8] Setting button Used to switch to the account management column.
[9] Account setting select tab Used to change account management types.
[10] Account setting information Information required for account management.

3-4-2 Account management

Note : Only the operator ranked 1 is allowed to add or delete an account and to change a
password.

 The initial setting for data guard should be performed in accordance with the
description given later in Subsection 3-4-6.

1. To switch users (log-in)

(1) Tap the [CHANGE OPERATOR] button.
 The contents of the display are changed for Log-in mode.
(2) Enter the username and password with the screen keyboard, and tap the [OK] button.
 A message box appears, indicating that log-in is complete.

2. To add an account
(1) Tap the [SETTING] button.
 The contents of the display are changed for Account management mode.
(2) Tap the [ADD] tab.
 The account setting column switches to Account add mode.
(3) Enter data in the USER ID, PASSWORD and RANK fields for the operator to be added.
(4) Tap the [OK] button.
 A new account is added.

3. To delete an account
(1) Tap the [SETTING] button.
 The contents of the display are changed for Account management mode.
(2) Tap the [REMOVE] tab.
 The account setting column switches to Account delete mode.
(3) Select the USER ID to be deleted and enter “–9999.”
(4) Tap the [OK] button.
 The selected account is deleted.

3-16
 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING 3
4. To change a password
(1) Tap the [SETTING] button.
 The contents of the display are changed for Account management mode.
(2) Tap the [CHANGE] tab.
 The account setting column switches to Account change mode.
(3) Select the USER ID of the user concerned and enter a new password.
 Enter one and the same password in both the Password and Confirm Password fields.
(4) Tap the [OK] button.
 The password of the selected account is changed.
Note : The password for the protect function can be changed by selecting the username
“Protect Key.” By default, no password is set for this function.

5. To log out
(1) Tap the [CHANGE OPERATOR] button.
 The contents of the display are changed for Log-in mode.
(2) Tap the [LOGOUT] menu item.
 A message box appears, indicating that log out is complete.

3-4-3 Setting a Rank

The entry of data in each item can be restricted.
SET NO.1 SET NO.2 SET NO.3 SET NO.4 SET NO.5 SET NO.6 SET NO.7 SET NO.8 CUSTOM
SETTING

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2

1. SET NO. (1 to 8)
Used to set an operator rank for the selected item. The entry of data is restricted for
operators below the specified rank.
Example : If Rank No. 4 is specified for a data item, operators ranked from 5 to 8 cannot
set or modify the data of the item.
Note : As is the case with the entry of data to an item, the rank setting for the item cannot
be modified using the SET NO. menu functions by operators below the rank
currently set.
2. CUSTOM SETTING
If a rank can be set individually for each item on the display, use this menu function to
perform detailed rank settings.
Note : Only the operator ranked 1 is allowed to use the [CUSTOM SETTING] menu
function.

3-17
3 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING

3-4-4 Input and output of the settings

The settings on the Data Guard Setting display can be saved and loaded.
Note : Only the operator ranked 1 is allowed to perform data input and output operations.

1. Data saving
(1) Tap , [File] and the [DATA I/O] option in that order.
 A window for data I/O operations is displayed.
(2) Tap the [SAVE FILE] button.
(3) Tap the [BROWSE] button to specify the saving destination and the file name.
 The file name is automatically determined.
(4) Tap the [EXECUTE] button.
 Data saving starts and a message box appears.
Remark : Check SAVE CSV FILE if it is desirable to output a CSV file along with the storage
of data.

2. Data loading
(1) Tap , [File] and the [DATA I/O] option in that order.
 A window for data I/O operations is displayed.
(2) Tap the [LOAD FILE] button.
(3) Tap the [BROWSE] button to specify the file to be loaded.
(4) Select the type of the data to be loaded.
 Check USER REGISTRY DATA to load account information and passwords.
 Check DATA GUARD SETTING to load rank settings.
(5) Tap the [EXECUTE] button.
 Data loading starts and a message box appears.

3-4-5 Initialization of the settings

Follow the procedure below to initialize account information, passwords and rank settings.
Note : Only the operator ranked 1 is allowed to initialize the settings.
(1) Tap , [File] and the [DATA ERASE] option in that order.
 A window for data initialization is displayed.
(2) Select the type of the data to be initialized.
 Check USER REGISTRY DATA to initialize account information and passwords.
 Check DATA GUARD SETTING to initialize rank settings.
(3) Enter “–9999.”
(4) Tap the [START INIT.] button.
 Data initialization starts.

3-18
 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING 3
3-4-6 Initial setting for data guard
Follow the procedure below to initially create an account with rank No. 1 as a preparation for
using the Data Guard Setting display for the first time.
(1) Tap the [CHANGE OPERATOR] button.
 The contents of the display are changed for Log-in mode.
(2) Enter NCUSER as username with the screen keyboard, leave the password blank, and tap
the [OK] button.
 A message box appears, indicating that log-in is complete for the initial setting account
named NCUSER.
(3) Add another account with rank No. 1, and then switch users to log-in as the user ranked 1.

 Follow the relevant procedures described above in Subsection 3-4-2.

 Initially create an account with rank No. 1 as a preparation for using the Data
Guard Setting display for the first time, and perform the desired initial settings
as the user ranked 1.

Note 1: The password for an account named NCUSER cannot be changed at all.
Note 2: An account named NCUSER cannot be created or used if there is already another
account provided with rank No. 1.
Note 3: An account named NCUSER can be created or used anew when there are in particular
no more accounts provided with rank No. 1 or when the account information is totally
initialized.

3-19
3 DISPLAY OPERATION AND DATA SETTING

3-5 Saving Machining Programs

This NC unit is designed so that machining programs are saved onto the local disk. If the NC unit
is accidentally turned off by a sudden power interruption or other events, entered data may not
be saved. During data entry, therefore, perform the following operation as appropriate for data
storage.

 To save a machining program:

Execute the [PROGRAM COMPLETE] menu function on the PROGRAM
display or select another display even halfway to save the machining program
as far as it is prepared.

 Never fail to back up and store every machining program of importance onto an external
memory, such as USB memory stick.
The machining programs saved on the local disk may not be restored if the local disk
CAUTION should fail in function.

3-6 Naming Machining Programs

Machining programs can be specified by a name (Work Number) composed of up to 32
characters.
Note : For the use of numerals only, however, a program name must be a natural number of
up to eight digits (from 1 to 99999999).
Characters available
 Letters (capital and small: A to Z and a to z)
 Numerals
 Symbols: “+” “–” “_” and “.”
Note 1: It should be noted here that no distinction is made between capital and small letters
(case-insensitive). That is, a new program cannot be named “aBC” if a program named
“ABC” already exists in the storage area concerned.
Note 2: Moreover, the program name must not begin with a period (.).

3-20 E
 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN) 4
4 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN)
The Process Home screen appears when the NC unit is turned on.

 Used to display information on each work process for the NC and to call up various displays.
Function  Used for simple monitoring of other machines and for starting peripheral software.
 Used to turn off the NC unit.

4-1 Displayed Data

[9] [10]
[2]

[1]

[4]

[11] [3]

[5]
[8]

[6] [7]

D747S30011’

1. Display data description

No. Item Description

Process selection Display select buttons and summaries are displayed according to the selection of a
[1]
area work process in this area.
[2] Machine information The progress of machining, the machining time and operator information. (Note 1)
[3] Summary display Summarized information on the process selected in the process selection area.
[4] Simple monitoring Operating states of other machines on the same network. (Note 2)
Display select Buttons for calling up the displays corresponding to the process selected in the process
[5]
buttons selection area. (Note 4)
[6] Setting/OFF button Used to replace the display select buttons with those for setting and turning off.
[7] Status display area Status of the machine.
Display of communication status of peripheral software.
[8] Peripheral software
The Smooth Applications Manager can be started from the Process Home screen.
[9] Machining time Display of machining time on a gauge. (Note 1)
[10] Parts count Display of the number of machined pieces on a gauge.
Used to select a SMART mode.
[11] SMART button
The name of the button indicates the curetly selected mode.

4-1
4 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN)

Note 1: The graphic display of machining progress (%) or machining time on a gauge is based
on the computed machining time as a result of simulation, or the time obtained by the
last actual operation. It may not be correct due to variation in overriding values, etc.
Note 2: Provided that a network is established.
Note 3: Items displayed depend upon the specifications of the machine.
Note 4: Display select buttons grayed out are currently disabled.

4-2 Process Selection

Select a work process on the Process Home screen, and necessary information is displayed
along with a button for calling up the corresponding display.

[1] [2]

[3]

D747S30012

No. Item Description

Five work processes are displayed as enumerated below. Display select buttons and
summaries are displayed according to the selection in this area.
MACHINING Work process for machining
Work process PROGRAM Work process for the creation of a program
[1]
buttons
TOOL DATA Work process for the setting of tool data
SET UP Work process for the setup of coordinate systems, fixtures, etc.
MAINTENANCE Work process for maintenance
Used to call up the main display for the selected work process.
MACHINING POSITION display
Main display PROGRAM PROGRAM display
[2]
select buttons TOOL DATA TOOL DATA display
SETUP SETUP RECORD display
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE display
Indication on whether all necessary work in each process has been completed.
: Completed
: Not completed
Here are the conditions required for the work in each process to be judged complete.
[3] Work check MACHINING (Excluded from work check)
PROGRAM The program has undergone a simulation.
TOOL DATA All necessary tools have been registered.
SETUP All necessary coordinate systems have been set.
MAINTENANCE There are no items that need to be checked.

4-2
 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN) 4
4-3 Machine Information Display
The progress of machining, the machining time and operator information are displayed in this
area.

1. Displayed data

[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]

[5]
[6]
D747S30166

No. Item Description

[1] Progress of machining Percentage of the current machining time to the estimated machining time.
[2] Machining time Current machining time.
[3] Operation mode Currently selected operation mode.
Name given to the machine.
[4] Machine name Machine can be named arbitrarily.
Remark : See the description given under 2 below for more information.
Username and rank of the operator as logged in.
Remark :
[5] Operator information
1. See the description given under 3 below for log-in procedure.
2. See Section 3-4 for the details of operator information setting.
[6] Work number Work number of the currently executed machining program.

Note 1: The progress of machining cannot be displayed for EIA/ISO programs in general, or a
MAZATROL program which has not yet been run even on the TOOL PATH CHECK
display.
Note 2: The progress of machining (%) and the machining time are displayed on the basis of
the time data estimated by simulation or obtained by the last actual execution. They
may not be displayed correctly due to a difference in override values applied or for
other reasons.

2. Giving an arbitrary name to the machine

(1) Tap the machine name displayed.
 A name entry window is displayed.
(2) Enter a name and tap the [OK] button.
 The name entered is displayed as the name of the machine.

3. Log-in procedure
Operator information is displayed on the basis of the settings on the Data Guard Setting display.
(1) Tap the operator information displayed.
 The log-in window is displayed.
(2) Enter the username and the password and tap the [LOGIN] button.
 Information on the operator is displayed as logged in.

4-3
4 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN)

4-4 Summary Display

Summarized information on the selected work process is displayed in this area.

1. Machining
The current load on each axis and the spindle speed are displayed.

[1]

[2]

[3]

D747S30013

No. Item Description

[1] Spindle information Load on, and speed of, the spindle.
[2] Override information Override values for rapid traverse and cutting feed.
[3] Axis information Current position and load on each axis. (Note)

Note : Information is given on the axes X, Y, Z, A, B and C only.

Remark : Items displayed depend upon the specifications of the machine.

4-4
 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN) 4
2. Programming
The product shape and information on the simulation and the actual machining are displayed for
the program selected on the POSITION display.

[1]

[2]

[3]

D747S30014

No. Item Description

Product shape described in the program selected on the POSITION display.
Use fingers as required to operate the model displayed on the screen.
 When a MAZATROL program is selected:
3D product shape, as displayed on the PROGRAM display for the MAZATROL
[1] Product shape program.
 When an EIA/ISO program is selected:
Tool path, as drawn on the PROGRAM display for the EIA/ISO program.
Remark : See the separate PROGRAMMING MANUAL (MAZATROL program) or
PROGRAMMING MANUAL (EIA/ISO program) for more information.
Information on whether or not the program has undergone a simulation, along with the
Simulation infor- machining time obtained by the simulation.
[2] mation  : Simulation completed.
(Note)
 : Not yet simulated.
Information on whether or not the program has actually been executed on the machine,
Actual machining along with the machining time obtained by the last execution.
[3] information  : Actually executed.
(Note)
 : Not yet actually executed.

Note 1: These information items cannot be given for an EIA/ISO program.

Note 2: When the table selection function is enabled, the shape of the product on that work-
table is displayed which is selected on the TRACE display.

 See Section 5-2 for more information.

4-5
4 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN)

3. Tool data
Information is given on the tools to be used for the program selected on the POSITION display.

[1]

[2]

D747S30015

No. Item Description

List of the tools to be used for the execution of the program selected on the POSITION
display.
 Green: Tools that have been registered and have not yet reached their serviceable
[1] Tools used lives.
 Gray: Tools that have not yet been registered on the TOOL DATA display.
 Red: Tools that have reached their serviceable lives.
[2] Tool information Information on the tool selected.

Note : Tools used are not listed up in the following cases:

 The program concerned is an EIA/ISO program.
 Tools specified in an EIA/ISO program to be called as a subprogram from the
MAZATROL program concerned, or tools specified in a program to be called as a
subprogram from the EIA/ISO program concerned.
 Tools are designated by group numbers in the program concerned.

4-6
 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN) 4
4. Set up
Information is given on the setup data for the program selected on the POSITION display.

[1]

[2]

D747S30016

No. Item Description

3D graphic representation of the setup data prepared for the program selected on the
[1] Setup state POSITION display.
Use fingers as required to operate the model displayed on the screen.
List of the coordinate systems to be used for the execution of the program selected on the
POSITION display.

Coordinate  : The displayed coordinate system has been set up.

[2]
system list  : The displayed coordinate system has not yet been set up.
Remark : If zero (0) is set for all setting items of, or an item remains unset (blank) for,
the coordinate system concerned, then the system is judged to be “not yet set up.”

Note 1: Coordinate systems specified in an EIA/ISO program to be called as a subprogram

from the MAZATROL program concerned, or those specified in a program to be called
as a subprogram from the EIA/ISO program concerned, cannot be listed up.
Note 2: Coordinate system list is not displayed at all for an EIA/ISO program.

4-7
4 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN)

5. Maintenance
Information is displayed on the maintenance and inspection items managed by the NC unit.

[1]

[2]

[3]

D747S30017

No. Item Description

Periodic inspection Of the items to be inspected periodically, 3 items that need to be inspected earlier
[1]
information are displayed.
Calendar inspection Information about daily, weekly and monthly inspection items.
[2]
information
Long-term periodic Information about 1500- or 3000-hour inspection items.
[3]
inspection information

4-8
 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN) 4
4-5 Simple Monitoring
The operating states of other machines connected to the network can be checked.
Information on up to 5 machines can be displayed.

1. Display data

[1] [3]

[2]

D747S30018

No. Item Description

The progress of machining is indicated in percentage.
[1] Progress of machining
If an alarm is triggered, its number is displayed.
[2] Machine name Specified name of the machine.
Indication of operating state in different colors.
Red : Operation stopped
Yellow : Setup in progress
[3] Operating state
Blue : Automatic operation in progress
Green : In automatic operation mode
Gray : Not set or not in communication

Note : The monitoring function can only be used for machines equipped with an NC unit of the
MAZATROL Smooth series.

2. Setup for simple monitoring function

 You need to set up a network to connect the machines to be monitored and to

assign IP addresses to them.

(1) Enable the monitoring function using a parameter.

 Set bit 0 of parameter IOP4 to 1.
Note : The same setting is required for the machine to be monitored.
(2) Assign an IP address to the machine to be monitored.
(a) Tap the simple monitoring area to display a setting window.

(b) Enter the name and IP address of the machine with a screen keyboard.

4-9
4 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN)

4-6 Peripheral Software

The status of communication with the peripheral software provided by Mazak is displayed.
The Smooth Applications Manager can be started from the Process Home screen.

1. Displayed data

[2]

[1]
D749S30076

No. Item Description

[1] Communication status Status of communication with the peripheral software
Application start Used to call up the display of the peripheral software or to start the
[2]
buttons Smooth Applications Manager.

2. Display of the communication status

Color codes are used, as shown below, to indicate the status of the peripheral pieces of
application software that are installed on the NC unit: whether or not they are currently being
accessed by another PC, etc.

Image State
A state where the peripheral software or function cannot be used.

A state where the peripheral software or function can be used.

The orange indicator blinks so long as data communication is in progress.

3. Start of software
The display of the peripheral software can be called up as well as the Smooth Applications
Manager can be started from the Process Home screen.

 See Section 4-7 for a detailed description of the Smooth Applications

Manager.

4-10
 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN) 4
4-7 Smooth Applications Manager
The Smooth Applications Manager is used to call up a registered NC display and to start various
applications.

1. Displayed data

A. Normal display

[6]

[3]
[1]

[5]

[4] [2]

D749S30077

B. Display in Edit mode

[7]

D749S30078

4-11
4 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN)

C. Display data description

No. Item Description

Application start The start buttons of the registered applications are displayed by category.
[1]
buttons Tap the button to start the corresponding application.
Application start Start buttons of the applications that do not fall under any category.
[2]
buttons (general) Tap a button to start the corresponding application.
Display of the categories under which the registered applications belong.
Tap the button to alternately show and hide the start buttons of the applications
registered in the corresponding category.
[3] Category buttons
The factory-set categories are as follows:
 MACHINING  PROGRAM  TOOL DATA
 SETUP  MAINTENANCE
Used to turn on the function for consulting manuals.
[4] MANUAL button
Remark : See Subsection 4-8-1 for more information.
Used to return to the Process Home screen.
[5] Return button Note : Do not change over to the Process Home screen incautiously in Edit mode;
otherwise the current results of editing operations are canceled without previous notice.
Used to select the mode for editing, e.g. adding and reducing, the contents of the col-
[6] Edit mode button umns of category and application.
In Edit mode the application start buttons and category buttons do not function at all.
Used to edit, e.g. add and reduce, the contents of the columns of category and applica-
[7] Edit buttons
tion.

Note : APP on an NC display denotes an application.

2. Registering and editing data

Use the Smooth Applications Manager as follows to register applications required and shortcuts
to be prepared for the NC displays.

A. Registering an NC display
(1) Tap the [EDIT] button at the top of the screen.
 The Edit mode is activated with the available edit buttons presented.
(2) Tap the [ADD] button.
 The categories of items to be added are displayed.
(3) Tap the [NC SCREEN] button.
 The available NC displays are listed up.
(4) Select the desired display, and tap the [OK] button.
(5) Tap the button to be prepared as a shortcut for the selected display.

A button position available for

registering a new item

 The specified NC display is now registered.

4-12
 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN) 4
B. Registering a MAZAK application
After performing Steps (1) and (2) described in Section A above, proceed as follows:
(3) Tap the [MAZAK APP] button.
 A list of the available applications is displayed.
(4) Select the desired application, and tap the [OK] button.
(5) Tap the button to be prepared as a shortcut for the selected application.

A button position available for

registering a new item

 The specified application is now registered.

 See Section 4-8 for a description of the applications available.

C. Registering another application

After performing Steps (1) and (2) described in Section A above, proceed as follows:
(3) Tap the [USER APP] button.
 The following window appears.

[2]
[1] [3]
[4]

[5] [6]

D749S30079

No. Item Description

Graphical representation of the button to be registered as a shortcut of the
[1] Button image
selected application.
Used to specify the execution file of the desired application.
[2] [FILE] button Tap this button to open a browsing window.
An application cannot be registered unless its execution file is specified.
Used to specify the image to be displayed on the button.
[3] [IMAGE] button Tap this button to open a browsing window.
Skip this setting to use the icon prepared for the execution file as it is.
Enter the name to be displayed on the button.
[4] Name
Skip this setting if no verbal description is required.
Used to confirm the editing operations so as to generate a shortcut with the
[5] [OK] button
current properties.
[6] [CANCEL] button Used to cancel the results of the editing operations in their entirety.

4-13
4 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN)

(4) Specify the execution file of the application to be registered, the icon and the name to be
displayed on the button, and then tap the [OK] button.
Note 1: The application name can consist of up to 24 characters. It will be displayed in
three lines, the top, middle, and bottom, each containing up to 8 characters.
Note 2: Double-byte characters cannot be used.
(5) Tap the button to be prepared as a shortcut for the selected application.

A button position available for

registering a new item

 The specified application is now registered.

D. Deleting an existing button

(1) Tap the [EDIT] button at the top of the screen.
 The Edit mode is activated with the available edit buttons presented.
(2) Tap the [DELETE] button.
 The buttons ready for deletion are marked with a close symbol (x).
Marking for an item which can
be deleted

(3) Tap the application start button to be deleted.

 A message box appears.
(4) Tap the [OK] button.
 The selected application is now deleted.

E. Moving an existing button

(1) Tap the [EDIT] button at the top of the screen.
 The Edit mode is activated with the available edit buttons presented.
(2) Tap the [MOVE] button.
(3) Tap the application start button to be moved.
(4) Tap the position to which to move the button.

A button position which can be

specified as the destination of
moving

 The application start button is moved to the specified position.

4-14
 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN) 4
F. Adding a category
After performing Steps (1) and (2) described in Section A above, proceed as follows:
(3) Tap the [CATEGORY] button.
 The following window appears.

[1]

[2] [3]

D749S30080

No. Item Description

[1] Category name Name of the category to be added
Used to confirm the editing operations so as to generate a category with the
[2] [OK] button
current properties.
[3] [CANCEL] button Used to cancel the results of the editing operations in their entirety.

(4) Specify the name of the category to be added, and then tap the [OK] button.
 The new category is now added.
Note 1: Double-byte characters cannot be used.
Note 2: The category name can consist of up to 12 characters.
Note 3: A new category is always added in the bottommost position.

G. Deleting an existing category

(1) Tap the [EDIT] button at the top of the screen.
 The Edit mode is activated with the available edit buttons presented.
(2) Tap the [DELETE] button.
 The buttons ready for deletion are marked with a close symbol (x).

Marking for an item which can

be deleted

Note : It is not possible to delete a category under which there is any application provided.
Clear the desired category, therefore, of all applications beforehand to delete it.
(3) Tap the category button to be deleted.
 A message box appears.
(4) Tap the [OK] button.
 The selected category is now deleted.

4-15
4 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN)

3. Precautions
 The Smooth Applications Manager is not designed to guarantee normal operation of user-
defined applications. Check to see if the registered application works normally.
 Deletion of an application by the Smooth Applications Manager does not include its un-
installation.
 Up to 49 applications (7 rows by 7 columns) can be registered under each category, and the
total number of registered applications can amount to 100.
 Up to 100 categories can be registered.

4-8 Applications Available

This section describes various applications that can be started through the Smooth Applications
Manager.

4-8-1 Function for consulting manuals

The Smooth Applications Manager can be used to display various manuals provided for the
machine tool. Tap the MANUAL button to display the Start page concerned and then select the
desired manual.

1. Displayed data

A. Start page
The home page of the function for consulting manuals is as follows.
[1]
[2]
[3]

[5]
[4]

D749S30081
Note : The contents of the Start page depend upon the specifications of the machine.

4-16
 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN) 4
B. Document page
The following page is displayed when a PDF file is selected.
[1]
[2]
[3]

[6]

[7]

[8]
D749S30082

No. Item Description

[1] Menu bar Used to display the [File], [View], [Tool] and [Help] menus.
Display of various tool buttons
[2] Tool bar
Remark : A detailed description is given below under 2.
Display of the tab for returning to the start page (Start Page) and those for displaying
the PDF files currently selected. The name of the currently active PDF file is displayed
in this area.
[3] Tab bar
The desired PDF file can be displayed by tapping the corresponding tab.
Depending on the number of the PDF files selected, their tabs are displayed on multi-
ple stages.
Language field with a The currently selected language of the manuals.
[4]
dropdown menu Open the dropdown menu and select the desired language.
Tap a button to display the PDF file of the corresponding manual with a new tab
[5] Manual buttons
provided in the tab bar.
Tap a bookmark or a thumbnail to display the corresponding page of the PDF file in
the document pane.
Bookmark/Thumbnail
[6]  Tap the button to display bookmarks in this pane.
pane
 Tap the button to display thumbnails in this pane.
[7] Document pane Display of the contents of the currently active PDF file.
[8] Page Number of the page currently displayed and total number of pages of the PDF file.

4-17
4 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN)

2. Tool buttons

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]

D747S30221

No. Item Description

[1] Open tool Used to open a PDF file.
[2] Find tool Used to search the currently displayed PDF file for a specific character string.
[3] Hand tool Used to pan around the displayed page.
[4] Select text tool Used to select a text of the currently displayed PDF file.
[5] Fit Page tool Used to fit one PDF page entirely in the document pane.
[6] Fit Width tool Used to fit the displayed PDF page in the document pane horizontally.
[7] Zoom In tool Used to enlarge the displayed document.
[8] Zoom Out tool Used to reduce the displayed document.
[9] Previous Page tool Used to display the previous page.
[10] First Page tool Used to display the first page.
[11] Go To tool Used to display a dialogue box for jumping to the desired page.
[12] Next Page tool Used to display the next page.
[13] Last Page tool Used to display the last page.
[14] Screen Keyboard tool Used to display a screen keyboard.
Used to alternately select and deselect the [Topmost Window] option.

[15] Topmost Window tool  (button in orange) indicates that the option is selected.

 (button grayed out) indicates that the option is deselected.

3. Operational procedure

A. Displaying manual data

(1) Tap the button of the desired manual on the Start page.
 The specified manual is displayed with a new tab provided in the tab bar.
Note : Tapping a manual button may open a submenu in some cases. If so, tap the cor-
responding option in the submenu to display the desired manual in a new tab.

Submenu

4-18
 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN) 4
B. Opening a PDF file

(1) Tap in the tool bar, or tap [File] in the menu bar and then [Open…].
 A dialogue box for file selection appears on the screen.
(2) Select the desired PDF file.
(3) Tap the [Open] button to display the PDF file in a new tab.
Note : Alternately, use the Explorer to find the desired PDF file, and double tap the file to
display its contents in a new tab.

C. Closing a tab
(1) Double tap the tab to be closed.
 A popup menu is displayed with the [Close] option in it.

(2) Select [Close].

D. Moving from one page to another

Slide a finger on the document to move it gradually, or follow the procedure below to jump to the
desired page.

(1) Tap in the tool bar, or tap [View] in the menu bar, and then tap [Go To] and [Page] in
that order.
 The Page dialogue box appears on the screen together with a screen keyboard.

(2) In the Page Number field, enter the number of the page to be displayed using the screen
keyboard.
(3) Tap the [OK] button to jump to the specified page.

4-19
4 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN)

E. Searching for a text

(1) Tap in the tool bar, or tap [File] in the menu bar and then [Find…].
 The Find dialogue box appears on the screen together with a screen keyboard.

(2) In the Search Text field, enter the character string to be searched for using the screen
keyboard.
(3) Tap the [Find] button to start searching.

F. Displaying manuals on top of the other windows

(1) Tap (the grayed out icon) in the tool bar, or tap [View] in the menu bar, and then tap
[Topmost Window].

 The Topmost Window button in the tool bar is highlighted in orange ( ), as well as a
check mark is assigned to the [Topmost Window] option, and the manual data will
always be displayed in the topmost window.

Note : The above option is always deselected when the function for consulting manuals is
exited.

4-20
 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN) 4
4-8-2 Control of access to MAZAK API
MAZAK API (optional) is an interface provided to enable data communication between the NC
unit and an application program (hereinafter referred to as [external] APP) prepared by the
customer.
This subsection describes how to control access by the external APPs to the NC unit through
MAZAK API.
Register the application for access control beforehand using the Smooth Applications Manager.

 See Section 4-7, 2-B “Registering a MAZAK application” for the registration
procedure.

1. Displayed data

A. MAZAK API Security level selection window (When a security level is not selected)

[2]

[3]
[1]

[4] [5]

B. MAZAK API Security level selection window (When a security level is selected)

[2]

[6]
[1]

[4] [5]

4-21
4 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN)

C. Access authorization list window

[7] [8]

[4] [5] [9]

2. Display data description

No. Item Description

Used to select a security level from among HIGH (recommended), MEDium and
[1] Security level column
LOW.
Icon for the Access Used to display the Access authorization list window.
[2]
authorization list window
[3] Security notice column Indicates that no external APPs can be connected to the MAZAK API.
[4] Apply button Used to save registered or changed data.
[5] Cancel button Used to cancel a registration of, or changes to, data.
 Indicates the external APPs that are currently connected to the MAZAK API.
(Up to 5 external APPs can be connected at the same time.)
Connected software name
[6]
column  The name of an external APP is displayed as it is when the security level is
set to HIGH or MED. The external APP is displayed as Unknown software if
its security level is set to LOW.
Used to enter the name of external APPs that you give access to the MAZAK
[7] Software name entry field
API.
Used to set the password for connecting the external APP to the MAZAK API.
[8] Password entry field
Once registered, the password is masked behind asterisks ().
Used to change pages of the access authorization list.
[9] Page buttons
Tap and to display the previous and the next page, respectively.

4-22
 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN) 4
3. Setting a security level
According to the desired level, follow the procedures below to set a security level for the external
APPs. Note that the recommended security level is HIGH.

A. Setting the security level to HIGH

(1) Tap the HIGH security level button.

(2) Tap the icon for the Access authorization list window.

 The Access authorization list window appears on the screen.

Note : If the “Access authorization list” has already been set, jump to Step (7).
(3) Tap a Software name entry box and enter the name of the desired external APP.

Note 1: Up to 32 characters can be entered for an external APP name.

Do not use double-byte (two-byte) characters.
Note 2: Enter correctly the name of the external APP to be used through the MAZAK API.
If the name specified on the external APP does not agree with the name entered,
the APP cannot be used through the MAZAK API.
(4) Tap the corresponding Password entry box and enter an arbitrary password.

Note 1: Up to 32 characters can be entered for a password.

Do not use double-byte (two-byte) characters.
Note 2: Do not fail to set the same password correctly for the external APP; otherwise the
APP cannot access the MAZAK API.

4-23
4 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN)

(5) Tap the apply button in the Access authorization list window.
 The following dialogue box (Security notice) is displayed.

(6) Tap the apply button in the Security notice dialogue box.
 The Access authorization list window closes and the data entered take effect.
 Once the data entered in the Access authorization list window have taken effect, all
the characters entered in the Password entry field are masked behind asterisks ().
 Tap the cancel button to cancel the data entered and to return to the Access
authorization list window.
(7) Finally tap the apply button in the MAZAK API Security level selection window.
 The MAZAK API Security level selection window closes and all the changes take ef-
fect.
Note : The Security notice dialogue box appears on the screen if the apply button
in the MAZAK API Security level selection window is tapped without the
“Access authorization list” being set. Perform settings as required.

 If the apply button in the Security notice dialogue box is tapped, the MAZAK API
Security level selection window closes and the change to the security level takes effect,
but the external APP cannot access the Mazak API.
 Tap the cancel button in the Security notice dialogue box to return to the MAZAK
API Security level selection window.

B. Setting the security level to MED or LOW

(1) Tap the MED or LOW security level button.

(2) Finally tap the apply button in the MAZAK API Security level selection window.
 The MAZAK API Security level selection window closes and the change takes effect.

4-24
 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN) 4
Note : If the security level is to be lowered, the Security notice dialogue box shown below
appears on the screen.
 Tap the apply button in the Security notice dialogue box to confirm the change
and to exit the MAZAK API Security level selection window.
 Tap the cancel button in the Security notice dialogue box to cancel the change
and to return to the MAZAK API Security level selection window.

4. Exiting the MAZAK API Security level selection window

 Tap the apply button in the MAZAK API Security level selection window.
 The change in security level takes effect and the window closes.
 Tap the cancel button in the MAZAK API Security level selection window.
 The change in security level is canceled and the window closes.
Note : The Security notice dialogue box shown below appears on the screen if the security
level is to be lowered by tapping the apply button or if the cancel button is
tapped.

 Tap the apply button in the Security notice dialogue box to confirm the change
and to exit the MAZAK API Security level selection window.
 Tap the cancel button in the Security notice dialogue box to cancel the change
and to return to the MAZAK API Security level selection window.

4-25
4 STARTING & SHUTTING DOWN THE NC (PROCESS HOME SCREEN)

4-9 Turning Off the NC Unit

 Do not touch the switches with wet hands.

DANGER

 Do not turn power off during spindle rotation or axis movement. Failure to observe this
instruction may result in machine damage due to collision, or personal injury due to flyout
of the workpiece.
CAUTION
 If power is to be left turned off for three months or more in succession, copy the NC-stored
parameters and other data beforehand to provide against possible data loss.

(1) Make sure that neither spindle rotation nor axis movement is in progress (program operation,
input/output with external devices, etc.).
(2) Select the manual operation mode and return the machine to its zero point or move the
turret to a safe position.

(3) Tap the button in the upper left corner of the NC screen to call up the Process
Home screen.

(4) Tap the button in the lower left corner of the NC screen.

(5) Tap the button which will appear next.

(6) Tap the [OK] button in the resulting confirmation dialog box.
(7) Set the main power breaker to “OFF” position after the display on the screen and the logo
on the top of the operating panel have disappeared.
Note : If the main power breaker is turned off before the logo on the top of the operating
panel disappears, normal NC function is not guaranteed. It takes maximum one
minute until the logo disappears.
(8) Switch off the factory power supply.

 If the machine features the automatic power off function (option), refer to the
separately provided specifications for options.

4-26 E
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

5-1 POSITION Display

This display shows various types of information about the operational status of the machine and the
Function
workpiece-machining status.

When the POSITION display is selected, the various functions required for manual operation or automatic
Remarks operation will be displayed at the menu display area. The usage of each such menu is described in
chapters related to manual operation and automatic operation.

5-1-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

A. Displayed data with the [COMMAND] menu function deactivated

[26]
[1]
[13]
[2] [3]
[4] [25]

([14])
[15]

[16] [17]

[5]

[6] [7] [8]

[9]
[12] [10]
[11]

D747S30019’E

5-1
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

B. Displayed data with the [COMMAND] menu function activated

[26]

[25]

[18] [20] [22]

[24]

[19] [21] [23]

D747S30020’E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Work number and Name of the program being executed
WNo. a b c
( a’ b’ ) ( c’ )
a a’: Work number
[1] WNo. —
b b’: Identification of MAZATROL program or EIA/ISO program
c c’: Program name
* Items a’, b’, and c’ are displayed only during execution of a sub-
program.
UNo. Number of the unit/tool sequence/block being executed
[2] SNo. — Remark : “UNo.” is not displayed for an EIA/ISO program.
BNo.
Actual quantity of machined workpieces and the preset number of
workpieces to be machined (Parts count)
[3] COUNTER Pieces COUNTER a (b)
a: Actual quantity of machined workpieces
b: Preset number of workpieces to be machined
[4] TIME H : M’ S” Cumulative time of automatic machining operation
mm (in) Current position of the tool tip on each axis in the workpiece coordinate
[5] POSITION X, Y, Z, A, C
degrees system

5-2
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
No. Item Unit Data description
 Number and name of the tool currently mounted on the spindle
 If an eight-digit T-command code is set, the number of the tool being
used will be displayed at TNo. The group number will be displayed in
parentheses in that case.
[6] TNo. — TNo. a
( b )
a: Number of the tool currently mounted on the spindle
b: Name of the tool currently mounted on the spindle
(or group number for an eight-digit T-code format)
 Number and name of the standby tool
 If an eight-digit T-command code is set, the number of the tool to be
used will be displayed at TNo. The group number will be displayed in
parentheses in that case.
[7] TNo. — TNo. a
( b )
a: Number of the standby tool
b: Name of the standby tool
(or group number for an eight-digit T-code format)
Number of the indexed magazine pocket and name of the tool
PKNo. a
[8] PKNo. — ( b )
a: Number of the indexed magazine pocket
b: Name of the tool
[9] UNIT — Name of the program unit currently being executed
Number and amount of tool offsetting
T-OFFSET D# ( a ) b
H# ( a’ ) X
Y c
[10] T-OFFSET — Z
a : Offset number for tool radius compensation
a’ : Offset number for tool length compensation
b : Amount of tool radius compensation
c : Amount of tool length compensation on the X-, Y- and Z-axis
Actual diameter of the tool being used.
[11] ACT- mm (in) * Zero (0) is displayed for a tool type which has not the corresponding
setting item provided on the TOOL DATA display.
[12] — — Graphic presentation of the tool being mounted on the spindle
 Display of modal information
MODAL
[13] —  Title and data of G-codes which belong to group 15 and 20 are not
S, F, M, B, G
displayed.
[14] ( ) — Selected spindle gear number
min–1 Number of revolutions per minute of the spindle
M. SPDL
[15] m/min
T. SPDL Surface speed (Cutting speed) for the spindle
(ft/min)
mm/min
Current rate of feed per minute
(in/min)
[16] FEED mm/rev
Current rate of feed per revolution
(in/rev)
°/min Rate of feed of the rotational axis
[17] LOAD % Load status of each axis
mm (in) Current position of the tool tip on each axis in the workpiece coordinate
[18] POSITION X, Y, Z, A, C
degrees system
mm (in)
[19] MACHINE X, Y, Z, A, C Current position of the machine in the machine coordinate system
degrees
mm (in)
[20] BUFFER X, Y, Z, A, C Moving distance of each axis in the next block to be executed
degrees

5-3
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

No. Item Unit Data description

mm (in) The remaining distance of movement of each axis that exists in the
[21] REMAIN X, Y, Z, A, C
degrees block currently being executed
NEXT COMMAND
[22] — G-, M-, T- and B-codes preset in the next block to be executed
G, M, T, B
mm (in)
[23] WPC X, Y, Z, A, C Workpiece zero-point position in the machine coordinate system
degrees
Display of modal information on the group 00 of G-code while there are
[24] — —
remaining movement distances (REMAIN) to be covered.
Display of the number of the currently selected SMC data set.
No indication is made if the selection concerned is not yet done.
[25] SMC data No. —
Example : If SMC data set No. 3 is currently selected

Used to quickly change over to a display of the foreground program

data.
 In the case of a MAZATROL program, the PROGRAM display is
called up on the screen with that unit or tool sequence being
[26] Direct jump button —
highlighted (marked with the cursor) the execution of which has been
interrupted.
 In the case of an EIA/ISO program, the EIA MONITOR display is
called up.

Note 1: The items displayed depend on the specifications of the machine.

Note 2: The data items [20] BUFFER and [22] NEXT COMMAND are not displayed for the block
succeeding such blocks as follows:
 Block including G28 or G30
 Block consisting of EOB (End of Block) code only
During execution of a MAZATROL program, the data items are not displayed when the
internal control commands are equivalent to the commands above.
Note 3: Commands which do not exist in the program can be displayed for outer corner
machining with tool radius compensation, etc. because a connecting tool path is auto-
inserted.
Note 4: The POSITION [18], BUFFER [20], and REMAIN [21] distances, whose standard display
refers to the machine coordinate system (composed of orthogonal axes of mechanical
motion), can be given in values of the programming coordinate system (established in
accordance with the angular positions of the A- and C-axes) by setting bit 1, 2, and 3 of
parameter SU153 to “1,” respectively.
Note 5: The following commands are not displayed in the NEXT COMMAND column:
M90, M91, M92, M93, M98, M99
Note 6: Tap and [View] and then use the [SP Load Short-time Rating] option to select
whether to display the spindle’s load meter [17] with reference to the short-time (inter-
mittent) rating or continuous rating. Assign a check mark to the option for display with
reference to the short-time (intermittent) rating.
Note 7: The tool length compensation amounts displayed as [10] T-OFFSET represent either
the compensation amount setting (on the TOOL OFFSET display) alone, or as inte-
grated with the tool length setting on the TOOL DATA display, according as bit 4 of
parameter F170 is set to “0” or “1.”

5-4
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
5-1-2 Data registration
On the POSITION display, the following data can be registered:

1. Parts count

A. Number of machined workpieces (a, item [3])

After machining, the total number of machined workpieces will be calculated and displayed at a
of item [3], if “1” (counting valid) is set in the NUMBER item of the end unit in the program.

B. Target number of workpieces to be machined (b, item [3])

This value is used for quantitative restriction of workpieces to be machined.
When the total number of machined workpieces reaches the value set here, the machine will
stop.
(1) Place the cursor on the COUNTER data item.

COUNTER 5 ( 10)
 
a b

 To change the number of machined workpieces, move the cursor to position a.

 To set the target number of workpieces to be machined, move the cursor to position b.
(2) Set new data using a screen keyboard.

2. Counter setting
The area on the screen where the coordinates of the various axes are displayed is referred to as
counter, and modification of the coordinates displayed on the counter is referred to as counter
setting.
During the manual operation mode, the coordinates of each axis displayed on the current
position counter, item [5], can be freely changed as required.
(1) Select the manual operation mode.
(2) Place the cursor on the coordinate data to be changed.

X 0.
Y 0.
Z 0.
A 0.
C 0.

(3) Set new coordinate data.

3. Setting SMC data

The desired set of SMC data can be set for actual machining operation.

 See Section 5-7 for more information.

5-5
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

5-1-3 Display operations

1. Work number selection

Follow the procedure below to set the work number of a program to be executed in the automatic
mode of operation.
(1) Tap the [WORK No.] menu item, or tap directly the WNo. item on the screen.
 The work number listing window (named WORK No. SELECT) appears on the screen.
(2) Set a work number.
 The work number of the program to be run in automatic operation will be selected.

2. Command display
MACHINE positions and WPC information (on the workpiece zero point) can be displayed.

 See the relevant items in Subsection 5-1-1 above for further details.

(1) Tap the [COMMAND] menu item.

 The menu function is activated and “commands” are displayed.
 Tapping the menu item once again deactivates the menu function and creates the
normal display.

3. Shape drawing
The shape data in the selected program can be displayed in the window.

 See Subsection 2-3-2 “Windows list” for further details.

4. [SP Load Short-time Rating] option

Follow the procedure below to select whether to display the spindle’s load meter with reference
to the short-time (intermittent) rating or continuous rating.
(1) Tap , [View] and the [SP Load Short-time Rating] option in that order.
 A check mark is assigned to the option and the load meter concerned is displayed with
reference to the short-time (intermittent) rating.
Note 1: The available types of short-time (intermittent) rating depend on the specifications of
the machine.
Note 2: An attempt to select the [SP Load Short-time Rating] option during automatic opera-
tion can only cause the alarm 428 MEMORY PROTECT (AUTO OPERATION).
Note 3: The spindle load values (in %) on the other displays concerned, e.g. MACHINING -
MONITORING display, change according to the reference rating selected on the
POSITION display.
Note 4: In order to use the AFC function correctly, do not fail to change the HORSE PW setting
(an item on the TOOL DATA display) as required according to the reference rating
selected.

5-6
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
5. Changing the format of viewing the spindle load
Follow the procedure below to change the format of viewing the spindle load.
(1) Select the load display area by tapping.
 A menu for spindle selection is displayed.
 The menu items displayed depend on the specifications of the machine.
M. SPDL

(2) Tap the [M. SPDL] menu item.

 Graphical format is selected for the load meter of the spindle.
 Tap the same menu item anew to retrieve the normal viewing format.

Display
example

Red solid line: Spindle output curve with reference to intermittent (40%ED) rating.
Green solid line: Spindle output curve with reference to continuous rating.
Red broken line: Drawn for the intermittent (40%ED) rating’s maximum output and its 50%.
Green broken line: Drawn for the continuous rating’s maximum output and its 50%.
Description White disk: Displayed to show the current spindle speed and the current output, as
calculated from the load value. (Updated at intervals of 3 seconds)
A distinction in colors is made as follows:
White: for an output < 100%.
Yellow: for an output  100% and < 120%.
Red: for an output  120%.

Note 1: The output value may not be displayed correctly for a while after a change for the other
reference rating by using the [SP Load Short-time Rating] option displayed by
tapping and [View].
Note 2: Solid and broken lines in red refer to a rating type other than the above (according to
the specifications of the machine) when the display of spindle output curve with refer-
ence to 40%ED rating is made invalid (parameter F159 bit 4 = 0) or when the [SP Load
Short-time Rating] option (displayed by tapping and [View]) is selected.
Note 3: The display of the output value can only be made when the current spindle speed falls
within the range provided for the output curve.
Note 4: The scale of the vertical axis (output) and the horizontal axis (spindle speed) is deter-
mined according to the specification of the spindle.
Note 5: Depending upon the spindle execution, the display of spindle output curve is auto-
matically changed according to the selected gear number.

5-7
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

6. Direct jump function

The direct jump button is useful when it is desired, after an interruption of automatic oper-
ation due to resetting or a power failure, to quickly check, and for the restart operation to edit, the
program data at the position of interruption.
(1) Tap the button.
 In the case of a MAZATROL program, the PROGRAM display is called up on the screen
with that unit or tool sequence being highlighted (marked with the cursor) the execution
of which has been interrupted.
 In the case of an EIA/ISO program, the EIA MONITOR display is called up.
 After checking and editing the program data at the interruption position, restart operation
can be introduced from that position of the program.

 For details, refer to Part 4, Subsection 1-2-2 “Restart operation/Smooth

restart operation.”

Note 1: Current information on the interruption will be deleted by the following operations.

 Pressing the button,

 Replacing the foreground program with another one on the POSITION display,
 Renumbering (Renaming) the program concerned on the PROGRAM FILE display,
 Deleting the program concerned on the PROGRAM FILE display,
 Moving the program concerned through the PROGRAM FILE display to another
storage area, or
 Overwriting the program concerned on the DATA I/O display.
Note 2: As for a MAZATROL program, if the program layout has been changed in the mean-
time, then the PROGRAM display can only be called up by tapping the button in
its initial state (with the first unit being marked with the cursor). The operations that
cause the program layout to change are as follows.
(a) Performing one of the following operations on the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display
 Changing the priority number setting
 Enabling Control Out
 Tapping the [PROGRAM COPY] menu item
 Tapping the [UNIT COPY] menu item
 Tapping the [MULTIPLE UNIT COPY] menu item
 Tapping the [ERASE] menu item
 Tapping the [INSERT] menu item
 Tapping the [PRI. No. CHANGE] menu item
 Tapping the [PRI. No. ASSIGN] menu item
 Tapping the [PRI. No. ALL ERAS] menu item
 Tapping the [DELAY PRIORITY] menu item
 Tapping the [SUB PROG PROC END] menu item
(b) Executing the [PROGRAM WRITE] menu function on the PROGRAM LAYOUT dis-
play

5-8
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
5-1-4 Custom display

1. Custom display area

The POSITION display consists of three display areas as shown below. Two areas in the right
half, initially displaying modal information and load meter, can be used freely by the customer to
view information on various items.
[2
]

[3]

[1]

[4]

[5]

No. Contents Description

[1] Common display area Positional information in coordinates, tool information, etc.
Title of the information items displayed in the upper half of Custom display
[2] Title of Custom display area 1
area.
Information items of the type selected by the customer.
[3] Custom display area 1
* The default state is of modal information (MODAL).
Title of the information items displayed in the lower half of Custom display
[4] Title of Custom display area 2
area.
Information items of the type selected by the customer.
[5] Custom display area 2
* The default state is of load information (LOADMETER).

The information types selectable for the custom display area are as follows.
No. Title Description
1 MODAL Display of modal information (Default state of Custom display area 1)
2 LOADMETER Display of load information (Default state of Custom display area 2)
3 MODAL/LOAD Compact display of MODAL [1] and LOADMETER [2] in a single column
4 PROGRAM MONITOR Display of program contents
5 EIA MONITOR Display of the information given on the EIA MONITOR display
6 TRACE Display of the information given on the TRACE display
7 TOOL DATA Display of the information given on the TOOL DATA display
8 TOOL OFFSET Display of the information given on the TOOL OFFSET display
9 WORK OFFSET Display of the information given on the WORK OFFSET display
10 MACRO VARIABLE Display of the information given on the MACRO VARIABLE display
11 3D MONITOR Display of the information given on the 3D MONITOR display
12 MAZA-CHECK Used to select a measurement pattern of the MAZA-CHECK function.

Note : The available items depend on the specifications of the machine.

5-9
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

Select a custom display area (the title of which is provided with a tab mark) by tapping to perform
data settings as required.
The fixed display area in the left half is selected (active) in the initial state.
(1) Tap Custom display area 1.
 Custom display area 1, if selectable, is selected (made active) with its title and frame
being highlighted in light blue.

(2) Tap Custom display area 2.

 Custom display area 2, if selectable, is then selected (made active) with its title and
frame being highlighted in light blue.

(3) Tap anywhere outside Custom display area 2.

 The selection of Custom display area 2 is canceled.

5-10
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
2. Changing the contents of custom display areas

A. Changing the display contents by selecting from a list

(1) Tap anywhere on the common display area.
 The following submenu is displayed.

DEFAULT SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING USER SET DISPLAY DISPLAY
1 2 3 4 5 REGIST SELECT 1 SELECT 2

(2) According as the change of contents is required for Custom display area 1 or 2, tap the
[DISPLAY SELECT 1] or [DISPLAY SELECT 2] menu item.
 The DISPLAY SELECT window appears.

(3) Select the desired item by tapping and tap the [OK] button.
 The contents of the custom display area concerned are changed accordingly.
Note : One and the same type of information cannot be selected for both custom display
areas. Such an erroneous selection will only cause an alarm (459 DISPLAY PRO-
TECT).

B. Registering the current combination of custom display contents

(1) Tap anywhere on the common display area.
 The following submenu is displayed.
DEFAULT SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING USER SET DISPLAY DISPLAY
1 2 3 4 5 REGIST SELECT 1 SELECT 2

(2) Tap the [USER SET REGIST] menu item.

 The contents of the menu is changed as follows.

SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING USER SET

1 2 3 4 5 REGIST

(3) Choose one from among the [SETTING 1] to [SETTING 5] menu items by tapping to
register the current combination of custom display contents.
 The current combination of custom display contents is registered and can be restored
next time simply by selecting the menu item in question.

5-11
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

C. Changing the display contents by selecting from the registered combinations

(1) Tap anywhere on the common display area.
 The following submenu is displayed.
DEFAULT SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING USER SET DISPLAY DISPLAY
1 2 3 4 5 REGIST SELECT 1 SELECT 2

(2) Choose the desired one from among the [SETTING 1] to [SETTING 5] menu items by
tapping.
 The contents of Custom display areas 1 and 2 are changed according to the selected
one of the registered combinations.

D. Renaming the menu items for the registration

The menu items for the above-mentioned registration ([SETTING 1] to [SETTING 5]) can be re-
named, by creating a setting file, so as to characterize the combinations.
DEFAULT SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING USER SET DISPLAY DISPLAY
1 2 3 4 5 REGIST SELECT 1 SELECT 2
1 2 3 4 5

Follow the procedure below to rename the menu items by editing the text file “CustomDisplay.txt”
in the “C:\ymw\M8Y\data\nm64mdata\eng” folder.
(1) Open “CustomDisplay.txt” using a text editor such as Notepad.
(2) Edit the file in the required format and save it properly.
<Format>

[UserSetting- ] [1]
CustomName= [2]

No. Item Data description

[1] [UserSetting- ] Specify the number of the menu item to be renamed.
SETTING 1 to 5: 1 to 5
[2] CustomName=  Specify the item name to display in the menu.
An item name consists of up to 24 characters. It will be displayed in three lines,
the top, middle, and bottom, each containing up to 8 characters.
 Double-byte characters cannot be used.

(3) Turn the NC off temporarily and then turn it back on.
 The menu items are renamed as specified.
<Setting example>
If the “CustomDisplay.txt” file is edited as follows:
[UserSetting-1] To rename the [SETTING 1] menu item.
CustomName= SET UP To replace SETTING 1 with SET UP.

[UserSetting-2] To rename the [SETTING 2] menu item.

CustomName= SETTING 2 will not be changed in default of specification.

[UserSetting-3] To rename the [SETTING 3] menu item.

CustomName= MAZ PROG To replace SETTING 3 with MAZ PROG.

The menu in question will be displayed as follows (after the NC is ‘turned’ on):

DEFAULT SET UP SETTING MAZ SETTING SETTING USER SET DISPLAY DISPLAY
2 PROG 4 5 REGIST SELECT 1 SELECT 2

5-12
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
Note : “eng” in the folder name (C:\ymw\M8Y\data\nm64mdata\eng) corresponds with the
language currently selected for the display mode.

E. Restoring the default display

(1) Tap anywhere on the common display area.
 The following submenu is displayed.
DEFAULT SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING USER SET DISPLAY DISPLAY
1 2 3 4 5 REGIST SELECT 1 SELECT 2

(2) Tap the [DEFAULT] menu item.

 The contents of Custom display areas 1 and 2 are replaced respectively with modal
information and load information (MODAL and LOADMETER).

3. PROGRAM MONITOR
The contents of the currently selected program are displayed.

A. Display operations

COMMENT

<Menu functions>
1. COMMENT
Used to select whether or not to display the contents of the comment unit in a MAZATROL
program.

 The display contents are the same as those of the PROGRAM MONITOR
window. See Subsection 2-3-2 for more information.

Note 1: With <PROGRAM MONITOR> being shown in a custom display area, do not open the
PROGRAM MONITOR window; otherwise an alarm will be caused (459 DISPLAY
PROTECT).
Note 2: Even when the PROGRAM MONITOR window is shown on the screen, an attempt to
select PROGRAM MONITOR for a custom display area is successful (the window is
automatically closed).

5-13
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

4. EIA MONITOR
The display contents correspond to the information given on the EIA MONITOR display.

A. Displayed data

[2] [1]

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Data of the EIA/ISO program.
[1] EIA/ISO program —
The currently active block is highlighted.
[2] Line number — Serial numbers of the respective lines (blocks)

C. Display operations

PROG PROG SEARCH SEARCH SEARCH RESTART2 EIA

UP DOWN
HEAD END LINE No. NONMODAL MONITOR
 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

<Menu functions>
1. PROG HEAD
Used to search for the top line of the program.
2. PROG END
Used to search for the bottom line of the program.
3. SEARCH LINE No.
Used to search for any required line of the program.
4. SEARCH UP 
Used to search for any character string in the area before the cursor position.
5. SEARCH DOWN 
Used to search for any character string in the area after the cursor position.
6. RESTART2 NONMODAL
Used to restart the programmed operation by the particular menu function.
7. EIA MONITOR
Used to change over to the EIA MONITOR display.

 See Section 5-3 for a detailed description of display operations.

5-14
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
5. TRACE
The display contents correspond to the information given on the TRACE display.

A. Data display

[2]

[1]

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Machining shape that has been defined by the program.
The machining shape is displayed with a pink line, the workpiece with a
(Shape) —
green line, and the chuck, the jaw and the axis of rotation of the turning
[1] spindle with a light blue line.
Path of the tool tip. (The path of the tool tip is displayed with a white line,
(Tool path) —
and the tool tip itself is displayed with a▼ mark.)
0 Scale value of graphics. (Automatically determined for a MAZATROL
[2] mm (in)
program according to the machining shape)

C. Display operations
<2D display mode>
PATH PART SHAPE PLANE SCALE TRACE
ERASE SHAPE ERASE CHANGE CHANGE

1 2 3 4 5 6 12

<3D display mode>

ZOOM TO SELECT PATH SECTION WPC ON XY PLANE YZ PLANE ZX PLANE TRACE
FIT TABLE ERASE

7 8 1 9 10 11 11 11 6 12

<Menu functions>
1. PATH ERASE
Used to erase the path of the tool tip.
2. PART SHAPE
Used to display the programmed machining shape.
3. SHAPE ERASE
Used to erase the machining shape drawn by the [PART SHAPE] menu function.
4. PLANE CHANGE
Used to select the plane on which the machining shape is to be displayed.

5-15
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

5. SCALE CHANGE
Used to display the machining shape in enlarged or reduced size.

6. (Mode selection between 2D and 3D)

Used to change the display mode between 2D and 3D.
7. ZOOM TO FIT
Used to fit the graphic entirely in the display area, without changing its attitude (the point of
view).
8. SELECT TABLE
Used to select the worktable to be displayed in the 3D display mode.
9. SECTION
Used to select and deselect the sectional view.
10. WPC ON
Used to show and hide the coordinate system.
11. XY/YZ/ZX PLANE
Used to change the viewing direction by selecting a plane perpendicular to it.
12. TRACE
Used to change over to the TRACE display.

 See Section 5-2 for a detailed description of display operations.

D. Remarks
1. With <TRACE> being shown in a custom display area, do not open the PART SHAPE
window; otherwise an alarm will be caused (459 DISPLAY PROTECT).
2. Changing the POSITION display to another or replacing the Custom display area <TRACE>
with another information type always cancels the current results from the view-modifying
operations done with the PLANE CHANGE and SCALE CHANGE menu functions.
3. Scale value is not displayed in the 3D display mode.
4. Activation of the [PART SHAPE] menu function for an EIA/ISO program is rejected with an
alarm (465 EIA SHAPE DATA NOT FOUND) unless the program is created by the
(optional) function for converting a MAZATROL program into the EIA/ISO format and,
moreover, has shape data additionally provided in parentheses.

5-16
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
6. TOOL DATA
The display contents correspond to the information given on the TOOL DATA display.

A. Displayed data
<In tool-name display mode>
Display format for TOOL LENGTH INPUT Display format for COMP INPUT

[9] [9]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [1] [2] [3] [4] [7]

[8] [8]

<In group-number display mode>

Display format for TOOL LENGTH INPUT Display format for COMP INPUT
[9] [9]
[1] [10] [5] [6] [1] [10] [7]

[8] [8]

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Tool number
[1] TNo. —
TNo. of the tool mouned on the spindle is highlighted in blue.
[2] TOOL — Tool name
[3] NOM- mm (in) Nominal diameter of the tool
[4] ID code — Suffix (Code that identifies tools of the same nominal diameter)
[5] LENGTH mm (in) Length of the tool
[6] ACT- mm (in) Actual diameter of the tool
LENG COMP.
F166 bit 1 = 0: Cutting-end position compensation value (LENG COMP.)
[7] or mm (in)
WEAR COMP. F166 bit 1 = 1: Wear compensation amounts (WEAR COMP.)

Number of the page currently displayed and the total number of pages
a/b
[8] Page —
a: Number of the page currently displayed
b: Total number of pages
Used to change the display mode between tool-name display and group-
Display mode
[9] — number display.
select button
Presented only when bit 0 of parameter US3 is set to “1.”
[10] GROUP No. — Group number, as set on the TOOL DATA display.

5-17
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

C. Display operations

TOOL COMP INCH TOOL

LENGTH
INPUT INPUT MODE DATA

1 2 3 4

<Menu functions>
1. TOOL LENGTH INPUT
Used to select the display format convenient for inputting tool length data.
2. COMP INPUT
Used to select the display format convenient for inputting compensation data.
3. INCH MODE (or METRIC MODE)
Used to change the measuring units between metric and inch for the display as well as data
input.
Remark : This item is only provided for the (optional) inch/metric unit system change
simplifying function.
4. TOOL DATA
Used to change over to the TOOL DATA display.

 See Section 8-1 for a detailed description of display operations.

D. Data input
Various data items can be set from this area.

 See Section 8-1 for a detailed description of data setting procedure.

E. Remarks
1. The display format/page can only be changed with the title bar being selected.
2. The area is dependent upon selection or cancellation of the [Wear Comp. Incremental
First] option (displayed by tapping and [Setup]) on the TOOL DATA display.
3. The area is dependent upon selection or cancellation of the [Display Current Tool first]
option (displayed by tapping and [Setup]) on the TOOL DATA display.
4. Selection of [INCH MODE] or [METRIC MODE] for this area has the same effect on the
<TOOL OFFSET> area (but no influence at all on the other Custom display areas).

5-18
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
7. TOOL OFFSET
The display contents correspond to the information given on the TOOL OFFSET display.

A. Displayed data

[1] [2]

[3]

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] No. — Tool offset number
[2] OFFSET mm (in) Tool offset amount
Number of the page currently displayed and the total number of pages
a/b
[3] Page —
a: Number of the page currently displayed
b: Total number of pages

C. Display operations
JUMP TO INCH TOOL
OFFSET MODE OFFSET
No.
1 2 3

<Menu functions>
1. JUMP TO OFFSET No.
Used to search for any required number of the offset data item.
2. INCH MODE (or METRIC MODE)
Used to change the measuring units between metric and inch for the display as well as data
input. This item is only provided for the (optional) inch/metric unit system change simplifying
function.
3. TOOL OFFSET
Used to change over to the TOOL OFFSET display.

 See Section 8-3 for a detailed description of display operations.

5-19
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

D. Data input
Various data items can be set from this area.

 See Section 8-3 for a detailed description of data setting procedure.

E. Remarks
1. The display format/page can only be changed with the title bar being selected.
2. The area is dependent upon selection or cancellation of the [Keep Cursor Position] option
(displayed by tapping and [Setup]) on the TOOL OFFSET display.
3. Selection of [INCH MODE] or [METRIC MODE] for this area has the same effect on the
<TOOL DATA> area (but no influence at all on the other Custom display areas).

8. WORK OFFSET
The display contents correspond to the information given on the WORK OFFSET display.

A. Displayed data

[1] [2]

[3] [4]

[5]

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] No. — No. of the workpiece zero point data set
[2] — — G-code
X, Y, Z mm (in) Distance on each axis from the machine zero point to the zero point of the
[3]
A, C degrees workpiece coordinate system. (Offset of workpiece zero-point)
X, Y, Z mm (in)
[4] Shift amount of workpiece zero-point in each workpiece coordinate system
A, C degrees
Number of the page currently displayed and the total number of pages
a/b
[5] Page —
a: Number of the page currently displayed
b: Total number of pages

5-20
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
C. Display operations

SEARCH WORK
P No. OFFSET

1 2

<Menu functions>
1. SEARCH P No.
Used to search for any required P number of the offset data set.
2. WORK OFFSET
Used to change over to the WORK OFFSET display.

 See Section 6-2 for a detailed description of display operations.

D. Data input
Various data items can be set from this area.

 See Section 6-2 for a detailed description of data setting procedure.

E. Remarks
The display page can only be changed with the title bar being selected.

9. MACRO VARIABLE
The display contents correspond to the information given on the MACRO VARIABLE display.

A. Displayed data

Display format for COMMON VARIABLE Display format for LOCAL VARIABLE

[3]

[1] [2] [1] [2]

[4] [4]

Display format for REG. VARIABLE

[1] [2]

[4]

5-21
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] No. — Number of the variable
[2] DATA — Registered value of the variable
[3] NEST — Nesting number
Number of the page currently displayed and the total number of pages
a/b
[4] Page —
a: Number of the page currently displayed
b: Total number of pages

C. Display operations

COMMON LOCAL REG. MACRO MACRO

VARIABLE VARIABLE VARIABLE SEARCH VARIABLE

1 2 3 4 5

<Menu functions>
1. COMMON VARIABLE
Used to display common variables.
2. LOCAL VARIABLE
Used to display local variables.
3. REG. VARIABLE
Used to display registered variables.
4. MACRO SEARCH
Used to search for any required number of the macro variable.
Provided only for common variables.
5. MACRO VARIABLE
Used to change over to the MACRO VARIABLE display.

 See Section 6-3 for a detailed description of display operations.

D. Data input
Various data items can be set from this area.

 See Section 6-3 for a detailed description of data setting procedure.

E. Remarks
1. The display format/page can only be changed with the title bar being selected.
2. The area is dependent upon selection or cancellation of the [Not Exponential Display]
option (displayed by tapping and [Setup]) on the MACRO VARIABLE display.
3. The area is dependent upon selection or cancellation of the [Incremental First] option
(displayed by tapping and [Setup]) on the MACRO VARIABLE display.

5-22
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
10. 3D MONITOR
The display contents correspond to the information given on the 3D MONITOR display.

A. Displayed data

[1]

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Graphical representation of the machine, tool, material, and fixture
[1] 3D models —
models

C. Display operations

STORE STORE ZOOM ROTATION MOVE 3D

WORKPCE
MATERIAL IN/OUT MONITOR

1 2 3 4 5 6

<Menu functions>
1. STORE
Used to store the results from the view-modifying operations.
2. STORE WORKPCE MATERIAL
Used to store the current state of the material model.
3. ZOOM IN/OUT
Used to enlarge and reduce the model view.
4. ROTATION
Used to rotate the model.
5. MOVE
Used to move (translate) the model.
6. 3D MONITOR
Used to change over to the 3D MONITOR display.

 See Section 12-3 for a detailed description of display operations.

D. Remarks
1. Depending on the machine specifications, the information of the 3D MONITOR display can-
not be displayed in the custom display area.

5-23
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

2. The ON/OFF states of the [STORE] and [STORE WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu functions
depend upon their current states on the 3D MONITOR display.
3. When the [STORE] menu function is activated, the viewing conditions depend upon the 3D
MONITOR display.
4. The area is dependent upon the current ‘hide’ settings on the 3D MONITOR display.

11. MAZA CHECK

An execution type of macroprogram of the MAZA-CHECK function can be selected.
A measurement history is displayed.

A. Displayed data

[1]

[2]
[6]

[3] [4]

[5]

B. Display data description

No. Item Data description

[1] Initial setting button Used to select the initial setting program.
[2] Probe calibration button Used to select the program of calibration for the probe.
Continuous measurement
[3] Used to select the program of calibration for multiple rotational axes.
button
Rotational axis calibration
[4] Used to select the program of calibration for a single rotational axis.
button
[5] MDI output button Used to output the selected program as MDI data.
[6] Measurement history Displays the date (year, month, day and time) of the previous measurement.

C. Display operations

MAZA
CHECK

<Menu functions>
1. MAZA CHECK
Used to change over to the MAZA CHECK display.

 See Section 5-6 for more information.

5-24
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
5-2 TRACE Display

 This display can be used for displaying the operational status of machine in graphic form.
 This display is useful for displaying the tool movements synchronized with actual machine actions
including an ATC action.
Function  Machining shape and path of the tool tip can be displayed on this display.
… Even in the locked status of machine, the movement of the tool indicated on this display will
continue. The running status of the machining program can therefore be checked without actually
operating the machine.

 A plane to be used to display machining shape and path of the tool tip can be designated.
Remarks  Scale values used for machining shape display and the tool tip path display can be changed.
 Machining shape display and the tool tip path display can be stored.

5-2-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

A. 3D display mode

[8]

[3]
[4]
[5]

[2]

[6] [1]

D747S30021

5-25
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

B. 2D display mode

[7]
[3]
[4]
[5]

[2]

[1]
[6]

D747S30022

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Machining shape that has been defined by the program
(Shape) —  with a purple line for point-machining
[1]  with a green line for line- or face-machining
Path of the tool tip (The path of the tool tip is displayed with a white
(Tool path) —
line, and the tool tip itself is displayed with a red ▼ mark.)
Current position of the tool tip with respect to the machine origin (or to
mm (in)
[2] X, Y, Z, A, C the workpiece origin with the [POSITION DISP] menu function
degrees
selected).
WNo. — Work number of the program currently being executed.
[3] If a subprogram is currently being executed, the work number of that
( ) —
subprogram will be displayed in parentheses.
[4] UNo. — Number and name of the program unit currently being executed.
[5] TNo. — Number and name of the tool mounted on the spindle
Integral time elapsed during automatic cutting (for checking the actual
[6] TIME h: m’ s”
automatic operation time of the machining program.)
0 Scale value of graphic form (automatically determined on the initial
[7] mm (in)
display according to the machining shape)
[8] Mode select button — Used to change the display mode between 2D and 3D.

Note : The color of the ▼ mark for the tool tip can be changed by parameter SU14.

 See the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-code List for more information.

5-26
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
5-2-2 Displaying machining shape and tool tip

 Follow the procedures described below in Subsection 5-2-4 to select a

display plane and to enlarge or reduce the shape.

(1) Tap the [WORK No.] menu item.

 The WORK No. SELECT window appears on the screen.
(2) Set the work number of the program to be executed.
 The work number specified is then displayed in the WNo. item ([3]).
(3) Tap the [PART SHAPE] menu item.
 The [PART SHAPE] menu function is activated and the machining shapes are displayed
continuously. After displaying the machining shapes, the menu function is deactivated.
Note 1: Following the procedure described below in Subsection 5-2-4 “1. Plane selection”,
it is possible to select the plane or 3-D view on which machining shapes are to be
displayed.
Note 2: Following the procedure described below in Subsection 5-2-4 “2. Change of scale
values”, it is possible to display available machining shapes in enlarged or
reduced size.
In the initial state, the machining shapes will be displayed with a scaling factor
which has been automatically determined.
Note 3: When the 3D display mode is selected, the [PART SHAPE] menu function is not
available. A product shape automatically created according to the program
contents is displayed in the case of a MAZATROL program.

 See the separate PROGRAMMING MANUAL (MAZATROL Program) for a

detailed description of “product shape.”

Note 4: Activation of the [PART SHAPE] menu function for an EIA/ISO program is re-
jected with an alarm (465 EIA SHAPE DATA NOT FOUND) unless the program is
created by the (optional) function for converting a MAZATROL program into the
EIA/ISO format and, moreover, has shape data additionally provided in paren-
theses.
(4) Tap the [POSITION DISP] menu item.
 The [POSITION DISP] menu function is enabled and the title of the data column
COORDINATE changes to POSITION.
The indication of the coordinates is then given with respect to the workpiece origin.
Otherwise (with the [POSITION DISP] menu function cancelled) it is given with respect
to the machine origin.
Note : The selection of the [POSITION DISP] menu function is not simply cancelled by a
display changeover.

(5) Press the button.

 The button will light up and the path of the tool tip (marked with ▼) synchronized
with the machine action will be displayed. After the entire path of the tool tip has been

displayed (i.e., after execution of the program has been completed), the button
will go out.
Note 1: The machining shape that has been displayed in procedural step (3) above can be
erased by tapping the [SHAPE ERASE] menu item.

5-27
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

Note 2: The path of the tool tip can be erased by tapping the [PATH ERASE] menu item.
Note 3: If the [STORE] menu function is enabled, the shape data will be stored and restored
when the TRACE display is selected again.
Note 4: The data in the 3D display mode cannot be stored.
Note 5: The alarm 477 DESCRIPTION IMPOSSIBLE will be displayed and the tool path drawn
so far cleared in the 3D display mode when the drawing amount exceeds the
predetermined limit.

5-2-3 Display operations in the 3D display mode

1. Changing viewing conditions

Use fingers appropriately to rotate as well as enlarge or reduce the graphic on the screen.
Use a menu to change the viewing conditions as required.
(1) Tap the right-hand area of the display.
 The following submenu is displayed.
ZOOM TO SECTION WPC ON XY PLANE YZ PLANE ZX PLANE SELECT
FIT TABLE

1 2 3 4 4 4 5

<Menu functions>
1. ZOOM TO FIT
Used to fit the graphic entirely in the display area, without changing its attitude (the point of
view).
2. SECTION
Used to select and deselect the sectional view.
3. WPC ON
Used to show and hide the coordinate system.
4. XY/YZ/ZX PLANE
Used to change the viewing direction by selecting a plane perpendicular to it.
5. SELECT TABLE
Used to select the worktable to be displayed in the 3D display mode.

2. Changing worktables
When the table selection function is enabled, follow the procedure below to select a worktable for
which to display the machining shape in the 3D display mode.
(1) Tap the right-hand area of the display.
 The following submenu is displayed.

ZOOM TO SECTION WPC ON XY PLANE YZ PLANE ZX PLANE SELECT

FIT TABLE

(2) Tap the [SELECT TABLE] menu item.

 The menu is changed over as follows.

ZOOM TO A C NOT
FIT USE

Note : The axis names in the menu may differ according to the machine specifications.

5-28
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
(3) Select the desired table by tapping the menu item of the corresponding axis name.
 The function of the selected menu item is activated to display the machining shape for
the selected worktable.

5-2-4 Display operations in the 2D display mode

1. Plane selection
Select the plane on which the machining shape is to be displayed.
Plane selection menu items vary depending on the machine specifications, the programming
method and the menu selection.

Machining center A

Machining center with turning functions MAZATROL program With turning (MILLING & TURN.) B
Without turning (MILLING ONLY) C

EIA/ISO program [TURNING PLANE] ON D

[TURNING PLANE] OFF E

Note : When the [TURNING PLANE] menu function is enabled, a display plane suitable for
checking the turning shape can be selected for an EIA/ISO program.

Follow the procedure below to select a display plane according to the pattern.
<For pattern A, C or E>
One plane Two planes Three planes
3-D view
XY XZ YZ XY-XZ YX-YZ XZ-XY XY-XZ-XY
     — — 

<For pattern B or D>

One plane Two planes Three planes
3-D view
YZ YX XZ YZ-YX XZ-XY YX-YZ YZ-YX-XZ
     — — —
: Plane selected initially
: Selectable —: Not selectable

(1) Tap the right-hand area of the display.

 The following submenu is displayed.
PLANE SCALE STORE
CHANGE CHANGE

(2) Tap the [PLANE CHANGE] menu item.

 The following menu for PLANE CHANGE is displayed:
<For pattern A or C>
XY XZ YZ XY-XZ YX-YZ 3-D
1 PLANES 1 PLANES 1 PLANES 2 PLANES 2 PLANES

<For pattern B>

YZ YX XZ YZ-YX XZ-XY ANGLE
1 PLANES 1 PLANES 1 PLANES 2 PLANES 2 PLANES INPUT

5-29
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

<For pattern E>

XY XZ YZ XY-XZ YX-YZ 3-D TURNING
1 PLANES 1 PLANES 1 PLANES 2 PLANES 2 PLANES PLANES

<For pattern D>

YZ YX XZ YZ-YX XZ-XY WORK TURNING ANGLE
1 PLANES 1 PLANES 1 PLANES 2 PLANES 2 PLANES BASE PLANES INPUT
DRAW

Note : The [ANGLE INPUT] menu item in pattern D is only displayed when the [WORK
BASE DRAW] menu function is selected.
(3) Tap the menu item that corresponds to the plane or 3-D view to be selected.
 The selected plane or 3-D view will then be displayed in the data display area.
 The particular machining shape or the path of the tool tip will be erased from the screen if
plane or 3-D view changeover is carried out.
(4) In the case of an EIA/ISO program, select the [WORK BASE DRAW] menu item as a
drawing method. (Notes 1 and 2)
(5) Tap the [PART SHAPE] menu item.
 The available machining shapes will be continuously displayed on the selected plane or
3-D view.
Note 1: There are two drawing methods provided as follows:

Drawing method Description Applicability

Based on the The tool path is drawn in the actual coordinate system.  For pattern A or C
machine coordi- This method is suitable for checking the real move-  For EIA/ISO programs with
nate system ment on the machine. [WORK BASE DRAW] OFF
Based on the The tool path is drawn with the workpiece remaining in  For pattern B
workpiece the attitude of A = 0°.
 For EIA/ISO programs with
By this method the machining shape can be easily [WORK BASE DRAW] ON
grasped even in the case of a program which requires
rotational motions on the A-axis.

Machining
shape

Display area

Path and shape are

Z Z
superimposed on
the workpiece in the
attitude of A = 0°
Y Y
Drawing based on the Drawing based
machine coordinate system on the workpiece D747S30023

5-30
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5

Machining
shape

Display area

Path and shape are

Z Z
superimposed on
the workpiece in the
attitude of A = 0°
Y Drawing based on the Y Drawing based
machine coordinate system on the workpiece
D747S30024

Note 2: Enable the [ANGLE INPUT] menu function to specify an angle by which the workpiece
is to be rotated on the C-axis for the [WORK BASE DRAW] method.

2. Change of scale values

The particular machining shape can be displayed in enlarged or reduced size.

A. If display on a plane is selected

(1) Tap the [SCALE CHANGE] menu item.
 A screen keyboard is displayed and the cursor appears in nearly the center of the
screen.
(2) Move the cursor to the portion to be enlarged or reduced by using the cursor keys on the
screen keyboard or tapping that portion directly.

If this portion is to be enlarged or

reduced, move the cursor as
indicated by the arrow.

D735S1008

Note : This operation is not required if the entire machining shape is to be enlarged or
reduced.
(3) Specify the desired scale value.
 Tap on the screen keyboard to confirm the value displayed in the data input area
(in the bottom right corner of the screen).
 The specified scale value is displayed in the scale display area ([7]). Subsequently, the
machining shape and the path of the tool tip will be erased automatically.
(4) Tap the [PART SHAPE] menu item.
 The available machining shapes will be displayed continuously at the new scaling factor.

5-31
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

B. If 3-D view is selected

If the [3-D] menu function has been selected during plane-select operation, the 3-D display
viewpoint can be changed.
In addition, the entire machining shape can be displayed in enlarged or reduced size. However,
partial enlargement or reduction of the machining shape is not possible.
(1) Tap the [SCALE CHANGE] menu item.
 The [SCALE CHANGE] menu function is activated and a cubic is displayed in nearly the
center of the screen.
(2) If the 3-D view is to be enlarged or reduced, carry out step (3) of 1. above.
 Skip the following steps (3) and (4) if no change is to be made to the 3-D display
viewpoint.
(3) Tap the cursor key that corresponds to the direction in which the viewpoint is to be changed.
 Each time a cursor key is tapped, the cubic rotates by 5 degrees in the respective
directions.

Cursor key Direction of rotation

upward

downward

to the right

to the left

 This will cause erasure of the machining shape and tool-tip path that are currently being
displayed if Step (2) above has been skipped.

(4) Tap on the screen keyboard.

 The cubic display is cleared. In addition, the [SCALE CHANGE] menu function is
deactivated and a new viewpoint is definitively set.
(5) Tap the [PART SHAPE] menu item.
 The machining shapes are displayed continuously according to the changed viewpoint.

5-2-5 [Counter Erase]

Tap and [Setup] and then select the [Counter Erase] option to hide the digital items
(WNo., UNo., TNo., coordinates and time).
Note : The digital items cannot be hidden in the 3D display mode.

5-32
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
5-3 EIA MONITOR Display

 The currently active block is highlighted on the program list.

 During block stop, the program section that succeeds the block just completed can be edited.
Function
 The program can be restarted by specifying its starting position using the cursor on the program list.
Existing modal information, however, becomes invalid.

 This display is a special one for EIA/ISO programs.

Remarks  EIA/ISO function is an optional function.
 This display is not displayed when the machine is not provided with the EIA/ISO option.

5-3-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[2] [3]

[1]

D747S30025

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Data of the EIA/ISO program.
[1] EIA/ISO program —
The currently active block is highlighted.
[2] Work number — Work number of the EIA/ISO program.
[3] Program name — Name of the program displayed on the item [2].

5-33
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

5-3-2 EIA/ISO monitor function

1. The EIA/ISO program that has been selected on the POSITION display are listed on this
display.
During automatic operation, the currently active block is highlighted (the program scrolls as
operation progresses, and the active section is continually displayed on the screen).

N0200 G00 X100. Z10.

N0210 G01 Z-40. Currently active block
N0220 X120. Z-60.
N0230 X125. Z-73.
N0240 X150.

2. Monitoring of subprogram
If the subprogram is an EIA/ISO program, display will change over to the subprogram.
If the subprogram is a MAZATROL program, the block of subprogram call will remain high-
lighted during execution of the MAZATROL subprogram.

5-3-3 Editing functions

(1) Bring the machine to a block stop during automatic operation (for example, press the Feed
Hold button ).
(2) Tap the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu item.
 The line of the block just completed will be displayed in violet, and the cursor will
appeare at the beginning of the next line. (The area from the cursor position to the end of
the program can now be edited.)
Cursor appears here.


N0010 G01 X100. Z2. Line of the block just completed.
N0020 X99. Z0. (displayed in violet)
N0030 X90. Z-10.
N0040 X93.5 Z-15.3
N0050 X100. Z-40.
N0060 G00 X102.
N0070 Z2.
N0080 X70.
N0090 G28 U0. W0.


(3) Edit the program as required.

 Similar editing operations to EIA/ISO program editing operations can be carried out.
However, two programs cannot be edited simultaneously on the EIA MONITOR display.

 Refer to the PROGRAMMING MANUAL (EIA/ISO Program) for further

details.

(4) Tap the [PROGRAM COMPLETE] menu item.

(5) Execute automatic operation (by pressing the Start button ).

 Operation will progress according to the edited program.

Extra care is therefore required during program editing.

CAUTION

5-34
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
Note : An alarm will result if the button is pressed during program editing on this

display. Before pressing the button, be sure to terminate the program editing
operation by tapping the [PROGRAM COMPLETE] menu item.

5-3-4 RESTART 2 NONMODAL function

(1) Move the cursor to the block line to be selected.
 The position to be selected can be searched for using the [SEARCH] menu function as
required.

 Refer to the PROGRAMMING MANUAL (EIA/ISO Program) for more infor-

mation.
…

N0010 G01 X100. Z2.

Cursor N0020 X 99. Z0.
N0030 X 90. Z-10.

(2) Tap the [RESTART2 NONMODAL] menu item.

 The line where the cursor is present will be highlighted and the starting position will be
set.
…

N0010 G01 X100. Z2.

Highlighted
N0020 X 99. Z0.
display
N0030 X 90. Z-10.

(3) Execute automatic operation (by pressing the button).

 Automatic operation will restart from the highlighted section.
Note 1: To cancel the selection, press the key. The selection cannot be cancelled by
changing over the display.
Note 2: To change the selection, repeat steps (1) and (2) above once again.
Note 3: The restart function and the RESTART 2 NONMODAL function differ as follows:

Restart function RESTART 2 NONMODAL function

 The section of the program from its head to the desig-  With the preceding program section being ignored,
nated block is internally processed with the purpose of restart operation will be begun with the execution of
checking for error and setting modal information. the designated block, on the basis of the modal
 After preparatory positioning to the ending position of information currently valid.
the preceding block, restart operation will be begun with Before step (1) above, therefore, perform modal
the execution of the designated block. setting as required using the MDI mode. See the
description on MDI for details.

Note 4: On condition that the function is made valid (i.e. F168 bit 6 = 1), perform the above
steps (1) to (3) during a pause of automatic operation – caused by the function of
single-block operation or M0/M1 (programmed/optional stop) – to skip the commands
up to the selected block.
Do not use the function during a pause caused in another way than the above-
mentioned ones; otherwise the use of the function during a feed-hold stop, for example,
will only lead to an alarm (428 MEMORY PROTECT (AUTO OPERATION)).

5-35
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

Note 5: When the program currently displayed on the screen has a restart position already
specified by the [RESTART2 NONMODAL] function, tapping the [PROGRAM EDIT]
menu item will only lead to an alarm (449 RESTART SEARCH FINISHED).
Note 6: The function in question is only valid for the mode of memory operation or hard disk
operation. Tapping the [RESTART2 NONMODAL] menu item in any other operation
mode will only lead to an alarm (1473 NOT AUTO MODE).
Note 7: The selection of non-modal restart position is always canceled if the operation mode is
changed, for example, by pressing a key for manual mode of operation.

5-36
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
5-4 Condition Monitor

 Displaying the changes in the machining load of the spindle and each axis, in the spindle speed, and the
output characteristics of the spindle.
Function
 Setting the threshold (cutting torque to start pecking) for the cutting-load detection type of drill auto-
pecking cycle.

5-4-1 SPINDLE LOAD GRAPHIC DISPLAY display

Function Displaying the changes in the speed and load of the spindle.

1. Data display

A. Displayed data

[7]
[1]

[3] [5]

[4]

[6]

[2]

D747S30026E

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Numbers of the tools mounted on the spindle, with reference to the period
[1] Tool number —
([2])
[2] Axis of abscissa s Period of the graphic display
Axis of ordinate
[3] min–1 Spindle speed
(upper)
Axis of ordinate
[4] % Spindle load
(lower)
Graphic display
[5] — Display of the changes in the spindle speed in a red line.
(upper)
Display of the changes in actual spindle load in a green line.
Graphic display
[6] — The average and peak load values can be additionally displayed respec-
(lower)
tively in white and red lines for each tool.
[7] Spindle name — Name of the spindle the data on which are currently displayed.

5-37
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

2. Displaying spindle load data

(1) Start the sampling of the spindle load data.
 Select the POSITION display, tap , [File] and [Spindle Load] in that order to
assign a check mark to the item mentioned last.

(2) Select the SPINDLE LOAD GRAPHIC DISPLAY tab.

Note 1: To stop sampling, tap , [File] and [Spindle Load] in that order again to remove
the check mark from the item mentioned last.
Note 2: Selection of this display during sampling, not after stopping it, will show the data that
has been obtained from the start of sampling to the moment of display selection.
Note 3: If sampling is stopped and then started anew, existing data samplings will be erased.
Note 4: Spindle load data can be sampled for a maximum of one hour.
Note 5: Spindle load data are displayed according to the selection or cancellation of the [SP
Load Short-time Rating] option (provided on the POSITION display)

3. Display mode selection

A. Setting the display time scale

Upon selection of this display, sampled data will initially be displayed in its entirety.
The time scale for graphic display can be changed as required for an enlarged view of a specific
period.
(1) Tap the [CHANGE TIME] menu item.
 A screen keyboard is displayed.
(2) Specify the desired time.
 The graphic display will be remade for the period from 0 (sampling start) to the specified
time.
(3) Use the cursor or page keys to select the desired period (time section).
 Press the cursor keys to scroll (move) 1/5 of the current display period (time section) or
the page keys to scroll the entire period.

Key Scrolling direction

  or Scrolling for the later section (forward scrolling)

  or Scrolling for the earlier section (backward scrolling)

 This operation can also be performed on the scroll bar below the graph by using a finger.

5-38
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
B. Displaying the data of only a specific tool in enlarged form
When multiple tools have been used during sampling, data of only a specific tool can be disp-
layed in enlarged form.
(1) Tap the [CHANGE TOOL] menu item.
 A screen keyboard is displayed.
 A tool number (TNo.) is marked with the cursor.

Cursor

(2) Specify the desired tool number.

 The graphic display will be remade for an enlarged view of the specified tool.

C. Displaying the initial state of the graphic display

Once display period has been changed or only a specific tool has been selected for an enlarged
view, temporarily retrieve the initial state of this display to perform a similar modification anew.
(1) Tap the [CHANGE DISPLAY] menu item.
 The graphic display will return to the initial state (existing when the display was called
up).

4. Displaying additional data related to spindle load

A. Displaying the average spindle load

Average value of the actual spindle load during cutting feed can be calculated and displayed for
each tool.
(1) Tap the [AVERAGE VALUE] menu item.
 The average load will be additionally indicated in a white line for each tool.
 Tap the same menu item once again to clear the display of the average load.

B. Displaying the peak spindle load

Peak value of the actual spindle load during cutting feed can be detected and displayed for each
tool.
(1) Tap the [PEAK VALUE] menu item.
 The peak load will be additionally indicated in a red line for each tool.
 Tap the same menu item once again to clear the display of the peak load.

5-39
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

5-4-2 MACHINING - MONITORING display

Displaying the changes in the machining load of the spindle and each axis, in the spindle speed, and the
Function
output characteristics of the spindle.

1. Data display

A. Displayed data

[5]

[1] [1]

[2]
[4]

[3]

D747S30027E

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Work number of the program being executed
WNo. a b ( c )
[1] WNo. — a: Work number
b: Program type (MAZATROL or EIA/ISO)
c: Program name
mm (in) Current position of the tool tip on each axis in the workpiece coordi-
[2] POSITION X, Y, Z, A, C
degrees nate system
Peak and average load values for the monitoring data currently
displayed.
( a )
% PEAK b
[3] LOAD or
AVERAGE c
kW
a: Number of the corresponding graph
b: Peak value
c: Average value

5-40
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
No. Item Unit Data description
Graphic display of spindle output characteristics or changes in
machining load of the spindle and feed axes.
( a ) b

c e
a: Graph number
b: Graph title
d

1. For a graph of spindle output characteristics

c: Spindle output (kW)
d: Spindle speed (min–1)
[4] Graphic display ― e: Spindle output characteristic curve (in red) with respect to the
spindle speed.
The output peak and average output (for the displayed data
samplings) are indicated respectively by a red disk  (in a
position of the abscissa corresponding to the spindle speed
for the output peak) and a white triangle .
2. For a graph of changes in machining load of the spindle and feed
axes
c: Load (%)
d: Sampling time (s)
e: The load values applied during rapid traverse and cutting
feed are respectively displayed in light blue and green lines.
White and red lines refer to the average load and peak load
during cutting feed.
Graph display switch
[5] ― Used to select the number of graphs to be displayed.
buttons

2. Selecting graphs to be displayed

Two or four graphs can be displayed at the same time on the MACHINING - MONITORING
display.
 Four-graph display mode
Four graphs are displayed squarely at the same time. Process monitoring data from the past
of a maximum of 80 seconds to the present is displayed in this mode.
 Two-graph display mode
Two graphs are displayed vertically on the display at the same time. Process monitoring data
from the past of a maximum of 160 seconds to the present is displayed in this mode.
Note : Peak and average values displayed are those calculated from the monitoring data
currently being displayed graphically.

5-41
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

The following data can be displayed graphically in this mode. The selectable items vary from
model to model.

Display item Display example Description

 Output characteristics of the spindle.
Red line:
Spindle output characteristics against the
spindle speed with reference to intermittent
(40%ED) rating.
Green line:
Spindle output characteristics against the
spindle speed with reference to continuous
MILLING SPINDLE rating.
OUTPUT
Yellow line:
1 or
TURNING SPINDLE Maximum rotational speed for the current tool
OUTPUT (only displayed for a valid setting [> 0]).
Red disk :
Crossing point of the maximum output value
and the corresponding spindle speed (within
the displayed data samplings).
White triangle :
Crossing point of the average output value of
the displayed data samplings and the current
spindle speed.
 Changes in the machining load of the spindle.
Light blue line:
Load value applied during rapid traverse.
Green line:
MILLING SPINDLE
Machining load values applied during cutting
LOAD
feed.
2 or
TURNING SPINDLE Red line:
LOAD Maximum machining load value applied
during cutting feed.
White line:
Average machining load value applied during
cutting feed.
 Changes in the machining load of the
controlled axes (displayed in the same
X-AXIS LOAD manner as for the load of the spindle).
Y-AXIS LOAD
3 Z-AXIS LOAD
A-AXIS LOAD
C-AXIS LOAD

(1) Tap one of the two graph display switch buttons to select the number of graphs to be dis-
played.
 The number of the graphs is changed accordingly on the screen.
(2) Tap at the right end of the title of a graph.
 A list of selectable items is displayed.

5-42
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
(3) Tap the desired item.
 The specified graph is displayed.
Note 1: The same data cannot be displayed on multiple graph sections. The setting for such a
display will cause the alarm 401 ILLEGAL FORMAT to be given.
Remark : By repeating Step (2), selection of graph type can be repeated as often as required
in the same display mode.
Note 2: The red line refers to a rating type other than the above (according to the specifications
of the machine) when the display of spindle output curve with reference to 40%ED
rating is made invalid (parameter F159 bit 4 = 0) or when on the POSITION display the
[SP Load Short-time Rating] option (displayed by tapping and [View]) is
selected.

3. Setting the display time scale

The time scale for graphic display can be changed in steps as required for an overview or an
enlarged view in detail.
(1) Tap the [CHANGE TIME] menu item.
 The following dialogue box for time scale selection appears on the screen.

(2) Change the time scale as required.

 Use a finger to move the slider on the dialogue box.

Increasing the time scale Decreasing the time

for an enlarged view scale for an overview

 The display time can be selected from among eight or seven steps as shown below:

Step 2-graph display mode 4-graph display mode

LONG 1 160 80
2 80 40
3 40 20
4 20 10
5 10 5
6 5 2.5
7 2.5 1.3
SHORT 8 1.3

(3) Tap the [OK] button.

 The graphic display will be made now in each section according to the settings.

5-43
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

5-4-3 DRILL MONITOR display

Setting the threshold (cutting torque to start pecking) for the cutting-load detection type of drill auto-
Function
pecking cycle.

1. Data display

A. Displayed data

[1]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[2]
[3]

[4]

[9]
[10]

[11]

D747S30028E

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Work number of the program being executed
WNo. a b
( c )
[ a’ b’ ]
( c’ )
a
Work numbers
a’
[1] WNo. —
b
Identification of MAZATROL program or EIA/ISO program
b’
c
Name of the program
c’

* For data items a’, b’ and c’, data is displayed only during
execution of subprograms.
 If the program being executed is a MAZATROL program:
UNo. a - a’
a : Number of the unit being executed
a’ : Number of the sequence being executed
[2] UNo. —
 If the program being executed is an EIA/ISO program:
UNo. a – a’
a : Number of the sequence being executed
a’ : Number of the block being executed

5-44
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
No. Item Unit Data description
Name of the program unit currently being executed
[3] UNIT — UNIT: a
a : Name of the unit
X, Y, Z, mm (in) Current position of the tool tip on each axis in the workpiece coordinate
[4] POSITION
A, C degrees system
[5] TNo. ― Number of the tool being used
[6] TOOL ― Name (type) of the tool being used
[7] NOM-/NOM. mm (in) Nominal diameter or nominal size and suffix of the tool being used
[8] MAT. ― Material of the tool being used
[9] PEAK N·m Peak value of the machining torque
[10] THRESHOLD N·m Threshold for pecking by a drill (Note 1)
Graphic display of the machining torque of the milling spindle.
a

[11] Graphic display ―

b

a: Machining torque (N·m)

b: Sampling time (s)
c: Machining torque of the spindle is displayed in a green line.
Red and yellow lines refer respectively to the peak value (for the
displayed data samplings) and the threshold for pecking by a drill.

Note 1: Threshold is only displayed when a drill is currently mounted on the spindle.
Note 2: The unit “N·m” denotes the torque (torsional moment) of the axis. If a disk with radius of
1 meter, for example, is rotated at a force of 1 newton, a torque of 1 N·m will be im-
posed on the axis of rotation.

2. Setting the threshold

On the DRILL MONITOR display, the pecking threshold level for the cutting-load detection type
of drill auto-pecking cycle can be set while monitoring the machining torque of the spindle. This
drill auto-pecking cycle will execute the pecking process only when the machining torque
exceeds the threshold level. The setting procedure is as follows:
(1) Drill an actual workpiece using the tool for which the threshold is to be set.
 Select a drilling hole depth that does not cause clogging with any chips. The drilling hole
depth should not exceed the value of [3 × tool diameter of the drill].
(2) Tap the [BORDER VALUE] menu item.
(3) Enter the desired threshold seeing the graph-displayed machining torque and peak torque.
 The entered pecking threshold level is displayed in a yellow solid line on the graph.
 The same value is set in the corresponding item on the TOOL DATA display.
Note : Even if the threshold is changed during execution of the cutting-load detection-type drill
auto-pecking cycle, that new value will not become valid until the machining cycle is
completed.

 Do not perform the cutting-load detection type of drill auto-pecking cycle if the
drill has a tool diameter of 4 mm or less or is made of a material other than
high-speed steel. Otherwise, tool damage may result since the machining
torque cannot be detected accurately under those conditions.

5-45
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

3. Scale change

A. Automatic vertical scale change

When a new drill is mounted onto the milling spindle, the scale for the vertical axis of the cutting
torque graph is changed automatically. The cutting resistance is calculated theoretically from the
tool diameter of the drill and then the optimum scale is selected automatically from nine types (1,
2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200 and 500 N·m).
Note 1: The scale will not be changed if a non-drilling tool is mounted onto the spindle.
Note 2: If automatic scale change has not occurred in the past, 10 N·m will be selected as the
initial value.

B. Manual vertical scale change

The scale for the vertical axis of the cutting torque graph can be changed to the desired value in
manual mode. The procedure is as follows:
(1) Tap the [SCALE CHANGE] menu item.
(2) Enter the desired scale. The data that can be entered ranges from 0 to 655.35 N·m.
 The graph is cleared and then a new one is displayed with the new scale.
 During automatic operation, the graph is cleared temporarily and monitoring commences
from the beginning of the graph with the new scale.

4. Setting the display time scale

 Follow the same procedure as described under 3 in Subsection 5-4-2.

The display time can be selected from among eight steps, as in the 2-graph
display mode.

5-46
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
5-4-4 CONDITION CHECK display

Executing the checking program allows status diagnosis of the milling spindle.
Function
Up to ten sets of checking results can be stored.

 There are two types of CONDITION CHECK display provided: Type A and Type B (optional) with a
Remarks corresponding difference in data items displayed on the screen.
 This display may not be available for some types of machine execution.

1. Data display

A. Displayed data

[1] [3]
[4]

[2]

[5]

D747S30029E

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] CHK. START TIME Y/M/D/h/m The time when the condition check was started.
[2] SPDL. COND. — The conditions of the milling spindle.
[3] Current tool — The tool currently mounted in the spindle.

5-47
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

No. Item Unit Data description

Various data items on the milling spindle are displayed in real time.
Data items displayed are as follows:
 Speed of the milling spindle
 Load of the milling spindle (*1)
 Machine body temperature (Reference temperature)
 Increase in the temperature of the milling spindle (*2)
 Increase in the temperature of the milling spindle motor (*2)
 Vibration of the milling spindle (*3, *4)
 Increase in the milling spindle bearing’s temperature (*2, *3, *5)
[4] SPNDLE DATA — *1 Load data are displayed differently according to the selection or
cancellation of the [SP Load Short-time Rating] option
(provided on the POSITION display).
*2 The data displayed are increments with respect to the reference
temperature.
*3 Displayed only for Type B.
*4 Two vibration data items of different acquisition frequency bands
are displayed.
*5 Two or three items of temperature are displayed, depending on
the mounting positions of the bearings.
[5] Graphic display — The graphic data for the currently selected item.

2. Starting condition check

(1) Carry out axis movements to set the milling spindle to a position at which it can be rotated
safely.
(2) Select the MDI operation mode.
 The MDI window is displayed.
(3) Tap the [START CHECK] menu item.
 The corresponding menu function is enabled and a screen keyboard is displayed.
Note : Select a tool that can be rotated at the maximum permissible milling spindle
speed.

 See the description given under 5 for more information.

(4) Specify the tool number of the tool to be used for condition check.
 A block of the G-code for calling the checking program is displayed in the MDI window.
Note : The checking program may include commands for return to the zero point and
C-axis connection.

(5) Execute the checking program by pressing the button.

 The status of the milling spindle is analyzed and an LED [2] activated.

Color of LED Status of the milling spindle

Green Normal
Yellow Alarm 1452 SPINDLE CONDITION CAUTION is displayed. The spindle, however, does not
stop rotating.
Red Alarm 1392 SPINDLE CONDITION MALFUNCTION is displayed, and the spindle immedi-
ately stops rotating.

Note 1: Never select the single-block operation mode before executing the checking
program.
Note 2: Judgment results from the condition check in question bear no relation to the
product quality.
 The menu function will be disabled upon completion of the condition check.

5-48
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
3. Change of graphic data
A change of graphic data displayed can be made as follows.
(1) Select another menu item concerning the graphic data on the CONDITION CHECK display.
POSITION START DISPLAY LOAD TEMP. VIBRAT.L VIBRAT.H RUNNING
CHECK SAVEDATA GRAPH GRAPH GRAPH GRAPH RECORDER

 The corresponding change in graphic data will occur on the screen.

Note : The [VIBRAT. L GRAPH] and [VIBRAT. R GRAPH] menu items are only provided for
Type B.

4. Displaying saved data

Follow the procedure below to display the past condition check data:
(1) Tap the [DISPLAY SAVE DATA] menu item.
 The SELECT SAVE DATA window appears on the screen.

(2) Select the date and time of the data to be displayed and tap the [OK] button.
 The graphic data and the spindle conditions are changed for the selected date and time,
and the SELECT SAVE DATA window is closed.
Remark : The results of each condition check are saved at the end of the execution of the
checking program. The NC can save up to ten sets of checking results. Saving each
eleventh set of checking results is made by deleting the oldest set of data concerned.

5-49
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

5. Restrictions on the size of the tool to be used for condition check

 For condition check, use a tool that satisfies the recommended dimensions
listed below. It may not be possible to obtain normal condition check results if
a significantly unbalanced tool or a tool not satisfying the specified size items
should be used.

L
(from the gauge line)

D

D740S30319

Tool shank model Recommended length (L) Recommended diameter (D)

BT40 (BIG+)/HSK-A63/CAPTO C6/KM63 Max. 80 mm (3.15 in) Max. 40 mm (1.57 in)
BT50 (BIG+)/HSK-A100/CAPTO C8 Max. 120 mm (4.72 in) Max. 70 mm (2.76 in)

 Be sure to select a tool that can be rotated at the maximum permissible milling spindle
speed. Failure to observe this precaution leads to machine damage and operator injury.

CAUTION

5-50
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
5-4-5 RUNNING RECORDER display

Daily milling spindle data are recorded and changes in the speed, load, vibration, and temperature are
Function
displayed.

 There are two types of RUNNING RECORDER display provided: Type A and Type B (optional) with a
Remarks corresponding difference in data items displayed on the screen.
 This display may not be available for some types of machine specification.

1. Date display

A. Displayed data

[1]

[2]
[3]

D747S30030E

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] Display date Y/M/D The date of the currently displayed data.
The title of each graphic data item and the upper and lower limits of
the data are displayed. Graphic items displayed are as follows:
 Speed of the milling spindle
 Load of the milling spindle (*1)
 Temperature of the milling spindle (*2, *3)
 Vibration of the milling spindle (*4)
Comment on the
[2] — *1 Load data are displayed differently according to the selection or
graphic data
cancellation of the [SP Load Short-time Rating] option (pro-
vided on the POSITION display).
*2 Bearing temperature is displayed additionally for Type B.
*3 The data displayed is an increment with respect to the reference
temperature.
*4 Displayed only for Type B.
Changes in the speed, load, vibration, and temperature of the milling
[3] Graphic data —
spindle are displayed.

Note : The oldest data that can be shown on the RUNNING RECORDER display dates back
to one year ago from the current date.

5-51
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

2. Specifying the display date

Follow the procedure below to specify the date of the milling spindle data to be displayed:
(1) Tap the [SELECT DISPLAY DATE] menu item.
 A screen keyboard is displayed.
(2) Enter the date (year, month, and day).

Example : To specify January 12, 2008, tap keys in the following order:
2 0 0 8  0 1  1 2

 The milling spindle data of the entered date are displayed on the screen.

3. Setting the display time range

Follow the procedure below to change the time range for graphic display:
(1) Tap the [CHANGE DISPLAY RANGE] menu item.
 A screen keyboard is displayed.
(2) Change the time range for graphic display with the arrow keys.
 : To broaden the time range for graphic display.
 : To narrow the time range for graphic display.
 : To return the starting time for graphic display by one hour.
 : To advance the starting time for graphic display by one hour.

Upon selection of this display, the time for graphic display ranges from 0 o’clock to 24 o’clock.
The time range is broadened or narrowed with the corresponding arrow key by steps in
ascending or descending order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, and 24 hours.
Example : To display 4 hours of data from 8 a.m.:
1. Tap  4 times to change the time range from 24 hours to 4 hours.
2. Tap  8 times to change the starting time from 0 o’clock to 8 o’clock.

5-52
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
5-5 MACHINING NAVIGATION - RESULT Display

The machining time and spindle output data are listed for each tool according to the results of actual
Function
machine operation.

5-5-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

A. Displayed data with the [TOOL OPTIMIZE] menu function deactivated

[1] [2]
[3]
[4]

[6] [5]

[9] [10 [11] [12] [13] [14]

]
[7] [8]

D747S30031E

5-53
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

B. Displayed data with the [TOOL OPTIMIZE] menu function activated

[8]
[15]
[17]

[16] [18]

D747S30032E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Work number of the machining program
WNo. a ( b )
[1] WNo. —
a : Work number
b : Program name
[2] WRITE DATE Y/M/D Date on which the file was last updated
[3] TOTAL SEQ. — Total number of tool sequences in the program
[4] NUMER OF T-CODE — Number of tool change operations required for actual machining
[5] TIME H/M/S Total machining time
RATIO OF
[6] — Color-identified graphic display of the ratio of machining time for each tool
MACHINING TIME
[7] Tool information — Name, nominal size and ID code of the tool
Machining time Ratio of machining time for each tool sequence with respect to the total
[8] —
information machining time
[9] TNo. — Tool number
[10] TOOL — Tool name
[11] NOM-/NOM — Nominal diameter or nominal size of the tool and tool ID code
[12] SEC s Machining time
[13] AVERAGE kW Average value and peak value of spindle output
Program infor-
[14] — Information on the program
mation
[15] T-COND. — Information on the tool to be used
[16] CUTTING COND. — Cutting conditions specified in the program
Ratio of the average/peak spindle load to the output characteristics, calcu-
[17] LOAD %
lated for the tool sequence

5-54
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
No. Item Unit Data description
Spindle output curve for intermittent (40%ED) rating and continuous rating
by red and green lines, respectively, against the spindle speed, displayed
Spindle output
for the tool sequence.
[18] characteristic —
The output peak and average output are indicated respectively by a red disk
curve
 (in a position of the abscissa corresponding to the spindle speed for the
output peak) and a white triangle.

Note 1: The load information items [17] are displayed according to the selection or cancellation
of the [SP Load Short-time Rating] option (displayed by tapping and [View]
on the POSITION display) in which state the program concerned has been executed.
Note 2: The red line refers to a rating type other than the above (according to the specifications
of the machine) when the display of spindle output curve with reference to 40%ED
rating is made invalid (parameter F159 bit 4 = 0) or when on the POSITION display the
[SP Load Short-time Rating] option (displayed by tapping and [View]) is
selected.
Note 3: The contents of the MACHINING NAVIGATION - RESULT display are created as a
result of each execution of the particular program and stored for it. To view the
machining results for programs chained together for continuous operation, therefore,
return to the POSITION display and select there the desired programs one by one.
Programs to be run for Data for the MACHINING
automatic operation NAVIGATION - RESULT display

WNo. 1 WNo. 1

Program chain Data creation upon

completion of machining

WNo. 2 WNo. 2

Program chain

WNo. 3 WNo. 3

5-55
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

Note 4: For a MAZATROL program with one (1) being set under both CONTI. and NUMBER of
the END unit (repetitive program execution with piece count) as well as with a signifi-
cant setting (on the POSITION display) for number of pieces to be machined, the
method of data creation of machining results depends on a parameter setting as
follows:
F159 bit 0 = 0: Creation of data for the first piece machining only
= 1: Creation of total data upon completion of repetitive machining
Note that the setting of one (1) as the NUMBER item of the END unit is indispensable
for the data creation in question.
By the way, the number of data sets to be created for tool sequences is limited to 4000.
F159 bit 0 = 0 F159 bit 0 = 1

Data of machining results 1st execution

2nd execution

Data of machining results



Last execution
Creation of data for the Creation of total data
first piece machining upon completion of
only repetitive machining

Note 5: The time for executing the common and the END units of a MAZATROL program is not
taken into account for the MACHINING NAVIGATION - RESULT display.

5-5-2 Displaying data

The functions of this display cannot be used for a machining program which has not ever been
executed actually on the machine.
(1) Execute the desired program in the automatic operation mode.

 Refer to Chapter 1 for the procedure.

(2) Select the MACHINING NAVIGATION - RESULT display.

 The results of the machine operation will be displayed in the tool-specific display mode
([TOOL OPTIMIZE] ON).
 No data will be displayed if the automatic operation has not yet been completed at all. In
case the automatic operation based on a program of the same work number has already
been completed, however, data at that time will be displayed.

5-56
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
5-5-3 Display modes
This display has the following two display modes:

Display mode Condition Data display

Total display [TOOL OPTIMIZE] menu The machining time and average spindle output are listed for each tool
mode function OFF sequence in addition to the general information about execution of the
program.
Tool-specific [TOOL OPTIMIZE] menu Data of a specific tool sequence listed up in the total display mode can
display mode function ON be selectively displayed in further detail.

1. Changing from the total to the tool-specific display mode

(1) Check that a graphic display of the ratio of machining time for each tool sequence is
presented under RATIO OF MACHINING TIME.
 For a program the execution of which has been completed, the machining time ratio for
each tool sequence to the total machining time will be displayed in a color-identified
format on a strip graph as shown in the display example below. The items on the strip
graph are keyed from left to right, in a one-to-one correspondence, to those line items of
the list (machining time and average spindle output for each tool sequence) that are
displayed at the bottom of the graph.

Graphic display
of the ratio of
machining time

List

(2) Tap an item in the list.

 An arrow head (▲) will be displayed under the graph RATIO OF MACHINING TIME to
indicate the item of the tool sequence currently selected by the cursor, as shown in the
display example below.

Indicates the item

of the selected
tool sequence

Cursor

(3) Select the line of the desired tool sequence.

 The arrow head will move correspondingly with the cursor so that the ratio of the
machining time of the specific tool sequence to the total machining time can be visually
checked.
(4) Tap the [TOOL OPTIMIZE] menu item.
 The display contents will be changed for a detailed view of the specified tool.
 Tap the same menu item once again, and the total display mode will be retrieved.

5-57
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

5-6 MAZA CHECK Display (Option)

 Used to set the arguments for the macroprogram of the MAZA-CHECK function, following the Help
Function instructions, and to output them to the MDI window or as an EIA/ISO program.
 Used to check the macroprogram execution history and the parameters changed.

5-6-1 Outline
The purpose of the MAZA-CHECK function is to compensate for the slight deterioration in
accuracy due to aged deterioration and environmental temperature, so as to improve accuracy,
by a calibration using the results of measurement with a touch sensor and a reference ball.

 For more information see the separate Operating Manual for the MAZA-
CHECK function.

The MAZA CHECK display gives Help information according to the machine model and the
measurement type in order that the arguments may be easily and correctly specified in a macro-
program call command. The G-code for calling the macroprogram can be output, with the
specified arguments, into the MDI window or as an EIA/ISO program.
Each time the macroprogram is executed, the type of the program, the date of measurement and
the parameter values modified are stored on this display.

5-6-2 Data display

1. Displayed data

A. Display for entering arguments

[1]

[2]

[3] [4] [5]

[6]

[7]

D747S30033

5-58
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
No. Item Unit Data description
The currently selected execution type is displayed in a different color.
[1] Type of execution — Pink: Execution type currently selected
Purple: Other execution types
[2] Programming format — Format of the call command for the currently selected execution type.
Arguments to be specified for calling the macroprogram.
[3] Argument — Black: Indispensable.
Gray: Omissible if the default value is desired.
[4] Argument entry field — Used to enter the values of arguments.
Verbal description of arguments.
Explanation of
[5] — Black: Indispensable.
arguments
Gray: Omissible if the default value is desired.
[6] Help image — Graphical explanation of the augment currently selected with the cursor.
[7] Caution — Caution to be taken when executing the currently selected program type.

B. Display for execution history

[1]
[2] [3]

[4]

[5]

D747S30034

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] Parameters — Parameters to be modified for the machine model concerned.
[2] Date — Date of execution of the macroprogram.
[3] Type of program — Name of the executed program type.
[4] Parameter value — Values of the modified parameters.
Number of the page currently displayed and the total number of pages
a/b
[5] Page —
a: Number of the page currently displayed
b: Total number of pages

5-59
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

2. Menu

CONFIG PROBE A AXIS C AXIS MDI EIA/ISO TOOL DAT LOG

CALIB- PIVOT PIVOT OUTPUT OUTPUT WINDOW
RATION UPDATE UPDATE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

<Menu functions>
1. CONFIG
Used to select the initial setting program.
2. PROBE CALIBRATION
Used to select the program of calibration for the probe.
3. A (B, C) AXIS PIVOT UPDATE
Used to select the program of calibration for the A-/B-/C-axis.
4. A (B, C) AXIS PIVOT UPDATE
Used to select the program of calibration for the A-/B-/C-axis.
5. MDI OUTPUT
Used to output a macroprogram call command with the specified arguments into the MDI
window.
6. EIA/ISO OUTPUT
Used to output a macroprogram call command with the specified arguments as an EIA/ISO
program.
7. TOOL DAT WINDOW
Used to display the TOOL DATA window for a particular argument to be specified easily.
8. LOG
Used to display the execution history.
Note : The axis names in 3 and 4 depend on the machine model.

5-6-3 Display operations

1. Entry of an argument
(1) Tap the desired argument item.
The Help image of the selected argument is displayed on the right side.
When the cursor is placed on the argument T (selection of tool number) for the initial setting
program, the TOOL DATA window can be displayed. The window shows only the touch
probes as appropriate.
(2) Enter a value, following the Help image and the description of the argument.

2. Output as MDI data

Follow the procedure below to output a macroprogram call command with the specified argu-
ments into the MDI window.
(1) Select the MDI operation mode, and tap the [MDI OUTPUT] menu item.
 A message box is displayed.
(2) Tap the [OK] button to output a macroprogram call command into the MDI window.
The specified values are output in a character string of macroprogram call command.
If an argument displayed in gray is not specified, the corresponding word (address and
value) is omitted and the default value will be used in the execution of the macroprogram.

5-60
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
3. Output as an EIA/ISO program
Follow the procedure below to output a macroprogram call command with the specified argu-
ments as an EIA/ISO program.
The program contents are the same as those for MDI operation.
(1) Tap the [EIA/ISO OUTPUT] menu item.
 A message box is displayed.
(2) Tap the [OK] button to output a macroprogram call command as an EIA/ISO program.
If a program with the same name already exists, it is overwritten with the new one.
The program names are as follows.
MAZA-CHECK_CONFIGURATION ............ Initial setting program.
MAZA-CHECK_PROBE_CALIBRATION .... Program of calibration for the probe.
MAZA-CHECK_A_PIVOT_UPDATE ........... Program of calibration for the A-axis.
MAZA-CHECK_B_PIVOT_UPDATE ........... Program of calibration for the B-axis.
MAZA-CHECK_C_PIVOT_UPDATE........... Program of calibration for the C-axis.

4. Log display
The MAZA-CHECK execution logs can be checked using the [LOG] menu function.
The items to be checked are Date of execution, Type of program, and Correction parameters
modified by the macroprogram.
A maximum of 1000 logs are stored, and when the number of logs exceeds 1000, logs are
deleted in chronological order.
Tap the and buttons respectively to display the next log and the previous log.

5. Precautions
1. Entry of an argument outside the setting range or in an incorrect format will only cause the
alarm 402 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT or 401 ILLEGAL FORMAT.
2. An attempt to output the call command to the MDI window during automatic operation, or as
an EIA/ISO program with the data protect function ON, will only cause the alarm 428
MEMORY PROTECT (AUTO OPERATION) or 406 MEMORY PROTECT.
3. A program execution log is stored only upon completion of the execution. It will not be
stored if the program execution is stopped halfway.
4. Data cannot be input manually in the MDI window unless the MDI menu is displayed.

5-61
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

5-7 Display for Setting SMC Data

 Used to prepare and edit the optimum sets of relevant cutting conditions (SMC data) for the type of
machining and workpiece. SMC is an abbreviation of Smooth Machining Configuration.
 Factory-set data consist of a set of standard settings for general use in all types of machining, and sets
of special settings for finishing to enhance surface quality and geometric accuracy.

Function  Use the editing functions to prepare a special set of finishing conditions in order to achieve so high a
surface quality or geometric accuracy as required. It is recommended, however, to use the factory-set
data (standard conditions and special finishing conditions) unless an extremely high quality or accuracy
is required.
 A particular set of registered SMC data becomes effective when it is selected in the SMC DATA SELECT
window or specified in program.

 See Table 5-1 for the details on the factory-set data.

Remarks
 Up to 20 sets of SMC data can be registered.

5-7-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[5]

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[4]

[6]

D747S30167

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[7] [8]

5-62
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
2. Display data description

No. Item Data description

Number of registered SMC data set.
The desired data set is to be specified in the program using the numbers in this
column.
Remark : See the separate PROGRAMMING MANUAL (EIA/ISO Program) for
information on the programming format concerned.
: Symbol for data sets that are protected against editing.
[1] Data No.
Black: SMC data recommended by Mazak.
Green: SMC data in DATA LOCK state.
Remark : See Subsection 5-7-2 for a description of DATA LOCK.
： Mark for a data set which is prepared by copying and modifying SMC data
recommended by Mazak. The number refers to the original data set.
[2] Name Name of SMC data.
M-codes (to be used instead of Data Nos. [1]) for specifying the desired SMC data
[3] Command value set in the program.
Setting range: M821 to M830
Status of the registered machining conditions.
[4] Status
Remark : See Table 5-2 for an explanation of each status.
[5] Image Graphical representation.
Use the sliders as required to adjust the machining conditions.
[6] Machining conditions
Remark : See Table 5-3 for an explanation of machining conditions.
[7] SET SMC DATA button Used to enable the SMC data with the selected No.
CLEAR SMC DATA Used to disable the SMC data with the selected No.
[8]
button

5-7-2 Registering and editing data

1. Registering and editing data

Note : Data with the data number 0 cannot be edited. If an attempt is made to do so, the alarm
1494 CANNOT EDIT SMC DATA will be triggered.
<Main menu>

EDIT COPY MOVE REMOVE DATA

SMC DATA SMC DATA SMC DATA SMC DATA LOCK

1 2 3 4 5

<Editing menu>
EDIT SET SELECT UPDATE
Machining conditions
NAME CODE PICTURE SMC DATA

6 6 6 6 6 7 8 9 10

STEP STEP UPDATE

Machining conditions
<< >> SMC DATA

6 6 6 6 6 7 8 9 10

1. EDIT SMC DATA

Used to display an editing menu.
2. COPY SMC DATA
Used to copy the selected set of SMC data under another No.
If an SMC data set is already registered under the same No., the alarm 1494 CANNOT
EDIT SMC DATA will be triggered.

5-63
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

3. MOVE SMC DATA

Used to move the selected set of SMC data under another No.
If an SMC data set is already registered under the same No., it will be replaced with the
selected one.
4. REMOVE SMC DATA
Used to delete the selected set of SMC data.
5. DATA LOCK
Used to prohibit the editing of the selected set of SMC data. Locked SMC data cannot be
edited, copied, moved or deleted.
The No. of the locked set of SMC data is marked with .
 The selected data set can be locked and released alternately by tapping the [DATA
LOCK] menu item.
6. Machining conditions
Used to set machining conditions (see Note below). Select the menu item of the desired
type of machining conditions and perform data settings using the following two methods.
 Using a finger to move the slider

 Using the [STEP <<] and [STEP >>] menu functions

The values set here are updated when the [UPDATE SMC DATA] menu function is acti-
vated.
Note : The names of the currently registered machining condition types are displayed in
this section of the menu. See Table 5-3 for a description of the factory-set
machining condition types.
7. EDIT NAME
Used to enter the name of the selected SMC data.
8. SET CODE
Used to set a command value for the selected SMC data.
9. SELECT PICTURE
Used to assign an image to the selected SMC data.
Tap the [SELECT PICTURE] menu item, select in the resulting PICTURE SELECT window
an image and finally tap the [OK] button.

10. UPDATE SMC DATA

Used to save the edited cutting conditions.
Note : Selection of another display without tapping this menu item clears the results from
editing operations.

5-64
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
11. STEP << and STEP >>
Used to change cutting conditions.

2. Selection/cancellation of data
Follow the procedure below to use a set of SMC data for actual machining operation.
(1) Call up the POSITION display and tap the [SMC DATA SELECT] menu item.
 The SMC DATA SELECT window appears on the screen.
(2) Select the desired set of SMC data.
(3) Tap the [SET SMC DATA] button in the window.
 The selected SMC data are activated and the color of the data number turns to blue.
 Tap the [CLEAR SMC DATA] button to cancel the selection.

5-7-3 Input and output of data

The SMC data can be saved and loaded.

1. Data saving
(1) Tap , [File] and the [DATA I/O] option in that order.
 A window for data I/O operations is displayed.
(2) Tap the [SAVE FILE] button.
(3) Tap the [BROWSE] button to specify the saving destination and the file name.
 The file name is automatically determined.
(4) Tap the [EXECUTE] button.
 Data saving starts and a message box appears upon completion of saving operation.

2. Data loading
(1) Tap , [File] and the [DATA I/O] option in that order.
 A window for data I/O operations is displayed.
(2) Tap the [LOAD FILE] button.
(3) Tap the [BROWSE] button to specify the file to be loaded.
(4) Tap the [EXECUTE] button.
 Data loading starts and a message box appears.

5-65
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

5-7-4 Factory-set data

SMC data (a maximum of 10 data sets) recommended by Mazak are factory set.
The factory-set data cannot be edited.
Table 5-1 Factory-set data

No. Name Description

Standard settings for general use in all types of machining.
It is recommended to use this set of data if there are no special requirements put
0 2.5X&3X-R
on machining speed, surface quality or geometric accuracy.
The following sets of SMC data are provided to meet the particular requirements.
1 3X-F SP Used for roughing in 3-axis machining.
Used for finishing in 3-axis machining.
2 3X-F SM
Operation is performed with priority given to smoothness.
Used for finishing in 3-axis machining.
3 3X-F AC
Operation is performed with priority given to accuracy.
4 5X-R Used for roughing in 5-axis machining.
Used for roughing or finishing in 5-axis machining.
5 5X-F SP
Operation is performed with priority given to speed.
Used for finishing in 5-axis machining.
6 5X-F SM
Operation is performed with priority given to smoothness.
Used for finishing in 5-axis machining.
7 5X-F AC
Operation is performed with priority given to accuracy.

Remark : Factory-set data depend upon the machine specifications.

Table 5-2 Contents of status data

Status Description
Change in machining time according to the adjustment.
Machining time  The closer to , the more the machining time is shortened.
 The closer to , the more the machining time is prolonged.
Change in smoothness according to the adjustment.
Smoothness  The closer to , the more the smoothness is increased.
 The closer to , the more the smoothness is reduced.
Change in accuracy according to the adjustment.
Accuracy  The closer to , the more the accuracy is increased.
 The closer to , the more the accuracy is reduced.

Table 5-3 Contents of machining condition data

Machining condition Description

Used to adjust the acceleration of each axis.
Acceleration  The closer to , the more the acceleration is increased.
 The closer to , the more the acceleration is reduced.
Used to adjust the corner passing speed.
 The closer to , the more the speed is increased.
Corner speed
 The closer to , the more the speed is reduced.
Note : When moving at high speed, the tool turns inside a corner.
Used to adjust the change in axis motion speed.
Sharpness  The closer to , the more the change in speed is reduced.
 The closer to , the more the change in speed is increased.

5-66
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
5-8 POSITION TEACH Window

 Used to store the current position on the controlled axes in memory.

Function
 Stored coordinates can be used for data entry as required.

5-8-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[6]
[3]
[8]
[7]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]

Tap the display mode switch button [6] to

enlarge the stored data display area [2].

[6]
[8]
[7]
[4]

[2]

D747S30036

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Position in the Positional indication with reference to the workpiece or machine
[1] workpiece/machine — coordinate system.
coordinate system Use the counter switch button [3] to change the reference.
[2] Stored data — Stored data. Up to 4 sets of data can be stored.
[3] Counter switch button — Used to change the contents of the dislpay area [1].
[4] Storage button — Used to store the current position on the controlled axes.
Stored data select Used to select form among data sets 1 to 4.
[5] —
button
Display mode switch Used to change the display mode.
[6] —
button
[7] Delete button — Used to delete all stored data.
Pulse operation box Indication on whether or not the manual pulse operation box is
[8] —
ON/OFF currently activated.

5-67
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

3. Use of the POSITION TEACH window

Note : The UNDO/REDO function cannot be used for the POSITION TEACH window.

A. To store coordinates

(1) Tap the button at the top of the screen.

 The POSITION TEACH window appears on the screen.
(2) Perform axis movements to the desired position and then tap one of the storage buttons 1 to
4.
 The coordinates are set under the selected number of stored data.

B. To overwrite stored coordinates

(1) Tap the storage button under which coordinates are already set.
 A message box appears on the screen.
(2) Tap the [OK] button.
 The stored values are overwritten.

C. To delete stored coordinates

(1) Tap the delete button.
 A message box appears on the screen.
(2) Tap the [OK] button.
 Stored data 1 to 4 are all deleted.

4. To use the stored coordinates for data entry

(1) Call up the display on which to enter data using the stored coordinates.
(2) On the POSITION TEACH window tap the desired coordinate.
 The calculator window is displayed.
(3) Tap the get button.
 The selected coordinate is displayed in the data display area of the calculator window.
(4) Select the item to which to enter the coordinate, and tap the key on the calculator
window.
 The particular value in the POSITION TEACH window is entered to the selected item.

5-9 Display for Intelligent Thermal Shield

 For detailed information see the separate Operating Manual for the Intelligent
Thermal Shield function.

5-68
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
5-10 TRIAL MODE Window

 Designed to assist the machining of the first workpiece by a MAZATROL program.

Function  The functions of program stop and coolant stop can automatically be executed for ease of examining the
approach and escape positions.

5-10-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[1] [2] [3]

[4]

D749S30084

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] Function names — Names of the functions provided
[2] Settings (APPROACH) — Settings for the functions provided
[3] Settings (ESCAPE) — Settings for the functions provided
[4] Trial mode button — Used to alternately select and cancel the trial mode.

Remark : When the trial mode is selected, the special operation mode is indicated by a
message (TRIAL MODE) at the top of the display.

5-69
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

5-10-2 Functions and settings

The functions provided for the trial mode are as follows.
Function Setting Unit Description APPROACH ESCAPE

Used to enable or disable the automatic stop of coolant feed.

COOLANT
MAN/AUTO — If AUTO is selected, coolant feed is automatically stopped at  
STOP
the moment when the tool arrives at the tool change position.
Used to enable or disable the function for stopping program
execution.
If ON is selected, program execution is automatically stopped
PROGRAM at the following moment:
OFF/ON —  
STOP  The axis movement of approach arrives at the start point of
cutting.
 The axis movement of escape arrives at the turret-indexing
position.
Used to enable or disable the automatic stop before arrival at
the start point of cutting.
If VALID is selected, the axis movement of approach is
VALID/INVALID — stopped at a position before the start point of cutting.
The distance from that position to the start point of cutting
REMAINING (hereinafter referred to as remaining distance) is to be speci-  —
DIST. STOP fied as REMAINING DISTANCE.
Used to enter the remaining distance.
REMAINING mm The text box can only be activated when VALID is selected for
DISTANCE (in) the REMAINING DIST. STOP function.
Note : The default value is 9999.99 mm or 393.7 in.
Used to enable or disable the limitation of the speed of rapid
traverse.
VALID/INVALID — If VALID is selected, the axis movement of approach is per-
formed at the special rate of rapid traverse using the special
override value, both specified for the trial mode.
Used to enter the upper limit of the rate of rapid traverse.
The text box can only be activated when VALID is selected for
the RAPID FEED RATE LIMIT function.
mm/min
RAPID FEED Note :
RAPID (in/min)
1. The default value is 1 mm/min (in/min).
FEED RATE  —
2. The value of parameter M1 is used if it is less than the
LIMIT
setting of this item.
Used to enter the value of overriding the rate of rapid traverse.
The text box can only be activated when VALID is selected for
the RAPID FEED RATE LIMIT function.
RAPID FEED Note :
%
OVERRIDE 1. The default value is 1%.
2. The value selected by the rapid traverse override switch
on the operating panel is used if it is less than the set-
ting of this item.

: Available
Note 1: The settings for the trial mode are not cleared by turning off the NC unit.
Note 2: The trial mode is canceled in the initial state established by turning on the NC unit.
Note 3: The settings for the trial mode cannot be modified during automatic operation or when
the trial mode is selected.
Note 4: The selection of the trial mode during automatic operation does not become effective
until the execution of the current block is finished.
Note 5: The upper limit of the rate of rapid traverse can be specified independently for each
axis. The upper limit for an axis, however, may be overstepped by the speed of a
resultant linear motion from simultaneous control of multiple axes.

5-70
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
5-10-3 Example of operation
The operation in the trial mode is detailed below.

[5]
Escape movement

[1]

[4] Approach movement

[3] [2]

D749S30085

<Approach movement>
[1] Position of completion of the tool change command
 The feed of coolant is automatically stopped if AUTO is selected for the COOLANT
STOP function.
 The machine is automatically brought into the state of feed hold if ON is selected for the
PROGRAM STOP function.
 The special rate of, and special overriding value for, rapid traverse (RAPID FEED and
RAPID FEED OVERRIDE) are applied to the axis movement of approach if VALID is
selected for the RAPID FEED RATE LIMIT function.
Note 1: Take the ending point of the preceding unit of machining to be the “position of
completion of the tool change command” if the same tool is to be used for the
machining unit in question (i.e. if no tool change is required).
Note 2: Take the start point of automatic operation to be the “position of completion of the
tool change command” if the currently selected tool is to be used for the first
machining unit (i.e. if no tool change is required).
[2] Stop position of axis movement shortened by the remaining distance before the start point
of cutting
 The machine is automatically brought into the state of feed hold at a position distant from
the start point of cutting by the remaining distance if VALID is selected for the RE-
MAINING DIST. STOP function.
 The special rate of, and special overriding value for, rapid traverse (RAPID FEED and
RAPID FEED OVERRIDE) are applied to the axis movement of approach if VALID is
selected for the RAPID FEED RATE LIMIT function.
Remark : The machine may be brought into the state of feed hold at a position more
distant than specified, depending on the rate of rapid traverse for approach.
Note : In case that the straight approach path is replaced with multiple segments either
according to the TPC relay points manually set or by the function for automatic
avoidance of collision with the workpiece, the RAPID FEED RATE LIMIT and RE-
MAINING DIST. STOP functions are executed for each segment repeatedly.

5-71
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

[3] Start point of cutting

 The machine is automatically brought into the state of feed hold when the tool arrives at
this point.
 The feed of coolant is started again in the automatic operation restarted if AUTO is
selected for the COOLANT STOP function.
<Escape movement>
[4] Ending point of machining
[5] Position of output of the tool change command
 The feed of coolant is automatically stopped if AUTO is selected for the COOLANT
STOP function.
 The machine is automatically brought into the state of feed hold if ON is selected for the
PROGRAM STOP function.
Note 1: The COOLANT STOP and PROGRAM STOP functions are not executed if the
same tool is to be used for the next machining unit (i.e. if no tool change is re-
quired).
Note 2: The COOLANT STOP and PROGRAM STOP functions are not executed in the
case of the machining unit just before the END unit.
Remark : TRIAL MODE STOP appears in the message display area when the machine is
automatically brought into the state of feed hold by the PROGRAM STOP or REMAIN-
ING DIST. STOP function.

5-72
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 5
5-11 HANDLE INTERUPT Window

Used to check, and manually change, the amount of the shifting interruption that has been performed in a
Function
pause of automatic operation using the manual pulse handle.

This window may not be available for some specifications of the machine.
Remarks Set bit 5 of parameter K258 to one (1) to enable the function for digitally setting the (axis position) counter
in the HANDLE INTERUPT window.

5-11-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

A. With the “counter setting” function disabled B. With the “counter setting” function enabled

[1] [2] [1] [2] [3]

[4]

[5]

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] Axis name — Name of the controlled axis.
mm (in) Amount of shifting interruption, with reference to the machine coordi-
[2] Interruption amount
degrees nate system.
Flag ( ) added to an interruption amount which contains a counter
[3] Counter setting flag —
setting value.
mm (in)
[4] Data entry field Value temporarily keyed in for the counter setting function.
degrees
Used to clear only an interruption amount digitally set so as to restore
[5] [CLEAR] button — the total amount of the shifting interruption performed manually using
the manual pulse handle.

Note : The interruption amount digitally set using the “counter setting” function is cleared
when:
 the [CLEAR] button is tapped,
 the RESET key ( ) is pressed, on condition that the function concerned (for
canceling the digitally set amount of handle interruption by “resetting”) is enabled (F95
bit 6 = 1, or F168 bit 5 = 1), or
 the execution of a program end command is completed, on condition that the function
concerned (for canceling the digitally set amount of handle interruption by “resetting”) is
enabled (F95 bit 6 = 1).

5-73
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS

5-11-2 Counter setting procedure

On condition that the function for digitally setting the (axis position) counter in the HANDLE
INTERUPT window is enabled (K258 bit 5 = 1), follow the procedure below to change the
counter value as required.
(1) Tap the row of the interruption amount to be changed.
(2) Set the desired new value of interruption amount using the resulting screen keyboard.

5-74 E
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

6-1 SET UP RECORD Display

 Various data required for program execution set-up are displayed.

Function  Three display modes are provided for the respective types of setup work. Use the custom display
function to select the information types appropriate for the required setup work.

Remarks Printer output of this display allows next set-up to be readily executed.

6-1-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]

D747S30038E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] WNo. — No. of the program being selected in the foreground.
[2] Program name — Name of the program
[3] TNo. — Number of the tool currently mounted on the spindle
[4] DATE Y/M/D The date when the program was last edited
[5] MATERIAL — Material name of the workpiece to be machined

6-1
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

6-1-2 Custom display

Select a display mode, and specify the contents of the sub-displays, for the required setup work.

1. Custom display area

The SETUP RECORD display consists of three display areas as shown below.
The upper left area is a common display area, and the other two areas can be used for custom
display according to the required setup work.
Display mode for workpiece setting or tooling Display mode for coordinate system setting

[2] [4]

[1] [3] [1]

[4] [2] [5]

[5] [3]

No. Item Data description

[1] Common display area Information on the tools, material, etc.
Title of the information items displayed in the upper half of Custom display
[2] Title of Custom display area 1
area.
[3] Custom display area 1 Information items of the type selected by the customer.
Title of the information items displayed in the lower half of Custom display
[4] Title of Custom display area 2
area.
[5] Custom display area 2 Information items of the type selected by the customer.

6-2
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
Two areas for custom display can be used freely by the customer to view information on various
items according to the selected display mode.
The information types selectable for the custom display area are as follows.
: Selectable
Display mode
No. Title Data description Workpiece Coord. sys.
Tooling
setting setting

Display of the product shape described in the

1 PRODUCT SHAPE  — —
program selected on the POSITION display
2 ADDITIONAL INFO Display of the specified graphic data  — —
Display of the note or comment made on the program
3 MEMO  — —
selected on the POSITION display
Display of the information given on the 3D SETUP
4 3D SETUP DATA  — —
display
Display of the coordinate systems to be used for the
5 WPC SETTING execution of the program selected on the POSITION —  —
display
6 MEASURE Display of the information on manual measurement —  —
Display of the information given on the WORK
7 WORK OFFSET —  —
OFFSET display
WORK POS Display of the information given on the WORK
8 —  —
ERROR COMP POSITION ERROR COMP. display
Display of the information given on the DYNAMIC
9 DYNAMIC OFS —  —
OFFSET display
Display of the information given on the ADDITIONAL
10 ADDITIONAL WPC —  —
WPC display
Display of the tools to be used for the execution of the
11 USED TOOL LIST — — 
program selected on the POSITION display
TOOL INFOR- Display of the information on the tool selected from
12 — — 
MATION the list (10)
Display of a 3D model for the tool selected from the
13 TOOL MODEL — — 
list (10)
Display of the information given on the TOOL DATA
14 TOOL DATA — — 
display

Note : The available items depend on the specifications of the machine.

6-3
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

Select a custom display area (the title of which is provided with a tab mark) by tapping to perform
data settings as required.
The fixed (upper left) display area is selected (active) in the initial state.
(1) Tap Custom display area 1.
 Custom display area 1, if selectable, is selected (made active) with its title and frame
being highlighted in light blue.

(2) Tap Custom display area 2.

 Custom display area 2, if selectable, is then selected (made active) with its title and
frame being highlighted in light blue.

(3) Tap anywhere outside Custom display area 2.

 The selection of Custom display area 2 is canceled.

2. Changing the display mode (the type of setup work)

(1) Tap anywhere on the common display area.
 The following submenu is displayed.
WORK WPC TOOLING DISPLAY DISPLAY
ATTACH SETTING MODE SELECT 1 SELECT 2
MODE MODE

Select the desired display mode (type of setup work).

 The construction of the display is changed accordingly.

6-4
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
3. Changing the contents of custom display areas
(1) Tap anywhere on the common display area.
 The following submenu is displayed.
WORK WPC TOOLING DISPLAY DISPLAY
ATTACH SETTING MODE SELECT 1 SELECT 2
MODE MODE

(2) According as the change of contents is required for Custom display area 1 or 2, tap the
[DISPLAY SELECT 1] or [DISPLAY SELECT 2] menu item.
 The DISPLAY SELECT window appears.

(3) Select the desired item by tapping and tap the [OK] button.
 The contents of the custom display area concerned are changed accordingly.
Note : One and the same type of information cannot be selected for both custom display
areas. Such an erroneous selection will only cause an alarm (459 DISPLAY PRO-
TECT).

6-5
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

4. PRODUCT SHAPE
A product shape is displayed according to the description in the program selected on the
POSITION display.
 3D product shape is displayed in the case of a MAZATROL program.
 Tool path is displayed in the case of an EIA/ISO program.
Use fingers as required to rotate, enlarge or reduce the model displayed on the screen.

A. Displayed data

[1]

D747S30038

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Product shape described in the program selected on the POSITION
display.
[1] Product shape —
For MAZATROL: 3D product shape
For EIA/ISO: Tool path

C. Remarks
When the table selection function is enabled, the shape of the product on that worktable is
displayed which is selected on the TRACE display.

 See Section 5-2 for more information.

6-6
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
5. ADDITIONAL INFO
Graphic data are displayed according to the selection.

A. Displayed data

[2] [3]

[1]

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] Graphics data — Display of the selected graphic data.
[2] File name — Name of the graphic file currently used.
[3] Page — Page information.

C. Display operations

PICTURE FILE FILE

SELECT ADDITION DELETE

1 2 3

<Menu functions>
1. PICTURE SELECT
Used to select the desired graphic data.
(1) Tap the [PICTURE SELECT] menu item.
 The PICTURE SELECT window appears on the screen.

(2) Select the file to be used and tap the [OK] button.

6-7
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

2. FILE ADDITION
Used to add graphic files. Up to 99 files can be prepared for graphic display.
(1) Tap the [FILE ADDITION] menu item.
 The FOLDER NAME SET window appears on the screen.

(2) Specify the folder of image files and tap the [OK] button.
 The FILE ADDITION window appears on the screen.

(3) Select the file to be added and tap the [OK] button.

3. FILE DELETE
Used to delete graphic files prepared.
(1) Tap the [FILE DELETE] menu item.
 The FILE DELETE window appears on the screen.

(2) Select the file to be deleted and tap the [OK] button.

6-8
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
6. MEMO
Use this area to display and edit the note or comment made on the program that is currently
selected on the POSITION display.
Alphanumeric characters and symbols prepared on the screen keyboard can be used to make or
edit the comment.

A. Displayed data

[2]

[1]

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] Comment — Display of the note or comment made on the program concerned.
[2] Edit icon — Used to alternately activate and deactivate the edit mode.

6-9
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

7. 3D SETUP DATA
The display contents correspond to the information given on the 3D SETUP display.

A. Displayed data

[1] [2] [3]

D747S30040

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] 3D shape tree display — Current arrangement of the 3D models.
[2] 3D shape — Graphical representation of the 3D models.
[3] Model information — Information on the model currently selected.

C. Display operations
TABLE FIXTURE W/P MAT ZOOM TO >>>
SHOW / SHOW / SHOW / FIT
HIDE HIDE HIDE
1 1 1 2 4

XY PLANE YZ PLANE ZX PLANE XY PLANE YZ PLANE ZX PLANE 3D VIEW >>>

180° 180° 180°

3 3 3 3 3 3 4

<Menu functions>
1. SHOW/HIDE
Used to alternately show and hide the model concerned.
2. ZOOM TO FIT
Used to fit the model entirely in the display area, without changing its attitude (the point of
view).
3. View change
Used to select the plane and direction of the view.
4. Menu changeover
Used to display another menu.

6-10
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
8. WPC SETTING
Information is given on the coordinate systems to be used for the execution of the program
selected on the POSITION display.
 For a MAZATROL program: Information on the WPC units.
 For an EIA/ISO program: Selection of this information type can only cause the alarm 440
EIA/ISO PROGRAM DESIGNATED.

A. Displayed data

[4]

[1] [2] [3]

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] UNo. — UNo. of a WPC unit
[2] UNIT — Serial number of the WPC unit
[3] ADD. WPC — Information on the setting under ADD. WPC, if specified.
[4] Settings — Settings (of the origin) for the coordinate system concerned.

C. Display operations
 When the cursor is placed on an ADD. WPC item:
G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 A B >>>

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2

C D E F G H I J >>>

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2

G54.1P >>>

1 2

 When the cursor is placed on a setting item:

INCRMENT
INPUT

<Menu functions>
1. Selection for ADD. WPC
Used to select a setting under ADD. WPC.

6-11
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

2. Menu changeover
Used to display another menu.
3. INCRMENT INPUT
Used to activate the incremental input function.

9. MEASURE (for manual measurement)

Manual measurement can be performed from this area for both dimensional measurement and
results display in the manual mode.
 With manual measurement, therefore, it is easy to perform measurements after setup or
machining without having to prepare a program.
 Since it presents coordinates display in addition to dimensional display, the manual mea-
surement function can also be used for workpiece alignment.

 See Subsection 6-1-3 for more information.

10. WORK OFFSET

The display contents correspond to the information given on the WORK OFFSET display.

A. Displayed data

[1] [2]

[3] [3] [3]

[3] [3] [4]

[5]
D747S30041E

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] No. — No. of the workpiece zero point data set
[2] — — G-code
X, Y, Z mm (in) Distance on each axis from the machine zero point to the zero point of the
[3]
A, C degrees workpiece coordinate system. (Offset of workpiece zero-point)
X, Y, Z mm (in)
[4] Shift amount of workpiece zero-point in each workpiece coordinate system
A, C degrees

6-12
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
No. Item Unit Data description
Number of the page currently displayed and the total number of pages
a/b
[5] Page —
a: Number of the page currently displayed
b: Total number of pages

C. Display operations

SEARCH WORK
P No. OFFSET

1 7

 When the cursor is placed on a setting item (G54 to G58, or SHIFT):

INCRMENT TEACH EIA SEARCH TABLE COPY WORK
INPUT TEACH P No. CENTER OFFSET
SETTING
2 3 4 1 5 6 7

<Menu functions>
1. SEARCH P No.
Used to search for any required number of the offset data item.
2. INCRMENT INPUT
Used to activate the incremental input function.
3. TEACH
Used to enter at the cursor position the machine coordinate that denotes the current
position of the tip of the tool mounted on the spindle.
4. EIA TEACH
Used to enter at the cursor position the machine coordinate that is calculated using the tool
length registered on the TOOL OFFSET display.
5. TABLE CENTER SETTING
Used to enter a coordinate of the axis of table rotation. Only available when the cursor is
placed on a setting item of the X- or Y-axis.
6. COPY
Used to copy the settings of the specified coordinate system.
7. WORK OFFSET
Used to change over to the WORK OFFSET display.

 See Section 6-2 for a detailed description of display operations.

11. WORK POS ERROR COMP (optional)

The display contents correspond to the information given on the WORK POSITION ERROR
COMP. display
Remark : The above-mentioned display cannot be used unless the corresponding option is
enabled.

6-13
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

A. Displayed data
[1] [2]

[3] [3]

[3] [3]

[3] [3]

[4]
[3]

D747S30042E

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] P: — No. of the data set for workpiece setup error correction
[2] — — G-code
x, y, z mm (in)
[3] Particular data set for workpiece setup error correction
a, b, c, A, C degrees
x, y, z mm (in)
[4] Common correction data
A, C degrees

C. Display operations
INCRMENT AUTO WORK POS
INPUT SET ERROR
COMP.
1 2 3

<Menu functions>
1. INCRMENT INPUT
Used to activate the incremental input function.
2. AUTO SET
Used to enter at the cursor position the machine coordinate of the current position.
Note : Do not use this menu function when [INCRMENT INPUT] is activated; otherwise
an alarm is triggered (1431 AUTO SET ERROR).
3. WORK POS ERROR COMP.
Used to change over to the WORK POSITION ERROR COMP. display.

6-14
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
12. DYNAMIC OFS (optional)
The display contents correspond to the information given on the DYNAMIC OFFSET display
Remark : The above-mentioned display cannot be used unless the corresponding option is
enabled.

A. Displayed data

[1] [2]

[3] [3]

[3] [3]

[3] [3]

[3] [3]

D747S30043

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] P: — No. of the data set for dynamic offset
[2] — — G-code
X, Y, Z mm (in)
[3] Particular data set for dynamic offset
A, C degrees

C. Display operations

INCRMENT TEACH DYNAMIC

INPUT OFFSET

1 2 3

<Menu functions>
1. INCRMENT INPUT
Used to activate the incremental input function.
2. TEACH
Used to enter at the cursor position the machine coordinate that denotes the current
position of the tip of the tool mounted on the spindle.
3. DYNAMIC OFFSET
Used to change over to the DYNAMIC OFFSET display.

6-15
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

13. ADDITIONAL WPC

The display contents correspond to the information given on the ADDITIONAL WPC display.

A. Displayed data

[1]

[2] [2] [2]

[2] [2] [2]

[2] [2]

[2] [2]

D747S30044E

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] WPC — Name of the WPC data set with ID-code from A to K
X, Y, Z mm (in)
[2] Coordinates
th, A, C degrees

C. Display operations
INCRMENT TEACH TABLE COPY ADDITION
INPUT CENTER
SETTING
1 2 3 4 5

<Menu functions>
1. INCRMENT INPUT
Used to activate the incremental input function.
2. TEACH
Used to enter at the cursor position the machine coordinate that denotes the current
position of the tip of the tool mounted on the spindle.
3. TABLE CENTER SETTING
Used to enter a coordinate of the axis of table rotation. Only available when the cursor is
placed on a setting item of the X- or Y-axis.
4. COPY
Used to copy the settings of the specified coordinate system.
5. ADDITION
Used to change over to the ADDITIONAL WPC display.

6-16
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
 See Section 6-4 for a detailed description of display operations.

14. USED TOOL LIST

Information is given on the tools to be used for the execution of the program selected on the
POSITION display.

A. Displayed data

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]

D747S30045E

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] TNo., PKNo. — Number of the tool (pocket)
[2] TOOL — Name of the tool
[3] PART — Section to be machined by the tool
[4] NOM. NOM- — Naminal size or nominal diameter
TOOL LENGTH
[5] Y/M/D Date on which the tool length was last updated
WRITE DATE
[6] WEAR COMP. mm (in) Wear compensation amount
[7] REMAIN — Information on the tool life
[8] TOOL MODEL — Name of the tool model

C. Display operations
INCRMENT POSITION TOOL TOOL
INPUT MODEL DATA
FILE
1 2 3 4

<Menu functions>
1. INCRMENT INPUT
Used to activate the incremental input function.
2. POSITION
Used to change over to the POSITION display.
3. TOOL MODEL FILE
Used to change over to the TOOL MODEL MANAGEMENT display.
4. TOOL DATA
Used to change over to the TOOL DATA display.

6-17
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

15. TOOL MODEL

The tool model is graphically displayed for the tool selected from the USED TOOL LIST.
Use fingers appropriately to rotate as well as enlarge or reduce the graphic in the display area.

A. Displayed data

[1]

[2]

D747S30046

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] Model name — Name of the tool model
[2] Model — 3D tool model

16. TOOL INFORMATION

Information is given on the tool selected from the USED TOOL LIST.

A. Displayed data

[1]

D747S30047E

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] Tool information — Various information items of the selected tool.

17. TOOL DATA

The display contents correspond to the information given on the TOOL DATA display.

 See the description under 6 in Subsection 5-1-4 for more information.

 See Section 8-1 for a detailed description of display operations.

6-18
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
6-1-3 Manual measurement

1. Function overview
Two main purposes of manual measurement are as follows.

A. Workpiece dimension measurement

Items below can be measured.
 Diameter and center coordinates of a circular shape
 Workpiece coordinate of a surface, and its inclination with respect to a machine coordinate axis
 Straightness of a surface, and its inclination with respect to a machine coordinate axis
Combination of the above three measuring results allows the following values to be obtained:
 Center distance between two circular shapes ([1] in the figure below)
 Distance between the center of a circular shape and a surface ([2] in the figure below)
 Distance, parallelism, perpendicularity, and inclination between two surfaces ([3] in the figure
below)

[1] Center distance [2] Distance between [3] Surface distance

circle center and surface
Distance measurements NM210-00446’

B. Alignment function
WPC measurement can be accomplished by the manual measurement function for the sake of
alignment even when the workpiece origin is to be set to the center of a hole.
Remark : The MDI MMS function, also useable for alignment, can only measure the coordi-
nate of an XY-, XZ-, or YZ-plane, and is not useful for measurement of hole center.
Moreover, MDI MMS is exclusively designed for WPC measurement for a program,
and so it is not proper for checking coordinates only, for example. The execution of a
MAZATROL MMS unit allows the measurement in question, indeed, but requires
program preparation time.

6-19
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

2. Measurement patterns
The following five measurement patterns are available:
 Circle measurement (for obtaining diameter and center coordinates of a hole/boss)
 Surface measurement (for obtaining coordinate and inclination of a surface)
 Straightness measurement [optional] (for obtaining straightness between two arbitrary points)
 One-point measurement (for obtaining coordinate X, Y, or Z of a reference surface)
 Two-point measurement (for obtaining center line coordinate of a groove/step)
In addition, combinations of the five measurement patterns above can be used to calculate
distance, angle, parallelism, and perpendicularity.
Note : As for machines with a spindle head of swiveling type, perform manual measurement
with the spindle head being oriented at 0°, 90°, or –90°; otherwise an alarm will be
caused (497 HEAD ANGLE INCORRECT).
Here follows a detailed description of the measurement patterns available.

A. Circle measurement (Three measurement points)

A X
C B

Circle measurement M3S054

Measuring procedure
 Measurement points A, B, and C can be positioned arbitrarily (on condition that they are
different from one another.)
 Measuring movement (movement of touch sensor) must be parallel to one of the orthogonal
axes (simultaneous contol of two axes is not available). The use of Z-axis direction (±),
however, will cause an alarm.
 Circle measurement is only possible in the XY-plane.
 Z-coordinate must be identical at points A, B, and C. If the difference along the Z-axis
exceeds the setting of parameter L12, a warning will be given (but measurement is possible).

Parameter Z
L12

X
Point A
Point B

Z-coordinate M3S055

6-20
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
B. Surface measurement
The surface to be measured must be parallel to the X-, Y- or Z-axis.
1. Surface designation
The surface is named after the axis to which it is parallel. A surface parallel to the X-axis, for
example, is referred to as an X-axis surface.

Z Z Z

X Y X Y X Y
Parallel to X-axis Parallel to Y-axis Parallel to Z-axis
  
Y-axis surface Z-axis surface
X-axis surface

Surface designation M3S056

2. Decision of measurement surface

Which axis surface has been measured is decided as follows from the direction of
measuring feed and the coordinates of the two measured points.
1. Two axis surfaces are selected by the feed direction.
2. Decision is made from comparison between axis components of the point-to-point
distance.

Example : Feed in the X-axis direction

 Exclusion of X-axis surface.
Distance components: z > y
 Decision for Y-axis surface.

z

y

X Y
Decision of measurement surface
M3S057

6-21
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

3. Angle selection
Angular data for various axis surfaces denotes the following.
 X-axis surface .......... CCW angle from +Y-axis on YZ-plane (150° in example below)
 Y-axis surface .......... CCW angle from +Z-axis on ZX-plane (160° in example below)
 Z-axis surface .......... CCW angle from +X-axis on XY-plane (135° in example below)

Z Z Z

–20°
150°
160°

–45°
Y
X X Y X Y
–30° 135°

X-axis surface Y-axis surface Z-axis surface

Angular measurement M3S058

4. Measuring procedure
 In the case shown below, set the measurement points A and B so as to satisfy the
condition: parameter L12  . If L12 < , a warning will be given (but measurement is
possible).

A


X Y

Surface measurement M3S059

 Measuring movement (movement of touch sensor) must be parallel to one of the

orthogonal axes (simultaneous contol of two axes is not available).
 Measuring movement direction must be identical for measurement points A and B;
otherwise an alarm will be caused.

6-22
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
C. Straightness measurement (option)
1. Decision of measurement surface

 Decision of measurement surface is the same as that of surface measure-

ment (2-B).

2. Angular measurement
Angle is obtained for a line approximated by the least square method.
3. Measuring procedure
 After manual measurement of A and B, points 1 to n will be measured automatically. The
number of measurement points n must be entered by the operator (1  n  30).

A B

…… ……
1 2 …… …… n

Straightness measurement M3S060

 Measuring procedure is the same as that of surface measurement.

D. One-point measurement
Notes on measurement
 The measurement point can be set at any position.
 As a result of measurement, only the reference surface coordinate of the axis of measuring
feed is displayed.

E. Two-point measurement
1. Decision of measurement surface

 Decision of measurement surface is the same as that of surface measure-

ment (2-B).

2. Notes on measurement
An alarm will result if the axis of measuring feed for the second point differs from that for the
first point. In that case, operation can be continued from the second-point measurement by
correcting the axis of measuring feed after clearing the alarm.
3. Distance, angle, parallelism, perpendicularity
 Up to two items can be stored as measuring results. If possible, distance, angle,
parallelism, and perpendicularity between two data items can be calculated and
indicated.
 For calculation of parallelism and perpendicularity, value will be indicated always with
data 1 as reference.

6-23
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

3. Displayed data

A. Displayed data

[11]
[1] [2]

[5]

[3]

[6] [7]
[4]

[8]

[9] [10]
[12]

D747S30048E

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

mm (in)
[1] POSITION Current position of the tool tip in the workpiece coordinate system
degrees
mm (in)
[2] MACHINE Current position of the machine in the machine coordinate system
degrees
[3] MES. POS mm (in) Coordinates of the measurement point. See Table A below.
mm (in)
[4] RESULT Measuring results are displayed. See Table B below.
degrees
mm/min
[5] FEED Rate of feed for measurement (jog).
(in/min)
Linear distance derived from two sets of measuring results.
DISTANCE mm (in)
Blank if the distance is not obtainable. See Table C below.
[6]
X-, Y-, and Z-axis components of the distance derived from two sets of measuring
ELEMENT mm (in)
results.
Difference in angle between two surfaces.
ANGLE degrees
Blank if the difference is not obtainable.
Degree of parallelism/perpendicularity at “mm”, and the difference in angle
[7] between two surfaces at “%.”
PARALLEL/
mm Blank if the value in question is not obtainable.
PERPEN-
% The parallelism/perpendicularity will not be calculated unless the difference in
DICULAR
angle between two surfaces falls within the range of 0° or 180° ± parameter L13
(for parallelism), or 90° ± parameter L13 (for perpendicularity).
Work number, or one of the codes G54 to G59, additional basic coordinate systems
[8] WRITE DATA —
(A to K), or G54.1P1 to G54.1P300 (option), as writing destination
Number of the WPC unit.
[9] UNo. —
* Displayed only when a MAZATROL program is selected under [8] above.

6-24
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
No. Item Unit Data description
Coordinates to be written.
Note : When, on a correspondingly executed machine, the table selection
function is enabled (parameter D106 bit 4 = 1) and a WPC unit or an
ADDITIONAL WPC data set is designated as the writing destination, then the
WRITE DATA column presents R. T (Rotary Table) instead of the names of the
table’s rotational axes.
Table selection function enabled
WRITE DATA mm (in)
[10] WRITE DATA
(Coordinates) degrees
(TEST M M M )
UNo. ( ) X ( )
Y ( )
th ( )
Z ( )
R.T ( )

[11] MMS — Indications about touch sensor. See Table D below.

Measure-
[12] — See Table E below.
ment help

Table A
Surface Straightness One-point Two-point
Mode Circle measurement
measurement measurement measurement measurement
Points 2 (Starting/
3 2 1 2
displayed ending points)
Correction on Corrections are performed Corrections are performed assuming that the measurement plane is
measuring assuming that all measured either XY, XZ, or YZ.
results. points are present on a circle.

Table B
Surface Straightness One-point Two-point
Mode Circle measurement
measurement measurement measurement measurement
CIRCLE X PLANE, X STRGT., X STD, X CENTR,
Measure-
Y PLANE, Y STRGT., Y STD, Y CENTR,
ment pattern
Z PLANE Z STRGT. Z STD Z CENTR
Center coordinates (Z Coordinates of Coordinates of Coordinate of Coordinate of
refers to the first mea- the central point the central point reference surface the central point
X, Y, Z
surement point) of two points of starting and (of only one axis) on the axis of
ending points measuring feed

th — Angle Angle — —

Degree of
D Diameter — — —
straightness

Table C
Distance calculation pattern Conditions
Circle and Circle
Circle and Z-axis surface None
Circle and Straightness for the Z-axis
Circle and X- or Y-axis surface The surface must be parallel to the Z-axis (within the
Circle and Straightness for the X- or Y-axis surface tolerance of parameter L13).
One surface and the other of the same axis The two surfaces must be in the same angle (within the
One straightness and the other for the same axis tolerance of parameter L13).
One surface and the other of different axis The two surfaces must be parallel to each other (within
One straightness and the other for different axis the tolerance of parameter L13).

6-25
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

Table D
Function
1 The red LED will light when the touch sensor unit is powered on.
2 The red LED will light when the touch sensor is mounted in the spindle and the machine becomes
ready for measurement. The LED will turn off when the red LED 4 described below lights up.
3 The red LED will light while the touch sensor is being mounted in the spindle.
That is, measurement mode is on while this LED lights.
4 When the probe at the end of the touch sensor comes into contact with the workpiece or a fixing
attachment, the red LED will light and the red LED 2 described above will turn off.

Table E
CIRCLE SURFACE STRAIGHT 1 POINT 2 POINT
MEASURE MEASURE MEASURE MEASURE MEASURE

4. Mode changeover

A. Manual mode
 Any manual operation mode can be used during touch sensor positioning.
 For contact with measurement point, however, only pulse and feed keys
can be used. If skip signal comes on in other modes, an alarm will be caused.
(Measurement pattern is not cancelled.)

B. TAPE, MEMORY mode ( , )

Measurement is not allowed in these modes. An alarm will be caused if the pattern selection
menu item is tapped.
 If TAPE or MEMORY mode is selected during measurement, the measurement operation will
be cancelled.

C. MDI mode ( )

This mode can be used only in response to the corresponding mode change message given in
straightness measurement. In other cases, the same processing will occur as with other auto-
matic operation modes.

6-26
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
5. Measuring procedure
Measuring procedure is outlined below.

Pulse or JOG mode

Pulse/JOG or rapid traverse mode (MDI for straightness
measurement)
Touch sensor moved
Measurement pattern close to measurement Contact made
selection by menu by JOG End
point by manual feed

Repetition

Measuring procedure M3S062

Follow the respective procedures detailed below for the available measurement patterns.

A. Circle measurement

Manual [1st point]

JOG JOG

Manual Manual

JOG JOG

[3rd point] [2nd point]

JOG JOG

Circle measurement M3S063

(1) Tap the [CIRCLE MEASURE] menu item.

 This displays the message FIRST POINT MEASURING and activates the menu
function.
(2) Measure the first point using the jog feed function.
 This displays the coordinates of the first measurement point and then displays the
message SECOND POINT MEASURING.
(3) Measure the second point using the jog feed function.
 This displays the coordinates of the second measurement point and then displays the
message THIRD POINT MEASURING.
(4) Measure the third point using the jog feed function.
 This displays the coordinates of the third measurement point and the measuring results
(center coordinates of the circle).
 The menu function will be deactivated.

6-27
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

B. Surface measurement

Manual

JOG

[1st point]
JOG

Manua
l
JOG

[2nd point]
JOG

Surface measurement M3S064

(1) Tap the [SURFACE MEASURE] menu item.

 This displays the message FIRST POINT MEASURING and activates the menu
function.
(2) Measure the first point using the jog feed function.
 This displays the coordinates of the first measurement point and then displays the
message SECOND POINT MEASURING.
(3) Measure the second point using the jog feed function.
 This displays the coordinates of the second measurement point and the measuring
results (coordinates of the central point).
 The menu function will be deactivated.

C. Straightness measurement (option)

Automatic

Manual Manual

JOG JOG JOG JOG

Straightness measurement M3S065

(1) Tap the [STRAIGHT MEASURE] menu item.

 This displays the message REQUEST STARTING POINT and highlights the menu item
in green.
(2) Measure the starting point using the jog feed function.
 This displays the coordinates of the starting point of measurement and then displays the
message REQUEST FINAL POINT.
(3) Measure the ending point using the jog feed function.
 This displays the coordinates of the ending point of measurement and then displays the
message SELECT MDI MODE.

6-28
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
(4) Move the sensor away from the measurement surface using the jog feed function.
 Change over the operation mode to MDI after returning, and the system will display the
message NUMBER OF MEASURING POINTS?. Input the number (1 to 30) of points to
be measured using a screen keyboard.
The current number of measured points and the total number of points to be measured
will then be displayed, and the current number will be updated with each automatic
measurement.
The message PUSH CYCLE START BUTTON will be displayed after the setting of the
number.

(5) Press the button.

 This causes automatic measurement to be repeated the designated number of points.
 After measurement, measuring results will be displayed, and the color of the menu item
will turn to orange.
Note : To correctly operate the machine, the work number of the macroprogram to be called
up for manual straightness measurement must be the same as the work number set in
the corresponding parameter L15.

D. One-point measurement

Manual
First point

JOG

One-point measurement M3S066

(1) Tap the [1 POINT MEASURE] menu item.

 This displays the message MOVE TO THE MEASURING POINT.
(2) Execute the measurement using the jog feed function.
 This displays the coordinates and the measuring results.

6-29
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

E. Two-point measurement

Manual
Manual
First point Second point

JOG JOG

Two-point measurement M3S067

(1) Tap the [2 POINT MEASURE] menu item.

 This displays the message FIRST POINT MEASURING and activates the menu
function.
(2) Measure the first point using the jog feed function.
 This displays the coordinates of the first measurement point and then displays the
message SECOND POINT MEASURING.
(3) Measure the second point using the jog feed function.
 This displays the measuring results (coordinate of the central point).
 The menu function will be deactivated.

6. Other functions

A. Copying measuring results

Measuring results can be copied into the write-data registration column.

 Data displayed in that column can be written into the designated position
using the function described later in paragraph C.

(1) Tap the [COPY RESULT] menu item.

 This changes the menu as follows:
RESULT RESULT RESULT RESULT RESULT RESULT RESULT RESULT
1-X 1-Y 1-Z 1-theta 2-X 2-Y 2-Z 2-theta

(2) Select the desired menu item (Remark) and then tap the key. (Multiple menu items
can be selected).
Remark : The menu items concerned are composed of an identification number (1 or 2)
and an axis (X, Y, Z, or th) of the measuring results to be copied.
Note : If menu items of the same axis but of different measuring result number are
selected in sequence, the first selection will be replaced by the next selection.
 The measuring results that have been highlighted will be copied into the write-data
registration column.

6-30
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
B. Clearing measureing results
(1) Tap the [CLEAR RESULT] menu item.
 This displays the message CLEAR MEASURING RESULT No.?.
(2) Specify the identification number (1, 2, or 0) of the measuring results to be cleared.
 The distance and angle items will then be cleared together with the measuring results.
Thus, it will become possible for either of the two points to be measured once again.
 Enter zero (0) if both data sets No. 1 and No. 2 are to be cleared.

C. Data writing
Values displayed in the write-data registration column (WRITE DATA) can be written into the
designated position. The R. T value can be written in particular into the corresponding item of the
basic coordinate unit (WPC) or of the data set of additional basic coordinates (ADDITIONAL
WPC) when the table selection function is enabled.
(1) Tap the write-data registration column to display the cursor.
(2) Use one of the following three methods to designate the writing destination:
 Writing into the basic coordinate unit (WPC):
( 123456M) ----- Set the work number of the writing destination program by selecting from the
WORK No. SELECT window.
UNo.( 1) ------ Input the unit number of the required WPC unit within the program.

Writing into work offsets (WORK OFFSET):

( G54 ) ------ Set a code from G54 to G59 using the menu.
 Writing into additional work offsets (Option)
( G54.1P6) ----- Select “G54.1” from the menu. The message G54.1 P-CODE? will then be
displayed. Input the P number of the writing destination.
 Writing into additional basic coordinates (ADDITIONAL WPC):
( A ) ------ Set a code from A to K using the appropriate menu.

(3) Tap the [WRITE] menu item.

 This displays the message WRITE <INPUT>? and activates the menu function.
(4) Tap the key.
 The coordinate data will then be written into the designated destination.
When writing is completed, the menu function will be deactivated.
 Data for th will be ignored if the coordinates are written into work offsets.
Remark : Select, or put a check mark to, the [Store Write Data] option (displayed by tapping
and [Setup]), and the WRITE DATA values will not be cleared simply by a
change in the data type of the writing destination: data of the basic coordinate unit
(WPC), of the ADDITIONAL WPC display (A to K), or the work offset settings (G54 to
G59, or G54.1P).
Example : When the [Store Write Data] option is selected
Data to be written (into a WPC unit) Destination changed (to work offset)
WRITE DATA WRITE DATA
(TEST M ) ( G54 )
UNo.( 1 ) X (-220.23) X (-220.23)
Y ( -60.5 ) Y ( -60.5 )
th ( 0. ) Z (-300.25)
Z (-300.25) A ( 90. )
A ( 90. ) C ( 30. )
C ( 30. )

6-31
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

Note : When the table selection function is enabled, however, the above-mentioned “Store”
function is of no effect for the value of the table’s rotational axis (R. T).

D. Incremental data input

Incremental data input can be used for setting the data to be written.
(1) Tap the [INCRMENT INPUT] menu item.
 This displays the message LENGTH TO ADD?.
(2) Specify the data to be added. The specified data will then be added to the data indicated by
the cursor.

E. Clearing entire data setting

Follow the procedure below to clear the entire data in the write-data setting column:
(1) Tap the [ALL CLEAR] menu item.
 This displays the message ALL CLEAR?.
(2) Tap the key.
 This clears the entire data in the write-data setting column.

7. MAZATROL program window

When a MAZATROL program is designated in the parentheses under WRITE DATA and the
cursor remains set at ( ) or UNo., the MAZATROL program window can be displayed.
(1) Move the cursor onto the name of the MAZATROL program or the UNo. item.
(2) Tap , [Window] and [Program] in that order.
 This displays the MAZATROL program window corresponding to the specified program
and UNo. data.
Note : The window, however, will not display any data if the unit number that has been
selected at UNo. is not included in the specified MAZATROL program.

6-32
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
6-2 WORK OFFSET Display

Function Setting zero-point offset for six workpiece coordinate systems (G54 to G59) for EIA/ISO programs.

Remarks This type of display is available as an option.

6-2-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[1] [3] [5] [7]

[2] [4] [6] [8]

D747S30049E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

X, Y, Z mm (in) Distance from the machine zero-point to the zero-point in G54 workpiece
[1] coordinate system on each axis
A, C degrees (Offset of workpiece zero-point)
X, Y, Z mm (in) Distance from the machine zero-point to the zero-point in G55 workpiece
[2] coordinate system on each axis
A, C degrees (Offset of workpiece zero-point)
X, Y, Z mm (in) Distance from the machine zero-point to the zero-point in G56 workpiece
[3] coordinate system on each axis
A, C degrees (Offset of workpiece zero-point)
X, Y, Z mm (in) Distance from the machine zero-point to the zero-point in G57 workpiece
[4] coordinate system on each axis
A, C degrees (Offset of workpiece zero-point)
X, Y, Z mm (in) Distance from the machine zero-point to the zero-point in G58 workpiece
[5] coordinate system on each axis
A, C degrees (Offset of workpiece zero-point)
X, Y, Z mm (in) Distance from the machine zero-point to the zero-point in G59 workpiece
[6] coordinate system on each axis
A, C degrees (Offset of workpiece zero-point)
X, Y, Z mm (in) Shift amount of workpiece zero-point in each workpiece coordinate system.
[7]
A, C degrees

6-33
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

No. Item Unit Data description

X, Y, Z mm (in) The same as the MACHINE item on the POSITION display.
[8]
A, C degrees Remark : See Section 5-1 for details.

6-2-2 Data registration

The following data can be registered on the WORK OFFSET display.
1. Offset value of the zero-point of the workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59 (items [1] to
[6])
Offset value of the workpiece zero-point is the offset value from the machine zero-point to
the workpiece zero-point.

G54 G55 G56 G57

Workpiece coordinate Workpiece coordinate Workpiece coordinate Workpiece coordinate
system 1 system 2 system 3 system 4

Workpiece Workpiece
zero-point 2 zero-point 3

Offset 2 Workpiece zero-point 4

Workpiece Offset 3
zero-point 1 Offset 4
Offset 1

G58
Machine zero-point Workpiece coordinate system 5
Offset 5

Offset 1: Offset value of the workpiece zero-point Workpiece zero-point 5

in the workpiece coordinate system 1
Offset 2: Offset value of the workpiece zero-point
in the workpiece coordinate system 2 G59
Offset 3: Offset value of the workpiece zero-point Workpiece coordinate
in the workpiece coordinate system 3 Offset 6 system 6
Offset 4: Offset value of the workpiece zero-point
in the workpiece coordinate system 4 Workpiece
Offset 5: Offset value of the workpiece zero-point zero-point 6
in the workpiece coordinate system 5
Offset 6: Offset value of the workpiece zero-point
in the workpiece coordinate system 6
D735S1013

6-34
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
2. Shift amount of the workpiece coordinate systems (item [7])
Offset value of the external workpiece zero-point for shifting all the workpiece coordinate
systems G54 to G59.

G54 G55 G56 G57

Workpiece coordinate Workpiece coordinate Workpiece coordinate Workpiece coordinate
system 1 system 2 system 3 system 4
Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece
zero-point 2 zero-point 3 zero-point 4

Offset 3
Workpiece Offset 2
zero-point 1 Offset 4
Offset 1

G58
Workpiece coordinate
Offset 5 system 5
Workpiece
Offset X zero-point 5

G59
Machine zero-point Workpiece coordinate
Offset 6
system 6
Workpiece
zero-point 6
Offset X : Offset value of external workpiece zero-point

D735S1014

1. Procedure for setting offset value of workpiece zero-point

A. If known offset value of workpiece zero-point is to be set

(1) Place the cursor on the axis position of the coordinate system where data setting is
required.
 Tap the display column of the desired coordinate system.
(2) Set the offset value.
 Key in the known data using the screen keyboard.
(3) Repeat the steps (1) and (2) until entire data of the intended axes have been set.

B. If unknown offset value of workpiece zero-point is to be set

If the offset to be set is unknown, the data can be set using the [TEACH] (tool-nose position data
store) function.
(1) Mount a tool whose length has already been registered.

 See Section 8-1 for information on tool length.

(2) Bring the tool nose to the intended workpiece zero-point.

 Carry out manual axis movements until the tool nose has reached the workpiece
zero-point.

6-35
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

(3) Place the cursor on the intended axis postion of the coordinate system where data setting is
required.
 Press the cursor key to call up the cursor on the screen and move the cursor to the axis
position of the coordinate system where the data is to be set.
(4) Tap the [TEACH] menu item.
(5) Set the distance from the workpiece zero-point to the tool’s center line, and to the tool nose,
along the X/Y- and the Z-axis respectively.
<Position of the workpiece zero-point>

Coordinate
reading position Machine zero-point

Workpiece zero-point
+Z

Workpiece

+X

Distance to the workpiece

5 zero-point (Radius of the tool)
M3S035

 The offset value will be set automatically.

2. Setting shift amount of the workpiece coordinate systems

The amount of shifting can be set in the same manner as described above unter “1. Procedure
for setting offset value of workpiece zero-point,” by replacing “workpiece zero-point” with “shifting
coordinates.”
Note : Using the [INCRMENT INPUT] menu function, desired data can easily be set by
specifying an incremental or decremental value for the existing data using a screen
keyboard.

6-2-3 Display operations

1. COPY
Follow the procedure below to copy another set of workpiece zero-point data.
(1) Move the cursor to the column of the data set to be replaced with the copied data.
(2) Tap the [COPY] menu item.
(3) From the displayed menu select an item corresponding to the set of workpiece zero-point
data to be copied.
 The selected set of workpiece zero-point data is copied at the cursor position.

2. TABLE CENTER SETTING

Follow the procedure below to enter a coordinate (provided in a parameter) of the axis of table
rotation as X-axis or Y-axis value.
(1) Move the cursor onto an X- or Y-axis data item.
(2) Tap the [TABLE CENTER SETTING] menu item.
 A message box is displayed.

6-36
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
(3) Tap the [OK] button.
 The particular coordinate (provided in a parameter) of the axis of table rotation is set as
an X-axis or Y-axis value.

6-3 MACRO VARIABLE Display

Function This display allows macro variables to be set for the user macros.

 Two types of macro variables can be used:

[1] Common variables ················ Can be used for both the main program and the macro programs
that are to be called up from the main program.
[2] Local vairables ····················· Can only be used in macro programs.
 The macro variable displays consist of the four sub-displays listed below.
[1] COMMON VARIABLE display ················· Allows the operator to set the common variables to be
used to execute user macros in the automatic
operation mode.
Remarks [2] COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK) display ··· Allows the operator to set the common variables to be
used to carry out tool path checks.
[3] LOCAL VARIABLE display····················· Allows the operator to check the local variables to be
used to execute user macros in the automatic
operation mode.
[4] LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) display ······· Allows the operator to check the local variables to be
used to carry out tool path checks.
Note : The LOCAL VARIABLE and LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) displays only list settings of variables;
the data on these two displays cannot be modified.
Refer to the PROGRAMMING MANUAL (EIA/ISO Program) for further details of user macros.

6-3-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

A. COMMON VARIABLE, COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK)

[1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2]

[4]

D747S30050E

6-37
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

B. LOCAL VARIABLE, LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK)

[3] [3]

[1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2]

[4]

D747S30051E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] No. — Variable number
[2] Data — Registered variable value
[3] NEST — Nesting number
[4] Page — Number of the current page/Total number of pages

6-3-2 Data registration

1. COMMON VARIABLE and COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK) displays

Only data of variables can be registered on the COMMON VARIABLE and COMMON VARI-
ABLE (CHECK) displays.
(1) Set the cursor on the data item under DATA of the variable to be set.
 After calling up the cursor on the display by tapping a cursor key, move the cursor to the
data item under DATA of the variable to be set.
(2) Use the screen keyboard to set the desired data as the intended variable.

2. LOCAL VARIABLE and LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) displays

No data can be set manually on the LOCAL VARIABLE and LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK)
displays.

6-38
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
6-3-3 Display operations

1. COMMON VARIABLE and COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK) displays

A. Automatically activating the incremental input function

Tapping the [INCRMENT INPUT] menu item allows the entered data to be added to the current
data.

 See the description under 5. in Subsection 3-2-2 for more information.

The [INCRMENT INPUT] menu function can be automatically activated as an initial condition for
data entry on the MACRO VARIABLE display.
(1) Select (or put a check mark to) the [Incremental First] option displayed by tapping
and [Setup] to initially make the [INCRMENT INPUT] menu function activated.

Remark : The selection of this option is not simply cancelled by turning-off.

B. Setting data in exponential form

Use the [Exp] menu function to set data in exponential form.
Example : To set the data 2 × 106
(1) Tap the keys in the following order: 2 [Exp] – 6

 This displays “2. E–6” under DATA.

C. Changing display pages on the screen

The COMMON VARIABLE and COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK) displays have multiple pages
of data registration.
 Tapping the button displays the next page.
 Tapping the button displays the previous page.

2. LOCAL VARIABLE and LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) displays

The LOCAL VARIABLE and LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) displays have as many pages as the
nesting levels 1 to 5. The number displayed on the data item [3] denotes the nesting level of the
current data.
 Tapping the button displays data of the next nesting.
 Tapping the button displays data of the previous nesting.

6-39
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

3. Changing display type of variables

The display type of macro variables (within a specific range of their values) can be chosen
between Exponential and Not Exponential.

(1) Select (or put a check mark to) the [Not Exponential Display] option displayed by tapping
and [Setup].
 Non-exponential display is chosen for variables’ values within a specific range as
indicated below.

Example : Entry of 0.01

 Exponential display: 1.E-2 Non-exponential display: 0.01

Range of absolute values of variables “Not Exponential Display” “Not Exponential Display”
(ABS var.) selected cancelled
ABS var. < 0.0001 Exponential form
0.0001  ABS var. < 1 Non-exponential form Exponential form
1  ABS var.  99999.9999 Non-exponential form
99999.9999 < ABS var. Exponential form

Remark : The selection of this option is not simply cancelled by turning-off.

4. Clearing data of variables

Set the bits 5, 6 and 7 of parameter F87 to one (1) when it is desirable to automatically clear the
respective ranges of common and local variables by resetting as well as upon completion of
program execution.
The relationship between parameters and macro variables to be cleared is as follows.

Parameter Macro variables concerned

F87 bit 5 Common variables (from #500 on)
F87 bit 6 Local variables
F87 bit 7 Common variables (#100 to #199)

Note : Macro variables for checking purposes are excluded from clearance.

6-40
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
6-4 ADDITIONAL WPC Display

Function Basic coordinates used for the MAZATROL program can be prepared externally on this display.

 10 sets (A to K, except I) of basic coordinates (of workpiece zero point) can be prepared on this display.
Remarks  Select the desired data set with the corresponding address A to K in the basic coordinate unit of a
MAZATROL program.

6-4-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[1] [3] [5] [7] [9]

[2] [4] [6] [8] [10]

D747S30052E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

X, Y, Z mm (in) Distance from the machine zero-point to the zero-point in workpiece

[1] coordinate system A on each axis
th, A, C, (R.T) degrees (Offset of workpiece zero-point)
X, Y, Z mm (in) Distance from the machine zero-point to the zero-point in workpiece
[2] coordinate system B on each axis
th, A, C, (R.T) degrees (Offset of workpiece zero-point)
X, Y, Z mm (in) Distance from the machine zero-point to the zero-point in workpiece
[3] coordinate system C on each axis
th, A, C, (R.T) degrees (Offset of workpiece zero-point)
X, Y, Z mm (in) Distance from the machine zero-point to the zero-point in workpiece
[4] coordinate system D on each axis
th, A, C, (R.T) degrees (Offset of workpiece zero-point)
X, Y, Z mm (in) Distance from the machine zero-point to the zero-point in workpiece
[5] coordinate system E on each axis
th, A, C, (R.T) degrees (Offset of workpiece zero-point)
X, Y, Z mm (in) Distance from the machine zero-point to the zero-point in workpiece
[6] coordinate system F on each axis
th, A, C, (R.T) degrees (Offset of workpiece zero-point)

6-41
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

No. Item Unit Data description

X, Y, Z mm (in) Distance from the machine zero-point to the zero-point in workpiece

[7] coordinate system G on each axis
th, A, C, (R.T) degrees (Offset of workpiece zero-point)
X, Y, Z mm (in) Distance from the machine zero-point to the zero-point in workpiece
[8] coordinate system H on each axis
th, A, C, (R.T) degrees (Offset of workpiece zero-point)
X, Y, Z mm (in) Distance from the machine zero-point to the zero-point in workpiece
[9] coordinate system J on each axis
th, A, C, (R.T) degrees (Offset of workpiece zero-point)
X, Y, Z mm (in) Distance from the machine zero-point to the zero-point in workpiece
[10] coordinate system K on each axis
th, A, C, (R.T) degrees (Offset of workpiece zero-point)

Note : When the table selection function is enabled (parameter D106 bit 4 = 1), each WPC
column (from A to K) presents R. T (Rotary Table) instead of the names of the table’s
rotational axes.
Example : For a machine with the table’s rotational axes A and C
Table selection function disabled Table selection function enabled
X 0. X 0.
Y 0. Y 0.
th 0. th 0.
Z 0. Z 0.
C 0. R.T 0.

When, with the table selection function being enabled, a data set prepared on the
ADDITIONAL WPC display is selected under ADD. WPC in the basic coordinate unit,
only the setting for the rotational axis selected with the table selection unit is used,
along with the data of the rectangular axes, for establishing the workpiece coordinate
system.

6-4-2 Data registration

Data registration procedure on the ADDITIONAL WPC display does not differ from that on the
WORK OFFSET display.

 Refer to Subsection 6-2-2.

Note : An attempt to use the [TEACH] menu function in data setting for a rotational axis, th or
R. T will only lead to an alarm (454 CURSOR POSITION INCORRECT).

6-4-3 Address setting

Follow the procedure below to set the desired address under ADD. WPC in the basic coordinate
unit of a MAZATROL program.
(1) Tap the [WPC] menu item on the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display.
 The basic coordinate unit will be displayed as follows:
UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y th Z C A
3 WPC-0

(2) Move the cursor to the ADD. WPC item.

 The following menu will be displayed.

6-42
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 A B >>>
(a)
d

 Tapping the [>>>] menu item changes over to the following menu.
C D E F G H J K >>>
(b)
d

(3) Tap the menu item corresponding to the desired address.

 The selected address will be displayed under ADD. WPC.
Note : When an address is set under ADD. WPC, data previously set under X to A will all be
cleared.
6-4-4 Considerations to measurement

1. Storing the tool tip position into the memory

A. ADDITIONAL WPC display

As with the WORK OFFSET display, the ADDITIONAL WPC display allows the tool tip position
to be stored into the memory.

 Refer to Subsection 6-2-2.

2. Coordinate measurement
When the MMS or MDI-MMS function is applied to the basic coordinate unit that has an address
set under ADD. WPC, the measured coordinates will be written into the column of that address
on the ADDITIONAL WPC display.
Example : Measurement of X coordinate by the MDI-MMS function

UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC

3 WPC-0 A ～

(1) Tap the [+X SENSOR] menu item.

(2) Enter 0.

(3) Press the button.

 WPC A
X -356.253  Automatically (over)written
Y 0.
th 0.
Z 0.
A 0.
C 0.

Note 1: Even if an address from G54 to G59 is designated for the ADD. WPC item, the modal
information for an EIA/ISO program will not be overridden with that address . This is
because in this case the G54 to G59 coordinate systems are considered as a
MAZATROL coordinate system.
Note 2: Data setting can only be performed either for the ADD. WPC item or the X to A items in
the WPC unit. If transferring a machining program from an external unit should cause
data setting for both sections in question, the ADD. WPC item will have priority.

6-43
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

6-5 Graphic Display of Straightness (Option)

Measurement results will be indicated in general in numeric values in the MEASURE display
area of the SET UP RECORD display. In particular, straightness data will be graphically shown
in a polygon line. The measurement results and graph can be printed out.

1. Calling up the STRAIGHTNESS GRAPH display

(1) Tap the [STRAIGHT GRAPH] menu item of the basic menu for the MEASURE display area
of the SET UP RECORD display.
 The following display appears on the screen.

D747S30053

2. Initial state of the STRAIGHTNESS GRAPH display

The initial state of this display depends upon measurement conditions as follows:
 Straightness measurement data not stored in either “1:” or “2:”
 Graph frame is only shown.
 No character is indicated.
 Straightness measurement data in either “1:” or “2:”
 Polygonal line is drawn with the horizontal axis passing the start and end points of straight-
ness data.
 Dimensions are shown.
 Straightness data in both “1:” and “2:”
 Graph for data “1:” will be drawn.

6-44
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 6
3. Menu functions
The following menu functions are available on the STRAIGHTNESS GRAPH display.

A. MEASURE
Used to return from the STRAIGHTNESS GRAPH display to the MEASURE display area of the
SET UP RECORD display.

B. PARALLEL PERPNDLR
When there are surface or straightness measurement data in “1:”, and straightness measure-
ment data in “2:” and when parallelism or perpendicularity is calculable between these two data,
then data “2:” can be shown graphically with data “1:” as reference, that is, as the horizontal axis.
In other cases, this menu function is not effective.

C. DRAW GRAPH 1, DRAW GRAPH 2

 [DRAW GRAPH 1] for showing the straightness graph for data “1:”.
 [DRAW GRAPH 2] for showing the straightness graph for data “2:”.
Note : These menu functions are not effective if the specified data is not of straightness
measurement.

D. NAME INPUT
Comment input is allowed with up to 11 alphanumeric characters at top right on the display.

4. Notes
 Vertical scale is two times the maximum of measured divergences.
 Graph coordinate system is identical with the machine coordinate system in that the +X and
+Y directions point respectively to the right and upward.

6-45
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP

6-46 E
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

7-1 PROGRAM Display

 Refer to the PROGRAMMING MANUAL (MAZATROL Program) when

creating MAZATROL programs.
 Refer to the PROGRAMMING MANUAL (EIA/ISO Program) when creating
EIA/ISO programs.

D747S30054E
Fig. 7-1 An example of display presentation (for MAZATROL programming)

7-1
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

7-2 TOOL PATH CHECK Display

This display is used to display the tool path data commanded by the program. Data within external storage
Function
units can also be used for tool path displaying.

 Only the program that has been selected on the PROGRAM display can undergo tool path check.
 When the TOOL PATH CHECK display is presented, the appropriate scaling factor for the figure being
displayed will be automatically set according to the common data within the program and the shape of
Remarks
the workpiece will be displayed.
 If machining process change is made on the PROGRAM LAYOUT display, the tool path will be
displayed in the new process order.

7-2-1 Data display

1. Displayed data
<2D display mode>

[9]

[8]
[5] [1]
[2]
[3]

[4]

[6]

[7]

[8] [8]

D747S30055E

7-2
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
<3D display mode>

[9]

[1]
[2]
[3]

[4]

[6]

[7]

D747S30056E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Work number of the program on which the path check is to be made.
[1] WNo. —
* The number in parentheses refers to a subprogram currently called.
Number of the unit and sequence whose tool path is drawn (MAZATROL)
[2] UNo. —
Number of the sequence and block whose tool path is drawn (EIA/ISO)
Tool number, offset number and tool name of the tool moving on the tool
[3] TNo. —
path.
Current position of the tool tip with respect to the workpiece zero-point or the
machine origin
mm (in) Remark : A menu function is provided to change the reference coordinate
[4] X, Y, Z, A, C
degrees systems for positional indication.
POSITION and COORDINATE values refer to coordinates in the workpiece
and machine coordinate systems, respectively.
[5] Scale — Scaling factor for the graphics being displayed
Machining shape that has been defined by the program (with a purple line for
point-machining, and with a green line for line- or face-machining), and path
of the tool tip (with a yellow solid line for cutting feed or a yellow dotted line
[6] (Graphic) — for rapid traverse)
* As for line machining shapes (contours), the starting point and ending point
of each component are always rectilinearly connected (interpolated) for a
representation in so simple and readily identifiable a format as possible.
Display of the machining time obtained by tool path checking.
TOOL PATH TOOL PATH = Rapid traverse distance +
Cutting feed distance
[7] H: M’ S’’
TIME TIME Rapid traverse speed Cutting feed rate
+ Dwell time + MST processing time (designated in parameter)
[8] Numeric value — Display limit (automatically determined according to the machining shape)
Display mode Used to change the display mode between 2D and 3D.
[9] —
select button

Note : For simultaneous rapid traverse on multiple axes, the tool path displayed will have its
starting point and ending point connected by a straight line.

7-3
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

7-2-2 Basic display operation

(1) Tap the [PART SHAPE] menu item.
 This will cause the menu function to be activated and continuously display the machining
shapes defined in the program.
The menu function will be automatically deactivated when continuous display of the
machining shape is completed.
(2) Select a tool path display method.

Menu item Function

[PATH CONTINUE] The tool path is displayed continuously.
[PATH STEP] Each time the [PATH STEP] menu item is tapped, the tool path is displayed step
by step.
[SHAPE ERASE] The machining shape is deleted.
[PATH ERASE] The tool path is deleted.

Note 1: If the [PATH STEP] menu item is tapped during continuous display of the tool path,
or if the [PATH CONTINUE] menu item is tapped during step-by-step display of
the tool path, the later selected menu function will be activated.
Note 2: During continuous display or stepped display of tool path, the drawing on the
display can be stopped by tapping the [STOP] menu item (but not by pressing the
key). If the [PATH CONTINUE] or [PATH STEP] menu item is tapped once
again, then the tool path will restart being displayed from the beginning, not from
the stopped position.
Note 3: The alarm 477 DESCRIPTION IMPOSSIBLE will be displayed and the tool path
drawn so far cleared in the 3D display mode when the drawing amount exceeds
the predetermined limit.
Note 4: Activation of the [PART SHAPE] menu function for an EIA/ISO program is re-
jected with an alarm (465 EIA SHAPE DATA NOT FOUND) unless the program is
created by the (optional) function for converting a MAZATROL program into the
EIA/ISO format and, moreover, has shape data additionally provided in paren-
theses.

 The functions of the submenu items for display operation are the same as
those of the corresponding ones on the TRACE display. Refer to the relevant
section.

7-2-3 Restarting tool path check

(1) Tap the menu selector button.
(2) Tap the [PATH RESTART] menu item.
 A restart data setting window will be opened.
(3) Designate the restarting position of tool path checking.

 The procedure for specifying the restarting position of tool path checking is
the same as for the restart in the automatic operation mode.
See the Operating Manual, Part 4, Subsection 1-2-2 “Restart operation/
Smooth restart operation” for further details.

(4) Tap the [PATH CONTINUE] or [PATH STEP] menu item.

 Tool path checking will then start from the designated position.

7-4
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
7-2-4 Block skip
Any block of an EIA/ISO program can be skipped during tool path checking.
(1) Tap the menu selector button.
(2) Tap the [BLOCK SKIP] menu item.
(3) Tap the [PATH CONTINUE] or [PATH STEP] menu item.

 The procedure for specifying the blocks to be skipped is the same as for the
blocks in the automatic operation mode. See the Operating Manual, Part 4,
Section 2-7 for further details

7-2-5 Window function

Tapping the [PROGRAM MONITOR] menu item displays the PROGRAM MONITOR window.

7-2-6 Tool path checking in a quasi-actual machining image

The VIRTUAL MACHINING display can be called up for a MAZATROL program to check the tool
path in a quasi-actual machining image.
 A cutting area error and other abnormalities can be detected in an earlier stage and the test
cutting time can be saved correspondingly.

 See Section 12-4 for more information.

7-5
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

7-3 SHAPE CHECK Display

Displaying the machining shape that is defined in a program.

Function
Use this display to check whether the programmed data are correct.

Remarks This display mode can be used only while MAZATROL program creation or editing is in progress.

7-3-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[4]
[6] [1]
[2]

[3]

[5]

[6] [6]
D747S30057

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] WNo. — Same as the data item of the POSITION display
[2] UNo. — Unit and sequence number of the program displayed graphically
Coordinate values of the leading end of the currently displayed machining
[3] X, Y, Z mm (in)
shape with respect to the workpiece zero-point or the machine origin
[4] Scale mm (in) Scaling factor for the figure being displayed
Machining shape that has been defined by the program

[5] Graphics — * As for line machining shapes (contours), the starting point and ending point
of each component are always rectilinearly connected (interpolated) for a
representation in so simple and readily identifiable a format as possible.
[6] X, Y, Z mm (in) Display limit (automatically determined according to the machining shape)

7-6
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
7-3-2 Basic display operation
(1) Select a shape display method.
 If the [SHAPE CONTINUE] menu item is tapped, the machining shape will be continu-
ously displayed on the display.
 Each time the [SHAPE UNIT] menu item is tapped, the machining shape will be
displayed unit-by-unit on the display.
 Each time the [SHAPE STEP] menu item is tapped, the machining shape will be
displayed step-by-step on the display.
 Tapping a menu item causes the corresponding menu function to be activated, and the
activation is canceled when display of the machining shape is completed.
Note : If, for example, the [SHAPE STEP] menu item is tapped during continuous display
of the machining shape, or if the [SHAPE CONTINUE] menu item is tapped during
step-by-step display of the machining shape, the later selected menu function is
activated.

 Operating procedures of menu items [SHAPE ERASE], [PLANE CHANGE],

[STORE] and [SCALE CHANGE] are the same as those on the TRACE
display. Refer to the relevant section.

7-7
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

7-4 PROGRAM FILE Display

Function Displaying the work numbers and other data of the programs pre-registered in the NC unit

The following operations can be carried out for the pre-registered programs:
 Naming and renaming a program (Setting and changing a work number)
 Program erasure
Remarks  Program copy
 Converting MAZATROL programs to EIA/ISO programs (option)
 Directory change
 Program transfer

7-4-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[9]
[6] [7] [8]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

D747S30184

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Work number of a pre-registered program, and program type identifi-
cation (MAZATROL programs or EIA/ISO programs)
[1] WORK No. —
M: MAZATROL program
E: EIA/ISO program
[2] SIZE — Number of blocks in the registered program
[3] PROGRAM NAME — Name of the registered program
[4] CREATE DATE Y/M/D h:m Date and time when the program was created
[5] WRITE DATE Y/M/D h:m Date and time of the last edition of the program
[6] DIRECTORY — Name of the currently selected directory
[7] TOTAL PROGRAM — Number of registered programs
Usage ratio of the memory
a%
[8] MEMORY USED —
a: Usage ratio (=[Used memory]/[Total memory])
(Only displayed when the STANDARD PROGRAM area is selected)

7-8
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
No. Item Unit Data description
Screen keyboard Tap this button to display a screen keyboard on the screen.
[9] —
button

7-4-2 Setting a work number

For easy identification of programs pre-registered in the NC unit, a name consisting of 48
alphanumeric characters or less can be assigned to each program. (The name of a program is
referred to as its work number.)
Remark : Even without a program name, however, program execution itself is not affected.
(1) Select the work number for which a program name is to be input.
 Tap the desired work number.
(2) Tap the [NAME INPUT] menu item.
 The following window appears.

(3) Enter the desired name using a screen keyboard and tap the [OK] button.

7-9
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

7-4-3 Changing a work number

 The work number of each program registered in the NC unit can be changed as required.
(1) Select the work No. to be changed.
(2) Tap the [PROGRAM RENUMBER] menu item.
 The following window appears.

(3) Enter a new work number and tap the [OK] button.
 The old work number is overriden with the new one.
Note : Settng the work number of another program registered in the NC unit will cause the
alarm 433 SAME PROGRAM EXISTS.
 Tapping the [OK] button above causes the following window to be displayed if the program
concerned is registered for a project.

Tap the [YES] and [NO] buttons, respectively, to and not to renumber the corresponding
program accordingly in the registration for the project.
Remark : The CHANGE REGISTERED PROGRAM window will only be displayed when
the project function is enabled (US1 bit 5 = 1).

7-10
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
7-4-4 Program erasure
This operation refers to erasing NC-registered programs. Carry out this operation if registered
programs become unnecessary.
Remark : See the description given later under 4. for the procedure of program erasure with
the project function being enabled (US1 bit 5 = 1).

1. Single program erasure

(1) Tap the [PROGRAM ERASE] menu item
(2) Select the program to be deleted.
(3) Tap the [DELET A PROGRAM] menu item.
 The following window appears:

(4) Tap the [OK] button.

 The selected program is deleted.
Note : If the automatic operation work number designated on the POSITION display is
set and then the [OK] button is tapped, a message box appears with ACTIVE
PROGRAM ERASE <INPUT>? in it. To execute erasure, tap the [OK] button, or
to cancel erasure, press the [CANCEL] button.

2. Multiple program erasure

(1) Tap the [PROGRAM ERASE] menu item.
(2) Tap the [SELECT DELETE] menu item.
 A check box column is displayed on the left of the work number column, and the menu
changes as follows:
SELECT SELECT SELECT ERASE
RANGE ALL ALL
CANCEL

(3) Use the check boxes to select the programs to be deleted.

Alternatively, use the menu functions as required.
 [SELECT RANGE] for selecting programs in a range specified.
 [SELECT ALL] for selecting all programs.
 [SELECT ALL CANCEL] for canceling the current selection in its entirety.

7-11
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

(4) Tap the [ERASE] menu item.

 A message box appears on the screen.
(5) Tap the [OK] button.
 The selected programs are deleted at one time.

3. All program erasure

This operation refers to erasing all NC-registered programs at one time.
(1) Tap the [PROGRAM ERASE] menu item.
(2) Tap the [ALL ERASE] menu item.
 A screen keyboard appears on the screen.
(3) Enter “–9999.”
 All the programs registered in the NC unit are erased.

4. Program erasure (with the project function being enabled)

A. Single and Multiple program erasure

(1) Tap the [PROGRAM ERASE] menu item.
 The following menu is displayed.
SELECT SELECT SELECT ERASE ALL PROGRAM
RANGE ALL ALL ERASE
CANCEL

(2) Select from the work No. list the programs to be deleted.
Tap on the work No. list a single or multiple programs to be deleted one by one.
Alternatively, use the following menu functions as required.
 [SELECT RANGE] for selecting programs in a range specified.
 [SELECT ALL] for selecting all programs.
 [SELECT ALL CANCEL] for canceling the current selection in its entirety.
(3) Tap the [ERASE] menu item.
 A message box appears on the screen.

(4) Tap the [OK] button.

 The selected programs are deleted.

7-12
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
Note : Tapping the [OK] button above causes the following window to be displayed if the
program concerned is registered for a project.

 Tap the [YES] and [NO] buttons, respectively, to remove, and leave, the corresponding
program from, and as it was in, the registration for the project.
 In the case of multiple program erasure, the user is prompted to specify for each
program whether or not to remove it. Tap the DO THIS FOR THE REST OF WNO. check
box to assign a check mark beforehand to apply [YES] or [NO] to all the remaining
programs (without having to repeat the same operation for each of them).

B. All program erasure

(1) Tap the [PROGRAM ERASE] menu item.
(2) Tap the [ALL ERASE] menu item.
 A screen keyboard appears on the screen.
(3) Enter “–9999.”
 All the programs registered in the NC unit are erased.
Note : When the Enter key ( ) is tapped at the end of the above procedure, the following
window is displayed if there are any programs registered for a project.

 Tap the [YES] and [NO] buttons, respectively, to remove, and leave, the corresponding
program from, and as it was in, the registration for the project.
 The user is prompted to specify for each program whether or not to remove it. Tap the
DO THIS FOR THE REST OF WNO. check box to assign a check mark beforehand to
apply [YES] or [NO] to all the remaining programs (without having to repeat the same
operation for each of them).

7-13
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

7-4-5 Program copy

This operation enables the previously registered programs within the NC unit to be copied. Use
this function to newly create similar programs as those which have been registered.
(1) Select the work number of the program to be copied.
(2) Tap the [PROGRAM COPY] menu item.
 The following window appears:

(3) Enter a new work number, and tap the [OK] button.
 A program having the same contents as those of the original will be created under the
new work number.
Note : Settng the work number of another program pre-registered in the NC unit will cause the
alarm 433 SAME PROGRAM EXISTS.

7-4-6 Program editing

(1) Select the work number of the program to be edited.
(2) Tap the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu item.
 According as the selected program is created in the MAZATROL or EIA/ISO format, the
corresponding display of programming will be called up with the program in question
selected in the editing mode.

7-4-7 Converting MAZATROL programs to EIA/ISO programs

EIA/ISO conversion is a function that converts an NC-registered MAZATROL program into an
EIA/ISO program.

 For details, refer to Section 13-7.

7-4-8 Opening the shape drawing window

Shape drawing is a function that draws the shape data of an NC-registered program in the
window.
(1) Select the work number of the program that contains the shape data to be drawn.
(2) Tap the [PART SHAPE] menu item.
 The menu function is activated, and the PART SHAPE window opens.

 See Section 5-1 to check the types of data displayed in the PART SHAPE
window.

Note : Alarm 465 EIA SHAPE DATA NOT FOUND will be displayed in this step if an EIA/ISO
program without shape data is designated.
 Tap the [PART SHAPE] menu item again if the PART SHAPE window is to be closed.

7-14
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
7-4-9 Directory change

1. Types of program storage areas in the NC unit

The program storage area in and for the NC unit is divided into five sub-areas:

Area name Description

STANDARD PROGRAM Stores programs created on the PROGRAM display and used for MEMORY operation.
BACKUP PROGRAM Backs up each program.
HDD OPERATION Stores programs used for Hard Disk operation or USB operation (Remark 1, Note).
PROGRAM
ETHERNET OPE. Stores programs used for Ethernet operation (Remark 2).
PROGRAM
EDITING PRG. BACKUP Stores programs backed up by the program edit backup function.

 See Section 14-4 for more information on the program edit backup function.

Remark 1: For USB operation, the folder that has been specified in the hard-disk operating
area is set to the folder existing on a USB drive.

 See Subsection 7-4-12 for the folder-changing procedure.

Remark 2: The ETHERNET OPE. PROGRAM area can only be displayed when the corre-
sponding optional function is selected.
Note : The USB in this subsection refers to USB equipment applicable to a USB mass-
storage class.

2. Changing program storage areas

 Use the following procedure to change the area of the programs to be displayed on the
PROGRAM FILE display:
(1) Tap the [DIR. CHANGE] menu item.
 The following window appears:

(2) Select the desired storage area.

(3) Tap the [OK] button.
 The programs stored in the selected area are listed up on the screen.

7-15
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

 Follow the procedure below when the project function is enabled (US1 bit 5 = 1).
(1) Select the desired storage area in the STORAGE AREA LIST column.

 The programs stored in the selected area are listed up on the screen.

7-4-10 Program transfer

Use the following procedure to transfer a program from the storage areas STANDARD
PROGRAM, BACKUP PROGRAM, HDD OPERATION PROGRAM and EDITING PRG. BACK-
UP to another:
Note 1: Only EIA/ISO programs can be transferred to the HDD OPERATION PROGRAM or
ETHERNET OPE. PROGRAM area.
Note 2: Programs cannot be transferred manually into the EDITING PRG. BACKUP area.
(1) Tap the [PROGRAM TRANSFER] menu item.
 The menu function is activated and the following window appears:

(2) Specify the work number of the program to be transferred and select the destination area.
(3) Start program transfer by tapping the [OK] button in the window.
 The specified program will be transferred to the selected storage area.
 When the program in question is to be ‘moved’ (i. e. cleared from the source area upon
completion of the transfer), tap the MOVE check box to assign a check mark.

7-16
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
 Tap the OVER WRITE check box to assign a check mark in order to allow the data to be
overwritten without causing an alarm in case the specified work number should be
occupied in the destination area.

 When multiple programs are to be transferred in sequence, tap the button.

The button will then remain held down ( ) and the window will not disappear auto-
matically when the transfer of a program is completed. Tap the button again to
retrieve the normal closing function.
Tapping the [OK] button above causes either of the following windows to be displayed if the
program concerned is registered for a project.
BACKUP PROGRAM area as destination Any other storage area as destination

<BACKUP PROGRAM area as destination>

 Tap the [YES] button to remove the corresponding program from the registration for the
project.
 Tap the [NO] button to leave the corresponding program as it was in the registration for the
project.
 The window will only be displayed when the project function is enabled (US1 bit 5 = 1).
<Any other storage area as destination>
 Tap the [YES] button to change the corresponding information item of the program accor-
dingly in the registration for the project.
 Tap the [NO] button to leave the corresponding information item of the program as it was in
the registration for the project.
 The window will only be displayed when the project function is enabled (US1 bit 5 = 1).

7-17
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

7-4-11 Rearranging programs

Programs can be rearranged in normal ascending or descending order of their attributes.
(1) Tap the WORK No. title on the display.

 Programs will be rearranged in descending order of the work number.

 A re-tap of the WORK No. title will rearrange the programs in normal ascending order of
the work number.
 Similarly, tapping the SIZE, PROGRAM NAME, CREATE DATE title, etc. allows the
programs to be rearranged in normal ascending or descending order of their attributes.

7-18
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
7-4-12 Changing a reference folder
Prior to shipping from the factory, the reference folders for the backup area, hard disk operation
area and Ethernet operation area are preset as listed in the table below.
[Folder names for each area]
Area name Folder name
Backup area C:\ymw\M8Y\data\MC_Backup\Programs
Hard disk operation area C:\ymw\M8Y\data\MC_Direct Mode Programs
Ethernet operation area C:\ymw\M8Y\data\MC_Direct Mode Programs

Example : Execute the following procedure to change the reference folder for the backup area:
(1) Tap , [Setup] and [Backup Program] in that order.
 The following window appears:

 To change the reference folder corresponding to the hard disk operation area and
Ethernet operation area, select [HDD Operation Program] and [ETHERNET Ope.
Program], respectively.
(2) Input the folder name and tap the [OK] button.
 Alternatively, tap the [BROWSE] button to display the tree of the available folders, and
select an item if it is to be set as a folder name. Complete the setting by tapping the [OK]
button.

7-19
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

7-4-13 Program management functions

For some specific program numbers (of four-digit, from 8000 to 9999), erasure and editing of the
programs and their call-out on the PROGRAM display can be prohibited by using parameters.
The following describes three available functions.

1. Prohibition of selected-program editing

Irrespective of whether the data protect function is activated or deactivated, execution of the
operations listed in the table below is disabled for the selected program.
The alarm 406 MEMORY PROTECT will occur if an attempt is made to carry out these
operations.

Type of display Prohibited item

PROGRAM display  Modifying the selected program
(MAZATROL, EIA/ISO)
PROGRAM FILE display  Erasing the selected program
 Registering the name of the selected program
 Renumbering the selected program
 Execution of [ALL ERASE] erases all programs, except the selected ones.

2. Prohibition of selected-program call

Display of the contents of the selected program is prohibited.
The alarm 402 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT will occur if an attempt is made to carry out for the
selected program the operations listed in the table below.

Type of display Prohibited item

PROGRAM display  Searching for the work number of the selected program
(MAZATROL, EIA/ISO)  Copying from the selected program (unit copying and shape copying included)
PROGRAM FILE display  Renumbering the selected program
EIA MONITOR display  Displaying the selected program for monitoring purposes (No alarms will result even
if an attempt is made to call up the selected program.)
DATA I/O display  Saving or punching the selected program
(CMT, DNC, TAPE)  If [ALL PUNCH] is executed using TAPE mode, the selected program will not be
punched.
 The alarm 517 (or 587) PROG. OPERATION NOT ALLOWED or 547 TAPE
PUNCHER ERROR will occur if an attempt is made to execute a saving or
punching operation under a previously set status of the work number of the
selected program.
 Loading of the selected program is possible.

3. Description of parameters

Address Description

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Program management function

Prohibition of editing (#9000-#9999)

F81 Prohibition of call (#9000-#9999)
Prohibition of editing (#8000-#9999)
Prohibition of call (#8000-#9999)

7-20
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
7-4-14 Project function
Use the project function to arbitrarily divide the machining programs stored in the NC unit into
distinctive groups (projects) in terms of machining process, workpiece material, etc., so as to
facilitate the work No. selection.
The project function enables the following operations on the stored programs.
 Creating a project,
 Registering, or removing, programs into, or from, a project,
 Renaming a project,
 Copying a project,
 Specifying the main program for a project, and
 Deleting a project.
Remark : Set bit 5 of parameter US1 to “1” to enable the project function.

Creating a project

 Creating a project
Create a project.
<Reference>
“2. Creating a project”

Registering programs

 Registering programs
Register programs into a new project.
<Reference>
“2. Creating a project”

7-21
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

Specifying the main program

 Specifying the main program

A particular program can be selected from among the registered ones as the main program.
<Reference>
“7. Specifying the main
program”

Selecting a WNo. through the project list

 Selecting a WNo. through the project list

The project function serves to facilitate the Work No. selection on the displays PROGRAM, EIA MONITOR
and DATA I/O as well as in the windows for restart operation and comparison stop.
<Reference>
The WORK No. SELECT
window described in Sub-
section 2-3-2

7-22
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
1. Data display

A. Displayed data
<Display by storage area>

[16]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

[6]

[8] [7]

[11] [12] [13] [14] [15]

[9] [10]

D747S30203

<Display by project>

[16]
[17] [18] [19]

[6]

[8] [7]

[20] [21] [22] [23] [24]

[9] [10]

D747S30204

7-23
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Icon and name of the currently active program storage area.

: STANDARD PROGRAM
[1] Currently active
— : HDD OPERATION PROGRAM
[2] program storage area
: ETHERNET OPE. PROGRAM

: BACKUP PROGRAM
Usage ratio of the memory; displayed only when the STANDARD PRO-
GRAM area is selected.
Usage ratio of the
[3] — Usage ratio of the memory
memory
a%
a: Usage ratio (= [Used memory]/[Total memory] × 100)
[4] DIRECTORY — Name of the directory of the currently active program storage area.
Number of the programs registered in the currently active program
[5] TOTAL PROGRAM —
storage area.
List of the available storage areas. Select the desired area in this column
[6] STORAGE AREA LIST —
to display the machining programs stored in it.
[7] CREATE PROJECT — Used to create a new project.
[8] PROJECT LIST — Used to list up the currently registered projects.
[9] PROJECT NAME — Name of the project.
WRITE DATE Y/M/D Date and time of the last edition of the project.
[10]
(PROJECT LIST) h:m
Work number of the registered program, and program type identification
(MAZATROL programs or EIA/ISO programs).
[11] WORK No. —
M : MAZATROL program
E : EIA/ISO program
[12] SIZE — Size of the registered program.
[13] PROGRAM NAME — Name of the registered program.
Y/M/D Date and time of the creation of the program.
[14] CREATE DATE
h:m
Y/M/D Date and time of the last edition of the program.
[15] WRITE DATE
h:m
Screen keyboard Tap this button to display a screen keyboard on the screen.
[16] —
button
Name of the active Name of the currently selected project.
[17] —
project
Number of programs Number of the programs registered for the currently selected project.
[18] —
for the project
Update date of the Y/M/D Date and time of the last edition of the currently active project.
[19]
project h:m
WORK No. of the program registered for the currently active project.
Work numbers are preceded by the corresponding small icons shown
below if they refer to programs that are stored in the HDD OPERATION
PROGRAM or ETHERNET OPE. PROGRAM area.
[20] WORK No. — : HDD OPERATION PROGRAM
: ETHERNET OPE. PROGRAM
Note : Leading exclamation mark ( ! ) indicates that the program (WNo.)
is not yet stored in any storage area.
Size of the program registered for the currently active project.
[21] SIZE —
This column is naturally empty for a program preceded by ! .
Name of the program registered for the currently active project.
[22] PROGRAM NAME —
This column is naturally empty for a program preceded by ! .

7-24
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
No. Item Unit Data description
Date and time of the creation of the program registered for the currently
Y/M/D active project.
[23] CREATE DATE
h:m
This column is naturally empty for a program preceded by ! .
Date and time of the last edition of the program registered for the current-
Y/M/D ly active project.
[24] WRITE DATE
h:m
This column is naturally empty for a program preceded by ! .

2. Creating a project
Follow the procedure below to create a new project into which to divide machining programs
stored in the NC unit.
(1) Tap the [CREATE PROJECT] button.
 The following window appears on the screen.

(2) Enter the desired name using a screen keyboard and tap the [OK] button.
 A new project is created with the specified name.
 The following window is displayed to prompt the user to select the programs to be
registered under the new project name.

Note : Any string of up to 32 characters can be used as a project name.

The project name, however, must not begin with a period ( . ).
Remark : Useable (one-byte) characters are as follows.
 Alphabetical characters (A to Z),
 Numerals,
 Symbols and signs (“+”, “–”, “_” and “ . ”)
(3) Tap in the left-hand column a storage area containing the desired programs.

7-25
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

(4) Tap the desired programs in the right-hand column.

Note : Tap as many programs as desired.
 The selected program is highlighted by a blue background.

Note : Tap a highlighted program as required to remove it from the registration for the
project.

(5) Repeat Steps (3) and (4) above to register the desired programs stored in other storage
areas.
Remark : The project function allows programs stored separately in multiple storage
areas to be brought together under one and the same project name.
(6) Finally tap the [OK] button.
 The programs selected through the WORK No. SELECT window are registered under
the new project name.
Note : Do not register more than 999 programs for a single project; otherwise an alarm
will be raised (2616 MAX NUMBER OF PROJECTS EXCEEDED).

3. Registering programs
Follow the procedure below to register programs additionally for an existing project.
(1) From the project list select the project to be supplemented with additional programs.
(2) Tap the [REGISTER PROGRAM] menu item.
 The WORK No. SELECT window appears on the screen.
(3) Tap in the window the programs to be added and then tap the [OK] button.
Remark : See the description above under 2. “Creating a project” for the information on how
to use the WORK No. SELECT window.

4. Removing programs from a project

Follow the procedure below to remove programs from the registration for a project.
(1) From the project list select the project from which to remove the registered programs.
(2) Tap the [UNREGISTER PROGRAM] menu item.
 The following menu is displayed.
SELECT SELECT SELECT UN- PROGRAM
RANGE ALL ALL REGISTER
CANCEL

7-26
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
(3) Tap in the right-hand column the programs to be unregistered.
Tap on the work No. list a single or multiple programs to be unregistered (removed from the
registration) one by one.
Alternatively, use the following menu functions as required.
 [SELECT RANGE] for selecting programs in a range specified.
 [SELECT ALL] for selecting all programs.
 [SELECT ALL CANCEL] for canceling the current selection in its entirety.
(4) Tap the [UNREGISTER] menu item.
 The following window is displayed.

(5) Tap the [OK] button.

 The selected programs are removed from the registration for the project.

5. Renaming a project
Follow the procedure below to rename an existing project as required.
(1) From the project list select the project to be renamed.
(2) Tap the [RENAME PROJECT] menu item.
 The following window appears on the screen.

(3) Enter a new project name and tap the [OK] button.
 The old project name is overriden with the new one.
Note : Settng the name of another project registered in the NC unit will cause the alarm
2617 SAME PROJECT EXISTS.

6. Copying a project
Follow the procedure below to copy an existing project as required.
(1) From the project list select the project to be copied.
(2) Tap the [COPY PROJECT] menu item.
 The following window appears on the screen.

7-27
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

(3) Enter a new project name, and tap the [OK] button.
 A project having the same contents as those of the original will be created under the new
project name.
Note : Settng the name of another project registered in the NC unit will cause the alarm
2617 SAME PROJECT EXISTS.

7. Specifying the main program

Follow the procedure below to specify any one of the programs registered under a project name
as the main program.
When a project is selected in the left-hand column, its main program will be sorted out and
displayed on the top row in the right-hand column and highlighted by a yellow background.
(1) Select the desired project from the project list in the left-hand column.
 The right-hand column displays the programs (WNos.) registered for the project.
(2) Tap in the right-hand column the program to be specified as the main program.
(3) Tap the [SET MAIN PROGRAM] menu item.
 The following window is displayed.

(4) Tap the [OK] button.

 The selected program is set as the main program.
Note : To cancel the main program designation, execute the same menu function ([SET
MAIN PROGRAM]) on the program concerned (on a yellow background) in the
right-hand column.

8. Deleting a project
(1) Tap the [DELETE PROJECT] menu item.
 The following menu is displayed.
SELECT SELECT SELECT ERASE ALL PROGRAM
RANGE ALL ALL ERASE
CANCEL

(2) Select from the project list the projects to be deleted.

Tap on the project list a single or multiple projects to be deleted one by one.
Alternatively, use the following menu functions as required.
 [SELECT RANGE] for selecting projects in a range specified.
 [SELECT ALL] for selecting all projects.
 [SELECT ALL CANCEL] for canceling the current selection in its entirety.

7-28
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
(3) Tap the [ERASE] menu item.
 The following window is displayed.

(4) Tap the [OK] button.

 The selected projects are deleted.
Note : The programs concerned are not deleted from the memory by the deletion of the
projects in which they are registered.

9. Deleting all projects

(1) Tap the [DELETE PROJECT] menu item.
(2) Tap the [ALL ERASE] menu item.
 A screen keyboard appears on the screen.
(3) Enter “–9999.”
 All the projects registered in the NC unit are erased.
Note : The programs concerned are not deleted from the memory by the deletion of the
projects in which they are registered.

10. Input and output of projects

The project settings on the PROGRAM FILE display can be saved and loaded as required.
Note : The loading or saving of project settings does not include that of the contents of the
programs concerned.

A. Data saving
(1) Tap , [File] and the [DATA I/O] option in that order.
 A window for data I/O operations is displayed.
(2) Tap the [SAVE FILE] button.
(3) Tap the [BROWSE] button to specify the saving destination and the file name.
Note : The file name is automatically determined.
(4) Tap the [EXECUTE] button.
 Data saving starts and a message box appears.

B. Data loading
(1) Tap , [File] and the [DATA I/O] option in that order.
 A window for data I/O operations is displayed.
(2) Tap the [LOAD FILE] button.
(3) Tap the [BROWSE] button to specify the file to be loaded.
(4) Tap the [EXECUTE] button.
 Data loading starts and a message box appears.

7-29
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

7-5 PROGRAM LAYOUT Display

 Program layout mode

The tools to be used in the processes of the MAZATROL program are displayed in the order of
machining.
Function  Process control mode
The logical linking status of processes within the program and the configurations of the subprograms
within the processes are displayed.
 This display can be used to edit a tool priority number and to write the data into the program.

 For both multi-workpiece machining and subprogram looping, only one time of program data is
displayed.
Remarks  The display can be called up from the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display and the PROCESS CONTROL
display, and process layout information for the cursor position is displayed in both cases.
 Subprograms that are called up from the EIA/ISO programs will not be displayed on this display.

7-5-1 Data display

1. Displayed data
<Program layout mode>

[1]
[2] [15]
[3]
[16]

[4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]

D747S30059E

7-30
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
<Process control mode>

[1]
[15]
[3]
[16]
[4] [11]

[9] [17] [18]

D747S30060E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] MAIN WNo. — Work number of the main program
[2] SUB WNo. — Work number of the subprogram (on which the cursor is placed)
[3] PROCE.No. — Number of the process being displayed/Total number of processes
[4] PNo. or No. — Process number or Data number
[5] PRI. No. — Tool priority number
[6] SNo. — Tool sequence number
[7] TOOL — Tool name
[8] NOM- mm (in) Nominal diameter of the tool
[9] LNo. — Layout number
[10] UNo. — Unit number
[11] UNIT — Name of the unit
[12] ANGLE C degrees Angle specified as ANGLE C in an INDEX unit
[13] ANGLE A degrees Angle specified as ANGLE A in an INDEX unit
[14] WNo. — Work number of the program
Display mode Used to change the display mode between Program layout and Process
[15] —
select button control, or to change the type of process display.
Process select
[16] — Used to change the process to be displayed.
button
[17] MAIN — Work number of the main program
[18] SUB 1 to 8 — Work number of the subprogram (Nesting 1 to 8)

Note 1: The items displayed depend on the model and specifications of the machine.

7-31
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

Note 2: When the table selection function is enabled (parameter D106 bit 4 = 1), select, or put
a check mark to, the [Display Table Angle] option displayed by tapping and
[View], to display the table angle (under R. T) instead of the standard ANGLE values.
<When the [Display Table Angle] option is selected>
The ANGLE C and ANGLE A columns ([12] and [13]) are replaced with an R. T column,
and the WNo. indication [14] is given in up to 32 characters.
Example :
PNo. PRI. No. SNo. TOOL NOM- LNo. UNo. UNIT R.T WNo.
1 1 END MILL 8. A 1 4 LINE CTR 0. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ012345
1 1 CTR-DR 20. 1 7 DRILLING 90. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ012345
1 2 DRILL 10. 1 7 DRILLING 90. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ012345

Note 3: As for machines with a swivelling axis, an ANGLE B column is added (for the spindle
head’s swivelling axis) to standard display of ANGLE C and ANGLE A columns ([12]
and [13]) for the table’s rotational axes and, therefore, the size of the WNo. indication
[14] is limited to 25 characters, and an oversized item is displayed in the leading 22
characters followed by three dots (…) as a sign of abbreviation.
Example :
PNo. PRI. No. SNo. TOOL NOM- LNo. UNo. UNIT ANGLE B ANGLE C ANGLE A WNo.
1 1 END MILL 8. A 1 4 LINE CTR 0. 0. 0. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV...
1 1 CTR-DR 20. 1 7 DRILLING 0. 90. 0. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV...
1 2 DRILL 10. 1 7 DRILLING 0. 90. 0. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV...

7-5-2 Priority number setting

Tool priority numbers can be set on a tool sequence basis.
(1) Tap the PRI. No. item to be set.
(2) Use the screen keyboard to specify the desired machining priority number.
 The machining priority number will be set in the position of the cursor.

 The operations described later in Subsection 7-5-8 must be carried out before
the priority number that has thus been edited on this display can be incor-
porated into the program.

7-5-3 Delay priority designation

A delay machining priority number can be designated during tool priority number setting.
(1) Tap the PRI. No. item for which delay machining is to be set.
(2) Tap the [DELAY PRIORITY] menu item.
(3) Use the screen keyboard to specify the desired delay machining priority number.
 The delay machining priority number will be set to all tools of the same type within the
process.

7-32
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
7-5-4 Priority number assignment
A tool priority number (described in 7-5-2 above) can be assigned to all tools of the same type
within the process.
(1) Tap the PRI. No. item to be assigned.
(2) Tap the [PRI. No. ASSIGN] menu item.
(3) Use the screen keyboard to specify the desired tool priority number.
 The tool priority number will be assigned to all tools of the same type within the process.
Alarm 420 SAME DATA EXISTS will result if the designated priority number already
exists.

7-5-5 Priority number movement

A tool priority number can be moved.
(1) Tap the PRI. No. item to be moved.
(2) Tap the [PRI. No. MOVE] menu item.
(3) Use the screen keyboard to specify a destination tool priority number.
 The tool priority number will be moved.
Example :
No. PRI.No. SNo. TOOL NOM- No. PRI.No. SNo. TOOL NOM-
1 1 FCE MILL 50. PRI No. 1 1 FCE MILL 50.
2 1 FCE MILL 50. MOVE 2 1 FCE MILL 50.
3 1 FCE MILL 50. 3 1 FCE MILL 50.
Setting “4”
4 2 END MILL 15. 4 4 END MILL 15.
5 2 END MILL 15. 5 4 END MILL 15.
6 3 END MILL 12. 6 3 END MILL 12.
7 3 END MILL 12. 7 3 END MILL 12.
8 3 END MILL 12. 8 3 END MILL 12.
9 4 DRILL 8. 9 5 DRILL 8.
10 4 DRILL 8. 10 5 DRILL 8.
11 5 DRILL 10. 11 6 DRILL 10.
12 5 DRILL 10. 12 6 DRILL 10.

 All the priority numbers that are equal to that which is selected by tapping are overriden
with the destination priority number.
 The current priority numbers equal to and larger than the destination priority number will
increment by one as long as they are serial.
[1] A train of priority 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9 will become
number of
1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 if 2 is “moved” to 5.

[2] A train of priority 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9 will become

number of
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9 if 5 is “moved” to 2.

[3] A train of priority 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 will become

number of if 7 is “moved” to 3 which has not been
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 used as a priority number.

7-33
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

Remark : If, in procedural step (1), the cursor is set to a position in which a priority number
has not been designated, only the tool sequence priority number at the cursor
position will move.
No. PRI.No. SNo. TOOL NOM- No. PRI.No. SNo. TOOL NOM-
1 1 FCE MILL 50. PRI No. 1 1 FCE MILL 50.
2 1 FCE MILL 50. MOVE 2 1 FCE MILL 50.
3 1 FCE MILL 50. 3 1 FCE MILL 50.
Setting “4”
4 END MILL 15. 4 4 END MILL 15.
5 2 END MILL 15. 5 2 END MILL 15.
6 3 END MILL 12. 6 3 END MILL 12.
7 3 END MILL 12. 7 3 END MILL 12.
8 3 END MILL 12. 8 3 END MILL 12.
9 4 DRILL 8. 9 5 DRILL 8.
10 4 DRILL 8. 10 5 DRILL 8.
11 5 DRILL 10. 11 6 DRILL 10.
12 5 DRILL 10. 12 6 DRILL 10.

7-5-6 Erasure of all priority numbers

All tool priority numbers for the process can be erased.
(1) Tap the [PRI. No. ALL ERAS] menu item.
 A message box appears on the screen.
(2) Tap the [OK] button.
 All tool priority numbers will be erased.

7-5-7 Store
The tool priority number being edited can be stored.
Before changing the display during editing, carry out the storage operation described below.
Otherwise, the edited data will be erased when the display is changed.
(1) Tap the [STORE] menu item.
 The menu function will then be activated to store the editing results.
Note : If, during storage, the PROGRAM LAYOUT display is selected from the PROGRAM
display, the program layout of the stored process data will be displayed, irrespective of
the position of the cursor on the PROGRAM display.

7-5-8 Program write

Data that has been set in the PROGRAM LAYOUT display can be written into the program.

 After editing, however, the program write operation described below must be
carried out to incorporate the data into the program.

(1) Tap the [PROGRAM WRITE] menu item.

 The menu function is activated and a message box appears on the screen.
(2) Tap the [OK] button.
 After the data has been written into the program, the menu function is deactivated and
the display will be made once again in order with the first priority number first.

7-34
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
7-5-9 Simultaneous use of functions
Two of the three functions described above can be used at the same time. Selected two
functions are executed at the same time.

Functions that can be used simultaneously

Delay priority Priority number assignation Priority number movement
Delay priority  
Priority number assignment  ×
Priority number movement  ×
: Can be used at the same time
×: Cannot be used at the same time

7-5-10 Changing the type of process display

The available display types in program layout mode are as follows.
1. Process-specific display mode (1 PROC.)
2. Total program display mode (ALL PROC)
Use the display mode select button [15] and the menu functions concerned to change the display
type. The current type is indicated by the state of display of the button and the menu items.

Menu item Function

This menu item is highlighted in green in the process-specific display mode.
Tap the menu item in the “ALL PROC” display mode to select the “1 PROC.” display mode (where
the layout of that process will be displayed which is marked with the cursor in the “ALL PROC”
display mode).
1 PROC.
When the PROGRAM LAYOUT display is called up from the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display,
the layout of that process will be displayed which is marked with the cursor on the preceding
display (on condition that the PROGRAM LAYOUT display has been left in the “1 PROC.” display
mode).
This menu item is highlighted in green in the total program display mode. Tap the menu item in the
ALL PROC
“1 PROC.” display mode to select the “ALL PROC” display mode.

In the “1 PROC.” mode, use the process select button [16] or the menu functions concerned to
change the process to be displayed.

Menu item Function

PREV. PROCESS Used to display the program layout of the previous process.
NEXT PROCESS Used to display the program layout of the next process.

7-5-11 Program reference window

Selecting the [Program] option (displayed by tapping and [Window]) allows a program
reference window to be opened beginning at the unit of the tool sequence indicated by the
cursor.
 Tool priority numbers can be set with the window remaining opened. After the priority number
is typed and the key tapped, the window disappears.

7-35
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

7-5-12 Alternation of process numbers and data numbers

Use the [Display PNo.] option (displayed by tapping and [View]) to alternate the display
contents in column [4] between process numbers and data numbers (entiteld PNo. and No.).
1. Displaying process numbers (under PNo.)
Assign a check mark to [Display PNo.] for process-wise display (PNo. as the title of column
[4]) where layout data sets are arranged in terms of the respective processes to which they
belong.
2. Displaying data numbers (under No.)
Clear the check mark from [Display PNo.] for serial display (No. as the title of column [4])
where layout data sets are arranged in terms of their serial numbers.

7-5-13 Process-number search

In Process control mode, control data related to the first process of the specified program will be
displayed. If control data related to the other processes of the specified program is to be checked
on the screen, use the procedure described below.
(1) Tap the [PROC. No. SEARCH] menu item.
(2) Using a screen keyboard, specify the identification number of the process whose control
data is to be checked.
 The specified process number will then be displayed in the PNo. item ([4]), and the
control data of the specified process will be displayed on the screen.

7-36
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
7-6 MACHINING NAVIGATION - PREDICT Display

The machining time and the spindle output data are listed for each tool according to the estimates made
Function by the checking operation on the TOOL PATH CHECK display. The machining time can therefore be
reduced effectively.

 The navigation function gives modification data so that cutting conditions can be optimized for each tool.
Remarks
 Recommended tools are presented to allow more effective machining with each tool type.

7-6-1 Data display

1. Displayed data
<Displayed data with the [TOOL OPTIMIZE] menu function deactivated>

[1] [2]
[3]
[4]

[6] [5]

[9] [10 [11] [12] [13] [14]

[7] [8] ]

D747S30061E

7-37
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

<Displayed data with the [TOOL OPTIMIZE] menu function activated>

[8]
[15]
[17]

[16] [18]

D747S30062E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Work number of the program to be used for machining
WNo. a ( b )
[1] WNo. —
a : Work number
b : Program name
[2] WRITE DATE Y/M/D Date on which the file was last updated
[3] TOTAL SEQ. — Total number of tool sequences in the program
NUMER OF T- Number of tool function codes (T-codes) required for the machining.
[4] —
CODE Not displayed till completion of tool layout.
[5] Time h.m.s Total machining time estimated
RATIO OF
[6] MACHINING — Color-identified graphic display of the ratio of machining time for each tool
TIME
[7] Tool information — Name, nominal size and ID-code of the tool
Machining time
[8] — Ratio of machining time for each tool sequence
information
[9] TNo. — Tool number
[10] TOOL — Tool name
[11] NOM-/NOM — Nominal diameter or nominal size of the tool and tool identification code
[12] SEC s Estimated machining time
[13] AVERAGE kW Estimated average value of spindle output (see Note 2.)
Program infor-
[14] — Information on the program
mation
[15] Tool condition — Information on the tool to be used
[16] Cutting condition — Cutting conditions specified in the program
Ratio of the average turning/milling spindle load to the output characteristics,
[17] Load information %
estimated for the tool sequence

7-38
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
No. Item Unit Data description
Turning/Milling spindle output curve for intermittent (40%ED) rating and
Spindle output
continuous rating by red and green lines, respectively, against the spindle
[18] characteristic —
speed, estimated for the tool sequence. The average output is also estimated
curve
and indicated by a white triangle.

Note 1: No significant data can be presented on this display till completion of the checking
operation for the desired program on the TOOL PATH CHECK display. (The execution
of the Virtual Machining function is of no effect for this display.)
Note 2: The average value of spindle output is estimated according to the particular workpiece
material, and the coefficients used in the calculation of the average output are
described and stored for each material in a text file (C:\ymw\M8Y\data\nm64mdata\eng
\cspmat.txt) on the local disk as shown below.
The indication of the average output will be zero (0) in case the text file contains no
descriptions for the workpiece material specified in the program.
c：\ymw\M8Y\data\nm64mdata\eng\cspmat.txt
[Material-1]
Name=FC250  Workpiece material
Coeff-1=38
Coeff-2=568
Coeff-3=73
Coeff-4=139 Description of the coefficients used in the calculation of the average output for a
Coeff-5=105 workpiece made of FC250. Do not change the values inadvertently.
Coeff-6=295
Coeff-7=1500
Coeff-8=25
[Material-2]
Name=FCD450
Coeff-1=31
Coeff-2=568
Coeff-3=73
Coeff-4=142
Coeff-5=105
Coeff-6=294
Coeff-7=1100
Coeff-8=25
[Material-3] * “eng” in the file name corresponds with the language currently selected for
Name=S45C the display mode.
Coeff-1=23 * No registration for a new material can be made arbitrarily since the file only
 contains coefficients strictly certificated.


Note 3: Independently of whether the [SP Load Short-time Rating] option (provided on the
POSITION display) is currently selected or cancelled, the [17] LOAD AVERAGE value
is estimated and displayed with reference to the short-time rating.
Note 4: The red line refers to a rating type other than the above (according to the specifications
of the machine) when the display of spindle output curve with reference to 40%ED
rating is made invalid (parameter F159 bit 4 = 0) or when on the POSITION display the
[SP Load Short-time Rating] option (displayed by tapping and [View]) is
selected.
Note 5: The time for executing the common and the END units of a MAZATROL program is not
taken into account for the MACHINING NAVIGATION - PREDICT display.

7-39
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

7-6-2 Displaying data

 The functions of this display cannot be applied for a machining program

which has not yet been checked on the TOOL PATH CHECK display.

(1) Select the TOOL PATH CHECK display.

 The desired program must have been selected beforehand on the PROGRAM display.
(2) Carry out the checking operation completely.

 Refer to Section 7-2 for the checking procedure.

(3) Select the MACHINING NAVIGATION - PREDICT display.

 The estimates of the machine operation will be displayed in the total display mode
described in the following subsection.
 No data will be displayed if the checking operation has not yet been completed at all. In
case the checking operation based on a program of the same work number has already
been completed, however, data at that time will be displayed.

7-6-3 Display modes

1. Outline
This display has the following two display modes:
 Total display mode
The display is always made in this mode when the MACHINING NAVIGATION - PREDICT
display is selected.
In this display mode, estimated machining time and average spindle output are listed for each
tool sequence in addition to the general information about execution of the program.
 Tool-specific display mode
In this display mode, which can be selected and canceled by tapping the [TOOL OPTIMIZE]
menu item, data of a specific tool sequence listed up in the total display mode can be
selectively displayed in further detail. Moreover, cutting conditions specified in the program
can be modified through this display.

7-40
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
2. Changing from the total to the tool-specific display mode
(1) Check that a graphic display of the ratio of machining time for each tool sequence is
presented under RATIO OF MACHINING TIME.
 For a program the tool-path checking of which has been completed, estimated
machining time ratio for each tool sequence to the total machining time will be displayed
in a color-identified format on a strip graph as shown in the display example below. The
items on the strip graph are keyed from left to right, in a one-to-one correspondence, to
those line items of the list (estimated machining time and average spindle output for
each tool sequence) that are displayed at the bottom of the graph.

Graphic display of
the ratio of estimated
machining time

List

(2) Tap an item in the list.

 An arrow head (▲) will be displayed under the graph RATIO OF MACHINING TIME to
indicate the item of the tool sequence currently selected by the cursor, as shown in the
display example below.

Indicates the item of

the selected tool
sequence

Cursor

(3) Select the line of the desired tool sequence.

 The arrow head will move correspondingly with the cursor so that the ratio of the
estimated machining time of the specific tool sequence to the total machining time can
be visually checked.
(4) Tap the [TOOL OPTIMIZE] menu item.
 The display contents will be changed for a detailed view of the specified tool.
 Tap the same menu item once again, and the total display mode will be retrieved.

7-41
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

7-6-4 Modifying the cutting conditions

In the tool-specific display mode, cutting conditions specified in the PROGRAM display can be
modified through this display.

 Modification and incorporation of the cutting conditions into the program will
not immediately update the data in this display. Perform the checking
operation anew on the TOOL PATH CHECK display for that purpose
(modification of the program data on the PROGRAM display is of course not
required).

1. Modifying the cutting conditions

The cutting conditions specified in the program can be modified in the tool-specific display mode.
Note : The modified conditions, however, will not be incorporated into the program until the
[WRITE PROGRAM] menu function is executed.
(1) Select the tool-specific display mode.
 Cutting conditions cannot be modified until the tool-specific display mode has been
selected for the desired tool sequence.
(2) Tap the [C-COND CHANGE] menu item.
 The cursor will be placed on the C-SP text box in the CUTTING COND. display area,
which indicates that the values in this area can now be modified.
 Tap the same menu item anew, and the data modification will be prohibited once again.
Example :
(a) With the menu function deactivated (b) With the menu function activated

Cursor

Note : It is possible to edit the four cutting conditions displayed in the CUTTING COND.
display area (C-SP, FR, DEP-Z and WID-R), of which, however, only those corre-
sponding to the selected tool sequence are subjected to the edition.

 Refer to the PROGRAMMING MANUAL (MAZATROL Program) for a

description of the data items of the tool sequence.

(3) Tap the desired text box to place the cursor on it.
 The cursor can only be placed on the available boxes.
(4) Using a screen keyboard, specify new cutting condition.
 The value selected by the cursor will be overwritten by the new data.

7-42
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 7
2. Canceling the modification
Before execution of the [WRITE PROGRAM] menu function, the modification data can any time
be canceled and the original data retrieved by the following procedure:
(1) Tap the [CLEAR DATA] menu item.
 The entire text data in the CUTTING COND. display area will be changed to the original
data (current settings on the PROGRAM display).
 This operation can be performed any time, irrespective of whether the [C-COND
CHANGE] menu function is activated or deactivated, unless the [WRITE PROGRAM]
menu function has been executed.

3. Incorporating the modification into the program

Carry out the following operation to incorporate the modified cutting conditions into the program:
(1) Tap the [WRITE PROGRAM] menu item.
 A message box appears on the screen.
(2) Tap the [OK] button.
 The modified cutting conditions will be incorporated definitely into the program.
 This operation can be performed any time, irrespective of whether the [C-COND
CHANGE] menu function is activated or deactivated.
Note 1: Once this menu item has been selected, the modification clearing operation described
in item 2 above will only retrieve the modified values (the original data will have been
cleared from the memory).
Note 2: If the [TOOL OPTIMIZE] menu function is canceled or another tool is selected before
executing the [WRITE PROGRAM] menu function, then the results from the modifying
operations are entirely canceled and the original data retrieved.

7-43
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION

7-44 E
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

8-1 TOOL DATA Display

 There are two display modes provided on this display: Tool data mode for setting various data items on
the tools to be used, and Tool layout mode for assigning pocket numbers to the tools to be used as well
as for managing stocked tools.
Function
 Used to register magazine-mounted tools and setting tool shape data and the data required for man-
agement of the tools.
 Used to check the tools to be used for program execution and to manage stocked tools.

 Tool materials data that has been set on this display is used as learning data relating to cutting con-
Remarks ditions.
 Tool lengths can be manually measured using this display.

8-1-1 Outline

1. Data display
<Tool data mode>
Detailed information on the tool selected from the list is displayed on the right of the screen.

Mode select tabs.

List of tool data. Information on the tool

selected from the list at left.

D747S30238E

8-1
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

<Tool layout mode>

Use this mode to check the tools to be used for the execution of the program selected from the
program list and to manage data on the tools taken out from the magazine.

List of tool data. Display of the tools to be used for the

selected program, necessary tools and
stocked tools.

D747S30239E

A list of tool data is displayed on the left of the screen and items displayed on the right side
change depending on whether Tool data mode or Tool layout mode is selected.
Tap one of the mode select tabs (TOOL DATA and TOOL LAYOUT) to select the desired display
mode.

8-2
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
2. Tool list

A. Displayed data

In tool-name display mode In group-number display mode

[7] [7]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [1] [8] [5] [6]

D747S30240

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Pocket number
[1] TNo. —
TNo. of the tool mouned on the spindle is highlighted in blue.
[2] TOOL — Tool name
[3] NOM- mm (in) Nominal diameter of the tool
[4] ID Code — Suffix (Code that identifies tools of the same nominal diameter)
Rotational direction of the turning spindle and left-handed/right-handed tool
[5] FW/RV R/L — specification
(Displayed only for machines with turning functions)
Status of the tool
INVA: Invalid (prohibition of use)
[6] STAT. —
BRK: Broken (Note 1)
OVER: Tool life over (Note 2)
Used to change the display mode between tool-name display and group-
Display mode
[7] — number display.
select button
Presented only when bit 0 of parameter US3 is set to “1.”
[8] GROUP No. — Group number of the tool, as set on the TOOL DATA tab.

Note 1: If it is desirable to clear a tool of the status of BRK (Broken), make manual data
settings so as to establish either of the following conditions:
 LIFE TIME or LIFE NUM. = 0 (established by changing from another value, or anew after
deleting 0), or
 LIFE TIME > CUT TIME, or LIFE NUM. > USED NUM.

8-3
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

Note 2: If it is desirable to clear a tool of the status of OVER (Tool life over), make manual data
settings, in responce to the indication by highlighting an item in magenta on the TOOL
DATA tab, so as to establish all the following conditions:
 LIFE TIME > CUT TIME, or LIFE NUM. > USED NUM., and
 MAX WEAR  > WEAR COMP 

8-4
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
8-1-2 Tool data mode

1. Detailed display by tool

Items to be entered vary depending on the selected tool.

A. For milling tools

<Example of display>

END MILL CTR-DR

<Display data description>

The following table shows what items need to be set and what items are provided for each tool.

8-5
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

No. Item Unit Data description

CTR-DR DRILL

1 TOOL — Tool name  

2 NOM- mm (in) Nominal diameter or nominal size of the tool  
3 ID CODE — Code for identifying tools of the same type and the same nominal dia.  
4 LENGTH mm (in) Length of the tool  
5 LENG. CO. mm (in) Amount of geometric compensation for tool length  
6 LENG. No. — Offset number for tool length compensation  
7 TEETH — Number of teeth (of a throw-away drill) — 
8 ACT- mm (in) Actual diameter of the tool — —
9 ACT- CO. mm (in) Amount of geometric compensation for tool radius  
10 ACT- No. — Offset number for tool radius compensation  
11 LENGTH B mm (in) Length of the tool  
12 EDG-ANG degrees Nose angle of the tool  
13 TAP TYPE — Method of tapping for the tap (synchronous/asynchronous) — —
14 CORNER R mm (in) Corner R of an end-mill — —
15 LENG COMP. mm (in) Cutting-end position compensation value  
16 TYPE — Type of geometry of a barrel-shaped milling cutter — —
17 ACT-2 mm (in) Actual diameter 2 of a barrel-shaped milling cutter — —
18 TEETH LG mm (in) Length of cut of a barrel-shaped milling cutter — —
19 R1 mm (in) Contour radius 1 of a barrel-shaped milling cutter — —
20 R2 mm (in) Contour radius 2 of a barrel-shaped milling cutter — —
21 R HEIGHT mm (in) Contour radius center height of a barrel-shaped milling cutter — —
22 WEAR COMP X mm (in) Tool wear compensation amount in X-axis direction  
23 WEAR COMP Z mm (in) Tool wear compensation amount in Z-axis direction  
24 WEAR COMP Y mm (in) Tool wear compensation amount in Y-axis direction  
25 MAX WEAR X mm (in) Maximum admissible amount for wear compensation in X  
26 MAX WEAR Z mm (in) Maximum admissible amount for wear compensation in Z  
27 MAX WEAR Y mm (in) Maximum admissible amount for wear compensation in Y  
28 FW/RV — Direction of rotation  
29 OFS COMP Y — Compensation amount for misalignment  
30 LIFE TIME min Life time of the tool  
31 CUT TIME min Tool operation time  
32 LIFE NUM. — Tool life in number of machined pieces  
33 USED NUM. — Number of pieces machined by the tool  
34 INTERFER. — Intra-magazine interference data  
35 PKNo. — Number of the magazine pocket  
36 THRUST F. % Thrust force coefficient for the Z-axis servomotor — 
37 REC. FEED % Return speed ratio for synchronous tapping — —
38 HORSE PW % Horsepower coefficient for the milling spindle motor — 
39 MAX. ROT. min–1 Max. milling spindle speed  
Group number of the tool (the same group number is to be assigned to all
40 GROUP No. — tools that are the same in both shape and dimensions, in order that they  
may be used as a spare tool for one another.)
41 ID No. — Tool ID number  
42 TOOL — Tool name  
43 MAT. — Tool material  
44 BORDER N·m Threshold for the drill pecking cycle of cutting-load detection type — 
45 TOOL MODEL — Name of the tool model  

8-6
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
: Provided
Tool
BCK CHAM- FCE END CHIP TOL BAL E
REAMER TAP BOR BAR B-B BAR OTHER BARREL
FACE FER MILL MILL VAC SENS MIL
            
            
            
            
            
            
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
—  — — — —    — —  
            
            
            —
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
—  — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — —   — — — —
         — —  —
— — — — — — — — — — — — 
— — — — — — — — — — — — 
— — — — — — — — — — — — 
— — — — — — — — — — — — 
— — — — — — — — — — — — 
— — — — — — — — — — — — 
            
            
            
            
            
            
         — —  —
            —
         — —  
         — —  
            
            
            
            
— — — — —     — —  
—  — — — — — — — — — — —
— —        — —  
         — —  

            

            
            
         — —  —
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
            

Note 1: The BORDER item is only displayed for the optional auto-pecking function.
Note 2: The TOOL item can be specified as BARREL only when the optional function of cutting
point command is available.
Note 3: The ACT- item is replaced with ACT-1 for a BARREL tool.

8-7
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

B. For turning tools

<Example of display>

GENERAL GROOVE

<Display data description>

The following table shows what items need to be set and what items are provided for each tool.

8-8
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
: Provided
Tool
No. Item Unit Data description
GENERAL GROOVE THREAD SPECIAL

1 TOOL — Tool name    

2 PART — Section to be machined by the tool    —
3 CODE No. — Identification number for a special tool — — — 
4 NOM- — — — —
5 NOM. mm (in) Nominal size of the tool    
Suffix (Code that identifies tools of the same
6 ID CODE —    
nominal size)
7 INDEX ANG. degrees Index angle of the tool tip for the FLASH-tool    
8 HLD. TYPE — Type of the tool holder    
9 TOOL SET X mm (in) Tool setting value in X-axis direction    
10 TOOL SET Z mm (in) Tool setting value in Z-axis direction    
11 LENGTH mm (in) Length of the tool — — — —
Relative position of the tool nose from the milling
12 LENGTH A mm (in)    
spindle’s nose center (in Z)
Relative position of the tool nose from the milling
13 LENGTH B mm (in)    
spindle’s nose center (in X)
14 ACT- mm (in) Actual diameter of the tool — — — —
Relative position of the tool nose from the milling
15 LENGTH C mm (in)    
spindle’s nose center (in Y) (Note 3)
Rotational direction of the turning spindle and
16 CUT DIR. —    
left-handed/right-handed tool specification
17 NOSE-R mm (in) Radius of the tool nose   — 
Method of tapping for the tap
18 TAP TYPE — — — — —
(synchronous/asynchronous)
19 EDG-ANG degrees Nose angle of the tool  — — 
20 WIDTH mm (in) Width of the tool shank    
21 TIP-WID mm (in) Cutting width of the grooving tool —  — —
22 CUT ANGLE degrees Cutting angle of the tool  — — 
23 GRV DEPTH mm (in) Maximum available grooving depth of the tool —  — —
24 No. — No. of offset data on the TOOL OFFSET display    
Tool wear compensation amount in X-axis
25 WEAR COMP X mm (in)    
direction
mm (in) Tool wear compensation amount in Z-axis
26 WEAR COMP Z    
direction
Tool wear compensation amount in Y-axis
27 WEAR COMP Y mm (in)    
direction
Maximum admissible amount for wear compen-
28 MAX WEAR X mm (in)    
sation in X
Maximum admissible amount for wear compen-
29 MAX WEAR Z mm (in)    
sation in Z
Maximum admissible amount for wear compen-
30 MAX WEAR Y mm (in)    
sation in Y
Easy wear compensation amount in X-axis
31 EASY COMP X mm (in)    
direction
Easy wear compensation amount in Z-axis
32 EASY COMP Z mm (in)    
direction
Easy wear compensation amount in Y-axis
33 EASY COMP Y mm (in)    
direction
Constant wear compensation amount in X-axis
34 CONS.COMP X mm (in)    
direction
Constant wear compensation amount in Z-axis
35 CONS.COMP Z mm (in)    
direction

8-9
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

: Provided
Tool
No. Item Unit Data description
GENERAL GROOVE THREAD SPECIAL

Constant wear compensation amount in Y-axis

36 CONS.COMP Y mm (in)    
direction
37 HOLDER — Tool holder type (1 - 4)    
38 LBB No. — Number of the Long Boring Bar    —
39 HOLDER L mm (in) Holder size (Length)    
40 HOLDER H1 mm (in) Holder size (Width)    
41 HOLDER H2 mm (in) Holder size (Width)    
42 LIFE TIME min Life time of the tool    
43 CUT TIME min Tool operation time    
44 LIFE NUM. — Tool life in number of machined pieces    
45 USED NUM. — Number of pieces machined by the tool    
46 INTERFER. — Intra-magazine interference code    
47 PKNo. — Number of the magazine pocket    
Group number of the tool (the same group
48 GROUP No. — number is assigned to all tools that are the same    
in both shape and dimensions.)
49 ID No. — Tool ID number    
Memorandum of the tool (in up to 8
50 NAME —    
alphanumeric characters)
51 MAT. — Tool material    
TOOL EYE compensation amount in X-axis
52 TL EYE CM X mm (in)    
direction
TOOL EYE compensation amount in Z-axis
53 TL EYE CM Z mm (in)    
direction
54 REC. FEED % Return speed ratio for synchronous tapping — — — —
55 TOOL MODEL — Name of the tool model    

Note 1: For a machine having “visual tool ID/data management” functions, ID numbers cannot
be specified on the TOOL DATA display.
Note 2: The NAME item is displayed when bit 2 of parameter F166 is set to 1. If the “visual tool
ID/data management” function is made valid, however, the IDNo. item is displayed in
stead of the NAME item.
Note 3: The items displayed depend on the model and specifications of the machine.

8-10
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
2. Simplified display for multiple tools
A tap on the [LIST INPUT] menu item on the TOOL DATA display changes the display of the
detailed tool information display area at the right of the display as shown below. In this display
format, it is possible to set, for multiple tools in succession, LENGTH, ACT-, LENG COMP., and
WEAR COMP data.

A. Displayed data

[1] [2] [3]

D747S30066E

Another tap on the [LIST INPUT] menu item returns the display to the normal display format.

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] LENGTH mm (in) Tool length of the tool
[2] ACT- mm (in) Tool diameter of the tool
LENG COMP. or
[3] mm (in) Cutting-end position/Wear compensation amount (Note)
WEAR COMP

Note : LENG COMP. or WEAR COMP is displayed according as parameter F166 bit 1 is set
to 0 or 1.

C. WEAR CO. INPUT mode (only for machines with turning functions)
Activate the [WEAR CO. INPUT] menu function to select the display format convenient for in-
putting length and wear compensation data (with the LENG COMP. and WEAR COMP X/Y/Z
data items displayed on the screen).
INCRMENT TEACH LIST WEAR CO.
INPUT INPUT INPUT

8-11
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

8-1-3 Registering the tools to be used (for MAZATROL programs)

1. Registering the tools to be used

A. Procedure for registering tools

Proceed as follows to register on the TOOL DATA display the tools to be used:
(1) Tap the TNo. item under which a tool is to be registered.
(2) Tap the [EDIT] menu item.
(3) Tap the [TOOLDATA ASSIGN] menu item.
 This will cause the following menu to be displayed:
ENDMILL FACEMILL CHAMFER BALL OTHER TOUCH BARREL >>>
CUTTER ENDMILL TOOL SENSOR [1]
d

CENTER DRILL BACKSPOT REAMER TAP BORING BACK CHIP >>>

DRILL FACER BAR BOR. BAR VACUUM [2]

GENERAL GROOVE THREAD T.DRILL T.TAP SPECIAL >>>

[3]

 Tapping the [>>>] menu item will change the menu in the order of [1]  [2]  [3]  [1].
(4) From among the menus [1], [2] and [3] select the name of the tool to be registered.
 The selected tool name will be registered in the TOOL column.
(5) For registering a turning tool, tap the PART item.
 From the displayed menu select a menu item in the diagram below according to the
section to be machined.

OUT
OUTR
DIAMETER

EDG EDG
EDGE EDGE
(BAK)

IN IN
INNER INNER
(BAK) DIAMETER

If [SPECIAL] is selected for the tool type, select a menu item from [001] to [009].
(6) Tap the NOM- item and specify the nominal diameter.
(7) Tap the INTERFER. item and selcet the menu item for the desired information item on
intra-magazine interference.

ORDINARY LARGE MAG DIR+ MAG DIR- SMALL LARGE MAG DIR+ MAG DIR-
DIAMETER L + - S L + -

 [LARGE L], [MAG DIR+ +] and [MAG DIR– –] menu items are displayed only for
machines that allow the use of very large tools.

8-12
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
The menu refers to information items on intra-magazine interference as shown below.
ORDINARY DIAMETER
For a tool completely fitting into the pocket.
LARGE L
For a tool which allows only SMALL tools to be mounted in both adjacent pockets.
MAG DIR + +
For a tool which requires the next pocket (succeeding in PKNo.) to be left empty.
MAG DIR – –
For a tool which requires the last pocket (preceding in PKNo.) to be left empty.
SMALL S
For a tool which allows in general ORDINARY, LARGE and SMALL tools to be mounted
in both adjacent pockets, and additionally in particular a MAG DIR + tool in the next
pocket and a MAG DIR – tool in the last pocket.
LARGE L
For a tool which not only requires both adjacent pockets to be left empty, but also
restricts the type of the tool in the preceding (last but one) and the following (next but
one) pocket to ORDINARY or SMALL.
MAG DIR+ +
For a tool which not only requires both adjacent pockets to be left empty, but also
restricts the type of the tool in the next but one pocket to ORDINARY or SMALL.
MAG DIR– –
For a tool which not only requires both adjacent pockets to be left empty, but also
restricts the type of the tool in the last but one pocket to ORDINARY or SMALL.
The figure below gives an illustration of tool arrangement in the magazine.
<Reference diagram for available tool sizes>
Pocket
PKNo. –  concerned +
ORDINARY : Size of the tool
in question
PKNo. –  +
LARGE

PKNo. –  +
MAG DIR +

PKNo. –  +
MAG DIR –

PKNo. –  +
SMALL

PKNo. –  +
LARGE

PKNo. –  +

MAG DIR +

PKNo. –  +
MAG DIR –

Note : The diagram above is only given for reference. Tool data registration should be
done after checking each tool for real mounting safety in the magazine.

8-13
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

Remark : The table below shows the clearance required in the magazine between
adjacent tools of various size.
Tool data registration can be normally done only when the tool in question does
not interfere with the nearest tools on both sides. Otherwise the registration will be
rejected with an alarm (458 INTERFERING TOOL REGISTERED).
<Clearance required in the magazine between adjacent tools of various size>
Pocket
Preceding pockets concerned Succeeding pockets

PKNo. –  +

ORDINARY ORDINARY
LARGE — — LARGE
MAG DIR + — MAG DIR +
MAG DIR – — MAG DIR –
ORDINARY
SMALL SMALL
LARGE — — LARGE
MAG DIR + — — MAG DIR +
MAG DIR – — — MAG DIR –
ORDINARY — — ORDINARY
LARGE — — LARGE
MAG DIR + — — MAG DIR +
MAG DIR – — — MAG DIR –
LARGE
SMALL SMALL
LARGE — — — — LARGE
MAG DIR + — — — MAG DIR +
MAG DIR – — — — MAG DIR –
ORDINARY — ORDINARY
LARGE — — LARGE
MAG DIR + — — MAG DIR +
MAG DIR – — — MAG DIR –
MAG DIR +
SMALL — SMALL
LARGE — — — — LARGE
MAG DIR + — — — MAG DIR +
MAG DIR – — — — MAG DIR –
ORDINARY — ORDINARY
LARGE — — LARGE
MAG DIR + — — MAG DIR +
MAG DIR – — — MAG DIR –
MAG DIR –
SMALL — SMALL
LARGE — — — — LARGE
MAG DIR + — — — MAG DIR +
MAG DIR – — — — MAG DIR –
ORDINARY ORDINARY
LARGE LARGE
MAG DIR + — MAG DIR +
MAG DIR – — MAG DIR –
SMALL
SMALL SMALL
LARGE — — LARGE
MAG DIR + — — MAG DIR +
MAG DIR – — — MAG DIR –

8-14
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
Pocket
Preceding pockets concerned Succeeding pockets

PKNo. –  +

ORDINARY — — ORDINARY
LARGE — — — — LARGE
MAG DIR + — — — — MAG DIR +
MAG DIR – — — — — MAG DIR –
LARGE
SMALL — — SMALL
LARGE — — — — LARGE
MAG DIR + — — — — MAG DIR +
MAG DIR – — — — — MAG DIR –
ORDINARY — — ORDINARY
LARGE — — — LARGE
MAG DIR + — — — MAG DIR +
MAG DIR – — — — MAG DIR –
MAG DIR +
SMALL — — SMALL
LARGE — — — — LARGE
MAG DIR + — — — — MAG DIR +
MAG DIR – — — — — MAG DIR –
ORDINARY — — ORDINARY
LARGE — — — LARGE
MAG DIR + — — — MAG DIR +
MAG DIR – — — — MAG DIR –
MAG DIR –
SMALL — — SMALL
LARGE — — — — LARGE
MAG DIR + — — — — MAG DIR +
MAG DIR – — — — — MAG DIR –

(8) Tap the ID CODE item.

 The following menu will be displayed. From among the menus [1], [2] and [3] select an
appropriate suffix.
A B C D E F G H HEAVY >>>
TOOL [1]
d

J K L M N P Q R HEAVY >>>
TOOL [2]
d

S T U V W X Y Z HEAVY >>>
TOOL [3]
d

 Tapping the [>>>] menu item will change the menu in the order of [1]  [2]  [3]  [1].
Note : Menus [1] to [3] are provided for assignment of a suffix (code that identifies tools of the
same nominal diameter). For heavy tools, suffix assignment must be made with the
[HEAVY TOOL] menu function being activated.

8-15
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

B. Tool length (LENGTH)

Using a screen keyboard, specify the tool LENGTH for milling tools or the tool LENGTH A and B
for turning tools.

 The procedure for manual tool length measurement is described later under
2.

Tool’s reference position

LENGTH

C. Tool diameter (ACT-) and cutting-end position compensation value (LENG COMP.)
Specify the tool diameter (actual diameter of the tool) as ACT-.
Under the corresponding condition of parameter setting (F38 bit 4 = 1), it is possible to set the
diameter with a minus sign. Tools that have a negative diameter value specified will be offset in
reverse to the programmed direction for tool radius compensation during execution of an
EIA/ISO program.
Remark : Do not use such a tool, however, for the execution of a MAZATROL program;
otherwise an alarm will be raised (654 TOOL DATA ERROR).
 Cutting-end position compensation is necessary for drills, back spot-facing tools, back-boring
bars, or other tools whose actual cutting-end positions are not at the tips of the tools.

LENG COMP.

ACT-

Cutting-end position compensation value for drill M3S020

8-16
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
 For drills, the appropriate LENG COMP. value can be set automatically from the nose angle
(EDG-ANG) and nominal diameter (NOM-). The automatic setting occurs upon manual
setting of the EDG-ANG value or upon completion of automatic tool-length measurement, and
can be made valid or invalid by setting the parameter L44 as follows.
L44 = 0 : Automatic setting of LENG COMP. value with reference to the EDG-ANG value.
No automatic setting will occur, however, upon completion of automatic tool-
length measurement when the EDG-ANG item is not yet entered.
= 1 : No automatic setting of LENG COMP. value.
= 2 : Automatic setting of LENG COMP. value with reference to the EDG-ANG value.
In case the EDG-ANG item is not yet entered, automatic setting will occur for the
default EDG-ANG value (118°) upon completion of automatic tool-length
measurement.

D. TEETH
Set the number of cutting edges (TEETH) for a drill.

E. CORNER R
Set the radius of the edge of an end-mill.
This data item is used in 3-D machining operations.

CORNER R

ACT-

Corner R (CORNER R) of an end-mill D740S30530

F. TAP TYPE
Tap the [FLOATING TAP] menu item to select “asynchronous” as the type of tapping, or tap the
[FIXED TAP] menu item to select “synchronous” as the type of tapping.
Note : For a tap currently mounted on the spindle, the change in the TAP TYPE setting will not
become valid until the tap is mounted anew (over any other tool).

G. Spindle rotation direction and left-/right-handedness (CUT DIR.)

From the corresponding menu, select for a turning tool in which direction the turning spindle is to
be rotated during machining and whether the tool is left-handed or right-handed.
<When GENERAL, T. GROOVE, THREAD or SPECIAL is selected>

RIGHT RIGHT LEFT LEFT

8-17
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

Examples of setting
PART For Turning spindle 1 For Turning spindle 2

RIGHT LEFT RIGHT LEFT

OUT IN
Z

LEFT RIGHT

EDG

H. Radius of tool nose (NOSE-R)

Using a screen keyboard, specify the radius of tool nose.

I. Cutting angle (CUT ANGLE) and tool nose angle (EDG-ANG)

Using a screen keyboard, specify the shape of the tool nose (cutting angle and tool nose angle)
for turning tools.

WIDTH

ACT-
EDG-ANG
CUT ANGLE WIDTH

EDG-ANG
NOSE-R

J. Maximum cutting depth (GRV DEPTH) and tool width (TIP-WID)

Using a screen keyboard, specify the maximum cutting depth of the grooving tool and tool width
of the grooving tool.

WIDTH

TIP-WID
GRV DEPTH

NOSE-R

8-18
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
K. Tool width (WIDTH)
Using a screen keyboard, specify the width of the tool.

L. Thrust force (THRUST F.)

To control the load current of the Z-axis servomotor, specify the thrust force of the milling tool.
 When the [AUTO SET] menu item is tapped, the NC equipment will calculate the maximum
permissible load value of the Z-axis servomotor and automatically set the adequate thrust
force coefficient (%).
Note 1: If the load on the Z-axis servomotor exceeds the percentage value that has been input
to the THRUST F. item, then the cutting feedrate will automatically decrease and the
load will be controlled to within its permissible limits.
Note 2: This item is valid only for machine models provided with an AFC function. This
operation does not need to be performed for the machine models of the standard
specifications.

M. Horse power (HORSE PW)

To control the load current of the milling spindle drive motor, specify the horse power of the
milling tool.
 When the [AUTO SET] menu item is tapped, the NC equipment will calculate the maximum
permissible load value of the spindle drive motor and automatically set the adequate horse
power coefficient (%).
Note 1: If the load on the milling spindle drive motor exceeds the percentage value that has
been input to the HORSE PW item, then the cutting feedrate will automatically
decrease and the load will be controlled to within its permissible limits.
Note 2: This item is valid only for machine models provided with an AFC function. This
operation does not need to be performed for the machine models of the standard
specifications.

N. REC. FEED
Set a returning speed rate (%) for the synchronous tapping tool.
Returning speed = REC. FEED/100 × Feed rate
(All REC. FEED settings less than 100% are handled as 100%.)

O. Maximum rotational speed (MAX. ROT.)

Specify the maximum rotational speed of the milling tool.
Note 1: The maximum rotational speed of the tool will not be limited if “0” remains set in this
item.
Note 2: The maximum rotational speed data cannot be set for TOL SENSOR and CHIP VAC.

P. Type of material (MAT.)

Tap the menu item corresponding to the type of material to be set.
 If a milling tool that has been registered on the TOOL FILE display is registered here, the
corresponding type of material set previously on that display will be automatically set. (Only
when a suffix is set.)

8-19
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

 The material types presented in the menu here refer to the settings on the
CUTTING CONDITION - W.-MAT./T.-MAT. display. See Section 9-1 for
further details.
 Data that has been set in the MAT. item is referred to during automatic setting
of cutting conditions or used as tutorial data relating to cutting conditions in
the MAZATROL program, based on the data that has been registered on the
CUTTING CONDITION display. See Section 9-2 for further details.

Q. Threshold value (BORDER)

Set the threshold value of cutting load on the drill for auto-pecking. Determine the value with the
aid of the DRILL MONITOR display of Condition Monitor (COND. MONITOR).

R. Holder type (HLD. TYPE)

Select from the menu the type of the turning tool in terms of holder.
This item is provided for the application of an angle holder.
[STANDARD HOLDER] Display: STANDARD (Default setting)
[45 HOLDER] Display: 45 (when parameter BA63 = 45)
[45 HOLDER] Display: 45 (when parameter BA63 = 45)
Note : An angle holder is only selectable when bit 3 of parameter TC142 is set to one (1).

S. INDEX ANG.
Select from the menu the tool’s application direction (i.e. the index angle of the milling spindle).
[M-SP 0 STANDARD] The milling spindle is indexed to 0° for the application of the tool.
[M-SP 180 REVERSE] The milling spindle is indexed to 180° for the application of the tool.
[TURN. T ANGLE] To specify the desired angle of indexing the milling spindle for the
application of the tool.

T. Tool life time (LIFE TIME)

Specify tool life time (maximum possible application time).
Note : The NC unit cannot manage the life of that tool if “0” remains set at this item.

U. Tool application time (CUT TIME)

Specify tool application time (cumulative cutting feed time) in minutes.
 The tool application time is automatically counted up during actual cutting feed of the tool.
The display of the CUT TIME item in the CONTENTS column and of the TNo. and TOOL
items in the TOOL LIST column will be highlighted in magenta when the tool application time
reaches the life time specified above.
 The display of the TNo. and TOOL items in the TOOL LIST column will be highlighted in
yellow when the tool application time “approaches” the life time specified above.
The judgment of the approach to the life time is made according to the setting of the following
parameters:
F82 bit 2 (Method of judgment)
= 0: The rate of the application time to the life time has reached the setting of F77.
= 1: The remaining serviceable time has descended to the setting of F77.
F77 (Reference value of judgment)
For F82 bit 2 = 0: Critical rate of the application time to the life time (in %).
For F82 bit 2 = 1: Critical remaining serviceable time (in minutes).
Note 1: This step is to be omitted for a new tool (to leave the default setting “0” as it is for the
CUT TIME item).

8-20
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
Note 2: The judgment of tools approaching the expiry of their life is not effectuated if parameter
F77 remains set to “0”.

V. Tool wear compensation data (WEAR COMP)

As workpiece machining progresses, increasing wear on the tools may gradually deviate the
actual nose positions of the tools from the program-designated dimensions. Set any such errors
in this data item to carry out tool offset.
If tool offset is required as a result of measurement of machined workpieces, use this item to
store the compensation amount.
Tool wear compensation amount will be automatically corrected when a workpiece measurement
unit or a tool measurement unit in a MAZATROL program is executed.
Note : Select, or put a check mark to, the [Wear Comp. Incremental First] option (displayed
by tapping and [Setting TOOL DATA]) if it is desirable to edit the current
setting by entering incremental data.

W. Maximal available tool wear compensation data (MAX WEAR)

Set the maximal available tool wear compensation data. When the tool wear compensation data
reaches this data, the tool is regarded to be exhausted.
Setting such data enables spare tools to be indexed automatically.

X. TOOL MODEL
Use this item to register the shape model of the tool to be used for the INTELLIGENT SAFETY
SHIELD and Virtual Machining functions. Three types of tool models are available: Parametric
model, New model by rotation/extrusion and Assembly tool model.

 See Section 12-6 for a detailed description.

2. Manual measurement of the tool lengths

The actual length of each tool to be used must be measured for setting data under LENGTH,
LENGTH A or LENGTH B on the TOOL DATA display. Measurement of the tool lengths can be
made in the full-automatic mode, the semi-automatic mode, or the manual mode. Here, the
operating procedure for manual tool-length measurement using the [LENGTH TEACH] function
of the TOOL DATA display is described.

 For the full-automatic and semi-automatic tool-length measurement pro-

cedures, see the Operating Manual for the machine.

(1) Mount on the spindle the tool whose length is to be measured.

 Carry out the tool change operation to mount on the spindle the tool which is accomo-
dated in the magazine pocket.

 For the operation, see the Operating Manual for the machine.

(2) Perform manual axis movements to bring the tool tip into contact with the top surface of
either the reference block or the workpiece of a pre-determined height.
 For H-type machines, the edge locator of the table functions as reference.

8-21
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

 For the operation, see the Operating Manual for the machine.

(3) Call up the TOOL DATA display on the screen.

(4) Tap the [LENGTH TEACH] menu item.
 The cursor will appear in the position of the LENGTH item of the tool currently mounted
on the spindle.
(5) Specify the height of either the reference block or the workpiece.
 The NC equipment will then calculate the length of the tool mounted on the spindle, and
the calculated value will be automatically set under LENGTH. (See the following figure.)

Machine zero-point

Distance from the

machine zero-point to
the current position of
the machine

Manual axis movement Distance from the

machine zero-point to the
table surface (constant)

Current position
of the machine
Tool length

Distance from the

Reference block
table surface to
or workpiece
the tool tip

Table
M3S022

Note : In the case of the figure shown below, specify “0”.

Table
M3S023

 Since the current position of the machine is stored in the memory of the NC equipment, it
will calculate the length of the tool if the height of the reference block or workpiece (i.e.,
the distance from the table surface to the tool tip) is specified.

8-22
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
3. Tool length measurement using the [TEACH] menu function
The operating procedure is shown below taking as an example the case that the TEACH method
is used for a turning tool.
Do not use the [TEACH] menu function unless the position on the A-axis is 0°; otherwise an
alarm will be caused (1451 TILT TABLE ANGLE INCORRECT).
(1) Mount on the spindle the tool whose length is to be measured.
 Carry out the tool change operation to mount on the spindle the tool which is accomo-
dated in the magazine pocket.

 For the operation, see the Operating Manual for the machine.

(2) Perform manual axis movements to bring the tool tip into contact with the end face of the
reference workpiece.

 For the operation, see the Operating Manual for the machine.

Example: TNo. 2

Axis of rotation
of the turning spindle

Reference Distance Z from the

Z workpiece end face of the table
100 mm
50 mm

Y
Machine coordinate
system
D740S30310

 Any workpiece whose dimensions are known can be used as a reference one.
(3) Call up the TOOL DATA display on the screen and tap the [LENGTH TEACH] menu item.
 The cursor will appear in the position of the LENGTH A item of the tool currently
mounted on the spindle.
 The cursor will move to LENGTH A if a turning, grooving, threading, or special turning
tool is mounted on the spindle, or to LENGTH if any other tool is mounted.
(4) Enter the distance Z, from the end face of the table. In this example, enter “100.”
 The NC unit will then calculate the length of the tool mounted on the spindle, and the
calculated value will be automatically set under LENGTH A.
(5) Perform manual axis movements to bring the tool tip into contact with the outer diameter
surface of the reference workpiece.

8-23
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

Example:
TNo. 2
Axis of rotation
of the turning spindle

Reference
Z workpiece

50 mm Distance Y from the axis of

Y rotation of the turning spindle

Machine coordinate
system
D740S30311

(6) Move the cursor to the LENGTH B item.

(7) Tap the [TEACH] menu item.
(8) Enter the distance Y from the axis of rotation of the turning spindle. In this example, enter
the radius value “25” of the reference workpiece.
 The NC unit automatically calculates the length of the tool mounted on the spindle and
assigns the calculated value to LENGTH B.
 To assign a value to LENGTH for a tool other than a turning, grooving, threading or special
turning tool, perform the operations of steps (1) to (4). The operations of steps (5) to (8) are
not required.

4. Manual tool nose measurement using the TOOL EYE (TOOL EYE measurement)
The operating procedure is shown below taking as an example the case that the manual tool
length measurement using the TOOL EYE is executed for a turning tool.
(1) Mount on the spindle the tool whose length is to be measured.
 Carry out the tool change operation to mount on the spindle the tool which is accomo-
dated in the magazine pocket.

 For the operation, see the Operating Manual for the machine.

(2) Tap the [TOOL MEASURE] menu item.

 The following menu will be displayed:
MSR UNIT MSR UNIT TOOL EYE
OFF ON MEASURE

Note : Activation of the [TOOL MEASURE] menu function of the TOOL DATA display is
rejected with an alarm (2611 TOOL OFFSET MEASURING) if a TOOL EYE
measurement using the corresponding function of the TOOL OFFSET display
should not yet be completed.
(3) Tap the [MSR UNIT ON] menu item.
 The TOOL EYE will move out to the predetermined measuring position.

 Be extra careful not to bring the arm of the TOOL EYE into contact with the
tool or workpiece during TOOL EYE OUT/IN operations. If contact is likely to
occur, either move the milling spindle to a safety working zone or remove the
workpiece.

(4) Move the tool nose close to the sensor of the TOOL EYE.

8-24
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
(5) Tap the [TOOL EYE MEASURE] menu item (first, measure the LENGTH A).
 The detailed tool display area at the right of the display will change to the tool length list
and the line corresponding to the current tool will be highlighted (in light blue).
 The cutting feed mode will be automatically selected and the feed rate will be fixed at the
measuring speed specified in parameter K15.
(6) Bring the tool nose into contact with the sensor located in the Z-axis direction.

Example: [2] [1]

LED

Y Y

[1] Z

[2]

 A “beep” sound will occur, the LED in the middle will go out, and the movement of the
axis will stop.
 The value of LENGTH A will be set automatically.
(7) Move the tool nose away from the sensor.
 Press the key for an axis movement in the opposite direction to that of [2] in step (6)
above. (Because of the automatic interlock function, all the other axis move keys are
ineffective.)
 When the axis move key is released, the interlock function will be canceled as a result
and usual axis movement operations can be subsequently carried out.
(8) Tap the [TOOL EYE MEASURE] menu item to deactivate the menu function, and then
move the tool nose close to the next measurement position.
(9) Tap the [TOOL EYE MEASURE] menu item again to measure the LENGTH B.
(10) Bring the tool nose into contact with the sensor located in the Y-axis direction.
 The value of LENGTH B will be set automatically.
(11) Move the tool nose away from the sensor.
(12) Tap the [MSR UNIT OFF] menu item to return the TOOL EYE to its storage position.

 A laser measurement function can be used for measuring the tool length of a milling tool.
 If, following the above setting operations, tool-length data is also to be set for other tools,
repeat procedural steps (1) through (11) above.
Remark : Set bit 7 of parameter SU158 to one (1) if it is desirable that the corresponding wear
compensation amount should be cleared to zero (0) as a result of automatic updating
of the settings on the TOOL DATA display by the function of “tool length measure-
ment.”
Tool type Item measured Wear comp. item cleared
LENGTH A WEAR COMP Z
Turning
LENGTH B WEAR COMP Y
Milling LENGTH WEAR COMP Z

8-25
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

5. Setting tool wear compensation data

(1) Calculate the tool wear compensation data.
Example : If the measured diameter value of a machined workpiece is 30.24 mm for a
programmed diameter value of 30.00 mm, as shown below:

TNo. 1

30 30.24

Machining shape Measured value of a

definded in the program machined workpiece
T3S057

Tool wear compensation data for TNo. 1 becomes:

(Wear compensation data) = ((Programmed data) – (Measured data))/2
= (30 – 30.24)/2
= –0.12 (mm)
(2) Tap the desired data item.
(3) Set the value that was calculated during step (1) above.
Note 1: Wear compensation is always performed with reference to the machine coordinate
system, irrespective of the angular position of the table.
Note 2: Set the compensation data in radius values.

A = 0° A = –90°

Comp. Z

Comp. Z
Comp. Y

Comp. Y

A = –90°
A = 0°

6. Setting tool life management data

The life of the tools accommodated in the magazine can be managed using one of the following
three methods:
 Tool life management according to the application time
 Tool life management according to the number of machined workpieces
 Tool life management according to the amount of wear
Remark : Use the following parameters to select or cancel the method of tool life manage-
ment according to the application time, or the number of machined workpieces:
F113 bit 4 (Tool life management according to the application time)
= 0: Use of application time for tool life management.
= 1: No use of application time for tool life management.

8-26
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
F114 bit 7 (Tool life management according to the number of machined workpieces)
= 0: Use of workpiece quantity for tool life management.
= 1: No use of workpiece quantity for tool life management.

A. Tool life management according to the application time

(1) Tap the LIFE TIME data item.
(2) Set the maximum available application time for the tool.
 The NC unit cannot manage the life according to the application time for a tool whose
setting under LIFE TIME remains 0.
 The application time is automatically counted up during actual cutting feed of the tool,
and displayed in the CUT TIME data item in minutes (according to the internal
processing in seconds). When the application time reaches the LIFE TIME setting,
“OVER” will appear under STAT. in the TOOL LIST area with the tool’s display items
“TNo.” and “TOOL” being highlighted in magenta.
 The display items “TNo.” and “TOOL” in the TOOL LIST area will be highlighted in yellow
when the tool’s application time “approaches” the LIFE TIME setting.
The judgment of the approach to the life time is made according to the following
parameters:
F82 bit 2 (Method of judgment)
= 0: The rate of the application time to the life time has reached the value of F77.
= 1: The remaining serviceable time has descended to the value of F77.
F77 (Reference value of judgment)
F82 bit 2 = 0: Critical rate of the application time to the life time (in %).
F82 bit 2 = 1: Critical remaining serviceable time (in minutes).
Note 1: The expiry of the serviceable life will not merely be indicated by the display of “OVER”
under STAT., but also cause the alarm 225 TOOL LIFE OVER. The function for
automatic replacement of the life tool with a spare one can now be applied to continue
machining by suppressing the interruption of automatic operation due to the alarm.
Use the following parameters to select the type of processing at the expiry of tool life:
F113 bit 1 (Type of processing at the expiry of a milling tool’s life)
= 0: Automatic operation is continued.
= 1: Automatic operation is stopped with an alarm displayed.
F113 bit 2 (Type of processing at the expiry of a turning tool’s life)
= 0: Automatic operation is continued.
= 1: Automatic operation is stopped with an alarm displayed.
Note 2: The judgment of tools approaching the expiry of their life is not effectuated if parameter
F77 remains set to 0.
Note 3: The current value of the CUT TIME item can be changed manually as required.

B. Tool life management according to the number of machined workpieces

(1) Tap the LIFE NUM. data item.
(2) Set the maximum available number of workpieces to be machined by the tool.
 The NC unit cannot manage the life according to the number of machined workpieces for
a tool whose setting under LIFE NUM. remains 0.
Note 1: The expiry of the serviceable life with respect to the application frequency will not
merely be indicated by the display of “OVER” under STAT., but also cause the alarm
225 TOOL LIFE OVER. The function for automatic replacement of the life tool with a
spare one can now be applied to continue machining by suppressing the interruption of
automatic operation due to the alarm.

8-27
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

Note 2: The current value of the USED NUM. item can be changed manually as required.

C. Tool life management according to the amount of wear

(1) Tap the data item X of MAX WEAR.
(2) Set the maximum permissible amount of tool wear in the X-axis direction.
 If 0 remains set, tool life management according to the amount of wear in the X-axis
direction will not occur.
(3) Set the maximum permissible amount of tool wear in the Z-axis direction.
 If 0 remains set, tool life management according to the amount of wear in the Z-axis
direction will not occur.
Note : If, during automatic workpiece measurement or automatic nose measurement, the
absolute value of the data setting in the WEAR COMP item exceeds the data setting in
MAX WEAR, then the data will be highlighted and an alarm message 225 TOOL LIFE
OVER will be displayed to indicate that the tool life has expired and the tool must
therefore be replaced with a new one.

7. Tool nose position for each tool (TOOL EYE measurement)

 Turning tool : Tool nose reference point

Section to be
machined Outer diameter Inner diameter Edge
(OUT) (IN) (EDG)
Type of tool

General cutting tool

(GENERAL)

Grooving tool
(GROOVE)

Threading tool
(THREAD)

8-28
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
8. Other functions

A. TOOL SEARCH
Use this menu function to search the TOOL DATA display for tools with reference to their
names.
(1) Tap the [TOOL SEARCH] menu item.
 The following menu will be displayed:
ENDMILL FACEMILL CHAMFER BALL OTHER TOUCH BARREL >>>
CUTTER ENDMILL TOOL SENSOR [1]
d

CENTER DRILL BACKSPOT REAMER TAP BORING BACK CHIP >>>

DRILL FACER BAR BOR. BAR VACUUM [2]

GENERAL GROOVE THREAD SPECIAL >>>

[3]

 Tapping the [>>>] menu item will change the menu in the order of [1]  [2]  [3]  [1].
 The menu [3] is only displayed for machines with turning functions.
(2) From among the menus [1], [2] and [3] select the menu item that corresponds to the tool
name to be searched for.
 The selected menu function will be activated.
(3) Specify the nominal diameter of the tool to be searched for.
 If the tool to be searched for is already registered, the line of the tool concerned will be
displayed and highlighted.
Example : When checking the tool number under which a drill with a nominal diameter of
12 mm is registered:
After tapping the [DRILL] menu item, enter “12” and tap the key.

This shows that the tool to be searched for is registered under pocket number 4.

Remark 1: If the key is tapped following this, the NC unit will check whether another
corresponding tool exists in the subsequent area, and the line of the tool concerned will
be highlighted next. If no corresponding tools can be found any more, then the alarm
message 407 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND will be displayed.
Remark 2: It is also possible to search for the corresponding tool name just by specifying
TOOL item. In this case, tap only the key in procedural step (3) without specify-
ing the nominal diameter.

8-29
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

B. TOOL DATA ERASE

Use this menu function to erase tool data registered on the TOOL DATA display.
(1) Tap the line of the tool data to be erased.
Example : On the display shown below, if the END MILL data of tool number 4 is to be
erased:

(2) Tap the [EDIT] menu item.

(3) Tap the [TOOL DATA ERASE] menu item.
 A message box appears on the screen.
(4) Tap the [OK] button.
 The selected tool data will be erased.

C. LIFE TOL SEARCH

Use this menu function to search the area after the tool currently marked with the cursor for tools
the life of which is over.
(1) Tap the [LIFE TOL SEARCH] menu item.
 A message box appears with LIFE TOOL SEARCH <INPUT>? in it.
(2) Tap the [OK] button.
 The NC unit will verify in the above-mentioned area the existence of tools whose life is
over.
If such a tool is found, its data line is displayed in the selected state.
If no such tools are (more) found, an alarm (407 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND) is
displayed.

D. GROUP NO. SEARCH

Use this menu function to search the TOOL DATA display for tools with reference to their group
numbers. The [GROUP NO. SEARCH] menu item, however, is presented only when bit 0 of
parameter US3 is set to “1.”
(1) Tap the [GROUP NO. SEARCH] menu item.

(2) Enter the group number of the tool to be searched for, and tap the key.
 If the tool to be searched for is already registered, the line of the tool concerned will be
displayed and highlighted.

Remark : If the key is tapped following this, the NC unit will check whether another
corresponding tool exists in the subsequent area, and the line of the tool concerned will
be highlighted next. If no corresponding tools can be found any more, then the alarm
message 407 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND will be displayed.

8-30
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
E. INCH MODE and METRIC MODE menu functions (valid when the optional inch/metric
unit system change simplifying function is available)
These menu items are used to change the display mode and an input unit system (inch/metric)
on the TOOL DATA display.
[INCH MODE] is displayed in metric mode (F91 bit 4 = 0), and [METRIC MODE] is displayed in
inch mode (F91 bit 4 = 1).
 Selection of [INCH MODE] activates the menu function and the display mode as well as
the input unit system change from metric to inch.
 Selection of [METRIC MODE] activates the menu function and the display mode as well
as the input unit system change from inch to metric.

 See the Section 13-8 for further details.

Note : Basically, this function is valid when an inch/metric unit system change simplifying
option is provided. Even when the option is provided, the change function cannot be
used if bit 1 in parameter F82 is set to “0” (inch/metric display selection invalid).

F. Display Current Tool first

Select, or put a check mark to, the [Display Current Tool first] option, displayed by tapping
and [Setting TOOL DATA], and, from the next time on, the TOOL DATA display will
initially be called up with the data line of the current tool (mounted on the spindle) being selected
with the cursor, along with the detailed information displayed in the right-hand column.

Note : This function, however, is not effective (and the initial display always shows the first
line of tool data registered at the top) when no tool is currently selected (TNo. = 0), no
data registration has yet been done for the current tool, or when the LIST INPUT
display mode is selected last.

8-31
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

8-1-4 Setting tool data (for EIA/ISO programs)

Setting data in ACT- CO. or No. items and LENG CO. or No. items of this display allows tool
designation and tool life management using an EIA/ISO program.

1. Registering the tools to be used

(1) Select a tool from the list.
(2) Tap the GROUP No. data item.
(3) Specify a group number.
 Any group number from 0 to 99999999 can be set for the tool. Set one and the same
group number for multiple tools of the same type (in terms of both shape and dimen-
sions) in order that they shall be used as a spare tool for each other.

 See the description under 2 below for details of group number setting.

Note : Zero (0) is of no effect as a group number for automatic spare tool selection.
 When the group number is set, the tool ID number will also be displayed at the same
time. To check details of the tool ID number, see Note 3 that follows.
(4) Tap the ACT- CO. data item.
(5) Specify the amount of tool radius compensation.
 When the radius compensation amount is set, the No. item on the right will become
blank to indicate that the item has become invalid.
(6) Tap the LENG. CO. data item.
(7) Specify the amount of tool length compensation.
 When the length compensation amount is set, the No. item on the right will become
blank to indicate that the item has become invalid.
 For the current tool on the spindle only, tool length compensation amount can be set
using the [LENG-OFS TEACH] menu function.

 See Subsection 8-1-6 for further details.

(8) Tap the No. data item on the right of ACT- CO.
(9) Specify the offset number under which the radius compensation amount to be referred to
has been set on the TOOL OFFSET display.
 When the offset number for tool radius compensation is set, the ACT- CO. item will
become blank to indicate that the item has become invalid.
(10) Tap the No. data item on the right of LENG CO.
(11) Specify the offset number under which the length compensation amount to be referred to
has been set on the TOOL OFFSET display.
 When the offset number for tool length compensation is set, the LENG CO. item will
become blank to indicate that the item has become invalid.

 See Section 8-3 for further details of the TOOL OFFSET display.

8-32
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
Note 1: The amount of tool length or radius compensation is to be set by either setting the data
directly on this display or setting the offset numbers that correspond to the data items
prepared on the TOOL OFFSET display.
Note 2: When the tool for which the offset data has been set on this display is to be used during
execution of the program, the offset amount (or offset number) that has been set on
this display will govern even if another offset number is designated in the program.
Example :
Program

H1 Offset No. for length comp. The offset data enclosed in become valid
according to these blocks.
D2 Offset No. for radius comp.
T01T0M06 The offset data used for this block will be the data enclosed in
according to the settings as shown below on the TOOL DATA display.

TOOL OFFSET display TOOL DATA display

No. OFFSET
1 10.1
2 10.2
3 10.3
4 10.4
5 10.5

The program is executed according to the radius compensation amount (No. 4 = 10.4)
and length compensation amount (No. 5 = 10.5) that are set on the TOOL DATA
display, instead of the length compensation amount (H1 = 10.1) and the radius com-
pensation amount (D2 = 10.2) that are designated in the program.
Note 3: For a machine that has “visual tool ID/data management” functions, tools can be
managed using ID No. data. The data is to be set within the following range:
 Eight decimal digits (0 to 99999999)
For a machine that does not have “visual tool ID/data management” functions, ID No.
data does not have any meaning. The data can be freely used as tool identification
numbers or for any other purposes. In that case, the data can be set within the range of
eight decimal digits.
Note 4: The “visual tool ID/data management” functions do not allow ID number editing on the
TOOL DATA display. If data editing is attempted, alarm 406 MEMORY PROTECT will
occur.
Note 5: If data is not displayed under GROUP No. or TOOL then data can be set under
GROUP No., and when any data has been set under GROUP No. under that state,
then data can be further set under ID No., ACT- CO. (or No.), LENG CO. (or No.),
LIFE TIME, CUT TIME, ACT-, LENG COMP., THRUST F., HORSE PW and MAX.
ROT.
Note 6: The amount of tool radius or length compensation can be entered in inch or metric
units by selecting the [INCH MODE] or [METRIC MODE] menu item, respectively.
Basically, this function is valid when an inch/metric unit system change simplifying
option is provided. Even when the option is provided, the change function cannot be
used if bit 1 in parameter F82 is set to “0” (inch/metric display selection invalid).

 See the Section 13-8 for further details.

8-33
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

Note 7: Select (or put a check mark to) the [Dia. && Leng. Co. Incre. First] option displayed
by tapping and [Setup] to automatically make the incremental input method
selected (the [INCRMENT INPUT] menu function activated) when the cursor is
positioned on an item of geometric compensation data for tool radius or tool length.

2. Setting tool group numbers

If a group number is set for the tools that are to be used during execution of an EIA/ISO program,
the next spare tool to be used will be auto-selected from tools of the same group number.
Remark : As for MAZATROL programs, spare tool management is performed by the tool
name scheme.

A. Selection of spare tools

As listed below, two methods are available to select spare tools. Either is to be selected by
setting 0 or 1 in bit 2 of parameter F84.
 F84 bit 2 = 0: Group number scheme
 F84 bit 2 = 1: Tool name scheme
1. Group number scheme
Tools of the same group number are all regarded as spare ones, and tools that have neither
yet reached their lives nor become damaged are automatically selected in order with the
smallest tool number first. Note that zero (0) is of no effect as a group number for tool life
management and spare tool selection.
2. Tool name scheme
Tools of the same tool name, the same nominal diameter, and the same suffix are all
regarded as spare ones, and tools that have neither yet reached their lives nor become
damaged are automatically selected in order with the smallest tool number first.
Note : If all spare tools have reached their lives or become damaged, life-expired one having
the largest tool number will be selected first.

B. Designation of tool numbers in the EIA/ISO program

As listed below, two methods are available to designate tool numbers in the EIA/ISO program.
Either is to be selected by setting 0 or 1 in bit 4 of parameter F94.
 F94 bit 4 = 0: Group number designation scheme
 F94 bit 4 = 1: Tool number designation scheme
1. Group number designation scheme
The T-command in the program is taken as the command for group number (GROUP No.).
Tools with the same GROUP No. as that of the commanded GROUP No. are selected as
spare tools.
In this group number designation sheme, T01 in the program is taken as a command for
group No. 1. In case the group number “1” has been assigned for TNo. 2 and TNo. 3 on the
TOOL DATA display, the tool of TNo. 3 is selected if the life of the tool of TNo. 2 has
already expired.
2. Tool number designation scheme
The T-command in the program is taken as the command for tool number (TNo.). Tools with
the same GROUP No. as that of the commanded TNo. are selected as spare tools.
In this tool number designation sheme, T01 in the program is taken as a command for TNo.
1. In case the group number “2” has been assigned for TNo. 1 and TNo. 4 on the TOOL
DATA display, the tool of TNo. 4 is selected if the life of the tool of TNo. 1 has already
expired.

8-34
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
Note : For both schemes, if there are multiple tools of the same group number, the appro-
priate tool will be selected according to the particular method of selecting spare tools.

3. Other functions

A. ADD. DATA CANCEL menu function

Follow the procedure below to erase only ADD. DATA (additional data), that is GROUP No. and
ID No. items, of a particular tool.

(1) Select the desired tool from the list.

(2) Tap the [EDIT] menu item.
(3) Tap the [ADD. DATA CANCEL] menu item.
 A message box appears on the screen.
(4) Tap the [OK] button.
 The added data (GROUP/ID No.) of the tool selected in Step (1) will then be erased.
Note : For a machine having “visual tool ID/data management” functions, the [ADD. DATA
CANCEL] menu function has no effect on the ID number, and only clears the group
number to zero (0).

8-35
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

8-1-5 MAZATROL tool data INVALIDATION (Option)

1. Overview
“INVALIDATION” is an option that makes registered MAZATROL tool data on the TOOL DATA
display invalid during program execution. The invalidated tool data is indicated by INVA under
STAT. for distinction from valid tool data.
Using this option, you can select tools from all those of the same type or set the tools not to be
used without deleting the tool data before executing the program.

2. Making the tool data valid/invalid

(1) Select the desired tool from the list.
(2) Tap the [EDIT] menu item.
(3) To make the data selected in (1) valid/invalid, tap the menu item [TOOLDATA VALID] or
[TOOL DATA INVALID] respectively.
 A message box appears on the screen.
(4) Tap the [OK] button.

INVA for indication of an

invalid tool.

3. Machine action
Only in the following cases, tools designated as invalid (INVA) on the TOOL DATA display are
regarded as invalid tools.

A. Automatic operation
The machine action differs as follows between MAZATROL program automatic operation and
EIA/ISO program automatic operation:
1. MAZATROL program operation
Invalid tools are excluded from a list of usable tools. The alarm 626 DESIGNATED TOOL
NOT FOUND will be displayed if an alternative, usable tool of the same type is not present.
2. EIA/ISO program operation
The tool change command (T-code) for an invalid tool will cause the axis movement to be
disabled, with an alarm displayed, after the corresponding tool change operation.

B. Tool path check

The machine action differs as follows between tool path check using a MAZATROL program and
tool path check using an EIA/ISO program:
1. During tool path check using a MAZATROL program
Invalid tools are not selected. If an alternative, usable tool of the same type is not present, a
tool path will be drawn in the absence of a tool (diameter offsetting will use the tool nominal
diameter data existing in the program).
2. During tool path check using an EIA/ISO program
The tool change command (T-code) for an invalid tool will cause an alarm (937 ILLEGAL
TOOL DESIGNATED).

8-36
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
C. Tool layout
All invalid tools will be indicated as INVA in the tool layout mode.
Note : The pocket numbers of invalid tools are not used for the assignment by the [PKNo.
SHIFT] menu function.

4. In combination with the optional “GROUP No. assignment”

When the MAZATROL tool data option “GROUP No. assignment” is used, tool commands in an
EIA/ISO program are executed according to the group number data of the MAZATROL tool data
display.
The machine action during automatic operation (or tool path check) based on an EIA/ISO
program, therefore, differs from that occurring with the tool data option “GROUP No. assignment”
not being used.
The machine acts as follows according to the particular method of selecting tools:
1. Group number scheme (User parameter F94, bit 4 = 0)
 The machine will stop with the display of an alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED if
the tools of the selected group number are all invalid ones.
 If the tools of the selected group number include valid ones (life-expired or broken tools
included), then these valid tools will be searched for.
2. Tool number scheme (User parameter F94, bit 4 = 1)
When the tool of the selected tool number is invalid:
[1] If a group number has been set, a spare tool search will be made using that group
number. The machine action after the search is the same as that described for the
group number scheme above.
[2] If a group number has not been set, an alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED will
result.
Example : Differences in machine action between the two tool selection schemes:
TNo. GROUP No. Valid/Invalid
1 12345678 Invalid
2 Valid
3 87654321 Invalid
4 87654321 Valid

For the settings on the TOOL DATA display as shown above:

Group number scheme
Example 1: If T12345678T0M06 is set,
the alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED results.
Example 2: If T87654321T0M06 is set,
the tool of TNo. 4 is selected.
Tool number scheme
Example 1: If T01T0M06 is set,
the alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED results.
Example 2: If T03T0M06 is set:
the tool of TNo. 4 is selected.

Note : The machine action during automatic operation and that of tool path check are the
same.

8-37
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

8-1-6 Manual tool length measurement (using the LENG-OFS TEACH menu function)
The [LENG-OFS TEACH] menu function can be used to set tool length data in the LENG CO.
item.
(1) Perform manual axis movements to bring the nose of the tool into contact with the top of
either a reference block or a workpiece whose height is predetermined.

 Refer to the Operating Manual of the machine for further details of manual
operations.

(2) Tap the [LENG-OFS TEACH] menu item.

 The menu function will then be activated, and the LENG CO. item of the tool currently
mounted on the spindle will be selected.
(3) Specify the height of either the reference block or the workpiece.
 The NC unit will then calculate the tool length (see the explanatory figure under 2 in
Subsection 8-1-3) and set the calculated data under the LENG CO. item.
 The [LENG-OFS TEACH] menu item will return to its normal display state.

8-38
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
8-1-7 Tool layout mode
Use the tool layout mode to assign pocket numbers to the tools to be used for machining.
The display in this mode indicates the tools to be provided (as an additional or a spare tool) for
the particular machining program and number of workpieces to be machined.
Note : The function of this display mode (indexing the necessary tools, among others) cannot
be utilized effectively until the machining program has undergone the tool path check
for the estimation of each tool’s application time.

1. Displayed data

In tool-name display mode In group-number display mode

[1] [2] [3] [1] [2] [3]

[4] [5] [4] [5]

[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]

[12] [12] [13]

D747S30241E

The display on the TOOL LAYOUT tab occurs in the tool-name or group-number display mode in
accordance with the corresponding selection for the TOOL LIST area on the left side.

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] WNo. — Work number of the specified program
[2] NUM. pcs. Number of workpieces to be machined
The machining time required for the execution of the particular program
[3] TIME H:M’S”
[1] in order to machine the particular number of workpieces [2].
[4] Total number pcs. Total number of workpieces to be machined
[5] Total time H:M’S” Total machining time
[6] TNo. — Number of the tool pocket on the magazine
[7] TOOL — Tool name
NOM- mm (in) Nominal diameter or size of the tool
[8]
Suffix — Suffix (Code for identifying tools of the same size).
[9] NECESSARY min Time for which the tool is to be used for machining
[10] REMAIN min Remaining serviceable time of the tool
[11] LIFE TIME min Life time of the tool
[12] ID No. — Identification number of the stocked tool
[13] GROUP No. — Group number of the tool, as set on the TOOL DATA tab.

8-39
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

3. Display modes
Alternation of the NECESSARY TOOL and ARRANGED TOOL sections
The middle section on the right side alternatively displays the NECESSARY TOOL and
ARRANGED TOOL sections.
Use the respective menu functions to alternate the two display sections.
(1) Tap the [NECES. TOOL] menu item.
 The NECESSARY TOOL section will appear.
 The [ARRANGED TOOL] menu function will be deactivated.
(2) Tap the [ARRANGED TOOL] menu item.
 The ARRANGED TOOL section will appear.
 The [NECES. TOOL] menu function will be deactivated.

4. ARRANGED TOOL display section

“Arranged tools” here denote tools that are to be provided for the particular machining program.
Indexing the arranged tools
The “arranged” tools for the particular machining program can be indexed by the following
procedure:
(1) Specify the desired work number in the PROGRAM LIST display section.
 The ‘arranged tools’ will be indicated in the ARRANGED TOOL display section.
 A highlighted display of TNo. in magenta in the MAGAZINE section refers to the present
tools to be used in the particular machining. Their TNos. (pocket numbers) will be
automatically assigned to the corresponding tools in the ARRANGED TOOL display
section.
 Tapping the [WORK No.] menu item will display the work number listing window (named
WORK No. SELECT) for selecting the work number.
(2) Set the number of workpieces as required for multi-piece machining by repeatedly running
the program.
 The display contents will be renovated for the multiple-piece machining.
Repeat steps (1) and (2) to index the arranged tools simultaneously for multiple programs.
Tap the [ALL ERASE] menu item and enter “–9999” to erase all the data in the PROGRAM LIST
display section.
Note : The indication of arranged tools is based upon the results of a continuous tool path
check conducted on the program (specified tools and their estimated application times).
Before utilizing the function of this display, therefore, a newly created program or a
modified one must be checked beforehand by the [PATH CONTINUE] menu function
on the TOOL PATH CHECK display. Otherwise, no information items on machining
time will be displayed.

8-40
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
5. NECESSARY TOOL display section
Among the tools to be provided for the particular machining program, “necessary tools” here
denote those which are currently lacking on the magazine, and those which should serve as a
spare for the present tool which is predicted to reach its serviceable life during operation.
Indexing the necessary tools
The tools “necessary” for the particular machining program can be indexed by the following
procedure:
(1) Specify the desired work number in the PROGRAM LIST display section.
 The necessary tools will be indicated in the NECESSARY TOOL display section.
 Tools necessary as a spare are indicated by a highlighted display in yellow.
 A highlighted display of TNo. in magenta in the MAGAZINE section refers to the present
tools to be used in the particular machining.
 A highlighted display in yellow in the MAGAZINE section refers to the present tools
whose serviceable life is predicted not to be long enough.
 Tapping the [WORK No.] menu item will display the work number listing window (named
WORK No. SELECT) for selecting the work number.
(2) Set the number of workpieces as required for multi-piece machining by repeatedly running
the program.
 The display contents will be renovated for the multiple-piece machining.
Repeat steps (1) and (2) to index the necessary additional tools simultaneously for multiple
programs.
Tap the [ALL ERASE] menu item and enter “–9999” to erase all the data in the PROGRAM LIST
display section.
Note : The indication of necessary tools is based upon the results of a continuous tool path
check conducted on the program (specified tools and their estimated application times).
Before utilizing the function of this display, therefore, a newly created program or a
modified one must be checked beforehand by the [PATH CONTINUE] menu function
on the TOOL PATH CHECK display. Otherwise, no information items on machining
time will be displayed.

6. STOCK TOOL display section

The TOOL DATA display can also be used for saving the data of the tools removed from the
magazine onto the local disk.

A. Registering the stocked tools

(1) Select the desired tool from the list.
(2) Tap the [MOVE] menu item.
 A screen keyboard appears on the screen.
Note : When the tool in question has an ID number already registered, that number will
be present in the data entry field of the screen keyboard.
(3) Enter the identification number of the stocked tool.
 The specified tool data will be removed from the MAGAZINE section and registered
under the designated ID No. in the STOCK TOOL display section.
 The [MOVE] menu item will return to its normal display state.

8-41
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

Example : When the data of the drill with a nominal dia. of 6 mm under PKNo. 3 in the
MAGAZINE section is to be registered under ID No. 10380:
(a) Move the cursor onto the line of PKNo. 3 in the MAGAZINE section.
MAGAZINE TOOL STOCK TOOL

PKNo. TOOL NOM- ID No. TOOL NOM-

1 END MILL 10. C 10521 END MILL 8. B
2 10525 END MILL 20. B
3 DRILL 6. B 10382 DRILL 12. B
4 10386 DRILL 20. A
5 FCE MILL 200. BL
6
7 DRILL 10. N
8
9 CTR-DR 20. A
10
Tap this line.

(b) Tap the [MOVE] menu item.

(c) Enter “10380”.
 The required registration will be performed and the display changed as follows:
MAGAZINE TOOL STOCK TOOL

PKNo. TOOL NOM- ID No. TOOL NOM-

1 END MILL 10. C 10521 END MILL 8. B
2 10525 END MILL 20. B
3 10382 DRILL 12. B
4 10386 DRILL 20. A
5 FCE MILL 200. BL 10380 DRILL 6. B
6
7 DRILL 10. N
8
9 CTR-DR 20. A
10

B. Setting the folder for data storage

The data of the stocked tools are saved in the folder named “C:\ymw\M8Y\data\MC_ToolList”
(the default folder) on the hard disk. Change the folder as required for sharing the stocked tools’
data with other machine tools equipped with the SmoothX and linked on a network.
Note : For a machine having “visual tool ID/data management” functions, the name of the
destination folder “C:\ymw\M8Y\data\MC_ToolList” cannot be changed.
(1) Tap , [Setting TOOL LAYOUT] and the [Folder Setting] option in that order.

8-42
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
 The following dialogue box will appear:

(2) Type the folder name as required and tap the [OK] button.
 For sharing the data with other computers, set the properties of the storage folder as
“Shared As” and “Full” access type. Use the Explorer for setting the folder.
 Format for designating the folder
 For setting the folder of My Computer
Drive name:\Root folder name\Lower folder name\ . . .
 For setting the folder of another computer on the LAN
\\Computer name\Sharing folder name\Lower folder name\Lower folder name\ . . .
Example : When there are two machine tools equipped with the MAZATROL SmoothX in the
plant and they are linked on a network to the office computer:

Office

Hub
Plant

Server
Computer name: MAZAK
MAZATROL MAZATROL
SmoothX SmoothX
Machine 1 Machine 2

D747S30068

Proceed as follows to designate the storage folder for the stocked tools of Machines 1 and 2
as “STOCK” under the C drive of the office computer named “MAZAK”:
(a) Create a folder named STOCK under the C drive of the office computer.
(Set the properties of the folder as “Shared As” and “Full” access type.)
(b) Designate the storage folder for the stocked tools as follows on Machines 1 and 2:
\\MAZAK\STOCK

8-43
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

8-1-8 Tool layout for the necessary tools

After indexing (or drawing the information on) the necessary tools as described above, proceed
as follows for assigning pocket numbers to, and performing other management operations on,
the required tools:

1. Automatic assignment of pocket numbers

(1) Tap the NECESSARY TOOL display section.
(2) Tap the [PKNo. ASSIGN] menu item.
 A message box appears on the screen.
(3) Tap the [OK] button.
 The numbers of currently empty pockets will be assigned to the necessary tools.
Example : When the following data are displayed in the MAGAZINE and NECESSARY
TOOL display sections:
MAGAZINE TOOL NECESSARY TOOL

PKNo. TOOL NOM- PKNo. TOOL NOM-

1 END MILL 10. C 0 END MILL 8. B
2 0 END MILL 20. B
3 DRILL 6. B 0 DRILL 12. B
4 0 DRILL 20. A
5 FCE MILL 200. B L
6
7 DRILL 10. N
8
9
10

The display in the NECESSARY TOOL section will change as follows upon step (3):
 Pocket numbers 4 and 6 are skipped since the pocket No. 5 is occupied by a large-sized
tool.
NECESSARY TOOL
PKNo. TOOL NOM-
2 END MILL 8. B
8 END MILL 20. B
9 DRILL 12. B
10 DRILL 20. A

Note : No assignment will occur if there are no more empty pockets available on the
magazine.

2. Editing the necessary tools’ data

Proceed as follows for manually performing management operations on the “necessary” tools
such as setting of pocket number, interference code and life time:
(1) Tap the NECESSARY TOOL display section.
(2) Tap the line of the desired tool.
(3) Tap the [EDIT] menu item.
 The NECESSARY TOOL display section will enter the edit mode.
(4) Tap the desired item and enter the data.

8-44
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
(5) Tap the [EDIT] menu item once again to deactivate the menu function.
 The NECESSARY TOOL display section will return to the list mode.
Example : When pocket number “6”, interference code for “Large tool” and life time “100 min”
are to be set for the face mill with a nominal diameter of 200 mm in the NECESSARY
TOOL section:
(a) Tap the line of “FCE MILL” with “200” under NOM-.
NECESSARY TOOL

PKNo. TOOL NOM- NECESSARY REMAIN LIFE TIME

3 END MILL 30. A 10 0
5 DRILL 20. B 13 0
0 FCE MILL 200. B 20 0
0 DRILL 10. 8 0
0 DRILL 15. 5 0
0 TAP M8. 12 0

Tap this line.

(b) Tap the [EDIT] menu item.

 The cursor will be placed in the column of PKNo. on the currently selected line.
NECESSARY TOOL

PKNo. TOOL NOM- NECESSARY REMAIN LIFE TIME

3 END MILL 30. A 10 0
5 DRILL 20. B 13 0
0 FCE MILL 200. B 20 0
0 DRILL 10. 8 0
0 DRILL 15. 5 0
0 TAP M8. 12 0

(c) Enter “6”.

 The pocket No. 6 will be assigned to the FCE MILL.
(d) Tap the desired menu item for the intra-magazine interference code.
 The display will change as follows:
NECESSARY TOOL
PKNo. TOOL NOM- NECESSARY REMAIN LIFE TIME
3 END MILL 30. A 10 0
5 DRILL 20. B 13 0
6 FCE MILL 200. BL 20 0
0 DRILL 10. 8 0
0 DRILL 15. 5 0
0 TAP M8. 12 0

 The cursor will be shifted to the LIFE TIME item.

(e) Enter “100”.
 The life of the FCE MILL will be set to 100 min.
(f) Tap the [EDIT] menu item once again to deactivate the menu function.
 The NECESSARY TOOL display section will return to the list mode.

8-45
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

3. Registering the necessary tool’s data into the MAGAZINE display section
The following two methods are available to register the data of the necessary tools (with a
significant pocket number assigned) into the MAGAZINE display section:

A. Registering the necessary tool’s data using “visual tool ID/data management” functions
(1) Tap the NECESSARY TOOL display section.
(2) Assign the magazine pocket numbers to the necessary tools.
(3) Tap the [MAGAZINE SETUP] menu item.
 This will allow the operation to be continued using the tool specification display on the
display unit of the magazine.
(4) Perform tool mounting/dismounting setup operations while referring to the tool specification
display.
 The necessary tools’ data will be registered into the MAGAZINE display section under
the corresponding pocket numbers.

 Refer to the Operating Manual for the visual tool ID/data management
functions for further details.

Note : Alarm 488 MEMORY PROTECT (MAGAZINE SETUP) will occur, if editing tool data on
the TOOL DATA display, completing the layout of tools on the TOOL LAYOUT display,
or loading data on the DATA I/O display is attempted with the [MAGAZINE SETUP]
menu function being activated.

B. Registering the necessary tool’s data not using “visual tool ID/data management”
functions
(1) Tap the NECESSARY TOOL display section.
(2) Assign the magazine pocket numbers to the necessary tools.
(3) Tap the [LAYOUT FINISH] menu item.
 The menu function will be activated and a message box displayed.
(4) Tap the [OK] button.
 The necessary tools’ data will be registered under the corresponding pocket numbers in
the MAGAZINE display section, and the [LAYOUT FINISH] menu function will be de-
activated.
 The “registered” data will be cleared from the NECESSARY TOOL display section.
Note : The above-mentioned registration is performed in a rewriting manner. That is, the data
displayed under a pocket number in the MAGAZINE display section will immediately
be replaced by the data of the necessary tool with the same pocket number assigned.

8-46
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
Example : When the following data are displayed in the MAGAZINE and NECESSARY TOOL
display sections:
MAGAZINE TOOL NECESSARY TOOL
PKNo. TOOL NOM- PKNo. TOOL NOM-
1 END MILL 10. C 3 END MILL 8. B
2 8 END MILL 20. B
3 DRILL 6. B 10 DRILL 12. B
4 0 DRILL 20. A
5 FCE MILL 200. BL
6
7 DRILL 10. N
8
9 CTR-DR 20. A
10

The display in both sections will change as follows upon step (3):
 The data of DRILL with NOM- “6” under PKNo. 3 has been replaced by the data of END
MILL with NOM- “8”.
MAGAZINE TOOL NECESSARY TOOL

PKNo. TOOL NOM- PKNo. TOOL NOM-

1 END MILL 10. C 0 DRILL 20. A
2
3 END MILL 8. B
4
5 FCE MILL 200. BL
6
7 DRILL 10. N
8 END MILL 20. B
9 CTR-DR 20. A
10 DRILL 12. B

4. Registering the stocked tools’ data into the MAGAZINE display section
Proceed as follows for searching the STOCK TOOL display section for the necessary tools’ data
to be registered into the MAGAZINE display section:
(1) Tap the STOCK TOOL display section.
(2) Tap the [NECES. SELECT] menu item.
 The data of those stocked tools which are the same in type as the necessary tools will
selectively be displayed.
(3) Tap the line of the desired tool.
(4) Tap the [MOVE] menu item.
 The menu function will be activated.
(5) Specify the pocket number for the tool.
 The stocked tool’s data will be registered under the specified pocket number in the
MAGAZINE display section, and the [MOVE] menu function will be deactivated.
Note 1: The “moved” data here will always replace the MAGAZINE data on the line of the
pocket number specified in (5).

8-47
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

Note 2: If there are multiple data entries (with variety of tool application) under the same ID
number as that of the selected tool, all the entries will be moved at once into the
MAGAZINE display section under one and the same pocket No.
For the specified tool, moreover, if F166 bit 2 = 1 (for the use of ID Nos. on the TOOL
DATA display), the ID number used for the registration in the STOCK TOOL display
section will be automatically set on the TOOL DATA display.
Example : When the NECESSARY TOOL and STOCK TOOL display sections have the
following data provided:
NECESSARY TOOL STOCK TOOL

PKNo. TOOL NOM- ID No. TOOL NOM-

0 END MILL 8. B 10850 END MILL 8. B
0 END MILL 20. B 10859 END MILL 10. B
0 DRILL 12. B 10552 FCE MILL 200. A
10442 DRILL 12. B
10445 DRILL 30. B

(a) Select the STOCK TOOL section for the display operation and press the [NECES.
SELECT] menu item.
 The data of the END MILL with NOM- “8”, suffix B and the DRILL with NOM- “12”,
suffix B will selectively be displayed in the STOCK TOOL section.
The necessary tool END MILL with NOM- “20”, suffix B will have no corresponding
data searched for and displayed there.
STOCK TOOL

ID No. TOOL NOM-

10850 END MILL 8. B
10442 DRILL 12. B

Proceed further as follows to register the data of the stocked tool END MILL with ID No.
10850 under pocket number 3 in the MAGAZINE display section:
(b) Tap the line of ID No. 10850 and tap the [MOVE] menu item.
 The menu function will be activated.
(c) Key in “3”.
 The [NECES. SELECT] menu function will be deactivated and the data of the
selected tool (END MILL with NOM- “8”, suffix B) will be registered under pocket
number 3 in the MAGAZINE display section.
 The moved data will be cleared from the STOCK TOOL and NECESSARY TOOL
display sections.

5. Clearing the pocket numbers

The assignment of pocket numbers to the necessary tools can be totally cleared (reset to “0”) as
follows in case of an erroneous assignment:
(1) Tap the NECESSARY TOOL display section.
(2) Tap the [PKNo. CLEAR] menu item.
 The menu function will be activated and a message box displayed.
(3) Tap the [OK] button.
 The pocket numbers currently assigned to the necessary tools will all be reset to “0”, and
the [PKNo. CLEAR] menu function will be deactivated.

8-48
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
8-1-9 Other functions for display operation

1. Erasing the STOCK TOOL data

(1) Tap the STOCK TOOL display section.
(2) Tap the line of the tool to be erased.
(3) Tap the [TOOLDATA ERASE] menu item.
 The menu function will be activated and a message box displayed.
(4) Tap the [OK] button.
 The data of the selected tool will be cleared from the STOCK TOOL display section.

2. Searching for the STOCK TOOL data

A. For tool-name display mode

(1) Tap the STOCK TOOL display section.
(2) Tap the [SEARCH] menu item.
 The menu function will be activated and a screen keyboard displayed.
(3) Key in the ID No. of the tool to be searched for.

(4) Tap the key.

 The data of the searched tool will be displayed in the STOCK TOOL display section, and
the [SEARCH] menu function will be deactivated.
Note : The alarm 407 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND will be displayed on the screen if no
data corresponding to the specified ID No. are registered in the STOCK TOOL display
section.

B. For group-number display mode

(1) Tap the STOCK TOOL display section.
(2) Tap the [SEARCH] menu item.
 The following menu will be displayed.
ID No. GROUP >>>
No.
d
(3) Tap the desired menu item, [ID No.] or [GROUP No.].
 The menu function will be activated and a screen keyboard displayed.
(4) Key in the ID No. or GROUP No. of the tool to be searched for.

(5) Tap the key.

 In the case of searching for the ID No.: the data of the searched tool will be displayed in
the STOCK TOOL display section, and the [ID No.] menu function will be deactivated.
 In the case of searching for the group No.: the data of the searched tool will be displayed
in the STOCK TOOL display section. If the key is tapped again, the NC unit will
check whether another corresponding tool exists in the subsequent area, and the line of
the tool concerned will be highlighted next.
Note : The alarm 407 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND will be displayed on the screen if no
data corresponding to the specified ID No. or group No. are registered in the STOCK
TOOL display section.

8-49
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

3. Displaying tool layout without referring to (estimated) tool application time

Assign a check mark to the [No Refer Time] option (displayed by tapping and [Setting
TOOL LAYOUT]) to have the tool layout data displayed independently of whether or not the
program has undergone a tool path check.

8-50
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
8-2 TOOL FILE Display

This display is used when registering the data of the milling tools to be used, such as end-mills, face-mills,
Function
chamfering cutters, ball end-mills, etc.

 The TOOL FILE display is divided into the following four displays according to the type of milling tool to
be used:
1. TOOL FILE (END MILL) display
2. TOOL FILE (FACE MILL) display
3. TOOL FILE (CHAMFER) display
4. TOOL FILE (BALL E-MILL) display
 Up to a maximum of 1024 milling tools can be registered on the TOOL FILE display.
 If the TOOL FILE display has been changed over from another display, the TOOL FILE (END MILL)
display will be selected automatically.
Remarks
If another TOOL FILE display should be called up:
1. Tapping the [FACEMILL] menu item changes the current display over to the TOOL FILE (FACE
MILL) display.
2. Tapping the [CHAMFER CUTTER] menu item changes the current display over to the TOOL FILE
(CHAMFER) display.
3. Tapping the [BALL ENDMILL] menu item changes the current display over to the TOOL FILE
(BALL E-MILL) display.
4. Tapping the [ENDMILL] menu item changes the current display back to the TOOL FILE (END MILL)
display.

Note : Milling tools that are not registered on this display cannot be used when creating a
program or when executing a program in the automatic operation mode. Milling tools
on hand, therefore, should be registered on this display.

8-2-1 Data display

1. Displayed data of the displays for end-mills and ball end-mills

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

[8]

D747S30069E

8-51
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

2. Displayed data of the displays for face-mills

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

[8]

D747S30070E

3. Display data of the display for chamfering cutters

[1] [2] [7] [4] [5] [6] [1] [2] [7] [4] [5] [6]

[8]

D747S30071E

8-52
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
4. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] No. — Register number of the milling tool on each display
mm (in) Nominal diameter of the milling tool
[2] NOM- Suffix (code that identifies the milling tools having the same nominal
—
diamater)
[3] TOOL MAT. — Material of the milling tool
[4] DEPTH mm (in) Maximum depth of cut
[5] TEETH — Number of teeth of the milling tool
[6] ANG. degrees Nose angle of the face-mill or chamfering cutter
[7] MIN- mm (in) Minimal diameter of the chamfering cutter
Number of the page currently displayed and the total number of pages
a/b
[8] Page —
a: Number of the page currently displayed
b: Total number of pages

8-2-2 Registering milling tool data

When registering milling tools on the TOOL FILE display, the types of data to be set differ
according to the types of tools to be used.

1. Registering an end-mill or ball end-mill

Example : We will register the end-mill shown below as an example.

Tool mateiral: High speed steel

Number of teeth: 2

30

10

End-mill M3S018

(1) Call up the TOOL FILE (END MILL) display.

 The following display will then be presented:
No. NOM- TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH

 In this example, assume that no end-mills have yet been registered.

(2) Move the cursor to the position of the No. item to be registered.
 The cursor can be moved only to the lines of numbers which have been registered and
the next line.

No. NOM- TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH

 Move the cursor to this position.

8-53
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

(3) Tap the key on the screen keyboard.

 The corresponding number will then be displayed under No., and the cursor will move to
the NOM- item.

No. NOM- TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH

1

(4) Specify the nominal diameter of the tool to be registered.

 In the example, specify “10”.
 The input value will then be displayed under NOM-, and the cursor will move to the right
side of that value.

No. NOM- TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH

1 10. 

 The following menu for assigning tool ID codes will be presented in the main menu
display area:
A B C D E F G H HEAVY >>>
TOOL [1]
d

J K L M N P Q R HEAVY >>>
TOOL [2]
d

S T U V W X Y Z HEAVY >>>
TOOL [3]
d

Tapping the [>>>] menu item will change the menu in order of [1]  [2]  [3]  [1].
With the [HEAVY TOOL] menu function being activated or deactivated (changed by
tapping the corresponding menu item), a suffix for heavy or normal tools can be
respectively selected from among A to Z.
The tool ID code refers to the suffix, appended to the nominal diameter value, to identify
tools of the same nominal diameter.
Note : If a suffix for heavy tools is assigned, the ATC speed will automatically decrease
and then tool change will be safely made.
(5) Tap the menu item that is appropriate to the suffix to be registered.
 In the example, we will assign the suffix A since the tool is the first one with nominal
diameter of 10 mm. Tap the [ A ] menu item (in the menu [1]).
 If it is not necessary to assign a suffix, tap the TOOL MAT. item.
(6) Move the cursor to the TOOL MAT. item.
 The list of the materials set on the CUTTING CONDITION - W.-MAT/T.-MAT. display is
displayed in the main menu display area.

No. NOM- TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH

1 10.A

8-54
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
 Refer to Section 9-1 for further details.

(7) Tap the menu item that is appropriate to the tool material to be registered.
 In the example, tap the [HSS] menu item
 The selected material will be displayed under TOOL MAT.
(8) Move the cursor to the DEPTH item.

No. NOM- TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH

1 10.A HSS

(9) Specify the maximum depth of cut that can be machined during one cutting operation (i.e.,
the length of the cutting edge of the end-mill).
 In the example given, specify “30”.
(10) Move the cursor to the TEETH item.

No. NOM- TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH

1 10.A HSS 30.

(11) Specify the number of teeth of the tool to be registered.

 In the example given, specify “2”.

No. NOM- TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH

1 10.A HSS 30. 2

Note : Use the same registration procedure for ball end-mills after calling up the TOOL FILE
(BALL E-MILL) display.

8-55
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

2. Registering a face-mill
Example : We will register the face-mill shown below as an example.

Tool mateiral:
Cemented carbide
Number of teeth: 12

45°

80

Face-mill

(1) Call up the TOOL FILE (FACE MILL) display.

 The following display will then be presented:

No. NOM- TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH ANG.

 In this example, assume that no face-mills have yet been registered.

(2) Move the cursor to the position of the No. item to be registered.
 The cursor can be moved only to the lines of numbers which have been registered and
the next line.

No. NOM- TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH ANG.

 Move the cursor to this position.

(3) Tap the key on the screen keyboard.

 The corresponding number will then be displayed under No., and the cursor will move to
the NOM- item.

No. NOM- TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH ANG.

1

(4) Set nominal diameter and suffix data in the same manner as that which is described at
steps (4) and (5) of “1. Registering an end-mill or ball end-mill”.
 In the example shown above, if the nominal diameter and the suffix are set as “80” and
“A”, respectively, the display will change as follows:

No. NOM- TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH ANG.

1 80.A

8-56
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
(5) Set the type of material of the tool in the same manner as that which is described at steps
(6) and (7) of “1. Registering an end-mill or ball end-mill”.
 In the example given, tap the [CBD] menu item.

No. NOM- TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH ANG.

1 80.A CBD

(6) Specify the maximum depth of cut that can be machined during one cutting operation (i.e.,
the length of the cutting edge of the face-mill).
 In the example given, specify “5”.

No. NOM- TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH ANG.

1 80.A CBD 5.

(7) Set the number of teeth of the tool in the same manner as that which is described at steps
(10) and (11) of “1. Registering an end-mill or ball end-mill”.
 In the example given, set “12.”

No. NOM- TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH ANG.

1 80.A CBD 5. 12

(8) Move the cursor to the ANG. item.

(9) Specify the nose angle of the tool to be registered.
 In the example shown above, specify “45”.

No. NOM- TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH ANG.

1 80.A CBD 5. 12 45.

8-57
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

3. Registering a chamfering cutter

Example : We will register the chamfering cutter shown below as an example.

Tool mateiral: Cemented carbide

Number of teeth: 2

45°

10

20
Chamfering cutter

(1) Call up the TOOL FILE (CHAMFER) display.

 The following display will then be presented.

No. NOM- MIN- TOOL MAT. TEETH ANG.

 In this example, assume that no chamfering cutters have yet been registered.
(2) Move the cursor to the position of the No. item to be registered.
 The cursor can be moved only to the lines of numbers which have been registered and
the next line.

No. NOM- MIN- TOOL MAT. TEETH ANG.

 Move the cursor to this position

(3) Tap the key on the screen keyboard.

 The corresponding number will then be displayed under No. item, and the cursor will
move to the NOM- item.

No. NOM- MIN- TOOL MAT. TEETH ANG.

1

(4) Set nominal diameter and suffix data in the same manner as that which is described at
steps (4) and (5) of “1. Registering an end-mill or ball end-mill”.
 In the example shown above, if the nominal diameter and the suffix are set as “20” and
“A”, respectively, the display will change as follows:

No. NOM- MIN- TOOL MAT. TEETH ANG.

1 20.A

(5) Move the cursor to the MIN- item.

(6) Specify the minimum diameter of the chamfering cutter.
 In the example shown above, specify “10”.

8-58
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
(7) Set the type of material of the tool in the same manner as that which is described at steps
(6) and (7) of “1. Registering an end-mill or ball end-mill”.
 In the example shown above, tap the [CBD] menu item.

No. NOM- MIN- TOOL MAT. TEETH ANG.

1 20.A 10. CBD

(8) Set the number of teeth of the tool in the same manner as that which is described at steps
(10) and (11) of “1. Registering an end-mill or ball end-mill”.
 In the example shown above, set “2.”

No. NOM- MIN- TOOL MAT. TEETH ANG.

1 20.A 10. CBD 2

(9) Move the cursor to the ANG. item.

(10) Specify the nose angle of the tool to be registered.
 In the example shown above, specify “45.”

No. NOM- MIN- TOOL MAT. TEETH ANG.

1 20.A 10. CBD 2 45.

Remark : To register a round-chamfering tool, tap the [ROUND CHAMFER] menu item in
Step (10). The angle value with a preceding symbol R will then be set under ANG.

8-59
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

8-2-3 Erasing a part of the registered data

A part of data registered on the TOOL FILE display can be erased.
(1) Call up the TOOL FILE display on which the data to be partly erased is registered.
Example : Erasing the end-mill data that is registered under No. 3 on the TOOL FILE
(END MILL) display:

No. NOM- TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH

1 10.A CBD 30. 2
2 10.B HSS 10. 2
3 20.A CBD 20. 4
4 30.A HSS 15. 3
5 40.A CBD 20. 4

 In this example, assume that the end-mill data shown above is registered on the display.
(2) Move the cursor to the No. item of the tool data to be erased.

No. NOM- TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH

1 10.A CBD 30. 2
2 10.B HSS 10. 2
3 20.A CBD 20. 4
4 30.A HSS 15. 3
5 40.A CBD 20. 4

(3) Tap the [ERASE] menu item.

 The menu function will be activated and a message box displayed.
(4) Tap the [OK] button.
 The data in the line where the cursor is placed will then be erased, and the data on the
next line and following lines will then be shifted upwards.

No. NOM- TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH

1 10.A CBD 30. 2
2 10.B HSS 10. 2
3 30.A HSS 15. 3
4 40.A CBD 20. 4

 After that, the [ERASE] menu function will be deactivated.

8-60
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
8-3 TOOL OFFSET Display

This display is used when setting the amount of tool-radius or tool-position compensation of each tool to
Function
be used for an EIA/ISO program.

Remarks Current position on each axis can be set.

8-3-1 Data display

Type of tool offset differs according to the particular machine model (there are three types of tool
offset: type A, B and C), and data that will be displayed also differs according to the selected
type.

1. Displayed data of type A

[1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2]

[16]

D747S30072E

8-61
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

2. Displayed data of type B

[1] [3] [4] [5] [6] [1] [3] [4] [5] [6]

[16]

D747S30073E

3. Displayed data of type C

[1] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]

[16]

D747S30074E

8-62
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
4. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] No. — Tool offset number
[2] OFFSET mm (in) Tool offset amount
TOOL LENGTH
[3] mm (in) Amount of geometric compensation for tool length
GEOMETRY
[4] TOOL LENGTH WEAR mm (in) Amount of wear compensation for tool length
TOOL RADIUS
[5] mm (in) Amount of geometric compensation for tool radius
GEOMETRY
[6] TOOL RADIUS WEAR mm (in) Amount of wear compensation for tool radius
[7] GEOMETRIC OFFSET X mm (in) Amount of tool offsetting in the X-axis direction
[8] GEOMETRIC OFFSET Y mm (in) Amount of tool offsetting in the Y-axis direction
Amount of tool offsetting in the Z-axis direction or geometric
[9] GEOMETRIC OFFSET Z mm (in)
compensation for milling tool length
GEOMETRIC OFFSET Radius of the tool nose or amount of geometric compensation for
[10] mm (in)
NOSE-R milling tool radius
[11] WEAR COMP.X mm (in) Amount of tool wear compensation in the X-axis direction
[12] WEAR COMP.Y mm (in) Amount of tool wear compensation in the Y-axis direction
Amount of tool wear compensation in the Z-axis direction or wear
[13] WEAR COMP.Z mm (in)
compensation for milling tool length
Amount of wear compensation for the tool nose radius or amount of
[14] WEAR COMP. NOSE-R mm (in)
wear compensation for milling tool radius
Code that indicates the direction of the virtual tool nose (0 to 9)
[15] DIRCTN —
(for EIA/ISO programs only)
Number of the page currently displayed and the total number of
pages
[16] Page — a/b
a: Number of the page currently displayed
b: Total number of pages

8-63
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

8-3-2 Tool-compensation data setting procedures

Use the following procedures to input data to the OFFSET item of the TOOL OFFSET display.
When an inch/metric unit system change simplifying option is provided, the display mode and an
inch/metric input unit system on the TOOL OFFSET display can be selected using a menu.

1. Manual setting procedure

(1) Move the cursor to the position in which data is to be input.
(2) Use a screen keyboard to specify the desired data.
 The specified data will then be displayed in the position where the cursor was placed.
 Amount of tool offset (amount of geometric offset)
The amount of tool offset is the data that compensates for any difference between the
programmed dimension and the dimension of an actually machined workpiece.
(Amount of offset) = (Programmed value) – (Value that was measured after machining)
The amount of tool offset can be used to machine workpieces of the intended dimensions
without changing the corresponding programmed data.
 Radius of the tool nose (nose radius) and the direction of a virtual nose
These two types of data relate to nose radius compensation amount to be used for an
EIA/ISO program. During MAZATROL program execution, therefore, the two types of data
are ignored and, instead, the setting in the NOSE-R item of the TOOL DATA display
becomes valid.
Nose-R compensation is a function that compensates for any cutting errors arising from the
roundness of the tool nose.
Also, a virtual nose refers to a “reference point of the tool nose on a programmed path”. The
cutting errors mentioned above can be correctly compensated for by specifying the radius of
the tool nose and the direction of a virtual nose.

Example:

NOSE-R

8-64
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
 Codes denoting the direction of a virtual nose are preset as follows:

Virtual nose point

Virtual nose point 1 Virtual nose point 2

Virtual nose point 3 Virtual nose point 4

Virtual nose point 5 Virtual nose point 6

Virtual nose point 7 Virtual nose point 8

Virtual nose point (0 or 9) (Nose center)

T3S080’’

Remark 1: Keeping cursor position

When a check mark  is assigned to the [Keep Cursor Position] option displayed by
tapping and [Setup], the cursor will be initially displayed at the last set position
next time the display is selected. The cursor will not be moved automatically to the next
position after a numeric data setting.

8-65
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

Remark 2: Geometry Incremental Input On

When a check mark  is assigned to the [Geometry Incremental Input On] option
displayed by tapping and [Setup], the incremental input method will auto-
matically be selected (the [INCRMENT INPUT] menu function activated) when the
cursor is positioned on an item of geometric offset data.
Remark 3: Wear Incremental Input Off
As for wear compensation data, the incremental input method is selected as an initial
state (the [INCRMENT INPUT] menu function activated). If this initial selection for the
items of wear compensation data should be cancelled, then assign a check mark  to
the [Wear Incremental Input Off] option displayed by tapping and [Setup].

8-66
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
2. Automatic setting procedure using the TEACH function
Using the [TEACH] menu function of the display, tool-length compensation data can be auto-
matically set to the OFFSET item (type A), the TOOL LENGTH GEOMETRY item (type B), or the
GEOMETRY OFFSET Y and Z (type C) of the TOOL OFFSET display.

A. For milling tools

(1) Perform manual axis movements to bring the tool tip into contact with the top surface of
either the reference block or the workpiece of a predetermined height.

 See the Operating Manual for the machine.

(2) On the TOOL OFFSET display move the cursor to the position of the OFFSET item (type A)
or TOOL LENGTH GEOMETRY item (type B) corresponding to the tool mounted on the
spindle.
(3) Tap the [TEACH] menu item.
 The [TEACH] menu function will be activated.
(4) Using a screen keyboard, specify the height of either the reference block or the workpiece.
 The NC unit will then calculate the tool length, and the calculated value will be
automatically set under OFFSET item (type A) or TOOL LENGTH GEOMETRY item
(type B).

Machine zero-point

Distance from the

machine zero-point to
the current position of
the machine

Manual axis movement Distance from the

machine zero-point to the
table surface (constant)

Current position
of the machine
Tool length

Distance from the

Reference block
table surface to
or workpiece
the tool tip

Table
M3S022

Remark : Since the current position of the machine is placed in the memory, the NC unit will
calculate the length of the tool if the height of the reference block or workpiece (i.e., the
distance from the table surface to the tool tip) is specified.
 The [TEACH] menu function will be deactivated.

8-67
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

B. For turning tools

Tool offset amounts can be set in GEOMETRIC OFFSET Y and Z automatically using the
[TEACH] menu function.
The operating procedure is shown below taking as an example the case that the TEACH method
is used for a turning tool.
(1) Mount on the spindle the tool whose length is to be measured.
 Carry out the tool change operation to mount on the spindle the tool which is accomo-
dated in the magazine pocket.

 For the operation, see the Operating Manual for the machine.

(2) Perform manual axis movements to bring the tool tip into contact with the end face of the
reference workpiece.

Example: TNo. 2

Axis of rotation
of the turning spindle

Reference Distance Z from the

Z workpiece end face of the table
100 mm
50 mm

Y
Machine coordinate
system
D740S30310

 Any workpiece whose dimensions are known can be used as a reference one.
(3) Move the cursor to the GEOMETRIC OFFSET Z item on the TOOL OFFSET display and
tap the [TEACH] menu item.
(4) Enter the distance Z from the end face of the table. In this example, enter “100.”
 The NC unit will then calculate the length of the tool mounted on the spindle, and the
calculated value will be automatically set under GEOMETRIC OFFSET Z.
(5) Perform manual axis movements to bring the tool tip into contact with the outer diameter
surface of the reference workpiece.

Example:
TNo. 2
Axis of rotation
of the turning spindle

Reference
Z workpiece

50 mm Distance Y from the axis of

Y rotation of the turning spindle

Machine coordinate
system
D740S30311

(6) Move the cursor to the GEOMETRIC OFFSET Y item.

8-68
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
(7) Tap the [TEACH] menu item.
(8) Enter the distance Y from the axis of rotation of the turning spindle. In this example, enter
the radius value “25” of the reference workpiece.
 The NC unit automatically calculates the length of the tool mounted on the spindle and
assigns the calculated value to GEOMETRIC OFFSET Y.
To assign a value to GEOMETRIC OFFSET Z for a tool other than a turning, grooving, threading
or special turning tool, perform the operations of steps (1) to (4). The operations of steps (5) to
(8) are not required.

3. Selection of a screen display mode and an input unit system (inch/metric)

When an inch/metric unit system change simplifying option is provided, the display mode and an
inch/metric input unit system on the TOOL OFFSET display can be selected using the menu
functions.
[INCH MODE] is displayed in metric mode (F91 bit 4 = 0), and [METRIC MODE] is displayed in
inch mode (F91 bit 4 = 1).
 Selection of [INCH MODE] highlights the menu item and the display mode as well as the
input unit system change from metric to inch.
 Selection of [METRIC MODE] highlights the menu item and the display mode as well as
the input unit system change from inch to metric.

 See the Section 13-8 for further details.

Note : Basically, this function is valid when an inch/metric unit system change simplifying
option is provided. Even when the option is provided, the change function cannot be
used if bit 1 in parameter F82 is set to “0” (inch/metric display selection invalid).

8-3-3 Setting the current position

The current position of the tool nose in the workpiece coordinate system can be set while the
POSITION window remains on the TOOL OFFSET display.

 See Subsection 2-3-2 for further details of the POSITION window.

The procedure for setting the current position of each axis is described below.
(1) After selecting the manual operation mode, tap , [Window] and [Position] in that
order to open the POSITION window.
(2) Tap the current position data item of the desired axis.
(3) Specify a new coordinate value.
(4) Close the POSITION window.

8-69
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

8-3-4 EIA/ISO tool length measurement

1. Outline
 Automatically measured tool lengths can be set in tool offsets automatically.
 Two methods are available to measure tool lengths: fully automatic and semi-automatic.
Fully automatic tool length measurement allows the following operations to be carried out:
• Continuous length measurement of a maximum of 13 tools
• Assignment of any offset number
• Automatic shifting in the XY-plane (for automatic length measurement of a tool whose nose
does not lie on the axis of the spindle) [Control parameter: L94]
Semi-automatic tool length measurement allows any offset number to be assigned. [Control
parameter: L95]
 The EIA/ISO tool length measurement function works with an EIA/ISO option. If, however, bit
3 of parameter F93 (MAZATROL tool length valid/invalid for EIA/ISO programs) is set to
“valid”, this function will not work even when the above-mentioned option is provided.

2. Operating procedure for fully automatic tool length measurement

(1) Select the TOOL OFFSET display.
(2) Set the MDI mode.
 This displays an MDI window.
(3) Tap the [T MSR AUTO] menu item.
 The upper right section of the display will be changed into the setting area of tool length
measurement data.

D747S30075E
(4) Tap the TNo. item and specify the number of the tool to be measured.

8-70
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
(5) Specify the offset number under which the measuring result is to be stored.
 Automatic offset number setting
Automatic setting of offset numbers according to the tool number becomes possible by
setting the required parameter.
Automatically set offset numbers are keyed to tool numbers (the amount of shifting is set
with parameter).
Parameter L95: Automatic offset number setting for offset tool measurement
(1: Yes, 0: No)
Parameter L96: The amount of shifting for the offset number that is to be automatically
set for offset tool measurement
(6) Specify the desired amount of shifting in the XY-plane.
 Specifying the amount of shifting in the XY-plane
The required parameter can be used to select whether or not the items X SHIFT and Y
SHIFT are to be displayed.
Parameter L94: Display of X/Y SHIFT items (1: Yes, 0: No)
(7) Tap the [MDI START] menu item.
 A message box appears on the screen.
(8) Tap the [OK] button.
 This displays measurement M- and T-codes in the MDI window and causes the corre-
sponding offset number(s) on the left half of the display to be highlighted in red.
Example of display

D747S30076E
 While the menu function mentioned above in step (3) remains activated, steps (4) to (8)
can be repeated for up to a maximum of 13 tools.

(9) Press the button to perform the measurement operation.

 Measurement results will then be set under the corresponding offset number.
 In the flow of the measurement for multiple tools, the page containing the data item to be
set for each tool is automatically selected and displayed on the left half.

8-71
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

Note: Specified data having a displayed cursor on the right half can be erased for each line
using the [ERASE] menu function.
Also, only the data at the cursor position can be deleted using the key. The data
in the MDI window, however, will remain unchanged. Update the MDI window data by
tapping once again the [MDI START] menu item.

3. Operating procedure for semi-automatic tool length measurement

(1) Select the TOOL OFFSET display.
(2) Set the MDI mode.
 This displays an MDI window.
(3) Tap the [T MSR SEMIAUTO] menu item.
 As with fully automatic tool length measurement, the right-hand half of the display will be
changed into the setting area of tool length measurement data, where the tool number of
the tool on the spindle is displayed under TNo.
(4) Tap the OFFSET No. item and specify the offset number under which the measuring result
is to be stored.
(5) Tap the key.
 This displays a measurement M-code in the MDI window and the [T MSR SEMIAUTO]
menu item will return to its normal display state.
If an offset number is unset, no measurement M-code will be displayed in the MDI
window.

(6) Press the button to perform the measurement operation.

 Use semi-automatic tool length measurement if, as shown below, fully automatic mea-
surement might cause tool interference.

Interference Side cutter

Measuring
table Side cutter
Measuring
table
Inter-
ference

D735S1057

4. Remarks
1. This function is not available for a multi-nose tool that requires setting of multiple tool
lengths for one pocket.
2. Parameter L96 (Amount of shifting for automatic offset number setting) must be set to an
integer equal to, or greater than, zero (0). An alarm will be caused when the shifting results
in the maximum available offset number being exceeded.
Note : This function cannot be used to measure the tool length of a touch sensor.

8-72
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
8-3-5 Manual tool nose measurement using the TOOL EYE (TOOL EYE measurement)

1. Outline
Tool offset amounts can be set in data items concerned automatically through manual measure-
ments using the TOOL EYE.
Note : Irrespectively of the angular position on the B-axis, results of manual measurement
here refer to the distances of the tool nose from the milling spindle’s nose center (or
turret face) along the controlled orthogonal axes (of the machine coordinate system).
(No automatic conversion occurs to obtain the offset amounts for a B-axis index angle
of 0°.)

2. Operating procedure for TOOL EYE measurement

(1) Mount on the spindle the tool to be measured.
 Carry out the tool change operation to mount on the spindle the tool which is accomo-
dated in the magazine pocket.

 For the operation, see the Operating Manual for the machine.

(2) Move the cursor to the cell into which the measureing result is to be written.
 TOOL EYE measurement can only be used for the data items GEOMETRIC OFFSET X,
Y, and Z.

(3) Tap the [TOOL MEASURE] menu item.

 The following menu will be displayed:
MSR UNIT MSR UNIT TOOL EYE
OFF ON MEASURE

Note : Activation of the [TOOL MEASURE] menu function of the TOOL OFFSET display
is rejected with an alarm (2610 TOOL DATA MEASURING) if a TOOL EYE
measurement using the corresponding function of the TOOL DATA display should
not yet be completed.
(4) Tap the [MSR UNIT ON] menu item.
 The TOOL EYE will move out to the predetermined measuring position.

 Be extra careful not to bring the arm of the TOOL EYE into contact with the
tool or workpiece during MSR UNIT ON/OFF operations. If contact is likely to
occur, either move the milling spindle to a safety working zone or remove the
workpiece.

(5) Move the tool nose close to the sensor of the TOOL EYE.
(6) Tap the [TOOL EYE MEASURE] menu item.
 The row of the tool offset data number concerned will be highlighted (in light blue).
 The cutting feed mode will be automatically selected and the rate of feed will be fixed at
the measuring speed specified in parameter K15.
 Use the cursor keys as required, even in this step, to set another cell (data item) as
writing destination.
 Use the page buttons as required to shift the cursor rapidly onto the first cell (in the upper
left corner) of the next or previous page.

8-73
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

(7) Perform manual axis movements to bring the nose of the tool into contact with the sensor.

Example: [2] [1]

LED

Z Z

[1] X

[2]

 A “beep” sound will occur, the LED in the center of the TOOL EYE will go out, and the
axis movement will stop automatically.
 The measuring result corresponding to the controlled axis of the final measuring feed will
be set automatically in the cell selected by the cursor.
Example 1: When B-axis index angle = 90° and final measuring feed occurs on the
X-axis.
The measuring result used for automatic data setting is as follows:

Measuring result
Z
Sensor’s reference point

D747S30195

Example 2: When B-axis index angle = 90° and final measuring feed occurs on the
Z-axis.
The measuring result used for automatic data setting is as follows:

Sensor’s refer-
ence point
X
Measuring result

D747S30196

8-74
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
Example 3: When B-axis index angle = 45° (using a 45-degree holder) and final
measuring feed occurs on the Z-axis.
The measuring result used for automatic data setting is as follows:
(Irrespectively of the angular position on the B-axis, the measuring result refers to
the distance of the tool nose from the milling spindle’s nose center along the
controlled orthogonal axis.)

X
Milling spindle’s nose

Z Sensor’s refer-
ence point

Measuring result

D747S30197

(8) Move the tool nose away from the sensor.

 Press the key for an axis movement in the opposite direction to that of [2] in step (7)
above. (Because of the automatic interlock function, all the other axis move keys are
ineffective.)
 When the axis move key is released, the interlock function will be canceled as a result
and usual axis movement operations can be subsequently carried out.
(9) Tap the [TOOL EYE MEASURE] menu item to deactivate the menu function.
 The row of the tool offset data number concerned will be cleared of highlighting.
(10) Tap the [MSR UNIT OFF] menu item to return the TOOL EYE to its storage position.
 Repeat procedural steps (1) to (9) above as required to continue data settings using the
TOOL EYE for other tools.
Remark : It must be noted here that, irrespective of the setting of bit 7 of parameter SU158,
the corresponding wear compensation amount is not cleared to zero (0) as a result of
automatic updating of the settings on the TOOL OFFSET display.
Note : Since the deformation of the headstock affects the measuring result, it is not advisable,
though possible, to perform TOOL EYE measurement when the thrust of the tailstock is
applied for supporting the workpiece.

TOOL EYE Tool nose

Chuck Tailstock
Deformation of the Tailstock center
headstock due to Shaft workpiece
the thrust by the
tailstock
Thrust

D740S30314

8-75
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

8-4 Input Error Prevention Function

 Checks the input value to change data in the TOOL DATA and TOOL OFFSET displays.
 Prompts for operator confirmation (by opening a window or displaying an alarm message) if the amount
Function
of change is larger than the parameter setting concerned.
 By rechecking the input value, machine collision due to input errors can be avoided.

 The function is only valid when parameter F81 bit 7 is set to 1.

Remarks
 The checking method for the wear compensation amount can be set by parameter F95 bit 4.

8-4-1 Operation
A confirmation window appears if it is attempted to make a change greater in amount than the
parameter concerned.
As for the wear compensation amount, set parameter F95 bit 4 to one (1) if it is desirable to be
warned by an alarm.

1. Window method
A confirmation window appears if the input value or the amount of change should exceed the
parameter setting concerned.

A. Displayed data

[1]
[2]

[3]

[4] [5] D747S30077E

B. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] CURRENT DATA mm (in) Current data setting
[2] INPUT DATA mm (in) Input value
[3] INCREMENT mm (in) Amount of change in the set value relative to the input value.
[4] [CANCEL] button — Used to cancel the input value.
[5] [OK] button — Used to confirm the input value.

2. Alarm method
With parameter F95 bit 4 being set to 1, the alarm 1467 SETTING RANGE EXCEEDED is
displayed if the input value or the change in the wear compensation amount should exceed the
parameter setting concerned, and the input value is ignored.
For data other than the wear compensation amount, warning is always done by opening a
window.

8-76
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
8-4-2 Data items to be checked
When the input error prevention function is enabled, the following data items are monitored.

Display name Data items to be checked

TOOL DATA display  TOOL SET  LENGTH  ACT-  LENG COMP.  LENG. CO.
 ACT-CO.  WEAR COMP X  WEAR COMP Z  WEAR COMP Y
TOOL OFFSET display All data items

Note : Automatic data change by a tool measurement unit is out of checking. (However, the
results from the [TEACH] menu function will be checked.)

8-4-3 Related parameters

The parameters related to the input error prevention function are listed in the table below.

Parameter Setting range Description

0: Input error prevention function invalid
F81 bit 7 0/1
1: Input error prevention function valid
Method of warning for the wear compensation amount.
F95 bit 4 0/1 0: Window method
1: Alarm method
Allowable amount of value change 1 (Threshold value for the amount of change in
TOOL SET, LENGTH, ACT-, LENG COMP., LENG. CO. and ACT-CO. values
F124 0 - 99999999
on the TOOL DATA display and GEOMETRY values on the TOOL OFFSET
display)
Allowable amount of value change 2 (Threshold value for the amount of change in
F125 0 - 99999999 WEAR COMP values on the TOOL DATA display and WEAR values on the
TOOL OFFSET display)
F126 0 - 99999999 Maximum setting value of the wear compensation amount.

 See the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List for more information.

8-77
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

8-5 Changed Data Check Function

Function Prevents interference due to input errors in the TOOL DATA or TOOL OFFSET display.

The function is only valid when parameter F87 bit 2 is set to 1.

Remarks
The number and message of the relevant alarms depend upon the machine specifications.

8-5-1 Outline
This function prevents interference due to input errors in the tool geometry or offset data.
During automatic operation, if the data for the tool to be used has been changed in the TOOL
DATA or TOOL OFFSET display, the NC unit prompts the operator for rechecking by means of
alarm 1300 PLEASE CHECK THE TOOL DATA and lighting of the red warning lamp. The
machine will be brought into feed-hold state and the rapid traverse speed reduced to the
parameter value so as to avoid interference due to input errors.

8-5-2 Operation

No. Display on the screen Description

The change in the TOOL DATA

or TOOL OFFSET display is
stored in the NC unit.

During automatic operation, the

[3] NC monitors the current tool
number and tool offset number
([1] in the left figure) and per-
forms the following actions if the
data of the change stored in 1 is
to be used.
 Feed hold
 Alarm message output
2 ([2] in the left figure)
 Lighting red warning lamp
 Changing rapid traverse
override rate
([3] in the left figure)

[1]
[2]

8-78
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 8
No. Display on the screen Description

Check the data and, if there is no

problem, press the start button.
The message shown in 2 above
will then be replaced by 1302
RAPID OVERRIDE LIMIT ([1] in
the left figure).

[1]

If cutting feed is commanded, the

rapid traverse override rate re-
[1] turns to the previous value ([1] in
the left figure).
The warning message shown in
3 above disappears.

Note 1: All setting items in the TOOL DATA and TOOL OFFSET displays are checked by this
function.
Note 2: The alarm message mentioned in 2 above depends upon the type of the data changed:
Data in the TOOL DATA display 1300 PLEASE CHECK THE TOOL DATA
Data in the TOOL OFFSET display 1301 PLEASE CHECK THE TOOL OFFSET
Note 3: The change in data is retained until any of the following operations is performed. (It is
not cleared by turning off the NC unit.)
 Changed data is used in automatic operation.
 Changed tool data is deleted.
 Changed tool offset data is deleted.

8-79
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS

8-80 E
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS 9
9 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS

9-1 CUTTING CONDITION - W.-MAT./T.-MAT. Display

Registering the materials types of workpieces and tools that are to be selected for automatic setting of
Function
cutting conditions on the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display and the TOOL FILE display
 Data that has been registered on this display can be used only for a MAZATROL program.
Remarks
 Initially, MAZAK-recommended data is displayed. You can change or add data as required.

9-1-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[1]

[2]

D747S30078E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] W.-MAT. — Workpiece material name
[2] T.-MAT — Tool material name

9-1
9 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS

9-1-2 Data registration

The CUTTING CONDITION - W.-MAT./T.-MAT. display allows the names of the materials of
workpieces and tools to be registered using character strings of alphabetic characters and arabic
numerals.
(1) Tap the desired one of the workpiece materials data items from MAT.1 to MAT.16 or the
tool materials data items from MAT.1 to MAT.8.
(2) Input the appropriate name using a screen keyboard.
 Up to eight characters can be set. The maximum number of workpiece materials types is
sixteen, and that of tool materials types is eight for each tool.
 Tap the key to delete the input name.
Note 1: Two parameters are provided for automatic development of the tool sequence in the
MAZATROL program. One is D14 (decisive factor for drilling aluminum materials) and
one is D15 (decisive factor for drilling non-aluminum materials). Which of the two
parameters will be auto-selected depends on the selected workpiece material.
Workpiece material 6 is regarded as aluminium. Parameter D14 will be used if the
workpiece material 6 is selected in the MAZATROL program. Parameter D15 will be
used if another workpiece material is selected.

 Refer to the PROGRAMMING MANUAL (MAZATROL Program) for further

details of automatic tool development. See the separate Parameter List/
Alarm List/M-code List for further details of the parameters.

Note 2: The workpiece material names registered in this display are cross-referred to those in
the file (C:\ymw\M8Y\data\nm64mdata\eng\cspmat.txt) containing the data for the
calculation of the average output indicated on the MACHINING NAVIGATION -
PREDICT display.

 Changing a workpiece material name in one storage area requires the same
operation for the other.
Refer to item [13] of “2. Display data description” in Subsection 7-6-1.

9-1-3 Read and Write of text file

The workpiece and tool material names (W.-MAT. and T.-MAT.) in the cutting conditions can be
taken in and out as a text file of the local disk. Use the [File] option (displayed by tapping )
to perform these operations.

1. File saving and file loading

 File saving
The workpiece and tool material names indicated on the CUTTING CONDITION display are
saved onto the local disk as a text file (C:\ymw\M8Y\data\nm64mdata\eng\material.txt).
 File loading
The text file (C:\ymw\M8Y\data\nm64mdata\eng\material.txt) of the workpiece and tool
material names saved on the local disk is loaded into the NC unit.
Note : “eng” in the file name corresponds with the language currently selected for the display
mode.

9-2
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS 9
2. Format of the text file

[DRILL] [1] Title

1,
2,
3,
[2] Material 4,
name 5,
6,
7,
8,
[CTR-DR]
1,
2,
3,
4,

[1] Title
The title denotes the category of the material data described under it as listed below.

Title Meaning Title Meaning

WORK Workpiece BOR BAR Boring bar
DRILL Drill B-B BOR Back-boring bar
CTR-DR Center drill E-MILL End-mill
REAM Reamer F-MILL Face-mill
TAP Tap B-ENDMILL Ball-end-mill
BCK FACE Back spot-facing tool OTHER Other types of tool
CHF-C Chamfering cutter

Note : The characters enclosed in brackets [ ] are used as the keyword to construct the file.
Do not enter any comment on this character line. Otherwise, the data may not be read
correctly during file loading.
[2] Material name
Materials are described.
2,
The first numeral denotes the material number corresponding to the title given above. The
material name can be entered after the comma “,”.
Example 1: File

［WORK］ “S45C” is registered as workpiece material No. 1.

1,S45C
2,...

Note 1: The material name can consist of a maximum of eight half-size characters (or four
normal-size characters).
Note 2: The character string of the material name must not begin or end with a half-size null
code. This code can only be used within the character string.
Example 2: Leading/trailing half-size null code.
File

［WORK］
1,_S45C_
2,... An example of incorrect description
( _ denotes a half-size null code.)

9-3
9 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS

Example 3: Half-size null code within a character string

File

［DRILL］
1,HSS_B
2,... An example of correct description

Note 3: Do not enter one and the same material name repeatedly under the same category.
Example 4: File

［WORK］ An example of incorrect entry

1,S45C (Loading of this file only registers “S45C” and “FC” as work-
2,S45C
piece material No. 1 and 3 respectively; entry of No. 2 and 4
3,FC
4,S45C is ignored.)

9-4
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS 9
9-2 CUTTING CONDITION - C-SP/FR Display
Registering the fundamental data for automatic setting of the cutting conditions on the PROGRAM
Function
(MAZATROL) display and the TOOL FILE display.
 The CUTTING CONDITION display consists of the following two sub-displays containing the surface
speed and feed rate data for each milling tool type:
1. CUTTING CONDITION - C-SP display
2. CUTTING CONDITION - FR display
 Data that has been registered on this display is used only for MAZATROL programs.
Remarks  Data recommended by Yamazaki Mazak is pre-registered prior to shipping of the machine. The
registered data can be modified as required.
 The cutting conditions to be used for the point, line and face machining units of the MAZATROL
program are automatically calculated from the registered data within this display, the CUTTING
CONDITION - W.-MAT./T.-MAT. display, and the TOOL DATA display, the registered data within the
program, and the settings of parameters. Refer to the PROGRAMMING MANUAL (MAZATROL
Program) for calculation expressions.

Note : The CUTTING CONDITION - C-SP display will be auto-selected when any other
display is changed over to the CUTTING CONDITION display.

9-2-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

A. CUTTING CONDITION - C-SP display

[1]
[3]

[2]

[4]

[6]

D747S30079E

9-5
9 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS

B. CUTTING CONDITION - FR display

[1]
[3]

[2]

[5]

[6]

D747S30080E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] Tool name — Name (type) of the currently selected tool
[2] W.-MAT. — Name of the material of the workpiece
[3] T.-MAT. — Name of the material of the tool
m/min
[4] Cutting speed Cutting speed (Surface speed) for the workpiece material
(ft/min)
mm/rev
[5] Rate of feed Rate of feed for the workpiece material
(in/rev)
Number of the page currently displayed and the total number of pages
a/b
[6] Page —
a: Number of the page currently displayed
b: Total number of pages

9-6
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS 9
9-2-2 Data registration
The following data can be registered for each tool on the CUTTING CONDITION - C-SP/FR
display:
1. Cutting or surface speed for each workpiece material type registered on the CUTTING
CONDITION - W.-MAT./T.-MAT. display
2. Rate of feed for each workpiece material type registered on the CUTTING CONDITION
- W.-MAT./T.-MAT. display
Cutting conditions data differs according to the selected type of milling tool, type of workpiece
material, and type of tool material. The method of setting the data, however, is the same. Here,
how to set data is described below taking the following conditions as an example:
1. Assume that FC and HSS are already registered under MAT.1 of W.-MAT. and MAT.1 of
DRILL item, respectively, on the CUTTING CONDITION - W.-MAT./T.-MAT. display.
W.-MAT.
MAT.1 MAT.2 MAT.3
FC
MAT.9 MAT.10 MAT.11
T.-MAT.
TOOL MAT.1 MAT.2 MAT.3
DRILL HSS
CTR-DR

2. Set the C-SP and FR data of the drilling tool for the workpiece material FC to “110 (m/min)”
and “2 (mm/rev)” respectively.

(1) Call up the CUTTING CONDITION - C-SP display.

 The following display will then be made:

DRILL T.-MAT.
W.-MAT. HSS BALANCE CARBIDE
FC

 This example assumes that only FC and HSS are already registered as the workpiece
material type and the drilling tool material type, respectively, on the CUTTING CONDI-
TION - W.-MAT./T.-MAT display.
(2) Move the cursor to the HSS column of the drilling tool for the workpiece material FC. (Use
the page buttons on the screen to enter the C-SP data for other types of tool.)

DRILL T.-MAT.
W.-MAT. HSS BALANCE CARBIDE
FC

Move the cursor to this position

(3) Input a surface speed using a screen keyboard.

 In the example shown above, “110” is to be set.
(4) Next, call up the CUTTING CONDITION - FR display.
 The following display will then be made:

DRILL T.-MAT.
W.-MAT. HSS BALANCE CARBIDE
FC

9-7
9 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS

(5) Move the cursor to the HSS column of the drilling tool for the workpiece material FC. (Use
the page buttons on the screen to enter the FR data for other types of tool.)

DRILL T.-MAT.
W.-MAT. HSS BALANCE CARBIDE
FC

Move the cursor to this position

(6) Input a rate of feed.

 In the example shown above, set “2.”

9-8
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS 9
9-3 CUTTING CONDITION - PERCENTAGE Display

Registering cutting-condition automatic setting coefficients according to the materials type of the work-
Function
piece and turning tool.

 Data that has been registered on this display can be used only for a MAZATROL program.
 Initially, MAZAK recommended data is displayed. You can change or add data as required.
 The cutting conditions to be used for the turning machining units of the MAZATROL program are auto-
Remarks matically calculated from the registered data within this display, the CUTTING CONDITION - TURNING
display, and the TOOL DATA display, the registered data within the program, and the settings of
parameters. Refer to the PROGRAMMING MANUAL (MAZATROL Program) for calculation expres-
sions.
 Only available for machines with turning functions.

9-3-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]

D747S30081E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

W.-MAT.
[1] — Workpiece material name
(Workpiece material)
R-SPD% Setting coefficient of surface speed during rough-machining
[2] %
(Workpiece material) according to workpiece material
F-SPD% Setting coefficient of surface speed during finish-machining according
[3] %
(Workpiece material) to workpiece material
R-FEED% Setting coefficient of rate of feed per spindle rotation during
[4] %
(Workpiece material) rough-machining according to workpiece material
R-DEPTH% Setting coefficient of maximum depth of cut during rough-machining
[5] %
(Workpiece material) according to workpiece material
T.-MAT.
[6] — Tool material name
(Tool material)

9-9
9 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS

No. Item Unit Data description

R-SPD% Setting coefficient of surface speed during rough-machining
[7] %
(Tool material) according to tool material
F-SPD% Setting coefficient of surface speed during finish-machining according
[8] %
(Tool material) to tool material
R-FEED% Setting coefficient of rate of feed per spindle rotation during
[9] %
(Tool material) rough-machining according to tool material
R-DEPTH% Setting coefficient of maximum depth of cut during rough-machining
[10] %
(Tool material) according to tool material

9-3-2 Data registration

On the CUTTING CONDITION - PERCENTAGE display, the following data can be registered:
 Cutting-condition automatic setting coefficients appropriate for the materials type

9-10
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS 9
9-4 CUTTING CONDITION - TURNING Display

Registering the fundamental data for automatic setting of the cutting conditions (surface speed, rate of
Function
feed, etc.) to be used in turning processes.

 Data that has been registered on this display can be used only for a MAZATROL program.
 Initially, data that MAZAK recommends is displayed. The data can be changed as required.
Remarks  The cutting conditions to be used in a turning process are calculated automatically in accordance with
the data that has been registered on this display and on the CUTTING CONDITION - PERCENTAGE
and TOOL DATA displays, data that has been set in the program to be executed, and parameter
settings. Refer to the PROGRAMMING MANUAL (MAZATROL Program) for calculation expressions.

9-4-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

D749S30086E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

m/min
[1] R-SPD Cutting speed (surface speed) during rough-machining
(ft/min)
m/min
[2] F-SPD Cutting speed (surface speed) during finish-machining
(ft/min)
mm/rev
[3] R-MAX-FEED Rate of feed per turning spindle rotation during rough-machining
(in/rev)
mm
[4] R-MAX-DEPTH Maximum depth of cut during rough-machining
(in)
Maximum ratio of load during rough-machining
[5] R-MAX-LOAD %
Independent setting for the turning spindles 1 and 2

9-11
9 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS

9-4-2 Data registration

On the CUTTING CONDITION - TURNING display, the following data can be registered:
 The surface speed, rate of feed per revolution, maximum depth of cut and maximum ratio of
load that are to be set for roughing during each turning unit, and the surface speed during
finishing.
Procedures for registering the above-mentioned data are described below (for the sake of
convenience of description, the statement made below assumes that data is to be set in order of
item number).
(1) Select a data item R-SPD.
(2) Set a surface speed for roughing.
 The designated value is displayed and the cursor moves to the data item F-SPD.
(3) Set a surface speed for finishing.
 The designated value is displayed and the cursor moves to the data item R-MAX-FEED.
(4) Set a rate of feed per spindle revolution for roughing.
 The designated value is displayed and the cursor moves to the data item R-MAX-
DEPTH.
(5) Set a maximum depth of cut for roughing.
 The designated value is displayed.
(6) Set the maximum ratio of load for roughing.
 The designated value is displayed.
Remark : Data setting in items marked with  is not required.

9-12
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS 9
9-5 CUTTING CONDITION - SPEC. CUT. FORCE Display

Registering the data of specific cutting force for automatic setting of the cutting conditions to be used
Function
according to the materials type of the workpiece.

 Data that has been registered on this display is used only for MAZATROL programs.
 Data recommended by Mazak is pre-registered prior to shipping of the machine. The registered data
can be modified as required.
Remarks  The cutting conditions to be used for the machining units of a MAZATROL program are calculated
automatically in accordance with the data registered on this display as well as on the CUTTING
CONDITION - PERCENTAGE and TOOL DATA displays, and the data in the program.
Remark : Refer to the PROGRAMMING MANUAL (MAZATROL Program) for calculation expressions.

9-5-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[1] [2]

D747S30087E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] COMMON N/mm2 (lbf/inch2) Specific cutting force, to be used generally
[2] TAPPING N/mm2 (lbf/inch2) Specific cutting force, to be used for tapping

9-13
9 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS

9-5-2 Data registration

The following data can be registered on the CUTTING CONDITION - SPEC. CUT. FORCE
display:
 Specific cutting force, to be used generally for turning units or specifically for tapping units.
The procedure for registering the above-mentioned data is described below (for the sake of
convenience of description, the statement made below assumes that data is to be set in order of
item number).
(1) Select a data item in the COMMON column.
(2) Set a specific cutting force to be used generally for turning units.
 The designated value is displayed and the cursor moves to the TAPPING column.
(3) Set a specific cutting force to be used specifically for tapping units.
 The designated value is displayed.
Remark : Data setting in items marked with  is not required.

9-6 CUTTING CONDITION LEARN Display

The CUTTING CONDITION LEARN display is provided to store those modifications on the cutting con-
Function
ditions that are performed by the operator with the aid of the VFC function.

The data stored in this display will be given priority in the automatic setting of cutting conditions for a
Remarks MAZATROL program if the related basic conditions agree with the stored ones. Otherwise, the data stored
in the CUTTING CONDITION display will be used for that purpose.

9-6-1 Data display

1. Displayed data
<For milling cutting condition>

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]

D747S30083E

9-14
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS 9
<For turning cutting condition>

[12] [13] [14] [15] [16]

D747S30084E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

A“ ” mark is displayed when the data is in a modification prohibited
[1] — —
status.
[2] No. — Number of data
[3] TOOL — Type of the tool
[4] NOM- — Nominal diameter and tool identification code of the tool
[5] T.-MAT. — Name of the tool material
[6] W.-MAT. — Name of the workpiece material
mm (in) Infeed range Z (One of the learning conditions for face milling)
[7] DEP-Z Infeed range Z (One of the learning conditions for end milling), namely,
%
“Infeed stroke Z/Tool diameter” is displayed in percentage terms.
mm (in) Infeed range R (One of the learning conditions for boring or back-boring)
[8] WID-R Infeed range R (One of the learning conditions for end milling), namely,
%
“Infeed stroke R/Tool diameter” is displayed in percentage terms.
Type of milling process; roughing is displayed as “RGN”, or finishing, as
[9] PROCESS — “FIN”.
The type of machining cycle is displayed when the tool is a drill.
[10] C-SP m/min (ft/min) Cutting speed (surface speed) during machining
mm/rev
[11] FR Rate of feed during machining
(in/rev)
[12] UNIT — Name of the turning unit
[13] OD-MAX mm (in) Outer diameter of the workpiece
[14] LENGTH mm (in) Length of the workpiece
[15] DEPTH mm (in) Cutting depth during machining
Type of turning process; roughing is displayed as “RGN”, or finishing, as
[16] PROCESS —
“FIN”.

9-15
9 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS

9-6-2 Menu functions

 LEARN OFF
Used to protect a specific data against further modification. Position the cursor on the desired
data line and tap the [LEARN OFF] menu item. The display of the menu item will then be set
into the select state, and a message box will appear with DO NOT LEARN CUT COND.
<INPUT>? in it. Tap the [OK] button to apply the protect function. The protection will then be
indicated by a symbol on the left of the No., the display of the menu item will return to the
deselect state and the item itself will be replaced by [LEARN].
Tapping again the menu item displayed in the select state will only return the display to the
deselect state.
 LEARN
Used to cancel the protect function. Position the cursor on the desired data line and tap the
[LEARN] menu item. The display of the menu item will then be set into the select state, and a
message box will appear with LEARN CUT CONDITION <INPUT>? in it. Tap the [OK] button
to cancel the protect function. The symbol of protection will then disappear, the display of the
menu item will return to the deselect state and the item itself will be replaced by [LEARN
OFF].
Tapping again the menu item displayed in the select state will only return the display to the
deselect state.
 DATA EDIT
A tap on the [DATA EDIT] menu item sets its display into the select state to indicate that data
can be edited. Select the desired item and enter data using a screen keyboard or a menu.
 ERASE
Used to clear a specific data. Position the cursor on the desired data line and tap the
[ERASE] menu item. The display of the menu item will then be set into the select state, and a
message box will appear with ERASE <INPUT>? in it. Tap the [OK] button to clear the
specified data.
Tapping again the menu item displayed in the select state will only return the display to the
deselect state.

9-16
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS 9
9-7 USER PARAMETER Display

Function Registering and displaying user parameters

9-7-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[4]
[5]

[1] [1] [1] [1] [1] [1]

[2] [2] [2] [2] [2] [2]

[3]

D747S30085

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] Address — Address of various user parameters
[2] Data — Data of various user parameters
Used to change pages for an address with multiple pages of data
[3] Page buttons —
registration.
Parameter type Used to select a type of parameters from among USER, MACHINE and
[4] —
buttons PLC parameters.
Used to select an address.
[5] Address tabs —
Address selection can also be done from a menu.

 For further details, see the separate Prameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List.

Note : Confirm the contents of parameters before changing them.

9-17
9 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS

3. Bit input function

A function is provided for facilitating the setting of a parameter whose unit is bits.
Example : The procedure for assigning ‘1’ to bit 5 in parameter D91 (a parameter whose unit is
bits) is shown below.
(1) Moving the cursor to parameter D91 automatically changes the contents of the menu to the
following:
 The menu item of a bit which is currently set to ‘1’ is displayed in the select state.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 BIT
INPUT

(2) Tap the [BIT 5] menu item.

 The value ‘1’ will be set up at bit 5 of D91 and the [BIT 5] menu item is displayed in the
select state.
 To reset bit 5 of D91 to ‘0’, tap the [BIT 5] menu item again.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 BIT
INPUT

 The bit input function can be used on the USER PARAMETER display, the MACHINE
PARAMETER display, and the PLC PARAMETER display.

9-18
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS 9
9-8 MACHINE PARAMETER Display

Function Registering and displaying machine parameters

9-8-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[5]
[6]

[1] [3] [1] [3] [1] [3] [1] [3] [1] [3] [1] [3]

[2] [2] [2] [2] [2] [2]

[4]

D747S30086

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] Address — Address of various machine parameters
[2] Data — Data of various machine parameters
Axis name
[3] Axis name —
Note : According to parameter number, it may not be displayed.
Used to change pages for an address with multiple pages of data
[4] Page buttons —
registration.
Parameter type Used to select a type of parameters from among USER, MACHINE and
[5] —
buttons PLC parameters.
Used to select an address.
[6] Address tabs —
Address selection can also be done from a menu.

 For further details, see the separate Prameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List.

Note : Confirm the contents of parameters before changing them.

9-19
9 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS

9-9 PLC PARAMETER Display

Function Displaying parameters for sequence ladder adjustment

9-9-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[4]
[5]

[1] [1] [1] [1] [1] [1] [1]

[2] [2] [2] [2] [2] [2] [2]

[3]

D747S30087

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] Address — Address of various PLC parameters
[2] Data — Data of various PLC parameters (Note)
Used to change pages for an address with multiple pages of data
[3] Page buttons —
registration.
Parameter type Used to select a type of parameters from among USER, MACHINE and
[4] —
buttons PLC parameters.
Used to select an address.
[5] Address tabs —
Address selection can also be done from a menu.

Note : These parameters are preadjusted to the machine specifications prior to shipping from
the factory. There is no need to enter or change data.

9-20 E
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

10-1 DATA I/O Display

 This display is used to transfer programs or other types of data between the NC unit and the hard disk or
between the NC unit and an external unit.
Function
 Use this display to save various data to be used by the Smooth CAM unit in simulating the machine
operation conditions.

10-1-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[3]

[1] [4] [1]

[5]

[2] [2]

D747S30088

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Work number of program for transference and identification of
MAZATROL programs or EIA/ISO programs
M: MAZATROL program
[1] PROGRAM — E: EIA/ISO program
* The display type for this area can be selected from [VIEW] (displayed
by tapping ): [Single Column], [2 Columns], or [4 Columns].
[2] OTHER DATA — Data other than programs for transference (Remark) (Note)
[3] Unit name — Name of unit for transference
[4] I/O mode — Data transfer mode (loading, saving, etc.)
Display that indicates data is being input or output. During data input or
[5] Display of execution —
output, display according to transfer mode being executed ([4]) is made.

10-1
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

Remark : The types of OTHER DATA to be transferred are as follows:

 TOOL DATA  USER PARAM.
 TOOL OFFSET  M. PARAM. (Machine parameter)
 TOOL FILE  MACRO VAR.
 ADD WPC (Additional WPC origin data)  MAINTENANCE
 CUTTING COND.  TOOL MODEL
 WORK OFFSET  PALLET MANG.
 SPACE ERROR
The items displayed in this area depend on the specifications of the machine.
Note : The machine parameters are factory-set to the optimum values for the standard
operating conditions of each machine model. In principle, therefore, avoid loading the
M. PARAM. data.

3. Units for transference

Item Description
HARD DISK For data input/output operations with the hard disk installed on the machine.
USB For data input/output operations with a USB memory connected through the USB connector.
SD For data input/output operations with an SD card inserted in the slot concerned.
TAPE For data input/output operations through a tape reader/punch.
CMT For data input operations with a CMT device.

Note 1: The CMT data I/O function is only designed for loading (not for saving).
Note 2: Use a connector for USB-RS232C conversion to connect a tape reader/punch or a
CMT device.

10-1-2 DATA I/O operations (HARD DISK)

The following three data input/output operations can be executed using the hard disk.
1. Loading
The program data or other types of data prestored on the hard disk are registered into the
NC unit.
2. Saving
The program data or other types of data pre-registered in the NC unit are stored onto the
hard disk.
3. Directorying
The data type prestored on the hard disk are displayed.
Note : Data communication with the HDD OPERATION PROGRAM area cannot be achieved
by the HARD DISK function of the DATA I/O display.
The operating procedure of each operation listed above is described below.

10-2
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
1. Selecting the directory
For loading, saving and directorying with the hard disk, selection of the required directory must
be done beforehand by the following procedure:
(1) Tap the [DIR. SELECT] menu item.
 The following window will appear.

(2) Select a directory displayed, or key in the name of the required directory, and tap the [OK]
button.
 Enter the name with a screen keyboard.

2. Deleting the directory

To delete a directory (with all the files thereunder) on the hard disk, proceed as follows:
(1) Tap the [DIR. DELETE] menu item.
 The following window will appear.

(2) Select a directory displayed, or key in the name of the directory to be deleted, and tap the
[OK] button.
 Enter the name with a screen keyboard.
Note : All the files stored under the specified directory will be deleted by the above operation.

3. Loading
(1) Tap the [HARD DISK] menu item.
(2) Tap the [NC  HD LOAD] menu item.
 LOAD will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Select the data to be transferred.
For program data transfer
 Tap the PROGRAM area of the HARD DISK display section and enter the work number
of the program to be transferred. The entered work number will be highlighted.

10-3
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

 Up to 960 programs can be selected.

For non-program data transfer
 Tap the [SELECT MODE] menu item to enable the menu function, and tap the desired
item in the OTHER DATA area of the HARD DISK display section. The data name will
be highlighted, indicating the designation of that type of data for transfer.
For erasing the data setting
 Tap the [SELECT MODE] menu item to enable the menu function, and tap the data
setting to be erased. The highlighting will then be cleared.
 Follow the procedure below to erase all the data settings at once:
(a) Tap the [ALL ERASE] menu item.
 A message box appears.
(b) Tap the [OK] button.
 The current data settings will be all cleared.
(4) Tap the [START] menu item.
A warning window is displayed (by the function for preventing erroneous parameter loading)
when a loading command which includes loading of one of the following types of
parameters is to be executed, and the data transfer does not start until the [OK] button in
the window is tapped.
 User parameter (USER PARAM.)
 Machine parameter (M. PARAM.)
 Inertia parameter (INERTIA PARA)
 CC-LINK parameter
 Spindle attachment parameter (SPDL.ATTACH)

 See Subsection 10-1-12 “Function for preventing erroneous parameter

loading” for more information.

 Data transfer will begin.

 The display color will change for the data currently being transferred.
 Upon completion of transfer of each data item, the highlighting of tha data name will be
cleared, and the same data name will be displayed in the NC display section.
 Upon completion of data transfer, the display of the [START] menu item will return to the
deselect state.
Note 1: You can select using bit 6 of I/O parameter IOP5 whether loading of a program whose
work number is the same as that of a program pre-registered within the NC unit, is to
be enabled or not (1 or 0).

 For further details of parameters, see the separate Parameter List/Alarm

List/M-Code List.

To enable such a program for which the loading operation is not available by parameter
setting, to be loaded, the work number of the related pre-registered program must be
changed prior to loading.

10-4
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
Note 2: A listing window (named WORK No. SELECT) for the work numbers of all programs
registered previously in the NC unit can be displayed by tapping the [PROGRAM FILE]
menu item. While the window remains on the display, the [PROGRAM FILE] menu
item is displayed in the select state with [SELECT RANGE] additionally presented for
specifying programs in a designated range at one time.
Tapping the [PROGRAM FILE] menu item once again returns its display to the
deselect state and closes the window.
Note 3: Data transfer will be continued even if the existing display is changed over to another
display during the data transfer process. However, the data being transferred cannot
be overwritten.
This also applies to a transfer mode other than LOAD.
Note 4: Data transfer will halt if the [START] menu item is tapped during the data transfer
process. Data transfer cannot be restarted from the position in which the transfer
process has halted.
This also applies to a transfer mode other than LOAD.
Note 5: It is not advisable to load tool data prepared for another machine that is different in the
number of available tools.

4. Saving
(1) Tap the [HARD DISK] menu item.
(2) Tap the [NC  HD SAVE] menu item.
 SAVE will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Select the data to be transferred.
 The data input procedure is the same as that of LOAD. Input the data in the NC display
section. (See procedural step (3) of “3. Loading”.)
(4) Tap the [START] menu item.
 Data transfer will begin.
 The display color will change for the data currently being transferred.
 Upon completion of transfer of each data item, the highlighting of tha data name will be
cleared, and the same data name will be displayed in the HARD DISK display section.
 Upon completion of data transfer, the display of the [START] menu item will return to the
deselect state.

5. Directorying

A. Displaying in the select state all the programs and other types of data stored in the
directory concerned
(1) Tap the [HARD DISK] menu item.
(2) Tap the [DATA SELECT ALL] menu item.
 DIR will be displayed on the I/O data item, and a message box will appear.
(3) Tap the [OK] button.
 The various data stored on the hard disk will be displayed in the HARD DISK display
section.
 If programs are stored on the hard disk, the corresponding work numbers will be
displayed in the PROGRAM area.
 If non-program data are stored on the hard disk, the corresponding item will be
highlighted in the OTHER DATA area.

10-5
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

B. Displaying in the deselect state all the programs and other types of data stored in the
directory concerned
(1) Tap the [HARD DISK] menu item.
(2) Tap the [DATA DISPLAY] menu item.
 All the programs and other types of data stored in the directory concerned are displayed
in black characters (indicating the deselect state).
 Grayed out items in the OTHER DATA area denote that no corresponding data are
stored in the directory concerned.

6. Changing the folder

The folder used for the HARD DISK data input/output operations can be changed by the
following procedure:
(1) Tap , [Setup] and the [HD I/O Folder] option in that order.

(2) Set the required folder name in the dialogue box which appears upon step (1).

 Tap the [BROWSE] button to display the tree of the available folders, and select an item
if it is to be set as a folder name.

(3) Tap the [OK] button.

10-6
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
 The name of the folder which stores the data files is determined as follows:
“Setting of FOLDER NAMESET” + “Setting of DIR. SELECT”
Example : If the settings made as indicated in items 6 and 1 are respectively “C:\ymw\M8Y\
data\MC_Backup\Other” and “ABC”, the name of the folder concerned runs as follows:
C:\ymw\M8Y\data\MC_Backup\Other\ABC
 The folder can be assigned to any computer on the network.
 Once designated, the name of the folder is not cleared simply by the turning-off.
 The default setting is “C:\ymw\M8Y\data\MC_Backup\Other”.
 The folder name can consist of 64 characters.

10-7
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

10-1-3 DATA I/O operations (USB)

The following four data input/output operations can be executed through a USB (Universal Serial
Bus).
1. Loading
The program data or other types of data prestored on a USB are registered into the NC unit.
2. Saving
The program data or other types of data pre-registered in the NC unit are stored through a
USB.
3. Directorying
The data type prestored on a USB are displayed.
4. Selecting drive
A drive other than USB which is connected to the NC is selected.
The operating procedure of each operation listed above is described below.
The following description assumes that the USB has already been connected to the NC unit.
Note : The USB in this subsection refers to USB equipment applicable to a USB mass-
storage class.

1. Selecting the directory

For loading, saving and directorying with a USB, moreover, selection of the required directory
must be done beforehand by the following procedure:
(1) Tap the [DIR. SELECT] menu item.
 The following window will appear.

(2) Select a directory displayed, or key in the name of the required directory, and tap the [OK]
button.
 Enter the name with a screen keyboard.

10-8
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
2. Deleting the directory
To delete a directory (with all the files thereunder) on the USB, proceed as follows:
(1) Tap the [DIR. DELETE] menu item.
 The following window will appear.

(2) Select a directory displayed, or key in the name of the directory to be deleted, and tap the
[OK] button.
 Enter the name with a screen keyboard.
Note : All the files stored under the specified directory will be deleted by the above operation.

3. Loading
(1) Tap the [USB] menu item.
(2) Tap the [NC  USB LOAD] menu item.
 LOAD will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Select the data to be transferred.
For program data transfer
 Tap the PROGRAM area of the USB display section and enter the work number of the
program to be transferred. The entered work number will be highlighted.
 Up to 960 programs can be selected.
For non-program data transfer
 Tap the [SELECT MODE] menu item to enable the menu function, and tap the desired
item in the OTHER DATA area of the USB display section. The data name will be
highlighted, indicating the designation of that type of data for transfer.
For erasing the data setting
 Tap the [SELECT MODE] menu item to enable the menu function, and tap the data
setting to be erased. The highlighting will then be cleared.
 Follow the procedure below to erase all the data settings at once:
(a) Tap the [ALL ERASE] menu item.
 A message box appears.
(b) Tap the [OK] button.
 The current data settings will be all cleared.

10-9
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

(4) Tap the [START] menu item.

A warning window is displayed (by the function for preventing erroneous parameter loading)
when a loading command which includes loading of one of the following types of
parameters is to be executed, and the data transfer does not start until the [OK] button in
the window is tapped.
 User parameter (USER PARAM.)
 Machine parameter (M. PARAM.)
 Inertia parameter (INERTIA PARA)
 CC-LINK parameter
 Spindle attachment parameter (SPDL.ATTACH)

 See Subsection 10-1-12 “Function for preventing erroneous parameter

loading” for more information.

 Data transfer will begin.

 The display color will change for the data currently being transferred.
 Upon completion of transfer of each data item, the highlighting of tha data name will be
cleared, and the same data name will be displayed in the NC display section.
 Upon completion of data transfer, the display of the [START] menu item will return to the
deselect state.
Note 1: You can select using bit 6 of I/O parameter IOP5 whether loading of a program whose
work number is the same as that of a program pre-registered within the NC unit, is to
be enabled or not (1 or 0).

 For further details of parameters, see the separate Parameter List/Alarm

List/M-Code List.

To enable such a program for which the loading operation is not available by parameter
setting, to be loaded, the work number of the related pre-registered program must be
changed prior to loading.
Note 2: A listing window (named WORK No. SELECT) for the work numbers of all programs
registered previously in the NC unit can be displayed by tapping the [PROGRAM FILE]
menu item. While the window remains on the display, the [PROGRAM FILE] menu
item is displayed in the select state with [SELECT RANGE] additionally presented for
specifying programs in a designated range at one time.
Tapping the [PROGRAM FILE] menu item once again returns its display to the
deselect state and closes the window.
Note 3: Data transfer will be continued even if the existing display is changed over to another
display during the data transfer process. However, the data being transferred cannot
be overwritten.
This also applies to a transfer mode other than LOAD.
Note 4: Data transfer will halt if the [START] menu item is tapped during the data transfer
process. Data transfer cannot be restarted from the position in which the transfer
process has halted.
This also applies to a transfer mode other than LOAD.
Note 5: It is not advisable to load tool data prepared for another machine that is different in the
number of available tools.

10-10
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
4. Saving
(1) Tap the [USB] menu item.
(2) Tap the [NC  USB SAVE] menu item.
 SAVE will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Select the data to be transferred.
 The data input procedure is the same as that of LOAD. Input the data in the NC display
section. (See procedural step (3) of “3. Loading”.)
(4) Tap the [START] menu item.
 Data transfer will begin.
 The display color will change for the data currently being transferred.
 Upon completion of transfer of each data item, the highlighting of tha data name will be
cleared, and the same data name will be displayed in the USB display section.
 Upon completion of data transfer, the display of the [START] menu item will return to the
deselect state.

5. Directorying

A. Displaying in the select state all the programs and other types of data stored in the
directory concerned
(1) Tap the [USB] menu item.
(2) Tap the [DATA SELECT ALL] menu item.
 DIR will be displayed on the I/O data item, and a message box will appear.
(3) Tap the [OK] button.
 The various data stored on the USB will be displayed in the USB display section.
 If programs are stored on the USB, the corresponding work numbers will be displayed in
the PROGRAM area.
 If non-program data are stored on the USB, the corresponding item will be highlighted in
the OTHER DATA area.

B. Displaying in the deselect state all the programs and other types of data stored in the
directory concerned
(1) Tap the [USB] menu item.
(2) Tap the [DATA DISPLAY] menu item.
 All the programs and other types of data stored in the directory concerned are displayed
in black characters (indicating the deselect state).
 Grayed out items in the OTHER DATA area denote that no corresponding data are
stored in the directory concerned.

6. Selecting drive
(1) Tap the [USB] menu item.
(2) Tap the [DRIVE SELECT] menu item.
 The currently available drives are displayed.
(3) Select the desired drive.
 Data I/O operations can be carried out with the selected drive.

10-11
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

7. Removing a USB device

 When removing a USB device, be sure to use the “Safely Remove Hardware”
function or turn off the power.

10-1-4 DATA I/O operations (SD Card)

The following three data input/output operations can be executed using an SD card.
1. Loading
The program data or other types of data prestored on the SD card are registered into the NC
unit.
2. Saving
The program data or other types of data pre-registered in the NC unit are stored onto the SD
card.
3. Directorying
The data type prestored on the SD card are displayed.
The operating procedure of each operation listed above is described below.

1. Selecting the directory

For loading, saving and directorying with an SD card, selection of the required directory must be
done beforehand by the following procedure:
(1) Tap the [DIR. SELECT] menu item.
 The following window will appear.

(2) Select a directory displayed, or key in the name of the required directory, and tap the [OK]
button.
 Enter the name with a screen keyboard.

10-12
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
2. Deleting the directory
To delete a directory (with all the files thereunder) on the SD card, proceed as follows:
(1) Tap the [DIR. DELETE] menu item.
 The following window will appear.

(2) Select a directory displayed, or key in the name of the directory to be deleted, and tap the
[OK] button.
 Enter the name with a screen keyboard.
Note : All the files stored under the specified directory will be deleted by the above operation.

3. Loading
(1) Tap the [SD] menu item.
(2) Tap the [NC  SD LOAD] menu item.
 LOAD will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Select the data to be transferred.
For program data transfer
 Tap the PROGRAM area of the SD CARD display section and enter the work number of
the program to be transferred. The entered work number will be highlighted.
 Up to 960 programs can be selected.
For non-program data transfer
 Tap the [SELECT MODE] menu item to enable the menu function, and tap the desired
item in the OTHER DATA area of the SD CARD display section. The data name will be
highlighted, indicating the designation of that type of data for transfer.
For erasing the data setting
 Tap the [SELECT MODE] menu item to enable the menu function, and tap the data
setting to be erased. The highlighting will then be cleared.
 Follow the procedure below to erase all the data settings at once:
(a) Tap the [ALL ERASE] menu item.
 A message box appears.
(b) Tap the [OK] button.
 The current data settings will be all cleared.

10-13
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

(4) Tap the [START] menu item.

A warning window is displayed (by the function for preventing erroneous parameter loading)
when a loading command which includes loading of one of the following types of
parameters is to be executed, and the data transfer does not start until the [OK] button in
the window is tapped.
 User parameter (USER PARAM.)
 Machine parameter (M. PARAM.)
 Inertia parameter (INERTIA PARA)
 CC-LINK parameter
 Spindle attachment parameter (SPDL.ATTACH)

 See Subsection 10-1-12 “Function for preventing erroneous parameter

loading” for more information.

 Data transfer will begin.

 The display color will change for the data currently being transferred.
 Upon completion of transfer of each data item, the highlighting of tha data name will be
cleared, and the same data name will be displayed in the NC display section.
 Upon completion of data transfer, the display of the [START] menu item will return to the
deselect state.
Note 1: You can select using bit 6 of I/O parameter IOP5 whether loading of a program whose
work number is the same as that of a program pre-registered within the NC unit, is to
be enabled or not (1 or 0).

 For further details of parameters, see the separate Parameter List/Alarm

List/M-Code List.

To enable such a program for which the loading operation is not available by parameter
setting, to be loaded, the work number of the related pre-registered program must be
changed prior to loading.
Note 2: A listing window (named WORK No. SELECT) for the work numbers of all programs
registered previously in the NC unit can be displayed by tapping the [PROGRAM FILE]
menu item. While the window remains on the display, the [PROGRAM FILE] menu
item is displayed in the select state with [SELECT RANGE] additionally presented for
specifying programs in a designated range at one time.
Tapping the [PROGRAM FILE] menu item once again returns its display to the
deselect state and closes the window.
Note 3: Data transfer will be continued even if the existing display is changed over to another
display during the data transfer process. However, the data being transferred cannot
be overwritten.
This also applies to a transfer mode other than LOAD.
Note 4: Data transfer will halt if the [START] menu item is tapped during the data transfer
process. Data transfer cannot be restarted from the position in which the transfer
process has halted.
This also applies to a transfer mode other than LOAD.
Note 5: It is not advisable to load tool data prepared for another machine that is different in the
number of available tools.

10-14
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
4. Saving
(1) Tap the [SD] menu item.
(2) Tap the [NC  SD SAVE] menu item.
 SAVE will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Select the data to be transferred.
 The data input procedure is the same as that of LOAD. Input the data in the NC display
section. (See procedural step (3) of “3. Loading”.)
(4) Tap the [START] menu item.
 Data transfer will begin.
 The display color will change for the data currently being transferred.
 Upon completion of transfer of each data item, the highlighting of tha data name will be
cleared, and the same data name will be displayed in the SD display section.
 Upon completion of data transfer, the display of the [START] menu item will return to the
deselect state.

5. Directorying

A. Displaying in the select state all the programs and other types of data stored in the
directory concerned
(1) Tap the [SD] menu item.
(2) Tap the [DATA SELECT ALL] menu item.
 DIR will be displayed on the I/O data item, and a message box will appear.
(3) Tap the [OK] button.
 The various data stored on the SD card will be displayed in the SD display section.
 If programs are stored on the SD card, the corresponding work numbers will be
displayed in the PROGRAM area.
 If non-program data are stored on the SD card, the corresponding item will be
highlighted in the OTHER DATA area.

B. Displaying in the deselect state all the programs and other types of data stored in the
directory concerned
(1) Tap the [SD] menu item.
(2) Tap the [DATA DISPLAY] menu item.
 All the programs and other types of data stored in the directory concerned are displayed
in black characters (indicating the deselect state).
 Grayed out items in the OTHER DATA area denote that no corresponding data are
stored in the directory concerned.

10-1-5 DATA I/O operations (CMT)

The following data input/output operations can be executed using a cassette tape or a microdisk.
1. Loading
The program data or other types of data prestored on a cassette tape (CMT) or a microdisk
are registered into the NC unit.
2. Directorying
The data stored on a cassette tape or a microdisk are displayed.

10-15
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

The operating procedure of each operation listed above is described below.

The following description assumes that a cassette tape deck or a MAZAK microdisk unit has
already been connected to the NC unit and that cassette tape or microdisk setting is also
completed.
Note : The CMT data I/O function is available when parameter F163 bit 7 is set to “1.”

1. Loading
(1) Tap the [CMT] menu item.
(2) Tap the [LOAD NC  CMT] menu item.
 LOAD will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Select the data to be transferred.
For program data transfer
 Tap the PROGRAM area of the CMT display section and enter the work number of the
program to be transferred. The entered work number will be highlighted.
 Up to 960 programs can be selected.
For erasing the data setting
 Tap the [SELECT MODE] menu item to enable the menu function, and tap the data
setting to be erased. The highlighting will then be cleared.
 Follow the procedure below to erase all the data settings at once:
(a) Tap the [ALL ERASE] menu item.
 A message box appears.
(b) Tap the [OK] button.
 The current data settings will be all cleared.
(4) Tap the [START] menu item.
A warning window is displayed (by the function for preventing erroneous parameter loading)
when a loading command which includes loading of one of the following types of
parameters is to be executed, and the data transfer does not start until the [OK] button in
the window is tapped.
 User parameter (USER PARAM.)
 Machine parameter (M. PARAM.)
 Inertia parameter (INERTIA PARA)
 CC-LINK parameter
 Spindle attachment parameter (SPDL.ATTACH)

 See Subsection 10-1-12 “Function for preventing erroneous parameter

loading” for more information.

 Data transfer will begin.

 The display color will change for the data currently being transferred.
 Upon completion of transfer of each data item, the highlighting of tha data name will be
cleared, and the same data name will be displayed in the NC display section.
 Upon completion of data transfer, the display of the [START] menu item will return to the
deselect state.

10-16
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
Note 1: You can select using a parameter whether loading of a program whose work number is
the same as that of a program pre-registered within the NC unit, is to be enabled.

 For further details of parameters, see the separate Parameter List/Alarm

List/M-Code List.

To enable such a program for which the loading operation is not available by parameter
setting, to be loaded, the work number of the related pre-registered program must be
changed prior to loading.
Note 2: A listing window (named WORK No. SELECT) for the work numbers of all programs
registered previously in the NC unit can be displayed by tapping the [PROGRAM FILE]
menu item. While the window remains on the display, the [PROGRAM FILE] menu
item is displayed in the select state with [SELECT RANGE] additionally presented for
specifying programs in a designated range at one time.
Tapping the [PROGRAM FILE] menu item once again returns its display to the
deselect state and closes the window.
Note 3: It is possible to load a program that has been created using the MATRIX or MATRIX
NEXUS. In that case, the loaded program will be automatically converted into a
program used for the NC unit of the machine.
Note 4: Data transfer will be continued even if the existing display is changed over to another
display during the data transfer process. However, the data being transferred cannot
be overwritten.
Note 5: Data transfer will halt if the [START] menu item is tapped during the data transfer
process. Data transfer cannot be restarted from the position in which the transfer
process has halted.

2. Directorying
(1) Tap the [CMT] menu item.
(2) Tap the [DATA SELECT ALL] menu item.
 DIR will be displayed on the I/O data item.
(3) Tap the [OK] button.
 The various data stored on the external media will be displayed in the CMT display
section.
 If programs are stored on the external media, the corresponding work numbers will be
displayed in the PROGRAM area.
 If non-program data are stored on the external media, the corresponding item will be
highlighted in the OTHER DATA area.

10-17
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

10-1-6 DATA I/O operations (TAPE)

The following six data input/output operations can be executed using a paper tape or a
microdisk.
1. Loading
A program or non-program data of all those prestored on a paper tape or a microdisk is
registered in the NC unit.
2. All loading
All programs and non-program data prestored on a paper tape or a microdisk are registered
in the NC unit.
3. Punching
A program or non-program data of all those pre-registered within the NC unit is stored on a
paper tape or a microdisk.
4. All punching
All programs and non-program data pre-registered within the NC unit are stored on a paper
tape or a microdisk. By setting the corresponding parameter, only all programs can be
stored.
5. Comparing
A program or non-program data of all those prestored on a paper tape or a microdisk is
compared with a program or non-program data pre-registered within the NC unit.
6. All comparing
All programs and non-program data prestored on a paper tape or a microdisk are compared
with the programs and non-program data pre-registered within the NC unit.
Note 1: All the data other than EIA/ISO programs are I/O-operated in the three-digit G-code
format.

 For a detailed description of three-digit G-code format see Chapter 13 of the

PROGRAMMING MANUAL (MAZATROL Propgram).

Note 2: The TAPE data I/O function is available when parameter F163 bit 6 is set to “1.”
The operating procedure for the functions listed above is described below. The following
description assumes that a paper tape reader/punch or a MAZAK microdisk unit has already
been connected to the NC unit and that paper tape or microdisk setting is also completed.

1. Loading
(1) Tap the [TAPE] menu item.
(2) Tap the [LOAD NC  TAPE] menu item.
 LOAD will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Select the data to be transferred.
 Refer to procedural step (3) of “1. Loading” in Subsection 10-1-5.
(4) Tap the [START] menu item.
A warning window is displayed (by the function for preventing erroneous parameter loading)
when a loading command which includes loading of one of the following types of
parameters is to be executed, and the data transfer does not start until the [OK] button in
the window is tapped.
 User parameter (USER PARAM.)
 Machine parameter (M. PARAM.)
 Inertia parameter (INERTIA PARA)
 CC-LINK parameter
 Spindle attachment parameter (SPDL.ATTACH)

10-18
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
 See Subsection 10-1-12 “Function for preventing erroneous parameter
loading” for more information.

 Data transfer will begin.

 The display color will change for the data currently being transferred.
 Upon completion of transfer of each data item, the highlighting of tha data name will be
cleared, and the same data name will be displayed in the NC display section.
 Upon completion of data transfer, the display of the [START] menu item will return to the
deselect state.
Note 1: You can select using a parameter whether loading of a program whose work number is
the same as that of a program pre-registered within the NC unit, is to be enabled.

 For further details of parameters, see the separate Parameter List/Alarm

List/M-Code List.

To enable such a program for which the loading operation is not available by parameter
setting, to be loaded, the work number of the related pre-registered program must be
changed prior to loading.
Note 2: A listing window (named WORK No. SELECT) for the work numbers of all programs
registered previously in the NC unit can be displayed by tapping the [PROGRAM FILE]
menu item. While the window remains on the display, the [PROGRAM FILE] menu
item is displayed in the select state with [SELECT RANGE] additionally presented for
specifying programs in a designated range at one time.
Tapping the [PROGRAM FILE] menu item once again returns its display to the
deselect state and closes the window.
Note 3: Data transfer will be continued even if the existing display is changed over to another
display during the data transfer process. However, the data being transferred cannot
be overwritten.
Note 4: Data transfer will halt if the [START] menu item is tapped during the data transfer
process. Data transfer cannot be restarted from the position in which the transfer
process has halted.
Note 5: It is not advisable to load tool data prepared for another machine that is different in the
number of available tools.

2. All loading
(1) Tap the [TAPE] menu item.
(2) Tap the [ALL LOAD NC  TAPE] menu item.
 ALL LOAD will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Tap the [START] menu item.
 Data transfer will begin.
 Upon completion of data transfer, the display of the [START] menu item will return to the
deselect state.

10-19
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

3. Punching
(1) Tap the [TAPE] menu item.
(2) Tap the [PUNCH NC  TAPE] menu item.
 PUNCH will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Select the data to be transferred.
 See the description of procedural step (3) of “1. Loading”. Set data in the NC display
section.
(4) Tap the [START] menu item.
 The tape punch will start operating.
 The display color will change to purple for the data currently being punched out.
 Upon completion of transfer of each data item, the highlighting of tha data name will be
cleared, and the same data name will be displayed in the TAPE display section.
 After all the selected data have been punched on the paper tape, the display of the
[START] menu item will return to the deselect state.

4. All punching
(1) Tap the [TAPE] menu item.
(2) Tap the [ALL PUNCH NC  TAPE] menu item.
 ALL PNC will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Tap the [START] menu item.
 The tape punch will start operating.
 Bit 1 of parameter TAP26 = 0:
After all the pre-registered programs and other data have been punched on the paper
tape, the display of the [START] menu item will return to the deselect state.
 Bit 1 of parameter TAP26 = 1:
After all the pre-registered programs have been punched on the paper tape, the display
of the [START] menu item will return to the deselect state.

5. Comparing
(1) Tap the [TAPE] menu item.
(2) Tap the [COMPARE NC = TAPE] menu item.
 COMPARE will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Select the data to be compared.
 See the description of procedural step (3) of “1. Loading”.
(4) Tap the [START] menu item.
 Data comparison will begin.
 The name of the data currently being compared will be highlighted. Upon completion of
comparison of each data item, the highlighting of tha data name will be cleared, and the
same data name will be displayed in the NC display section.
 If the display of the [START] menu item has been returned to the deselect state without
any alarm being caused, it indicates that the contents of all the selected data agree with
those of the pre-registered data.
 If disparities exist in the data being compared, an alarm message 511 PROGRAM
DATA NOT SAME will be displayed and comparison will be aborted.
That is, the contents of the data being highlighted do not agree with the contents of the
pre-registered counterpart.

10-20
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
6. All comparing
(1) Tap the [TAPE] menu item.
(2) Tap the [ALLCOMP NC = TAPE] menu item.
 ALL CMP will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Tap the [START] menu item.
 Data comparison will begin.
 If the display of the [START] menu item has been returned to the deselect state without
any alarm being caused, it indicates that the contents of all data stored on the paper tape
agree with those of the data pre-registered within the NC unit.
 If disparities exist in the data being compared, an alarm message 511 PROGRAM
DATA NOT SAME will be displayed and comparison will be aborted.

7. Program-name tape input/output

When a program is transferred using tape I/O function, the name of the program which is set on
the PROGRAM FILE display can be assigned to that program during transfer operation.

A. Transfer conditions
1. Input or output of program names is possible only if the program-name tape I/O function has
been made valid using bit 2 of parameter TAP26.

 See the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List for parameter

details.

2. The following functions presented on the DATA I/O display (TAPE) can be used to transfer
program names to or from a tape.
 Loading
 All loading
 Punching
 All punching
 Comparing
 All comparing

B. Tape format
The name of the program transferred to or from a tape must be designated as follows:
Set the control-out code “(” after the number with O, then set the program name and the
control-in code “)”, in that order.
Example : O00001234 (COMMENT1234)

Program name

C. Notes
1. Only the codes listed in the ASCII codes list can be used as program names.
If an ASCII code other than 20, 2D, 2E, 30 to 39, or 41 to 5A is entered as the program
name, the ASCII code will be converted into a space code (&20) and registered in the
internal memory of the NC unit.
2. The maximum number of name characters which can be stored into the NC internal memory
during the program-name loading operation is 48. If, therefore, the name to be loaded
consists of 49 characters or more, all those excess characters will be ignored.

10-21
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

10-1-7 Saving CAM data

1. Saving CAM data

Use the [CAM DATA SAVE] menu function as follows to save various data to be used by the
Smooth CAM unit in simulating the machine operation conditions.
(1) Tap the [CAM DATA SAVE] menu item.
(2) Tap the [DIR. SELECT] menu item.
 The following window will appear.

(3) Select a directory displayed, or key in the name of the required directory, and tap the [OK]
button.
 Enter the name with a screen keyboard.
(4) Tap the [START] menu item.
 Data transfer will begin.
 Upon completion of data transfer, the display of the [START] menu item will return to the
deselect state.

2. Changing the folder

The folder used for saving CAM data can be changed by the following procedure:
(1) Tap , [Setup] and the [Cam Data Folder] option in that order.

(2) Set the required folder name in the dialogue box which appears upon step (1).

10-22
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
 Tap the [BROWSE] button to display the tree of the available folders, and select an item
if it is to be set as a folder name.

(3) Complete the setting by tapping the [OK] button.

 The name of the folder which stores the data files is determined as follows:
“Setting of FOLDER NAME SET” + “Setting of DIR. SELECT”
Example : If the settings made as indicated in items 2 and 1 are respectively “E:\” and
“ABC”, the name of the folder concerned runs as follows:
E:\ABC
 The folder can be assigned to any computer on the network.
 Once designated, the name of the folder is not cleared simply by the turning-off.
 The default setting is “E:\”.
 The folder name can consist of 64 characters.

10-1-8 Data input/output in text file format

The text file format can be applied for the following types of I/O operations: SD, HARD DISK, and
USB. Enable the [TEXT FORMAT] menu function to save (or output) the NC data in text file
format.
 EIA/ISO programs are always outputted in text file format (even with the [TEXT FORMAT]
menu function disabled).

 The text file format is described in detail for each data type in Chapter 13,
THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT, of the PROGRAMMING MANUAL (MAZATROL
Program).

 Loading and directorying operations are automatically performed appropriately to the format
of the file concerned, irrespective of the [TEXT FORMAT] menu function.

10-23
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

10-1-9 Saving programs additionally

It is possible to select between two types of saving operation for the SD, HARD DISK, and USB
I/O mode: additional saving (of the programs and other types of data in the specified directory)
and overwriting saving (by deleting data in the specified directory beforehand).
Follow the procedure below to make the desired selection.
(1) Tap and [Setup] to display the [Append Mode] option.
 Additional saving and overwriting saving modes are currently selected respectively when
the [Append Mode] item is provided with, and cleared of, a check mark.

 Tap the [Append Mode] option (displayed by tapping and [Setup]) to assign or
clear a check mark.
* Each tap alternates the assignment and clearance of the check mark.

10-1-10 Saving tool catalog

Follow the procedure below to specify whether or not to additionally save the tool catalog by the
execution of the [CAM DATA SAVE] menu function.
(1) Tap , [Setup] and the [CAM Data has tool catalog] option in that order.
 The tool catalog is additionally saved or not saved according as the [CAM Data has tool
catalog] item is provided with, or cleared of, a check mark.

10-24
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
10-1-11 MAZATROL program loading

1. Outline
In the DATA I/O display, the MAZATROL program that has been created using the MATRIX,
MATRIX NEXUS or SMART can be converted into an appropriate format and then loaded into
the memory of the NC unit. The input and output functions that can be used for the loading are as
listed in the table below.
: Loadable ×: Not loadable
MATRIX MATRIX NEXUS SMART
Binary Text Binary Text Binary Text
SD  ×  ×  ×
HDD  ×  ×  ×
USB  ×  ×  ×

After loading the MAZATROL program that has been created using another type of NC unit, it is
absolutely necessary to confirm the contents of the program and enter missing data and data
that has not been converted.
Note : An attempt to load a program saved in text file format will only lead to the alarm 549
DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND.
Remark : When a program created using an NC unit with an input sensitivity of micrometer
(0.001 mm) is loaded, some digital items may be displayed up to the fourth decimal
digit. Such items refer to values that have been set by the auto-setting function, and
can be used as they are since our NC unit has an input sensitivity of submicron
(0.0001 mm).

 Before starting the machining operation, be sure to confirm all contents of the program
obtained by conversion. Imperfections in the program could lead to machine damage and
operator injury.
CAUTION

2. Restrictions
 TPC data
The TPC (Tool Path Control) data are used for the prevention of interference on a particular
machine and must generally be re-set for another NC and another machine. Therefore, TPC
data are excluded in general from the conversion in question.
On condition that they are set complementally for a program created by the MATRIX or
MATRIX NEXUS for another machine of the same specifications, in particular, the TPC data
can also be converted adequately when bits 0 and 1 of parameter IOP2 are set accordingly.
For the interference prevention to be achieved desirably, do not use the particular parameter
settings unless the machines concerned are of one and the same specifications.

 See the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List for more information.

 Programming scheme
Only programs of initial-point scheme can be converted appropriately (not those of workpiece
scheme).
 END unit data
The information on the ending position specified in the source END unit is excluded from the
conversion in question. Select [ARBITRAR POSITION] under RETURN in the END unit to
specify the desired coordinates for final positioning at the end of machining.

10-25
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

10-1-12 Function for preventing erroneous parameter loading

The function is provided to prevent an erroneous, unintended loading of the user, machine, and
other basic parameters from occurring on the DATA I/O display.
 The function is only valid when parameter IOP4 bit 2 is set to 0.
A warning window appears when a loading command which includes loading of one of the
following types of parameters is to be executed by tapping the [START] menu item.
 User parameter (USER PARAM.)
 Machine parameter (M. PARAM.)
 Inertia parameter (INERTIA PARA)
 CC-LINK parameter
 Spindle attachment parameter (SPDL.ATTACH)

Remark : Loading operation is suspended as long as the warning window remains on the
screen.

Button Function
Used to start loading the specified types of data by answering the question in the affirma-
[OK]
tive.
Used to annul the command of loading (in its entirety) by answering the question in the
[CANCEL] negative.
Note : Loading does not occur for all the other types of data, either.

Note 1: The warning window will be closed and the loading command annulled by the following
operations:
 Tapping the display selector button or menu selector button, or
 Tapping the close button in the upper right corner of the window.
Note 2: The function does not work for the ALL LOAD function for TAPE (RS232C).

10-26
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
10-1-13 Conversion of a program with the use of A-axis tilting table (for machines with B-
axis tilting table)

1. Outline
A machining program which is created using the SmoothX (in MAZATROL format) for running on
a machine with A-axis tilting table can be converted, and loaded into the memory of the NC unit,
for the execution on a machine with B-axis tilting table.
Note : A machining program prepared by the conversion function should be complemented
manually by editing the items concerned as well as changing data on the workpiece
zero point, and then checked for appropriateness using the [DRY RUN] menu function.
In one and the same position on the C-axis (C = 0), the orientation of the rotary table (and the
T-slots on it) with the function of tilting on the B-axis is different by 90° as compared to a table
with the function of tilting on the A-axis. Set up the workpiece on a machine with B-axis tilting
table, therefore, in an orientation rotated by 90° in counterclockwise direction, in order that it may
be mounted in the same orientation, with respect to the direction of the table and T-slots, as on a
machine with A-axis tilting table.

<Top view of rotary table with the function of <Top view of rotary table with the function of
tilting on the A-axis> tilting on the B-axis>
B

Y
Y

Work-
piece X
X
Work-
piece C
C

D740S30526

10-27
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

2. Detailed description
Programs are converted as follows.
Coordinates of the starting and the ending point of each shape elements (FIG) in a machining
unit are converted as required. As for APRCH-X and -Y items determined by the [AUTO SET]
menu function (on tool sequence lines), they will be reset to the original state (?) to be deter-
mined anew under the new conditions.
As for a manual program mode unit (MANL PRO), commands of movement on the linear and
rotational axes under DATA 1 to DATA 6 are converted as required.
Original After conversion
UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM- No. UNo. UNIT TOOL NOM- No.
 MANL PRO     MANL PRO   
SNo. G1 G2 DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 DATA 4 DATA 5 DATA 6 S M/B SNo. G1 G2 DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 DATA 4 DATA 5 DATA 6 S M/B
1 90 00 A-90. C180.       1 90 00 B-90. C180.      
UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH FIN-Z START END UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH FIN-Z START END
 LINE CTR  LINE CTR
SNo. TOOL NOM- No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD ... SNo. TOOL NOM- No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD ...
R1 END MILL       R1 END MILL   ? ?  
F2 END MILL       F2 END MILL   ? ?  
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR 100. 20. 200. 120. 1 SQR -20. 100. -120. 200.
2 CIR 150. 70. 15.      2 CIR -70. 150. 15.     

Note 1: The basic coordinates system unit (WPC) and auxiliary coordinates system unit (OFF-
SET) as well as TPC data are excluded from the conversion. The data items cleared by
the conversion should be specified anew.
Note 2: Units for measurement are all excluded from the conversion (deleted in their entirety).
Note 3: As for an index unit (INDEX), indexing angles are surely converted into the corre-
sponding items (ANGLE C and ANGLE B), while linear axis positions for indexing
operation (TURN POS X, Y and Z) are all reset to zero (0).
Original After conversion
UNIT ADD. WPC X Y th Z C A UNIT ADD. WPC X Y th Z C B
WPC-        WPC- 

UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(th) W(Z) UNIT U(X) V(Y) D(th) W(Z)
OFFSET     OFFSET

UNIT TURN POS X TURN POS Y TURN POS Z ANGLE C ANGLE A UNIT TURN POS X TURN POS Y TURN POS Z ANGLE C ANGLE B
INDEX      INDEX 0 0 0  

3. Restrictions

A. Inconvertible programs
The following programs cannot be converted at all.
 MAZATROL programs created using an NC unit other than MATRIX, MATRIX NEXUS,
MATRIX 2 and MATRIX NEXUS 2.
Related alarm: 521 CANNOT LOAD (WRONG PROG TYPE)
 MAZATROL programs created for turning machines or compound machine tools.
Related alarm: 505 CANNOT LOAD (MISMATCH)
 EIA/ISO programs

10-28
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
B. Programs containing inconvertible blocks
Blocks that contain one of the command codes listed below are excluded from the conversion.
Each command code concerned in a manual program mode unit (MANL PRO) of a MAZATROL
program is expressed as G, and an alarm will be caused.
Command codes that cause an alarm
Contents Remedy
Selection of machine coordinate system: Since the command depends upon the data proper to each
G53 machine, review, and correct as required, the program as
well as the relevant data as appropriate for the particular
Pre-move stroke check:
program and the machine.
G22 / G23
Programmed data setting: Since the data concerning tool compensation, workpiece
G10 / G11 origin, and parameters are proper to each machine, review,
and correct as required, the arguments.
Tool radius compensation for five-axis machining: Review, and correct as required, the program as appropriate
G41.2 G41.4 G41.5 (to the left) / for the particular program.
G42.2 G42.4 G42.5 (to the right)
Tool length offset in tool-axis direction:
G43.1
Tool tip point control:
G43.4 / G43.5
Tool-axis direction control:
G53.1
Inclined-plane machining:
G68.2 G68.3 G68.4
3D coordinate conversion:
G68

4. Operating procedure
(1) Select the directory on the DATA I/O display.

 Refer to the description under “1. Selecting the directory” in Subsection

10-1-2, 10-1-3 or 10-1-4, according as the program concerned is stored on
the hard disk, a USB memory stick or an SD card.

(2) Tap the [NC  HD LOAD], [NC  USB LOAD] or [NC  SD LOAD] menu item to display
LOAD as I/O mode.
(3) Select the program to be loaded using the conversion function.

 Refer to the description of procedural step (3) under “3. Loading” in Sub-
section 10-1-2, 10-1-3 or 10-1-4, according as the program concerned is
stored on the hard disk, a USB memory stick or an SD card.

(4) Tap the [TILT. TBL A  B CONVERT] menu item to enable the menu function, and then
tap the [START] menu item.
 Program conversion will begin.
Note 1: Without the [TILT. TBL A  B CONVERT] menu function being enabled, tapping
the [START] menu item only loads the selected program without conversion.
Note 2: Once the data transfer is started, the [TILT. TBL A  B CONVERT] menu
function cannot be supplementarily selected or deselected any more.
Note 3: Data transfer will be continued even if the existing display is changed over to
another display during the data transfer process. However, the data being trans-
ferred cannot be overwritten.

10-29
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

Note 4: Data transfer will halt if the [START] menu item is tapped during the data transfer
process. Data transfer cannot be restarted from the position in which the transfer
process has halted.
 The display color will change for the data currently being transferred.
 Upon completion of transfer of the selected data item, the highlighting of tha data name
will be cleared, and the same data name will be displayed in the NC display section.
 Upon completion of data transfer, the display of the [TILT. TBL A  B CONVERT] and
[START] menu items will return to the deselect state.
Remark : The program created by the conversion function can be automatically marked out,
and saved under another name, by the addition of “_CNV” to the original work number
when bit 1 of parameter IOP6 is set to one (1).

10-30
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
10-2 Program Transfer from the Host PC to the NC

10-2-1 Outline
This section explains how to transfer machining programs, under an Ethernet-based network
environment, from the host PC to the local disk of the NC unit.
The procedure for transferring programs is outlined below.
1. Make valid the file-sharing function of the NC unit.
2. Copy program files from the host PC into the HD-operating program storage folder of the
NC unit.

10-2-2 Detailed description

1. Modifying the HD-operating program storage folder into a sharable folder

The HD-operating program storage folder within the local disk of the NC unit can be made
readable and writable from another Windows personal computer present on the network by
modifying the attributes of that folder. This task is called folder sharing, and the corresponding
folder is referred to as a sharable folder.
(1) Start the Windows Explorer.
(2) Select the HD-operating program storage folder by tapping “MC_Direct Mode Programs”.

(3) Tap the “Share” tab in the resulting window, and then select “Specific people…” from the
unfolded menu.

10-31
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

(4) Tap the down arrow button  next to the text box, select “Everyone” from the menu, and
then tap the [Add] button.

(5) To set the “Permission Level” for “Everyone”, tap the down arrow button  next to “Read”,
and select “Read/Write” from the menu.

Remark : Selection of “Read/Write” is required to allow the host PC to read and write the
files stored in the NC unit.
(6) Tap the [Share] button, and then close the resulting window by tapping the [Done] button to
complete the sharing process for the folder.

10-32
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
 The completion of the sharing process is indicated by “Shared” as “State”.

10-33
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

2. Copying program files from the host PC into the HD-operating program storage folder
The Windows Explorer allows program files within the host PC to be copied into the HD-
operating program storage folder of the NC unit.
This section introduces the procedure for accessing from a Windows8-containing host PC the
NC unit’s HD-operating program storage folder that was modified into a sharable folder as
described in Section 1 above and then copying an existing program file from any folder within the
host PC.
(1) Activate the Windows Explorer of the host PC to display the sharable HD-operating program
storage folder of the NC unit located on the network. The share name mentioned in Section
1 above will be displayed.

(2) Select “My Computer” or the Windows Explorer and display the contents of the desired
folder within the HD of the host PC. (The example below shows the results of processing
from the selection of “My Computer” to the display of the contents of “Programs” folder.)

10-34
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
(3) Copy the desired program from the displayed folder into the HD-operating program storage
folder.

Note 1: If the host PC cannot access the HD-operating program storage folder in the NC unit,
check and rename the Workgroup name so that there is no difference in it between the
host PC and the NC.
Note 2: The copying in Step (3) above will come to a halt in case the folder of destination
contains a program file having the same name as that of the selected file. The system
will then display a window to ask whether the existing file is to be overridden with the
selected one.
Note 3: Before copying a large-size program file, make sure that the local disk of the NC unit
has a sufficient available area. Always keep the largest possible area free by deleting
unnecessary programs from the HD-operating program storage folder on the PRO-
GRAM FILE display.

 Refer to Section 7-4, PROGRAM FILE Display, for the deleting procedure.
 Use the Help function of the Windows system to check the total residual
capacity of the local disk of the NC unit.

10-35
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

10-3 DATA I/O PARAMETER Display

This display is used to set the parameters for transferring programs or other types of data between the NC
Function
unit and the hard disk or between the NC unit and an external unit.

10-3-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[1] [2]

D747S30089E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] Transference setting — Setting for transference
[2] I/O parameter — Various parameters

 For further details, see the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List.

10-36
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
10-4 MACHINE MODEL SAVE Menu Function

 Used to copy the graphic machine model files stored in the NC unit onto a USB or other memory
Function devices.
 Useful for checking the machine models on a CAD/CAM system.

10-4-1 Operating procedure

The machine models are stored in the NC unit in the STEP, Parasolid, IGES, or STL format.
(1) Tap the [MACHINE MODEL SAVE] menu item.
 The terms and conditions of use are displayed when the function is used for the first
time.
(2) Carefully read the terms and conditions of use, and tap the [OK] button to agree with them.
(3) Tap the [DIR. SELECT] menu item.
 The following window appears on the screen.

(4) Select a directory displayed, or key in the name of the required directory, and tap the [OK]
button.
 Enter the name with a screen keyboard.
(5) Tap the [START] menu item.
 Data transfer begins.
 Upon completion of data transfer, the display of the [START] menu item will return to the
deselect state.

10-37
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

10-4-2 Changing the folder for data storage

The folder used for saving Machine Model data can be changed by the following procedure:
(1) Tap , [Setup] and the [Machine Model Folder] option in that order.

(2) Set the required folder name in the dialogue box which appears upon step (1).

 Tap the [BROWSE] button to display the tree of the available folders, and select an item
if it is to be set as a folder name.

(3) Complete the setting by tapping the [OK] button.

10-38
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 10
 The name of the folder which stores the data files is determined as follows:
“Setting of FOLDER NAME SET” + “Setting of DIR. SELECT” (set in Step (4) in 10-4-1)
Example : If the above-mentioned settings are “E:\” and “ABC”, the name of the folder
concerned runs as follows:
E:\ABC
 The folder can be assigned to any computer on the network.
 Once designated, the name of the folder is not cleared simply by the turning-off.
 The default setting is “E:\”.
 The folder name can consist of 64 characters.

10-39
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE

10-40 E
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS
The NC unit provides the following diagnostic displays and windows:

ALARM
DIAGNOSIS
(USER) ALARM HISTORY

PLC SIGNAL

DATA ERASE

MAINTENANCE
ACCUMULATED TIME

PLC

Display

VERSION
RUNNING
Window
CONTROL
DIAGNOSIS MONITOR

OPTION

DIAGNOSIS SERVO MONITOR (Note)

(MAKER)
SPINDLE MONITOR (Note)

HARDWARE MONITOR (Note)

LADDER MONITOR (Note)

D747S30090

Note : Description of these displays is omitted because they are reserved for MAZAK
servicemen.

11-1
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

11-1 DIAGNOSIS (USER)

11-1-1 ALARM display

Function Displaying the number, details, etc. of alarms currently occuring

 Even if more than one alarm occurred, only one of the alarm messages will appear on other displays.
Selection of this display, however, gives you further detailed information about all alarms whose causes
Remarks have not been removed.
 Refer to the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List for further details of alarms and their re-
setting methods.

1. Data display

A. Display mode with abbreviated work numbers (names)

[7]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

D747S30091E

11-2
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
B. Display mode with full work numbers (names)

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

D747S30092E

C. Display mode with the Help function being activated

[1] [2] [3]

D747S30093E

11-3
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] No. — Alarm number
[2] ALARM MESSAGE — Alarm contents
Section where the alarm occurred
(a, b, c)

[3] — — a: Work number

b: Unit number
c: Sequence number
Note : The data may not be displayed for certain types of alarms.
[4] DATE M.D Date when the alarm occurred
[5] TIME H:M Time when the alarm occurred
[6] TYPE — Source of the occurrence of the alarm
[7] Help button — Used to activate the Help function

Note : Use the button to select the desired display mode.

 Tap , [View] and the [Work Number Only Display] option in that order to
assign or clear a check mark.
 Without a check mark being assigned to [Work Number Only Display], the size of
indication of work No. in the column [3] is limited to 9 characters (display mode A).
 With a check mark assigned to [Work Number Only Display], the indication of work
No. in the column [3] is given in up to 32 characters without information of TYPE [6]
(display mode B).

11-4
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
3. DATA ERASE window
This window is used to erase the entire data of, or to initialize, the particular display.
(1) Tap the [DATA ERASE] menu item.
 The DATA ERASE window will appear.

(2) Select the display(s) to be initialized.

 Tap the name of the display to be initialized.
 The data will be selected and the selected data name will be highlighted in light blue.
 To cancel the selection, tap the same item again.
 The highlighting and selection of the display name will be cleared.
(3) Move the cursor to the COMPLETION box, input “–9999” and tap the key.
 The selected display(s) will be initialized. After the initialization has been completed, the
DATA ERASE window will disappear.

11-5
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

4. ACCUMULATED TIME window

A. Setting various cumulative time data

The four types of cumulative time data listed below can be set on the DIAGNOSIS display.

No. Item Data description

1 POWER ON The cumulative time for which the power has been turned on.
2 AUTO OPE. The cumulative time of automatic operation (from the start to the end).

3 AUTO CUT. The cumulative time of real automatic operation (with the button lighting).
The feed-hold period and the stopping period in the single-block operation are excluded.
The cumulative time for which the commands of linear and circular interpolation (G1, G2,
4 TOTAL CUT.
and G3) have been excecuted.

(1) Tap the [ACCUMU. TIME] menu item.

 The ACCUMULATED TIME window will appear.

(2) Tap the line of the desired item.

Example : If the AUTO CUT. item is to be set

(3) Enter the time with a screen keyboard.

Example : To set 11: 05’ 38’’, tap the keys in the following order:
1 1  5  3 8

(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) above for all other items for which cumulative time data is to be
set.
(5) Tap the [ACCUMU. TIME] menu item.
 The ACCUMULATED TIME window will then disappear.

11-6
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
5. Exclusion of certain alarms from display
Follow the procedure below to specify the alarms which are to be excluded from display in the
alarm display area of the screen.
(1) Tap , [Setup] and the [Exclude Alarm for display] option in that order.
 The EXCLUDE ALARM FOR DISPLAY window will then be opened.

(2) Enter the number of the alarm to be excluded from display in the alarm display area.
 The settings in this window work immediately. Alarms of the specified numbers will be “hidden”
for the alarm display area, indeed, but shown on the displays ALARM and ALARM
HISTORY.
 Alarms that are caused in relation to SYSTEM, SPINDLE and SERVO (Alarm Nos. 1 to 99
and 1000 to 1099) cannot be excluded from display. The entry of one of the numbers con-
cerned, or zero (0), will cause an alarm (402 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT).
The entry of a negative number will cause another alarm (401 ILLEGAL FORMAT).
 The function in question only prevents the specified alarms from being displayed in the alarm
display area, and does not affect, or change, at all the alarming function with its properties (as
to resulting machne stop state, recovering procedure, etc.).

 The function to exclude certain alarms from saving on the ALARM HISTORY
display is described under “6. Exclusion of certain alarms from saving” in
Subsection 11-1-2.

11-7
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

11-1-2 ALARM HISTORY display

Displaying the details, the places of occurrence, etc. of all alarms that have occurred up to now, in order of
Function
the latest alarm first.

1. Data display

A. Display mode with abbreviated work numbers (names)

[8]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

[7]
D747S30094E

11-8
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
B. Display mode with full work numbers (names)

[8]

[1] [2] [3]

[7]
D747S30095E

C. Display mode with the Help function being activated

[8]

[1] [2] [3]

[7]
D747S30096E

11-9
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] No. — Alarm number
[2] ALARM MESSAGE — Contents of alarm
Section where the alarm occured
(a, b, c)
a: Work number
[3] —
b: Unit number
c: Sequence number
Note : May not be displayed for the particular alarm.
[4] DATE M.D Date when the alarm occurred
[5] TIME H:M Time when the alarm occurred
[6] TYPE — Source of occurrence of the alarm
Number of the page currently displayed and the total number of pages
a/b
[7] Page —
a: Number of the page currently displayed
b: Total number of pages
[8] Help button — Used to activate the Help function

Note 1: Use the button to select the desired display mode.

 Tap , [View] and the [Work Number Only Display] option in that order to
assign or clear a check mark.
 Without a check mark being assigned to [Work Number Only Display], the size of
indication of work No. in the column [3] is limited to 8 characters (display mode A).
 With a check mark assigned to [Work Number Only Display], the indication of work
No. in the column [3] is given in up to 32 characters without information of DATE [4],
TIME [5] and TYPE [6] (display mode B).
Note 2: Alarms related to simulation on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display are separately
saved on that display (not displayed therefore on the ALARM HISTORY display).

3. Output of an alarm history text file

Up to 10000 alarms that have occurred in the past are automatically saved on the hard disk of
the NC unit. A maximum of 72 past alarms are saved on the DIAGNOSIS (USER) - ALARM
HISTORY display, and the operator can use saved alarm information for machine maintenance
purposes when wishing to check the alarms that have happened more retroactively to the past.
Text file name: “Alarm.txt”
Text file storage folder: “C:\ymw\M8Y\data\MC_sdg\Alarm”

[Sample alarm history text file]

405 PROGRAM No. NOT FOUND 8. 2 18. 7 OPERATE FFFFFF FF0000 1
583 PROGRAM DATA TYPE INCORRECT ( 4, , ) 8. 2 18.14 TRANSFER FFFFFF FF0000 0
585 CABLE MIS-CONNECTED ( 2, -10, ) 8. 2 18.16 TRANSFER FFFFFF FF0000 1
583 PROGRAM DATA TYPE INCORRECT ( 4, , ) 8. 2 18.18 TRANSFER FFFFFF FF0000 0
641 MISSING INPUT DATA ( 10, 0, 0) 8. 3 9.35 PROGRAM FFFFFF FF0000 0

 Output of the alarm history text file can be made valid/invalid by using the required parameter.
Parameter F83, bit 0: Alarm history text file output [‘0’: Valid, ‘1’: Invalid]
 The number of alarms that have been saved in the text file is counted during power-on. If the
number of alarms at this time is in excess of 10000, old alarms are automatically deleted in
order with the oldest alarm first so as to reduce the registration to a maximum of 10000
alarms. This automatic reduction in number of the saved alarms also occurs on the occasion
of “viewing the alarm history text file on the screen” described under 4 below.
 Saving in the text file occurs in the current language of NC display.

11-10
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
4. Viewing the alarm history text file on the screen
A menu function is provided for viewing on the NC screen the text file of alarm history mentioned
above under 3. Tap the [EXTENDED ALARM DISPLAY] menu item, and the contents of the
DIAGNOSIS (USER) - ALARM HISTORY display are replaced with those of the text file in
question as well as the denominator in the page display area (item [7] under 2) being updated
accordingly.
 The above menu item is only presented when F83, bit 0 = 0.
Parameter F83, bit 0: Alarm history text file output [‘0’: Valid, ‘1’: Invalid]
The language of the displayed text-file data may differ from the current language of NC display.
Moreover, some specific characters may be garbled (may not be displayed as appropriate) due
to significant difference between the languages of the text file and the NC display.

5. Searching alarms by numbers and dates

Follow the procedure below to search the text file for particular alarms by numbers and dates.

A. Searching alarms by numbers

(1) Tap the [ALARM No. SEARCH] menu item.
 A screen keyboard will appear, along with the message ALARM No. SEARCH?, on the
screen.
(2) Enter the desired alarm number.
Example : To search for alarm No. 318, tap the keys 3 1 8 in that order.
The screen will then be scrolled to show the first page including an alarm with the
specified number. Tap again to continue searching for the same alarm
number. If no corresponding alarms can be found (any more), then the alarm
message 407 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND will be displayed.
(3) Tap the key as required.
 The specified alarm number will be cleared. Repeat Steps (2) and (3) to search for
another alarm number.
(4) Finally tap the [ALARM No. SEARCH] menu item again.
 The search mode will be terminated.

B. Searching alarms by dates

(1) Tap the [DATE SEARCH] menu item.
 A screen keyboard will appear, along with the message ALARM DATE SEARCH
(MM.DD)?, on the screen.
(2) Enter the desired date.
Example : To search for alarms occurred on March 18, tap the keys 3  1 8
in that order.
The screen will then be scrolled to show the first page including an alarm of the
date “March 18”. Tap again to continue searching for the same date. If no
corresponding alarms can be found (any more), then the alarm message 407
DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND will be displayed.
(3) Tap the key as required.
 The specified date will be cleared. Repeat Steps (2) and (3) to search for alarms of
another date.
(4) Finally tap the [DATE SEARCH] menu item again.
 The search mode will be terminated.

11-11
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

6. Exclusion of certain alarms from saving

Follow the procedure below to specify the alarms which are to be excluded from saving.
(1) Tap , [Setup] and the [Exclude Alarm] option in that order.
 The EXCLUDE ALARM window will then be opened.

(2) Enter the number of the alarm to be excluded from saving.

 The settings in this window work immediately. Alarms of the specified numbers are also
excluded from output into the text file.
 Alarms that are caused in relation to SYSTEM, SPINDLE and SERVO (Alarm Nos. 1 to 99
and 1000 to 1099) cannot be excluded from saving. The entry of one of the numbers
concerned, or zero (0), will cause an alarm (402 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT).
The entry of a negative number will cause another alarm (401 ILLEGAL FORMAT).

 The function to exclude certain alarms from display in the alarm display area
is described under “5. Exclusion of certain alarms from display” in Subsection
11-1-1 “ALARM display.”

11-12
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
11-1-3 PLC SIGNAL display

Function Displaying ON/OFF status of machine signals

1. Data display

A. First page (No. 1 to No. 36)

[1] [2] [3] [1] [2] [3]

[4]

D747S30097E

11-13
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

B. Second page (No. 37 to No. 72)

[1] [2] [3] [1] [2] [3]

[4]

D747S30098E

C. Third page (No. 73 to No. 89)

[1] [2] [3]

[4]

D747S30099E

11-14
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
D. Fourth page (No. 90 to No. 105)

[1] [2] [3]

[4]

D747S30100E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] Signal name — Singal name
ON/OFF status of signals
[2] 0/1 — 0: OFF
1: ON
[3] Conditions for the signal to be turned ON (with devices concerned)
Number of the page currently displayed and the total number of pages
a/b
[4] Page —
a: Number of the page currently displayed
b: Total number of pages

Note : In the displayed data under Condition [3] the symbols &, I, and ! refer to the logical
operators AND, OR and NOT, respectively.

11-15
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

11-2 MAINTENANCE

11-2-1 MAINTENANCE display

 Periodic check items, the last date of checking, and the time that has elapsed since the last date of
Function checking are displayed.
 Periodic check items can be registered.

1. Data display

[4]

[3] [5] [6]

[1]

[2]

[7]

D747S30230E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] No. — Check number
MAINTENANCE
[2] — Name of a periodic check item
CHECK DATA
Graphical representation of the rate of the current time to the target
[3] TIME (H) %
time
[4] Target time Hour Target time for the periodic check item
[5] Current time Hour Current time for the periodic check item
[6] PREVIOUS CHECK ’Y. M. D The last date of periodic check item
Number of the page currently displayed and the total number of pages

[7] Page — a/b

a: Number of the page currently displayed
b: Total number of pages

Remark : The machine will not stop even if the display of the time which has elapsed since
the last date of checking exceeds the target time.

11-16
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
3. Registering the data for regular check items

A. Presetting the target time or the current time

(1) Tap the data item where data is to be preset.
(2) Enter the time with the screen keyboard.
Example : Specify “96”.
Note : Entry of the current time updates the data of data item [6] (PREVIOUS CHECK).

4. [PICK UP] menu function for periodic check items

Tap the [PICK UP] menu item, and check items of the three shortest remaining periods of time to
their respective target times are highlighted on yellow background.
Tap the same menu item again to clear the highlighting.

11-17
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

11-2-2 Data display for long-term check items

Function Data display for long-term check items (1500 and 3000 hours check items)

1. Data display

[1] [4]

[2] [3] [2] [3]

D747S30231E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Title of long-term check items
[1] Title — 1500-HRS CHECK ITEMS on the first page, and
3000-HRS CHECK ITEMS on the second page.
[2] No. — Check number
[3] Check items — Name of the check item
Graphical representation of the rate of the current time to the target
[4] TIME (H) %
time

11-18
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
11-2-3 Calendar check items

Function Display of daily, weekly and monthly check items

1. Data display

[1]

[2] [3] [2] [3]

D747S30232E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Title of the check items.
DAY CHECK tab selected ............. DAY CHECK ITEM
[1] Title —
WEEK CHECK tab selected.......... WEEK CHECK ITEM
MONTH CHECK tab selected ....... MONTH CHECK ITEM
[2] No. — Check number
[3] Check items — Name of the check item

11-19
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

11-2-4 CHECK EXHAUSTION display

 The CHECK EXHAUSTION display manages the consumption of oils, greases, and other consumables,
in the units appropriate to the particular item, and prompts the user to conduct checks and replacements
Function at the appropriate timing.
 The CHECK EXHAUSTION display can be displayed in either a graphic or numeric pattern, according
to the selection from the menu concerned.

1. Data display

A. Displayed data with the [DISPLAY GRAPH] menu function activated

[1] [2] [4]

[3]

[5]

D747S30233E

11-20
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
B. Displayed data with the [DISPLAY NUMBER] menu function activated

[1] [2] [6] [7] [4] [8]

[5]

D747S30234E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] USE PART — Location at which the part is used.
[2] PART NAME — Part name of the consumable part.
Graphic display of the rate of the elapsed time with respect to the
[3] Graphic display % checking period.
Displayed in green if less than 100%, and in magenta if 100% or more.
[4] LAST MAINTE. ’Y.M.D Date of the previous maintenance for the part.
Number of the page currently displayed and the total number of pages

[5] Page — a/b

a: Number of the page currently displayed
b: Total number of pages
Time,
Count, Replacement period of the part.
[6] MAINTE CYCLE
Distance, The unit varies from part to part: time, count, distance, etc.
etc.
Time,
The elapsed time from the first use of the part, the usage count, the
Count,
[7] PASSED running distance, etc. are displayed.
Distance,
Units vary from part to part.
etc.
[8] LAST EXCHNG ’Y.M.D Date of the previous replacement of the part.

11-21
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

3. Setting the date items

A. Setting the LAST MAINTE. item

(1) Tap the LAST MAINTE. item [4] for the checked part.
(2) Tap the [CHECKED] menu item.
 The LAST MAINTE. item [4] is changed to the current date, and the elapsed time is also
reset to zero.

4. Part check or replacement prompt window

The window prompting the user to check or replace the part is displayed when a time for its
check or replacement comes around. The window in question is displayed repeatedly at
power-on until the check or the replacement has been conducted. The left-side area of the
window shows an image of the part concerned, while the corresponding message is displayed in
the right-side area.

5. [PICK UP] menu function for consumables

Tap the [PICK UP] menu item, and consumables of the three shortest remaining periods of time
to their respective target times for check or replacement are highlighted on yellow background.
Tap the same menu item again to clear the highlighting.

11-22
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
11-2-5 UNIT WORKLOG display

The operation logs of machine components (usage count, usage time, running distance, and other items)
Function
are displayed.

1. Data display

[1] [2]

D747S30235E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] MANAGE ITEM — Items of usage condition display
Time,
Count, The usage count, usage time, running distance, and other items of the
[2] USAGE CONDITION
Distance, part are displayed.
etc.

11-2-6 Display operations

The data item will be highlighted when the current time reaches the target time. After completion
of checking, move the cursor to No. and then tap the key. The display of the data item will
then return from the highlighted state to the normal one.

11-23
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

11-2-7 Entry of the check items to be displayed

The check items to be displayed cannot be entered directly on the MAINTENANCE display.
Follow the procedure below to add or delete the periodic, long-term and calendar check items to
be displayed.
(1) Save the factory-set data of display items beforehand into the file.
(2) Execute the [File Write] function to create a file under the specified directory.

 See the description under 2 below.

(3) Edit the text file as required.

 See the description under 1 below.

(4) Execute the [File Read] function to fetch the data onto the display.

 See the description under 2 below.

1. Registering the data of the check items

Using a commercially available editor, open the text file of the following format under the
specified directory (\nm64mdata\eng\maintenance.txt).

[urcom]; ......................... Header of periodic check items

; ........................................ Comment line
1,CHECK GUIDE WAY LUB-OIL

24,
[mei15]; ......................... Header of 1500-hrs check items
1,CHANGE HYDRAULIC UNIT OIL

32,
[mei30]; ......................... Header of 3000-hrs check items
1,CHECK MACHINE LEVEL

32,

Note 1: “eng” in the directory name corresponds with the language currently selected for the
display mode.
Note 2: The description can consist of up to 40 characters (a two-byte code is counted as two
characters). Excess items or characters will be ignored.

11-24
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
A. Data format of the periodic check items

[urcom] Periodic check items  Up to 24 items can be registered.

1,CHECK GUIDE WAY LUB-OIL
 Set the description after the serial number and comma.

24,

B. Data format of the long-term check items

[mei15] 1500-hrs check items  Up to 32 items can be registered for each category.
1,CHANGE HYDRAULIC UNIT OIL
 Set the description after the serial number and comma.

32,

[mei30] 3000-hrs check items

1,CHECK MACHINE LEVEL

32,

C. Data format of the calendar check items

[mei_D] Daily check items  Up to 32 items can be registered for each category.
1,CHANGE HYDRAULIC UNIT OIL
 Set the description after the serial number and comma.

32,

[mei_W] Weekly check items

1,CHANGE HYDR. UNIT FILTER

32,

[mei_M] Monthly check items

1,CHANGE HYDR. UNIT FILTER

32,

2. Read and Write of check items’ text file

All the check items presented on the MAINTENANCE display can be read in from, and written
into, the specified text file. Use a commercially available editor to prepare a text file containing
the desired check items to be read in and presented on the display.

A. File Read
Using a commercially available editor, prepare a text file (containing the desired check items)
and copy it into the specified directory.

11-25
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

Tap , [File] and the [File Read] option in that order to start data loading. The contents
thus read in will be displayed as shown below upon completion of loading.

D747S30236E

B. File Write
Tap , [File] and the [File Write] option in that order to save the display data.
A text file containing the current display data will be created under the specified directory.

11-26
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
11-2-8 INSUL. RESIST. display

 The insulation resistance of the motors of spindles, servo axes and auxiliary apparatuses can be mea-
sured in order to predict the expiry of their serviceable lives.
 If the insulation resistance of a motor should fall below the threshold, an alarm is displayed to predict the
expiry of its serviceable life.
Function
 Upon switching-on of the NC, the insulation resistance of each motor is automatically measured and the
first measuring result of the day is displayed graphically.
The measurement can also be conducted manually for all the spindles and axes and the results from the
latest ten times of measurement diachronically displayed.

1. Data display

A. Displayed data with the [DISPLAY AUTO MEASURE.] menu function activated

[1] [2] [3]

[5]

[4]

[7]
[8]

[6]

D747S30228E

11-27
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

B. Displayed data with the [DISPLAY MANUAL MEASURE.] menu function activated

[1] [2] [3]

[5]

[4]

[7]
[8]

[6]

D747S30229E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Name of the spindle whose drive motor is concerned.
 Marked with a yellow symbol when the insulation resistance measured
last should fall below the warning threshold 1.
Note : A yellow symbol indicates that the drive motor concerned is to
[1] SPINDLE — be replaced with a new one in no distant future.
 Marked with a red symbol when the insulation resistance measured
last should fall below the warning threshold 2.
Note : A red symbol indicates that the drive motor concerned is to be
replaced instantaneously with a new one.
Name of the servo axis whose drive motor is concerned.
[2] NC AXIS —
Note : See the description of [1] SPINDLE for details on warning.
Name of the auxiliary apparatus whose drive motor is concerned.
[3] PERIPHERAL AXIS —
Note : See the description of [1] SPINDLE for details on warning.
Graphical representation of the change in insulation resistance for the item
selected in the upper section under SPINDLE, NC AXIS or PERIPHERAL
AXIS. The initial contents of the screen upon selection of the display refer to
the first item under SPINDLE.
 The results from automatic or manual measurements are graphically rep-
resented according as the [DISPLAY AUTO MEASURE.] or [DISPLAY
MANUAL MEASURE.] menu function is activated.
[4] Graphic display —  Line graph or bar graph is used according as the [DISPLAY AUTO MEA-
SURE.] or [DISPLAY MANUAL MEASURE.] menu function is activated.
 As for automatic measurement, the insulation resistance of each motor is
automatically measured upon switching-on of the NC on condition that
parameter K260 bit 0 = 1.
Data for up to 4000 days can be displayed on the screen.
 As for manual measurement, the results from up to ten times of measure-
ment can be displayed on the screen.

11-28
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
No. Item Unit Data description
[5] Axis of ordinates M Insulation resistance of the motor.
Date on which the insulation resistance of the motor was measured.
 When the [DISPLAY AUTO MEASURE.] menu function is activated, date
is indicated at appropriate intervals, except for dates of the earliest and
[6] Axis of abscissae date
latest measurement.
 When the [DISPLAY MANUAL MEASURE.] menu function is activated,
date is indicated for all the latest ten measurements.
Indication of the warning threshold 1 as to insulation resistance of the motor.
Warning threshold 1
On condition that parameter K260 bit 1 = 1, alarm 1051 INSULATION RE-
[7] as to insulation resis- M
SISTANCE DECREASE is raised when the measured insulation resistance
tance
should fall below the warning threshold 1.
Indication of the warning threshold 2 as to insulation resistance of the motor.
Warning threshold 2
On condition that parameter K260 bit 2 = 1, alarm 1052 INSULATION RE-
[8] as to insulation resis- M
SISTANCE WARNING is raised when the measured insulation resistance
tance
should fall below the warning threshold 2.

3. Manual measurement
(1) Press the emergency stop button.
(2) Tap the [START MANUAL MEASURE.] menu item.
 A message box appears with START (PRESS EMERG. STOP BTN) in it.
(3) Tap the [OK] button.
 The measurement is started.
 This operation will only lead to alarm 1050 MEASURE. ERROR (NOT EMERG. STOP) if
the machine has not been brought in the emergency stop state.
Note : Saving each eleventh set of measuring results is made by deleting the oldest set of
data concerned.

4. Changing the type of graphic display

 Tap the [DISPLAY AUTO MEASURE.] menu item for the results from automatic measure-
ments to be represented in the graphic display area.
 Tap the [DISPLAY MANUAL MEASURE.] menu item for the results from manual mea-
surements to be represented in the graphic display area.

11-29
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

11-3 RUNNING CONTROL

11-3-1 RUNNING CONTROL display

Function Displaying the machine operational status.

The operational status during power-on time is displayed in distinction between the following four
divisions:
1. Running in automatic operation
Remarks
2. Stopping in automatic operation
3. Setting-up in automatic operation
4. Stopping due to an alarm

1. Data display

[1]

[2]

[3]

D747S30108

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Date and cumulative power-on time for the operational status display
a (b)
c
[1] Date/Time —
a : Date (Year. Month. Day)
b : Day of the week
c : Cumulative power-on time

11-30
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
No. Item Unit Data description
 The operational status is displayed as follows on a strip graph:
Division Color Description

AUTO blue The time for which the button was lighting.

The time for which the machine remained in

Graphic display of FEED HOLD green
[2] — feed-hold or single-block stop.
operational status The time for which the automatic operation was
ALARM red
disabled due to an alarm.
The time for which power was on under other
SET UP yellow
states.

 Blank (uncolored) areas refer to power-off time.

 Used to change the date of operational status.
[3] Date change button —
 Tapping the button changes the graphic display on a weekly basis.

Note : Information on the machine status is accumulated at intervals of 10 seconds on the

RUNNING CONTROL display. Changes in the machine status during 10 seconds,
therefore, may not be accumulated.

3. Display period setting

When the RUNNING CONTROL display is called up, past one week (last seven days) of
machine status data will be initially displayed. Two methods are available to display machine
status data older than past one week:

4. Date specification
When the date is specified, machine status data that was recorded one week (seven days)
before the specified date will be displayed.
(1) Tap the [CHANGE PERIOD] menu item.
 The corresponding menu function is enabled.
(2) Enter the date (year, month, and day).
Example : To specify August 10, 2005, tap keys in the following order:
2 0 0 5  8  1 0

 The display of the menu item is returned to the deselect state and machine status data
that was recorded one week (seven days) before the specified date is displayed.
In the above example, machine status data that was recorded from August 4, 2005, to
August 10, 2005, is displayed.
Note : A tap only on the without data entry allows display to be returned to that of
the information which has been stored during the past seven days from the current
date.

5. Change using the date change button

A tap on the date change button allows display to be changed on a weekly (seven days) basis.
 Tap the button to display machine status data older than the currently displayed
period.
 Tap the button to display machine status data later than the currently displayed period.

11-31
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

6. Display of detailed data

Executed work numbers, machined workpiece counts, detected alarms, and other information
can be confirmed in detail on the RUNNING CONTROL display.

A. Changing the display

(1) Tap the desired date.

(2) Tap either of the following menu items:
 Tap the [RUNNING COND.] menu item to display the work number of the program which
was executed on the specified date, the number of workpieces machined on that date,
and other information.
 Tap the [M. SPDL LOAD] menu item when changes in the load (%) and rotational speed
of the milling spindle on the specified date are to be displayed on a graph.
 Tap the [ALARM LIST] menu item to display a list of alarms which were detected on the
specified date.
Note 1: The types of spindle loads which can be displayed differ according to the particular
machine specifications.
Note 2: The data on the load (%) are displayed differently according to the selection or cancel-
lation of the [SP Load Short-time Rating] option (displayed by tapping and
[View] on the POSITION display) on the specified date.

11-32
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
11-3-2 Display for each program

Program numbers and machining results (numbers of finished workpieces) on the selected date can be
Function
displayed.

1. Data display

[1] [2]

[3] [4]

[5]

D747S30109

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Date and cumulative power-on time for the operational status display
a (b)
c
[1] Date/Time —
a : Date (Year. Month. Day)
b : Day of the week
c : Cumulative power-on time

 The operational status is displayed as follows on a strip graph:

Division Color Description

AUTO blue The time for which the button was lighting.

FEED The time for which the machine remained in

Graphic display of green
HOLD feed-hold or single-block stop.
[2] —
operational status The time for which the automatic operation was
ALARM red
disabled due to an alarm.
The time for which power was on under other
SET UP yellow
states.

 Blank (uncolored) areas refer to power-off time.

Work number of the machining program and machining result.
a b
c
[3] WORK No. —
a : Work number
b : Program type (MAZATROL or EIA/ISO)
c : Number of finished workpieces

11-33
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

No. Item Unit Data description

 The operational status is displayed as follows on a strip graph:
Division Color Description

AUTO blue The time for which the button was lighting.

Display of operational The time for which the machine remained in

FEED HOLD green
[4] status (for each — feed-hold or single-block stop.
program) The time for which the automatic operation was
ALARM red
disabled due to an alarm.
The time for which power was on under other
SET UP yellow
states.

 Blank (uncolored) areas refer to power-off time.

[5] Program switch button — Used to change pages for other machining programs.

Note : The Number of finished workpieces displayed here only refers to the value of “parts
count” automatically taken on the corresponding command in the particular program.

 Refer to the Programming Manual for the parts counting.

 Up to five machining programs can be displayed at the same time. Scrolling for the sixth
program onward can be done by tapping the program switch button.

11-34
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
11-3-3 Spindle load display

Function Changes in the load (%) and speed of the spindle on the specified can be displayed on a graph.

1. Data display

[1] [2]

[3]

[4]

D747S30110

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Date and cumulative power-on time for the operational status display
a (b)
c
[1] Date/Time —
a : Date (Year. Month. Day)
b : Day of the week
c : Cumulative power-on time

 The operational status is displayed as follows on a strip graph:

Division Color Description

AUTO blue The time for which the button was lighting.

The time for which the machine remained in

Graphic display of FEED HOLD green
[2] — feed-hold or single-block stop.
operational status The time for which the automatic operation was
ALARM red
disabled due to an alarm.
The time for which power was on under other
SET UP yellow
states.

 Blank (uncolored) areas refer to power-off time.

 Graphic display of change in spindle speed.
[3] rpm min–1  The change in spindle speed during power-on is displayed in a red
line.
 Graphic display of change in spindle load.
[4] Load %
 The changes in spindle load are displayed in green.

11-35
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

11-3-4 Alarm list display

Function A list of alarms which were detected on the specified date can be displayed.

1. Data display

[1] [2]

[3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

[8]

D747S30111

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Date and cumulative power-on time for the operational status display
a (b)
c
[1] Date/Time —
a : Date (Year. Month. Day)
b : Day of the week
c : Cumulative power-on time

 The operational status is displayed as follows on a strip graph:

Division Color Description

AUTO blue The time for which the button was lighting.

The time for which the machine remained in

Graphic display of FEED HOLD green
[2] — feed-hold or single-block stop.
operational status The time for which the automatic operation was
ALARM red
disabled due to an alarm.
The time for which power was on under other
SET UP yellow
states.

 Blank (uncolored) areas refer to power-off time.

[3] No. — Alarm number
[4] ALARM MESSAGE — Contents of alarm

11-36
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
No. Item Unit Data description
Section where the alarm occured
(a, b, c)
a: Work number
[5] —
b: Unit number
c: Sequence number
Note: May not be displayed for the particular alarm.
H:M – The time the alarm was detected, and the time the alarm was released
[6] OCCUR. TIME
H:M Detected time (H:M)-released time (H:M)
[7] TYPE — Source of occurrence of the alarm
Number of the page currently displayed and the total number of pages
a/b
[8] Page —
a: Number of the page currently displayed
b: Total number of pages

Note 1: Use the button to select the desired display mode.

 Tap , [View] and the [Work Number Only Display] option in that order to
assign or clear a check mark.
 Without a check mark being assigned to [Work Number Only Display], the size of
indication of work No. in the column [3] is limited to 9 characters (display mode A).
 With a check mark assigned to [Work Number Only Display], the indication of work
No. in the column [3] is given in up to 32 characters without information of TYPE [7]
(display mode B).
Note 2: Only the alarms that were displayed in the alarm display area at the left bottom of the
display when the machine was in an alarm stop status are stored on the RUNNING
CONTROL display.
Note 3: The total number of alarms which can be listed at a time on the display is 16. Other
alarms can be displayed by changing pages with and buttons.

11-37
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

11-3-5 Other functions

1. CSV file output

Up to seven days of operational status data listed on the display is saved in the CSV file format
on the local disk.
［Output format］
Transfer of output data to the display unit on a line-by-line basis occurs with comma delimiters for
each item name in the next table. However, for the first line, the particular item name is
transferred and for the second line onward, 8640 lines of data which was sampled every 10
seconds with 0:00 as its starting time is transferred.

No. Item Item name Output format

1 Peak value of spindle load, up- SPDL_FB1 Decimal number
dated in every ten seconds SPDL_FB2 Decimal number
SPDL_FB3 Decimal number
SPDL_FB4 Decimal number
2 Automatic operation bit-7 ATMD_ALARM 0/1 binary
mode
bit-6 ATMD_N/A 0/1 binary
bit-5 ATMD_N/A 0/1 binary
bit-4 ATMD_N/A 0/1 binary
bit-3 ATMD_MDI 0/1 binary
bit-2 ATMD_N/A 0/1 binary
bit-1 ATMD_TAPE 0/1 binary
bit-0 ATMD_MEM 0/1 binary
3 Manual operation bit-7 MNMD_N/A 0/1 binary
mode bit-6 MNMD_N/A 0/1 binary
bit-5 MNMD_N/A 0/1 binary
bit-4 MNMD_RET 0/1 binary
bit-3 MNMD_PTP 0/1 binary
bit-2 MNMD_STEP 0/1 binary
bit-1 MNMD_HAND 0/1 binary
bit-0 MNMD_JOG 0/1 binary
4 Status signal bit-F SGNL_CUT 0/1 binary
bit-E SGNL_DEN2 0/1 binary
bit-D SGNL_TAP 0/1 binary
bit-C SGNL_CXF 0/1 binary
bit-B SGNL_PROC 0/1 binary
bit-A SGNL_SMZ 0/1 binary
bit-9 SGNL_INP 0/1 binary
bit-8 SGNL_AFC 0/1 binary
bit-7 SGNL_SGLB 0/1 binary
bit-6 SGNL_CXN 0/1 binary
bit-5 SGNL_RSL 0/1 binary
bit-4 SGNL_SPL 0/1 binary
bit-3 SGNL_STL 0/1 binary
bit-2 SGNL_OP 0/1 binary
bit-1 SGNL_SA 0/1 binary
bit-0 SGNL_MA 0/1 binary
5 Spindle speed SPDL_ROT1 Decimal number
SPDL_ROT2 Decimal number
SPDL_ROT3 Decimal number
SPDL_ROT4 Decimal number
6 Number of machined workpieces PARTS_CNT Decimal number

11-38
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
No. Item Item name Output format
7 Spindle override SPDL_OVRD1 Decimal number
SPDL_OVRD2 Decimal number
SPDL_OVRD3 Decimal number
SPDL_OVRD4 Decimal number
8 Cutting feed override FEED_OVRD Decimal number
9 Rapid feed override RAPID_OVRD Decimal number
10 Work No. attribute WNO_ATRB Binary 0 (EIA)/1(MAZ)
11 Work No. WNO_NO Decimal number
12 Alarm attribute (for system) ALARM_ATRB Decimal number
13 Alarm No. ALARM_NO Decimal number
14 Alarm detail code 1 ALARM_CODE1 Character string of detail code 1
15 Alarm detail code 2 ALARM_CODE2 Character string of detail code 2
16 Alarm detail code 3 ALARM_CODE3 Character string of detail code 3

2. Erasure of all operational status data files

All operational status data is erased.

3. Creation of an operational status data folder

Operational status data is saved on the hard disk automatically. To change the saving
destination, a new saving folder can be created using this function.
Prior to shipping from the factory, the operational status data folder is preset as follows:
[C:\ymw\M8Y\data\RUNMNG\LOG]

4. Creation of CSV file output folder

To change the CSV file saving destination, a new saving folder can be created using this function.
Prior to shipping from the factory, the CSV file output folder is preset as follows:
[C:\ymw\M8Y\data\RUNMNG\CSV]
This folder is created upon execution of CSV file output.

11-39
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

11-4 DIAGNOSIS (MAKER)

11-4-1 VERSION display

Function Displaying versions of NC unit and servo axes

1. Data display

A. First page

[5] [6] [7]

[1] [2] [1] [2] [3] [4] [1] [2]

[8]

D747S30224E

11-40
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
B. Second page

[5] [6] [7]

[1] [2] [1] [2] [3] [4] [1] [2]

[8]

D747S30225E

C. Third page

[1] [9] [1] [9]

[8]

D747S30226E

11-41
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

D. Fourth page

[1] [10] [1] [10]

[8]

D747S30227E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Function name
MAIN-A/B/C Software SAFE PLC Safety ladder
LG- Language CFast CFast
[1] ITEM — LADDER- Ladder SPN- Spindle
LGP- Ladder language SRV- Servo axis
3D MODEL Machine model CV- Power supply

[2] VERSION — Version

[3] MOTOR — Type name of motor stroke end detector
[4] MACHINE — Type name of machine stroke end detector
[5] UNIT — Model name of NC unit
[6] SERIAL — Serial number of NC unit
[7] MODEL — Type number of NC unit
[8] Page buttons — Used to change pages of information on the servo axes.
[9] SAFETY VER 1/2 — Version of amplifier safety CPU
[10] SAFETY BOOT 1/2 — Version of amplifier safety boot

11-42
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
11-4-2 DIAGNOSIS MONITOR display

 Display of memory status in the NC unit

Function
 You can write data into the memory.

1. Data display

[19]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]

[17] [18]

[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]

D747S30113E

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] ADDRESS — Display of memory address
[2] 76543210 — Data display in binary notation for the address in [1]
[3] HEX — Data display in hexadecima notation for the address in [1]
[4] ADRSS — Display of I/O address
[5] FEDCBA9876543210 — Data display in binary notation for the address in [4]
[6] HEX — Data display in hexadecimal notation for the address in [4]
[7] SHORT — Data display in decimal notation for the address in [4] (2-byte data)
[8] LONG — Data display in decimal notation for the address in [4] (4-byte data)
[9] ADDRESS — Address when writing data into memory
[10] 76543210 — Data display in binary notation for the address in [9]
[11] HEX — Data display in hexadecima notation for the address in [9]
[12] ADRSS — Address when writing data into I/O address
[13] FEDCBA9876543210 — Data display in binary notation for the address in [12]
[14] HEX — Data display in hexadecimal notation for the address in [12]
[15] SHORT — Data display in decimal notation for the address in [12] (2-byte data)
[16] LONG — Data display in decimal notation for the address in [12] (4-byte data)
[17] ADRSS — Display of I/O address
[18] 9876543210 — Data display in binary notation for the address in [17]
[19] PROJECT No. — Display of project number

11-43
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

Remark : Please follow the instructions of the Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center
when writing data into the memory.

3. Display operations

A. Monitoring memory status

(1) Tap the ADDRESS column of the MEMORY MONITOR DISP section.
Example :

(2) Use a screen keyboard to set the address to be monitored.

Example : Set “89ABC.”

B. Monitoring I/O memory status

(1) Tap the ADRSS column of the I/O MONITOR DISP section.
Example :

(2) Use a screen keyboard to set the address to be monitored.

Example : Set “Y120.”

C. Writing data into the memory

(1) Tap the ADDRESS item of the MEMORY MONITOR WRITE section.
Example :

(2) Use a screen keyboard to set the address for which the data should be written.
Example : Set “A8000000.”

(3) Tap the HEX item of the MEMORY MONITOR WRITE section.
Example :

11-44
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
(4) Set the data to be written.
Example : Set “1A.”

Note : Please follow the instructions of the Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center
when writing data into the memory.

D. Writing data in hexadecimal notation into the I/O memory

(1) Tap the ADRSS item of the I/O MONITOR WRITE section.
Example :

(2) Use a screen keyboard to set the address for which the data should be written.
Example : Set “R388.”

(3) Tap the HEX item of the I/O MONITOR WRITE section.
Example :

(4) Set the data to be written.

Example : Set “F1.”

Note : Write data in accordance with the directions of the Mazak Technical Center or
Technology Center.

E. Writing data (within the range from –32768 to 32767) in decimal notation into the I/O
memory
(1) Carry out the same operations as those of steps (1) and (2) described under D above.
Example : Set “R388.”

(2) Tap the SHORT item of the I/O MONITOR WRITE section.
Example :

(3) Input the data to be written.

Example : Set “9000.”

11-45
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

Note : Write data in accordance with the directions of the Mazak Technical Center or
Technology Center.

F. Writing data (outside the range from –32768 to 32767) in decimal notation into the I/O
memory
(1) Carry out the same operations as those of steps (1) and (2) described under E above.
Example : Set “R388.”

(2) Tap the LONG item of the I/O MONITOR WRITE section.
Example :

(3) Input the data to be written.

Example : Set “9000000.”

Note : Write data in accordance with the directions of the Mazak Technical Center or
Technology Center.

4. Changing projects
(1) Tap the PROJECT No. item.

 The following menu will be displayed:

PROJECT PROJECT PROJECT PROJECT PROJECT PROJECT
No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5 No.6

(2) Tap the menu item for the desired project.

 The display contents will be changed for the selected project.

11-46
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
11-4-3 OPTION display

Function Displaying all optional functions for the NC unit

1. Data display

A. First and second page

[1] [1] [1]

[2]

D747S30114

11-47
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

B. Third page

[1] [1] [1]

[2]

D747S30185

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Display of whether each of optional functions for the NC unit is available
or not.
[1] Function name —
The items for which the option is valid are displayed in black and the
items for which the option is invalid are displayed in white.
Used to change pages.
The third page (Page 3/3) refers to the optional functions Y-1 to Y-80,
[2] Page buttons — which can be made valid by importing the license file concerned.
Remark : See the description given below under 3 “Importing the
license file” for more information.

Remark : All terms are displayed in English on this display.

3. Importing the license file

Follow the procedure below to import the license file for the optional functions.
The name of the license file consists of the serial number of the machine and the extension
“.mlf.”
Example : If the serial number of the machine is “123456”, the filename of the license file is
“123456.mlf.”
(1) Use the page buttons to display the third page.
 The following menu is displayed.
IMPORT
LICENSE
FILE

11-48
 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 11
(2) Tap the [IMPORT LICENSE FILE] menu item.
 The IMPORT LICENSE FILE window appears on the screen.

(3) Type the folder name.

 Alternatively, tap the [BROWSE] button to display the tree of the available folders, and
select an item if it is to be set as a folder name.

Example : If the license file is stored in the “E:\ABC” folder, enter “E:\ABC” in the IMPORT
LICENSE FILE window.
(4) Finally tap the [OK] button.
 The import of the license file starts.
 Upon completion of the import, the IMPORT LICENSE FILE window closes and the
Mazak optional functions are made valid.
 The imported license file is stored on the local disk.
C:\ymw\M8Y\data\MC_sdg\mazakOption
 Once designated, the name of the folder for the license file is not cleared simply by the
turning-off.
 If the license file failed to be imported, the alarm 2606 IMPORT LICENSE ERROR will
be raised.

11-49
11 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS

11-50 E
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

12-1 Outline

1. Summary
The displays in question are used to set various three-dimensional models and to simulate the
programmed machining operation for the prevention of interference. During manual setup
operations as well as in the flow of programmed operation, moreover, the axis movement will be
stopped if interference is foreseen. The machine operation can also be confirmed on the screen.

2. Operation flow of interference check

In addition to the ordinary tool data and setup data, material (workpiece), tool and fixture models
must be registered beforehand for the interference check to be conducted properly in the
simulation of machine operation according to a newly created machining program.
The procedure from data registration to automatic operation is laid down below.

Data registration

 Registering the tool model

Register the model of the tool to be used for machining.
Registration can be done by creating any desired shape as well as selecting from existing catalogue data.

<Reference>
12-6 Tool Model Setting
Display
12-7 TOOL MODEL MANA-
GEMENT Display
12-8 TOOL PART MODEL
Display

 Registering the material model

Register the model of the material workpiece to be machined.
Registration can be done by creating any desired shape. Automatic creation from the machining program is
also available.

<Reference>
12-5 3D SETUP Display

 Registering the fixture model

Register the model of the fixture for material workpiece mounting.

<Reference>
12-5 3D SETUP Display

12-1
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

 Checking for interference during manual operations

The axis movement will be stopped if interference is foreseen during manual setup operations.

<Reference>
12-2 INTELLIGENT SAFETY
SHIELD (ISS)

Program creation

 Checking the created program for interference

Use the simulation function to check the created program for interference before actual execution in the
automatic mode of operation.

<Reference>
12-4 VIRTUAL MACHINING
Display

Automatic operation

 Checking for interference during automatic operation

In the flow of programmed operation the axis movement will be stopped if interference is foreseen.

<Reference>
12-2 INTELLIGENT SAFETY
SHIELD (ISS)

The machine operation can be confirmed in real time on the screen. If interference is judged to
occur, the part or component causing the interference will be highlighted.

 3D monitor function
The operation of the machine in manual as well as automatic mode of operation can be confirmed on the
screen.

<Reference>
12-3 3D MONITOR Display

12-2
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
12-2 INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD (ISS)

1. Outline
In manual as well as automatic mode of operation, the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD (ISS)
function checks in advance machine actions for interference on the basis of the three-dimen-
sional models of the machine components, and the commanded amount of movement. If it
judges an interference to occur, it immediately displays a warning message and stops the axis
movement.

2. Interference check

A. Turning ON the ISS

In the initial machine state after switching-on, the interference check function (ISS) is not turned
on until manual zero-point return operation has been completed (only for machines which require
such an initial operation), and the ISS initially conducts interference check on all models of
machine, material, fixture, and cutting tool.

Interference check function OFF Interference check function ON

HOME

Upon switching-on After zero-point return

Zero-point return

Note : The interference check during automatic operation can be conducted in the Memory,
Hard Disk, Ethernet and MDI operation modes. Tape operation cannot be checked for
interference by the ISS.

B. Work number selection

Select the work number of the program to be run for automatic operation, or for which to perform
setup operation.
Selecting a work number reads the models concerned of material and fixture.
The material model and fixture model must be set in the 3D SETUP display.

 For details, refer to Section 12-5.

The interference check by the ISS is always conducted on the basis of the material and fixture
models that are prepared for the program (work No.) currently selected for the Memory operation,
even in the Hard Disk, Ethernet and MDI operation modes as well as in manual operation mode.
Note : As required for interference check in an operation mode other than the Memory one,
select beforehand for the Memory operation mode a program (work No.) which has the
desired material and fixture models prepared.

12-3
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

C. Turning ON and OFF the ISS

The ISS can be canceled temporarily so as to allow the workpiece or fixture to be machined or
formed, as well as the TEACH function to be used for tool tip measurement.
(1) With the POSITION display on the screen, tap the [SAFETY SHIELD] menu item.
(2) Use the resulting “ISS status specification menu” shown below to turn on and off the ISS in
detail.
CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK AUTO OP. STORE 3D
MACHINE MATERIAL FIXTURE TOOL SAFETY WORKPCE MONITOR
INTER. INTER. INTER. INTER. SHIELD MATERIAL
1 2 3 4 5

1. CHECK MACHINE INTER.

Select this menu function by tapping the corresponding menu item to enable the machine
interference check mode. The selection of this function causes the other functions ([CHECK
MATERIAL INTER.], [CHECK FIXTURE INTER.], and [CHECK TOOL INTER.]) to be
automatically selected.
Cancel this menu function by tapping the corresponding menu item to disable the machine
interference check mode. The cancellation of this function causes the other functions
([CHECK MATERIAL INTER.], [CHECK FIXTURE INTER.], and [CHECK TOOL INTER.])
to be automatically canceled.
2. CHECK MATERIAL INTER.
Select this menu function by tapping the corresponding menu item to enable the inter-
ference check mode in particular for the material model.
Cancel this menu function by tapping the corresponding menu item to disable the inter-
ference check mode for the material model.
3. CHECK FIXTURE INTER.
Select this menu function by tapping the corresponding menu item to enable the inter-
ference check mode in particular for the fixture model.
Cancel this menu function by tapping the corresponding menu item to disable the inter-
ference check mode for the fixture model.
4. CHECK TOOL INTER.
Select this menu function by tapping the corresponding menu item to enable the inter-
ference check mode in particular for the tool model.
Cancel this menu function by tapping the corresponding menu item to disable the inter-
ference check mode for the tool model.
5. AUTO OP. SAFETY SHIELD
Select this menu function by tapping the corresponding menu item to turn on the inter-
ference check mode for automatic operation according to the particular state of the other
functions ([CHECK MATERIAL INTER.], [CHECK FIXTURE INTER.], and [CHECK TOOL
INTER.]). (ISS selection for automatic operation)
Cancel this menu function by tapping the corresponding menu item to turn off the inter-
ference check mode for automatic operation. Cancellation of this menu function includes
cancellation of the [CHECK MACHINE INTER.] menu function.
Note 1: The above menu functions cannot be selected or canceled during axis movement.
Note 2: The selection of the [CHECK MATERIAL INTER.], [CHECK FIXTURE INTER.], and
[CHECK TOOL INTER.] menu functions is conditioned on the selection of the [CHECK
MACHINE INTER.] menu function.

12-4
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
Note 3: During automatic operation, only the [CHECK MACHINE INTER.] menu function can
be deselected, but cannot be selected again by tapping the menu item.
Use the M-codes for canceling and restoring the ISS functions in a program for which
temporary cancellation of interference check functions is required.
Note 4: As long as the ISS for automatic operation is selected, Virtual Machining cannot be
performed in parallel with automatic operation. Unless the ISS is canceled for auto-
matic operation, an attempt to select the VIRTUAL MACHINING display during auto-
matic operation will only lead to an alarm (1460 CANNOT USE V. M. DURING AUTO
OPE).
Note 5: With the exception of [AUTO OP. SAFETY SHIELD], the interference-checking menu
function forcibly canceled is automatically retrieved in the following cases:
 Automatic operation is terminated by resetting,
 Tool change is performed in manual mode of operation,
 Tool measurement is carried out in manual mode of operation,
 Data change is performed on the model (machine, material, fixture, tool),
・ Another program (work number) is selected for operation,
・ The data of the currently used tool (mounted in the spindle) is changed,
・ Change is done on the following parameters:
BA1 to BA8, BA10 to BA14, BA16, BA27 to BA38,
F91, F137 to F140,
・ The model is edited on the 3D SETUP display.

D. Verifying the ISS status

The ISS status can be verified in the status display area on the screen.
In the display area in question the normal display and the highlighting of each icon correspond
respectively to the selection and cancellation of the particular item of interference check. Do not
fail to check the ISS status before starting the automatic operation.
Normal display of icons Highlighting of icons

<Legend of icons>
Icon Legend
Indicates the selection and cancellation of interference check mode for machine model.
The normal display of this icon indicates the entire cancellation of interference check
function (for machine, material, fixture and tool models).
Indicates the selection and cancellation of interference check mode for material model.
The normal display of this icon indicates the particular cancellation of interference check
function for the material model.
Indicates the selection and cancellation of interference check mode for fixture model.
The normal display of this icon indicates the particular cancellation of interference check
function for the fixture model.
Indicates the selection and cancellation of interference check mode for tool model.
The normal display of this icon indicates the particular cancellation of interference check
function for the tool model.

12-5
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

E. Canceling and Restoring the ISS functions by M-codes

There are various M-codes provided for canceling the ISS in its particular functions in the flow of
automatic operation, together with the corresponding restoration M-codes.
Use the cancellation M-codes for the purpose of conducting the Virtual Machining in parallel with
automatic operation, or continuing the execution of a program containing a G-code the cutting
function of which cannot be represented on the material model.
 The M-codes in question are provided in pairs for canceling the respective ISS functions as
well as for their restoration.
Note 1: A restoration M-code only undoes the cancellation made by its counterpart, and
restores no interference check functions canceled by any other cancellation M-codes.
Note 2: Only the state of ISS cancellation in its entirety (established by M660) is indicated by a
warning message (alarm 1127 INVALID SAFETY SHIELD).
<List of M-codes for canceling the ISS functions and Undoing>

Function to be canceled Cancellation M-code Restoration M-code

ISS M660 —
Material model cutting M662 —
Machine interference check M664 M665
Interference check for material model M666 M667
Interference check for fixture model M668 M669
Interference check for tool model M670 M671

1. M-code for canceling the ISS in its entirety

Use M660 to cancel the ISS in its entirety for automatic operation, which cancellation state
is indicated by an alarm (1127 INVALID SAFETY SHIELD). There is no undoing or resto-
ration M-code provided for this cancellation M-code.
The function canceled by this M-code is restored by pressing the key or at the end of
the program in question.
ISS status display upon M660 execution

Remark 1: The material model is not cut on the 3D MONITOR display.

Remark 2: Virtual Machining function can be used in parallel with automatic operation.
Programming example
Given below is an example of using the M660 code.
Use of M660

T01T00M6
G0X0.Z-5.
G1Z-50.
M660 ................... M-code for canceling the ISS in its entirety
G0X30.Z-5.
G1Z-50.


12-6
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
2. M-code for canceling the material model cutting
Use M662 to cancel the particular interference check function for the material model, along
with the cancellation of the function to represent the cutting of the material model on the 3D
MONITOR display. There is no undoing or restoration M-code provided for this cancellation
M-code.
The function canceled by this M-code is restored by pressing the key or at the end of
the program in question.
ISS status display upon M662 execution

Programming example
Precede with M662 a G-code the cutting function of which cannot be represented on the
material model. The type of processing the block of such a G-code without preceding M662
can be selected with a parameter as follows:
When F35 bit 2 = 0:
Continuing the operation by canceling the interference check function for material model.
When F35 bit 2 = 1:
Stopping the operation (all the axis movements) by producing an alarm (1818 ILLEGAL
COMMAND (SAFETY SHIELD)).
Use of M662

T01T00M6
G0X0.Z-5.
G1Z-50.
M662 ................... M-code for canceling the material model cutting
G43.1 ................. G-code for a cutting function not to be represented
G0X30.Z-5.
G1Z-50.


Remark : G-codes the cutting function of which cannot be represented are as follows:
G1.1 ........ Threading with C-axis interpolation
G41.1 ...... Shaping (to the left) ON
G42.1 ...... Shaping (to the right) ON
G51.2 ...... Polygonal machining mode ON
G114.3 .... Hob milling mode ON

12-7
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

3. M-code for canceling the machine interference check

Use M664 to cancel the machine interference check for automatic operation. The undoing
counterpart of this M-code is M665. Besides, the function canceled by this M-code is
automatically restored by pressing the key or at the end of the program in question.
ISS status display upon M664 execution ISS status display upon M665 execution

Remark : Representation of material model cutting is continued on the 3D MONITOR

display.
Programming example
Use this pair of M-codes to cancel the interference check function for a desired program
section only.
Use of M664 and M665

T01T00M6
G0X0.Z-5.
G1Z-50.
M664 ................... M-code for canceling the machine interference check
G0X30.Z-5.
G1Z-50. Interference check function is to be suspended for this
program section.

M665 ................... M-code for restoring the machine interference check
G0X60.Z-5.
G1Z-50.


4. M-codes for canceling the interference check particularly for material/fixture/tool model
Use M666, M668, and M670 to cancel the particular interference check function respec-
tively for material, fixture, and tool models. The undoing counterparts of these M-codes are
M667, M669, and M671. Besides, the functions canceled by these M-codes are auto-
matically restored by pressing the key or at the end of the program in question.
ISS status display upon M666 execution ISS status display upon M667 execution

ISS status display upon M668 execution ISS status display upon M669 execution

ISS status display upon M670 execution ISS status display upon M671 execution

Remark : Representation of material model cutting is continued on the 3D MONITOR

display.

12-8
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
Programming example
Use these pairs of M-codes to cancel the interference check function for a particular model
within a desired program section only.
Use of M666 and M667

T01T00M6
G0X0.Z-5.
G1Z-50.
M666 ................... Interference-check canceling M-code for material model
G0X30.Z-5.
G1Z-50.

M667 ................... Interference-check restoring M-code for material model
G0X60.Z-5.
G1Z-50.


Note : Precautions on a combined use of the M-codes in question:

A restoration M-code only undoes the cancellation made by its counterpart, in
other words, restores the interference check conditions before the execution of its
counterpart, and restores no interference check functions canceled by any other
cancellation M-codes. Pay due attention to the current ISS status, therefore, in a
combined use of the M-code pairs in question.
Programming example
In the sample program below, M665 only restores the interference check conditions
before the execution of the preceding M664, and the particular function of interference
check for the material model, canceled by M666 before the M664, will not be restored
until execution of M667.
Combined use of M-code pairs

T01T00M6
G0X0.Z-5.
G1Z-50.
M666 ................... Interference-check canceling M-code for material model
G0X30.Z-5.
G1Z-50.

M664 ................... M-code for canceling the machine interference check
G0X60.Z-5.
G1Z-50.

M665 ................... M-code for restoring the machine interference check
G0X90.Z-5.
G1Z-50.

M667 ................... Interference-check restoring M-code for material model


12-9
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

F. M-codes for temporarily canceling and restoring the ISS

For the use in an EIA/ISO program there is a special M-code provided for temporarily canceling
the ISS in its entirety, along with its undoing counterpart (i.e. for restoration), as shown below.
Use these M-codes to prevent, for example, the alarm 1125 SAFETY SHIELD CALCULATING
from occurring inopportunely to stop the execution of a measurement macroprogram.
M648: Temporary cancelation of the ISS
M649: Restoration of the ISS
Note 1: M648 and M649 must be given in a single-command block.
Note 2: ISS restoration by M649 causes the alarm 1160 SAFETY SHIELD SYNCHRONOUS
to be raised and the automatic operation to be temporarily suspended until the alarm is
cleared automatically.
Note 3: Do not give any cutting commands in the section of temporary cancelation of the ISS;
otherwise the interference check function cannot be executed properly after ISS resto-
ration by M649.
Note 4: Take care that the state of the programming coordinate system (as to the position of
the workpiece origin, the angle of rotation of the workpiece coordinate system, etc.) just
before M648 should surely be restored as required just before M649; otherwise the
interference check function cannot be executed properly after ISS restoration by M649.
Note 5: In a program for controlling two machining systems, give a command of temporary ISS
cancelation for only one system, and set the other system to a waiting state.
Note 6: M648 and M649 cannot be used in MAZATROL programs. It is, however, possible to
give them in an EIA/ISO program called by a MAZATROL program’s subprogram unit.

G. Precautions on the restart operation

With the ISS being selected for automatic operation, restart operation may be stopped due to
virtual interference between tool model and material model if the latter has been redrawn to the
initial uncut state. In such a case either store the current state of the material model, or cancel
the interference check function particularly for the material.

1. Restart after storing the current state of the material model

Assume that the operation has come to a stop in such a machining step as shown below.

D740S30459

With the 3D MONITOR display on the screen, tap the menu selector button to call up the
following menu and tap the [STORE WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu item.
STORE STORE ZOOM ROTATION MOVE POSITION POSITION
WORKPCE IN/OUT DISP
MATERIAL

12-10
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
Alternatively, tap the identical menu item in the “ISS status specification menu”.
CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK AUTO OP. STORE 3D
MACHINE MATERIAL FIXTURE TOOL SAFETY WORKPCE MONITOR
INTER. INTER. INTER. INTER. SHIELD MATERIAL

The current state of the material model on the 3D MONITOR display is stored.

D740S30460

Run the program on the machine from the stopped position. The representation of
machining will be continued on the stored material model.

Restart from the

stopped position

D740S30461

Note : It is indispensable for the beginning of the restart operation after storing the cur-
rent material model that the stored state of the material model should correspond
to the machining state of the actual material. Be sure to store the material model in
the stopped state, and restart the program from the stopped position.
2. Restart after canceling the interference check function for the material
Assume that the operation has come to a stop in such a machining step as shown below.

D740S30462

Display the “ISS status specification menu” and tap the [CHECK MATERIAL INTER.] menu
item to bring its display into the deselect state.

12-11
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

Run the program on the machine from the stopped position. With the material model being
redrawn, the operation will be started without interference check being conducted for the
material model.

D740S30463

Supplement
 Interference check does not apply to the initial approach to the restart position.
 With the ISS being selected for automatic operation, the restart function with modal
information reading cannot be used, without causing alarm 1819 ILLEGAL C/S (SAFETY
SHIELD), for an EIA/ISO program which contains a subprogram call command for a program
prepared and stored for the Hard Disk operation.
 With the ISS being selected for automatic operation, the restart function with modal
information reading cannot be used, without causing alarm 956 RESTART OPERATION
NOT ALLOWED, for an EIA/ISO program which contains an M-code (M660) for canceling the
ISS.
 With the ISS being selected for automatic operation, the restart operation cannot be started,
without causing alarm 1123 ILLEGAL OPE (SAFETY SHIELD), for an EIA/ISO program
when a manual interruption has been conducted after the search for the restart position with
modal information reading.
 The restart operation cannot be started, without causing alarm 1123 ILLEGAL OPE
(SAFETY SHIELD), for an EIA/ISO program when the ISS has been selected for automatic
operation after the search for the restart position with modal information reading under the
condition of “ISS cancellation for automatic operation”.
 An ISS cancellation or restoration M-code is of no effect when it is entered from the EIA/ISO
RESULT window for the restart function with modal information reading. Select or cancel the
menu functions concerned before starting the operational procedure for restart operation.
 The use of the [RESTART 2 NONMODAL] menu function, or any edit operation on the EIA
MONITOR display, cancels the interference check function for automatic operation.

H. Verifying the ON/OFF state of the [STORE WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu function
The ON/OFF state of the [STORE WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu function can be verified in the
status display area on the screen.
In the display area in question the normal display and the highlighting of the icon concerned
correspond respectively to the selection and cancellation of the menu function for storing the
current state and position of the material model as well as the state of the fixture model.
Normal display Highlighting

12-12
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
<Legend of icons>
Icon Legend
Indicates the selection and cancellation of the [STORE WORKPCE MATERIAL]
menu function.
The normal display of this icon indicates the cancellation of the menu function (for
storing the current state and position of the material model as well as the state of the
fixture model).

Note 1: Irrespective of selection and cancellation of the [STORE WORKPCE MATERIAL]

menu function, the current state and position of the material model as well as the state
of the fixture model are always cleared by switching-off.
Note 2: Use a parameter as follows to select the initial state of the [STORE WORKPCE
MATERIAL] menu function after switching-on.
When F143 bit 1 = 0: Selection
When F143 bit 1 = 1: Cancellation

I. Interference check
1. Interference check in manual mode of operation
In manual mode of operation, the NC extends the read-ahead tool position by the inter-
ference check distance (set in parameters M38 and M39) to execute an interference check.
If it is judged that interference occurs, an alarm message of the format 1101 or 1102
INTERFERE <Interfering part 1> <Interfering part 2> (in blue or red) will appear with all the
axis movements stopped.
If the NC judges that interference does not occur, it allows the axis movement to be per-
formed to that read-ahead position.

Position to be checked
for interference
Current position

Interference check
distance

D740S3088

If the NC judges that interference occurs, it causes the axis movement to decelerate and
stop immediately.

Interference
foreseen
Movement during
deceleration
D740S3089

12-13
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

Note : In the machine interference check mode, the axis movement speed will be
clamped according to the interference check distance. However, the clamping
speed for manual rapid traverse will be applied if it is slower.
The interference check in manual mode of operation is carried out in two phases. The axis
movement speed is fast in the first phase and slow in the second phase.

Stopped in the first inter-

Checked at the first- ference check phase
phase interference
check distance

Movement by checking at
the second-phase inter-
ference check distance

D740S3090

First interference check phase

In the first interference check phase, the axis movement speed is clamped so that an
interference check occurs at the first-phase interference check distance (set in parameter
M38).
If it is judged that interference occurs in the first interference check phase, the alarm
message 1101 INTERFERE <Interfering part 1> <Interfering part 2> (in blue) appears and
the axis movement stops.
When the axis movement is started again, an interference check will then occur at the
second-phase interference check distance (set in a parameter).
Note : Press the key to clear the (blue) alarm and to re-set the first phase of inter-
ference check.

 See the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List for more information
on parameters M38 and M39.

Second interference check phase

In the second interference check phase, the axis movement speed is clamped so that an
interference check occurs at the second-phase interference check distance (set in
parameter M39).
If it is judged that interference occurs in the second interference check phase, the alarm
message 1102 INTERFERE <Interfering part 1> <Interfering part 2> (in red) appears and
the axis movement stops.
In the alarm state of the second interference check phase the axis movement is disabled
in manual operation mode until the alarm is cleared by pressing the key or
canceling the interference check mode. Pressing the key in the second interference
check phase clears the alarm, if present, and causes the NC to return to the first-phase
interference check.

12-14
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
2. Interference check in automatic mode of operation
In automatic mode of operation with the ISS being selected, the NC reads ahead the
programmed tool positions to execute an interference check. When the read-ahead position
falls within the interference check distance (set in parameter M42) from an object concerned,
interference is judged to be likely, and an alarm message (No. 1122 or 1151) of the format
INTERFERE <Interfering part 1> <Interfering part 2> (WNo., UNo., SNo.) will appear with
the axis movement stopped.
The axis movement will continue passing through the read-ahead positions till the stop just
before the block the execution of which would cause an interference.
Note : The axis movement is stopped just before the block of foreseen interference in the
mode of cutting feed as well as in that of rapid traverse.

Read-ahead position Interference

foreseen

Current position Stopped just before

the critical block

Interference check distance Interference check distance

(M42) (M42)
D747S30115

If it is desired to execute cutting motions by omitting the interference check distance, use
one of the following two methods to cancel the interference check function for a particular
type of components. Note that the cancellation should not be applied without having
confirmed the operational safety by using the Virtual Machining function.
 Before starting automatic operation, manually cancel the menu functions concerned
([CHECK MACHINE INTER.], [CHECK MATERIAL INTER.], [CHECK FIXTURE
INTER.], and/or [CHECK TOOL INTER.]).
 Precede the desired program section of machining with an M-code for canceling the ISS
functions.

 The relevant M-codes are detailed under “E. Canceling and Restoring the ISS
functions by M-codes” of article 2 in this section (12-2).

Note 1: The [CHECK MATERIAL INTER.], [CHECK FIXTURE INTER.], and [CHECK
TOOL INTER.] menu functions cannot be manually selected or canceled during
automatic operation. Before starting automatic operation, manually conduct the
required cancellation (which cannot be undone till completion of the operation).

12-15
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

Note 2: As for programming with M-codes for canceling and restoring the ISS functions, it
is highly recommendable to undo the temporary cancellation as soon as it is not
necessary.
Example : Execution of cutting motions by omitting the interference check distance for the
fixture.

Since the interference check

function for the fixture is can-
Interference celled, the read-ahead position
foreseen does not cause an alarm.

Read-ahead
position
Current
position Cancellation of
interference
check function
for the fixture

Interference check distance (M42) Interference check distance (M42)

D740S30464

J. Continuation of operation in the even of an interference alarm

Even if stopped with an alarm caused by the interference check function, the automatic operation
can be continued by simultaneously pressing the key and the button on condition
that there is actually no risk of interference.
Use the following parameter to enable or disable the function concerned:
F169 bit 2: Continuation of operation after the detection of interference by the INTELLIGENT
SAFETY SHIELD function.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

 If operation is continued using this function, the interference check function will tempo-
rarily be deactivated. Use the function, therefore, with due care.

CAUTION

K. Restrictions on the ISS

1. Restrictions common to manual and automatic modes of operation
 Interference check does not occur for the operation of the pallet changer.
 In case the models are too complicated for the NC to execute an interference check, the
alarm message INTERFERE CHECK DATA OVERLOAD appears (at the work number
selection or model setting) and the axis movement stops (but the spindle will not stop). If
this occurs, press the key and then use a simpler material or fixture model, or
cancel the check function concerned for material or fixture model.

12-16
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
 The target can be passed over, without causing an interference alarm, during movement
through the interference check distance.

Next position

Current position

Interference
check distance
Fixture or another
component
D740S0274

 The machine interference check function is not enabled till completion of the initial
zero-point return after switching-on.
 Even when the non-interpolation type is actually selected, the multi-axis motions
enumerated below are always checked for interference as those of interpolation type,
resulting in an actual interference being passed over. As a countermeasure, set the
intermediate point as appropriate for interference prevention, or give multiple commands
of single-axis control.
 Motion from the intermediate point to the reference point in the execution of G28
(return to the 1st) as well as G30 (to the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point)
 Motion of “return from the reference point (by G29)”
* Positioning motion path
Interpolation type: Linear path from the starting to the ending point by
controlling the rapid traverse rates accordingly for the axes
concerned.
Non-interpolation type: Non-linear path by independent rapid traverse on the axes
concerned.
 The model data will be updated if the material information, setup information, and/or tool
data are changed. The interference check function is disabled (with the message
INVALID SHIELD displayed) while the model data is updated. Do not attempt axis
movements until the update of the model data is completed.

12-17
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

 If there is a clearance between the material model and the fixture model, or between the
blade/shank element and the holder of the tool model (see the figure below), the target
will not be detected if it is located in the clearance range. Be sure to create models
correctly.

No interference is detected in this improper

clearance between the blade/shank
element and the holder of the tool model.

D740S3061

 Automatic creation of material model cannot be applied for an EIA/ISO program created
by the function for converting a MAZATROL program into the EIA/ISO format. The
material model for such a program is to be specified on the 3D SETUP display.
 The settings for the eccentricity of a touch sensor’s stylus in parameters L1, L2, and L88
to L91 do not make the corresponding eccentricity on the sensor tool model that is set on
the TOOL DATA display.
 It is quite worth while setting parametric or assembly tool models. Interference check
might not be done correctly using simplified tool models which are initially created from
the information given on the TOOL DATA display only and thus may not approximately
enough represent the tools in question.
 The length of an automatically created tool model is determined by the length setting
only for the tool in question (without reference to the wear compensation amount).
Change the length setting, therefore, to change the shape of the tool model.
 The tool is represented in its model by simplifying the fastening screws and other parts
that are modified in shape according to the conditions of use, as well as the minute steps
on the holder and other details that have no influence on the interference check.
 Any touching or overlapping of the tool model’s cutter part with the material model during
cutting feed is judged as for removal of chips (normal cutting). No correct interference
check can be guaranteed, therefore, for a machining step in which a non-toothed section
of the cutter part should earlier come into contact with the material. Do not fail to check a
machining program for operational safety with the aid of the virtual machining function
before running it for automatic operation.

12-18
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
 There may be a minute error in position between the machine model and the actual
machine. The position of the stop caused by the interference check function cannot
otherwise than deviate by the eventual error, but there can be no interference in actual
fact owing to an allowance of the ISS interference check distance.

Position of the stop caused by

the interference check function

Machine model

Actual machine

Stop position on the actual Positional error of the model

machine, deviating by the
Movement distance
positional error of the model
D747S30116

2. Restrictions in manual mode of operation

 If it is judged that interference occurs in the manual mode of handle feed, the manual
pulse handle will be ineffective for 3 seconds after stoppage.
 Do not change the axis selector switch setting while operating the manual pulse handle.
Doing so may prevent correct interference check.
 Once in the second phase of interference check, do not press the key to clear a
second-phase interference alarm before retracting the component in question at the
speed that is reduced for the second-phase interference check from the critical area of
the first-phase interference check. Otherwise an operation for axis movement will
immediately cause an alarm of the first-phase interference check to which phase the
system has been returned by pressing the key.
3. Restrictions in automatic mode of operation
 Without canceling the ISS for automatic operation beforehand, an attempt to start Tape
operation will only lead to alarm 1124 ILLEGAL CYCLE START.
 Manual interruption, MDI interruption, or Handle interruption results in the ISS being
canceled during interruption as well as for the resumed automatic operation.
 Do not start automatic operation with the VIRTUAL MACHINING display on the screen.
Such a starting operation will only lead to alarm INVALID SCREEN FOR CYCLE
START. Select another proper display beforehand.
 Even after the execution of an ISS cancellation M-code (M660 to M671) in the MDI
operation mode, selecting the Memory operation mode restores the ISS for automatic
operation.

12-19
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

 With the ISS selected for automatic operation, the initial modal information for MDI
operation is the same as in the reset state (established by tapping ). Give modal
commands explicitly as required each time an MDI operation program is to be executed
for interference check under specified conditions. The current modal conditions of the
following G-code groups, however, are not reset automatically until resetting or
switching-off:
G-code groups 01, 03, 04, 06, 10, and 17.

 Refer to List of G-codes in the separate PROGRAMMING MANUAL (EIA/ISO

Program) for details on the groups in question.

 With the ISS selected for automatic operation, Virtual Machining cannot be performed in
parallel with automatic operation. Unless the ISS is canceled for automatic operation by
returning the display color of the [AUTO OP. SAFETY SHIELD] menu item to orange, an
attempt to select the VIRTUAL MACHINING display during automatic operation will only
lead to an alarm (1460 CANNOT USE V. M. DURING AUTO OPE).

 Do not press the button to start automatic operation when model edit operation is
in progress; otherwise an alarm will be caused (1282 START ERROR).

 At the very beginning of automatic operation by pressing the button, the axis
movement will be delayed for several seconds of an internal calculation processing for
the interference check function with an alarm (1125 SAFETY SHIELD CALCULATING)
displayed on the screen, which is cleared automatically upon completion of processing.
 Use G5P2 (High-speed machining mode), or cancel the ISS for automatic operation, in
order to execute properly a program for die machining, which includes a great number of
micro-distance motion commands; or else the machining operation may not proceed
otherwise than intermittently due to frequent occurrence of alarm 1125 SAFETY SHIELD
CALCULATING, or may only be executed at rates of feed lower than programmed.
 In continuous execution of multiple programs (program chaining) each change of
programs (WNos.) requires several seconds for preparatory reading of the new models,
for which period of time the start of the succeeding program will be delayed with an alarm
(1125 SAFETY SHIELD CALCULATING) displayed on the screen, which is cleared
automatically upon completion of reading.
 Select the [STORE WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu function (provided on the 3D MONI-
TOR display as well as in the “ISS status specification menu”) if, in continuous execution
of multiple programs (program chaining), the preceding program’s final state of the
material and fixture models is desirable for the beginning of the succeeding program.
 In continuous execution of multiple programs (program chaining) reading new models for
the succeeding program always results in the interference check function being restored
(if canceled for the preceding program). Do not fail, therefore, to enter the required can-
cellation M-code in the succeeding programs if the interference check function should
further remain canceled.

12-20
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
 The cutting on, or chip removal of, the material model takes place in accordance with the
movement of the tool model’s cutter in its specified shape. Examples are given below to
show how a portion which is removed in a real machining step can remain in its original
place. The type of processing such a case can be selected with bit 4 of parameter F35
as detailed in the following.

‘Uncut’ portion of
the material

D747S30117

When F35 bit 4 = 0:

A cut-off portion of the material model remains in its original place and, as a result, may
lead to a judgment of interference for the succeeding step of operation.
To avoid such an inappropriate judgment about interference, set this parameter to “1”
(ON), or cancel the interference check function for the material model beforehand.
When F35 bit 4 = 1:
A cut-off portion of the material model is ‘hidden’ and thus excluded from the interference
check.
 In the following cases the NC temporarily cancels the interference check function in its
entirety (without displaying a message of warning about the cancellation):
Execution of skip function (G31) and multi-step skip functions (G31.1 to G31.3) in an
EIA/ISO program, and
Measurements of machined-workpiece dimensions, workpiece origin coordinates, and
tool dimensions, as well as for sensor calibration, in a MAZATROL program.
 Temporary cancellation from the start of skip feed through the stop up to the end of
the reversion.
 After the stop of measuring feed the alarm 1125 SAFETY SHIELD CALCULATING
appears to indicate that the measuring results are currently processed, with the
machine at rest, for automatically setting or modifying the data items concerned. The
alarm disappears in several seconds upon completion of the internal processing.
 The cutting operation by a simultaneous control of linear and rotational axes cannot be
checked properly for interference between material and tool. Cancel the interference
check function for the tool or material model beforehand for such an operation.
 A command for drilling cycle of the cutting-load detection type for pecking cancels the
interference check function.
 The interference check function is not available during machine locking.
 Tapping cannot otherwise be represented on the material model than in cylindrical or
conical cutting to the size of the root of thread.
 A MAZATROL boring unit of stepped blind hole (BORE S2) may only lead to alarm 2102
WORK INTRF when the machining diameter (HOLE-) is set to the same value as that
of the pre-hole (PRE-DIA). Cancel the interference check function, as a preventive
measure, for the material model.

12-21
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

 The ISS judges as an interference any contact with the material model which occurs
during feed of the tool by G0 (rapid traverse), irrespective of the speed setting for rapid
traverse. Cancel, therefore, the interference check function for the tool or material model
in case a feed for cutting into the workpiece is programmed with G0 (on the condition of
a rapid traverse speed moderate enough to be safely used for cutting).
 Cancel the interference check function for a program which uses system variables (in
any form) since it cannot be checked properly for interference.
 Do not select or cancel the [BLOCK SKIP] menu function in the flow of automatic oper-
ation; otherwise no correct interference check can be guaranteed.
 The modification made on the material or fixture model on the 3D SETUP display during
automatic operation cannot immediately be taken into consideration as intended by the
ISS until, after completion of the automatic operation, the [DRAW WORKPCE MATE-
RIAL] menu function is executed on the 3D MONITOR display.
 The tool model used in interference check is always the one which is created for the
programmed tool even when the tool is replaced with a spare one due to the expiration of
the serviceable life in the flow of operation.
 Create the model for a FLASH tool as a body of revolution, as with an end mill, when it is
to be used as a milling tool. The creation of a parametric model representing the real
shape is not adequate in this case since the model cannot be rotated, as is the case with
real operation, and thus cannot ‘mill’ the material model appropriately.
 Perform the piece count setting as required before starting the automatic operation. A
setting during automatic operation will be processed according to the parameters con-
cerned as follows:
<For a manual setting about piece count>
 When F143 bit 0 = 0:
Accepting the piece count setting and continuing the operation by canceling the ISS.
 When F143 bit 0 = 1:
Rejecting the piece count setting with an alarm (1129 MEMORY PROTECT (SAFE-
TY SHIELD)), and continuing the operation without canceling the ISS.
<For a programmed setting about piece count>
 When F335 bit 7 = 0:
The processing depends on the setting of F143 bit 0 as follows.
When F143 bit 0 = 0:
Accepting the piece count setting and continuing the operation by canceling the ISS.
When F143 bit 0 = 1:
Rejecting the piece count setting with an alarm (1824 UNWRITABLE SYSTEM VA-
RIABLE (ISS)), and stopping the operation.
 When F335 bit 7 = 1:
Accepting the piece count setting and continuing the operation without canceling the
ISS, irrespectively of F143 bit 0.
 The interference check by the ISS cannot occur precisely by taking into account the
shaping tool’s rotation on its axis. The model of a shaping tool can only be created in a
solid cylinder which has the tip of the tool on the circumference of its base.

12-22
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
12-3 3D MONITOR Display

 Displays the machine, material, fixture, and tool models real-time so that the actual positional relation-
ship among the machine components can be grasped.
Function
 If interference is judged to occur by the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD (ISS), the part or component
causing the interference will be highlighted.

If a machine interference is foreseen by the ISS, the portion causing the interference will be
highlighted.
 In the first interference check phase during manual operation, the interfering portion will be
shown in yellow.
 In the second interference check phase during manual operation as well as for automatic
operation in general, the interfering portion will be shown in red.
Note 1: The material model remains as created and cannot be cut.
Note 2: Even if the interfering portion is shown in red, no actual collision has yet occurred.
Note 3: The display position of the material model is always determined with reference to the
workpiece origin as specified in the first unit of basic coordinates system (WPC) of the
program in question.

12-3-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[1] [5]
[2]

[3]

[4]

D747S30118E

12-23
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] WNo. — Work number of the program currently selected
[2] TNo. — Number and name of the tool mounted in the milling spindle
mm (in) Current position of the tool tip with respect to the machine origin (or to the
[3] X, Y, Z, A, C
degrees workpiece origin with the [POSITION DISP] menu function selected).
[4] Machining time — Machining time
Graphical representation of the machine, tool, material, and fixture
[5] Graphic display —
models

12-3-2 3D monitor menu

The 3D MONITOR display provides the following menus.
STORE STORE VIEW VIEW ZOOM ROTATION MOVE CHECK POSITION POSITION
WORKPCE CANCEL CHANGE IN/OUT UNITS DISP
MATERIAL SELECT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK AUTO OP. POSITION
MACHINE MATERIAL FIXTURE TOOL SAFETY
INTER. INTER. INTER. INTER. SHIELD
10 11 12 13 14

1. STORE
Used to store the results from the view-modifying operations with the VIEW CHANGE,
ZOOM IN/OUT, ROTATION and MOVE menu functions.
 Select the [STORE] menu function, and the results from the operations with the above-
mentioned menu functions will be restored intact next time the 3D MONITOR display is
called up.
 With the [STORE] menu item displayed in the deselect state, changing to another
display cancels the results from the view-modifying operations and the initial viewing
conditions will be restored next time the 3D MONITOR display is called up.
2. STORE WORKPCE MATERIAL
Used to store the current state of the material model.
Select the [STORE WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu function, and the current machining
state of the material model will be stored. It should be noted here that, with this menu item
displayed in the select state, the material model will not be updated even upon selection of
another program (WNo.).
3. VIEW CANCEL
To hide component models selectively, tap the [VIEW CANCEL] menu item to open the
following window.

12-24
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
 Tap the name of the component model to be hidden. The cursor is moved onto the
model name and the color of the model concerned is changed in the graphic display.
Double-tap the same name. Then the light-blue background of the model name is
removed, indicating that the component is hidden in the 3-D model display.
 To show a hidden component anew, tap the name of the component model (without
light-blue background) in the above-mentioned window.
4. VIEW CHANGE
To change the viewpoint of the 3-D model display section, tap the [VIEW CHANGE] menu
item to open the following window.

 Double-tap the desired viewpoint in the window, and the view is correspondingly
changed in the 3-D model display section.
5. ZOOM IN/OUT
Tap the [ZOOM IN/OUT] menu item, and use the cursor keys on the resulting screen
keyboard as follows:
to enlarge the model view.
to reduce the model view.
6. ROTATION
Tap the [ROTATION] menu item, and use the cursor keys on the resulting screen keyboard
as follows:
to rotate the model around the horizontal axis in the normal direction.
to rotate the model around the horizontal axis in reverse direction.
to rotate the model normally around the axis perpendicular to the table surface.
to rotate the model in reverse around the axis perpendicular to the table surface.
7. MOVE
Tap the [MOVE] menu item, and use the cursor keys on the resulting screen keyboard as
follows:
to move (translate) the model upward.
to move (translate) the model downward.
to move (translate) the model leftward.
to move (translate) the model rightward.
8. CHECK UNITS SELECT
Tap the [CHECK UNITS SELECT] menu item to enable or disable the interference check
function for each component of the machine model in accordance with the actual state of
the machine.

12-25
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

9. POSITION DISP
Used to select the reference for the digital indication of the current position: machine origin
or workpiece origin.
10. CHECK MACHINE INTER.
Select this menu function to enable the machine interference check mode.
11. CHECK MATERIAL INTER.
Select this menu function to enable the interference check mode in particular for the
material model.
12. CHECK FIXTURE INTER.
Select this menu function to enable the interference check mode in particular for the fixture
model.
13. CHECK TOOL INTER.
Select this menu function to enable the interference check mode in particular for the tool
model.
14. AUTO OP. SAFETY SHIELD
Select this menu function to turn on the interference check mode for automatic operation
according to the states of the other functions 10 to 13.
When the interference check function (INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD) is disabled in manual
mode of operation, the corresponding warning message (INVALID SHIELD) is displayed in the
upper part of the following displays:
 POSITION display  TRACE display
 EIA MONITOR display  MACHINING - MONITORING display
 3D MONITOR display

12-26
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
12-3-3 Moving an additional part
The display position of an additional part (worktable, measuring table, etc.) can be changed by
the following procedure so as to suit it to a change in the workpiece zero point, without having to
change the machining program or the machine parameters.
(1) Select the [MOVE OPTIONAL PARTS] option displayed by tapping and [Setup] in
that order.
 The following window appears on the screen.

(2) Enter in the X, Y, and Z fields the three dimensions of translating the additional part from its
reference position.
(3) Tap the [OK] button in the window to confirm the data settings, and the additional part will
be moved as specified.
Note 1: The translating dimensions in the X, Y, and Z fields are to be specified with reference to
the corresponding rectangular axes of the machine coordinate system.
Note 2: The machine coordinates of the reference position of the additional tables 1 and 2 refer
to the settings of parameters S25 and S36, respectively.
Note 3: The change in display position of an additional part on the 3D MONITOR display does
not produce the corresponding positional change on the VIRTUAL MACHINING
display. Follow a similar procedure as required on the latter display.
Note 4: Specify the angular position of the part (rotated around the Z-axis of the machine
coordinate system) as required by selecting between the Angle options 0 and 180
(degrees).
Note 5: Use the [CHECK UNITS SELECT] menu function to fit the NC conditions to the
machine in question as to whether it is equipped with additional parts.
Before movement After movement

12-27
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

12-3-4 Changing machine models

The machine model can be changed by the following procedure according to a change in ar-
rangement pattern of the additional table (detachable).
To use this function, set bit 3 of parameter F157 to “1” (Use of Table selection unit for the
VIRTUAL MACHINING, 3D MONITOR and 3D SETUP displays).
(1) Select the [MACHINE MODEL CHANGE] option displayed by tapping and [Setup]
in that order.
 The following window appears with the selectable machine models enumerated in it.

Cursor

The name of the currently selected machine model is displayed

on the light-blue background.

(2) Tap the desired machine model to position the cursor on it, and tap the [OK] button to
confirm the selection.
 Upon completion of internal processing for machine model change, graphic display is
changed accordingly.
Remark : The change in machine model on the 3D MONITOR display produces the corre-
sponding change on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display.
Note 1: As long as the internal processing for machine model change is in progress, the inter-
ference check function remains deactivated, which state is indicated by the INVALID
SHIELD message on the screen. Do not execute any axis movements before the
message disappears.
Note 2: During automatic operation an attempt to use the [MACHINE MODEL CHANGE]
function can only cause the alarm 428 MEMORY PROTECT (AUTO OPERATION) to
be raised.
Note 3: The alarm 2193 POWER OFF DURING MODEL CHANGE displayed at power-on in-
dicates that the latest operation for changing machine models has not been successful
due to power failure. Perform the changing operation again, if required.

12-28
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
12-4 VIRTUAL MACHINING Display

Function Simulates both the cutting operation and the machine movement.

 Provided that the ISS for automatic operation is made invalid, Virtual Machining can be performed even
in parallel with automatic operation.
Remarks
 If the ISS for automatic operation is made valid, Virtual Machining cannot be performed in parallel with
automatic operation.

12-4-1 Outline
Virtual Machining is the collective name for “Work simulation” that simulates the process of
cutting the workpiece and “Machine simulation” that simulates the movement of the machine.
 Work simulation
This simulation checks if the tool interferes with the material and fixture. The cutting process
can be checked while viewing the actual cutting image, facilitating the early discovery of
cutting failure and the reduction of the setup time.
 Machine simulation
This simulates the movement of machine components (including the tool) to check if inter-
ference occurs among these machine components.
Note 1: In simulation of measurement, as a matter of course, the measuring motion command
cannot help being executed up to the end (designated position) in default of the input
signal for skipping. The function of checking for interference is temporarily cancelled
during measurement as concerns the interference between workpiece and touch
sensor. Neither can occur the modification of the program according to the measuring
results.
Note 2: The operation of pallet change is skipped in the simulation. The material workpiece
with its fixture remains unchanged, irrespective of whether there comes a pallet change
command or not in the flow of simulation.

12-29
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

12-4-2 Data display

1. Displayed data
<Work simulation>

[1] [6]
[2]
[3]

[4]

[5]

[8]

[7]
D747S30119E

<Machine simulation>

[1] [6]
[2]
[3]

[4]

[5]

[8]

[7]
D747S30120E

12-30
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] WNo. — Work number of the program being simulated
[2] UNo. — Number of the unit being executed
[3] TNo. — Number and name of the tool being used
Current position
POSITION or mm (in)
[4] Remark : POSITION and COORDINATE values refer to coordinates in
COORDINATE degrees
the workpiece and machine coordinate systems, respectively.
[5] Machining time hh:mm:ss Time of machining
[6] Simulation — Graphical representation of Work simulation or Machine simulation

[7] Alarm — Display of alarms generated during simulation

Display of the storage area (HDD OPERATION PROGRAM or
[8] Area for simulation —
ETHERNET OPE. PROGRAM) of the program currently simulated

3. Menus for Virtual Machining

<First menu for Work simulation>
SIMULATN SIMULATN DRAW STOP PROGRAM TOOL MACHINE
WORKPCE
CONTINUE STEP EDIT PATH SIMULAT.
MATERIAL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

<Second menu for Work simulation>

INTERFER ALARM RESTART STORE 3D PROGRAM INTERFER MACHINE
ALARM MONITOR DETECT SIMULAT.
HISTORY SETUP
HISTORY ENABLE
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 7

<Third menu for Work simulation>

BLOCK ZOOM ROTATION MOVE
SKIP IN/OUT

15 16 17 18

<First menu for Machine simulation>

SIMULATN SIMULATN REPEAT POSITION PROGRAM TOOL MACHINE

CONTINUE STEP EDIT PATH SIMULAT.

1 2 19 20 5 6 7

<Second menu for Machine simulation>

INTERFER ALARM RESTART VIEW VIEW 3D INTERF. PROGRAM INTERFER MACHINE
ALARM CANCEL SETTING MONITOR DETECT SIMULAT.
HISTORY CHANGE SETUP
HISTORY ENABLE
8 9 10 12 13 14 7

<Menu functions>
1. SIMULATN CONTINUE
Used to execute the simulation continuously.
The display of the menu item remains in the select state during execution until it is returned
to the deselect state at the end of the program, by tapping the [STOP] or the [SIMULATN
STEP] menu item (to stop or change the execution mode).
2. SIMULATN STEP
Used to execute the simulation stepwise.
The display of the menu item remains in the select state during execution of the step until it
is returned to the deselect state at the end of the program, by tapping the [STOP] or the
[SIMULATN CONTINUE] menu item (to stop or change the execution mode).

12-31
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

3. DRAW WORKPCE MATERIAL

Used to redraw the material shape before machining. Only available to Work simulation.
4. STOP
Used to temporarily stop simulation.
5. PROGRAM EDIT
Used to divide the screen for simultaneous view of the VIRTUAL MACHINING and
PROGRAM displays, allowing the program data to be edited.
6. TOOL PATH
Used to return to the TOOL PATH CHECK display.
7. MACHINE SIMULAT.
Used to change the display modes.
 Menu item displayed in the select state: Machine simulation mode
 Menu item displayed in the deselect state: Work simulation mode
8. INTERFER ALARM HISTORY
Used to display the history of interference alarms generated during simulation.
9. ALARM HISTORY
Used to display the history of machine operation alarms generated during simulation.
10. RESTART
Used to specify the restart position for the simulation.
11. STORE
Used to store the current display contents. The storage continues as long as the menu item
is displayed in green. Only available to Work simulation.
12. 3D SETUP
Used to change over to the 3D SETUP display.
13. PROGRAM MONITOR
Used to monitor the program data on the screen.
14. INTERFER DETECT ENABLE
Used to enable and disable the interference check mode.
15. BLOCK SKIP
Used to enable the block skip function.
16. ZOOM IN/OUT, 17. ROTATION, 18. MOVE
Used to enlarge/reduce, rotate and move (translate) the displayed graphics.

 See Subsection 12-5-9 for more information.

19. REPEAT
Used to reproduce the machine movement for the period of 30 seconds before the
machining is stopped.

12-32
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
20. POSITION
Used to display the following menu:
ALL ACTUAL
AXISZERO MACHINE
RET POSITION

Tap the [ALL AXISZERO RET] or [ACTUAL MACHINE POSITION] menu item to return
the components on the controlled axes to their respective zero points, or to set them to
where they are actually positioned on the machine.
Note 1: As for simulation (by the [SIMULATN CONTINUE] or [SIMULATN STEP] menu
function) of contour-parallel machining type, the material may be partially uncut
depending upon the shape of the tool used.

 See Subsection 12-4-4 for a description of the menu functions peculiar to

Machine simulation.

Note 2: In the initial state of the VIRTUAL MACHINING display all machine components con-
cerned with axis movement are always positioned at their zero-point, which state may
not always apply to the start of real machine operation. Consequently, the simulation
may differ from the real machine operation until all the component concerned have
been moved by their first motion commands.

12-4-3 Work simulation

1. DRAW WORKPCE MATERIAL

Follow the procedure below to redraw the material shape before machining together with the
fixture. This function is available even during simulation.
(1) Tap the [DRAW WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu item.
 The material shape before machining is redrawn.

DRAW
WORKPCE
MATERIAL

D747S30121

Note 1: If the redraw function is selected during simulation, an alarm may occur because of
interference.
Note 2: The redraw function is available to Work simulation only.

12-33
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

2. PROGRAM EDIT
Use the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu function to divide the screen for simultaneous view of the
VIRTUAL MACHINING and PROGRAM displays.
(1) Tap the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu item.
 The screen is divided into two sections.
 The program display section shows the data of the currently simulated program, be it
MAZATROL or EIA/ISO type, allowing the program data to be edited.

MAZATROL program EIA/ISO program

 Tap the [PROGRAM COMPLETE] menu item to return to the Work simulation display.
Note 1: Tapping the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu item during simulation causes the running
simulation to be stopped, and the program edit display section appears.
Note 2: The program edit mode is enabled as soon as the program edit display section
appears.
Note 3: In the initial state of the program edit display section, the cursor is placed at the
beginning of the unit (MAZATROL) or the block (EIA/ISO) just simulated.
Note 4: The screen division in question can occur even in the replay mode, and the termination
of the program edit mode by tapping the [PROGRAM COMPLETE] menu item
resumes the simulation display with the replay mode being intact.
Note 5: The simulation display resumed by the termination of the program edit mode is no
different from that before the screen division, with the workpiece being cut and the
machine components shown as they were. However, the [SIMULATN CONTINUE] or
[SIMULATN STEP] menu function is cancelled.
Note 6: If the POSITION display or another is called up without tapping the [PROGRAM
COMPLETE] menu item, the return to the divided screen mode is not possible.

3. ALARM HISTORY and INTERFER ALARM HISTORY

Use these menu functions to view the history of alarms generated during simulation.

Menu item Function

INTERFER ALARM To view interference alarms generated during simulation.
HISTORY 24 alarms are saved per page, and a maximum of 48 alarms can be examined.
To view other alarms generated during simulation.
ALARM HISTORY
24 alarms are saved per page, and a maximum of 72 alarms can be examined.

(1) Tap the [INTERFER ALARM HISTORY] or [ALARM HISTORY] menu item.
 The history of the corresponding alarms is displayed.

12-34
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
 The display format is the same as for the DIAGNOSIS (USER) - ALARM
HISTORY display. See Subsection 11-1-2 for more information.

Note 1: On the DIAGNOSIS (USER) display, select or deselect the [Work Number Only
Display] item (displayed by tapping and [Setup]) to select the desired display
type.
Note 2: The alarms generated during simulation are excluded from antomatic saving in a text
file (even when parameter F83 bit 0 ist set to 0).
Note 3: While the history display is shown, the contents of the alarm history will not be updated
even if a simulation is running. Cancel the menu function concerned temporarily and
select it again to view the updated history.
Note 4: The history display is cancelled when another menu item ([RESTART], [STORE],
[PROGRAM MONITOR] or [MACHINE SIMULAT.]) is tapped.

4. RESTART
Use the following procedure to restart the simulation at the specified position of the currently
selected program.

A. Restart procedure
(1) Tap the [RESTART] menu item.
 A window for restart setting appears on the screen.
The format and contents of the window depend on the type of the currently selected
program.

 Refer to Part 4, Subsection 1-2-2 “Restart operation/Smooth restart oper-

ation” for a detailed description of the required setting on the restart position.

(2) Specify the restart position and start the search.

 The following window remains on the screen during search for the restart position.

 To stop the search for the restart position, tap the [RESTART] menu item again. The
interruption of the restart search causes the alarm 2120 RESTART PT SEARCH
INTERRUPTED.
 When the restart-position search process is completed, the SEARCHING window closes.
The simulation is in a state of temporary stop at the restart position.
(3) Start the simulation.
 Tap the [SIMULATN CONTINUE] or [SIMULATN STEP] menu item.
Note 1: Restart position search will be canceled if the display is changed for the TOOL PATH
CHECK display or another.
Note 2: Interference check does not occur during restart position search.
Note 3: The [SIMULATN CONTINUE] and [SIMULATN STEP] menu functions cannot be
selected or deselected during restart position search.
Note 4: It takes some time to complete the search process because a work simulation is
executed internally up to the specified restart position.

12-35
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

B. Difference in restart process between operation and simulation

<For MAZATROL programs>
Operation Simulation
Restart position to be specified Process Process
REPEAT TIMES Can be set Can be set
Up to 6 codes
M-codes for preparation Cannot be set
(MDI mode is also available)
Restart from an EIA/ISO
Executable Executable
subprogram

<For EIA/ISO programs>

Operation Simulation
SUB PROG. No. SUB PROG. No.
SEQUENCE No. SEQUENCE No.
Restart position to be specified
BLOCK No. BLOCK No.
REPEAT NUMBER REPEAT NUMBER
G On the POSITION display No display
S 1 code (Upon completion of the search the simu-
lation is in a state of temporary stop at the
Display of search results F 1 code
restart position, with the [SIMULATN CON-
T 2 codes TINUE] menu item being displayed in the
M 35 codes select state.)

Up to 6 codes
M-codes for preparation Cannot be set
(MDI mode is also available)
Restart from a MAZATROL
Executable Executable
subprogram

C. Restrictions on restart position search

 For multi-piece machining, the restart position search function cannot be used because the
Restart window does not show data for such machining.
 If a non-existent subprogram number is specified for restarting an EIA/ISO program, the
program will be internally executed up to the end.
 If the subprogram count (REPEAT NUMBER) specified for restarting an EIA/ISO program is
larger than the actual count, the program will be internally executed up to the end.

12-36
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
5. STORE
Follow the procedure below to retain the last image of the display before display change. The
retained display image is restored when the Work simulation display is called again.
(1) Tap the [STORE] menu item.
 The mode turns ON and OFF each time the [STORE] menu item is tapped. The ON/OFF
state is retained even if the display is changed.

[STORE] ON [STORE] OFF

Change for another display

The state before switching

the display is retained. The model image is initialized.

D747S30122E

Note 1: The [STORE] ON setting is retained until the power is turned off.
Note 2: Selecting another work number with the STORE mode ON and then switching to the
VIRTUAL MACHINING display restores the retained material/fixture. To display the
material/fixture corresponding to the selected work number, tap the [DRAW WORK-
PCE MATERIAL] menu item.
Note 3: The STORE function is available only during Work simulation (unavailable to the
Machine simulation).

12-37
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

6. Work interference check

The Work simulation function checks if interference occurs among the “tool,” “material,” and
“fixture” components. If interference occurs, the alarm message 2102 WORK INTRF will be
shown.
The display changes automatically to the Machine simulation display when the work simulation
stops temporarily according to the settings in the INTERFERENCE SETUP window.

A. Displaying shape of each component

For the Work simulation function to check for interference, the following parameters and other
data must be set beforehand so as to display the material, fixture, and holder.

Machine origin

Tool section
Tool holder
No. B C
1 BA28 BA29
B 2 BA31 BA32
C 3 BA34 BA35
4 BA37 BA38

Workpiece (Material)

A-axis S26

Fixture
S25: Center of the tilting table’s top surface.
Center of the tilting table’s top surface, in machine
coordinates of the orthogonal axes.
S26: Center of rotation of the tilting table.
S25 Center of rotation of the tilting table, in machine
coordinates of the orthogonal axes.

Tilting table
C-axis
D740S3077

The holder will be displayed at a position apart from the tool tip by a distance of the tool length.
The parameter settings for the holder vary depending on the holder type (Type 1 to 4) as shown
in the table below.

Parameter
Type 1 BA28 BA29
Type 2 BA31 BA32
Type 3 BA34 BA35
Type 4 BA37 BA38

B. Work interference check

A work interference check will be carried out in the following combination.
: Checked
Cutter Shank Holder
Material —  
Fixture   

Note 1: If the tool hits the interference check target, an alarm will be generated to indicate the
occurrence of interference.
Note 2: The portion ground during occurrence of interference will be shown in red.

12-38
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
Note 3: Multiple eventual sections of interference during one step of simulation can all be
indicated and treated as having been removed, indeed, but the alarm can only refer to
the section of the first interference.

Holder

Shank

Cutter

A combination of contact other than that

of the material with a cutter causes an
interference error and the erroneous
contact is displayed in red.

The contact surface of the material and

Material
the cutter is displayed as a cutting
surface in yellow.

D740S3078

7. Setting display color

<COLOR SETUP window>

[2]

[1]

[3]

[4]

<Display data description>

No. Item Data description
Components for color
1 Assign a check mark to the desired component and select the color from
change
the palette (2).
2 Color palette
3 TRANSPARENT Assign a check mark to the component to be displayed translucently
4 COLOR-TONE Assign a check mark to differently color the machined surfaces.

8. Precautions for work simulation

 An alarm (due to memory insufficiency) may be caused, especially at a section of complicated
geometry, during simulation of a program for die machining which includes a great number of
micro-distance motion commands.

12-39
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

 When a command of linear interpolation with simultaneous movement on a rotational axis is

given in the EIA/ISO program or in the MAZATROL program’s manual-programming unit, only
the starting and ending points can be simulated and thus the cutting process cannot be
represented at all, nor can the interference check be executed, for the tool path of such a
command.

12-4-4 Machine simulation

1. Replay (REPEAT menu function)

The Machine simulation function can reproduce the machine movement for the period of 30
seconds before the machining is stopped. Follow the procedure below to review, for example,
the machine movement immediately before the occurrence of the interference.
(1) Tap the [REPEAT] menu item.
 Tap the [REPEAT] menu item to enter the replay mode.
(2) Tap the [SIMULATN CONTINUE] or [SIMULATN STEP] menu item.
 When [SIMULATN CONTINUE] is selected, the machine movement will be reproduced
continuously.
 When [SIMULATN STEP] is selected, the machine movement will be reproduced in
units of the interference distance.
 The progress of replay will be indicated in the counter as a percentage.

Progress
of replay

Note 1: During replay, machine interference is checked based on the interference check
setting. Interference errors are indicated as usual during replay, but not recorded, as
appropriate, in the simulation alarm history.
Note 2: During replay, the workpiece shape that was displayed in Machine simulation at the
selection of the [REPEAT] menu item is displayed. The displayed workpiece will not be
cut during the replay mode.
Note 3: Switching to the Work simulation display during replay causes the display of the
[REPEAT] menu item to return to the deselect state.
Note 4: The [REPEAT] menu function cannot be selected if the Machine simulation function
has not yet been executed at all (by selecting [SIMULATN CONTINUE] or [SIMULATN
STEP]), since there is no data to replay.
Note 5: If a change for a display of other type, e. g. for the program edit display, occurs during
replay, the replay mode will be canceled, and the restored Machine simulation display
cannot reproduce any more the particular machine movement.

12-40
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
Note 6: Change for the Work simulation display, however, does not cancel the replay mode of
the machine simulation display.
Note 7: The machine movement capable of reproduction begins with the simulation step within
which falls the time 30 seconds before the CYCLE TIME indication (stopped) at tapping
the [REPEAT] menu item, and ends with that stopped CYCLE TIME. In the following
example of simulation flow, the time in question (00:01’17”) falls within Step 9, so the
machine movement for a 53-second period is reproducible (from the beginning of Step
9 up to the stopped time indication within Step 11).

Simulation step Indication under CYCLE TIME (at the step beginning)
1 (Start of simulation) 00:00’00”

2 00:00’08”

 
8 00:00’47”

9 (Starting step of replay) 00:00’54”

00:01’17” (30 seconds before tapping [REPEAT])
10 00:01’20”
11 (Ending step of replay) 00:01’47” (at tapping [REPEAT])
12 00:01’53”
 

* Simulation steps here refer to sections, or blocks, of simulation by which the

simulation is executed when the [SIMULATN STEP] menu item is tapped with the
[REPEAT] menu item displayed in the select state.

2. Positioning (POSITION menu function)

The [POSITION] menu function is provided to return the components on the controlled axes to
their respective zero points, or to set them to where they are actually positioned on the machine.
(1) Tap the [POSITION] menu item.
(2) Select the type of positioning from the resulting menu.
ALL ACTUAL
AXISZERO MACHINE
RET POSITION

 Tap the [ALL AXIS ZERO RET] menu item to perform zero-point return operations for all
axes as required for simulation.
In the following cases, zero-point return for all axes is required before executing
simulation.
 The machine stopped during machining.
 A software limit alarm has occurred.
Interference check and cutting operations are not performed when zero-point return for
all axes is in progress.
 Tap the [ACTUAL MACHINE POSITION] menu item to move the components on the
controlled axes to where they are actually positioned on the machine.
Note : Both positioning functions ([ALL AXIS ZERO RET] and [ACTUAL MACHINE POSI-
TION]) cannot be executed when simulation (continuous or stepwise), replay, search
for restart position or restart operation is in progress.

12-41
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

3. VIEW CANCEL menu function

Partial ‘Show/Hide’ can be selected for the machine model in the simulation display. Interference
checks will be conducted even for the ‘hidden’ components.
Tap the desired component in the window to clear its highlighting.
In the example shown below, the base and the column are ‘hidden’ to allow the operation of the
spindle and the table to be viewed more clearly.

Base and column shown Base and column hidden

Remark : The components capable of being hidden are: Base, Column, Table, Pallet, Saddle,
Head, Receiver (MMS), Coolant and Tool.
4. VIEW CHANGE menu function
The viewing point in the simulation display can be changed as required.
Tap the desired viewing point in the window.
Given below is an example of display with the FFRONT viewing point selected.

Remark: Available points of view are: FRONT, RIGHT, LEFT, BACK, UNDER, RIGHT-TOP,
RIGHT-UNDER and LEFT-TOP.
Note : The available points of view depend upon the specification of the machine.

5. INTERF. SETTING menu function

Use this menu function to turn on and off the interference check mode for each component.

12-42
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
6. Machine interference check
The Machine simulation function checks if interference occurs among the “machine model
components,” “tool,” “fixture,” and “material.”
During Machine interference checks, the following alarms may be generated.

Conditions Alarm
Interference warning 2101 NEAR MISS
Interference 2100 MACN INTRF

With the STOP AT 1ST PT OF INTERFERENCE option selected in the INTERFERENCE SET-
UP window, the display changes automatically to the Work simulation display when the Machine
simulation stops temporarily due to work interference.

A. Interference check during machine simulation

A machine interference check will be carried out in the combination of the machine components,
tool, fixture, and material. There are two types of interference checks as follows.

Interference check Simulation display

The target components will be shown in yellow if they come closer to each other
Interference warning
than the set interference distance.
Interference The target components will be shown in red if machine components interfere.

The clearance between yellow components The red components (Head and Table in
(Head and Table in this example) is shorter this example) interfere with each other.
than the interference distance.
D740S3079

12-43
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

B. Setting for interference check

To perform settings for interference check, tap , [Setup] and the [Interference Setup]
option in that order to open the corresponding window.

Tapping the [Interference Setup] option opens the INTERFERENCE SETUP window.

Tap the [DETAIL] button to display the following window:

12-44
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
Detailed description of the INTERFERENCE SETUP window
Category Item Description Application Setting Default
Machine simulation
Select whether or not to perform inter-
INTERFERENCE ference checks. With this item OFF, all (Interference check
is always active in ON/OFF ON
DETECTION of the following interference settings are
disabled. Work simulation
mode.)
STOP AT When ON, the simulation stops tempo-
STAND-OFF rarily if the target comes within the inter- Machine simulation ON/OFF OFF
DISTANCE ference distance.
STOP AT 1ST PT Work simulation
When ON, the simulation stops tempo-
OF INTER- Machine simulation ON/OFF ON
rarily if interference occurs.
FERENCE (Remark 1, 2)
Select whether or not unconditionally to
stop the simulation according to the
above settings. When OFF, the simula-
tion stops only when interference is de-
tected the first time for a particular pair of Work simulation
STOP AT ALL
components. (No stop occurs for the Machine simulation ON/OFF ON
INTER- INTERFERENCE
same pair from the second time (Remark 1, 2)
FERENCE
onward.)
OPTIONS
When ON, the simulation stops tempo-
rarily whenever an interference warning
or interference occurs.
STOP WHEN When ON, the simulation stops
OUT OF INTER- temporarily if the target gets out of the Machine simulation ON/OFF OFF
FERENCE interference distance.
0: Interference
warning judg-
ment disabled.
Metric: 1.00 to Metric:
Set the interference warning distance. 100.00 mm
INTERFERENCE 20 mm
An interference warning will be gene-
STAND-OFF Machine simulation Inch: 0.00001 to
rated if the component is within the set Inch:
DISTANCE 4.00000 in
distance.
0.7874 in
* The minimum
value depends
on the machine
model.
Metric: Metric:
CUTTING 0.10 to 2.0 mm 0.25 mm
TOLE- — Set the desired machining accuracy. Work simulation
RANCE Inch: Inch:
0.004 to 0.1 in 0.01 in
Select whether or not to match the Work simulation
SAME AS
accuracy of drawing the tool path with ON/OFF ON
CUTTING Machine simulation
PATH the machining accuracy.
TOLE- Metric: Metric:
RANCE Work simulation 0.10 to 2.0 mm 0.25 mm
Accuracy Set the desired accuracy.
Machine simulation Inch: Inch:
0.004 to 0.1 in 0.01 in
Set the types of commands the execu- Work simulation
STOP
— tion of which should cause the simula- ON/OFF OFF
OPTION Machine simulation
tion to be stopped temporarily.
Set the frequency of updating the 0: Updating
WORK Work simulation
machine simulation display. Use this disabled.
UPDATE — 4
setting if updating the display every time Machine simulation
INTERVAL 1 -: Frequency
slows down the performance.
WORK RE- WORK ON/OFF ON
Set the resolution for material model. Work simulation
SOLUTION SIMULATION 1 to 10 4
The responsiveness to the operation can
IN VIEW MACHINE ON/OFF OFF
be enhanced by lowering the resolution. Machine simulation
OPERAT. SIMULATION 1 to 10 1

12-45
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

Remark 1: With the STOP AT 1ST PT OF INTERFERENCE option selected, the display
changes automatically to the Work simulation display when the Machine simulation
stops temporarily due to work interference.
Remark 2: The Work simulation display changes automatically to the Machine simulation
display when the work simulation stops temporarily due to machine interference
according to the settings in this window.
Remark 3: The interference check mode cannot be turned off for an additional table on which a
material model is located. An attempt to cancel the mode will only lead to an alarm
(2191 CANNOT SELECT CHECK UNITS).

7. Moving an additional part

The display position of an additional part can be changed so as to suit it to a change in the
workpiece zero point, without having to change the machining program or the machine
parameters.

 See Subsection 12-3-3 “Moving an additional part” for more information.

8. Changing machine models

The machine model can be changed according to a change in arrangement pattern of the addi-
tional table (detachable).

 See Subsection 12-3-4 “Changing machine models” for more information.

12-46
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
12-4-5 Display of material, tool, and fixture

1. Material shape drawing

A right parallelepiped of the optimum dimensions for the selected program is displayed as a
workpiece material. Display specifications depend upon the type of the unit.

A. Point machining units

The types of point machining units shown below are available, and those right parallelepipeds
which include the respective patterns are displayed.

(A) POINT (B) LINE (C) SQUARE (D) GRID

(E) CIRCLE (F) ARC (G) CHORD

B. Line machining units

A right parallelepiped that includes the machining shape of the line machining unit is displayed.

Line machining unit (LINE) Line machining unit (ARC)

D740S3080

12-47
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

C. Face machining units

A right parallelepiped that includes the machining shape of the face machining unit is displayed.

Face machining unit (SQUARE) Face machining unit (CIRCLE)

D740S3081

D. 3D machining units
A right parallelepiped that includes the machining shape of the 3D machining unit is displayed.

3D machining unit
D740S3082

E. Compensating for (nominal) tool diameter

 For line machining or face machining
On the basis of the calculated machining shape, the appropriate right parallelepiped is dis-
played by allowing for the (nominal) tool diameter in accordance with the type of the
machining unit: LINE-RGT, LINE-LFT, LINE-CTR, LINE-OUT, or LINE-IN.

Compensating for tool diameter (in Line/Face machining)

LINE LFT/IN LINE CTR LINE RGT/OUT

The tool size is not incorporated at The radius of the tool is added The diameter of the tool is
all into the calculated machining since the tool center moves on added since the tool only
contour since the tool only moves the machining contour. moves outside the machining
inside the contour. contour.

Tool
Tool path
Machining contour (Arrow: Moving direction of the tool)
D740S3083

12-48
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
Remark : For LINE IN machining with only one straight line specified, the tool size will not be
allowed for since the IN-side cannot be identified.
 For point machining
The tool radius is added to the right parallelepiped that includes all the specified points.

Compensating for tool diameter (in Point machining)

Right parallelepiped
including all the points

Right parallelepiped
with added tool radius

D740S3084

 For 3D machining
The tool radius is added to the right parallelepiped that includes the locus of points of tool
movement.

12-49
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

F. Adding offset area

If Work simulation is executed for a material for which the tool size only is added to the
programmed machining shape, all the material may be chipped off and no display made at the
end. In order to avoid this, a fixed offset value is added to the machining shape so that the shape
of the as-machined workpiece can be readily understood.
An offset of 10 mm (or 1 in) is set up in both the X- and Y-directions of the machine coordinate
system in such a way as to encompass the right parallelepiped including the machining shape.
As for the Z-direction, an offset of 10 mm (or 1 in) is set up at the bottom side of the surface to be
machined.

Adding offset area

Y Unit: mm
Material shape Clearance
Offset
(F136)
10

Y max. 150

Offset
Offset 10
10 120
Machining Clearance
Clearance area (F136)
(F136)

Y min. 50
40
Offset
Clearance 10
Reference
point (F136)
X
Machine 40
coordinate
system X min. X max.
(50) (150)
40 X
Machine
coordinate
system
Machining
area
10

Offset
Z 10

D740S3085

G. Setting up a clearance (margin)

For the material shape with an added offset, the value of parameter F136 is added in both the X-
and Y-directions of the machine coordinate system in such a way as to encompass the shape of
the material. (No clearance added in the Z-direction)
Remark : The material will not be displayed if the size of one side with both the offset and the
clearance added to the machining shape exceeds 1000.0 mm or 39.37 inches.
Note : During machining from multiple directions, alarm 2102 WORK INTRF may be dis-
played to indicate interference at the offset and clearance area.

12-50
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
H. Rotation around the C-axis and A-axis
Rotation around the C- and A-axis, as specified in the WPC, WPC SHIFT, or INDEX unit, is also
taken into consideration as follows: The material will be a right parallelepiped that includes a right
parallelepiped formed by rotating the right parallelepiped including the machining shape. That is,
the material will be a right parallelepiped whose sides are parallel to the X-, Y-, or Z-axis of the
machine coordinate system.

Right parallelepiped formed by

rotating the right parallelepiped
including the machining shape

Right parallelepiped that includes

a right parallelepiped formed by
rotating the right parallelepiped
including the machining shape

D740S3086

2. Setting from the CHANGE MAT. SIZE window

Tap , [Setup] and the [Change Material] option in that order and use the resulting
window (named CHANGE MAT. SIZE) to change the coordinates (X, Y, Z) of the material’s
reference point (BASE) and dimensions (SIZE) along the X-, Y- and Z-axis.

Note : The [Change Material] function is not available for a material which is set on the 3D
SETUP display. If required, delete the corresponding setting on the 3D SETUP display
beforehand.

 See the description under 4. in Subsection 12-5-4 for more information.

3. Display of the fixtures

Fixtures are displayed according to the fixture models that are prepared on the 3D SETUP
display.

 See Subsection 12-5-5 for more information.

12-51
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

12-5 3D SETUP Display

 Used to set the material and fixture models to be used in the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD (ISS) and
Function Virtual Machining functions.
 The use of parametric models and CAD models enables more accurate interference checks.

12-5-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[2]
[3]
[1]

[4]

D747S30122

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

[1] 3D shape tree display section — Current arrangement of the 3D models

[2] Graphic display — Graphical representation of the 3D models

Dialogue box with a progress bar Progress of material model conversion

[3] —
for material model conversion Remark : See Subsection 12-5-8 for more information.
Message concerning the required conversion in case a CAD
Message of information on the model is selected as a material model.
[4] —
material model conversion
Remark : See Subsection 12-5-8 for more information.

3. Initial state of the 3D SETUP display

The table is initially displayed as appropriate for MAZATROL as well as EIA/ISO programs.
Create the material and fixture models as required and arrange them on the table.
Remark : It is also possible to use an additional table.
A parametric or CAD model of the material or fixture, once set, is retained and will initially be
displayed next time the 3D SETUP display is called up.

12-52
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
12-5-2 3D setup initial menu
The 3D SETUP display provides the following initial menu:
WORKPCE FIXTURE LOCATE OPTIONAL WORKPCE PALLET
MATERIAL SETUP MANUALLY TABLE CAD FILE SETUP
SETUP SETUP CONVERT
1 2 3 4 5 6

<Menu functions>
1. WORKPCE MATERIAL SETUP
Select this item to set the shape of the material model.
2. FIXTURE SETUP
Select this item to set the shape of the fixture model.
3. LOCATE MANUALLY
Select this item to locate and arrange the material and fixture models.
4. OPTIONAL TABLE SETUP (for machines with additional tables)
Select this item to specify the worktable together with its axis of rotation.
5. WORKPCE CAD FILE CONVERT
Select this item to convert a CAD model which is selected as a material model.
6. PALLET SETUP (only for correspondingly designed machine models)
Select this item to set a pallet model proper to the program.
Note : Use the [LOCATE] item in the “material-model setting menu” to manually locate and
arrange the material model positioned on an additional table.

12-5-3 Models to be set on the 3D SETUP display

The 3D SETUP display is used for the following four settings:

Material model setting (12-5-4) This procedure can be omitted if the model is specified
beforehand in MAZATROL program of workpiece scheme.

Fixture model setting (12-5-5)

Arrangement of the material and fixture models (12-5-4, 12-5-6)

Material model conversion (12-5-8) This procedure is only required when a CAD model is
selected as a material model.

1. Model setting methods

The model types and setting methods available for the programming types are as follows.
: Available —: Unavailable
Material model Fixture model
PARAMETER
3D SETUP display 3D SETUP display
display
Parametric Parametric
CAD model Table CAD model
model model
MAZATROL     
EIA/ISO     

12-53
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

2. Material model

A. Parametric model
Set simple material models by giving dimensions to the basic shapes.

 The setting procedure is detailed under 2 in Subsection 12-5-4.

The following nine types of material shape are available.

ROUND SQUARE HEXAGON

SQUARE PIPE L-TYPE BLOCK SQUARE (POCKET)

SQUARE (SLOT) SQUARE (SQUARE BOSS) SQUARE (LONG BOSS)

B. CAD model
CAD data can be imported as a material model.

 The setting procedure is detailed under 3 in Subsection 12-5-4.

12-54
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
3. Fixture model

A. Parametric model
Set simple fixture models by giving dimensions to the basic shapes. The following 25 types of
fixture shape are available.

 The setting procedure is detailed under 2 in Subsection 12-5-5.

MULTI BLOCK MULTI BLOCK LOCATING BLOCK

SUPPORT BLOCK WORK GRIPPER (OD)
(LARGE) (SMALL) (SQUARE)

LOCATING BLOCK
WORK GRIPPER (ID) PALLET PALLET (H-MC) VISE
(ROUND)

FIXTURE BASE
SWING CLAMP UNIVERSAL CLAMP CENTER CLAMP FIXTURE BASE
(H-MC)

ANGLE PLATE ANGLE PLATE ANGLE PLATE

POINT CLAMP JACK
(2 SIDES) (2 SIDES) (H-MC) (4 SIDES)

ANGLE PLATE PALLET SUBTABLE CONE TAIL

PALLET SUBTABLE
(4 SIDES) (H-MC) (H-MC) [Truncated cone] [Tailstock]

12-55
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

B. CAD model
CAD data can be imported as a fixture model.

 The setting procedure is detailed under 3 in Subsection 12-5-5.

12-5-4 Material model setting

Select the [WORKPCE MATERIAL SETUP] item from the initial menu of the 3D SETUP display
to display the material-model setting menu that is used to set a parametric or CAD model as a
material model.
The created material model is indicated in the 3D shape tree display section.

1. Material-model setting menu

<Material-model setting menu>
WORKPCE WORKPCE DELETE LOCATE WORKPCE EDIT WORKPCE FINISH >>>
MATERIAL MATERIAL WORKPCE OPTIONAL MATERIAL
DATABASE
DATABASE CAD FILE MATERIAL TABLE FILE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1. WORKPCE MATERIAL DATABASE

Used to set the material model by selecting a parametric model from the material database.
2. WORKPCE MATERIAL CAD FILE
Used to set the material model by selecting a model created using a CAD system.
3. DELETE WORKPCE MATERIAL
Used to delete the existing material model.
4. LOCATE
Used to locate and arrange the material model.
5. WORKPCE OPTIONAL TABLE
Used to set the material model to be positioned on an additional table.
6. EDIT DATABASE
Used to edit the database of the parametric models (by adding, changing, and deleting
data).
7. WORKPCE MATERIAL FILE
Used to manage the existing material models (by saving, renaming, copying, and deleting
data).
8. FINISH
Used to terminate the material-model setting mode.
The specified material model cannot be made effective for the 3D interference checking
(SAFETY SHIELD) and Virtual Machining functions until the [FINISH] menu item is tapped
to terminate the material-model setting mode (and, as a result, to return to the initial menu of
the 3D SETUP display).
Note 1: If the total number of material model faces and fixture model faces exceeds 4000,
alarm 2064 MAX NUM MODEL FACETS EXCEEDED will be displayed and the
face quantity check window opened.

12-56
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
Note 2: Even if the total number of faces ranges from 4000 to 8000, the models specified
in the 3D SETUP display will be made effective, indeed, for the SAFETY SHIELD
and Virtual Machining functions, but alarm 1105 SAFETY SHIELD CALCU-
LATING may be prone to occur or the Virtual Machining may decrease in
operation speed.
Note 3: If the total number of faces exceeds 8000, the models specified cannot be made
effective at all for the SAFETY SHIELD and Virtual Machining functions.

2. Setting a parametric model

Follow the procedure below to set the material model by selecting a parametric model from the
material database.

 The procedure for registering a parametric model in the material database is

detailed under 5 below in this Subsection.

A. Setting a material model on the main table

(1) Select from the material-setup structure tree a mother item under which to add a new
material model.

(2) Tap the [WORKPCE MATERIAL DATABASE] menu item.

 The existing parametric models are listed up in the WORKPIECE DATABASE window.

12-57
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

(3) Select the desired parametric model from the database, and then tap the [OK] button.
 The SELECT WORKPIECE MATERIAL window appears on the screen.

(4) Edit the dimensions as required and finally tap the [OK] button.
 The material model is set definitively and indicated in the 3D shape tree display section.

Note : If the created material model is too large to fit in the material size defined in the
program, alarm 2061 WORK MATL. LARGER THAN BARRIER will be displayed.

B. Setting a material model on an additional table

(1) Tap the [WORKPCE OPTIONAL TABLE] menu item.
(2) With the menu item ([WORKPCE OPTIONAL TABLE]) being displayed in the select state,
carry out the procedural steps (1) to (4) described above under A to set a material model on
an additional table.
 The material model is arranged on the additional table.

12-58
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
3. Setting a CAD model

A. Setting procedure
Follow the procedure below to set the material model by selecting a model created using a CAD
system.
(1) Tap the [WORKPCE MATERIAL CAD FILE] menu item.
 The existing CAD models are listed up in the IMPORT WORKPIECE MAT. CAD FILE
window.
(2) Select the desired CAD model, make the desired selection for auto-adjustment, and then
tap the [OK] button.

AUTO ADJUST YES ..... Places the CAD model in a proper position.
NO....... Places the CAD model according to the coordinate system used
in its creation.
 The material model is set definitively.
Note 1: First tap the [WORKPCE OPTIONAL TABLE] menu item (to set its display into the
select state) and then follow the above procedure to set a material model on an
additional table.
Note 2: If the created material model is too large to fit in the material size defined in the
program, alarm 2061 WORK MATL. LARGER THAN BARRIER will be displayed.
Note 3: If the number of faces on the specified material model exceeds 4000, alarm 2064 MAX
NUM MODEL FACETS EXCEEDED will be displayed and the face quantity check
window opened. It is possible, indeed, but not recommendable to set a material model
with more than 4000 faces. The maximum admissible number of faces is 8000.

 The procedure for managing (renaming, copying and deleting) CAD files to
be displayed in the above-mentioned window is detailed under 6 below in this
Subsection.

B. Restrictions on CAD models

 3-D CAD files available in the 3D SETUP display are those of solid models in the Parasolid or
STEP format.
 A Parasolid format 3-D CAD files has one of the file extensions x_t (text), xmt_txt (text), x_b
(binary), and xmt_bin (binary).
Loadable 3-D CAD files in Parasolid format: up to version V26.0.

12-59
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

 Loadable 3-D CAD files in STEP format: STEP AP203 or AP214 with a file extension “stp” or
“step.”
 A Parasolid or STEP format file cannot be read if it contains any of the following. Attempting
to do so causes the alarm 2001 CAD FILE FORMAT ERROR.
 Surface model (a model whose shape is represented by only surfaces, which is a
collection of planar elements without any content)
 Model containing any invalid shape (detected in entity checking)

C. Changing the folder containing CAD models

Follow the procedure below to change the folder containing 3D-CAD files.
(1) Tap the [CHANGE FOLDER] button in the IMPORT WORKPIECE MAT. CAD FILE
window.

 The CHANGE FOLDER window opens to show the drive name and the folder list.

Current folder of 3D-CAD files

Current drive (changeable)

Folder list

(2) In the folder list, select the desired folder and then tap the [OK] button.
 Double-tap [..] in the CHANGE FOLDER window as required to view the contents of the
upper-level folder.
 Double-tap a folder as required to view its lower-level folders.
 The contents (lower-level folders) of the new folder are shown.
(3) Finally select the desired folder and tap the [OK] button.
 The CHANGE FOLDER window closes and the files in the selected folder are listed in
the IMPORT WORKPIECE MAT. CAD FILE window.
Note : ”C:\” is selected as the default folder. The change in folder setting is retained.

12-60
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
4. Deleting the existing material model (DELETE WORKPCE MATERIAL)
Follow the procedure below to delete (from the 3D shape tree display section) the current
material model.
(1) Tap the [DELETE WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu item.
 A message box appears.
(2) Tap the [YES] button.
 The material model is deleted.
 To cancel the deletion, tap the [NO] button.

The material model has been

deleted.

12-61
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

5. Editing the material database

The material database can be edited as required by adding a new, changing or deleting an ex-
isting, parametric model.

(1) Tap the [EDIT DATABASE] menu item.

 The SELECT WORKPIECE MATERIAL window appears on the screen with the
following menu presented for editing the database:
NEW COPY AND CHANGE DELETE EDIT
CHANGE WORKPCE WORKPCE DATABASE
MATERIAL MATERIAL
1 2 3 4 5

<Menu functions>
1. NEW
Used to add a new parametric model to the material database.
2. COPY AND CHANGE
Used to add a parametric model to the material database by modifying an existing model.
3. CHANGE WORKPCE MATERIAL
Used to change or edit a parametric model in the material database.
4. DELETE WORKPCE MATERIAL
Used to delete a parametric model from the material database.
5. EDIT DATABASE
Deselect the menu item to terminate the edit mode.

A. NEW
Follow the procedure below to add a new parametric model to the material database.

(1) Tap the [NEW] menu item.

 The SELECT WORKPIECE MATERIAL window appears on the screen.
Remark : The No. field is filled in advance with the smallest available number (1 to
9999).
(2) Make selection for WORK MATERIAL and SHAPE, and enter the dimensions.

(3) Finally tap the [OK] button.

 A new parametric model is added to the material database.
Note 1: A preview appears in the 3-D display section when the setting of all the necessary
dimensions (a to h) is complete. The change of a dimension will update the preview as
soon as the data item is set definitively.

12-62
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
Note 2: An attempt to register an additional model under a number (No.) which is already in
use will only lead to an alarm (2057 NUMBER ALREADY REGISTERED).
Note 3: An attempt to register a model with an item being unset or incorrectly set will only lead
to an alarm (2028 ILLEGAL WORKPIECE DIMENSION).

B. COPY AND CHANGE

Follow the procedure below to add a parametric model to the material database by modifying an
existing model.
(1) Select the desired parametric model from the database.

(2) Tap the [COPY AND CHANGE] menu item.

 The SELECT WORKPIECE MATERIAL window appears on the screen.
Remark : The No. field is filled in advance with the smallest available number (1 to
9999).
(3) As required, change the selection for WORK MATERIAL and SHAPE, and modify the
dimensions.

(4) Finally tap the [OK] button.

 A new parametric model is added to the material database.
Note 1: A preview appears in the 3-D display section when the setting of all the necessary
dimensions (a to h) is complete. The change of a dimension will update the preview as
soon as the data item is set definitively.
Note 2: An attempt to register an additional model under a number (No.) which is already in
use will only lead to an alarm (2057 NUMBER ALREADY REGISTERED).

12-63
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

Note 3: An attempt to register a model with an item being unset or incorrectly set will only lead
to an alarm (2028 ILLEGAL WORKPIECE DIMENSION).
Note 4: Tapping the [COPY AND CHANGE] menu item without any parametric model selected
from the material database will lead to an alarm (2031 SELECT REGISTERED DATA).

C. CHANGE WORKPCE MATERIAL

Follow the procedure below to edit a parametric model in the material database.
(1) After selecting the parametric model to be edited in the WORKPIECE DATABASE window,
tap the [CHANGE WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu item.
 The SELECT WORKPIECE MATERIAL window appears on the screen.
(2) As required, change the selection for WORK MATERIAL and SHAPE, and modify the
dimensions.
Note : The data in the No. field cannot be changed.

(3) Finally tap the [OK] button.

 The selected parametric model is changed definitively.
Note 1: A preview appears in the 3-D display section when the setting of all the necessary
dimensions (a to h) is complete. The change of a dimension will update the preview as
soon as the data item is set definitively.
Note 2: An attempt to register a model with an item being unset or incorrectly set will only lead
to an alarm (2028 ILLEGAL WORKPIECE DIMENSION).
Note 3: Tapping the [CHANGE WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu item without any parametric
model selected from the material database will lead to an alarm (2032 SELECT DATA
TO CHANGE).

D. DELETE WORKPCE MATERIAL

Follow the procedure below to delete a parametric model from the material database.
(1) After selecting the parametric model to be deleted in the WORKPIECE DATABASE window,
tap the [DELETE WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu item.
 A message box appears on the screen.
(2) Tap the [YES] button.
 The selected parametric model is deleted from the database.
 To cancel the deletion, tap the [NO] button.
Note : Tapping the [DELETE WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu item without any parametric
model selected from the material database will lead to an alarm (2033 SELECT DATA
TO DELETE).

12-64
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
6. WORKPCE MATERIAL FILE
The created material model can be saved and managed in a CAD file.
(1) Tap the [WORKPCE MATERIAL FILE] menu item.
 The WORKPIECE MATERIAL FILE window appears on the screen with the following
menu presented for managing material models:

SAVE RENAME COPY AND DELETE WORKPCE >>>

WORKPCE MATERIAL
RENAME FILE
MATERIAL
1 2 3 4

<Menu functions>
1. SAVE WORKPCE MATERIAL
Used to save a material model into the material database or as a CAD model.
2. RENAME
Used to rename the file of a material model.
3. COPY AND RENAME
Used to copy the file of a material model under a different name.
4. DELETE
Used to delete the file of an unnecessary material model.
Note 1: The file format is “x_t”. If the file name does not have an extension, “x_t” will be added
automatically.
Note 2: If the length of the file name is in excess of 256 characters or if the length of the file
path is in excess of 260 characters, alarm 2039 FILE NAME TOO LONG will be
displayed.

A. SAVE WORKPCE MATERIAL

(1) Tap the [SAVE WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu item.
 The SAVE WORKPIECE MATERIAL window appears on the screen.

12-65
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

(2) Enter the file name.

(3) Tap the [OK] button.

 The material model is saved in a file with the specified name.
Note 1: The data to be saved is currently valid material shape data.
Note 2: All the shape components are integrated and saved as a single shape.

B. RENAME
Follow the procedure below to rename an existing file of material-shape model.
(1) Select the file to be renamed in the WORKPIECE MATERIAL FILE window.

(2) Tap the [RENAME] menu item.

 The RENAME window appears on the screen.

12-66
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
(3) Key in the new name.

(4) Tap the [OK] button.

 The file is renamed as specified.
Note : The extension cannot be changed. The same extension as the extension assigned to
the current file name is added automatically.

C. COPY & RENAME

Follow the procedure below to copy the file of a material-shape model.
(1) Select the file to be copied in the WORKPIECE MATERIAL FILE window.

(2) Tap the [COPY & RENAME] menu item.

 The COPY AND RENAME FILE window appears on the screen.

(3) Key in the name of the new file for the copied data.

12-67
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

(4) Tap the [OK] button.

 The file is copied under the new name.
Note : The extension cannot be changed. The same extension as the extension assigned to
the current file name is added automatically.

D. DELETE
Follow the procedure below to delete an existing file of material-shape model.
(1) Select the file to be deleted in the WORKPIECE MATERIAL FILE window.

(2) Tap the [DELETE] menu item.

 A delete confirmation window appears on the screen.

(3) Tap the [YES] button.

 The specified file is deleted.
Note : To cancel the deletion, tap the [NO] button.

12-68
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
12-5-5 Fixture model setting
Select the [FIXTURE SETUP] item from the initial menu of the 3D SETUP display to display the
fixture-model setting menu that is used to set a parametric or CAD model as a fixture model.
The created fixture model is indicated in the 3D shape tree display section.
Note : When multi-piece machining is set up in the program, assigning fixtures as a daughter
of (or subordinate to) a material model in the manual layout structure tree will cause the
fixtures to be arranged on the multiple pieces for the SAFETY SHIELD and Virtual
Machining functions. CAD models as well as the following types of parametric model
can be arranged subordinate to a material model.
 MULTI BLOCK (LARGE)
 MULTI BLOCK (SMALL)
 SUPPORT BLOCK
 LOCATING BLOCK (SQUARE)
 LOCATING BLOCK (ROUND)
 SWING CLAMP
 UNIVERSAL CLAMP
 CENTER CLAMP
 POINT CLAMP
 JACK

12-69
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

1. Fixture-model setting menu

<Fixture-model setting menu>
FIXTURE FIXTURE DELETE LOCATE FIXTURE EDIT FIXTURE FINISH >>>
OPTIONAL
DATABASE CAD FILE FIXTURE DATABASE FILE
TABLE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

<Menu functions>
1. FIXTURE DATABASE
Used to set the fixture model by selecting a parametric model from the fixture database.
2. FIXTURE CAD FILE
Used to set the fixture model by selecting a model created using a CAD system.
3. DELETE FIXTURE
Used to delete the existing fixture model.
4. LOCATE
Used to locate and arrange the fixture model.
5. FIXTURE OPTIONAL TABLE
Used to set the fixture model to be positioned on an additional table.
6. EDIT DATABASE
Used to edit the database of the parametric models (by adding, changing, and deleting
data).
7. FIXTURE FILE
Used to manage the existing fixture models (by saving, renaming, copying, and deleting
data).
8. FINISH
Used to terminate the fixture-model setting mode.
The specified fixture model cannot be made effective for the 3D interference checking
(SAFETY SHIELD) and Virtual Machining functions until the [FINISH] menu item is tapped
to terminate the fixture-model setting mode (and, as a result, to return to the initial menu of
the 3D SETUP display).
Note 1: If the total number of material model faces and fixture model faces exceeds 4000,
alarm 2064 MAX NUM MODEL FACETS EXCEEDED will be displayed and the
face quantity check window opened.
Note 2: Even if the total number of faces ranges from 4000 to 8000, the models specified
in the 3D SETUP display will be made effective, indeed, for the SAFETY SHIELD
and Virtual Machining functions, but alarm 1105 SAFETY SHIELD CALCU-
LATING may be prone to occur or the Virtual Machining may decrease in
operation speed.
Note 3: If the total number of faces exceeds 8000, the models specified cannot be made
effective at all for the SAFETY SHIELD and Virtual Machining functions.

12-70
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
2. Setting a parametric model

A. Setting a fixture model on the main table

Follow the procedure below to set the fixture model by selecting a parametric model from the
fixture database.
(1) Select from the MODEL LAYOUT structure tree a mother item (material or fixture) under
which to add a new fixture model.

(2) Tap the [FIXTURE DATABASE] menu item.

 The existing parametric models are listed up in the FIXTURE DATABASE window.
(3) Select the desired parametric model from the database, and then tap the [OK] button.

 The FIXTURE SETUP window appears on the screen.

(4) Edit the current data as required and finally tap the [OK] button.

 The fixture model is set definitively.

12-71
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

B. Setting a fixture model on an additional table

(1) Tap the [FIXTURE OPTIONAL TABLE] menu item.
(2) With the menu item ([FIXTURE OPTIONAL TABLE]) being displayed in the select state,
carry out the procedural steps (1) to (4) described above under A to set a fixture model on
an additional table.
 The fixture model is arranged on the additional table.

3. Setting a CAD model

A. Setting procedure
Follow the procedure below to set the fixture model by selecting a 3-D CAD model.
(1) Select from the MODEL LAYOUT structure tree a mother item (material or fixture) under
which to add a new fixture model.

(2) Tap the [FIXTURE CAD FILE] menu item.

 The IMPORT FIXTURE CAD FILE window appears to list up the existing CAD models.
(3) Select the desired CAD model, make the desired selection for auto-adjustment, and then
tap the [OK] button.

AUTO ADJUST YES ..... Fixtures are arranged so that the center of the right parallelepi-
ped including the CAD models lies on the center line of the table.

12-72
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
NO....... Places the CAD model according to the coordinate system used
in its creation.
 The fixture model is set definitively.

Note 1: First tap the [FIXTURE OPTIONAL TABLE] menu item (to set its display into the
select state) and then follow the above procedure to set a fixture model on an
additional table.
Note 2: If the created fixture model is too large to fit in the fixture size defined in the setup
information, alarm 2062 FIXTURE LARGER THAN BARRIER will be displayed.
Note 3: If the number of specified fixture model faces exceeds 4000, alarm 2064 MAX NUM
MODEL FACETS EXCEEDED will be displayed and the face quantity check window
opened. Besides, fixture models with more than 8000 faces cannot be set up at all.

B. Restrictions on CAD Models

Other restrictions are the same as for reading the material model.

 Refer to the description under 3-B in Subsection 12-5-4.

C. Changing the folder containing CAD models

Follow the procedure below to change the folder containing 3D-CAD files.
(1) Tap the [CHANGE FOLDER] button in the IMPORT FIXTURE CAD FILE window.

 Proceed with the succeeding steps in the same manner as for the material
model. Refer to the description under 3-C in Subsection 12-5-4.

12-73
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

4. DELETE FIXTURE
Proceed as follows to delete the current fixture model.

(1) Select the fixture to be deleted from the MODEL LAYOUT structure tree.

(2) Tap the [DELETE FIXTURE] menu item.

FIXTURE FIXTURE DELETE LOCATE FIXTURE EDIT FIXTURE FINISH >>>
OPTIONAL
DATABASE CAD FILE FIXTURE DATABASE FILE
TABLE

 The DELETE FIXTURE window appears on the screen.

(3) Confirm the deletion by tapping the [YES] button to delete the selected fixture with its
subordinate ones.

The selected fixture has been

deleted with its subordinate ones.

12-74
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
5. LOCATE
Note : Manual arrangement of a fixture model on the main and an additional table is to be
undertaken respectively with the [FIXTURE OPTIONAL TABLE] menu item being
displayed in the deselect and the select state.
The material and fixture models can be located and arranged manually.
(1) Select from the MODEL LAYOUT structure tree the fixture to be arranged manually.

(2) Tap the [LOCATE] menu item.

FIXTURE FIXTURE DELETE LOCATE FIXTURE EDIT FIXTURE FINISH >>>
OPTIONAL
DATABASE CAD FILE FIXTURE DATABASE FILE
TABLE

 The submenu for manual arrangement will be displayed.

 See Subsection 12-5-6 for a detailed description.

6. Editing the fixture database

The fixture database can be edited as required by adding a new, changing or deleting an existing,
parametric model.

(1) Tap the [EDIT DATABASE] menu item.

 The FIXTURE DATABASE window appears on the screen with a menu presented for
editing the database.

 The procedure for managing database (by adding, modifying, copying and
deleting) is detailed above under 5 in Subsection 12-5-4.

7. FIXTURE FILE
The created fixture model can be saved and managed in a CAD file.
(1) Tap the [FXTURE FILE] menu item.
 The FIXTURE MODEL FILE window appears on the screen with a menu presented for
managing fixture models.

 Proceed with the succeeding steps in the same manner as for the material
model. Refer to the description above under 6 in Subsection 12-5-4.

12-75
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

12-5-6 Manual arrangement of the material and fixture models

The material and fixture models set on the (main) table can be located and arranged manually.
Select the [LOCATE MANUALLY] item from the initial menu of the 3D SETUP display to display
the manual arrangement menu.
WORKPCE FIXTURE LOCATE OPTIONAL WORKPCE PALLET
MATERIAL SETUP MANUALLY TABLE CAD FILE SETUP
SETUP SETUP CONVERT

 The information given in this subsection also applies to the various menu
items of manual arrangement that are folded under [LOCATE] in the
Material-model setting menu and Fixture-model setting menu.

1. Manual arrangement menu

<Manual arrangement menu>

MOVE MOVE ROTATE FINISH >>>

SETUP SETUP
1 2 3 7

X-AXIS Y-AXIS Z-AXIS X-AXIS Y-AXIS Z-AXIS CONTACT FINISH >>>

MOVE MOVE MOVE ROTATE ROTATE ROTATE SURFACE
4 4 4 5 5 5 6 7

<Menu functions>
1. MOVE
Used to move (translate) as well as rotate the model on the selected plane.
2. MOVE SETUP
Used to setup the linear distance by which the model is to be moved.
3. ROTATE SETUP
Used to setup the angular distance by which the model is to be rotated.
4. X/Y/Z-AXIS MOVE
Used to move the model along the particular axis.
5. X/Y/Z-AXIS ROTATE
Used to rotate the model around the particular axis.
6. CONTACT SURFACE
Used to mate two selected faces.
7. FINISH
Used to terminate the manual arrangement.

2. Restrictions on manual arrangement

The restrictions imposed on the manual model arrangement are as follows.
 Manual model arrangement is available only for parametric and CAD models.
 Use the “material-model setting menu” or “fixture-model setting menu” to manually locate and
arrange the material or fixture model positioned on an additional table.

12-76
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
12-5-7 OPTIONAL TABLE SETUP menu function (for machines with additional tables)
A worktable together with its axis of rotation can be specified as a 3D setup item.
For example, follow the procedure below to perform setup operations for the C-axis table on a
machine of the construction shown below.

+Z
+Y

A C
+X

D749S30090

(1) Select the [OPTIONAL TABLE SETUP] item from the initial menu of the 3D SETUP dis-
play.
 The following setup menu is displayed for additional tables.
C-AXIS A-AXIS +X -X +Z FINISH
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
TABLE TABLE

(2) Tap the [C-AXIS OPTIONAL TABLE] menu item to select an additional table.
 The [C-AXIS OPTIONAL TABLE] menu function is activated.
C-AXIS A-AXIS +X -X +Z FINISH
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
TABLE TABLE

(3) Tap the [+Z] menu item to specify the axis of rotation of the selected table.
 The [+Z] menu function is activated.
C-AXIS A-AXIS +X -X +Z FINISH
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
TABLE TABLE

(4) Finally tap the [FINISH] menu item to terminate the particular setup mode.
 The menu is replaced with the initial menu of the 3D SETUP display.
WORKPCE FIXTURE LOCATE OPTIONAL
MATERIAL SETUP MANUALLY TABLE
SETUP SETUP

Note 1: Do not fail to deactivate both the [C-AXIS OPTIONAL TABLE] and [A-AXIS OP-
TIONAL TABLE] menu functions beforehand to perform setup operations for the
normal worktable on the 3D SETUP display.
Note 2: An alarm is raised (2074 CANNOT CHANGE TABLE AXIS) if the [–X] or [+X] menu
item is tapped for specifying the axis of rotation of the table without the [C-AXIS
OPTIONAL TABLE] nor the [A-AXIS OPTIONAL TABLE] menu function being acti-
vated.
Note 3: On the 3D MONITOR and VIRTUAL MACHINING displays are displayed a material
model which is located on the table specified last using the [OPTIONAL TABLE
SETUP] menu function, and the fixture models arranged on all the existing worktables.

12-77
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

12-5-8 Material model conversion

If a CAD model is selected as a material model (using the [WORKPCE MATERIAL CAD FILE]
menu function), it is necessary for the model to be converted for proper display on the VIRTUAL
MACHINING and 3D MONITOR displays.

1. Information given on the material model conversion

In case a CAD model is selected as a material model, messages concerning the required con-
version are displayed in the bottom right corner of the screen as enumerated below.

Material displayed on the VIRTUAL MACHINING

Message Description
and 3D MONITOR displays
 Material model is automatically created from
the information given in the common unit and
Material model conversion is not the MATERIAL unit.
yet done.
 No display of material in default of the infor-
mation concerned.

Material model conversion is The CAD model selected on the 3D SETUP dis-
complete. play is appropriately displayed on the screen.

Arranging and editing operations The material model remains displayed according
have been performed manually on to the results from the latest conversion per-
the converted material model. formed.
 A material model of another type is displayed.
No CAD model is set as a material
None
model.  No display of material in default of the infor-
mation concerned.

 Even with CONVERTED WORKPCE DO NOT EXIST or NEED CONVERT

WORKPCE AGAIN remaining displayed, a simulation or automatic operation
can be started (although an alarm will be raised).
In order for the material to be displayed correctly, however, convert the
material model using the procedures shown below.

12-78
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
2. Procedures for material model conversion

A. Manual conversion
(1) Tap the [WORKPCE CAD FILE CONVERT] menu item.
WORKPCE FIXTURE LOCATE WORKPCE >>>
MATERIAL SETUP MANUALLY CAD FILE
SETUP CONVERT

 A dialogue box appears to show the progress of material model conversion.

 The progress bar shows the progress of conversion, and the dialogue box disappears
automatically upon completion of the conversion.
 Tap the [CANCEL] button on the box to break off the conversion.
 The dialogue box stands in translucent display during conversion.
 The dialogue box remains displayed on the screen even if another display is called up.
Note 1: The material model conversion is broken off when automatic operation is started.
Note 2: Tapping the [WORKPCE CAD FILE CONVERT] menu item (for starting the ma-
terial model conversion) during automatic operation will only cause an alarm to be
raised (2087 CANNOT CONVERT WORKPCE).
Note 3: If another work number (WNo.) should be selected during material model conver-
sion, the current conversion is canceled and the material model for the program
with the new work number undergoes a conversion.
Note 4: Tapping the [WORKPCE MATERIAL SETUP] or [LOCATE MANUALLY] menu
item (for arranging and editing the material model) during material model con-
version will only cause an alarm to be raised (2088 WORKPCE CONVERTING).

B. Automatic conversion
With the message CONVERTED WORKPCE DO NOT EXIST or NEED CONVERT WORKPCE
AGAIN remaining displayed on the 3D SETUP display, calling up another display starts the
meterial model conversion automatically and the dialogue box with a progress bar appears on
the screen.

 The dialogue box with a progress bar is described above under A.

Note : The automatic conversion is always started for the currently selected program, and the
conversion for the material model of another program (with another WNo.), if in
progress, will be broken off.

12-79
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

3. Material model conversion through a confirmation dialogue box

With the message CONVERTED WORKPCE DO NOT EXIST or NEED CONVERT WORKPCE
AGAIN remaining displayed on the 3D SETUP display, a confirmation dialogue box (prompting
the operator to allow the conversion) appears on the screen in the following cases.
 The VIRTUAL MACHINING display is called up.
 The work number of the program to be run for automatic operation, or for which to
perform setup operation, is changed.

(1) Tap the [OK] button on the box, and the meterial model conversion is started and the
dialogue box with a progress bar appears on the screen.

 The dialogue box with a progress bar is described above under 2-A.

Note 1: The confirmation dialogue box is not displayed if the material model conversion con-
cerns the program currently selected on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display.
Note 2: The confirmation dialogue box appears if the material model conversion is to be done
for a program which is not currently selected on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display.
Note 3: The confirmation dialogue box is not displayed if the material model conversion con-
cerns the program currently selected for setup operation or automatic operation.
Note 4: The confirmation dialogue box appears if the material model conversion is to be done
for a program which is not currently selected for setup or automatic operation.
Note 5: The confirmation dialogue box is not displayed at all during automatic operation.

12-80
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
12-5-9 3D display operation
This section describes how to manipulate the material and fixture models displayed on the
screen.
Use fingers or the menu functions concerned to rotate, enlarge and reduce 3-D images in the
graphic display area.

 See Section 3-1 for detailed information on how to use fingers for display
operation.

<Display operation menu>

ZOOM ROTATION MOVE ZOOM >>>
IN/OUT TO FIT

1 2 3 4

XY PLANE YZ PLANE ZX PLANE XY PLANE YZ PLANE ZX PLANE 3D VIEW >>>

180° 180° 180°

5 5 5 5 5 5

TABLE FIXTURE W/P MAT COUNT >>>

SHOW / SHOW / SHOW /
FACETS
HIDE HIDE HIDE
6 7 8 9

1. ZOOM IN/OUT
Follow the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the model view.
(1) Tap the [ZOOM IN/OUT] menu item.
 A screen keyboard is displayed.
(2) Use the cursor keys as follows:
to enlarge the model view.
to reduce the model view.

D740S3065’

(3) Finally tap the [ZOOM IN/OUT] menu item anew to terminate the ZOOM IN/OUT mode.

12-81
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

2. ROTATION
Follow the procedure below to rotate the contents of the 3-D display section.
(1) Tap the [ROTATION] menu item.
 A screen keyboard is displayed.
(2) Use the cursor keys as follows:
to rotate the model upward.
to rotate the model downward.
to rotate the model leftward.
to rotate the model rightward.

D740S3066’

(3) Finally tap the [ROTATION] menu item anew to terminate the ROTATION mode.

12-82
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
3. MOVE
Follow the procedure below to move (translate) the contents of the 3-D display section.
(1) Tap the [MOVE] menu item.
 A screen keyboard is displayed.
(2) Use the cursor keys as follows:
to move (translate) the model upward.
to move (translate) the model downward.
to move (translate) the model leftward.
to move (translate) the model rightward.

D740S3067’

(3) Finally tap the [MOVE] menu item anew to terminate the MOVE mode.

4. ZOOM TO FIT
The currently displayed model can be fitted entirely in the display section, without changing its
orientation.
(1) Tap the [ZOOM TO FIT] menu item.
 The model in its entirety will fit in the display section.

ZOOM ZOOM
TO FIT TO FIT

D740S3068’

12-83
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

5. XY/YZ/ZX PLANE and XY/YZ/ZX PLANE 180°

The plane and direction of the view can be selected as required.
(1) Tap one of the menu items concerned (1 to 6 below).

XY PLANE YZ PLANE ZX PLANE XY PLANE YZ PLANE ZX PLANE 3D VIEW >>>

180° 180° 180°

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

 The view plane is changed accordingly.

XY PLANE
(from + side of Z)

YZ PLANE 180° YZ PLANE

(from – side of X) (from + side of X)

Ｚ
Ｙ

ZX PLANE 180° ZX PLANE

(from – side of Y) (from + side of Y)

XY PLANE 180°
(from – side of Z) D740S3069

(2) Finally tap the [3D VIEW] menu item to retrieve the initial three-dimensional view.

6. TABLE SHOW/HIDE
The table model can be hidden and shown as required.
(1) Tap the [TABLE SHOW/HIDE] menu item.

TABLE
SHOW /
HIDE

TABLE
SHOW /
HIDE
Table shown HIDE Table hidden
D740S3070’

12-84
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
7. FIXTURE SHOW/HIDE
The fixture model can be hidden and shown as required.
(1) Tap the [FIXTURE SHOW/HIDE] menu item.

FIXTURE
SHOW /
HIDE

FIXTURE
SHOW /
HIDE
Fixture shown 替 Fixture hidden
D740S3071’

8. W/P MAT SHOW/HIDE

The material model can be hidden and shown as required.
(1) Tap the [W/P MAT SHOW/HIDE] menu item.

W/P MAT
SHOW /
HIDE

W/P MAT
SHOW /
HIDE
Material shown Material hidden
D740S3072’

9. COUNT FACETS
(1) Tap the [COUNT FACETS] menu item.
 The NUMBER OF MODEL FACETS window appears on the screen.
The NUMBER OF MODEL FACETS window shows the total number of the faces of the material
model and the fixture models.
Note 1: If the total number of material model faces and fixture model faces exceeds 4000,
alarm 2064 MAX NUM MODEL FACETS EXCEEDED will be displayed and the face
quantity check window opened.
Note 2: Even if the total number of faces ranges from 4000 to 8000, the models specified in the
3D SETUP display will be made effective, indeed, for the SAFETY SHIELD and Virtual
Machining functions, but alarm 1105 SAFETY SHIELD CALCULATING may be prone
to occur or the Virtual Machining may decrease in operation speed.
Note 3: If the total number of faces exceeds 8000, the models specified cannot be made
effective at all for the SAFETY SHIELD and Virtual Machining functions.

12-85
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

12-5-10 Pallet model setting (only for correspondingly designed machine models)
On a correspondingly designed machine model, tap the [PALLET SETUP] item from the initial
menu of the 3D SETUP display to call up the following menu that is used to set a pallet model to
be used for the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD (ISS) function as well as on the 3D MONITOR
and VIRTUAL MACHINING displays.
PALLET PARAMET FINISH >>>
CAD FILE PALLET
READ
1 2 3

1. Selecting a pallet model from the machine component models prepared

(1) Tap the [PALLET CAD FILE] menu item.
 A window of the following format appears on the screen.

(2) Select the desired model by tapping its name in the window.
 A preview of the selected pallet model appears in the 3-D display section.

(3) Confirm the selection by tapping the [OK] button in the window.
 The selected model is set definitively as a pallet model.
(4) Finally tap the [FINISH] menu item to terminate the pallet-model setting mode.

12-86
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
2. Setting a pallet model according to the parameter settings concerned
(1) Tap the [PARAMET PALLET READ] menu item.
 The pallet model created using the relevant parameter settings is set definitively, as
shown in the 3-D display section.

(2) Finally tap the [FINISH] menu item to terminate the pallet-model setting mode.

 The parameter settings used in this type of pallet-model setting are as enumerated below.

Parameter Contents Setting range Setting unit

Table type
0: Rectangular table
SD50 0, 1 or 2 —
1: Round table
2: Chuck
SD51 Direction of the axis of rotation of a round table (Note 1) 0, 1 or 2 —
SD125
0.0001 mm
l Table size 0 to ±99999999
0.00001 in
SD130
0.0001 mm
SD131 Chamfer size of the table 0 to ±99999999
0.00001 in
BA1
0.001 mm
l Chuck size (Note 2) 0 to 99999999
0.0001 in
BA3

Note 1: Taken into account only for a round table (SD50 = 1).
Note 2: Taken into account to create a shape of chuck as pallet, on condition that
1) L110 bit 7 = 1 [The Z-axis of the machine coordinate system runs vertically],
2) BA48 ≠ 0 [A spindle head of swiveling type is mounted], and
3) SD50 = 2 [The machine table used is of the type of chuck].
In all other cases it is not possible to set, and display, a chuck model as pallet model.

 See the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List for further details of
the parameters.

12-87
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

12-6 Tool Model Setting Display

Used to register the shape data for the tools with their holders prepared in the magazine for the use in the
Function
simulation by the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD (ISS) and Virtual Machining functions.

 To show this display, position the cursor on the TOOL MODEL item in the TOOL DATA display and tap
the [MODEL EDIT] menu item.
Remarks
 If the tool model is not set, simulation will occur using a simple model that is based on the tool data
setting.

Note : Set the model of a tool in strict accordance with the settings (TOOL item above all) for
the tool on the TOOL DATA display; otherwise interference check and virtual machin-
ing cannot occur correctly.

12-6-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

A. Parametric tool model

[1] [3]

[2]

[4]

D747S30123

12-88
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
B. Rotation tool model

[1] [5]

[2]

[6]

D747S30124

 Example of model creation

D740S3060

12-89
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

C. Extrusion tool model

[1] [5]

[2]

[6]

D747S30125

 Example of model creation

D740S3144

12-90
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
D. Assembly tool model

[2]
[10]
[1]

[7]

[8] [11]

[9]

D747S30126

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description
[1] TOOL TYPE — Type of the tool
[2] TOOL MODEL NAME — Name of the tool model
[3] Diagrammatic view — Diagrammatic view of the selected tool model type
MODEL DEFINITION mm (in) Numeric data (of length and angle) of shape elements of the tool
[4]
(in parameters) degrees
[5] Graphic display — Graphical representation of the input data
MODEL DEFINITION mm (in) Numeric data for describing the tool shape in line segments and
[6]
(in shape elements) degrees arcs
HOLDER for an Maker name and model number of the holder of the selected
[7] —
assembly tool model assembly tool model
SOCKET for an Maker name and model number of the socket of the selected
[8] —
assembly tool model assembly tool model
CUTTER for an Maker name and model number of the cutter of the selected
[9] —
assembly tool model assembly tool model
TOOL DATA for an Settings on the TOOL DATA display for the tool the model of which
[10] —
assembly tool model is to be created by assembly method
[11] PREVIEW — Three-dimensional representation of the assembly tool model

12-91
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

3. Data registration
The procedure of data registration is as follows:
(1) Tap the TOOL MODEL item in the TOOL DATA display.

(2) Tap the [MODEL SELECT] menu item.

(3) To create a new tool model, name the model in the TOOL MODEL NAME field.

(4) Select the tool model setting method.

PARAM. ROTARY EXTRUDED ASSEMBLY
MODEL TOOL MODEL MODEL
MODEL
1 2 3 4

No. Menu item Function

1 PARAM. MODEL Used to set the tool shape based on the supplied parametric models.
Used to set the tool model by rotating the tool’s half profile drawn in line
2 ROTARY TOOL MODEL
segments and arcs.
Used to set the tool model by extruding by a specified length the profile of
3 EXTRUDED MODEL
the tool drawn in line segments and arcs.
Used to set the tool model by assembling holder, socket, and cutter parts
4 ASSEMBLY MODEL
into a unit.

12-92
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
A. PARAM. MODEL
(1) Select the desired model type.
 Be sure to select one that is most similar to the shape of the tool in question.

(2) Set parameters according to the diagrammatic view of the selected tool model.

 Different colors are used to indicate whether or not the geometry and size of a holder can be
defined as required by specifying parameters.

Holder Holder color Adjustable?

MAZAK
standard Black No
holder

Freely settable
White Yes
holder

12-93
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

B. ROTARY TOOL MODEL and EXTRUDED MODEL

Select these methods to draw tool shapes not included in the supplied parametric tool models.
 Select [ROTARY TOOL MODEL] to draw a half profile of the tool in continuous lines (linear
and circular segments) to be rotated by one turn. This method is useful for drawing milling
tools.
 Select [EXTRUDED MODEL] to draw the profile of the tool in continuous lines (linear and
circular segments) to be extruded. This method is useful for drawing turning tools.
<Menu functions>
No. Menu item Function
1 INCRMENT INPUT Select the menu item for incremental data input.
2 LINE Used to set the pattern (PTN) of the shape element as linear.
3 CW ARC Used to set the pattern (PTN) of the shape element as circular and clockwise.
4 CCW ARC Used to set the pattern (PTN) of the shape element as circular and counterclockwise.
5 INSERT Used to insert a new line above the one marked with the cursor.
6 ERASE Used to delete the line marked with the cursor.
Used to set the “cutter” attribute to an element of the tool shape. “Cutter” elements are
7 CUTTER
identified as the blade for cutting.
Used to set the “shank” attribute to an element of the tool shape. It will be judged as
8 SHANK
interference if a “shank” element hits the workpiece.
Used to set the “holder” attribute to an element of the tool shape. It will be judged as
9 HOLDER
interference if a “holder” element hits the workpiece.

C. ASSEMBLY MODEL
Select this method to draw a tool shape by assembling holder, socket, and cutter parts into a
desired unit.
 The tool shape can be easily created by selecting the relevant maker name and model
number.
 In addition, an image of the tool shape being created can be examined in the PREVIEW
pane.
The following flow of display operation is described below in detail:

Managing the items to be displayed

To facilitate the selection of tool parts, manage the items to be displayed
in the model number listing tree so that only those part models should be
displayed which are adequate to the particular requirements.
Selecting tool parts
Select the desired models of holder, socket, and cutter parts from the
respective model number listing trees.
Editing the tool shape
Cancel or change the existing tool parts as required.

Examining the tool shape in the PREVIEW pane

Examine the shape of the assembled tool by its graphical representation
in the PREVIEW pane.

 See the following sections for a detailed description of the respective pro-
cedures.

12-94
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
<Managing the items to be displayed in the model number listing tree>
Follow the procedure below to manage the items to be displayed in the model number listing tree
so that only those part models should be displayed which are adequate to the particular
requirements.
(1) Tap the [MODEL NO DISPLAY SETTING] menu item.
HOLDER SOCKET CUTTER HOLDER SOCKET CUTTER MODEL NO PREVIEW TOOL TOOL
DISPLAY MODEL
SELECT SELECT SELECT CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL ADJUST. DATA
SETTING MANAGE

 The MODEL NO. DISPLAY SETTING window appears on the screen.

[4] [1] [2]

[3]

No. Item Data description

[1] ITEM LIST List of available items
[2] SET CONTENT Description of the item currently selected in area [1]
Data entered with a screen keyboard for the item currently selected in area [1]
[3] Data input area
(only for an item of setting by numerical data entry)
LED for management Red or gray LEDs indicates items on which a managing operation has been
[4]
and non-management done or not, respectively.

(2) Select the desired display item and then tap the SET CONTENT area [2].
 The SET CONTENT area is made active, which is indicated by the shifting of the
magenta frame.
For an item of setting by selection
(a) Select an item.
(b) Tap an item to be nominated (or shown) in the model number listing tree to highlight its
display.
 Items selected for nomination in the tree are highlighted in blue.
 For an item to be hidden, tap the item to clear its highlighting.
For an item of setting by numerical data entry
(a) As for items of setting by numerical data entry, nomination in the tree can be limited to
those items which fall in size within the specified range.
(b) To do so, select an item, use a screen keyboard, and the key, to enter in the data
input area, and set definitively, the desired lower and upper limits in sequence.
Note : To allow all the items concerned to be nominated, however, set both lower
and upper limits to zero (0).

12-95
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

 Items on which a managing operation has been done are marked with a red LED in
the ITEM LIST area.
<Setting a tool shape>
(1) Select from the menu the type of the part to be added.
HOLDER SOCKET CUTTER HOLDER SOCKET CUTTER MODEL NO PREVIEW TOOL TOOL
DISPLAY MODEL
SELECT SELECT SELECT CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL ADJUST. DATA
SETTING MANAGE

 Parts to be assembled are divided into three types: HOLDER, SOCKET, and CUTTER.

Parts to be added Required menu item

HOLDER [HOLDER SELECT]
SOCKET [SOCKET SELECT]
CUTTER [CUTTER SELECT]

 The selected menu item is displayed in the select state, and the corresponding part
selection window appears on the screen.
(2) Proceed as follows to select the desired part:

[2]

[1]

[3]

[4]

No. Item Data description

[1] Model number listing area List of selectable items in a tree format
[2] Model image display area Image of the part selected in the model number list
[3] Detailed data display area Details of the part selected in the model number list
[4] Model number input area Used to select a part by entering its model number directly.

Note : The items displayed depend upon the part type selected.
The following two methods are available to select parts:
 Selection from the model number list
 Selection by direct entry of the model number
Selection from the model number list
Follow the procedure below to select a part from the model number list:
(a) Activate the model number listing area.
Move the magenta frame, and the highlighting of the title in magenta, onto the model
number listing area [1] by tapping it.
(b) Select the desired item.
Items are displayed in tree form, and part names (types), maker names, and model
numbers are listed in order from the top layer.

12-96
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
To display, or unfold, the items of a lower layer, tap the plus sign of an item, as shown
below.

To fold the items of a lower layer, tap the minus sign of an item, as shown below.

When a model number is selected by the cursor, the contents of that part are displayed
in model image display area [2] and detailed data display area [3].
(c) Tap the [OK] button to select the part definitively.
With the desired model number being selected, tap the [OK] button.
Note : When the selected item is not a model number, tapping the [OK] button will only
result in alarm 407 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND.
Selection by direct entry of the model number
Enter the model number directly, if known, to select the desired part.
(a) Enter the model number in the model number input area [4].
(b) Tap the [OK] button to select the part definitively.
Note : When the entered number has no corresponding data stored, tapping the [OK]
button will only result in alarm 407 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND.
(c) When the entered model number has multiple corresponding items stored, specify the
desired item with the maker name.
1. If the entered model number overlaps between different makers, select the corre-
sponding maker name.
The title of area [1] changes from MODEL No. LIST to NOMINATED LIST, and the
tree display of model number list is replaced by a list of the overlapping maker
names.
2. Select the desired maker name, and tap the [OK] button to select the part defini-
tively.
Note : The selection of a model number in the model number listing tree can be done
definitively by tapping the [OK] button even when the number has another
corresponding item nominated under different maker name.
 The selected part of the tool is indicated by the maker name and model number in the
corresponding area on the TOOLING display, and the highlighting of the menu item
selected in step (1) above is cleared.
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) to select the other parts of the tool.

<Canceling or changing the tool shape>

Canceling the existing part
(1) Select from the menu the type of the part to be canceled (or deleted).

Parts to be canceled Required menu item

HOLDER [HOLDER CANCEL]
SOCKET [SOCKET CANCEL]
CUTTER [CUTTER CANCEL]

 A message box appears.

12-97
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

(2) In response to the message prompting the confirmation, tap the [OK] button to cancel the
selected part.
To cancel the cancellation (deletion), tap the same menu item.

Changing the existing part

To change an existing part, reselect the part using the procedure described above under <Set-
ting a tool shape>. The tool shape will be reassembled using the newly selected part.

<Examining the tool shape>

Use fingers or the menu functions concerned to rotate, enlarge and reduce the tool shape in the
graphic display area.
Tapping the [PREVIEW ADJUST.] menu item replaces the other items by those for preview
adjustment. Tap the same menu item again to resume the original menu display.
HOLDER SOCKET CUTTER HOLDER SOCKET CUTTER MODEL NO PREVIEW TOOL TOOL ﾎﾙﾀﾞ ｿｹｯﾄ
DISPLAY MODEL 選択 選択
SELECT SELECT SELECT CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL ADJUST. DATA
SETTING MANAGE

<Menu for PREVIEW ADJUST.>

ZOOM ROTATION MOVE LENGTH LENGTH PREVIEW
ADJUST. ADJUST.
IN/OUT ADJUST.
X-Z Y-Z
1 2 3 4 5

<Menu functions>
No. Menu item Function
1 ZOOM IN/OUT Used to zoom in and out the 3D image.
2 ROTATION Used to rotate the 3D image.
3 MOVE Used to move (translate) the 3D image.
4 LENGTH ADJUST. X-Z Used to adjust the 3D image in its protrusion (in the Z- and X-axis directions).
5 LENGTH ADJUST. Y-Z Used to adjust the 3D image in its protrusion (in the Z- and Y-axis directions).

Tapping a menu item selects the corresponding adjustment mode (by eventually canceling the
current selection), while tapping a menu item displayed in the select state cancels the particular
adjustment mode.
Use the cursor keys on the screen keyboard to execute each menu function.
Remark : It is not possible, as appropriate, to select multiple adjustment functions at one time.
1. Select [ZOOM IN/OUT] to zoom in and out the 3D image with the cursor keys as follows:
: To zoom in
: To zoom out
: Ineffective
2. Select [ROTATION] to rotate the 3D image with the cursor keys.
Use the cursor key corresponding to the desired direction of rotation.
3. Select [MOVE] to move (translate) the 3D image with the cursor keys.
Use the cursor key corresponding to the desired direction of movement (translation).
4. Select [LENGTH ADJUST. X-Z] to adjust the 3D image in its protrusion (in the Z- and
X-axis directions) with the cursor keys as follows:
: To change the protrusion in the Z-axis direction.
: To change the protrusion in the X-axis direction.

12-98
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
5. Select [LENGTH ADJUST. Y-Z] to adjust the 3D image in its protrusion (in the Z- and
Y-axis directions) with the cursor keys as follows:
: To change the protrusion in the Z-axis direction.
: To change the protrusion in the Y-axis direction.
Note 1: The [LENGTH ADJUST.] menu functions only work on the 3D image concerned, and
do not affect at all the corresponding settings on the TOOL DATA display.
As for milling tools, the leftward and rightward keys ( and ) are of no effect.
Note 2: An assembly tool model is displayed without cutter part in the PREVIEW pane when it
has no CUTTER setting.
Such a tool model is displayed, however, on the VIRTUAL MACHINING and 3D
MONITOR displays with a simplified cutter shape created automatically from the data
settings on the TOOL DATA display.
Note 3: The TOOL DATA column for an assembly tool model only shows information on the
tool in question when the TOOLING display is called up in the flow of tool model setting
from the TOOL DATA display. The column is blank in the TOOLING display called up
from the TOOL MODEL MANAGEMENT display.
Examples of tool shape setting
Assembled shape HOLDER SOCKET CUTTER

——

4. Copying data
Follow the procedure below to create a new tool model by modifying an existing one.
(1) Select the TOOL MODEL item in the TOOL DATA display and tap the [MODEL SELECT]
menu item.
(2) Select the desired model in the resulting window and tap the [MODEL COPY] menu item.
 The TOOL MODEL COPY window appears on the screen.

(3) Set in the resulting window the name under which the selected model is to be copied.
(4) Finally tap the [OK] button to complete the copying procedure.

12-99
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

5. Deleting data
Follow the procedure below to delete the existing data.
(1) Select the TOOL MODEL item in the TOOL DATA display and tap the [MODEL SELECT]
menu item.
(2) Select the desired model in the resulting window and tap the [MODEL ERASE] menu item.
(3) Respond as required to the message in the resulting message box.
 Tap the [OK] button to delete the model.
 To cancel the deletion, tap the [CANCEL] button or the same menu item again.

6. If tool model is not set

If the tool model is not set, a simple model shape will be applied. The simple model shape is
determined based on the tool data and parameter settings.

12-100
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
12-7 TOOL MODEL MANAGEMENT Display

Used to manage (by adding, editing, and deleting data) the tool models and tool part models to be used in
Function
the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD (ISS) and Virtual Machining functions.

To show this display, position the cursor on the TOOL MODEL item in the TOOL DATA display and tap
Remarks
the [TOOL MODEL MANAGE] menu item.

12-7-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[2]

[1]

[3]

D747S30127

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

List of part models and tool models registered in the NC in a tree
format.
The tree for part models is constructed as follows:
■ Part name (type)
MODEL No. LIST
[1] — ├ Part maker name
(for parts or tools)
├ Part model number
The tree for tool models is constructed as follows:
■ Tool name (type)
├ Tool model name
[2] MODEL PICTURE — Image of the item selected in the listing tree
[3] DETAIL DATA — Details of the item selected in the listing tree

12-101
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

3. Managing data
The following describes the procedures for managing models (by adding, editing, copying, and
deleting models as well as by information change) on the TOOL MODEL MANAGEMENT
display.

A. Adding a model
Follow the procedure below to create a new part model or tool model to be added.
<Adding a part model>
(1) Tap the [ADD MODEL] menu item on the TOOL MODEL MANAGEMENT display.
(2) Tap the [ADD PART] item from the resulting menu.
(3) Perform settings as required in the TOOL PART MODEL ATTR. SETTING window.

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

No. Item Data description

TOOL PART MODEL Specify the type of the tool part model to be registered (HOLDER, MILLING, or
[1]
TYPE SOCKET).
Specify the maker name. Use the drop-down menu to select from among the
[2] MAKER NAME
existing maker names.
[3] MODEL No. Specify the model number (model name) of the tool part model to be registered.
Select from the drop-down menu the name of the tool as a part of which the tool
[4] TOOL
part model is to be registered.

(4) Select the part model setting method from the resulting menu.
For milling tool part model
PARAM. ROTARY
TOOL
MODEL
MODEL
1 2

For holder and socket part model

ROTARY
TOOL
MODEL
2

No. Menu item Function

1 PARAM. MODEL Used to set the part shape based on the supplied parametric models.
Used to set the part model by rotating its half profile drawn in line segments
2 ROTARY TOOL MODEL
and arcs.

 The TOOL PART MODEL display is called up on the screen.

(5) Proceed with data setting as required.

 See Section 12-8 for more information.

12-102
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
<Adding a tool model>
(1) Select the [ADD MODEL] menu item on the TOOL MODEL MANAGEMENT display.
(2) Select the [ADD TOOL] item from the resulting menu.
(3) Perform settings as required in the TOOL MODEL ATTRIBUTE SETTING window.

[1]
[2]

No. Item Data description

Select from the drop-down menu the tool name (type) of the tool as an item of
[1] TOOL
which the tool model is to be registered.
[2] TOOL MODEL NAME Specify the model name of the tool model to be registered.

(4) Select the tool model setting method from the resulting menu.
PARAM. ROTARY EXTRUDED ASSEMBLY
TOOL
MODEL MODEL MODEL
MODEL
1 2 3 4

No. Menu item Function

1 PARAM. MODEL Used to set the tool shape based on the supplied parametric models.
Used to set the tool model by rotating the tool’s half profile drawn in line
2 ROTARY TOOL MODEL
segments and arcs.
Used to set the tool model by extruding by a specified length the profile of
3 EXTRUDED MODEL
the tool drawn in line segments and arcs.
4 ASSEMBLY MODEL Used to set the tool model by assembling registered part models into a unit.

 The TOOL MODEL display is called up on the screen.

(5) Proceed with data setting as required.

 See Section 12-6 for more information.

B. Editing a model
Select an existing part or tool model to be edited, tap the [EDIT MODEL] menu item, and carry
out the required editing operations in the resulting display: TOOL PART MODEL display or
TOOL MODEL display according as a part model or a tool model is selected.

12-103
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

C. Copying a model
Select an existing part or tool model to be copied (for adding a somewhat modified model), tap
the [COPY MODEL] menu item, and carry out the required copying operations in the resulting
window: TOOL PART MODEL COPY window or TOOL MODEL COPY window according as a
part model or a tool model is selected.
<Copying a part model>
In the TOOL PART MODEL COPY window, set the MAKER NAME and MODEL No. items as
required within the lower NEW TOOL PART MODEL column.

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]

No. Item Data description

1 Copied TOOL PART MODEL TYPE Type of the tool part model selected in the listing tree for copying operation
2 Copied MAKER NAME Name of the maker of the tool part model to be copied
3 Copied MODEL No. Model number (model name) of the tool part model to be copied
Name of the tool as a part of which the tool part model to be copied is
4 Copied TOOL
registered
Type of the copied tool part model.
5 New TOOL PART MODEL TYPE
Automatic setting of the same type as for the original model.
As required, specify the maker name under which the copied tool part
model is to be stored. Use the drop-down menu to select from among the
6 New MAKER NAME
existing maker names.
The initial setting is the same maker name as for the original model.
As required, specify the model number (model name) under which the
7 New MODEL No. copied tool part model is to be stored.
The initial setting is the same model number as for the original model.
Name of the tool as a part of which the copied tool part model is registered.
8 New TOOL
Automatic setting of the same name as for the original model.

Note : Items other than Nos. 6 and 7 cannot be modified at all.

12-104
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
<Copying a tool model>
In the TOOL MODEL COPY window, set the TOOL MODEL NAME item as required within the
lower NEW TOOL MODEL column.

[1]
[2]

[3]
[4]

No. Item Data description

1 Copied TOOL Name (Type) of the tool model selected in the listing tree for copying operation
2 Copied TOOL MODEL NAME Model name of the tool model to be copied
Name (Type) of the copied tool model.
3 New TOOL
Automatic setting of the same name as for the original model.
Specify the model name under which the copied tool model is to be stored.
4 New TOOL MODEL NAME
The initial setting is the same model name as for the original model.

Note : Items other than No. 4 cannot be modified at all.

D. Changing a model’s information

Select an existing part or tool model to be changed in its information, tap the [CHANGE MODEL
INFO] menu item, and carry out the required changing operations in the resulting window:
CHANGE TOOL PART MODEL INFO window or CHANGE TOOL MODEL INFO window
according as a part model or a tool model is selected.
<Changing a part model’s information>
In the CHANGE TOOL PART MODEL INFO window, modify the MAKER NAME and MODEL No.
items as required within the lower NEW TOOL PART MODEL INFO column.

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]

No. Item Data description

Type of the tool part model selected in the listing tree for changing the
1 Old TOOL PART MODEL TYPE
information
2 Old MAKER NAME Name of the maker of the tool part model to be changed in information
Model number (model name) of the tool part model to be changed in
3 Old MODEL No.
information
Name of the tool as a part of which the tool part model to be changed in
4 Old TOOL
information is registered

12-105
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

No. Item Data description

Type of the tool part model with new information.
5 New TOOL PART MODEL TYPE
Automatic setting of the same type as for the old model.
As required, specify the maker name under which the tool part model with
new information is to be stored. Use the drop-down menu to select from
6 New MAKER NAME
among the existing maker names.
The initial setting is the same maker name as for the old model.
As required, specify the model number (model name) under which the tool
7 New MODEL No. part model with new information is to be stored.
The initial setting is the same model number as for the old model.
Name of the tool as a part of which the tool part model with new information
8 New TOOL is registered.
Automatic setting of the same name as for the old model.

Note : Items other than Nos. 6 and 7 cannot be modified at all.

<Changing a tool model’s information>

In the CHANGE TOOL MODEL INFO window, modify the TOOL MODEL NAME item as
required within the lower NEW TOOL MODEL INFO column.

[1]
[2]

[3]
[4]

No. Item Data description

Name (Type) of the tool model selected in the listing tree for changing the
1 Old TOOL
information
2 Old TOOL MODEL NAME Model name of the tool model to be changed in information
Name (Type) of the tool model with new information.
3 New TOOL
Automatic setting of the same name as for the old model.
Specify the model name under which the tool model with new information is
4 New TOOL MODEL NAME to be stored.
The initial setting is the same model name as for the old model.

Note : Items other than No. 4 cannot be modified at all.

E. Erasing a model
(1) Select the part or tool model to be erased, and tap the [ERASE MODEL] menu iem.
 A message box appears.
(2) Tap the [OK] button to confirm the erasure of the selected model.

12-106
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
F. Importing the maker’s part data
Follow the procedure below to import the data of the tool parts (holder, socket, cutter) to be
assembled into a unit.
Note : Only data prepared by Mazak can be imported
(1) Tap , [File] and the [OOL PART MODEL IMPORT] option in that order to open the
TOOL PART MODEL IMPORT window.

(2) Tap the [BROWSE] button to select the folder containing the desired part data.
(3) Select the desired part models.

 Tap the [SELECT ALL] button to select all the listed files.
 Tap the [ALL CANCEL] button to cancel the current selection in its entirety.
(4) Tap the [OK] button to start the importing process.
The progress of the importing process is indicated in the progress bar section at the lower
right corner of the window.
 The window will automatically be closed upon completion of importing.

G. Managing the items to be displayed in the MODEL No. LIST area

As required, manage the items to be displayed in the MODEL No. LIST area in a tree format.

 See the description given under 3-C in Subsection 12-6-1 for more infor-
mation.

12-107
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

12-8 TOOL PART MODEL Display

Used to register tool part models together with their holder models for the construction of an assembly tool
Function
model.

Remarks To show this display, use the [ADD PART] menu function on the TOOL MODEL MANAGEMENT display.

12-8-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

A. Parametric tool part model

[1] [4]

[2]

[3]

[5]

D747S30128E

12-108
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
B. Rotation tool part model

[1] [6]

[2]

[3]

[7]
[8]

D747S30129E

C. Rotation tool holder model

[1] [6]

[2]

[3]

[7]
[8]

D747S30130E

12-109
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description
[1] TOOL — Type of the tool part model to be set
TOOL PART MODEL Model number (model name) of the tool part model to be set
[2] —
(NAME)
[3] MAKER NAME — Name of the maker of the tool part model to be set
[4] Diagrammatic view — Diagrammatic view of the selected type of tool part model
MODEL DEFINITION mm (in) Numeric data (of length and angle) of shape elements of the part
[5]
(in parameters) degrees
Graphical representation of the input data.
[6] Graphic display —
The tip of a milling cutter part is indicated by a blue disk.
[7] Scale — Scale for the graphics being displayed
MODEL DEFINITION mm (in) Numeric data for describing the tool shape in continuous linear and
[8]
(in shape elements) degrees circular segments

3. Data registration
The procedure of data registration is as follows:
(1) Tap the [ADD MODEL] menu item on the TOOL MODEL MANAGEMENT display.
(2) Tap the [ADD PART] item in the resulting menu.
(3) Perform settings as required in the TOOL PART MODEL ATTR. SETTING window.

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

No. Item Data description

TOOL PART MODEL Specify the type of the tool part model to be registered (HOLDER or MILLING).
[1]
TYPE
Specify the maker name. Use the drop-down menu to select from among the
[2] MAKER NAME
existing maker names.
[3] MODEL No. Specify the model number (model name) of the tool part model to be registered.
Select from the drop-down menu the name of the tool as a part of which the tool
[4] TOOL
part model is to be registered.

(4) Select the part model setting method from the resulting menu.
For milling tool part model
PARAM. ROTARY
MODEL TOOL
MODEL
1 2

For holder part model

ROTARY
TOOL
MODEL
2

<Menu functions>
No. Menu item Function
Used to set the tool part model by selecting a pattern (type) and specifying
1 PARAM. MODEL
its dimensions.
Used to set the tool part model by rotating its half profile drawn in line
2 ROTARY TOOL MODEL
segments and arcs.

12-110
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
A. PARAM. MODEL for setting a tool part model

(1) Select the desired part model type. Be sure to select one that is most similar to the shape of
the tool part in question.

(2) Set parameters according to the diagrammatic view of the selected tool part model.

<Menu functions>
INCRMENT MODEL DATA TOOL
INPUT SELECT CHECK MODEL
MANAGE
1 2 3 4

No. Menu item Function

1 INCRMENT INPUT Select the menu item for incremental data input.
2 MODEL SELECT Used to open the MODEL TYPE SELECT window.
Used to check the entered data for admissibility.
3 DATA CHECK Any inadmissibility found is indicated by an alarm message (495 INCORRECT CAD
MODEL DATA).
TOOL MODEL Used to change over for the TOOL MODEL MANAGEMENT display.
4
MANAGE

12-111
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

B. ROTARY TOOL MODEL for setting a milling-tool or tool-holder part model

Select this method to draw a milling tool’s or holder’s shape not included in the supplied
parametric tool models. Select [ROTARY TOOL MODEL] and draw a half profile of the part in
continuous lines (linear and circular segments) to be rotated by one turn.
<Use of [ROTARY TOOL MODEL] for setting a milling-tool part model>

 Menu for setting a FIG PTN item

LINE CW ARC CCW ARC TOOL TIP DATA INSERT ERASE TOOL
POINT CHECK MODEL
SETTING FILE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

 Menu for setting an X, Y or R item

INCRMENT INSERT ERASE TOOL
INPUT MODEL
FILE
9 6 7 8

 Menu for setting a PART item

CUTTER SHANK INSERT ERASE TOOL
MODEL
FILE
10 11 6 7 8

12-112
 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION 12
<Use of [ROTARY TOOL MODEL] for setting a tool-holder part model>

 Menu for setting a FIG PTN item

LINE CW ARC CCW ARC TOOL TIP DATA INSERT ERASE TOOL
POINT CHECK MODEL
SETTING FILE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

 Menu for setting an X, Y or R item

INCRMENT INSERT ERASE TOOL
INPUT MODEL
FILE
9 6 7 8

<Menu functions>
No. Menu item Function
1 LINE Used to set the pattern (PTN) of the shape element as linear.
2 CW ARC Used to set the pattern (PTN) of the shape element as circular and clockwise.
3 CCW ARC Used to set the pattern (PTN) of the shape element as circular and counterclockwise.
Used to open the TOOL TIP POINT SETTING window.
Enter in the FIG No. text box the number of the shape element the ending point of
which is to be specified as the tip point of the tool part model.
TOOL TIP POINT
4
SETTING

Used to check the entered data for admissibility. Any inadmissibility found is indicated
5 DATA CHECK
by an alarm message.
Tap the menu item and then tap the [OK] button in the resulting message box to insert
6 INSERT
a new line above the one marked with the cursor.
Tap the menu item and then tap the [OK] button in the resulting message box to delete
7 ERASE
the line marked with the cursor.
8 TOOL MODEL FILE Used to change over for the TOOL MODEL MANAGEMENT display.
9 INCRMENT INPUT Select the menu item for incremental data input.
Used to set the “cutter” attribute to an element of the tool shape. “Cutter” elements are
10 CUTTER
identified as the blade for cutting.

12-113
12 DISPLAYS FOR THE 3-D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION

No. Menu item Function

Used to set the “shank” attribute to an element of the tool shape. It will be judged as
11 SHANK
interference if a “shank” element hits the workpiece.

Note 1: For tool-holder part models, the [TOOL TIP POINT SETTING], [CUTTER], and
[SHANK] items are not displayed in the menu concerned.
Note 2: To describe the shape of a tool-holder part model, enter the dimensions X and Y on the
assumption that the zero-point mark displayed (in the XY-plane) denotes the center of
the spindle nose.

4. Editing the existing data

On the TOOL MODEL MANAGEMENT display, position the cursor on an existing tool part
model to be edited, tap the [EDIT MODEL] menu item, and carry out the required editing
operations in the resulting TOOL PART MODEL display.

12-114 E
 OPTION 13
13 OPTION

13-1 Machining Management Functions

13-1-1 General
The machining management functions are designed so that machining management information
for each pallet can be managed by saving the information into a PALLET MANAGEMENT
display area and pallet ID information separate from the machining program data field. This
allows the machining program sequence to be changed according to the status of the workpiece
without updating the program.
The following four functions are provided for machining management:
 Scheduled-operation function
Allows the machining sequence to be designated for each pallet on the PALLET MANAGE-
MENT display. This eliminates the need for program updating.
 External unit skipping function
Allows the MMS unit and subprogram unit of a machining program to be designated on the
PALLET MANAGEMENT display as the program units to be skipped.
 External multi-piece machining function
Allows a multi-piece machining process to be included in a machining program by designating
that process on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.
 Fixture offsetting function
Allows offsetting data from a reference pallet to be designated on the PALLET MANAGE-
MENT display. Thus, constant machining accuracy can be achieved even when workpieces
of the same type are machined using multiple pallets.

13-1
13 OPTION

13-1-2 PALLET MANAGEMENT display

1. Displayed data

[6]
[7]

[8]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

[9]

[10]

D747S30131E
Displayed data items for each function are described below.

13-1-3 Scheduled-operation function

1. Data of the PALLET MANAGEMENT display

Data displayed for the scheduled-operation function ([1] to [5]) is described below.
Display data description (1/4)
No. Data name Description
[1] PALLET Number of pallets that is initially set for the particular machine specifications.
[2] WNo. Work number, or name, of the machining main program to be used for each pallet.
Note : Not displayed when parameter L53 is set ot zero (0).
[3] STATE The machining status is displayed for each pallet.
(Blank) ..............Indicates that machining for the pallet will not be performed.
“” is displayed under ORDER.
READY .............Indicates that the pallet is ready for machining.
CUTTING .........Indicates that machining is in progress.
FINISHED ........Indicates that machining has been completed.
(Alarm No.) .......Identifies the alarm that has occurred during machining.
UNFINISH ........Indicates that machining has been aborted by resetting.
[4] ORDER The machining order is displayed for each pallet.
Machining will not be performed if the pallet number has a displayed “” or UNFINISH.
[5] NUMBER The total count of times of machining up to that time is displayed. The maximum count is 9999.

13-2
 OPTION 13
2. Data editing methods
WNo., STATE, ORDER, NUMBER and multiple process numbers must be set for editing
scheduled-operation data. These methods are described below.

A. Setting WNo.
Set the work numbers of the main programs to be executed for each pallet.
(1) Tap the [EDIT] menu item on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.
So many pallets as predetermined for the particular machine specifications will then be
displayed.
(2) Tap the WNo. item. of the intended pallet.
No. PALLET WNo. STATE ORDER NUMBER
1 1
2 2
3


(3) Set the work number of the program to be executed.

Example : To execute the program of work number 123:
<Procedure 1>
Tap the keys 1 2 3 in that order.
<Procedure 2>
(a) Tap the [PROGRAM FILE] menu item.
 The WORK No. SELECT window is displayed.
(b) Select the work number 123 and then tap the [OK] buttton.
Note : Use the WORK No. SELECT window to select a program whose WNo. (or name)
consists of more than 8 digits (or characters).

B. Setting data in the STATE column

Set the state of machining on each pallet.
(1) Tap the STATE item.
No. PALLET WNo. STATE ORDER NUMBER
1 1 123
2 2
3

 The inquiry message PALLET STATE <MENU>? is displayed in a message box.
(2) Tap the [SET END (READY)] menu item to set READY if operational setup for palletizing
has been finished and the pallet is ready for machining.
 If READY is set, the machining order will also be set automatically. Data displayed under
ORDER item at this time will be the number next to that of the last pallet having a
displayed READY.
To cancel READY present under STATE item, tap the [CANCEL] menu item. STATE
item will become blank, “” will be displayed under ORDER, and the data in the ORDER
column for other pallets will be automatically updated.

13-3
13 OPTION

Example 1: Canceling READY on the PALLET 6 line.

No. PALLET WNo. STATE ORDER NUMBER
1 1 10 READY 3
2 2 20 READY 1
3 3 30 READY 2
4 4 40 READY 5
5 5 50 READY 6
6 6 60 READY 4
7


Tap the [CANCEL] menu item.

No. PALLET WNo. STATE ORDER NUMBER

1 1 10 READY 3
2 2 20 READY 1
3 3 30 READY 2
4 4 40 READY 4
5 5 50 READY 5
6 6 60  
7


C. Changing data in the ORDER column

When changing the machining order that has already been set, tap the ORDER item, enter new
data using a screen keyboard. The ORDER item data for other pallets are automatically updated.
Example : Chaging the data of ORDER on the PALLET 4 line to “1”.
No. PALLET WNo. STATE ORDER NUMBER
1 1 10 READY 5
2 2 20 READY 1
3 3 30 READY 2
4 4 40 READY 4
5 5 50 READY 3
6 6 60 READY 6
7


Tap the keys 1 and .

No. PALLET WNo. STATE ORDER NUMBER

1 1 10 READY 5
2 2 20 READY 2
3 3 30 READY 3
4 4 40 READY 1
5 5 50 READY 4
6 6 60 READY 6
7 The data updates to “1”.


13-4
 OPTION 13
D. Setting data in the NUMBER column
Data from 0 to 9999 can be set and the parts count will be performed from the set data at the end
of machining.
Note 1: If a data greater than 9999 is set under NUMBER item, the parts count will not be
performed at the end of machining.
Note 2: Parts count will be performed irrespective of the data set under NUMBER in the END
unit of the machining program.

E. Setting multiple process

If the machining program for one pallet is structured for each workpiece and/or each process
separately, multiple main programs can be set by setting multiple processes.
<Setting multiple process>
(1) Tap the pallet number for which multiple processes are to be executed.
Example : Setting multiple processes for PALLET 3:
No. PALLET WNo. STATE ORDER NUMBER
1 1 10 READY 5
2 2 20 READY 2
3 3 30 READY 3
4 4 40 READY 1
5 5 50 READY 4
6 6 60 READY 6
7


(2) Tap the [PLURAL PROCESS] menu item.

 A message box appears.
(3) Tap the [OK] button.
 For the PALLET No. specified in Step (1), multiple processes are set.
No. PALLET WNo. STATE ORDER NUMBER
1 1 10 READY 5
2 2 20 READY 2
3 3 
4 3 30 READY 3
5 4 40 READY 1
6 5 50 READY 4
7 6 60 READY 6


<Erasing multiple process setting>

(1) Tap the position of that process of all those previously set for the multi-process pallet that is
to be erased.
Example :
No. PALLET WNo. STATE ORDER NUMBER
1 1 10 READY 5
2 2 20 READY 2
3 3
4 3 30 READY 3
5 4 40 READY 1
6 5 50 READY 4
7 6 60 READY 6


13-5
13 OPTION

(2) Tap the [ERASE] menu item.

 A message box appears.
(3) Tap the [OK] button.
No. PALLET WNo. STATE ORDER NUMBER
1 1 10 READY 5
2 2 20 READY 2
3 3 30 READY 3
4 4 40 READY 1
5 5 50 READY 4
6 6 60 READY 6
7


F. ALL ERASE
This function clears the entire schedule that has been set (A to E).
Tap the [ALL ERASE] menu item, and then enter “–9999”.
The display will then be initialized.
Use this function also for initialization in the initial status of the NC system (that is, immediately
after the NC system has been loaded).

13-6
 OPTION 13
3. Starting scheduled operation and its progress display
The procedure for starting scheduled operation and the display of the progress of scheduled
operation are described below.

A. Starting procedure and progress display

(1) Enter necessary data on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.
(2) Make the scheduled-operation mode effective using an external switch.
 The SCH. OPERAT message will be displayed in the upper part of the display.

(3) Press the button.

 Machining will begin with the workpiece of machining ORDER (column [4]) number 1 and
the STATE indication (column [3]) will change into CUTTING.
When machining is completed, FINISHED and  will be displayed under STATE and
ORDER, respectively, and new data for other pallets will be displayed under ORDER.
Example : Change of progress display
No. PALLET WNo. STATE ORDER NUMBER
1 1 10 READY 4
2 2 20 READY 2
3 3 30 CUTTING 1
4 4 40 READY 5
5 5 50 READY 3
6 6 60 READY 6
7

Machining PALLET 3 is completed.
STATE of PALLET 2 is changed to “CUTTING”.

No. PALLET WNo. STATE ORDER NUMBER

1 1 10 READY 3
2 2 20 CUTTING 1
3 3 30 FINISHED 
4 4 40 READY 4
5 5 50 READY 2
6 6 60 READY 5
7


The machining process that corresponds to the pallet number having a newly displayed 1 in
the ORDER column will start.

13-7
13 OPTION

B. Precautions
1. Editing in the scheduled-operation mode
 Even during scheduled operation, editing can be done on the PALLET MANAGEMENT
display, except for the line of 1 under ORDER (machining now in progress).
See “2. Data editing methods”, for further details of editing.
 If the machining for the pallet of CUTTING is finished during EDIT mode, the machine

will be stopped. In this case, tap the [EDIT END] menu item, then press the
button to continue machining.
2. Restarting in the scheduled-operation mode
Restarting in the scheduled-operation mode can be done in the following case only:
 If the work number for ORDER 1 is the same as that displayed on the POSITION display.
<Remarks on the UNIT SKIP SWITCH function>
If the UNIT SKIP SWITCH is ON, execution of that unit will be skipped and the immediately
succeeding unit will be executed.
3. Other precautions

 Tapping the key changes CUTTING to UNFINISH. To perform machining for the
pallet anew, set READY under STATE.
 If an alarm occurs during machining, the alarm will be processed as follows:
1) The alarm number is displayed under STATE.
2)  is displayed under ORDER, and the machining order is updated.
3) If the alarm is of such a type that machining can be continued, the machining operation
will start from the machining program preset for the next process. If machining cannot
be continued, it will terminate on occurrence of the alarm.
Note : Do not set a multi-process program that enables machining to be done only after the
preprocess has been completed. If such a program is set and an alarm occurs, the
previous process will remain aborted and the next process will begin. Use a
subprogram if such programming is required.

 The external switch must be turned off when machining is to be done in the normal mode.
If machining is done in the scheduled-operation mode, scheduled operation will be carried
out with automatically updated work numbers.
CAUTION When SCH. OPERAT is displayed in the upper part of the POSITION display, then
scheduled-operation is in effect.
When SCH. OPERAT is not displayed on the POSITION display, then normal-mode
operation is in effect.

13-8
 OPTION 13
13-1-4 External unit skipping function

1. Data of the PALLET MANAGEMENT display

The data items displayed for the external unit skipping function ([6] to [8]) are detailed below.
Display data description (2/4)
No. Data name Description
[6] PALLET No. The pallet number corresponding to data [1] is displayed.
[7] WNo. The work number corresponding to data [2] is displayed.
[8] UNIT SKIP SWITCH The program is controlled according to ON (skipping), OFF (no skipping) of the bit
corresponding to a skip number from 0 to 9 in that program.

2. Entering data
Set UNIT SKIP SWITCH as follows to activate the external unit skipping function.
(1) Tap the [EDIT] menu item.
(2) Tap the intended pallet number.
(3) Tap the [PLT DATA EDIT] menu item.
(4) Tap the intended switch number directly, or tap the [ON] or [OFF] menu item to perform the
required UNIT SKIP SWITCH settings.
(5) Tap the [EDIT END] menu item on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.
(6) Set either from “0” to “9” in the $ field of the subprogram unit on the PROGRAM display.

 Refer to the PROGRAMMING MANUAL (MAZATROL Program) for the

setting procedure.

3. Starting operation

 See the description under 3. of Subsection 13-1-3. The operating procedure

is the same.

13-9
13 OPTION

4. Operation
A specific example is shown below.

Example:

Pallet 1 Pallet 2

WNo. WNo. WNo. WNo.

100 200 100 200

Unmachined Unmachined
Machined

M3S045

Program WNo. 1 (Main program)

UNo. UNIT X Y th Z C A
2 WPC-1 –300. –300. 0. –400. 0. 0.
UNo. UNIT WORK.No. $ REPEAT No.
3 SUB PRO 100 2 1 
UNo. UNIT WORK.No. $ REPEAT No.
4 SUB PRO 200 3 1 

PALLET MANAGEMENT display

No. PALLET WNo. STATE ORDER NUMBER

No. 1
PALLET No. 1 WNo. 1
1 1 1 READY 1 0
2 2 1 READY 2 0 UNIT SKIP SWITCH
3 3
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ON 
4 4
OFF         

No. 2
PALLET No. 2 WNo. 1

UNIT SKIP SWITCH

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ON 
OFF         

 For pallet 1, since UNIT SKIP SWITCH 2 is set to ON, UNo. 3 (that is, subprogram No. 100)
will be skipped.
 For pallet 2, since UNIT SKIP SWITCH 3 is set to ON, UNo. 4 (that is, subprogram No. 200)
will be skipped.

13-10
 OPTION 13
13-1-5 External multi-piece machining function

1. Data of the PALLET MANAGEMENT display

The data item displayed for the external multi-piece machining function ([9]) is detailed below.
Display data description (3/4)
No. Data name Description
[9] MULTIPLE SWITCH Multi-piece machining will be performed if the bits corresponding to the multi-piece
machining flag (MULTI FLAG) on the program are correspondingly set.

2. Entering data
Set MULTIPLE SWITCH as follows to activate the external multi-piece machining function.
(1) Tap the [EDIT] menu item.
(2) Tap the intended pallet number.
(3) Tap the [PLT DATA EDIT] menu item.
(4) Tap the MAIN, A, B, C, or D data item in the MULTIPLE SWITCH column.
(5) Enter “0” or “1.”
(6) Set the switches by repeating procedures (4) and (5) to specify a 10-bit number of 0s or 1s.
(7) Tap the [EDIT END] menu item.
(8) If you have selected either one from A to D in step (4) above, set that selected switch in the
$ field of the subprogram unit on the PROGRAM display.

 Refer to the PROGRAMMING MANUAL (MAZATROL Program) for the

setting procedure.

3. Starting operation

 See the description under 3. of Subsection 13-1-3. The operating procedure

is the same.

4. Operation
An operation example is shown below.

Example:

Pallet 1 Pallet 2
Unmachined Machined Machined

Unmachined

M3S046

13-11
13 OPTION

Program WNo. 1 (Main program)

UNo. MAT. INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CST IRN 50. 1 5  2 1100010101 100. 100.
UNo. UNIT PALLET No. (a)
1 PALT CHG 1
UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y th Z C A
2 WPC-1 -300. -300. 0. -400. 0. 0.
UNo. UNIT
3 LINE OUT ~
SNo. TOOL
1 END MILL ~
FIG PTN
1 SQR ~
UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT No.
4 SUB PRO 100 A 1 
UNo. UNIT CONTI. NUMBER
5 END 0 1

Program WNo. 100 (Subprogram)

UNo. MAT. INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CST IRN 50. 1 OFFSET   
OFS X Y th Z
Equivalent to
1 10 10 MULTI FLAG (b)
2 20 20 0000000111
3 30 30
UNo. UNIT
1 DRILLING ~
SNo. TOOL
1 CTR-DR ~
2 DRILL ~
FIG PTN Z X Y
1 PT 0 0 0 ~
UNo. UNIT CONTI. NUMBER
2 END 1 0

Program WNo. 2 (Main program)

UNo. MAT. INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CST IRN 50. 1 5  2 1100010101 100. 100.
UNo. UNIT PALLET No. (a)
1 PALT CHG 2
UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y th Z C A
2 WPC-1 -300. -300. 0. -400. 0. 0.
UNo. UNIT
3 LINE OUT ~
SNo. TOOL
1 END MILL ~
FIG PTN
1 SQR ~
UNo. UNIT WORK No. $ REPEAT No.
4 SUB PRO 100 A 1 
UNo. UNIT CONTI. NUMBER
5 END 0 1

13-12
 OPTION 13
PALLET MANAGEMENT display

No. PALLET WNo. STATE ORDER NUMBER No. 1

PALLET No. 1 WNo. 1
1 1 1 READY 1 0
2 2 2 READY 2 0 UNIT SKIP SWITCH
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
3 3
ON
4 4 OFF          
5
MULTIPLE SWITCH
6 10 6 5 1
7 MAIN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A 0 00 00 00000
B 0 00 00 00000
C 0 00 00 00000
D 0 00 00 00000
No. 2
PALLET No. 2 WNo. 1
UNIT SKIP SWITCH
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ON
OFF          
MULTIPLE SWITCH
10 6 5 1
MAIN 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A 0 00 00 00101
B 0 00 00 00000
C 0 00 00 00000
D 0 00 00 00000

The machining is executed according to the common data which is included both in MAIN and
MULTI FLAG of the main program, or both in A to D (set in $ of the subprogram unit) and MULTI
FLAG of the subprogram.
 Pallet 1
(Main program) MAIN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (If all bits are 0s, they will all be handled the
same as 1s.)
MAIN 1111111111
MULTI FLAG 1100010101
Common 1100010101  (a) (Main program)

(Subprogram) A 0000000000 (If all bits are 0s, they will all be handled the
same as 1s.)
A 1111111111
MULTI FLAG 0000000111
Common 0000000111  (b) (Subprogram)

 Pallet 2
(Main program)
MAIN 1100000000
MULTI FLAG 1100010101
Common 1100000000

(Subprogram)
A 0000000101
MULTI FLAG 0000000111
Common 0000000101

13-13
13 OPTION

13-1-6 Fixture offsetting function

1. Data of the PALLET MANAGEMENT display

The data item displayed for the fixture offsetting function ([10]) is detailed below.
Display data description (4/4)
No. Data name Description
[10] FIX. OFFSET The amounts of offset from the reference point of a reference pallet at a table angle of
0 degrees are input to X, Y, and Z with plus or minus signs.

2. Entering data
Set FIX. OFFSET as follows to activate the fixture offsetting function.
(1) Tap the [EDIT] menu item.
(2) Tap the intended pallet number.
(3) Tap the [PLT DATA EDIT] menu item.
(4) Tap the X, Y or Z data item in the FIX. OFFSET column.
(5) Set the amount of offset from the reference point of a reference pallet.
(6) Tap the [EDIT END] menu item.

3. Meaning of fixture offset data

When, as shown below, the reference point differs between the reference pallet fixture (indicated
by a discontinuous line) and the intended fixture (indicated by a continuous line), set the amounts
of offset at a table angle of 0 degrees (x, y, z) as the offsetting data for the fixture you are
going to use.
The offsetting data thus set will be added to the program coordinates and the machining program
will operate on the coordinate system having the added data.

In the XY-plane x

y +Y

+X

Fixture M3S047

In the XZ-plane In the YZ-plane y

x

z +Z z +Z

+X +Y

Remarks: Broken line: Reference pallet fixture

Continuous line: Non-reference pallet fixture
x, y, z: Amounts of offset from the reference point
Fixture offset data of a reference pallet M3S048’

13-14
 OPTION 13
4. Notes
Strictly observe the following notes when using the fixture offsetting function:
1. Data containing the fixture offsetting data is displayed in the field of WPC (workpiece
coordinates) of the POSITION display.
2. Set fixture offsetting data to 0 if the fixture offsetting function is not to be used.
3. Fixture offsetting will not be performed if the table is rotated using a B-code in a manual
programming unit or in an EIA/ISO program. (Fixture offsetting function, however, is
available for the table rotation by an INDEX unit.)
4. Since the fixture offsetting function only corrects offsets parallel to the rectangular axes of
coordinates, no corrections are performed for offsets of rotation on any axis.
In the XY-plane

+Y

+X

Offsetting possible Offsetting impossible

M3S049

In a plane parallel to the Z-axis

Offsetting possible Offsetting impossible

M3S050

5. By an MMS unit (for coordinate measurement), data not containing the fixture offsetting data
is written into the coordinate data items of the program.
13-1-7 Parameters
The following lists parameters related to the machining management functions:
Parameters related to the PALLET MANAGEMENT display
Parameter Setting value Description
0 The machining management functions become invalid.
L54 1 Valideated for operation of MAZATROL-FMS with pallet ID-function.
2 Machining management operation for multiple-pallet system is selected.
0 Work numbers are not displayed on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.
L53
1 Work numbers are displayed on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.

13-15
13 OPTION

13-2 Function Related to EIA/ISO Program (Option)

When the EIA/ISO ONLY function is made valid in order to operate the NC unit in EIA/ISO
program mode only, the screen configuration and various display modes will change to provide
convenience during machining with EIA/ISO programs. This function is valid only when EIA/ISO
programming option is added.

13-2-1 Setting method

(1) Call up the DIAGNOSIS (ALARM) display.
(2) Tap , [Setup] and the [EIA/ISO ONLY] option in that order.

When Steps (1) and (2) are performed once again, the check mark at the [EIA/ISO ONLY] item
will be cleared to indicate that the function has become invalid.

13-2-2 Configuration of displays

If the EIA/ISO ONLY function is made valid, the displays that the NC unit provides are of the
configuration shown in the following pages.

13-16
 OPTION 13
Configuration of displays - when EIA/ISO ONLY is made valid -

POSITION PROGRAM MONITOR PART SHAPE WORK No. SELECT DATA I/O
RESTART HANDLE INTERUPT COMPARISON STOP 

WORK No. SELECT

EIA MONITOR TRACE WORK OFFSET SETUP MACRO ADDITIONAL

VARIABLE WPC

WORK No. SELECT WORK No. SELECT POSITION POSITION

PART SHAPE PROGRAM MONITOR
DYNAMIC MEASURE
RESTART RESTART
OFFSET
COMPARISON STOP COMPARISON STOP 

STRAIGHTNESS
GRAPH


3D MONITOR 3D SETUP MACHINING - MACHINING AUTO MEASURE

MONITORING NAVIGATION -
RESULT

PROGRAM WORK No. SELECT

(EIA)

TOOL PATH PROGRAM MONITOR PROGRAM FILE

CHECK

PART SHAPE

VIRTUAL MACHINING
MACHINING NAVIGATION -
PREDICT

TOOL OFFSET POSITION DIAGNOSIS DATA ERASE

 (USER) Accumulated Time
(ALARM)

TOOL DATA
DIAGNOSIS RUNNING MAINTENANCE GRAPHIC COND MONITOR
(MAKER) CONTROL MAINTENANCE
(VERSION)

LADDER
USER MONITOR
PARAMETER
Main display

Sub-display

Window
MACHINE PLC
PARAMETER PARAMETER  Optional
Can be called up mutually by
tapping the menu item.

D747S30132E

13-17
13 OPTION

13-2-3 POSITION display

POSITION display is changed as follows when the EIA/ISO ONLY function is made valid.

1. Displayed data when the EIA/ISO ONLY function is made valid

[1]

[2]

D747S30133

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Work number and Name of the program being executed
O a b
[1] O – (a’ ) (b’ )
a a’: Work number
b b’: Program name
N a – a’
[2] N – a: Number of the sequence being executed
a’: Number of the block being executed

13-18
 OPTION 13
13-3 Workpiece Measurement Printout Function

13-3-1 Function overview

The workpiece measurement printout system has been developed to take automatic measure-
ments of hole and boss diameter, groove and step width, center to center distance, step
differences and other distances between randomly selected points, angles of slant and the like,
and to provide output of the measuring results (via RS-232C or onto the local disk).
When the printout is made, the system will compare the actual measured value with the desired
value and judge whether or not the results fall within the tolerance range. It will also output the
results of this judgment. Further, it will also automatically conduct tool data compensation when
measurement is made of a surface machined by an end mill.
These functions can be used by embedding a designation for calling a macro program for the
execution of workpiece measurement printout within normal machining programs that have been
written either in MAZATROL programming format or in EIA/ISO code. This type of application will
allow the preservation of initial machining accuracy as well as the rapid discovery of any
non-conforming parts.
Note : Use a connector for USB-RS232C conversion to use an RS-232C cable.

Touch sensor

MAZATROL

Measurement

Measured value
Desired value Judgement

End mill WNo.

Compensation
Desired value
Measured value
Error
Output Compensation
data

Output of measuring results

(via RS-232C, or onto the local disk)

Desired value

Overview of workpiece measurement output function D740SC001

13-19
13 OPTION

1. Measurement function
Random workpiece lengths or angles are measured by a touch sensor. A wide variety of mea-
surement patterns are available for selection. Patterns available are described in the following
charts.
Details of measurement patterns
Measurement group Measurement patterns
A. Diameter/Width measure-
ment:
Designate center coordinate d d
data and desired diameter ID and OD
and width.
Inside diameter Outside diameter

w w
Groove and
step width
Groove width Step width

B. Measurement between two Y Z

random points:
Using surface, groove or
step center, hole or boss Surface X
center or corner measure-
ment, any two points can
be selected for the X and Y surfaces Z surface
distance between them to
be measured.
Depending on the type of
point combination, mea-
surement can be done for Groove and
step difference, from step center
center to center, and
between hole center and Groove center Step center
surface. (Refer to the
following table.)

Hole and
boss center

Hole center Boss center

Outside and
inside corners
Outside corner Inside corner

C. Slant measurements:
Measurement of two points a * Angle can be obtained on the
on a surface to obtain the XY-, XZ- or YZ-plane.
angle of inclination.

Angle of indication
M3S072

13-20
 OPTION 13
Examples of measurement between two randomly selected points

X-surfcace to X-surface (step) Step center X to X-surface

x x
P1
P1

P2 P2

Groove center X to groove center X Hole center to holde center (distance between centers)

x
x
P2

P1 r y

P1 P2

Hole center to outside corner Outside corner to outside corner

P2 P2

y r r y

P1 P1

x x
M3S073

Remark : The number of machining cycles to be conducted between measurements is to be

designated by macro variable #500.

 See the description under 2 in Subsection 13-3-2 for details.

2. Tolerance judgment function

Tolerance judgment is classified in three stages according to the upper tolerance limit (u), the
lower tolerance limit (v) and the compensation range setting rate (q).

c
Upper tolerance limit (u)
b
u–v
2
q× u–v a
2
Desired value
u–v
q× a
u–v 2
2
b
Lower tolerance limit (v)
c

Tolerance judgement M3S074

Remark 1: The value of “q” is to be designated by an argument for the workpiece measurement
initial setting program (WNo. 9100).

13-21
13 OPTION

 See the description under 1 in Subsection 13-3-4 for details.

Remark 2: The values of “u” and “v” are to be designated by arguments for the tolerance
judgment printout program (WNo. 915).

 See the descriptions under 4, 9 and 10 in Subsection 13-3-4 for details.

Remark 3: Range a: Tolerance judgment is “OK” and no compensation will be conducted.

Range b: Tolerance judgment is “OK” but an alarm message will be outputted.
If offset tool designation has been made, compensation will be conducted
towards the desired value.
Range c: An alarm will be given, and no compensation will be made.
The desired value will automatically be established to fall exactly in the middle of
the range between the upper and lower tolerance limits.
Example :
 ID measurement arguments X_Y_Z_D100.
 Tolerance judgment arguments U0.1V0
100.05 is the desired value.
When q = 0.4
100 + 00.1
c 100.1 (+0.05)
b 100.07 (+0.02)
a 100.05 (Desired value)
a 100.03 (–0.02)
b 100. (–0.05) M3S075
c

3. Compensation function
Designation of the tool number or the offset number of the end mill that is used for machining the
surface to be measured allows compensation to be made in the relevant data settings on the
TOOL DATA or TOOL OFFSET display.
TOOL DATA display

Tool length
Tool diameter

TOOL OFFSET (TYPE A) display

Offsetting amounts

Note : Compensation for the OFFSET DATA display cannot be made when type B is currently
valid. Designation of whether compensation is to be conducted on the TOOL DATA or
TOOL OFFSET display can be done by setting macro variable #502.

13-22
 OPTION 13
 See the description under 2 in Subsection 13-3-2 for details.

1. Diameter and width measurement

Compensation direction is determined automatically. The system compares the desired
value with the measured one, and makes compensation in the minus direction if under-
cutting, or in the positive direction if overcutting has been detected.
2. Measurement between two randomly selected points
The compensation direction cannot be determined automatically, and it is thus necessary to
supply an argument that is provided for the selection. If the argument is omitted, compen-
sation will be made in the positive direction. See the explanations of the various programs
for further details.
3. Slant measurement
The compensation function is not available for this type of measurement.

4. Printout function
The printout function can be controlled in the following three manners, depending on the setting
in macro variable #501.
#501 = 0: Printout not required
Make this selection when the system is to be operated with the measurement, tolerance
judgment and compensation functions only, or when printer failure or some other reason makes
it impossible to use the printer. Measurement results can be verified on the MACRO VARIABLE
- COMMON VARIABLE display even if no printout is to be made.
#501 = 1: Printout for each measurement.
This selection should be made if it is necessary to make an output of every measurement.
#501 = 2: Printout for compensation only.
This selection should be made if it is necessary to print out only the results of tolerance judgment
when error has been found to fall within the compensation range or to exceed the tolerance. The
results of the first measurement, however, will be printed out, regardless of the results. (Printout
is controlled by the results of tolerance judgments, and has no relationship to whether the offset
tool designation is made or not.)
A maximum of eight items can be included in the printout for one measurement.

 The printout items depend upon the data management system parameter
concerned as well as upon the argument settings at the call of the measure-
ment macroprogram, as detailed later in Subsection 13-3-6.

Example: Metric system, Surface to - Hole/Boss center measurement

/RESULT OF MEASURING
[1] Work number, Parts count ............. WNO 5678 COUNT 1
[2] Desired value, measurement pattern ............. MARK DATA FACE-HOL/BOS 60.000
[3] Measured value, direction of ............. MEASURED DATA X 60.053
measurement
[4] Tolerance range ............. TOLERANCE 0.100
[5] Error, tolerance judgment results ............. CHECK OK/WARNING 0.053
[6] Tool or Offset No. for compensation ............. OFFSET NO. 30
[7] Old tool data or offset data ............. OFFSET DATA 10.000
[8] New tool data or offset data ............. NEW OFFSET DATA 9.947

13-23
13 OPTION

5. Related NC parameters
The results of workpiece measurement are outputted by an external output command (DPRNT).
The NC parameters concerned (DPR1 to DPR16) must be set appropriately beforehand
according as the output is to be performed via RS-232C or onto the local disk (C:\ymw\
M8Y\\MC_sdg\print\).

 For details refer to Subsections 13-10-7 and -8 of the PROGRAMMING

MANUAL (EIA/ISO Program) and the Parameter List/Alarm List/M-code List.

13-3-2 Parameter setting

Before attempting to utilize the workpiece measurement printout function, it is necessary to first
register in the common variables the parameter settings which designate the data management
system to be used and the compensation amount of the touch sensor.

1. MACRO VARIABLE - COMMON VARIABLE display

D747S3013E
Set the parameters for data management system on the MACRO VARIABLE - COMMON VAR-
IABLE display.

 Refer to Section 6-3 for display data description and setting method.

13-24
 OPTION 13
2. Data management system parameters
Details of management system parameters
Item Address Description
Mesurement interval #500 Set the measurement interval in number of machining cycles.
If #500 is set to “0.”, no measurement will be made at all.
Printout designation #501 0. = No printout
1. = Printout for each measurement
2. = Printout for first measurement, then subsequent measurements when
compensation is made or tolerance level is exceeded
Compensation #502 0. = Compensation on the setting of the TOOL DATA display
designation 1. = Compensation on the setting of the TOOL OFFSET display
2. = Compensation on the current tool’s setting of the TOOL DATA display
(Remark 2)
Tool number of the #503 Tool number of the touch sensor to be used.
touch sensor Example : Tool No. 15 : #503 = 15.
Offset number #504 Number of the offset amount used for tool length offset of the touch sensor.
Example :
Set in #504 the data number of length offset amount for the touch sensor,
and enter its length (the same value as its LENGTH item on the TOOL
DATA display) under the number in question on the TOOL OFFSET
display.
TOOL OFFSET display
Tool length of the touch sensor

If offset No. 1 is used for a touch sensor whose length is 150, set the value
“150” as shown above, and set macro variable #504 to “1”.
MAZATROL tool data #510 When F93 bit 3 = 1 (MAZATROL tool data tool length Effective [Remark 1]), set
Effective/Ineffective #510 = 1. Otherwise set #510 = 0.
ATC type #511 0. .. for a machine which requires 2nd zero point return (G30) for ATC.
1. .. for a machine which doesn't require 2nd zero point return (G30) for ATC.
Nominal radius of the #554 When e.g. the nominal diameter is 5 mm, set as follows:
touch sensor Metric ........ #554 = 2.5
Inch ......... #554 = 0.0984

 Refer to Section 12-8, “Tool Offsetting Based on MAZATROL Tool Data”, of

the PROGRAMMING MANUAL (EIA/ISO Program).

Remark 1: F92 bit 7 = 1: MAZATROL tool diameter data Effective

F93 bit 3 = 1: MAZATROL tool length data Effective
F94 bit 2 = 1: Tool length offset is not canceled by G28 and G30.
(This setting is indispensable when F93 bit 3 = 1)
F84 bit 0 = 1: Offset amount involved into the counter during EIA/ISO execution.
Remark 2: If the serviceable life of the current tool is expired, tool data compensation is
conducted on its spare tool.
Use bit 7 of parameter F80 to select the data item to be compensated on the TOOL
DATA display.
F80 bit 7 = 0: LENGTH or ACT-
= 1: LENG. CO. or ACT- CO.

13-25
13 OPTION

3. Compensation data for the touch sensor

Eccentricity compensation values “ex” and “ey” and measurement compensation values “Mx”
and “My” must be registered as common variables before any attempt is made to use the touch
sensor to measure a workpiece.

2Mx
Sytlus ball contact circle center

2My ey

“A” view
ex Tool shank center

Eccentricity/Measurement compensation data M3S078

Execution of calibration measurement by the MAZATROL MMS (automatic centering system)

will cause these compensation amounts to be displayed on the MACHINE PARAMETER display.
Set the values of addresses L1 to L4 into common variables #550 to #553, respectively.
Example of settings
Parameter for mesurement Common variable
Compensation amount
Address Metric Inch Address Metric Inch
Eccentricity compensation ex L1 –58 –23 #550 –0.0058 –0.00023
Eccentricity compensation ey L2 1690 67 #551 0.169 0.00067
Measurement compensation Mx L3 24150 9510 #552 2.415 0.00951
Measurement compensation My L4 24277 9590 #553 2.4277 0.00959

 Refer to the PROGRAMMING MANUAL (MAZATROL Program) for further

information on the calibration measurement.

13-26
 OPTION 13
13-3-3 Macroprogram configuration
The workpiece measurement printout function is to be executed by adding a macroprogram call
command to the main program. Before this program is called out, however, it is necessary to
designate the workpiece coordinate system.
The tool change command for a touch sensor is included in the workpiece measurement initial
setting program, so it need not be given in the main program.

1. Coordinate system setting

As for coordinate system setting for workpiece measurement, the coordinate value for the Z-axis
should be the distance from the nose of the spindle at the machine zero-point and the length of
the touch sensor should be registered on the TOOL DATA display.
 EIA/ISO program .......... Use one of the codes G54 to G59, or G92.
 MAZATROL program .. Use a basic coordinate unit. However, “th” values will not be effective.
It should also be noted that the auxiliary coordinate unit will also be
ineffective.

2. Macroprogram call
 EIA/ISO program: Use G65 (unmodal command of user-macro call).

G65 P WNo.

Argument Argument
address data

 MAZATROL program: Use a subprogram unit.

UNo. UNIT WORK No. REPEAT No.

 SUB PRO WNo. 1

SNo. ARGM 1 ARGM 2 ARGM 3 ARGM 4 ARGM 5 ARGM 6

1

Argument data
Argument address

 Refer to the PROGRAMMING MANUAL concerned for a detailed description

of macroprogram call.

13-27
13 OPTION

3. Macroprogram
The workpiece measurement printout system is made up of the 15 macroprograms enumerated
in the table below. Select the appropriate program for the desired measurement pattern.
List of macroprograms
Group Work No. Type of measurement Argument address
Initial setting 9100 Workpiece measurement initial setting WRKQ
9110 ID/OD measurement MXYZD
Measurement A
9111 Groove/Step width measurement MXYZD
(Diameter and width)
9115 Tolerance judgment printout A UVS
9120 Surface measurement MXYZ
Measurement B 9121 Groove/Step center measurement MXYZD
(Measurement of the
9122 Hole/Boss center measurement MXYZD
distance between two
random points) 9123 Corner measurement MXYZI
9125 Tolerance judgment printout B EUVSB
9130 Slant measurement FMXYZ
Measurement C (Slant)
9135 Tolerance judgment printout C IAUV
9140 Data check sub-routine ——
9141 Measurement movement sub-routine ——
Sub-routines
9142 Tolerance judgment and compensation sub-routine ——
9145 Printout sub-routine ——

 The initial setting program (Work No. 9100) is indispensable for using the work measurement
function.
 Select the desired measurement pattern from measurement groups A, B or C. The tolerance
judgment printout program (Work No. 915) should be the one from the group from which the
measurement pattern has been selected.
 Sub-routines are used within the system, and cannot be directly used in a user program.

A. Diameter and width measurement

Measurement Group A
9100 .......................................... Workpiece measurement initial setting
9110, 9111 ................................ Diameter or width measurement
9115 .......................................... Tolerance judgment printout A

B. Measurement of the distance between two random points

Measurement Group B
9100 .......................................... Workpiece measurement initial setting
9120, 9121, 9122, 9123 ............ Measurement point 1 coordinate value
9120, 9121, 9122, 9123 ............ Measurement point 2 coordinate value
9125 .......................................... Tolerance judgment printout B

13-28
 OPTION 13
A total of 10 different combinations is possible for program numbers 9120 to 9123, depending on
the designation of arguments for measurement points 1 and 2.
Combinations of macroprograms
No. Program combination Measurement pattern Direction Compensation (*1)
1 9120 - 9120 Surface to surface X, Y, Z 
2 9120 - 9121 Surface to Groove/Step center X, Y 
3 9120 - 9122 Surface to Hole/Boss center X, Y 
4 9120 - 9123 Surface to Corner X, Y 
5 9121 - 9121 Groove/step center to Groove/Step center X, Y ×
6 9121 - 9122 Groove/step center to Hole/Boss center X, Y ×
7 9121 - 9123 Groove/step center to Corner X, Y 
8 9122 - 9122 Hole/boss center to Hole/Boss center X, Y, R (*2) 
(*2)
9 9122 - 9123 Hole/boss center to Corner X, Y, R 
10 9123 - 9123 Corner to Corner X, Y, R (*2) 

*1 The following symbols are used in this column:

 : Compensation can occur with reference to either measurement.
 : Compensation can occur with reference to the center measurement.
× : No compensation can be designated.
*2 As for combination No. 8, 9 and 10, tolerance judgment can be outputted about X, Y, or R
2 2
( X + Y ) each (or even multiple items) as a result of one pair of measurement, as shown
in the example below.
Measurement Group B
9100 ................Workpiece measurement initial setting
9122, 9123 ......Measurement of point 1 (Hole/Boss center or Corner)
9122, 9123 ......Measurement of point 2 (Hole/Boss center or Corner)
9125 (X) ..........Tolerance judgment printout B for X-axis direction
9125 (Y) ..........Tolerance judgment printout B for Y-axis direction
2 2
9125 (R) ..........Tolerance judgment printout B for the distance in XY-plane ( X + Y )

C. Slant measurement
Measurement Group C
9100 ................ Workpiece measurement initial setting
9130, 9135 ...... Slant measurement, tolerance judgment printout C
(These two programs must always be used by pairs.)

D. Multiple group measurement

 It is possible to designate measurements to be made from each group (A, B, and C) within the
same main program. In such cases, the workpiece measurement initial setting program is
necessary only once, at the beginning.
Example :
9100 9100 9100

Measurement A1 Measurement A Measurement A1

Measurement A2 Measurement B Measurement B

Measurement A3 Measurement C Measurement A2
.. .. ..
. . .
Workpiece measurement will be discontinued if an alarm is generated as a result of tolerance
judgment.

13-29
13 OPTION

 Group B measurements are normally composed of a cycle containing three programs:

1) Coordinate measurement of measurement point 1,
2) Coordinate measurement of measurement point 2, and
3) Tolerance judgment printout.
When one and the same measurement point is to be used as a reference for multiple
successive measurements, however, tolerance judgement can be done for the succeeding
measurement without having to repeat the previous measurement.
Example :
9100
9120 - 9123 ......... Coordinate measurement of P2
measurement point 1 (P1)
B1 9120 - 9123 ......... Coordinate measurement of B1

measurement point 2 (P2) B2 B3

P1
9125 ..................... Printout of toelerance judgment
P2’ P1’
between points P1 and P2

9120 - 9123 ......... Coordinate measurement of measurement point 2 (P2’)

B2
9125 ..................... Printout of toelerance judgment between points P1 and P2’

9120 - 9123 ......... Coordinate measurement of measurement point 1 (P1’)

B3
9125 ..................... Printout of toelerance judgment between points P1’ and P2’

 When machining is executed between measuring cycles:

Example :
9100 Since the execution of WNo. 9100 includes automatic tool
change for the touch sensor as well as parts count, enter zero
Measurement A1
.. as argument “W” (used to specify the work number) from the
. second call of 9100 so as to suppress the parts count function.
.. Machining cycle
. Other arguments can be omitted if they need not be changed
9100 from the settings for the first call of 9100.
W0.
Measurement A2
..
.

13-30
 OPTION 13
E. Examples for calling up a macroprogram
The following examples are given to show how the macroprogram can be called up from an
EIA/ISO program or MAZATROL program.
EIA/ISO program
Example :

Workpiece origin data G54

X -360.
G54 Coordinate system setting Y –450.
Z -600.
B 0

G65P9100W1200.R5.K3.Q0.5 Workpiece measurement initial setting

G65P9110M101.X200.Y200.Z-5.D100. Measurement (for inside diameter)
G65P9115U0.1V-0.1S2. Tolerance judgment and printout

Note:
G90/G91 and F-code modal information is updated through the workpiece measurement.

MAZATROL program
Example :


UNo. UNIT X Y th Z B
 WPC -  –360. –450. 0 –600. 0



UNo. UNIT WORK No. REPEAT No.
 SUB PRO 9100E 1
SNo. ARGM 1 ARGM 2 ARGM 3 ARGM 4 ARGM 5 ARGM 6
1 W1200. R5. K3. Q0.5
UNo. UNIT WORK No. REPEAT No.
 SUB PRO 9110E 1
SNo. ARGM 1 ARGM 2 ARGM 3 ARGM 4 ARGM 5 ARGM 6
1 M101. X200. Y200. Z-5. D100.
UNo. UNIT WORK No. REPEAT No.
 SUB PRO 9115E 1
SNo. ARGM 1 ARGM 2 ARGM 3 ARGM 4 ARGM 5 ARGM 6
1 U0.1 V-0.1 S2.

13-31
13 OPTION

13-3-4 Explanations of macroprograms

This subsection describes each of the macroprograms of WNos. 9100 to 9135.

1. Workpiece measurement initial setting (WNo. 9100)

This program is responsible for the designation of common data to be used in workpiece
measurement, the initializing of common variables, parts counting management and the auto-
matic tool change operation for the touch sensor. It should always be called out immediately
before any measuring operation.
EIA/ISO G65 P9100 Ww Rr Kk Qq
UNo. UNIT WORK No. REPEAT No.
 SUB PRO 9100E 1
MAZATROL
SNo. ARGM 1 ARGM 2 ARGM 3 ARGM 4 ARGM 5 ARGM 6
1 Ww Rr Kk Qq

Ww: Work number of the main program

Example : Printout for the setting of 4078
WNO 4078 COUNT 10
MARK DATA HOL/BOS DIA 100.000
MEASURED DATA R 100.799
However, if the call for WNo. 9100 is to be done repeatedly in the main program, the setting
from the second call should be “W = 0”.
 With the exception of cases in which “W = 0” the counter will advance by 1 each time the
program is called up, and the counter will automatically be cleared to 0 when the work
number (value “w”) changes. If it is necessary to clear the counter to 0 without changing
work numbers, set common variables #135 and #136 to 0.
 “Ww” designates a work number, but no check is made to ensure that this does not differ
from the actual work number.
 This is used in the heading section of the printout, so it is also possible to use a different
code setting at the user's discretion.
Rr: Initial point Z used for measurement (a workpiece coordinate)
After an automatic tool change has been conducted for the touch sensor, positioning will be
made to the point designated by “Rr” and then feed will be made at a rate of 3000 mm/min
(or 120 IPM). The measurement is conducted at the rate of a parameter setting (K41: G31
skip feed). Because measurement is normally made successively, return is made to point R
after each measurement cycle, so a zero-point return command should be given for the final
measurement (see the description of each measurement program).

13-32
 OPTION 13
Kk: Distance of measurement feed (positive value)
The distance specified here of measurement feed is not to be calculated from the axis of the
spindle, but rather represents the distance from the tip of the probe to the surface to be
measured.
This data is not effective during slant measurement.

k
k

#554 (Nominal radius of the probe)

X- and Y-directions Z-direction

M3S079

For slant measurement, set the measurement starting point in such a way that it will be
within 15 mm (0.6 in) of the measurement point.
Qq: Compensation-range setting rate (0 to 1.0)
Set the ratio of the range that will not result in compensation being conducted, with respect
to a tolerance width of 1.0.
Note : All argument data should contain a decimal point.

2. Inside and outside diameter measurement (WNo. 9110)

Diameters are calculated by the measurement of four points on a circle. Measurement is made
first along the X-axis, then along the Y-axis.
EIA/ISO G65 P9110 Mm Xx Yy Zz Dd
UNo. UNIT WORK No. REPEAT No.
 SUB PRO 9110E 1
MAZATROL
SNo. ARGM 1 ARGM 2 ARGM 3 ARGM 4 ARGM 5 ARGM 6
1 Mm Xx Yy Zz Dd

Mm: Measurement pattern:

 m = 1.: ID measurement
 m = 2.: OD measurement
 m = 3.: ID measurement II
When a zero-point return operation is to be performed after the measurement operation has
been completed, add “100” to each of the above settings and set as follows:
m = 101.; m = 102.; m = 103.
Xx: X-coordinate of the circle center (a workpiece coordinate)
Yy: Y-coordinate of the circle center (a workpiece coordinate)
Zz: Z-coordinate of the measurement plane (a workpiece coordinate)
Dd: Desired value of ID/OD
Note : All argument data should contain a decimal point.
Measurement operations for the three patterns (m = 1, 2, and 3) are as follows.

13-33
13 OPTION

[Measurement operations]
m = 1. ID measurement m = 2. OD measurement

x Workpiece zero point x Workpiece zero point

y y

r r

z z

k
k
d d

M3S082 M3S083

m = 3. ID measurement II
x
Workpiece zero point

Remark 1: Measurement pattern is determined

in accordance with argument “m” as
shown in the diagrams.
r
Remark 2: The values “r” and “k” are to be set in
z the workpiece measurement initial
setting program (WNo. 9100).
k Remark 3: Use the ID measurement II when
d there is a step within a circle, as is the
case with PCKT MT machining.
M3S084

13-34
 OPTION 13
3. Groove and step width measurement (WNo. 9111)
Groove and step width are calculated by measuring both ends of the groove or step section
(along either the X-axis or the Y-axis direction)
EIA/ISO G65 P9111 Mm Xx Yy Zz Dd
UNo. UNIT WORK No. REPEAT No.
 SUB PRO 9111E 1
MAZATROL
SNo. ARGM 1 ARGM 2 ARGM 3 ARGM 4 ARGM 5 ARGM 6
1 Mm Xx Yy Zz Dd

Mm: Measurement pattern:

1) m = 1.: X-axis groove width measurement
2) m = 2.: Y-axis groove width measurement
3) m = 3.: X-axis step width measurement
4) m = 4.: Y-axis step width measurement
When a zero-point return operation is to be performed after the measurement operation has
been completed, add “100” to each of the above settings and set as follows:
m = 101.; m = 102.; m = 103; m = 104.
Xx: When m = 1. or 3.: X-coordinate of the groove/step center (a workpiece coordinate)
When m = 2. or 4.: X-coordinate of the measurement point (a workpiece coordinate)
Yy: When m = 1. or 3.: Y-coordinate of the groove/step center (a workpiece coordinate)
When m = 2. or 4.: Y-coordinate of the measurement point (a workpiece coordinate)
Zz: Z-coordinate of the measurement plane (a workpiece coordinate)
Dd: Desired value of groove/step width
Note : All argument data should contain a decimal point.
Measurement operations for the four patterns (m = 1, 2, 3 and 4) are as follows.

13-35
13 OPTION

[Measurement operations]
m = 1. X-axis groove width measurement m = 2. Y-axis groove width measurement

x y

y x

r r

z z

k k
d d

M3S085 M3S085
m = 3. X-axis step width measurement m = 4. Y-axis step width measurement

x y

y x

r r

z z

k k
d d

M3S085 M3S085

Remark : The values “r” and “k” are to be set in the workpiece measurement initial setting
program (WNo. 9100).

13-36
 OPTION 13
4. Tolerance judgment printout A (WNo. 9115)
This program compares the results of the measurement of inside diameter, outside diameter,
groove width and step width with the desired values, makes a tolerance judgment on the basis of
the comparison, and prints out the results of this judgment. Tool diameter setting can also be
corrected, depending on the amount of error with respect to the desired value.
EIA/ISO G65 P9115 Uu Vv Ss
UNo. UNIT WORK No. REPEAT No.
 SUB PRO 9115E 1
MAZATROL
SNo. ARGM 1 ARGM 2 ARGM 3 ARGM 4 ARGM 5 ARGM 6
1 Uu Vv Ss

Uu: Upper tolerance limit

Vv: Lower tolerance limit
If measurement results are to be printed out without a tolerance judgment, these two
arguments should be “u = v = 0”.
Ss: Tool No. or Offset No. for which compensation is to be made.
 When compensation category #502 = 0., set the number of the tool concerned.
Example : Tool No. 20  S = 20.
 When compensation category #502 = 1., set the number of the offset amout concerned.
Example : Offset No. 20  S = 20.
 When compensation category #502 = 2., set the tool number or group number.
Use bit 4 of parameter F94 to select between tool number and group number.
 If compensation is not required or inopportune, omit argument S or enter “S0”.

13-37
13 OPTION

5. Surface measurement (WNo. 9120)

This program allows measurement of the workpiece coordinate of a surface. It is to be combined
with other measurement patterns to calculate the distance to the surface.
EIA/ISO G65 P9120 Mm Xx Yy Zz
UNo. UNIT WORK No. REPEAT No.
 SUB PRO 9120E 1
MAZATROL
SNo. ARGM 1 ARGM 2 ARGM 3 ARGM 4 ARGM 5 ARGM 6
1 Mm Xx Yy Zz

Mm: Designation of return point, measurement point, measurement pattern (in three digits).
[1] Hundreds digit: Designation of return point.
0: Return to R-point after measurement
1: Return to zero point after measurement
[2] Tens digit: Designation of measurement point.
1: Measurement point 1
2: Measurement point 2
[3] Units digit: Designation of measurement pattern.
1: X-surface measurement with measurement feed in direction of +X
2: X-surface measurement with measurement feed in direction of –X
3: Y-surface measurement with measurement feed in direction of +Y
4: Y-surface measurement with measurement feed in direction of –Y
5: Z-surface measurement with measurement feed in direction of –Z
Xx: X-coordinate of the measurement point (a workpiece coordinate)
Yy: Y-coordinate of the measurement point (a workpiece coordinate)
Zz: Z-coordinate of the measurement point (a workpiece coordinate)
Note : All argument data should contain a decimal point.

13-38
 OPTION 13
[Measurement patterns (“m1” denotes the units digit of argument m)]

Y Z
m1 = 4.

m1 = 5.
X X
–Y
m1 = 1. m1 = 2.
–Z

+X –X

+Y

m1 = 3.
M3S087

[Measurement operations]

X- or Y-surface (in the case of +X) Z-surface

k x Workpiece x Workpiece
zero-point zero-point

y y

r r

z z
k

M3S088

Remark : The values “r” and “k” are to be set in the workpiece measurement initial setting
program (WNo. 9100).

13-39
13 OPTION

6. Groove and step center measurement (WNo. 9121)

This program measures both edges of a groove or step section (along the X- or Y-axis) and
calculates the center coordinates of the groove or step section from these measurements. It is to
be combined with other measurement patterns to calculate the distance to the center of groove
or step section.
EIA/ISO G65 P9121 Mm Xx Yy Zz Dd
UNo. UNIT WORK No. REPEAT No.
 SUB PRO 9121E 1
MAZATROL
SNo. ARGM 1 ARGM 2 ARGM 3 ARGM 4 ARGM 5 ARGM 6
1 Mm Xx Yy Zz Dd

Mm: Designation of return point, measurement point, measurement pattern (in three digits).
[1] Hundreds digit: Designation of return point (as with surface measurement)
[2] Tens digit: Designation of measurement point (as with surface measurement)
[3] Units digit: Designation of measurement pattern.
1: X-axis groove center measurement
2: Y-axis groove center measurement
3: X-axis step center measurement
4: Y-axis step center measurement
Xx: For measurement patterns 1 and 3: X-coordinate of the groove/step center
(a workpiece coordinate)
For measurement patterns 2 and 4: X-coordinate of the measurement point
(a workpiece coordinate)
Yy: For measurement patterns 1 and 3: Y-coordinate of the measurement point
(a workpiece coordinate)
For measurement patterns 2 and 4: Y-coordinate of the groove/step center
(a workpiece coordinate)
Zz: Z-coordinate of the measurement point
Dd: Groove/Step width
Note : All argument data should contain a decimal point.

13-40
 OPTION 13
[Measurement patterns (“m1” denotes the units digit of argument m)]
m1 = 1. X-axis groove center measurement m1 = 2. Y-axis groove center measurement

x y

y x

r r

z z

k k
d d

M3S089 M3S089

m1 = 3. X-axis step section center measurement m1 = 4. Y-axis step section center measurement

x y

y x

r r

z z

k k
d d

M3S090 M3S090

Remark : The values “r” and “k” are to be set in the workpiece measurement initial setting
program (WNo. 9100).

13-41
13 OPTION

7. Hole and boss center measurement (WNo. 9122)

This program calculates the center coordinates (X and Y) of a hole or boss by measuring four
points on the circle. Measurement is made first along the X-axis, then along the Y-axis. It is to be
combined with other measurement patterns to calculate the distance to the hole or boss center.
EIA/ISO G65 P9122 Mm Xx Yy Zz Dd
UNo. UNIT WORK No. REPEAT No.
 SUB PRO 9122E 1
MAZATROL
SNo. ARGM 1 ARGM 2 ARGM 3 ARGM 4 ARGM 5 ARGM 6
1 Mm Xx Yy Zz Dd

Mm: Designation of return point, measurement point, measurement pattern (in three digits).
[1] Hundreds digit: Designation of return point (as with surface measurement)
[2] Tens digit: Designation of measurement point (as with surface measurement)
[3] Units digit: Designation of measurement pattern.
1: Hole center measurement
2: Boss center measurement
3: Hole center measurement II (with passage on the initial point level)
Xx: X-coordinate of the circle center (a workpiece coordinate)
Yy: Y-coordinate of the circle center (a workpiece coordinate)
Zz: Z-coordinate of the measurement plane (a workpiece coordinate)
Dd: Inside/Outside diameter
Note : All argument data should contain a decimal point.

13-42
 OPTION 13
[Measurement patterns (“m1” denotes the units digit of argument m)]
m1 = 1. Hole center measurement m1 = 2. Boss center measurement

x Workpiece zero point x Workpiece zero point

y y

r r

z z

k k
d d

M3S082 M3S083

m1 = 3. Hole center measurement II

x Workpiece zero point

Remark 1: Measurement pattern is determined

in accordance with argument “m 1” as
shown in the diagrams.
r
Remark 2: The values “r” and “k” are to be set in
z the workpiece measurement initial
setting program (WNo. 9100).
k Remark 3: Use hole center measurement II
d when there is a step within a circle, as is
the case with PCKT MT machining.
M3S084

13-43
13 OPTION

8. Outside and inside corner measurement (WNo. 9123)

This program performs continuous measurement of an X-surface and a Y-surface to calculate
the coordinates (X and Y) of the corner. It is to be used in combination with other measurement
patterns to calculate the distance to the corner.
EIA/ISO G65 P9123 Mm Xx Yy Zz Ii
UNo. UNIT WORK No. REPEAT No.
 SUB PRO 9123E 1
MAZATROL
SNo. ARGM 1 ARGM 2 ARGM 3 ARGM 4 ARGM 5 ARGM 6
1 Mm Xx Yy Zz Ii

Mm: Designation of return point, measurement point, measurement pattern (in three digits).
[1] Hundreds digit: Designation of return point (as with surface measurement)
[2] Tens digit: Designation of measurement point (as with surface measurement)
[3] Units digit: Designation of measurement pattern.
1: Outside corner measurement with measurement feed in direction of +X and +Y
2: Outside corner measurement with measurement feed in direction of –X and +Y
3: Outside corner measurement with measurement feed in direction of –X and –Y
4: Outside corner measurement with measurement feed in direction of +X and –Y
5: Inside corner measurement with measurement feed in direction of –X and –Y
6: Inside corner measurement with measurement feed in direction of +X and –Y
7: Inside corner measurement with measurement feed in direction of +X and +Y
8: Inside corner measurement with measurement feed in direction of –X and +Y
Xx: X-coordinate of the corner (a workpiece coordinate)
Yy: Y-coordinate of the corner (a workpiece coordinate)
Zz: Z-coordinate of the measurement point (a workpiece coordinate)
Ii: Distance from corner to measurement point (plus value)
Note : All argument data should contain a decimal point.

13-44
 OPTION 13
[Measurement patterns (“m1” denotes the units digit of argument m)]

Outside Corner Inside Corner

m1 = 4. m1 = 3. m1 = 8. m1 = 7.
Y

m1 = 1. m1 = 2. m1 = 5. m1 = 6.

M3S091

[Measurement operations]

Outside Corner Inside Corner

(in the case of m1 = 1.) (in the case of m1 = 8.)

x Workpiece
zero-point
i
Y
i y i y

X
Workpiece
i zero-point

Z r
r
z
z
X
k

k
i i

M3S092

Remark : The values “r” and “k” are to be set in the workpiece measurement initial setting
program (WNo. 9100).

13-45
13 OPTION

9. Tolerance judgment printout B (WNo. 9125)

This program compares the distances between measurement points 1 and 2 as measured in
combination of coordinate measurements (WNo. 9120 to 9123) against the desired values,
makes a tolerance judgment on the basis of the comparison, and prints out the results of this
judgment. Tool radius and tool length compensation can also be made, depending on the
amount of error with respect to the desired value.
EIA/ISO G65 P9125 Ee Uu Vv Ss Bb
UNo. UNIT WORK No. REPEAT No.
 SUB PRO 9125E 1
MAZATROL
SNo. ARGM 1 ARGM 2 ARGM 3 ARGM 4 ARGM 5 ARGM 6
1 Ee Uu Vv Ss Bb

Ee: Designation of distance with axis direction

e = 1.: Distance along the X-axis
e = 2.: Distance along the Y-axis
e = 3.: Distance along the Z-axis
2 2
e = 4.: Distance in the XY-plane ( X + Y )
Uu: Upper tolerance limit
Vv: Lower tolerance limit
If measurement results are to be printed out without a tolerance judgment, these two
arguments should be “u = v = 0”.
Ss: Tool No. or Offset No. for which compensation is to be made.
 When compensation category #502 = 0., set the number of the tool concerned.
Example : Tool No. 20  S = 20.
 When compensation category #502 = 1., set the number of the offset amout concerned.
Example : Offset No. 20  S = 20.
 When compensation category #502 = 2., set the tool number or group number.
Use bit 4 of parameter F94 to select between tool number and group number.
 If compensation is not required or inopportune, omit argument S or enter “S0”.
Bb: Compensation-amount conversion coefficient
This data is effective only when compensation is made. The default value of argument B is
one (b = 1). (See the following figures.)
Note : All argument data should contain a decimal point.

13-46
 OPTION 13
[Compensation operation]
b = 1. Inner compensation as seen from the reference b = –1. Outer compensation as seen from the reference

Z Tool for radius compensation Tool for radius compensation

X or Y

Measured
Reference Coordinate for Reference distance Coordinate for
coordinate Measured compensation coordinate compensation
distance
Tool for length
compensation
Tool for length compensation
Reference coordinate Coordinate for
compensation

Coordinate for compensation Reference coordinate

M3S093 M3S094

b = 0.5 Inner compensation on both sides b = –0.5 Outer compensation on both sides

Tool for radius compensation Tool for radius compensation

Measured distance Measured distance

M3S095 M3S096

13-47
13 OPTION

10. Slant measurement/Tolerance judgment printout C (WNo. 9130/9135)

This pair of programs measures two points on a surface and calculates the angle of inclination
with respect to the coordinate axis, compares the results to a desired value to make a tolerance
judgment, and prints out the result of this judgment.
G65 P9130 Ff Mm Xx Yy Zz
EIA/ISO
G65 P9135 Ii Aa Uu Vv
UNo. UNIT WORK No. REPEAT No.
 SUB PRO 9130E 1
SNo. ARGM 1 ARGM 2 ARGM 3 ARGM 4 ARGM 5 ARGM 6
1 Ff Mm Xx Yy Zz
MAZATROL
UNo. UNIT WORK No. REPEAT No.
 SUBPRO 9135E 1

SNo. ARGM 1 ARGM 2 ARGM 3 ARGM 4 ARGM 5 ARGM 6

1 Ii Aa Uu Vv

Ff: Designation of plane

f = 1.: Measurement of an angle in the XY-plane
f = 2.: Measurement of an angle in the XZ-plane
f = 3.: Measurement of an angle in the YZ-plane
Mm: Designation of measurement direction
m = 1.: Measurement feed in direction of +X
m = 2.: Measurement feed in direction of –X
The above two settings cannot be made when f = 3.
m = 3.: Measurement feed in direction of +Y
m = 4.: Measurement feed in direction of –Y
The above two settings cannot be made when f = 2.
m = 5.: Measurement feed in direction of –Z
The above setting cannot be made when f = 1.
When a zero-point return operation is to be performed after the measurement operation has
been completed, add “100” to each of the above settings and set as follows:
m = 101.; m = 102.; m = 103.; m = 104.; m = 105.
Xx: X-coordinate of the measurement starting point (a workpiece coordinate)
Yy: Y-coordinate of the measurement starting point (a workpiece coordinate)
Zz: Z-coordinate of the measurement starting point (a workpiece coordinate)
Ii: Shifting amount along the axis from measurement point 1 to measurement point 2.
 The axis for shifting is automatically determined according to the combination of argu-
ments “f” (plane) and “m” (measurement direction).
 The absolute value of i (l i l) should be as large as possible.
 The coordinates of measurement starting point 2 are automatically determined according
to the measurement starting point, the shifting amount and the desired angle.
 Take care about the argebraic sign of shifting amount “i” (see the following figure).

13-48
 OPTION 13
Aa: Desired angle (degrees): Setting range is 45.  a  45. (See the following table.)
 The reference coordinate axis for angle calculation is automatically determined accor-
ding to the combination of arguments “f” (plane) and “m” (measurement direction).
 Take care about the argebraic sign of desired angle “a” (see the following figure).

P2 P1 P1 P2

a (–) a (+) a (–)

P1 P2 P2 P1
a (+) a (–)
i (+) i (+) i (–) i (–)

Signs of shifting amount “i” and desired angle “a” M3S101

Combination of arguments “f” (plane) and “m” (measurement direction)

f: Plane m: Measurement direction i: Shifting amount a: Desired angle

f = 1. m = 1, 2 X-axis along Y-axis Angle with Y-axis

XY-plane m = 3, 4 Y-axis along X-axis Angle with X-axis
f = 2. m = 1, 2 X-axis along Z-axis Angle with Z-axis
XZ-plane m=5 Z-axis along X-axis Angle with X-axis
f = 3. m = 3, 4 Y-axis along Z-axis Angle with Z-axis
YZ-plane m=5 Z-axis along Y-axis Angle with Y-axis

Uu: Upper tolerance limit (degrees)

Vv: Lower tolerance limit (degrees)
If tolerance judgment is not necessary, set as “u = v = 0”.
Note : Change the measurement direction so as to set the desired angle within the range of
45 degrees.
Example :

Angle with X-axis = 60 deg. Angle with Y-axis = 30 deg.

Y x
30°
60° y
f = 1.
X

X m = 4. Y m = 1.
a = 60. a = 30.
M3S097

13-49
13 OPTION

[Measurement operations]

When f = 1. and m = 3. When f = 2. and m = 5.

x Workpiece x Workpiece
zero-point zero-point

P1 P2 y
P2
y
P1

a i
(a > 0) (i > 0)

r
r
z a z

i
(i > 0) (a < 0)
M3S098 M3S099

Remark : The measurement starting point should be set within 15 mm (0.6 in) of the measure-
ment point.

Measurement point Measurement point

Starting point

15 mm 15 mm
(0.6 in) (0.6 in)

Measurement along the X- or Y-axis Measurement along the Z-axis

M3S100

13-50
 OPTION 13
[Definition of the measured angle]
1. f = 1.; Angle in the XY-plane

Measurement direction a>0 a<0

P2 j
P2

m = 1. i
a i a
+X

P1
j P1

j P2
P2

m = 2. a i
a i
–X

P1
P1 j

P2 P1
j j
m = 3.
+Y a a

P1 P2
i i

i P2 P1 i

a a
m = 4.
–Y j j
P1 P2

M3S102

Remark 1: P1 denotes the measurement starting point designated by arguments “x”, “y”, and
“z”. P2 is determined automatically according to the arguments “i” and “a”.
The above example refers to the case where i > 0. The positions of P1 and P2 are
exchanged if i < 0.
Remark 2: The measured angle is calculated as follows:
–1 j
tan
i
(j = [Coordinate of measurement point 2] – [Coordinate of measurement point 1])

13-51
13 OPTION

2. f = 2.; Angle in the XZ-plane

Measurement direction a>0 a<0

P2 j
P2

m = 1. i
a i a
+X

P1
j P1

j P2
P2

m = 2. a i
a i
–X

P1
P1 j

i P2 P1 i

a a
m = 5.
–Z j j
P1 P2

M3S103

Remark 1: P1 denotes the measurement starting point designated by arguments “x”, “y”, and
“z”. P2 is determined automatically according to the arguments “i” and “a”.
The above example refers to the case where i > 0. The positions of P1 and P2 are
exchanged if i < 0.
Remark 2: The measured angle is calculated as follows:
–1 j
tan
i
(j = [Coordinate of measurement point 2] – [Coordinate of measurement point 1])

13-52
 OPTION 13
3. f = 3.; Angle in the YZ-plane

Measurement direction a>0 a<0

P2 j
P2

m = 3. i
a i a
+Y

P1
j P1

j P2
P2

m = 4. a i
a i
–Y

P1
P1 j

i P2 P1 i

a a
m = 5.
–Z j j
P1 P2

M3S103

Remark 1: P1 denotes the measurement starting point designated by arguments “x”, “y”, and
“z”. P2 is determined automatically according to the arguments “i” and “a”.
The above example refers to the case where i > 0. The positions of P1 and P2 are
exchanged if i < 0.
Remark 2: The measured angle is calculated as follows:
–1 j
tan
i
(j = [Coordinate of measurement point 2] – [Coordinate of measurement point 1])

13-53
13 OPTION

13-3-5 List of measurement patterns with macroprograms

Group Work No. Measurement patterns (m1)
1. 2. 3.

9110

ID OD ID II
M3S104
A
1. 2. 3. 4.

9111

X groove width Y groove width X step width Y step width

M3S105
4. –Y
5. –Z

9120 1. +X 2. –X

3. +Y M3S106

1. 2. 3. 4.

9121

X groove center Y groove center X step center Y step center M3S107

B
1. 2. 3.

9122

Hole center Boss center Hole center II M3S108

4. 3.
8. 7.

9123

1. 2. 5. 6.
Outside corner Inside corner
M3S109
f = 1. f = 2. f = 3.

Y Z Z
1. 1. 3.
4. 5. 5.
3.
9130 2. 2. 4.
C
(9135) X X Y
XY-plane XZ-plane YZ-plane
1, 2: angle with Y-axis 1, 2: angle with Z-axis 3, 4: angle with Z-axis
3, 4: angle with X-axis 5: angle with X-axis 5: angle with Y-axis

M3S110

13-54
 OPTION 13
13-3-6 Printout of measurement results

1. Contents of printout
The output contents are automatically controlled by the type of data processing system being
used. A maximum of 8 items can be included in one print cycle.
Format (different by output items)
Metric: Integer: up to four digits;
Decimal: down to three decimal places.
Inch: Integer: up to four digits;
Decimal: down to four decimal places.

A. Work No. and parts count

The work number designated by argument W in the workpiece measurement initial setting (WNo.
9100) and parts count number are printed out as follows:
WNO 1234 COUNT 1

B. Desired value
The printout includes the automatically calculated desired value (MARK DATA) and a comment
which indicates the measurement pattern.
Measurement pattern and comment
Measurement pattern Comment
Inside/Outside diameter MARK DATA HOL/BOS DIA
Groove/Step width MARK DATA GRV/STP WIDTH
Surface to Surface MARK DATA FACE-FACE
Surface to Groove/Step center MARK DATA FACE-GRV/STP
Surface to Hole/Boss center MARK DATA FACE-HOL/BOS
Surface to Corner MARK DATA FACE-CNR
Groove/Step center to Groove/Step center MARK DATA GRV/STP-GRV/STP
Groove/Step center to Hole/Boss center MARK DATA GRV/STP-HOL/BOS
Groove/Step center to Corner MARK DATA GRV/STP-CNR
Hole/Boss center to Hole/Boss center MARK DATA HOL/BOS-HOL/BOS
Hole/Boss center to Corner MARK DATA HOL/BOS-CNR
Corner to Corner MARK DATA CNR-CNR
Slant in XY-plane MARK DATA SLANT X-Y
Slant in XZ-plane MARK DATA SLANT X-Z
Slant in YZ-plane MARK DATA SLANT Y-Z

C. Measured value
The actually measured lengths and angles are also printed out with the comments according to
the format shown below.

Length Angle Comment

Length along X-axis Angle with X-axis MEASURED DATA X
Length along Y-axis Angle with Y-axis MEASURED DATA Y
Length along Z-axis Angle with Z-axis MEASURED DATA Z
2
ID/OD or Length in XY-plane ( X + Y ) 2 —— MEASURED DATA R

13-55
13 OPTION

D. Tolerance range
The following value is printed out:
(Upper tolerance limit – Lower tolerance limit) / 2.
Example : For an upper tolerance limit of u = 0.3 and a lower tolerance limit of v = 0:
TOLERANCE 0.150

E. Error and judgment

The value of “Measured value”  “Desired value” is printed out, along with the results of the
tolerance judgment.

Error judgement results Comment

Within tolerance range/Outside compensation range CHECK OK
Within tolerance range/Within compensation range CHECK OK/WARNING
Outside tolerance range CHECK LIMIT OVER ALARM

F. Tool or Offset No. for compensation

Either the tool number or the offset number designated by argument “Ss” will be printed out.

Tool No. For tool No. 25 TOOL NO.25

Offset No. For offset No. 25 OFFSET NO.25

G. Old tool data/offset data

This function prints out the old value (before compensation) of the data listed in F. above.
As for tool data, the valu ptinted out refers to the diameter of the tool with the exception of Z-axis
step difference measurement, for which tool length is printed out.

For tool data TOOL DATA 20.000

For offset data OFFSET DATA 10.000

H. New tool data/offset data

This function prints out the new value (after compensation) of the data listed in F. above.

For tool data NEW TOOL DATA 19.950

For offset data NEW OFFSET DATA 9.975
 Items printed : Printout × : No printout
Componsation
Tolerance not not designated Compensation
No. Item
designated Judgment results outside conducted
compensation range
A Work No. and parts count   
B Desired value   
C Measured value   
D Tolerance range ×  
E Error and judgment ×  
F Tool/Offset number for compensation × × 
G Old tool data/offset data × × 
H New tool data/offset data × × 

For compensation designation #502 = 2., the following items are not outputted.
F: Tool/Offset number for compensation
G: Old tool data/offset data
H: New tool data/offset data

13-56
 OPTION 13
2. Display of measurement results
Measurement results are naomally verified by the printout, but they can also be verified as
required on the MACRO VARIABLE - COMMON VARIABLE.
Use this display to verify the measured coordinates themselves, instead of the distance between
them, for measurements between two random points.

Address Contents Address Contents

#135 Work No. #162 X-coordinate of measurement point 1
#136 Parts count #163 Y-coordinate of measurement point 1
#145 Desired value #164 Z-coordinate of measurement point 1
#146 Measured value #168 X-coordinate of measurement point 2
#147 Tolerance range ([u  v]/2) #169 Y-coordinate of measurement point 2
#148 Error: Measured value  Desired value #170 Z-coordinate of measurement point 2
(#146  #145)
#149 Offset number or Tool number (Remark)
#150 Old offset data or tool data (Remark)
#151 New offset data or tool data (Remark)
#152 Tolerance judgment OK range (q × #147)
#153 Judgment:
1. OK
2. WARNING
3. ALARM for tolerance over

Remark : For compensation designation #502 = 2., these items are not outputted.

13-3-7 Related alarms

An alarm will be generated in the event that a programming error or a malfunction in the touch
sensor prevents an accurate measurement or in case of tolerance over state. An alarm message
will be displayed on the screen if an alarm is generated.

Alarm No. and message Description

3901 PARAMETER ERROR A data processing system parameter is not correct.
3902 INITIALZ ARGUMENT ERROR An argument is not correct for the workpiece measurment initial setting
program.
3903 MEASURE ARGUMENT ERROR An argument is not correct for a measurement operation program.
3904 JUDGE ARGUMENT ERROR An argument is not correct for a tolerance judgment printout program.
3905 PATTERN GROUP MISS MATCH There is mismatch between tolerance judgment printout program and
measurement pattern group.
3906 ARGUMENT E ERROR Argument “Ee” for tolerance judgment printout B does not match the
measurement pattern.
3907 CORRECTION APPOINT ERR. Compensation is designated for tolerance judgment printout B with a mea-
surement pattern for which compensation is not possible.
3910 TOLERANCE OVER Results of tolerance judgment show a tolerance over state.
3912 MMS NOT TOUCH Touch sensor has not come into contact with the workpiece during mea-
surement.

Note : If a block preceded by a block for calling workpiece measurement macro is designated
for restart position of an EIA/ISO program, alarm No. 3910 will be caused at the calling
block in the flow of restart position search, unless all the blocks for calling work No.
9100 to 9145 are provided with skip code ( / ) and the block-skip function is validated
before restart position search.

13-57
13 OPTION

13-3-8 Program and printout examples

This subsection includes five printout examples.
Example 1: Compensation of tool diameter for Tool No. 20 as a result of ID measurement.

Program (EIA/ISO)
:
G65P9100W1234.R10.K3.Q0.5
G65P9110M101.X-50.Y-50.Z-5.D50.
50.
G55P9115U0.3V0.S20.
:
Printout
50.
%%
/RESULT OF MEASURING/
WNO 1234 COUNT 1
ID
MARK DATA HOL/BOS DIA 50.150
50.+0.3
0 MEASURED DATA R 50.064
TOLERANCE 0.150
CHECK OK/WARNING -0.086
10. TOOL NO 20
TOOL DATA 10.000
NEW TOOL DATA 9.914
5 END

M3S111

The values q = 0.5; d = 50.; u = 0.3; and v = 0 would cause an alarm to be generated if the
measured value were greater than 50.3 or less than 50. If the result were 50.075 < measured
value < 50.225, the result would be CHECK OK and no compensation would be made.

13-58
 OPTION 13
Example 2: Compensation for Offset No. 30 as a result of measurements of hole center as
reference and surface.

Program (EIAISO)
:
G65P9100W5678.R10.K4.Q0.5
(P1) G65P9122M11.X-100.Y-60.Z-20.D60.
100. (P2) G65P9120M122.X-40.Y-60.Z-20.
G65P9125E1.U0.1V-0.1S30.B-1.
60 ± 0.1
:
Printout
60.
%%
P1 P2
/RESULT OF MEASURING/
WNO 5678 COUNT 1
60.
MARK DATA FACE-HOLE/BOS 60.000
MEASURED DATA X 60.053
TOLERANCE 0.100
CHECK OK/WARNING 0.053
10. OFFSET NO 30
OFFSET DATA 10.000
NEW OFFSET DATA 9.947
20. END

M3S112

If the value “B–1.” were not designated, the new offset data would become 10.053.

13-59
13 OPTION

Example 3: Measurement of two outside corners and tolerance judgment along the X-axis and
the Y-axis.

Program (EIA/ISO)
:
G65P9100W2468.R15.K5.Q0.5
(P1) G65P9123M14.X-80.Y0.Z-10.I15.
(P2) G65P9123M122.X0.Y-60.Z-10.I15.
G65P9125E1.U0.1 V-0.1
80 ± 0.1 G65P9125E2.U0.05 V–0.05

P1 :
Printout
%%
60 ± 0.05
/RESULT OF MEASURING/
WNO 2468 COUNT 1

P2 MARK DATA CNR-CNR 80.000

MEASURED DATA X 80.047
15. TOLERANCE 0.100
10. CHECK OK/WARNING 0.047
END
%%
10. 15. MARK DATA CNR-CNR 60.000
MEASURED DATA Y 60.051
TOLERANCE 0.050
CHECK LIMIT OVER ALARM 0.051
END

M3S113

The above example could also apply a step width measurement.

13-60
 OPTION 13
Example 4: Continuous measurement of X-axis distance between hole center and groove
center, and Y-axis distance between hole center and surface.

Program (EIA/ISO)
:
G65P9100W3690.R20.K3.Q0.5
(P1) G65P9122M11.X-48.Y-60.Z-15.D60.
(P2) G65P9121M121.X-120.Y-60.Z-15.D32.
G65P9125E1.U0.05 V–0.05
120. (P2’) G65P9120M124.X–120.Y0.Z-15.
72 ± 0.05 48. G65P9125E2.U0.1V–0.1
P2’
:
Printout
60 ± 0.1
%%
P2 P1
/RESULT OF MEASURING/
WNO 3690 COUNT 1

MARK DATA GRV/STP-HOL/BOS 72.000

MEASURED DATA X 71.963
TOLERANCE 0.050
20. CHECK OK/WARNING –0.037
15. END
%%
32. 60. MARK DATA FACE-HOLE/BOS 60.000
MEASURED DATA Y 59.952
TOLERANCE 0.100
CHECK LIMIT OVER ALARM -0.048
END

M3S114

13-61
13 OPTION

Example 5: Measurement of slant angle between two surfaces on the XY-plane

Tolerance: ±0.2 deg.

Program (EIA/ISO)
:
G65P9100W1496.R10.K5.Q0.5
G65P9130F1.M3.X–420.Y–200.Z–20.
G65P9135I200.A–30.U0.2V–0.2
G65P9130F1.M102.X–130.Y–270.Z–20.
G65P9135I110.A30.U0.2V–0.2
:
420. Printout
130. %%
/RESULT OF MEASURING/

200. 110. WNO 1496 COUNT 1

270.
MARK DATA SLANT X-Y –30.000
MEASURED DATA X –29.925
30° TOLERANCE 0.200
30°
CHECK OK 0.075
200. END
%%
MARK DATA SLANT X-Y 30.000
10.
MEASURED DATA Y 29.937
20.
TOLERANCE 0.200
CHECK OK –0.063
END

M3S115

Argument K is not effective for this function. However, specify a positive value.

13-62
 OPTION 13
13-4 Geometry Compensation Function

13-4-1 Function general

1. Geometry compensation function

Machining at rapid feed will generally degrade a geometry accuracy in proportion to the feed rate.
For example, delayed follow-up of smoothing circuit and servo system occurs in circular cutting,
making a smaller workpiece than commanded circle radius.
Our CNC unit allows conventional geometry errors to be reduced by using geometry compen-
sation function. The geometry compensation function is composed of the following five functions:
1. Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration
2. Feedforward control
3. Precise vector compensation
4. Optimum feed control (Optimum deceleration at corners, Optimum acceleration control)
5. Feed clamping for circular interpolation
In circular cutting, geometry errors from smoothing circuit can be reduced by pre-interpolation
acceleration/deceleration and those from delayed follow-up of servo system can be reduced by
feedforward control.

Programmed path
R

F Path when geometry compensation

F
function is invalid.

Path when geometry compensation

function is valid at an active feed-
R forward gain level of 0%

Path when geometry compensation

function is valid at an active feed-
forward gain level of 70%

R: Designated radius (mm)

R: Radius error (mm)
F: Cutting speed (m/min)

13-63
13 OPTION

Active feedforward control

Pre-interpolation accelerate/
decelerate commands
Active feedforward control

Post-interpolation
accelerate/decelerate
commands + +
Kp Kv M
– –

Detector

Kp: Position loop gain S

Kv: Velocity loop gain
M: Motor
S: Differential

Note : Active feedforward control is valid only when the geometry compensation function is
valid.
Also, the time required for the positioning of very small line segments using command G00 can
be reduced since gradient-fixed acceleration/deceleration occurs automatically.
The positioning time changes as follows:

Velocity

Time constant fixed

Gradient fixed Positioning time Time

(When geometry
compensation
function is valid.)

Positioning time Time

Optimum corner deceleration may occur, depending on the angle, , of connection point A. This
allows machining into highly precise edges.

Programmed path

Deceleration occurs here.

13-64
 OPTION 13
2. Geometry compensation function for rotational axes
As compared with the geometry compensation function described above under 1, this function
improves errors in control system by implementing the appropriate acceleration/deceleration
according to the particular machining contour, even for movement commands that require
simultaneous control of the rotational axes.
In stead of the conventional “optimum deceleration at corners,” the optimum acceleration control
is conducted in the geometry compensation function for rotational axes.

Geometry compensation INVALID for rotational axes Geometry compensation VALID for rotational axes
1 Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration
2 Optimum deceleration at corners Optimum acceleration control
3 Feed clamping for circular interpolation Feed clamping for circular interpolation
4 Precise vector compensation Precise vector compensation
5 Feedforward control Feedforward control
6 Software acceleration/deceleration control Software acceleration/deceleration control

This compensation function provides control as required to ensure that the acceleration of each
axis at corners may come to the maximum permissible value (as set in the parameters con-
cerned).

C-axis

Motion path Acceleration arising from a

N1 N2
change in the moving direction

Z-axis

C-axis motion C-axis motion

speed Change in motion speed speed Deceleration for the permissible
acceleration (to suppress vibration)

D740S3087

13-65
13 OPTION

13-4-2 Detailed description

1. Programming format

A. MAZATROL program
For MAZATROL programs the geometry compensation function becomes automatically valid
through the setting of user-parameter F72.

User-parameter F72 = 1: Geometry compensation function valid

F72 = 0: Geometry compensation function invalid

It is also possible to validate/invalidate the geometry compensation function by setting

M153/M154 under M-code article either of tool sequence data in a machining unit or of a manual
program mode unit. But it is not the case if M153/M154 is given in an M-code unit.

M153 : Geometry compensation function valid

M154 : Geometry compensation function invalid

Sample program
UNo. MAT. INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CST IRN 100. 0 OFF   
UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R
1 FCE MILL 0. 2. 4  0.6 
SNo. TOOL NOM- No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M M
R 1 FCE MILL 100. ? ? XBI  1.4 70. 110 2.1 154
F 2 FCE MILL 100. ? ? XBI   70. 110 0.84
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CX P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR 0. 0. 150. 150.
UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R INTER-R CHMF
2 POCKET 10. 10. 4 4 0.6 0.6 0. 0.
SNo. TOOL NOM- No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD TYPE PK-DEP DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M M
R 1 END MILL 20. ? ? CW G01 9.4 14. 82 0.159 154
F 2 END MILL 14. ? ? CW G01  9.8 86 0.448
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CX P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR 45. -85. 105. 115. R 10. R 10. R 10. R 10.
UNo. UNIT CONTI. NUMBER ATC RETURN WORK No. EXECUTE
3 END 0 1 0 ZERO PT 

Note : If the program shown above is executed in the automatic operation mode with
parameter F72 = 1, the geometry compensation function will be made invalid for rough
machining of face milling (with face mill of 100) and pocket milling (with end mill of
20).

13-66
 OPTION 13
B. EIA/ISO program
G61.1 Geometry compensation function valid
G61 (Exact stop check mode)
G62 (Automatic corner override) Geometry compensation function invalid
G63 (Tapping mode) (Command codes of the same group cancel the mode.)
G64 (Cutting mode)

Note : In the case of EIA/ISO programs, it is always necessary to give the G-code command
to make the geometry compensation function valid since the setting of parameter F72
is not effective for them.
<Sample program>
N001 G61.1 Geometry compensation function valid
G01X100.F1000
X100.Y-100.
X-100.Y-100.
X-100.
X-100.Y100.
X100.Y100.
G64 The mode is cancelled (becomes invalid).

2. Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration

F Programmed path

F
Actual path

R

R: Designated radius (mm)/(in)

 R: Radius error (mm)/(in)
: Angle error (rad)
F: Cutting speed (m/min)/(in/min)
R

The radius error, R, is calculated as follows:

1 1 1 2 F × 103 2
Post-interpolation Exponential R = × ( Ts2 + Tp ) × ( ) (mm)
R 2 2 60
acceleration/
1 1 1 2 F × 103 2
deceleration Linear R = × ( Ts2 + Tp ) × ( ) (mm)
R 24 2 60
Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration
1 1 2 F × 103 2
(When geometry compensation function if R = × ( + Tp (1 – Kf2)) × ( ) (mm)
R 2 60
effective)

Ts : The preset time constant (s) for the smoothing circuit = Parameter N5/1000
Tp : Position loop time constant (s) = 1/parameter SV003
Kf : Feed-forward gain = Parameter S4/100
F F × 103
Note : nder the inch system, ( 60 ) acts as a substitute for ( 60 )

13-67
13 OPTION

The acceleration/deceleration pattern is shown below.

Velocity

L74

Gradient-fixed
acceleration/deceleration
Programmed
velocity

Time
L75

Gradient-fixed execution time

3. Optimum corner deceleration

Machining with high edge precision can be done by decelerating the machine at corners.
Optimum corner deceleration control occurs when the function of geometry compensation is
made invalid for rotational axes.
Before it arrives at corner point P, the machine is automatically decelerated to achieve its
maximum permissible deceleration value, Vo.


P
N002

N001
Decelerated to Vo

The deceleration pattern is shown below.

Velocity

N001 N002

F: Cutting feed rate

L75: Cutting feed time constant
Vo for pre-interpolation
acceleration/deceleration
Vo: Maximum permissible
deceleration velocity

L75 Time

The value of Vo can be approximately given in the following expressions:

Vo = V / 2 (1 – cos)
V = (L74/L75) × t t: Sampling frequency during interpolation (= 3.5 ms)

13-68
 OPTION 13
If the intersection angle, , of the path of the current block and that of the next one is the value of
parameter L77 or less, these two paths will be judged smooth and no deceleration will occur. If
this angle is in excess of the value of parameter L77 the paths will be judged nonsmooth and
optimum corner deceleration will be performed.

Note : The angle  will be handled as five degrees if parameter L77 is set to 0.
Although any value from 0 to 30 degrees can be set using parameter L77, setting of too
large an angle value may cause machine vibration and/or rough surface machining,
even if that value is an allowable one.

4. Optimum acceleration control

Optimum acceleration control refers to controlling the feed at corners between blocks. The
acceleration of each axis concerned for cornering is controlled so as to obtain the optimum rate
of feed at corners and thus to prevent machine vibration for high accuracy in edge sections.
Optimum acceleration control occurs when the function of geometry compensation is made valid
for rotational axes.
The feed of the first block is decelerated at the corner point P to such a value (Vo) that the
acceleration (A) of each axis required for the motion of the second block may come to the
maximum permissible value (Amax).

A
Vo

P
V N002

N001
Decelerated to Vo

The formula of calculation of Amax is as follows:

M27 100 – N26 2
Amax = × 60 × 1000 × 100 (mm/ms )
N25

13-69
13 OPTION

5. Precise vector interpolation

Although a very small line segment forms a very small block-to-block angle and thus provides
smooth interpolation, it may not become possible for optimal corner deceleration to be achieved.
This, however, becomes possible with a vectorial accuracy interpolation function since smoother
interpolation can be obtained.
(Precise vector interpolation is valid only for the geometry compensation function.)
If interpolation has been programmed, rough interpolation is performed prior to precise vector
interpolation.

Programmed path

Rough interpolation

After rough interpolation, precise vector interpolation is performed.

recise vector interpolation

Rough interpolation

As shown below, the programmed path may not be smooth,

Programmed path

13-70
 OPTION 13
If this is the case, the velocity will be reduced and optimum corner deceleration will occur.
Reduction of the velocity moves the tool almost as programmed, thus allowing precise machining.

Rough interpolation

Programmed path

Precise vector interpolation

Rough interpolation

6. Accuracy coefficient
Under corner- and arc-machining commands, optimal corner deceleration and arc feed rate
limitation provide automatic deceleration to compensate for any errors in the accuracy of
machining. In that case, machining accuracy can be further improved by specifying an accuracy
coefficient in the program since further deceleration is achieved at corners and at arc sections.
Command format

Specifies the rate of reduction of the corner deceleration speed and the arc feed rate limitation in
,K__
percentage terms.

<Sample program 1>

N001 G61.1
N200 G1X_Y_,K30 If a corner deceleration command or an arc-interpolation command has been
N300 X_Y_ specified, machining will begin decelerating to 70% of the default value at
N400 ... this block onward.

<Sample program 2>

N001 G61.1
N200 G2I-10.,K30 Only this block is where machining decelerates to 70% of the default value.
N300 G1X10.,K0 The accuracy coefficient is cancelled for this block onward automatically.
N400 ...

The accuracy coefficient is cancelled automatically in the following cases:

 The case that the reset key is pressed
 The case that a shape offset cancellation command (G64) is issued
 The case that command code ,K0 is set
Note 1: An accuracy coefficient cannot be specified in MAZATROL programs.
Note 2: If a value from 1 to 100 is specified as accuracy coefficient K in a program that includes
a corner deceleration command and an arc-interpolation command, the machining time
will increase, compared with its normal value.

13-71
13 OPTION

7. Feed clamping for circular interpolation

Circular interpolation with a constant speed on the motion path requires the rate of feed on the
controlled axes concerned to be precisely changed in accordance with the change in the
tangential direction. The command speed can be obtained even in circular interpolation, indeed,
when the radius (R) of the arc is large enough with respect to the specified rate of feed (F). In the
case of a relatively small radius, however, the rate of feed is clamped in such a manner that the
acceleration (A) required for the circular path may not overstep the maximum permissible value
(Amax) for the pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration control.

F
F

R
A
F
 F

The formula of calculation of Amax is as follows:

M27 100 – N26 2
Amax = × 60 × 1000 × 100 (mm/ms )
N25

13-4-3 Hold status

G61.1
Initial status Power on ×
Reset command M02, M30, M00, reset ×
Reset operation NC reset switch, external reset ×
Reset and initialize ×
Block interruption Mode change (auto/manual), feed hold 
Block stop Single block 
Emergency stop Emergency stop switch, external emergency stop 
NC alarm Servo alarm 
OT Hardware OT 
Emergency stop cancel Emergency stop switch, external emergency stop ×
: No change ×: Cancel

13-4-4 Notes
1. This feature works only under optional specifications for geometry compensation function. A
program error (Alarm 935 NO PRE-INTERP ACCEL/DECEL OPT.) will result if program-
ming is done using this feature under the standard specifications for usual machining.
2. Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration is valid for the G61.1 command block onward.
3. The feedrate which has been set using command F is limited to the value obtained by the
following expression:
Maximum cutting feedrate M3 × Speed limit magnification L76
If the value that has thus been obtained is in excess of the rapid feedrate value of M1, the
M1 value will become the actual upper limit of feedrate.
4. The geometry compensation function for a rotational axis is an additional option, other than
that mentioned in item 1 above.

 See Subsection 13-4-6 for arc-machining speed limitation.

13-72
 OPTION 13
13-4-5 Parameters
Parameters related to geometry compensation are listed below.

Address Description
L74 Cutting feed rate for pre-interpolational acceleration/deceleration control
L75 Time constant for pre-interpolational linear control during cutting feed rata acceleration/deceleration
L76 Acceleration rate for high-speed cutting
L77 Angle for deceleration at corner before interpolation
F72 Selection of the geometry compenation function of the MAZATROL program
L129 Acceleration/deceleration filter (1st stage), G1 time constant
L130 Acceleration/deceleration filter (1st stage), G0 time constant
L131 Acceleration/deceleration filter (2nd stage), G1 time constant
L132 Acceleration/deceleration filter (2nd stage), G0 time constant
N29 Time constant for geometry compensation rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration filter
L73 Time constant for geometry compensation acceleration/deceleration filter 2
N4 Time constant for post-interpolation rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration filter
F96 bit 6 Rotational axis geometry compensation valid/invalid
F1 G61.1 corner deceleration coefficient (%)
F2 G61.1 arc-clamping speed coefficient (%)
J41
J42
J43
M-code macroprogram call
J45
J46
J47
S4 Feedforward gain
M27 Optimum acceleration control: Target speed
N25 Time constant for deceleration rate calculation
N26 Accuracy coefficient for deceleration rate calculation

 See the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List for further details of
the parameters.

13-73
13 OPTION

13-4-6 Appendix
Appended data concerns theoretical values obtained from the conditions of commanded radius,
feedforward gain, etc. They may differ from measured values in actual machining depending on
cutting conditions, machine accuracy, etc. Apply it as a general criterion for test cuts and others.

1. Maximum feed rate in circular interpolation when geometry compensation function is valid
Maximum feed rate in circular interpolation when geometry compensation is valid can be
determined from the following equation.
 = F ×  ....................................................... [1] F
F = R ×  ....................................................... [2]
From equations [1] and [2]
R 
L74/60
F= R× = R× –3 × 60.... [3]
L75 × 10
F : maximum feed rate (mm/min)
R : Circle radius (mm)
L74 : Cutting feed rate (mm/min)
L75 : Cutting feed time constant (ms)
Each maximum feed rate in radius from equation [3] is
as follows:
Parameter L74 = 30000 (mm/min)
L75 = 400 (ms)
Maximum feed rate for circle radius

Radius (mm) 15 25 50 100 150

Maximum feed rate
8.216 10.607 15.000 21.213 25.981
(m/min)

2. Maximum feed rate to keep a geometry error within 10 m in circular interpolation

Maximum feed rate obtained from a geometry error in circular interpolation can be determined
from the following equation.

A. When geometry compensation function is valid

R × R
3
F × 10 = 1 2 2 × 60 ............................. [4]
Tp (1 – Kf )
2
F : Maximum feed rate (m/min)
Tp : Position loop time constant (s) (= 1/SV003)
Kf : Feed-forward gain (= S4/100)
R : Geometry error (mm)
R : Circle radius (mm)

13-74
 OPTION 13
B. When geometry compensation function is invalid
(In exponential acceleration/deceleration system)
R × R
3
F × 10 = 1 1 × 60 ............................. [5]
Tp2 + Ts 2
2 2
F : Maximum feed rate (m/min)
Tp : Position loop time constant (s) (= 1/SV003)
Ts : Smoothing circuit time constant (s) (= N5/1000)
R : Geometry error (mm)
R : Circle radius (mm)
Each maximum feed rate within 10 m in geometry error from equations [4] and [5] is as follows:

Radius (mm) 15 25 50 100 150

Geometry compensation
1.534 1.980 2.801 3.961 4.851
function valid (m/min)
Geometry compensation
0.911 1.177 1.664 2.353 2.882
function invalid (m/min)

Parameter SV003 = 33 (rad/s)

S4 = 70 (%)
N5 = 20 (ms)
R = 10 (m)

3. Maximum cutting feed in circular interpolation when geometry compensation function is

available and geometry error (Theoretical value).
L74 3000 (mm/min)
L75 400 (ms)
Feedforward gain 0.7
Geometry error 0.01 (mm)
Time constant (G61.1) 0.4 (s)
Position loop time constant 0.03 (s)
Time constant (G64) 0.02 (s)

Geometry compensation function valid Normal cutting mode

R (mm) Maximum feed 1 Error Maximum feed 2 Error Maximum feed
(m/min) (mm) (m/min) (mm) (m/min)
150 25.981 0.287 4.851 0.028 2.882
100 21.213 0.287 3.961 0.028 2.353
50 15.000 0.287 2.801 0.028 1.664
25 10.607 0.287 1.980 0.028 1.177
15 8.216 0.287 1.534 0.028 0.911
5 4.743 0.287 0.886 0.028 0.526

13-75
13 OPTION

L74 3000 (mm/min)

L75 400 (ms)
Feedforward gain 0.85
Geometry error 0.01 (mm)
Time constant (G61.1) 0.4 (s)
Position loop time constant 0.03 (s)
Time constant (G64) 0.02 (s)

Geometry compensation function valid Normal cutting mode

R (mm) Maximum feed 1 Error Maximum feed 2 Error Maximum feed
(m/min) (mm) (m/min) (mm) (m/min)
150 25.981 0.156 6.576 0.052 2.882
100 21.213 0.156 5.369 0.052 2.353
50 15.000 0.156 3.797 0.052 1.664
25 10.607 0.156 2.685 0.052 1.177
15 8.216 0.156 2.080 0.052 0.911
5 4.743 0.156 1.201 0.052 0.526

L74 3000 (mm/min)

L75 400 (ms)
Feedforward gain 0.99
Geometry error 0.01 (mm)
Time constant (G61.1) 0.4 (s)
Position loop time constant 0.03 (s)
Time constant (G64) 0.02 (s)

Geometry compensation function valid Normal cutting mode

R (mm) Maximum feed 1 Error Maximum feed 2 Error Maximum feed
(m/min) (mm) (m/min) (mm) (m/min)
150 25.981 0.011 24.556 0.726 2.882
100 21.213 0.011 20.050 0.726 2.353
50 15.000 0.011 14.178 0.726 1.664
25 10.607 0.011 10.025 0.726 1.177
15 8.216 0.011 7.765 0.726 0.911
5 4.743 0.011 4.483 0.726 0.526

Remark 1:
 Maximum feed 1 when geometry compensation function is available represents the
maximum feed in circular interpolation.
 Maximum feed 2 when geometry compensation function is available represents the
maximum feed to keep a geometry error within 10 m.
 Error hen geometry compensation is available represents a geometry error at the
maximum feed 1.
Remark 2:
 Maximum cutting feed in normal machining mode represents the maximum feed to keep
a geometry error within 10 m.
 Error in normal machining mode represents a geometry error at the maximum feed 2
when geometry compensation function is available.
Note : An increased feed forward gain causes a decreased geometry error. However, it
causes vibration to the machine, which may deteriorate the surface roughness of
cutting surface.

13-76
 OPTION 13
13-5 Hard Disk Operating Function

13-5-1 Outline
With the hard disk (HD) operating function, any large-size EIA/ISO program pre-saved within a
special folder of the HD contained in the NC unit can be executed for automatic operation while
transferring that program to the NC memory.

13-5-2 Preparation for HD operation

To execute HD operation, it is required first to create a machining program and save it into a
special folder of the built-in HD. Create and then save (copy) the desired program into the folder
shown below by either the Explorer accompanying the Windows system, or another commer-
cially available software.
Folder for HD operation programs: C:\ymw\M8Y\data\MC_Direct Mode Programs\
Prior to shipping from the factory, the reference folder for HD operation programs is preset as
shown above. It is possible to change the reference folder on the PROGRAM FILE display.

 For changing procedure, see Section 7-4.

13-5-3 Selection of operation mode

1. Selection between HD and conventional TAPE operation modes

The HD operating function is provided as the alternative to the conventional TAPE operating
function. Use the following parameter to select between the provided operating functions as
required for actual operational conditions:

Name Program type

Address Description
Unit Setting range Conditions

TAPE mode selection – The operating function to be selected for the TAPE
operation mode.
F40 0: Conventional TAPE operating function
0, 1, 3 Immediate 1: HD operating function
3: Ethernet operating function

When the HD operating function is selected, the special operation mode is indicated, as shown
below, in the upper part of the display.
The indication is not given, indeed, during selection of the MDI or a manual operation mode nor
during execution of a program stored in the NC memory.

The mode indication is highlighted on red background, as shown below, during actual HD
operation.

13-77
13 OPTION

2. HD operation modes
The HD operating function can be used in the following two modes:
1. Direct operation mode
A program stored on the HD operates as the main program.
2. Subprogram operation mode
A program stored on the HD is called up as the subprogram from a main program registered
in the NC memory.
Press the TAPE key (to turn it on) to select the direct operation mode, and the MEMORY key (to
turn it on) to use the subprogram operation mode of the HD operating function.

TAPE operation key MEMORY operation key

3. Restrictions concerning the HD operating function

General restrictions on the HD operation are as follows:
 Only programs of the EIA/ISO format can be used for the HD operation.
 Programs stored on the HD cannot be checked for tool path and machining shape on the
TOOL PATH CHECK display.
 Programs stored on the HD cannot be used for simulation on the VIRTUAL MACHINING
display.
 A simulation on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display causes an alarm (844 PROGRAM No.
NOT FOUND) at the call for a subprogram which is stored on the HD.
 Programs stored on the HD cannot be subjected to the external work number search.
Further particular restrictions for each HD operation mode are as follows:

For direct operation mode

 The HD main program cannot call another HD program as a subprogram. On a subprogram-
call command from the HD main program can only the NC memory be searched for, and an
alarm will be given if the specified program is not found there.
 An NC subprogram called up from the HD main program cannot call another HD program as
the further subroutine.
 An alarm will be caused if an “M99” command (used for return from subprogram) is given in
the HD main program.

For subprogram operation mode

 The HD subprogram cannot call another HD program as a subprogram. On a further sub-
program-call command from the HD subprogram can only the NC memory be searched for,
and an alarm will be given if the specified program is not found there.
 Sequence number specification for subprogram call by “M98H” is not effective in calling up
an HD program. The HD subprogram is always executed from the beginning.
 Repeat time specification for subprogram call is not effective in calling up an HD program.
The HD subprogram is always executed only one time for one call command.

13-78
 OPTION 13
 The subprogram call from the NC main program preferably selects a program in the NC
memory to that on the HD in case the specified work number should have been assigned to
the both programs.
 With MAZATROL programs in the NC memory, use a subprogram unit or “G65” (non-modal
user macro call) in a manual-program unit for the HD subprogram operation mode.

13-5-4 Program selection for HD operation

Use the ordinary method for work number search to select as the main program a program
stored on the local HD and registered in the NC memory, respectively, for direct operation mode
and subprogram operation mode.

1. Direct operation mode

(1) Select the direct HD operation mode by pressing the key .

(2) Select the POSITION display on the screen.
 This is required for selecting the program to be run and checking the operational status
of the machine.
(3) Specify the desired program stored on the HD.
(a) Tap the [WORK No.] menu item.
The WORK No. SELECT window appears.
(b) Select the desired program from among those stored on the HD.
To specify the program of work No. 100, for example:
Example 1: Tap the keys 1 0 0 in that order.
Example 2: Tap the displayed work number “100” in the window, and then tap the
[OK] button.
Carry out the above procedural steps, referred to as “HD work number search”, to start the
direct HD operation.

2. Subprogram operation mode

(1) Select the subprogram operation mode by pressing the key.

(2) Select the POSITION display on the screen.
 This is required for selecting the program to be run and checking the operational status
of the machine.
(3) Specify the desired main program stored in the NC memory.
 Select, or perform work number search for, an NC program (stored in the NC memory)
including the subprogram-call command for the desired HD program.
 The operational procedure required here is just the same as that for normal MEMORY
operation. No HD subprogram operation, however, takes place if the correct command
for calling the HD program is not given in the specified NC program.

13-79
13 OPTION

13-5-5 Restart in the HD operation mode

The restart function is restricted for the HD operation as follows:
 The restart function can be executed in the subprogram operation mode only when the
selected NC main program is of the EIA/ISO format.
The restarting procedure for the HD operation is also the same as that for normal automatic
operation.

 Refer to Subsection 1-2-2 “Restart operation/Smooth restart operation” in the

Operating Manual, Part 4 “Automatic Operation”.

13-5-6 Format for HD operation programs

The programs on the HD to be used for the HD operation must be of the text file format. Use a
commercially available text editor capable of editing text files to create the desired programs.
Note : Only programs of the EIA/ISO format can be used for the HD operation.

1. File name
Designate the file of a program to be stored on the HD for HD operation as directed below. The
file names here serve as the work numbers to be searched for in actual machine operation.

PROGRAM12345678.EIA
Extension
File name

File name Assign a work number.

 Any string of up to 32 characters can be used as a work number. For the use of
numerals only, however, the work number may be up to eight digits long (from 1 to
99999999).
 Characters available are letters (capital and small: A to Z and a to z), numerals, and
the following symbols:
“+” “–” “_” and “.”
It should be noted here that no distinction is made between capital and small letters.
That is, a new program cannot be named “aBC” if a program with the name “ABC”
already exists in the storage area concerned. Moreover, the program name must
not begin with a period (.).
 The work number which is composed exclusively of numerals must begin with a
non-zero numeral. The leading zeros of the file name are always ignored, and thus
the NC unit cannot distinguish the following two names, for example, from one
another:
1234567.EIA
Both denote work number “1234567”.
01234567.EIA
Extension Identification of an EIA/ISO program
 All programs for the HD operation must have this extension assigned.

13-80
 OPTION 13
2. Programming format
Create HD operation programs in the following text file format:
 One program must be created for one text file.
 The program must not begin with an EOR code (%) since it is executed from the very first
block.
 Enter a line feed code (by pressing the return key) at the end of each block. A semicolon
‘;’must not be used. An alarm will result if a semicolon is included in the program.
 Macro data cannot be used.
 Only characters listed in the table below may be used. Two-byte codes (such as normal-size
characters or uni-codes) are not admissible.

Type Usable characters Remarks

Alphabet  ‘A’ ~ ‘Z’ (Capitals only)  Only one-byte codes can be used.
Numeral  ‘0’ ~ ‘9’  End of block is to be specified by CR (Carriage
Return) plus LF (Line Feed) or simply by LF.
 ‘’ (Decimal point)
Symbol  ‘%’ (EOR)
 ‘(’, ‘)’ (Parentheses)
 Space code
Others
 Line feed code (EOB)

3. Example of programming
Programs for direct operation mode

O200  The program must not begin with an EOR code (%)
G40 G80 G90 since it is executed from the very first block.
G28 X0 Y0 Z0

M30  The program end code must be M30 or M02.

(M99 will cause an alarm.)
%
 Enter ‘%’ (EOR) at the end of the program.

Programs for subprogram operation mode

O200  The program must not begin with an EOR code (%)
G40 G80 G90 since it is executed from the very first block.
G28 X0 Y0 Z0

M99  The end of program code must be M99.

%  Enter ‘%’ (EOR) at the end of the program.

13-81
13 OPTION

13-6 Ethernet Operating Function

13-6-1 Outline
With the Ethernet (abbreviated to ENET in this section) operating function, any large-size
EIA/ISO program pre-saved within the host computer can be executed for automatic operation
while transferring that program to the NC memory under an Ethernet-based network environ-
ment.

13-6-2 Preparation for ENET operation

To execute Ethernet operation, it is required first to connect the NC unit and the host computer
through an Ethernet cable in order to store the machining program in the host computer. The
LAN connector is located on the rear side of the NC unit. Ask the supervisor of the network in
your company for more information on the connecting procedure.
To prepare the NC for referring to the folder concerned in the host computer, carry out the
following operations on the POSITION display:
(1) Tap , [Setup] and the [Ethernet Running Folder] option in that order.

(2) Set the name of the reference folder in the dialogue box which appears upon step (1).

 Tap [BROWSE] to display the tree of the available folders, and select an item under the
host computer if it is to be set as a folder name.

(3) Complete the setting by tapping the [OK] button.

 Once designated, the name of the folder is not cleared simply by the turning-off.

13-82
 OPTION 13
 The folder name can consist of 64 characters.

13-6-3 Selection of operation mode

1. Selection between ENET and conventional TAPE operation modes

The ENET operating function is provided as the alternative to the conventional TAPE operating
function. Use the following parameter to select between the provided operating functions as
required for actual operational conditions:

Name Program type

Address Description
Unit Setting range Conditions

TAPE mode selection – The operating function to be selected for the TAPE
operation mode.
F40 0: Conventional TAPE operating function
0, 1, 3 Immediate 1: HD operating function
3: Ethernet operating function

When the ENET operating function is selected, the special operation mode is indicated in the
upper part of the display.
The indication is not given, indeed, during selection of the MDI or a manual operation mode nor
during execution of a program stored in the NC memory.
The mode indication is highlighted on red background during actual ENET operation.

 See Section 13-5 for more information.

2. ENET operation modes

The ENET operating function can be used in the following two modes:
1. Direct operation mode
A program stored in the host computer operates as the main program.
2. Subprogram operation mode
A program stored in the host computer is called up as the subprogram from a main program
registered in the NC memory.
Press the TAPE key (to turn it on) to select the direct operation mode, and the MEMORY key (to
turn it on) to use the subprogram operation mode of the ENET operating function.

TAPE operation key MEMORY operation key

13-83
13 OPTION

3. Restrictions concerning the ENET operating function

General restrictions on the ENET operation are as follows:
 Only programs of the EIA/ISO format can be used for the ENET operation.
 Programs stored in the host computer cannot be checked for tool path and machining shape
on the TOOL PATH CHECK display.
 Programs stored in the host computer cannot be used for simulation on the VIRTUAL
MACHINING display.
 A simulation on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display causes an alarm (844 PROGRAM No.
NOT FOUND) at the call for a subprogram which is stored in the host computer.
 The [RESTART 2 NONMODAL] menu function cannot be applied to a program stored in the
host computer.
 Programs stored in the host computer cannot be subjected to the external work number
search.
 Machine operation may sometimes break off in consequence of a retardation of data transfer
due to the particular performance of the host computer and communication conditions. It is
recommended, therefore, to connect the NC and the host computer one to one for high-speed
machining by micro-segmental command blocks.
Further particular restrictions for each ENET operation mode are as follows:

For direct operation mode

 The ENET main program cannot call another ENET program as a subprogram. On a sub-
program-call command from the ENET main program can only the NC memory be searched
for, and an alarm will be given if the specified program is not found there.
 An NC subprogram called up from the ENET main program cannot call another ENET
program as the further subroutine.
 An alarm will be caused if an “M99” command (used for return from subprogram) is given in
the ENET main program.
For subprogram operation mode
 The ENET subprogram cannot call another ENET program as a subprogram. On a further
subprogram-call command from the ENET subprogram can only the NC memory be searched
for, and an alarm will be given if the specified program is not found there.
 Sequence number specification for subprogram call by “M98H” is not effective in calling up
an ENET program. The ENET subprogram is always executed from the beginning.
 Repeat time specification for subprogram call is not effective in calling up an ENET program.
The ENET subprogram is always executed only one time for one call command.
 The subprogram call from the NC main program preferably selects a program in the NC
memory to that in the host computer in case the specified work number should have been
assigned to the both programs.
 With MAZATROL programs in the NC memory, use a subprogram unit or “G65” (non-modal
user macro call) in a manual-program unit for the ENET subprogram operation mode.

13-84
 OPTION 13
13-6-4 Program selection for ENET operation
Use the ordinary method for work number search to select as the main program a program
stored in the host computer and registered in the NC memory, respectively, for direct operation
mode and subprogram operation mode.

1. Direct operation mode

(1) Select the direct ENET operation mode by pressing the key.
(2) Select the POSITION display on the screen.
 This is required for selecting the program to be run and checking the operational status
of the machine.
(3) Specify the desired program stored in the host computer.
(a) Tap the [WORK No.] menu item.
The WORK No. SELECT window appears.
(b) Select the desired program from among those stored in the host computer.
To specify the program of work No. 100, for example:
Example 1: Tap the keys 1 0 0 in this order.
Example 2: Tap the displayed work number “100” in the window, and then tap the
[OK] button.
Carry out the above procedural steps, referred to as “Ethernet work number search”, to start
the direct ENET operation.

2. Subprogram operation mode

(1) Select the subprogram operation mode by pressing the key.

(2) Select the POSITION display on the screen.
 This is required for selecting the program to be run and checking the operational status
of the machine.
(3) Specify the desired main program stored in the NC memory.
 Select, or perform work number search for, an NC program (stored in the NC memory)
including the subprogram-call command for the desired ENET program.
 The operational procedure required here is just the same as that for normal MEMORY
operation. No ENET subprogram operation, however, takes place if the correct
command for calling the ENET program is not given in the specified NC program.

13-6-5 Restart in the ENET operation mode

The restart function is restricted for the ENET operation as follows:
 The [RESTART 2 NONMODAL] menu function cannot be applied to an ENET program.
 The restart function can be executed in the subprogram operation mode only when the
selected NC main program is of the EIA/ISO format.
The restarting procedure for the ENET operation is also the same as that for normal automatic
operation.

 Refer to Subsection 1-2-2 “Restart operation/Smooth restart operation” in the

Operating Manual, Part 4 “Automatic Operation”.

13-85
13 OPTION

13-6-6 Format for ENET operation programs

The programs in the host computer to be used for the ENET operation must be of the text file
format. Use a commercially available text editor capable of editing text files to create the desired
programs.
Note : Only programs of the EIA/ISO format can be used for the ENET operation.

1. File name
Designate the file of a program to be stored in the host computer for ENET operation as directed
below. The file names here serve as the work numbers to be searched for in actual machine
operation.

PROGRAM12345678.EIA
Extension
File name

File name Assign a work number.

 Any string of up to 32 characters can be used as a work number. For the use of
numerals only, however, the work number may be up to eight digits long (from 1 to
99999999).
 Characters available are letters (capital and small: A to Z and a to z), numerals, and
the following symbols:
“+” “–” “_” and “.”
It should be noted here that no distinction is made between capital and small letters.
That is, a new program cannot be named “aBC” if a program with the name “ABC”
already exists in the storage area concerned. Moreover, the program name must
not begin with a period (.).
 The work number which is composed exclusively of numerals must begin with a
non-zero numeral. The leading zeros of the file name are always ignored, and thus
the NC unit cannot distinguish the following two names, for example, from one
another:
1234567.EIA
Both denote work number “1234567”.
01234567.EIA
Extension Identification of an EIA/ISO program
 All programs for the ENET operation must have this extension assigned.

2. Programming format
Create ENET operation programs in the following text file format:
 One program must be created for one text file.
 The program must not begin with an EOR code (%) since it is executed from the very first
block.
 Enter a line feed code (by pressing the return key) at the end of each block. A semicolon
‘;’must not be used. An alarm will result if a semicolon is included in the program.
 Macro data cannot be used.
 Only characters listed in the table below may be used. Two-byte codes (such as normal-size
characters or uni-codes) are not admissible.

Type Usable characters Remarks

Alphabet  ‘A’ ~ ‘Z’ (Capitals only)  Only one-byte codes can be used.
Numeral  ‘0’ ~ ‘9’  End of block is to be specified by CR (Carriage
Return) plus LF (Line Feed) or simply by LF.
 ‘’ (Decimal point)
Symbol  ‘%’ (EOR)
 ‘(’, ‘)’ (Parentheses)
 Space code
Others
 Line feed code (EOB)

13-86
 OPTION 13

3. Example of programming
Programs for direct operation mode

O200  The program must not begin with an EOR code (%)
G40 G80 G90 since it is executed from the very first block.
G28 X0 Y0 Z0

M30  The program end code must be M30 or M02.

(M99 will cause an alarm.)
%
 Enter ‘%’ (EOR) at the end of the program.

Programs for subprogram operation mode

O200  The program must not begin with an EOR code (%)
G40 G80 G90 since it is executed from the very first block.
G28 X0 Y0 Z0

M99  The end of program code must be M99.

%  Enter ‘%’ (EOR) at the end of the program.

13-87
13 OPTION

13-7 EIA/ISO Conversion

13-7-1 Outline
Any MAZATROL program that has been created using the MATRIX can be converted into an
EIA/ISO program by EIA/ISO conversion. Conversion into an EIA/ISO program makes machining
possible even with a machine not having a MAZATROL NC.
As for point-machining, two output schemes are available for an EIA/ISO converted program, as
tabulated below. Select the desired scheme using bit 2 of parameter F88.
Output schemes
EIA/ISO conversion 1 EIA/ISO conversion 2
Bit 2 of parameter F88 1 0
 Counterboring
 Boring (Roughness level 2 to 9)
 Chamfering (Cycle 2)
Output with a code from G0 to G4
 End-milling (Cycles 2, 3)
Point-
machining  Tornado cycle
 Planet tapping
Synchronous tapping Output with G84/G74 or G84.2/G84.3 (Parameter-selectable)
Output of a fixed-cycle code
Other point-machining patterns Output with a code from G0 to G4
from G73 to G87
For point machining, since a code For point machining, the
from G0 to G4 is issued automati- length of the program
cally, workpieces can be machined decreases since a fixed-
Feature even with a machine not having a cycle code is issued auto-
fixed-cycle option. matically.
Operation is the same as for the
original MAZATROL program.

To execute an EIA/ISO converted program using other machines, edit the program according to
the particular NC specifications or machine configuration. Before machining a workpiece, edit the
functions listed in the table below and then perform checks by cutting test pieces.
Functions required for editing

Function Editing
Workpiece coordinate system  Since workpiece coordinate system rotation is a characteristic function of the
rotation (G92.5) NC unit of Mazak, this function cannot be used for other machines. Therefore,
after changing the “th” of the WPC unit into 0, convert the program into EIA/ISO
form and delete G92.5 from the EIA/ISO program.
 For the M32, rewrite G92.5 into G92.1.
M-code (M_ _)  Edit M-codes into the form appropriate for the intended machine.
 During EIA/ISO conversion, a maximum of four M-codes are issued auto-
matically for one block. The number of M-codes which can be included in one
block differs according to the particular configuration of the machine. Therefore,
edit M-codes into the form appropriate for the intended machine.
Positioning for tool change (G30) Edit the command appropriately to the intended machine.
Tool change command (M6T_T_) Edit the command appropriately to the intended machine.
Remark : Set F89 bit 6 to “1” as required to output a command (G30) for return
to the 2. zero-point before each tool change command.
Geometry compensation (G61.1) Edit the command appropriately to the intended machine.

13-88
 OPTION 13
13-7-2 EIA/ISO conversion program format
The format of program conversion from MAZATROL into EIA/ISO is shown below. The work
number of the source program is assigned on the first line and comments are automatically
inserted for each tool sequence. These comments take the format of “source program work
number - unit number - sequence number”.
Whether shape data (the data for drawing the shape of the workpiece) is to be added to the end
of the EIA/ISO program can be selected using bit 0 of parameter F89. To add shape data, set
this bit to “1”. Set the bit to “0” if addition is not required.
MAZATROL program WNo. 1000 EIA/ISO program
Work number
UNo. MAT. INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE (P1000) of the source
0 CBN STL 50. 0. OFF G17G00G40G54G64G80G90G94G98 program
UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z BTM N10(1000-1-1) Comment
1 FCEMILL 100. 2. 3 G54G64G95
SNo. TOOL NOM- No. 
R1 FCEMILL 50. 1 N20(1000-2-1) Comment
 
UNo. UNIT DETPH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH
N30(1000-3-0) Comment
2 LINE CTR 100. 10. 10. 2 
SNo. TOOL NOM- No. M30
R1 END MILL 10. 2 (G423L2)
 (A1X0.Y0.Z0.)
Shape data
UNo. UNIT CONTI. NUMBER ATC 
3 END 0 0 0 %

13-7-3 Output data unit

Coordinate data is always output with a decimal point. If the data is 0, then 0 is output. If the least
significant digit in data with a decimal point is 0, then the digit is omitted.
Example 1: 0.000  0
Example 2: 10.100  10.1
Digit number of decimal fraction
Metric (mm) Inch
4 digits 5 digits

13-89
13 OPTION

13-7-4 Operating procedure

(1) Tap the work number of the program to be converted on the PROGRAM FILE display.
 Never fail to select a MAZATROL program.
(2) Tap the [EIA/ISO CONVERT] menu item.
 The EIA CONVERT window will appear on the screen.

(3) Enter a new work number for the conversion destination, and tap the [OK] button.
 During conversion, EIA/ISO CONVT is displayed in the upper part of the display.
 When conversion is completed, the corresponding EIA/ISO program will be created
under the new work number and the message EIA/ISO CONVT will disappear.
 Tap the [EIA/ISO CONVERT] menu item once again to stop converting.
Note : During step (2) above, alarm 440 EIA/ISO PROGRAM DESIGNATED will be displayed
if an EIA/ISO program has been designated in step (1).
During step (3) above, alarm 433 SAME PROGRAM EXISTS will be displayed if
another NC-registered program is designated.
During step (3) above, alarm 418 EIA/ISO CONVERTING will be displayed if an
attempt is made to change, delete, or copy the work number of the conversion source
program with an EIA/ISO CONVT message remaining on the display.

13-90
 OPTION 13
13-7-5 Supplementary description and precautions
MAZATROL programs operate with reference to the machine status during processing.
Programs that have been converted into EIA/ISO ones, on the other hand, are those which
correspond with the machine status at the conversion into the EIA/ISO format.
Therefore, the EIA/ISO converted program must be edited accordingly when it is to be run on
another machine, as well as after changing tools to be used or modifying tool data.
1. The parameters that were valid during conversion are considered during output of an
EIA/ISO converted program. EIA/ISO converted program will not be affected even if
modifications are performed on a parameter that is used in a MAZATROL program.
2. Parameter F97 can be used to select the type of coordinate system to be used for an
EIA/ISO converted program.

F97 Coordinate system

1 G54
2 G55
3 G56
4 G57
5 G58
6 G59 (Codes A to J or codes G54.1P1 to G54.1P300 cannot be selected)

3. To select external WPC using the WPC unit of the conversion source program, set any
command code from G54 to G59. Command codes A to J or G54.1P1 to G54.1P300 cannot
be set.
4. The conversion of a measurement unit (for coordinates, workpiece, and tool) only results in
a description of approach and retract paths with information on the source (program, unit
and sequence Nos. connected with hyphen in parentheses).
5. For a tool change, data is output in the format of “M6T No. of the tool to be changed for T No.
of the tool to be used next”. M6T0T0 is output if the tool to be used is not registered on the
TOOL DATA display. The tool suffix, if specified on the TOOL DATA display, can be ex-
pressed in the resulting T-code as follows:
Example : Output for Tool No. 10 with suffix “A”
10A  T10.01

 Refer to Chapter 11 of the separate PROGRAMMING MANUAL (EIA/ISO

Program) for details on the designation of suffix in a T-code.

6. Shape data can be assigned to an EIA/ISO converted program.

Converted EIA/ISO program With the shape data, the corresponding shape of
 machining can be displayed on the TRACE and
G91G30XYZ TOOL PATH CHECK displays.
G90 Use bit 0 of parameter F89 to select whether shape
M6T7T8 data is to be assigned.
 F89 bit 0 = 0 : Does not assign shape data.
M30
= 1 : Assigns shape data.
(.............
........... Shape data
...........)

13-91
13 OPTION

7. If line and face machining units in the source program require one section to be used
repeatedly in the converted program, the total program size can be reduced by shifting that
section into a subprogram and calling it up repeatedly.
A sequence number is set on the beginning line of the subprogram section, and M99 on the
ending line. M98<_>H _ is set in the main program to call up the particular subprogram
section.
Whether a subprogram is to be created can be selected by setting bit 0 of parameter F88.
Set the bit to “1” for creation, or “0” for no creation.
The created subprogram is automatically named by adding “-SUB” to the main program
name.
Example : When the name of the main program is “1001”, then the subprogram is named
“1001-SUB”.
* If the above naming should result in a subprogram name of more than 32 characters, then
the main program name used will be shortened as required (to the leading 28 characters).
Absolute-data command G90 is used to give positional information within a subprogram.
Tool paths in the XY-plane for line machining and face machining are described in a sub-
program. Z-axial infeed and tool path in the XY-plane are described in the main and sub-
program, respectively.

Z Y

Approach Escape
path path
X X
Z-axial infeed is described in the main Tool paths in the XY-plane are described in a
program. subprogram.

Main program, WNo. 1001 Subprogram, WNo. 1001-SUB

(P1000) N10(1000-1-1)
G17G0G40G54G64G90G94 G0X5.Y2.
G1X50. For each
  machining
N10(1000-1-1) G0X60.Y60. unit
M98<1001-SUB>H10 M99
G1Z-2. 
 N20(1000-2-1)
M98<1001-SUB>H10 G2X10.Y10.R5.
G0Z100. G1X50. For each
  machining
G2X40.Y10.R5. unit
N20(1000-2-1)
M98<1001-SUB>H20 M99
G0Z-2.

N30(1000-3-0)

M30

13-92
 OPTION 13
As for some face machining types (FCE MILL (unidirectional), STEP, POCKET, PCKT MT,
PCKT VLY), Z-axial infeed is specified in the main program, and the subprogram contains a
description of tool path in the XY-plane and of Z-axis movements for passing over to the
next cutting pass.

Passing over to the

second infeed on the (M)
Z-axis (S)
(S) (M)
(M)
(S)
(S) (S)
(M)
(S)
(S) (S) (M)
(S) (S)
(M) (S) (S)

(S) (S)
(M)
(S) (S) (M) Main program
(S) Subprogram
(S)
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed

Main program, WNo. 2001 Subprogram, WNo. 2001-SUB

(P2000) N10(2000-1-1)
G17G00G40G54G64G90G94G98 G1X
N10(2000-1-1) G0Z Initial point
G80 X Y
 G1Z# Variable number
G1Z Cutting face height (1) X
# Variable number = Cutting face height (1) G0Z# Initial point
M98<2001-SUB>H10 X Y
G0Z Initial point G1Z# Variable number
X Y X
G1Z Cutting face height (2) 
# Variable number = Cutting face height (2) M99
M98<2001-SUB>H10
G0Z Initial point

M30

The value set in the parameter F98 is output as a macro variable number.
Note 1: The contents of a subprogram which is called by a subprogram unit cannot be
converted with the above-mentioned division into a main and a subprogram.
Note 2: Subprogram technique cannot be applied to manual program mode unit.
Note 3: Subprogram technique cannot be applied to multi-workpiece machining (which is
described within the main program).
Note 4: Subprogram technique cannot be applied to three-dimensional machining.

13-93
13 OPTION

8. For EIA/ISO conversion 2, since the point-machining unit is converted into a standard fixed-
cycle code, the machine does not operate as minutely as with the original MAZATROL
program.
Operational characteristics in that case are listed below.
 Cutting clearances always become equal to the setting of parameter D41.
 Deceleration for escape is not valid for drilling.
 Tapping tools do not move upward during R-point returning.
 The returning-speed override function is not valid for tapping, reaming, or boring.
 Returning at the bottom of a hole is not valid for back-boring.
 For boring and back-boring, the spindle always rotates forward (M03) after initial point/
R-point returning.
 During synchronous tapping, pecking does not occur (when F89 bit 1 = 1).
 The cutting depth does not decrease in steps during drilling.
9. A certain parameter setting causes the tool path to be described in the converted EIA/ISO
program with explicite preparatory functions for offsetting (G43 for length, G41 and G42 for
radius), where the appertaining H- and D-codes are outputted with respect to the number of
the tool concerned. As for a tool with multiple data sets registered, the T-code will be
expressed distinctively according to the suffixes, indeed, but the D- and H-codes must be
distinguished manually as required for the variety of tool application.
Example : Output for data sets under Tool No. 10 with various suffixes
10A  T10.01H10 (D10)
10B  T10.02H10 (D10)
10C  T10.03H10 (D10)
10. Remarks on tool offset
The operational conditions required for normal execution of the converted EIA/ISO program
are as follows.
<Execution on machines with the SmoothX as NC unit>
a) Tool length offset
Since the length-offsetting G-code is always outputted, use of the offset value 0 (zero) is
requisite when F93 bit 3 = 1 (application of MAZATROL length data).
b) Tool radius compensation

Output of compen- Description of

sation G-codes compensated path Requirements
F88 bit 4 F88 bit 5
0 0 F92 bit 7 = 1
0 1 F92 bit 7 = 0
When F92 bit 7 = 1:
Offset value zero (0)
1 0
When F92 bit 7 = 0:
Appropriate offset values
F92 bit 7 = 0, and
1 1
Offset value zero (0)

Remark : F92 bit 7 = 1/0 :

MAZATROL tool diameter data valid/invalid in EIA/ISO program execution.

13-94
 OPTION 13
<Execution on machines with an NC unit other than SmoothX>
a) Tool length offset
Edit the offsetting commands as required for the intended machine.
b) Tool radius compensation

Output of compen- Description of

sation G-codes compensated path Requirements
F88 bit 4 F88 bit 5
0 0
Edit the offsetting commands as required for the
0 1
intended machine.
1 0
1 1 No radius compensation

13-7-6 Parameter and alarm lists

Parameters relating to EIA/ISO conversion are listed below.
Parameter list
Parameter Function Setting Description
0: Subprogram creation invalid
F88 bit 0 Subprogram creation 0/1
1: Subprogram creation valid
0: Fixed-cycle G-code output (EIA/ISO conversion 2)
F88 bit 2 Point-machining G0-G4 output 0/1
1: G0-G4 code output (EIA/ISO conversion 1)
0: Output invalid
F88 bit 3 Workpiece offset writing 0/1
1: G10/G92.5 output valid
Output of tool radius compen- 0: No output
F88 bit 4 0/1
sation G-codes 1: Output
Immediate description of the 0: Description of contour
F88 bit 5 0/1
compensated tool path 1: Description of compensated path
0: Shape data addition invalid
F89 bit 0 Shape data addition 0/1
1: Shape data addition valid
Selection of synchronous tapping 0: G84/G74 output
F89 bit 1 0/1
G-codes 1: G84.2/G84.3 output
Output of G30 before tool change 0: No output
F89 bit 6 0/1
command 1: Output
1-6 1 - 6: G54-G59 output
F97 Coordinate system selection
Others Others: G54 output
100 - 199 Set one variable ID number to be used for the main
F98 Common variable ID number 500 - 699 program/subprogram.
Others Others: #100 output

Alarms relating to EIA/ISO conversion are listed below.

Alarm list
Error No. Error message Description Remedy
613 DATA MISSING Although the program to be converted into an EIA/ISO Select a coordinate system
IN WPC UNIT program contains an MMS unit, a code from G54 to by setting a code (G54-G59)
G59 has not been set in the added WPC. in the added WPC.
657 ILLEGAL Although the program to be converted into an EIA/ISO Select a coordinate system
NUMBER INPUT program contains an MMS unit, the G54.1 coordinate by setting a code (G54-G59)
system or a code (A to H, J, or K) has been selected in the added WPC.
for the added WPC.
703 PROCESS A unit not supported under the specifications, such as Delete the unsupported unit.
DEFINITION five-face machining or H/V face definition, has been
ERROR set.

13-95
13 OPTION

13-8 Inch/Metric Unit System Change Simplifying Function

13-8-1 Outline
Conventionally the change in unit system (inch/metric) of dimensional and feed data input has
required the corresponding modification of the related parameters, cutting conditions, etc.
The newly developed function allows an easy change in unit system, without having to be
supported by the above modifications, in order that MAZATROL or EIA/ISO programs prepared
in reference to machining drawings different in unit system (inch/metric) shall immediately be run
on the machine.
There are two methods available to change the unit system (inch/metric) of data input.
1. Use of the preparatory functions concerned (Power off/on not required)
 G20: Dimensional data input in inches
 G21: Dimensional data input in millimeters
This method changes the unit of coordinate data input, but does not have any influence
upon the data internally processed.
Angle commands, however, are always given in degrees, irrespective of the modal G-
function.
2. Setting the parameter concerned (Power off/on required)
 F91 bit 4 = 1: Inch system
= 0: Metric system
G20 and G21 are respectively modal when bit 4 of the F91 parameter is set to “1” and “0”.
This method not only changes the unit of coordinate data input, but also accordingly
converts the data displayed on the screen or internally processed.
Angle commands, however, are always given in degrees, irrespective of the parameter
setting.
3. Menu-based selection (Not requiring power off/on)
The display mode and an inch/metric input unit system on the TOOL DATA and TOOL
OFFSET displays can be selected using the menu functions.
 When bit 4 of parameter F91 = 0 (metric system), selection of [INCH MODE] activates
the menu function and the display mode as well as the input unit system change from
metric to inch.
 When bit 4 of parameter F91 = 1 (inch system), selection of [METRIC MODE] activates
the menu function and the display mode as well as the input unit system change from
inch to metric.
Automatic modification of various types of data with the present function, therefore, only refers to
the setting of the above parameter (bit 4 of F91).
For input of tool data different in inch/metric unit system, the selection can be immediately made
using the TOOL DATA and TOOL OFFSET display menus.

4. Selection of a unit system on the POSITION display

When bit 1 of parameter F82 is set to “1” (inch/metric display selection valid), the unit of data
representation on the POSITION display is automatically selected according to the
particular modal command code (G20 or G21).

13-96
 OPTION 13
13-8-2 Data concerned
Except for programs, the unit system change function acts upon the following two types of data:
1. Variable data (on the displays PARAMETER, WORK OFFSET, CUTTING CONDITION,
CUTTING CONDITION LEARN and ADDITIONAL WPC)
Variable data are preset in both inch and metric units prior to shipping. The modification of a
preset value in one unit system cannot be supported by an automatic modification of the
corresponding data in the other. Manually modify the data concerned, therefore, as required
to effectively use the unit system change function.
2. Characteristic data (on the displays TOOL DATA, TOOL FILE, TOOL OFFSET, HEAD
OFFSET, and the FIX. OFFSET data on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display)
Independently of the present function, characteristic data are automatically converted into
values appropriate to the unit system currently selected. No manual modification of
characteristic data, therefore, is required for the present function.
The present function does not refer to any data other than the above.
Note : The data items on the displays MACHINING NAVIGATION – PREDICTION and
RESULT cannot directly be influenced by the present function since they are only
obtained by a tool path checking or an automatic operation of the program concerned.

13-8-3 Operating procedure

1. Parameter-based selection
(1) Change bit 4 of parameter F91 from “1” (Inch system) to “0” (Metric system), or reversely.
(2) Turn off the NC unit and then turn it back on.
 The corresponding data will be automatically converted into values appropriate to the
unit system currently selected.

2. Menu-based selection
(1) Select the [INCH MODE] or [METRIC MODE] menu item.
 When [INCH MODE] is selected, the [INCH MODE] menu function is activated and the
unit of data representation on the display changes from millimeters to inches.
When [METRIC MODE] is selected, the [METRIC MODE] menu function is activated
and the unit of data representation on the display changes from inches to millimeters.
(2) When the menu item is highlighted, enter data in the selected unit.
Note : Selection with the menu cannot be made if bit 1 of parameter F82 is set to “0”
(inch/metric display selection invalid).

13-8-4 Internal management of data

1. Variable data (on the displays PARAMETER, WORK OFFSET, CUTTING CONDITION,
CUTTING CONDITION LEARN and ADDITIONAL WPC)
The NC unit has two storage areas provided for variable data: area of “inch data and metric
data for saving” and that of “data being used”. The latter is updated according to the
particular setting of the parameter concerned as follows:
Power off: The “data being used” are automatically saved onto the storage area of “inch or
metric data for saving” according to the value in bit 4 of parameter F91.
Power back on: The “inch or metric data for saving” are automatically copied onto the area
of “data being used” according to the value in bit 4 of parameter F91.

13-97
13 OPTION

2. Characteristic data (on the displays TOOL DATA, TOOL FILE, TOOL OFFSET, HEAD
OFFSET, and the FIX. OFFSET data on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display)
The NC unit has one set of characteristic data described in millimeters, and, upon turning-
on the power, provides the data as they are, or converts them into values appropriate to
inch system, according to the setting in bit 4 of parameter F91.

13-98
 OPTION 13
13-9 DYNAMIC OFFSET Display

Setting eight reference dynamic offsets (for G54.2P1 to G54.2P8) for dynamic offset  in the EIA/ISO
Function
program.

13-9-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[5] [6] [7] [8] [9]

D747S30135

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description
Distance of each axis from the table rotation center specified as a work-
piece coordinate offset to the workpiece zero-point specified in the
X, Y, Z mm (in)
machining program with G54.2P1 (deviation offset between the table
[1] rotation center and the workpiece to be machined)
The machine coordinates of rotational axes A and C when the above
A, C degrees
distance in the case of the above G54.2P1 program is set
Distance of each axis from the table rotation center specified as a work-
piece coordinate offset to the workpiece zero-point specified in the
X, Y, Z mm (in)
machining program with G54.2P2 (deviation offset between the table
[2] rotation center and the workpiece to be machined)
The machine coordinates of rotational axes A and C when the above
A, C degrees
distance in the case of the above G54.2P2 program is set
Distance of each axis from the table rotation center specified as a work-
piece coordinate offset to the workpiece zero-point specified in the
X, Y, Z mm (in)
machining program with G54.2P3 (deviation offset between the table
[3] rotation center and the workpiece to be machined)
The machine coordinates of rotational axes A and C when the above
A, C degrees
distance in the case of the above G54.2P3 program is set

13-99
13 OPTION

No. Item Unit Data description

Distance of each axis from the table rotation center specified as a work-
piece coordinate offset to the workpiece zero-point specified in the
X, Y, Z mm (in)
machining program with G54.2P4 (deviation offset between the table
[4] rotation center and the workpiece to be machined)
The machine coordinates of rotational axes A and C when the above
A, C degrees
distance in the case of the above G54.2P4 program is set
Distance of each axis from the table rotation center specified as a work-
piece coordinate offset to the workpiece zero-point specified in the
X, Y, Z mm (in)
machining program with G54.2P5 (deviation offset between the table
[5] rotation center and the workpiece to be machined)
The machine coordinates of rotational axes A and C when the above
A, C degrees
distance in the case of the above G54.2P5 program is set
Distance of each axis from the table rotation center specified as a work-
piece coordinate offset to the workpiece zero-point specified in the
X, Y, Z mm (in)
machining program with G54.2P6 (deviation offset between the table
[6] rotation center and the workpiece to be machined)
The machine coordinates of rotational axes A and C when the above
A, C degrees
distance in the case of the above G54.2P6 program is set
Distance of each axis from the table rotation center specified as a work-
piece coordinate offset to the workpiece zero-point specified in the
X, Y, Z mm (in)
machining program with G54.2P7 (deviation offset between the table
[7] rotation center and the workpiece to be machined)
The machine coordinates of rotational axes A and C when the above
A, C degrees
distance in the case of the above G54.2P7 program is set
Distance of each axis from the table rotation center specified as a work-
piece coordinate offset to the workpiece zero-point specified in the
X, Y, Z mm (in)
machining program with G54.2P8 (deviation offset between the table
[8] rotation center and the workpiece to be machined)
The machine coordinates of rotational axes A and C when the above
A, C degrees
distance in the case of the above G54.2P8 program is set
X, Y, Z mm (in) The same as the MACHINE item on the POSITION display.
[9] See Section 5-1 for more information.
A, C degrees

13-100
 OPTION 13
13-9-2 Data registration
The following data can be registered in the DYNAMIC OFFSET display:

1. Reference dynamic offset data (items [1] - [8]) for dynamic offset  using G54.2P1 - G54.2P8
The reference dynamic offset data refers to the amount of offset from the table rotation center in
the machine coordinate system to the zero-point of the workpiece to be machined.
Specify the machine-characteristic table rotation center in the machine coordinate system at the
zero-point of the workpiece coordinate system such as G54.
When the G54.2P1 command is further issued in the specified workpiece coordinate system, the
deviation vector will always be calculated from the reference dynamic offset data for the table
movement, and the coordinates of the ending point will be offset.

Mounted here

Offset of workpiece zero-point

(in G54, etc.)

Machine zero-point
D735S1101

[Legend]
W1: The ideal workpiece mounting position (the workpiece zero-point set on to the table rotation center)
W1’: The actual workpiece mounting position (vector Gs denotes the deviation from the ideal position)
W2’: The position of the actual workpiece W1’ after a table rotation by 
W2: The position of the ideally mounted workpiece W1 after a table rotation by 
Wo: The origin of workpiece coordinates (given by a corresponding preparatory function, such as G54)
Gs: The reference deviation vector (to be registered in the NC unit as a reference dynamic offset.)
G: The deviation vector for the rotation of the rotational axis by 
a (a1, a1’): The starting point of the G1 (linear interpolation) microsegment command
b (b1, b2’): The ending point of the G1 (linear interpolation) microsegment command

2. Specifying the reference dynamic offset

Measure the reference dynamic offset from the table rotation center (specified as an offset of the
workpiece coordinate system such as G54) to the zero-point of the workpiece to be machined,
and set the measured value as X, Y, Z coordinates. Also, set the A- and C-axial machine
coordinates obtained at that time.
(1) Tap the position of the desired axis in the workpiece coordinate system to be established.
(2) Enter offset data.
Similarly, assign offset data to all other axes by repeating steps (1) and (2) above.

13-101
13 OPTION

13-10 Tap Retract Function

13-10-1 Outline
If a synchronous tapping process should be stopped halfway due to an emergency stop or abrupt
switching-off, the normal conditions for automatic operation cannot be recovered in general
without cautious removal of the tap from the workpiece by hand, a very time-consuming job.
The function in question allows the tap to be taken automatically out of the workpiece, resulting
in a reduction of recovery time.

1) A synchronous tapping 2) The machine operation is 3) Enable the [TAP RETRACT] menu
process is started. abruptly stopped with the function to feed the tool backward out
tapping tool remaining in of the workpiece with the spindle ro-
the workpiece. tating synchronously.
D740S30338’

13-10-2 Operating procedure

(1) According to the cause of the operation stop, clear the alarm, for example, of emergency
stop or switch on the machine again.
(2) Select the manual mode of operation and hold down the [TAP RETRACT] menu item
together with the enable button.
 As long as the [TAP RETRACT] menu item together with the enable button is held down,
a synchronized operation of axis feed and spindle rotation continues, with the menu item
being displayed in the select state, in the respective reverse directions of the inside
thread cutting so as to take the tapping tool out of the workpiece.
 The retracting operation of axis feed and spindle rotation will be continued until the initial
point of the tapping process is reached and the highlighted state of the [TAP RETRACT]
menu item cleared.
 The rate of feed for retracting the tap depends on the setting in parameter BA72 (in %)
as follows:
Tap retracting feed = Feed for the synchronous tapping × BA72/100.
However, BA72 is processed as 100 (%) if it is set to zero (0).

 Enable button is an operational control provided on the machine operating

panel. Its simultaneous use is required for some operations or functions to be
executed. See Part 2 “MACHINE OPERATION” for more information.

13-10-3 Supplementary notes

1. The tap retract function cannot be used for an asynchronous tapping process.
2. It is not advisable to use the tap retract function again after a tap retracting operation is
interrupted by resetting or an emergency stop, for the reason that the appropriate synchro-
nization of axis feed and spindle rotation may not be obtained any more in general.

13-102
 OPTION 13
3. The INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function is suppressed during tap retracting operation.
4. The tap retract function cannot be used when the [MACHINE LOCK] menu function is
selected.
5. The override functions for spindle speed, rapid traverse, and cutting feed are not effective
for the tap retracting operation.
6. This optional function may not be obtainable for some machine types or specifications.
7. The tap retract function may not be used for some machine types or specifications when the
manual mode for return to the zero point is selected.

13-103
13 OPTION

13-11 WORK POSITION ERROR COMP. Display

Use this display to prepare the data for workpiece setup error correction to be referred to with G54.4P1 to
Function
G54.4P7 in the execution of EIA/ISO programs.

13-11-1 Data display

1. Displayed data

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[5] [6] [7] [8] [9]

D747S30136

2. Display data description

No. Item Unit Data description

Linear errors of the G54.4P1 coordinate system’s origin on the orthogonal
x, y, z mm (in)
axes X, Y, and Z in the workpiece coordinate system.
Angular errors of the G54.4P1 coordinate system in rotation around the
[1] a, b, c degrees
orthogonal axes X, Y, and Z of the workpiece coordinate system.
Machine coordinate of the rotational axis during measurement of the above
A, C degrees
errors
Linear errors of the G54.4P2 coordinate system’s origin on the orthogonal
x, y, z mm (in)
axes X, Y, and Z in the workpiece coordinate system.
Angular errors of the G54.4P2 coordinate system in rotation around the
[2] a, b, c degrees
orthogonal axes X, Y, and Z of the workpiece coordinate system.
Machine coordinate of the rotational axis during measurement of the above
A, C degrees
errors
Linear errors of the G54.4P3 coordinate system’s origin on the orthogonal
x, y, z mm (in)
axes X, Y, and Z in the workpiece coordinate system.
Angular errors of the G54.4P3 coordinate system in rotation around the
[3] a, b, c degrees
orthogonal axes X, Y, and Z of the workpiece coordinate system.
Machine coordinate of the rotational axis during measurement of the above
A, C degrees
errors

13-104
 OPTION 13
No. Item Unit Data description
Linear errors of the G54.4P4 coordinate system’s origin on the orthogonal
x, y, z mm (in)
axes X, Y, and Z in the workpiece coordinate system.
Angular errors of the G54.4P4 coordinate system in rotation around the
[4] a, b, c degrees
orthogonal axes X, Y, and Z of the workpiece coordinate system.
Machine coordinate of the rotational axis during measurement of the above
A, C degrees
errors
Linear errors of the G54.4P5 coordinate system’s origin on the orthogonal
x, y, z mm (in)
axes X, Y, and Z in the workpiece coordinate system.
Angular errors of the G54.4P5 coordinate system in rotation around the
[5] a, b, c degrees
orthogonal axes X, Y, and Z of the workpiece coordinate system.
Machine coordinate of the rotational axis during measurement of the above
A, C degrees
errors
Linear errors of the G54.4P6 coordinate system’s origin on the orthogonal
x, y, z mm (in)
axes X, Y, and Z in the workpiece coordinate system.
Angular errors of the G54.4P6 coordinate system in rotation around the
[6] a, b, c degrees
orthogonal axes X, Y, and Z of the workpiece coordinate system.
Machine coordinate of the rotational axis during measurement of the above
A, C degrees
errors
Linear errors of the G54.4P7 coordinate system’s origin on the orthogonal
x, y, z mm (in)
axes X, Y, and Z in the workpiece coordinate system.
Angular errors of the G54.4P7 coordinate system in rotation around the
[7] a, b, c degrees
orthogonal axes X, Y, and Z of the workpiece coordinate system.
Machine coordinate of the rotational axis during measurement of the above
A, C degrees
errors
Linear error data to be added commonly to each of the numbered data sets
x, y, z mm (in)
[8] from G54.4P1 to G54.4P7.
A, C degrees Machine coordinate of the rotational axis during error measurement
mm (in) The same as the MACHINE item on the POSITION display.
[9] X, Y, Z, A, C
degrees See Section 5-1 for details.

Note : The controlled axes displayed refer to the particular construction of the machine.

13-11-2 Data registration

The following data can be registered on the WORK POSITION ERROR COMP. display.

1. Data sets for workpiece setup error correction (G54.4P1 to G54.4P7) and common data
(items [1] to [8])
Seven data sets of describing the workpiece setup error can be prepared for the designation by
argument P in a G54.4 block (G54.4P1 to G54.4P7). It is possible, moreover, to prepare a
special set of data to be added commonly to each of the numbered data sets.
There are two types of data to be prepared for workpiece setup error correction as follows.
1. Linear errors on the orthogonal axes X, Y, and Z (x, y, z)
Specify the origin of the workpiece setup coordinate system with its absolute values in the
workpiece coordinate system concerned.
2. Angular errors in rotation around the orthogonal axes ( a, b, c)
Specify those angles (a, b, and c) of rotations around the axes X, Y, and Z of the work-
piece coordinate system concerned, in that order, by which the same orientation as that of
the workpiece setup coordinate system can be obtained.

13-105
13 OPTION

3. Machine coordinate of the rotational axis (A, C) during error measurement

Set the machine coordinate of the A- and C-axis during measurement of errors x, y and
z.

Y’
Workpiece with
setup errors
Y
Workpiece in the correct
mounting position
X’

Workpiece coordinate c
system (X, Y, Z)
Workpiece setup
y coordinate system
(X’, Y’, Z’)
X
x
D740PB0105

2. Procedure for setting correction values

Measure the setup errors of a workpiece with respect to the workpiece coordinate system
concerned, and follow the procedure below to set the data items x, y, z, a, b, and c.
(1) Tap the corresponding data item of the desired workpiece setup coordinate system.
(2) Set the correction value.
Repeat the steps (1) and (2) until all the required data items of the coordinate system have been
set.

13-106 E
 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14
14 OTHER FUNCTIONS

14-1 Voice Advisor

Function Outputs a voice message at NC power on (greeting message) or for operational safety or maintenance.

 The greeting message can be changed as required.

Remarks  This function outputs a voice message when it is required for operational safety or maintenance.
Should the occasion arise, multiple messages are placed in a waiting queue so that their output may
surely occur one by one in their entirety.

14-1-1 Change settings

In addition to the language, the sound volume and tone may be changed as desired. Moreover,
there is a sub-window provided for selecting and deselecting voice messages to be output.

1. Displaying the VOICE SETUP window

(1) Call up the DIAGNOSIS (USER) display on the screen.
(2) Tap , [Help] and the [Voice Setup] option in that order.

 The VOICE SETUP window will be displayed.

14-1
14 OTHER FUNCTIONS

2. Displayed data of the VOICE SETUP window

<Displayed data>

[1]

[2] [3]

[4]

[5]

[6] [7]
D747S30137E

<Display data description>

No. Item Unit Data description
ON: When tapped, the voice advisor function is enabled.
[1] ON/OFF —
OFF: When tapped, the voice advisor function is disabled.
[2] LANGUAGE — Set the language used for the voice advisor function.
[3] TYPE — Set the tone (male or female) of the voice message.
[4] VOLUME — Set the sound volume by moving the slider to the left and the right.
[5] VOICE SELECT — Use this column to select and deselect voice messages to be output.
[6] [OK] — Tap this button to reflect the voice settings.
[7] [CANCEL] — Tap this button to cancel the voice settings.

14-2
 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14
3. Displayed data of the VOICE SELECT window
<Displayed data>

[1]

[2]

[3]
D747S30138E

<Display data description>

No. Item Unit Data description
[1] VOICE SELECT — Perform settings on the voice messages to be output.
[2] Page indication — Use this box to change pages to be displayed.
[3] [OK] — Tap this button to close the VOICE SELECT window.

<Selection/Deselection of messages>
 To select, or make valid, a message, tap it directly.
The selection is indicated by a light-blue background.
 To deselect, or make invalid, a message, tap it directly.
The deselection is set off by a white background.
Note : Tapping the [OK] button ([3]) only closes the sub-window in question, and each series
of changing operations performed therein is to be confirmed definitely and cancelled in
its entirety, respectively, by tapping the [OK] and [CANCEL] button in the main VOICE
SETUP window.

14-3
14 OTHER FUNCTIONS

14-1-2 Greeting message

The greeting message is output when the NC power is turned on. This message can be set as
desired in the appropriate text file.

1. Greeting message text file

Write a message you want to output as the “greeting message” in the text file located in the
specified folder (C:\ymw\M8Y\data\nm64mdata\eng\voice.txt). (Note)
Example : For example, to output an English message “Let’s have a safe work day.” as the
greeting message, write it in the following text file using your text editor.
Text file: C:\ymw\M8Y\data\nm64mdata\eng\voice.txt
Contents: As shown below

Let’s have a safe work day.

The greeting message will be output as specified.

Note : “eng” in the specified file name corresponds with the selected language.

14-1-3 Exclusion of alarms from warning

The Voice Advisor has a function that warns against an alarm. It is possible to exclude particular
alarms from the vocal warning.

1. Setting alarms to be excluded

Open the text file concerned (C:\ymw\M8Y\data\MC_sdg\voice\ExcludeAlarmVoice.txt) with the
aid of a commercially available editor.

[ExcludeAlarmVoice]

001 = 128
002 = 129
003 = 0
004 = 0
005 = 0
006 = 0
007 = 0
008 = 0
009 = 0



As shown in the above example, register the numbers of the alarms to be excluded and then
save the file.

14-4
 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14
14-2 Custom Menu Function

Function Registers software applications to the menu items so that they can be started from the NC display.

Remarks The software applications can be started from the Home screen or using the menu.

1. Displaying custom menu items

A. On the Home screen

(1) Tap the [SPECIAL MENU] button in the peripheral software display area.
 The custom menu items will be displayed.

SPECIAL SPECIAL
MENU MENU

D747S30171

 A software application can be registered for a blank item.

 Tap the [SPECIAL MENU] button again to hide the custom menu items.

B. In the menu display area

(1) Tap the [SPECIAL MENU] menu item.
SMART ADDITION C-COND. SET UP NAVIGAT. PARAM DIAGNOS DATA SPECIAL
INFO. RESULT I/O MENU

 The custom menu items will be displayed.

>>> SPECIAL
MENU

 A software application can be registered to each of the blank menu items.

 Tapping the [>>>] menu item displays the next menu page.
 To return to the initial menu, tap the [SPECIAL MENU] menu item once again.

2. Setting Special Menu items

Edit the following file in the “C:\ymw\M8Y\data\MC_sdg\CustomMenu” folder to set the required
custom menu items.
HomeCustomMenu.txt: for the Home screen
CustomMenu.txt: for the menu

14-5
14 OTHER FUNCTIONS

(1) Open the file concerned using a text editor such as Notepad.

 This file is normally blank when opened.

Note : Depending on the machine specifications, the custom menu may already contain
some registered applications.
(2) Register software applications by editing and saving the file in the following format.
<Format>

[Menu- ] [1]
MenuName= [2]
FilePath= [3]

No. Item Unit Data description

Specify the custom menu item number to register the application.
 For the Home screen
Up to 8 items can be registered.
The relationship between custom menu item number and display
position is as follows.

3
7
4
1 8
[1] [Menu- ] — 5
2
6

 For the menu

The relationship between the custom menu numbers and the
item numbers is as follows.
First menu: 1 to 8
Second menu: 9 to 16
Third menu: 17 to 24
Fourth menu: 25 to 32
Fifth menu: 33 to 40
 Specify the item name to display in the custom menu.
An item name consists of up to 24 characters. It will be displayed
[2] MenuName= — in three lines, the top, middle, and bottom, each containing up to
8 characters.
 Double-byte characters cannot be used.
[3] FilePath= — Specify the full path to the folder where the application is stored.

(3) Turn the NC off temporarily and then turn it back on.
 New custom menu items cannot be made valid until the NC is ‘turned’ on.

14-6
 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14
3. Setting example
To register the WordPad application to the item number 1 in the custom menu, edit the
“CustomMenu.txt” file as follows.

When the NC is turned back on, the new item will be displayed as follows.
WORD >>> SPECIAL
PAD MENU

Note : Depending on the machine specifications, the custom menu may already contain some
applications. If so, use different menu item numbers to register new applications.

14-7
14 OTHER FUNCTIONS

14-3 NC Backup Function

This function intended for rapid restoration in the event of erroneous data deletion, for example, creates
Function backups of parameters, programs, and other data at the start of the NC unit or in desired timing, in order to
restore the normal state of the data concerned.

Remarks The backups created are saved in the files named “CustomerBackup_Date_Time.”

1. Automatic backup
This function creates backups during the start of the NC unit.
 Automatic backup becomes valid when “1” is set up at bit 7 in parameter F166.
 When the machine is powered on next time onward, backups will be created automatically at
the start of the NC unit. Automatic backup is indicated by the corresponding message in the
upper part of the screen, as shown below:

 Backup data are stored on the SD card inserted in the NC unit and in the following folder.
C:\ymw\M8Y\data\Backup_data

2. Manual backup
(1) Tap the [NC DATA BACKUP] menu item provided on the DIAGNOSIS display.
 A message box appears on the screen.
(2) Tap the [OK] button to execute the backup function.
 A window appears to indicate the progress of the backup.

 Backup data are stored in the saving destination specified by the procedure given under
3 below.

3. Backup data saving destination

Follow the procedure below as required to change the drive in which the data are to be saved
using the manual backup function.
(1) Call up the DIAGNOSIS display and tap , [Setup] and the [Backup Drive Select]
option in that order.

14-8
 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14
(2) From the list displayed, select the desired destination drive for saving backup data.

 Select “NC-device” when it is desirable to store backup data on the SD card inserted in
the NC unit and in the following folder.
C:\ymw\M8Y\data\Backup_data

4. Notes
1. As for machining program data, the function in question only creates backups of the
programs stored in the NC memory (STANDARD PROGRAM area), and does not cover the
BACKUP PROGRAM, HDD OPERATION PROGRAM and other program storage areas.
2. Parameters, programs, and other data concerned cannot be changed during backup. An
attempt of changing data or editing a program will only lead to alarm 1453 MEMORY
PROTECT (BACK UP), and the execution of the backup function will be continued.
3. Deselecting the menu item during backup terminates the function in question. If the backup
function is terminated halfway, the created backups will be deleted totally.
4. Do not run a program in the automatic operation mode during backup. Otherwise the
workpiece will be damaged or the backed up data will be incomplete.
5. The window indicating the progress of the backup process will remain on the screen, even if
another display is selected during backup.
6. The percentage “%” in the progress display window during backup is determined by the
count of the files or data sets to be processed, not by actual processing time. Consequently,
the count-up of percentage does not occur uniformly in general, as is especially the case
with programs showing a wide variety of sizes.
7. It is not possible to change the drive to which backup data are stored by the automatic back-
up function.

14-9
14 OTHER FUNCTIONS

14-4 Program Edit Backup Function

This function is provided to automatically save (in the EDITING PRG. BACKUP area) a program (stored in
Function
the STANDARD PROGRAM area) in its original state when an attempt is made to edit it.

1. Backup conditions
The following operations for a program stored in the STANDARD PROGRAM area activate the
backup function in order that the program may be saved automatically in its original state.
 Tapping the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu item on the PROGRAM display for a MAZATROL
program,
 Tapping the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu item on the PROGRAM display for an EIA/ISO
program,
 Tapping the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu item on the EIA MONITOR display, or
 Tapping the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu item on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display.
Note : The following data are excluded from the backup.
 Settings on the 3D SETUP display
 Setup information items on the PROGRAM display for an EIA/ISO program

2. Backup capacity
Up to 10 programs can be saved by the program edit backup function.
Saving each eleventh program is made by deleting that with the earliest backup date.

3. Restoring the backed up program

Use the [PROGRAM TRANSFER] menu function (provided on the PROGRAM FILE display) to
restore the desired program in its original state.

 See Subsection 7-4-10 “Program transfer” for more information.

14-10 E